Copyright: Copyright© 1996 DATASTORM, a subsidiary of Quarterdeck Corporation, All rights reserved worldwide.
Citation: Copyright© 1996 DATASTORM, a subsidiary of Quarterdeck Corporation, All rights reserved worldwide.


"Drag and Drop" Support

       File Extension         Drag and Drop Response

Using "Drag and Drop"

.cap	If you drop a Procomm Plus Capture file onto the Terminal window or its program icon, Procomm Plus prompts to determine whether you want to playback the file in the Terminal window or upload it.
	Click on Playback to playback the contents of the Capture file or Send to begin the upload using the current protocol.
.dir	When you drop a Procomm Plus Connection Directory file onto the Terminal window or its program icon, Procomm Plus prompts to determine whether it should be loaded as the current directory, or uploaded. Click on Load to load the file or Send to begin the upload using the current protocol.
.fax	When a generated fax file is dropped onto the Fax Status window or icon, Procomm Plus displays the Send Fax dialog, allowing you to specify the settings for the fax transmission.
	If a .fax file is dropped in the Terminal window or its program icon, Procomm Plus will attempt to upload it as a data file.
.was	When you drop an ASPECT source file into its Terminal window or its program icon, Procomm Plus prompts to determine whether you want to compile and run it, or upload it.
	Click on Run to attempt compilation of the source file and run the script or Send to initiate the upload using the current protocol.
.wax	If you drop a compiled ASPECT script file in the Terminal window or its program icon, Procomm Plus prompts to determine whether you want to run or upload it. Click on Run to execute the script or Send to initiate the upload using the current protocol.
other...	If you drag and drop a filename ending in an extension other than .dir, .cap, .was or .wax in the Terminal window or its program icon, Procomm Plus uploads it using the current protocol.
	If you're attempting to send more than one file and you're using a protocol that doesn't support "batch transfers," such as Xmodem or ASCII, Procomm Plus sends only the first file you selected.


1K-Xmodem

1K-Xmodem is essentially CRC Xmodem with 1024 byte (1K) packets. 1K-Xmodem is a single file protocol.


1K-Xmodem Protocol Options

The settings available for each of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols and their derivatives are identical. Keep in mind that these same options are also available for the following protocols:

Xmodem and 1K-Xmodem-G

Ymodem and Ymodem-G

For a brief discussion of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols, and their derivatives, see The Xmodem Protocol and The Ymodem Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select 1K-Xmodem from the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display its panel.

Download Options

The following options allow you to control the behavior of a 1K-Xmodem download:

Overwrite existing file

Enable this option if you want a file downloaded to your computer to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. By default, the incoming file will be renamed and the existing file will remain untouched.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete downloads are not deleted.

Use relaxed protocol timing

By default, Procomm Plus uses a standard timing value when waiting for information from the sending system. This is appropriate for most systems. With some connections, however, this standard value may cause an unacceptable number of time-outs or errors. Enabling this setting will slow the transfer slightly, but should improve the overall efficiency in those cases.


1K-Xmodem-G

1K-Xmodem-G is a variant of 1K-Xmodem. 1K-Xmodem-G does not provide software error recovery, as it expects the hardware to provide this service. This is a streaming protocol that sends and receives 1K packets in a continuous stream until instructed to stop. The packet is constructed the same as 1K-Xmodem's packets. 1K-Xmodem-G does not support batch mode; only a single file can be sent during a transfer.

This protocol does not provide any software error recovery. It is for use only with error-correcting modems!


1K-Xmodem-G Protocol Options

The settings available for each of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols and their derivatives are identical. Keep in mind that these same options are also available for the following protocols:

Xmodem and 1K-Xmodem

Ymodem and Ymodem-G

For a brief discussion of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols, and their derivatives, see The Xmodem Protocol and The Ymodem Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select 1K-Xmodem-G from the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display its panel.

Download Options

The following options allow you to control the behavior of a 1K-Xmodem-G download:

Overwrite existing file

Enable this option if you want a file downloaded to your computer to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. By default, the incoming file will be renamed and the existing file will remain untouched.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete downloads are not deleted.

Use relaxed protocol timing

By default, Procomm Plus uses a standard timing value when waiting for information from the sending system. This is appropriate for most systems. With some connections, however, this standard value may cause an unacceptable number of time-outs or errors. Enabling this setting will slow the transfer slightly, but should improve the overall efficiency in those cases.


A Word on Cover Sheet Design

The elegant features provided by the Cover Sheet Editor can be used to produce a wide variety of cover sheet designs, ranging from eye-catching to sedate. For best results, however, keep the following in mind:

White space is just as important as the text or graphics it surrounds.

Simpler graphics, such as line-drawings or silhouettes, tend to work better than more intricate designs.

Allow plenty of room for Variable Text objects.

Finally, if you want to share your cover sheets with others using Procomm Plus, be sure to give them any metafiles or bitmaps used in a particular cover sheet. They should store any .wmf or .bmp files required for the cover sheet in the same directory as the .cvr file is placed.


A Word on Fax Standards

Just like other types of data communications, fax transfers are governed by several different public international standards. In addition, some private corporations have established their own fax standards for one purpose or another, creating a potential source of confusion.

Problems with hardware compatibility are rare. Most fax devices in use today are Group III-compliant, and one Group III device will work properly with any other Group III device.

Software compatibility between your computer and your fax modem on the other hand, can be a problem, since many fax boards and modems require special software. Procomm Plus simplifies the picture by supporting Group III fax devices, the most common fax standard in use today. It also supports the Class 1, Class 2 and Sierra SendFax extensions to the Group III standard.

The table below briefly explains the Group III extensions supported by Procomm Plus:

	Group III Extensions
SendFax	The Sierra SendFax standard allows a fax modem to send faxes to other Group III devices. It has no provision for receiving faxes.
Class 1	Class 1 is an older standard in which the fax modem supplies the minimum services necessary to perform Group III communications. A Class 1 fax modem depends on fax software to perform all fax operations. Its only tasks in a fax operation are to establish and maintain a reliable connection and to transmit and receive data.
Class 2	Class 2 is a newer standard, in which the fax modem performs many of the fax operations along with the connection handling and data transfer. For example, a Class 2 fax modem handles the negotiations for transfer speed.


ACS

Asynchronous Communications Server. A computer with one or more modems that can be accessed by workstations on the network. An ACS can be dedicated, meaning the computer is only used as a communication server, or non-dedicated, meaning the computer can be used for other functions as well.


ADDS 60 (101-key)
This is the format for the ADDS 60 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard. The NumLock key is mapped, see below.

Procomm Plus Key	   ADDS 60 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^B1^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^B2^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^B3^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^B4^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^B5^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^B6^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^B7^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^B8^M
Shift F1	Shift-Function 1 (Shift-F1)	^B!^M
Shift F2	Shift-Function 2 (Shift-F2)	^B"^M
Shift F3	Shift-Function 3 (Shift-F3)	^B#^M
Shift F4	Shift-Function 4 (Shift-F4)	^B$^M
Shift F5	Shift-Function 5 (Shift-F5)	^B%^M
Shift F6	Shift-Function 6 (Shift-F6)	^B&^M
Shift F7	Shift-Function 7 (Shift-F7)	^B'^M
Shift F8	Shift-Function 8 (Shift-F8)	^B(^M
Ctrl-F5	Insert Line	^[M
Ctrl-F6	Delete Line	^[l
Ctrl-F7	Insert Character	^[F
Ctrl-F8	Delete Character	^[E
Ctrl-F9	Erase All ( E All )	^L
Ctrl-F10	Erase to End of Field/Line	^[K
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[O
Enter	Return	^M
Num Lock	Cursor Down ( Line Feed )	^J
Keypad /	Cursor Back	^U
Keypad *	Cursor Forward	^F
Keypad -	Cursor Up	^Z
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^Z
Keypad Cursor Left	Cursor Back	^U
Keypad Cursor Right	Cursor Forward	^F
Keypad Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Keypad Home	Cursor Home	^A
Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Keypad Insert	Insert Character	^[F
Keypad Delete	Delete Character	^[E
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift-Keypad /	/	/
Shift-Keypad *	*	*
Shift-Keypad -	-	-
Shift-Keypad 0	0	0
Shift-Keypad 1	1	1
Shift-Keypad 2	2	2
Shift-Keypad 3	3	3
Shift-Keypad 4	4	4
Shift-Keypad 5	5	5
Shift-Keypad 6	6	6
Shift-Keypad 7	7	7
Shift-Keypad 8	8	8
Shift-Keypad 9	9	9
Grey Insert	Insert Character	^[F
Grey Delete	Delete Character	^[E
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^A
Grey End	Erase End Of Line	^[K
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^Z
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Back	^U
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Forward	^F


ADDS 60 (84 key)
This is the format of the ADDS 60 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	      ADDS 60 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^B1^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^B2^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^B3^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^B4^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^B5^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^B6^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^B7^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^B8^M
Shift F1	Shift-Function 1 (Shift-F1)	^B!^M
Shift F2	Shift-Function 2 (Shift-F2)	^B"^M
Shift F3	Shift-Function 3 (Shift-F3)	^B#^M
Shift F4	Shift-Function 4 (Shift-F4)	^B$^M
Shift F5	Shift-Function 5 (Shift-F5)	^B%^M
Shift F6	Shift-Function 6 (Shift-F6)	^B&^M
Shift F7	Shift-Function 7 (Shift-F7)	^B'^M
Shift F8	Shift-Function 8 (Shift-F8)	^B(^M
Ctrl-F1	Cursor Down ( Line Feed )	^J
Ctrl-F2	Cursor Back	^U
Ctrl-F3	Cursor Forward	^F
Ctrl-F4	Cursor Up	^Z
Ctrl-F5	Insert Line	^[M
Ctrl-F6	Delete Line	^[l
Ctrl-F7	Insert Character	^[F
Ctrl-F8	Delete Character	^[E
Ctrl-F9	Erase All ( E All )	^L
Ctrl-F10	Erase to End of Field/Line	^[K
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[O
Enter	Return	^M
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^Z
Cursor Left	Cursor Back	^U
Cursor Right	Cursor Forward	^F
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Home	Cursor Home	^A
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Insert	Insert Character	^[F
Delete	Delete Character	^[E
Keypad +	Enter	^M
Shift Keypad -	-	-
Shift Keypad 0	0	0
Shift Keypad 1	1	1
Shift Keypad 2		2	2
Shift Keypad 3	3	3
Shift Keypad 4	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Keypad 6	6	6
Shift Keypad 7	7	7
Shift Keypad 8	8	8
Shift Keypad 9	9	9
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Back	^U
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Forward	^F
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^J
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Cursor Home	^A
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Erase End of Line	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert Character	^[F
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete Character	^[E


ADDS 90 (101-key)
This is the format for the ADDS 90 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The NumLock key is mapped, see below.

Note: NumLock is mapped in this emulation to the ADDS Terminal's New Line key.  The Normal state of the keypad keys transmit their numeric values. The Shift and Ctrl-keys transmit their functions as described below.

Procomm Plus Key	   ADDS 90 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^B1^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^B2^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^B3^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^B4^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^B5^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^B6^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^B7^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^B8^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^B9^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^B:^M
Shift F1	Function 11 (F11)	^B;^M
Shift F2	Function 12 (F12)	^B<^M
Shift F3	Function 13 (F13)	^B=^M
Shift F4	Function 14 (F14)	^B>^M
Shift F5	Function 15 (F15)	^B?^M
Shift F6	Function 16 (F16)	^B!^M
Shift F7	Function 17 (F17)	^B"^M
Shift F8	Function 18 (F18)	^B#^M
Shift F9	Function 19 (F19)	^B$^M
Shift F10	Function 20 (F20)	^B%^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 21 (F21)	^B&^M
Ctrl-F2	Function 22 (F22)	^B'^M
Ctrl-F3	Function 23 (F23)	^B(^M
Ctrl-F4	Function 24 (F24)	^B)^M
Ctrl-F5	Function 25 (F25)	^B*^M
Ctrl-F6	Function 26 (F26)	^B+^M
Ctrl-F7	Function 27 (F27)	^B,^M
Ctrl-F8	Function 28 (F28)	^B-^M
Ctrl-F9	Function 29 (F29)	^B.^M
Ctrl-F10	Function 30 (F30)	^B/^M
Shift Ctrl-F5	Insert Line	^[M
Shift Ctrl-F6	Delete Line	^[l
Shift Ctrl-F7	Insert Character	^[F
Shift Ctrl-F8	Delete Character	^[E
Shift Ctrl-F9	Erase All ( E All )	^L
Shift Ctrl-F10	Erase to End of Field/Line	^[K
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[O
Enter	Return	^M
Num Lock	Cursor Down ( Line Feed )	^J
Shift Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^Z
Shift Keypad Cursor Lt	Cursor Back	^U
Shift Keypad Cursor Rt	Cursor Forward	^F
Shift Keypad Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^J
Shift Keypad Home	Cursor Home	^A
Shift Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Shift Keypad Insert	Insert Character	^[F
Shift Keypad Delete	Delete Character	^[E
Shift Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Lt	Cursor Back	^U
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Rt	Cursor Forward	^F
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^J
Ctrl-Keypad Home	Cursor Home	^A
Ctrl-Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad Insert	Insert Line	^[M
Ctrl-Keypad Delete	Delete Line	^[l	[ 1B 6c ]
Ctrl-Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Grey PageDown	Clear Screen	^L
Grey Insert	Insert Character	^[F
Shift Grey End	Insert Line	^[M
Grey Delete	Delete Character	^[E
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^A
Grey End	Erase End Of Line	^[K
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^Z
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Back	^U
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Forward	^F
Ctrl-Grey Insert	Insert Line	^[M
Ctrl-Grey Delete	Delete Line	^[l	[ 1B 6c ]


ADDS 90 (84 key)
This is the format of the ADDS 90 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	      ADDS 90 Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^B1^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^B2^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^B3^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^B4^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^B5^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^B6^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^B7^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^B8^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^B9^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^B:^M
Shift F1	Function 11 (F11)	^B;^M
Shift F2	Function 12 (F12)	^B<^M
Shift F3	Function 13 (F13)	^B=^M
Shift F4	Function 14 (F14)	^B>^M
Shift F5	Function 15 (F15)	^B?^M
Shift F6	Function 16 (F16)	^B!^M
Shift F7	Function 17 (F17)	^B"^M
Shift F8	Function 18 (F18)	^B#^M
Shift F9	Function 19 (F19)	^B$^M
Shift F10	Function 20 (F20)	^B%^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 21 (F21)	^B&^M
Ctrl-F2	Function 22 (F22)	^B'^M
Ctrl-F3	Function 23 (F23)	^B(^M
Ctrl-F4	Function 24 (F24)	^B)^M
Ctrl-F5	Function 25 (F25)	^B*^M
Ctrl-F6	Function 26 (F26)	^B+^M
Ctrl-F7	Function 27 (F27)	^B,^M
Ctrl-F8	Function 28 (F28)	^B-^M
Ctrl-F9	Function 29 (F29)	^B.^M
Ctrl-F10	Function 30 (F30)	^B/^M
Shift Ctrl-F5	Insert Line	^[M
Shift Ctrl-F6	Delete Line	^[l
Shift Ctrl-F7	Insert Character	^[F
Shift Ctrl-F8	Delete Character	^[E
Shift Ctrl-F9	Erase All ( E All )	^L
Shift Ctrl-F10	Erase to End of Field/Line	^[K
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[O
Enter	Return	^M
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^Z
Cursor Left	Cursor Back	^U
Cursor Right	Cursor Forward	^F
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Home	Cursor Home	^A
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Insert	Insert Character	^[F
Delete	Delete Character	^[E
Keypad +	Enter	^M
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Back	^U
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Forward	^F
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^J
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Cursor Home	^A
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Erase End of Line	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert Character	^[F
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete Character	^[E


ADM 31 (101-key)
This is the format for the ADM 31 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard. F10 is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	   ADM 31 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
F11	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
F12	Function 12 (F12)	^AK^M
Shift F1	Function 13 (F13)	^AL^M
Shift F2	Function 14 (F14)	^AM^M
Shift F3	Function 15 (F15)	^AN^M
Shift F4	Function 16 (F16)	^AO^M
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^[I
Enter	Enter	^M
Insert	Character Insert	^[Q
Shift Grey Left	Shift Character Insert	^[q
Delete	Character Delete	^[W
Shift Delete	Shift Character Delete	^[r
Home	Home Cursor	^^
Shift Home	Clear Page	^Z
End	Line Delete	^[R
Shift End	Shift Line Delete	^[O
PgUp	Line Erase	^[T
Shift PgUp	Shift Line Erase	^[t
PgDn	Page Erase	^[Y
Shift PgDn	Shift Page Erase	^[y
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L


ADM 31 (84 key)
This is the format of the ADM 31 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      ADM 31 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
Shift F1	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
Shift F2	Function 12 (F12)	^AK^M
Shift F3	Function 13 (F13)	^AL^M
Shift F4	Function 14 (F14)	^AM^M
Shift F5	Function 15 (F15)	^AN^M
Shift F6	Function 16 (F16)	^AO^M
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^[I
Enter	Enter	^M
Insert	Character Insert	^[Q
Shift Insert	Shift Character Insert	^[q
Delete	Character Delete	^[W
Shift Delete	Shift Character Delete	^[r
Home	Home Cursor	^^
Shift Home	Clear Page	^Z
End	Line Delete	^[R
Shift End	Shift Line Delete	^[O
PgUp	Line Erase	^[T
Shift PgUp	Shift Line Erase	^[t
PgDn	Page Erase	^[Y
Shift PgDn	Shift Page Erase	^[y
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Line Erase	^[T
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^K
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^V
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home Cursor	^^
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Line Delete	^[R
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Character Insert	^[Q
Ctrl-Keypad .	Character Delete	^[W
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Enter	^M


ADM 3A/5 (101-key)
This is the format for the ADM 3A/5 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	  ADM 3A/5 Function           Transmitted Sequence

BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Horizontal Tab	^I
Home	Cursor Home	^^	[ 1E ]
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]


ADM 3A/5 (84 key)
This is the format of the ADM 3A/5 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	      ADM 3A/5 Function	              Transmitted Sequence

BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Horizontal Tab	^I
Home	Cursor Home	^^	[ 1E ]
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]


ANSI BBS (101-key)
This is the format for the ANSI BBS keymapping for the 101-key keyboard. The NumLock key is not mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	  ANSI Function                                  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[OP
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[OQ
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[OR
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[OS
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Shift Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	^X
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad /	Keypad /	/
Keypad *	Keypad *	*
Keypad -	Keypad -	-
Keypad +	Keypad +	+
Shift Keypad +	Keypad MINUS	-
Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Keypad Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Keypad PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Keypad Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Keypad Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Keypad Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Keypad PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Keypad Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Insert	0	0
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Ctrl-Enter	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Grey Delete	Delete Character	DEL	[ 7F ]
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Grey End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Ctrl-Grey Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Grey PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C


ANSI BBS (84 key)
This is the format of the ANSI BBS keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  NumLock is not mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	      ANSI Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[OP
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[OQ
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[OR
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[OS
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Shift Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	^X
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad -	Keypad -	-
Keypad +	Keypad Enter	^M
End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Shift Keypad +	+	+
Shift Keypad -	Keypad COMMA	,
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Insert	0	0
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM


ANSI BBS and IBM PC Advanced Settings

With the Current Terminal set to ANSI BBS or IBM PC, or to a named option set you’ve derived from one of these, click on the Advanced... button to display the advanced settings dialog:

Treat Music sequence as Delete Line

By default, the ANSI BBS and IBM PC emulations "eat" or ignore ANSI music sequences. However, some host systems use these sequences as Delete Line commands. Enable this setting if you want the emulation to respond to the ANSI Music sequence as a Delete Line command.

Use DEC line wrap mode

This setting determines the emulation’s behavior when the cursor is positioned in the last column and data is received from the host. This setting should only be enabled if you’re using the ANSI BBS or IBM PC emulation with a host configured for a VT-100 emulation.

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the Data Terminal Options panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


API

Application Program Interface. An interface that makes it possible for one program to talk to another. Essentially, a go-between.

See Communications API.


ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. Pronounced "Askey." A standard for assigning a number to character so that text can be stored in a computer. The ASCII character set contains each upper and lower case letter in the alphabet in addition to numerals and punctuation marks. There are 32 additional control characters such as escape and carriage return. The characters in the set are represented by numbers 0 through 127, each of which takes only seven bits to create. Extended or Highbit ASCII consists of characters represented by numbers 128 through 255. Extended ASCII characters are eight bit characters. The extended ASCII character set varies, depending on the current character set in use. These upper characters usually consist of line drawing characters and special use symbols.


ASCII Protocol Options

You can specify how carriage returns and line feeds will be interpreted by the ASCII protocol for both uploaded and downloaded files, as well as a variety of other options. These settings apply only to ASCII file transfers. To specify how carriage returns and line feeds should be handled by the current terminal emulation, see Terminal Options.

For a brief discussion of the protocol, see The ASCII Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select ASCII in the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the ASCII protocol settings:

CR options - upload

Some host systems expect a carriage return to be a special sequence. This field allows you to specify how a carriage return within a transmitted file is handled by the protocol. Click on the list box to select an option:

Don’t translate CR

Select this setting if you want Procomm Plus to send carriage returns without translation or modification during an ASCII upload. This is the default setting.

Strip CR

Select this setting if you want carriage returns to be removed from data uploaded with the ASCII protocol.

Add LF to CR

Select this setting if you want a line feed to be added to every carriage return in data transmitted with the ASCII protocol. This is necessary when a line of data received by the host is overwritten by the next line of incoming data.

CR options - download

Some host systems send multiple carriage returns; others send none at all. This field allows you to specify how a carriage return within a received file is handled by the protocol. Click on the list box to select an option:

Don’t translate CR

Select this setting if you don’t want Procomm Plus to translate or modify the carriage returns in files received from a host system. This is the default setting.

Strip CR

Select this setting if you want carriage returns to be removed from data you receive from a host system with the ASCII protocol.

Add LF to CR

Select this setting if you want a line feed to be appended to every carriage return in files received with the ASCII protocol. This is necessary when a line of data received by your computer is overwritten in the Terminal display by the next line of incoming data.

LF options - upload

This field allows you to specify how Procomm Plus handles line feed characters within files uploaded using the ASCII protocol. Click on the list box to select an option:

Don’t translate LF

Select this setting if you want line feeds to be sent to the host system without translation or modification during an ASCII upload. This is the default setting.

Strip LF

Select this setting if you want line feeds to be removed from data transmitted during an ASCII upload. This setting is useful if the host system automatically adds a line feed when it receives a carriage return, causing your data to appear double-spaced when received by the host.

Add CR to LF

Select this setting if you want line feeds to be preceded by a carriage return in data transmitted during an ASCII upload. If the new lines sent in your uploaded data seem to start one line down and one space over from the last line sent, this setting may correct the problem.

LF options - download

This field allows you to specify how Procomm Plus handles line feed characters within files downloaded using the ASCII protocol. Click on the list box to select an option:

Strip LF

Select this setting if you want line feeds to be removed from data you receive from a host system with the ASCII protocol. This is useful if the host sends you multiple line feeds during a download, causing the data you receive to appear double-spaced. This is the default setting.

If you use this setting, you may also need to set the CR options - download to Add LF to CR for your data to appear correctly in the Terminal display.

Add CR to LF

Select this setting if you want a carriage return added before every line feed received within an ASCII download. If the lines of text in your received file seem to start one line down and one space over from previous lines, this setting may resolve the problem.

Don’t translate LF

Select this setting if you want line feeds received from the host system within an ASCII download saved to disk without translation or modification.

Other Upload Options

The fields in this group allow you to specify a variety of settings for ASCII uploads. They include:

Millisecond delay between characters

This setting specifies the number of milliseconds Procomm Plus will wait between characters sent within an ASCII upload. The default character pacing is 0 milliseconds, or no pause.

If your host system seems to lose characters sent during an ASCII upload, try a setting of 5 or 10 milliseconds. This should satisfy all but the slowest host systems.

Delay between lines

This field specifies the delay in tenths of a second Procomm Plus will wait between lines sent within an ASCII upload. The default line delay is 0 tenths of a second, or no pause.

If the host system appears to handle a complete line at a time but loses some or all of a subsequent line, try a setting of 10 or 20 milliseconds. If the host is especially slow, you may need an even longer delay.

Use [ ] for Line pace character

If you enable this check box, Procomm Plus will wait to receive the character you specify before sending the next line of an ASCII upload.

For example, you can force Procomm Plus to wait for a greater-than character ">" before it sends a new line by entering the decimal value 62 in the edit field. For a table of ASCII character values, see ASCII Table.

Expand Tabs

If you enable this setting, each tab character in a file uploaded with the ASCII protocol will be replaced by the number of spaces specified in the associated edit field, which is eight spaces by default.

This setting is enabled by default. If it isn't enabled, tab characters are transmitted without modification.

Expand Blank Lines

If you enable this setting, blank lines within a file uploaded with the ASCII protocol will be expanded with a single space. A "blank" line is one that contains a carriage return or carriage return/line feed pair and no other characters. The expanded line will contain a space followed by the same carriage return or carriage return/line feed pair.

This is useful if you upload messages to host systems that interpret a blank line as the end of a message. Sending an expanded blank line allows you to use a blank line as a separator within the message. By default, blank lines are not expanded.

Display text

If this option is enabled, text transmitted in an ASCII upload will be echoed to the Terminal display. This option is disabled by default.

If you’ve enabled this setting, and the host is echoing also, the data may appear doubled, "lliikkee tthhiiss," because both systems are echoing the data. To remedy this problem, disable this option.

Other Download Options

The fields in this group allow you to specify a variety of settings for ASCII downloads. They include:

Seconds until download time-out

This setting specifies the number of seconds Procomm Plus will wait for received characters during an ASCII download. If Procomm Plus doesn’t receive any characters for the number of seconds specified, the ASCII download will terminate and the file will be saved to disk.

This setting is helpful if you’re performing unattended ASCII downloads. Since most host systems pause at a command prompt after transferring a file, Procomm Plus will end the download automatically.

The default time-out is 10 seconds, with a maximum time-out setting of 9999 seconds.

Overwrite existing file

If this setting is enabled, a downloaded file will replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. Otherwise, an incoming file name will be modified to protect a preexisting file.

For example, if you downloaded a file named readme.txt, but a readme.txt file already existed in the download directory, the incoming file would be saved as readme.tx1. If readme.tx1 already existed, the incoming file would be saved as readme.tx2, and so on. By default, preexisting files are protected.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase ASCII downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete ASCII downloads are not deleted.

Strip 8th bit

This setting specifies whether Procomm Plus strips the 8th bit from characters received during an ASCII download. It is disabled by default.

If this box has been checked and you transfer a WordStar file using the ASCII protocol, the received file will be in ASCII format rather than WordStar format.

Display text

If you enable this setting, data received during an ASCII download will also be displayed in the Terminal window. It is disabled by default.


ASCII Table


ASPECT

The programing language that comes with Procomm Plus. ASPECT allows you to create programs or scripts to automate the functions of Procomm Plus.

ASPECT is completely documented in the ASPECT help file, located in pw4asp.hlp. If the following link, ASPECT Script Reference, does not work or if you're unable to find this file, the ASPECT help file may not have been installed. Run Procomm Plus's  installation program, and use the Custom Installation feature to install the ASPECT help file.

See Script.


AT Command Set

The set of modem commands that are preceded with the letters AT, as in "ATtention." The AT alerts the modem that commands will follow. Usually a modem can accept as many as thirty eight additional command characters including spaces. The command string is then activated by pressing E. Almost every modem uses the AT command set. This command system was introduced by Dennis Hayes, and thus modems that preface commands with AT are referred to as Hayes Compatible.


AT&T 4410 (101-key)
This is the format for the AT&T 4410 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	  AT&T 4410 Function                                  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function Key F1	^[OP
F2	Function Key F2	^[OQ
F3	Function Key F3	^[OR
F4	Function Key F4	^[OS
F5	Function Key F5	^[OT
F6	Function Key F6	^[OU
F7	Function Key F7	^[OV
F8	Function Key F8	^[OW
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M
Keypad /	Clear	^[[2J
Keypad Home	Home	^[[H
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Keypad PgUp	Home Down	^[[24;1H
Keypad CrLf	Cursor Left	^[[D
Keypad CrRt	Cursor Right	^[[C
Keypad End	Home Down	^[[24;1H
Keypad CrDn	Cursor Down	^[[B
Keypad Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Grey Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Grey Home	Home	^[[H
Grey End	Home Down	^[[24;1H
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C


AT&T 4410 (84 key)
This is the format of the AT&T 4410 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	      AT&T 4410 Function	              Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function Key F1	^[OP
F2	Function Key F2	^[OQ
F3	Function Key F3	^[OR
F4	Function Key F4	^[OS
F5	Function Key F5	^[OT
F6	Function Key F6	^[OU
F7	Function Key F7	^[OV
F8	Function Key F8	^[OW
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M
Home	Home	^[[H
Ctrl-Home	Clear	^[[2J
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
PgUp	Home Down	^[[24;1H
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
End	Home Down	^[[24;1H
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]


AT&T 605 (101-key)
This is the format for the AT&T 605 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard. The F10 key is mappable, and the NumLock key is mapped to PF1.

Procomm Plus Key	  AT&T 605 Function                           Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function F1	^[Oc
F2	Function F2	^[Od
F3	Function F3	^[Oe
F4	Function F4	^[Of
F5	Function F5	^[Og
F6	Function F6	^[Oh
F7	Function F7	^[Oi
F8	Function F8	^[Oj
F9	Function F9	^[No
F10	Function F10	^[Np
F11	Function F11	^[Nq
F12	Function F12	^[Nr
Shift F1	Function F11	^[Nq
Shift F2	Function F12	^[Nr
Shift F3	Function F13	^[Ns
Shift F4	Function F14	^[Nt
Ctrl-F1	Shift Function F1	^[OC
Ctrl-F2	Shift Function F2	^[OD
Ctrl-F3	Shift Function F3	^[OE
Ctrl-F4	Shift Function F4	^[OF
Ctrl-F5	Shift Function F5	^[OG
Ctrl-F6	Shift Function F6	^[OH
Ctrl-F7	Shift Function F7	^[OI
Ctrl-F8	Shift Function F8	^[OJ
Ctrl-F9	Shift Function F9	^[NO
Ctrl-F10	Shift Function F10	^[NP
Ctrl-F11	Shift Function F11	^[NQ
Ctrl-F12	Shift Function F12	^[NR
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift Function F11	^[NQ
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift Function F12	^[NR
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift Function F13	^[NS
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift Function F14	^[NT
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	BackTab	^[[Z
Enter	Return	^M
Scroll Lock	Scroll Lock	^Q
Shift Scroll Lock	Scroll Lock*	^S
NumLock	PF1	^[OP
Keypad /	PF2	^[OQ
Keypad *	PF3	^[OR
Keypad -	PF4	^[OS
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Shift Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Shift Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Shift Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Shift Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Shift Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Shift Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Shift Ctrl-Enter	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Shift Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Shift Ctrl-Keypad .	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Shift Keypad Home	Home	^[[H
Shift Keypad End	End	^[[24;1H
Shift Keypad PgUp	Page Up	^[[V
Shift Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Shift Keypad CrLf	Cursor Left	^[[D
Shift Keypad CrRt	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift Keypad Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Shift Keypad Insert	Insert	^[[@
Shift Keypad Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Home	Clear	^[[2J
Shift Cursor Up	Shift Cursor Up	^[[T
Shift Cursor Left	Shift Cursor Left	^[[S
Shift Cursor Right	Shift Cursor Right	^[[ @	[ 1B 5B 20 40 ]
Shift Cursor Down	Shift Cursor Down	^[[ A	[ 1B 5B 20 41 ]
Shift Keypad PgDn	Page Down	^[[U
Shift Insert	Insert Line	^[[L
Shift Delete	Delete Line	^[[M
Grey Insert	Insert	^[[@
Shift Grey Insert	Insert Line	^[[L
Grey Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Grey Delete	Del Ln	^[[M
Ctrl-Delete	Ctrl-Delete	^[[P
Grey Home	Home	^[[H
Shift Grey Home	Clear	^[[2J
Grey End	End	^[[24;1H
Grey PgUp	Page Up	^[[V
Grey PgDn	Page Down	^[[U
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Reset	^[c
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Shift Grey Cursor Up	Shift-Cursor Up	^[[T
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Up	Ctrl-Up	^[[t
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Shift Grey Cursor Down	Shift-Cursor Down	^[[ A	[ 1B 5B 20 41 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Down	Ctrl-Cursor Down	^[[ A	[ 1B 5B 20 41 ]
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Shift Grey Cursor Left	Shift Cursor Left	^[[S
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Left	Ctrl-Cursor Left	^[[S
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift Grey Cursor Right	Shift Cursor Right	^[[ @	[ 1B 5B 20 40 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Right	Ctrl-Cursor Right	^[[ @	[ 1B 5B 20 40 ]


AT&T 605 (84 key)
This is the format of the AT&T 605 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Because of the extensive combinations supported by the AT&T 605, the keypad numeric values are only available in this mapping when NumLock is ON.  The Application keys are generated with the Ctrl-key when NumLock is ON, and Shift-Ctrl when NumLock is OFF.

Procomm Plus Key	      AT&T 605 Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function F1	^[Oc
F2	Function F2	^[Od
F3	Function F3	^[Oe
F4	Function F4	^[Of
F5	Function F5	^[Og
F6	Function F6	^[Oh
F7	Function F7	^[Oi
F8	Function F8	^[Oj
F9	Function F9	^[No
F10	Function F10	^[Np
Shift F1	Function F11	^[Nq
Shift F2	Function F12	^[Nr
Shift F3	Function F13	^[Ns
Shift F4	Function F14	^[Nt
Ctrl-F1	Shift Function F1	^[OC
Ctrl-F2	Shift Function F2	^[OD
Ctrl-F3	Shift Function F3	^[OE
Ctrl-F4	Shift Function F4	^[OF
Ctrl-F5	Shift Function F5	^[OG
Ctrl-F6	Shift Function F6	^[OH
Ctrl-F7	Shift Function F7	^[OI
Ctrl-F8	Shift Function F8	^[OJ
Ctrl-F9	Shift Function F9	^[NO
Ctrl-F10	Shift Function F10	^[NP
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift Function F11	^[NQ
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift Function F12	^[NR
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift Function F13	^[NS
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift Function F14	^[NT
Shift F5	PF1	^[OP
Shift F6	PF2	^[OQ
Shift F7	PF3	^[OR
Shift F8	PF4	^[OS
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	BackTab	^[[Z
Enter	Return	^M
Scroll Lock	Scroll Lock	^Q
Shift Scroll Lock	Scroll Lock*	^S
Keypad *	Keypad *	*
Keypad -	Keypad -	-
Shift Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Shift Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Shift Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Shift Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Shift Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Shift Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Shift Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Shift Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Shift Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Shift Ctrl-Keypad .	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Home	Home	^[[H
Shift Home	Clear	^[[2J
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Shift Cursor Up	Shift Cursor Up	^[[T
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Ctrl-Cursor Up	^[[t
PgUp	Page Up	^[[V
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Shift Cursor Left	Shift Cursor Left	^[[S
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Ctrl-Cursor Left	^[[S
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift Cursor Right	Shift Cursor Right	^[[ @	[ 1B 5B 20 40 ]
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Ctrl-Cursor Right	^[[ @	[ 1B 5B 20 40 ]
End	End	^[[24;1H
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Shift Cursor Down	Shift Cursor Down	^[[ A	[ 1B 5B 20 41 ]
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Ctrl-Cursor Down	^[[ A	[ 1B 5B 20 41 ]
PgDn	Page Down	^[[U
Shift-PgDn	Ctrl-Page Down	^[c
Insert	Insert	^[[@
Shift Insert	Insert Line	^[[L
Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Delete	Delete Line	^[[M
Ctrl-Delete	Ctrl-Delete	^[[P
Shift Keypad +	Enter	^M
With NUMLOCK toggled ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad .	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Keypad .	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om


Aborting a Fax Send or Receive

To interrupt a fax transfer, select Abort Fax Send/Receive from the Fax menu or the Action Bar in the Fax Status window. Procomm Plus immediately terminates the fax connection.

Aborting a Send Fax operation does not affect the Scheduled Faxes List; Procomm Plus will attempt to deliver it at a later time unless you delete it from the list. Also, if you abort a Send Fax operation when faxes and other documents are scheduled for transmission to other sites, Procomm Plus will continue to the next fax in the queue.


Accessing the Meta Key Editor

You can access the Meta Key Editor directly in one of two ways:

•	By pressing [image] [image] in the Procomm Plus Terminal window.

•	By selecting Meta Key Editor from the Terminal window’s Tool menu.

You can also access the editor by selecting Setup | Data | Setup Files in the Terminal window. Within the Setup dialog, select the .key file you want to modify, then click on Edit... to open the editor.

The Command Buttons

The editor provides a group of six command buttons to control file operations. These buttons are:

OK

Closes the editor window, saving any changes you may have made. to the current Meta Key file.

New

Creates a new .key file, using a filename you provide.

Save As

Saves an edited .key file to disk, using a new filename that you provide. The original .key file is left unchanged.

Cancel

Closes the editor without saving any changes you may have made.

Open

Opens an existing .key file.

Help

Opens the on-line Help system for the editor.


Action Bar

The row of icons available in each mode of Procomm Plus, as well as in many of its tools. The Action Bar is designed to keep common features within easy reach. In the connection windows, the Action Bar is configurable.

See also Icon.


Action Bar Icon Functions

An Action Bar button can perform one of six functions. As each function is selected in the Custom Icon dialog, the right portion of the dialog changes to display the fields required for that function. The icon functions are:

Menu Command

Send Text

Run Script

Run Program

Dial Entry

Notify Script

Menu Command

When you click on a Menu Command button, its associated menu command is called, just as though you’d selected it from the menu directly. The Custom Icon dialog contains a drop-down list box of the menu items available in the current command button set. Scroll through the list of commands, and select the one you want by clicking on it. To select a command from a different button set, click on the List menus for list box, then click on the one you want.

If you want to use the default icon for this function, click on Set Default Icon. Otherwise, you can browse for a different icon by clicking on the Change Icon... button.

The command’s menu item text is displayed on the Terminal window status line when you click on the button.

Send Text

When you click on a Send Text button, its associated text is transmitted through the active connection just as though you’d typed the text directly from the keyboard.

The Custom Icon dialog allows you to specify help text to be displayed on the status line and the text to be transmitted when you click on the icon. Enter the button’s help text in the Status line message field, and the text to be transmitted in the Send Text field. Click on Change Icon... to browse for an icon graphic to be used with your button.

Run Script

When you click on a Run Script button, its associated script is launched just as though you’d selected it from the Script File list box.

The Custom Icon dialog allows you to specify help text to be displayed on the status line and the script to run when you click on the icon. Enter the button’s help text in the Status line message field. You can either select the script from the Script File drop down list or enter the script filename directly in the list’s edit field.

If the script you want to run is not located in the directory specified in Script File in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup, you’ll need to specify the drive and path name for the file.

Click on Change Icon... to browse for an icon graphic to be used with your button.

Run Program

When you click on a Run Program button, its associated executable is launched just as though you’d run it from the Windows 95 Run... dialog.

The Custom Icon dialog allows you to specify help text to be displayed on the status line and the executable to run when you click on the icon. Enter the button’s help text in the Status line message field. You can either click on Browse... to search for the program’s executable file or enter the filename directly in the Execute Program edit field.

If the DOS directory containing the executable you want to run is not in your DOS PATH, you’ll also need to specify the full drive and path name for the file.

Click on Change Icon... to browse for an icon graphic to be used with your button.

Dial Entry

When you click on a Dial Entry button, Procomm Plus attempts to connect to its associated directory entry or group just as though you’d selected it from the Rapid Connect list box.

The Custom Icon dialog allows you to specify help text to be displayed on the status line and the entry or group to be accessed when you click on the icon. Enter the button’s help text in the Status line message field. Click on the Connect Data to list box to select the entry or group to be accessed when you click on the custom Action Bar button. By default, the Connect Data to list box displays entries available from the currently selected Connection Directory file. You can select a different directory file by clicking on the Connection Directory list box.

Click on Change Icon... to browse for an icon graphic to be used with your button.

Notify Script

When you click on a Notify Script button, a numeric value you specify is passed to the ASPECT $ACTIONBAR system variable. A Notify Script button is typically used to trigger actions or processes in the currently-executing script.

The Custom Icon dialog allows you to specify help text to be displayed on the status line and the value to be passed when you click on the icon. Enter the button’s help text in the Status line message field, and the value to be passed to $ACTIONBAR in the Script ID Number field.

Click on Change Icon... to browse for an icon graphic to be used with the button.

When you’re satisfied with the button’s settings, click on OK to accept them and close the dialog. Your new button will appear in the Current Action Bar list box.


Adaptive Answer

Modems that support this feature can distinguish between a fax call and a data call, since negotiation tones are different for fax and data. Procomm Plus supports this feature for modems that have this capability.


Adaptive Answer Options

Adaptive Answer is a technology which allows a modem to determine whether an incoming call is a from another modem in data mode or a fax call. If your modem supports Adaptive Answer, the settings in this group allow you to specify the commands used to enable it, as well as the result messages your modem returns for fax connections. From within Setup, click on the System, Modem Connection, Fax Settings, Adaptive Answer panel to display the settings:

Class 1 Adaptive Answer

These settings are used to enable and detect Adaptive Answer if you’re using a Class 1 fax modem.

Many Class 1 modems do not support Adaptive Answer. You may need to check your modem manual.

Enable command

This field specifies the command that will be used to turn on your modem’s support for Adaptive Answer.

Fax connect message

The Fax connect message field specifies the message returned by your modem when Adaptive Answer reports a fax call. Typically, the Fax connect message for Class 1 is FAX.

Class 2 Adaptive Answer

These settings are used to enable and detect Adaptive Answer if you’re using a Class 2 fax modem.

Adaptive Answer is supported by the Class 2 specification, but modems manufactured before the Class 2 specification was officially ratified might not support the feature. You may need to check your modem manual.

Enable command

The Enable command field specifies the command that will be used to turn on your modem’s support for Adaptive Answer.

Fax connect message

The Fax connect message field specifies the message returned by your modem when Adaptive Answer reports a fax call. Typically, the Fax connect message for Class 2 is +FCON.

Automatically switch baud rate to 19,200...

Some modems automatically raises their baud rate to 19200 during Adaptive Answer. If you enable this setting, Procomm Plus will automatically change its baud rate to 19200 in response to an Adaptive Answer connect message.


Add to Favorites

This dialog allows you to specify the name for the shortcut to be added to the Web Browser Favorites menu and the Favorites folder.  Click on OK to use the default name supplied by the Web page itself, or edit the name as desired and then click on OK.


Adding an Entry Class

A single Connection Directory entry can contain any combination of entry classes. You can easily specify these classes when you create the entry, or add them at a later time. To add an entry class to the selected entry, click on the Edit Entry button, or select the Edit | Edit Entry... menu item to open the Edit Directory Entry dialog. The Edit Directory Entry dialog looks and works identically to the Add Directory Entry dialog. Click on the button corresponding to the entry class you want to add or edit, and begin making changes.

The Name, Company and Group fields are commonly shared by all entry classes within an entry. Any changes you make in these fields in one class will affect their values in all of the entry’s classes.

For an explanation of the fields and panels within the dialog, see the appropriate discussions in Adding and Editing Entries For example, for questions about the FTP entry class, see "The FTP Entry Class".


Adding, editing and deleting directory entries

You’ll use the Add Directory Entry dialog to create new entries in the Connection Directory. The Add Directory Entry dialog allows you to specify an entry’s basic settings, such as the entry name and connection information. Once you’ve created an entry, you can access its settings panels to view or modify its other characteristics.

In the following topics, we’ll discuss how to add each of the entry classes supported by Procomm Plus. After each class explanation, we’ll detail each entry class’s respective fields and settings.

Although we’ll discuss each entry class separately, keep in mind that a single directory entry can contain any combination of the various classes supported by Procomm Plus. The Add Directory Entry dialog makes it easy to create a multi-class entry. For example, if you’re creating a Data-class entry for a company that also has an FTP server, you can specify an FTP class for the entry by clicking on the FTP button in the dialog and entering the appropriate information. You can also add classes to an existing entry, as explained in Adding an Entry Class.

The Data Entry Class

The Fax Entry Class

The Voice Entry Class

The Telnet Entry Class

The FTP Entry Class

The Web Entry Class

The Mail Entry Class

The News Entry Class

Adding an Entry Class

Deleting Entries


Adding, editing and deleting directory groups

The Connection Directory allows you to arrange multiple entries into a group. You can take advantage of this feature to organize the directory to better suit the way you use Procomm Plus.

Groups are created and modified with the directory’s Group Editor.

Step-by-Step: Adding a New Group

Editing a Group

Deleting Groups


Address

See COM port Address. See URL.


Addresses on the Web

Each page on the Web has a specific addresses which are specified by a Uniform Resource Locator, or URL. Web page addresses, or URLs, are typically made up of two parts:

1.	The method or protocol used to access the server.

2.	The server’s address, and possibly a path to the file or document.

The first part, or the part before the colon, tells the Web Browser window how to communicate with the server. For Web addresses, it is usually http. The second part, everything following the colon, tells it how to get there. The // indicates that what follows is a machine name, and the string following specifies the machine’s name. If you do not include a path and document name in the Address, the server will send a default.html document if it exists, or it may display the file directory in a tree structure.


Advanced Data Options

Settings in the Advanced options panel allow you to control a variety of Terminal window functions. From within Setup, select the Data, Data Options, Advanced buttons to display the Advanced panel.

Prompt for Download protocol

By default, Procomm Plus initiates the Current Transfer Protocol immediately when you click on the Action Bar’s Receive File button or select the Data | Receive File... menu item. If you enable this option, Procomm Plus will prompt you for the transfer protocol you wish to use.

Enable automatic download start...

By default, Procomm Plus begins downloading files automatically when it receives the initial sequences for the Zmodem and Kermit protocols. If you prefer to initiate downloads for these protocols just as you do for other transfers, disable this option.

Procomm Plus also supports autodownloading for the CIS-B+ protocol. See Enquiry Type in Common Terminal Options for more information.

View .GIF files during download

By default, Procomm Plus displays CompuServe Graphic Interchange Files in a separate window as they are being downloaded. These picture files usually have a filename extension of .gif. If you prefer not to view .gif graphics as they are downloaded to your machine, disable this option.

Flash icon when transfer complete

By default, if Procomm Plus has been minimized, it does not signal when a file transfer completes. Enable this option if you want the Procomm Plus icon to flash to signal a completed transfer. Note that this may cause Procomm Plus to "steal" the focus from another application.

Abort transfer if Carrier Detect signal lost

If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus will react to a loss of the Carrier Detect signal by aborting an ongoing file transfer. By default, Carrier Detect is ignored during a file transfer.

If you’re transferring files between two computers connected by a null modem cable, be sure that this field is disabled. Most null modem cables do not support the Carrier Detect signal.

Duplex

This setting determines whether the characters you enter in the Terminal window will be echoed to the Terminal display. The default setting of Full does not echo data, while Half duplex echoes each character as it’s sent to the host system.

Break Length

A break signal is recognized by some host systems as an attention code. You can specify a break length of 0 to 999, measuring tenths of a second. The default break length used in the Terminal window is 5, or a half-second.

Yield During File Transfer

This slider bar lets you control how generously Procomm Plus shares processor time during file transfers. To increase the time given to other applications, slide the "thumb" towards the right. To decrease the time given to other applications, slide it towards the left.

By default, Procomm Plus yields moderately during file transfers with the "thumb" set to the far left position. This is usually an optimal setting for most multi-tasking situations. However, there may be instances when you want to give other applications a higher priority.

On very fast systems, with 486 or higher processors, you may not need to make any adjustments at all to get both fast file transfers and optimal use of other applications that are running beside Procomm Plus!


Advanced Fax Connection Options

The Advanced settings allow you to specify the commands used to enable Class 1 error-correction methods, as well as some advanced control features. From within Setup, click on the System, Modem Connection, Fax Settings, Advanced panel to display these settings:

Fax ECM during send

This setting determines whether Error Correction Mode (ECM) will be used during a Class 1 fax send operation. Fax ECM during send can be set to None, Hardware or Software. The default setting depends on the modem you installed.

If set to None, ECM will not be used during a fax transmission. If set to Software, Procomm Plus’s internal routines will handle ECM. If set to Hardware, your modem’s hardware will handle ECM.

Fax ECM during receive

This setting determines whether ECM will be used during a Class 1 fax receive operation. Fax ECM during receive can be set to None, Hardware or Software. The default setting depends on the modem you installed.

If set to None, ECM will not be used when receiving a fax. If set to Software, Procomm Plus’s internal routines will handle ECM. If set to Hardware, your modem’s hardware will handle ECM.

In addition to checked for on and unchecked for off, each of the check boxes discussed below offer a third setting. The third setting is indicated by filling the check box with a graphical block; it means that the associated feature is neither on nor off, and the modem's current configuration for the feature will be used.

Reverse serial port bit order rate...

Some modems receive data from bit 0 to bit 7, while others reverse the order, and arrange data from bit 7 to bit 0. The symptom of a bit-order reversal is typically a fax image that appears as a group of small dots, perhaps with horizontal lines. These settings allow you to control how fax data is interpreted by the modem’s hardware:

... during send

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will send special commands which force the fax modem hardware to reverse the bit order on transmitted fax data.

... during receive

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will send special commands which force the fax modem hardware to reverse the bit order on received fax data.

Reverse fax bit order rate...

These settings correct the same kinds of mismatches described in "Reverse serial port bit order rate...", above. However, they allow you to control how fax data is interpreted by the fax software, rather than the modem hardware:

... during send

If this setting is enabled, the fax software will reverse the bit order on transmitted fax data.

... during receive

If this setting is enabled, the fax software will reverse the bit order on received fax data.


Advanced QWK Mail Viewer Features

Using QWK Message Attachments

Sorting Your QWK Messages

Finding a QWK Message

Signatures and Taglines

Using the ANSI Viewer

Using RIME Routing


An Introduction to FTP

The following topics are intended to help you become familiar with the key concepts of the FTP protocol and FTP hosts and clients. It introduces the principles of host/client operations, as well as a basic discussion of the Internet address system as it relate to  FTP.

What is FTP?

FTP Clients and FTP Hosts

FTP Address and Logon Information


An Introduction to Internet Mail

For a variety of reasons, electronic mail is perhaps the most used features of the Internet. Regardless of your areas of interest or expertise, chances are that sooner or later you will use Internet mail! You can use it to:

Send messages to individuals.

Send binary files, including images, audio files, programs and more.

Send text files.

Mail Protocols

Internet Mail Addresses

Encoded files


An Introduction to Internet Newsgroups

Internet newsgroups were created by university students who wanted to be able to exchange information on a scale greater than what was available with Mail. Today’s Usenet Newsgroups are the result of several generations of News programs.

Newsgroups are similar to forums and message areas available on national and local BBSs, but like the Internet itself, they have a much larger scale. There are currently over 15,000 newsgroups with subjects ranging from the monumental to the trivial, allowing people around the world to exchange information. If your service provider allows you to access newsgroups, you are sure to find one to pique your interest.

Newsgroup Naming Conventions

Newsgroup Articles

How News Works


Analog Signal

A signal that mimics a sound wave, analogous to sound. Modems are designed to convert the digital data of a computer into analog signals for the phone system.

See Digital Signal.


Anchor

An image or special text (usually colored) that marks a hyperlink. An anchor may refer to a hypertext link or a hypermedia link. Click on the anchor to access the linked material.


Annotating Faxes

The Procomm Plus Fax Viewer makes it easy for you to add annotation to your faxes. You can use text and a variety of graphical elements to enhance or draw attention to your documents. You have control over every aspect of the annotation objects you create, including line width, line color, fill color and font properties.

After you’ve placed the objects you want, you can merge your changes into the fax and save it as a fax, a Windows .bmp file or a .pcx image file.

Although you can use a variety of colors when creating text and graphical objects, and even import multicolored bitmaps to annotate your faxes, keep in mind that all of the annotation objects will be converted to monochrome when you merge them with the original image!

Before you can annotate a fax, you’ll need to put the viewer into annotation mode. Select the Annotation | Show Annotation menu item, or click on the Show/Hide Annotation button on the viewer Action Bar. The viewer enables the corresponding menu items and displays the Annotation Toolbar, which is discussed in The Annotation Toolbar.

For more information about the annotation, see the following topics:

The Annotation Toolbar

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Line

The Freehand Line

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Shape

Step-by-Step: Placing Text

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Polygon

Step-by-Step: Placing an Annotation Bitmap

Modifying an Annotation Object


Annotation and the Windows Clipboard

The Fax Viewer allows you to take full advantage of the Windows Clipboard. You can:

Paste a bitmap from the clipboard

To paste a bitmap from the clipboard into the annotation layer, press [image] [image] or select the Edit | Paste menu item. The Paste command is also available from the right mouse pop-up; just right click on annotation layer to access the menu.

The viewer places the pasted bitmap in the upper left corner of the current page. You can modify its location and settings.

Cut or copy objects to the clipboard

To copy a selected object to the clipboard, press [image] [image] or select the Edit | Copy menu item. To copy an object to the clipboard and delete it from the annotation layer, press [image] [image] or select the Edit | Cut menu item.

The Cut and Copy commands are also available from the right mouse pop-up; just right click on the object to access the menu.

Paste objects from the clipboard

To paste an object from the clipboard into the annotation layer, press [image] [image] or select the Edit | Paste menu item. The Paste command is also available from the right mouse pop-up; just right click on the annotation layer to access the menu.

The viewer places the pasted object in the upper left corner of the current page. You can then modify its location and settings.

Cut or copy text to the clipboard

To copy text you've highlighted in a text object to the clipboard, press [image] [image] or choose the Edit | Copy menu item. To copy selected text to the clipboard and delete it from the text object, press [image] [image] or select the Edit | Cut menu item.

The Cut and Copy commands are also available from the right mouse pop-up; just right click on the text box to access the menu.

Paste text from the clipboard into a text object

To paste text from the clipboard into a text object that you’re editing, press [image] [image] or select the Edit | Paste menu item. The Paste command is also available from the right mouse pop-up; just right click on the text object to access the menu. The text is copied into the object at the current cursor location in the text box.


Anonymous FTP

A public access FTP host that accepts the word "anonymous" or "ftp" as the user ID, and a valid Internet mail address as the password. Other FTP hosts require a designated User ID and password.

See also FTP. See also Archie.


Answering Calls

Procomm Plus makes it easy for you to connect to other systems, but it also makes it easy for other users to connect to your computer! You can either set Procomm Plus to answer all incoming data or fax calls, or enable Auto Answer whenever you’re expecting a call. Either way, your callers are automatically connected!

Perhaps the easiest way to answer an incoming call is to run the Host script. It turns the Terminal window into a single-line BBS that others can call to transfer files, exchange mail messages and even request faxes!

The Host script is discussed in detail in Host, the BBS Script.

For more information about answering calls, see the following topics:

Auto Answer Modes

Step-by-Step: Answering a Data Call


Answering Calls See Also
Answering Calls

Auto Answer Modes

Step-by-Step: Answering a Data Call


Archie

An Internet search engine that looks specifically for files. An Archie server contains a database of anonymous FTP servers and their files. You can Telnet to an Archie site, or use an Archie client.


Arranging Annotation Objects

By default, the Fax Viewer "layers" the objects you place in the same order you placed them. Usually, this isn’t a concern. However, if you want to place one object in front of another, the first object you placed will be drawn behind the second one.

The viewer provides two commands that allow you to arrange objects in the order you want: Move to Front and Move to Back.

First, use the Select Object tool to select the object you want to reorder. To pull the object in front of any other object(s), click on the Move to Front button or select the Annotation | Move to Front menu item. To push the object behind any other object(s), click on the Move to Back button or select the Annotation | Move to Back menu item.


Asynchronous

A type of data transfer that is not dependant on timing. Each discreet unit of data has a start bit, a stop bit, and a designated number of data bits. In this way the receiving side is more forgiving of pauses that may occur in the transaction because it can count the bits to see when a new unit is starting or ending. A port setting such as E71, represents Even Parity, seven Data Bits, and one Stop Bit. The start bit is implied.

See also Parity.


Auto Answer

To set Procomm Plus to answer all incoming calls in fax mode, select the Setup | Answer Options | Procomm Plus Answers Calls menu item in the main window, and then toggle the Setup | Answer Options | Fax item on.

If your fax modem supports Adaptive Answer, you may also be able to receive data calls while set to answer fax calls. For more information on these advanced modem features,  see Adaptive Answer Options.

If your fax modem supports Caller ID and you subscribe to the service, you can use it to answer fax calls. See Answer Action in The Caller ID Directory Editor Window for more information.


Auto Answer Modes

If you don’t want to use the Host script, you can answer calls by selecting an answer mode from the Setup | Answer Options menu.  First, click on the Procomm Plus Answers Calls menu item from the Setup | Answer Options menu, then select the desired answer option:

Data

Fax

Both Data and Fax

Any change you make to these settings will change the settings for Incoming Call Handling on the System | Modem Connection panel within Setup!  See Modem Connection Options for more information.

If your modem has a speaker and it’s enabled, you’ll hear incoming calls "ringing". If the Terminal window is visible, you may also see a "RING" message from the modem.

If you select one of the Answer Options commands, you won’t need to do anything when someone calls. Otherwise, you’ll need to select an Answer Options command when you receive a call, or manually send the commands to your modem to make it answer the call.

If you're receiving a fax call, you can select the Fax | Answer Fax Now menu item from the Fax Status window. For more information, see Manual Answer. If you're receiving a data call, you can select the Data | Answer Data Call Now menu item from the Terminal window menu to answer it automatically.

If you're using a single telephone line for all of your calls including voice, you'll probably want to answer all calls manually. Otherwise, if you've set Procomm Plus to answer all calls automatically, your modem will answer each time someone calls. Your callers will be greeted by your modem's answer tones and will probably hang up and try again.


Auto Answer_1
Auto Answer

A setting that defines how Procomm Plus will respond to an incoming call on the active modem. Both the Data and Fax options have an effect on how Procomm Plus will activate the modem to answer a call.


Auto Baud Detect

A software setting that tracks the connection speed of the modem, and then forces the port speed to be the same. The Connect messages from the modem are used to track the connection speed.

This setting is usually disabled for data-compressing modems, since the port must be at a higher speed than the connection rate, in order to handle the speed once the data has been decompressed. Also, the Connect message for a some data-compressing modems is set to CONNECT, as opposed to CONNECT 9600, for example. This can cause the port speed to be forced down to 300 bps if auto baud detect is enabled.


Automatic Download

Allows the sending computer to initiate a download on the receiving computer. This simplifies file transfers, since only the sender needs to activate the transfer. This feature is supported by the Zmodem and Kermit file transfer protocols.


BBS

See Bulletin Board System.


BFT

Binary File Transfer. Although it sounds like a typical file transfer protocol, this three letter acronym refers to a file transfer using fax technology. The important difference between a BFT and a fax transmission is that with a BFT, the recipient receives a file in its original state. With a fax transmission, the recipient receives a graphic representation of a document.


BPS

Short for Bits Per Second. This refers to the number of bits of information transmitted each second over a serial connection. For instance, if the signal rate is 600 baud, and four bits of information can be transmitted with each signal change, then the transmission rate is 2400 bps. Baud rate and BPS are often used interchangeably.

See Baud Rate.


Bandwidth

The amount of information that can be sent through a wire or other media during a given time interval. As bandwidth increases, so does the amount of information or "data" that can be transferred per time unit.


Batch Transfer

A file transfer procedure where a list of files has been selected to be transferred.


Baud Rate

The number of discrete signal events per second occurring on a communications channel. For instance, if a wave changes from a high frequency to a lower frequency 600 times per second, the connection is at 600 baud. The term "Baud Rate" is commonly used to indicate the amount of data transmitted in a given time span.

See also BPS.


Before You Call...

Make sure to turn on your computer and start Procomm Plus before you call. You should also be ready to give the Quarterdeck Technical Support specialist the following information, in addition to your serial number:

•	The version of Procomm Plus you're using. The version number is displayed in the same About Procomm Plus... dialog, along with your product serial number.

•	The type of processor in your computer. For example, a 486 or Pentium.

•	The amount of RAM memory in your computer.

•	The versions of Windows and DOS you're using.

•	The type of modem you're using, if any.

Also, be prepared to answer the following questions:

•	Have you run Procomm Plus successfully before? If so, have you changed any of your system's hardware or software since then?

•	Can you duplicate the series of steps that result in your problem?

•	Did an error message appear? If so, what did it say?

For more information on voice support options, please refer to your Technical Support Guide.


Binary File

Any file that is not a text file. Think of a text file as a document that could be created with a typewriter. Every character in the file represents a viewable character, with the exception simple control codes like "line-feed." Binary files have information in them not intended to be viewable characters. A common example of a binary file is a document created by an editor that uses special fonts, bold, underline, tables, and formatting. Other binary files include executable programs, graphics, and sound. An ASPECT script is a readable text file while you are entering the information. When you compile it, it becomes a binary script file. If you try to view the compiled version of your script in an editor, you will see strange characters not meant to be viewed.


Binary File Transfers

An increasingly important feature of fax technology is the Binary File Transfer, or BFT, in which a binary file is transferred between two fax devices over an error-corrected fax connection. The BFT standard, also known as the T.434 standard, was first approved by the International Telecommunications Union in 1992, and continues to evolve.

Using BFTs instead of, or in addition to standard faxing offers several advantages:

You, or the recipient, receive the file in its original format for immediate editing or processing.

You can transmit any kind of file, even executable or compressed archive files.

You can transmit any number of files in one fax session.

Your file transfers will be retried if the fax transmission is aborted.

Since a typical binary file is usually much smaller that its .fax image, you should save transmission time.

See the following topics for more information:

Receiving a Binary File Transfer

Step-by-Step: Sending a Binary File Transfer

Fax vs. File Transfer

Note that only computers equipped with Class 1 fax modems can send or receive BFTs. If your fax recipient’s fax system is a dedicated fax machine, Procomm Plus will only transmit standard fax documents; any BFTs in the File(s) to Fax list will be skipped automatically.

Similarly, if you’ve specified BFTs in a polling list, Procomm Plus will skip them if polled by a dedicated fax machine.


Bit

The smallest unit of information that can be stored on a computer. Since computers use a binary system to store data, a bit can have one of two values: one or zero.

See Byte.


Bitmap

A graphic file that is formed by describing the color and location of each point in an image, a literal bit map. Images that are formed by describing each dot of color are also called raster images. There are a number of different types of bitmaps or raster files, Microsoft’s .BMP files and CompuServe’s .GIF files are both bitmap formats.

The opposite of a raster image would be a vector image such as a metafile. Instead of giving an exact location and color for each bit, vector files describe a set of instructions to create given image.

See Metafile.


Bitmap Objects

To specify the display characteristics of a Bitmap object, double click on it. The editor opens the Bitmap Object Options dialog.

Sizing Group

None

If you want the bitmap image to be drawn without sizing of any kind, select the None radio button in the Sizing group. If the bitmap is larger than the area you’ve assigned it on the cover sheet, it will be clipped to fit.

Proportional

If you want the bitmap image to maintain its proportions, regardless of the area you assign it in the editor, select the Proportional radio button in the Sizing group.

This setting is helpful if the bitmap you’re including contains text or other features that should maintain their original proportions. Note however that the image may not fill the entire area you assign it to in the cover sheet.

Stretch to Fit

If you want the bitmap image to be expanded as required to fill the area you assign it in the cover sheet, select the Stretch to Fit radio button in the Sizing group. Note that this may cause the image to be distorted or compressed.

Click on the OK button to close the dialog and accept the current settings, including any changes you’ve made. If you don’t want to keep the changes you’ve made, you can click on Cancel to close the dialog.


Bookmark

Used by Web browsers and Gopher clients, a bookmark is a copy of the current Internet address that is saved to a list, so that you can find it again at a later time. The Procomm Plus Web Browser automatically saves bookmarks in the Connection Directory when you click the Add Page icon.


Box Objects

To specify the display characteristics of a Box object, double click on it. The editor opens the Box Object Options dialog:

Line Width

You can specify the width of the line used to draw the box by entering the number of pixels you want in the Line Width edit field. The default is 4.

Corners

You can specify whether the box frame will have Round or Square corners by selecting the appropriate radio button from the Corners group.

Click on the OK button to close the dialog and accept the current settings, including any changes you’ve made. If you don’t want to keep the changes you’ve made, you can click on Cancel to close the dialog.


Break

An asynchronous communication signal used to alert the remote system. The break differs from usual data bytes in that it consists of only start bits, no data bits and no stop bits.


Bridge

A computer that routs information from one network or subnet, to another. Bridge is a generic term meaning either a router or a gateway.

See also Router. See also Gateway.


Buffer

A block of memory or disk space, set aside for temporary data storage.


Bulletin Board System

Also called a BBS. A computer equipped to automatically answer incoming calls and allow users to leave messages and access information. Other functions of a BBS may include uploading and download capabilities, and support for interactive games.


Byte

A group of eight bits stored together that comprise a character or data element.

See Bit.


CCITT

See ITU-T.


CD

See Carrier Detect.


COM Port Address

The memory location that an application writes to, in order to communicate with a COM port. When the jumpers on a modem are configured for COM1, the modem is assigned the starting address (Base Port Address) of 0x3f8. If a different COM port is already configured as COM1, one or both of the conflicting devices will typically fail to respond when an application writes to that address.


COM port

Short for Communications Port, also called a Serial Port. The plug or connector where a PC receives communication or data from various serial devices such as a serial mouse or a modem. COM ports use the RS-232 standard.

A COM port is visually distinguished from a parallel port because it has two rows of pins sticking out of the PC, where a Parallel port has two rows of holes going into the PC. A COM port may have nine or twenty-five pins.


CR

Carriage Return. Used to mark the end of a line of text under DOS and Windows operating systems. The Carriage Return is also sent to most modems after an AT command string, causing the modem to process the command and clear its command buffer.

The ASCII notation for a Carriage Return is represented by the two characters ^M.


CRC

Cyclic Redundancy Check. An error checking method which performs a mathematical calculation on a "block" of data in order to detect transmission errors.


CTS

Clear To Send. One of the two hardware flow control lines in a serial port connection. If Clear to send is "on," the modem is ready to send. If the CTS line is "off," the buffer is full and the computer of terminal should wait. Part of the RS-232 standard.

See also RTS. See also Hardware Flow Control.


Cache

A buffer where frequently accessed data or program modules are stored temporarily. Information from a local cache can be used to save transfer time, if the same information is repeatedly referenced.


Call Waiting

A service provided by the phone company, that notifies you during a call that there is another incoming call. You can temporarily disable this service from Setup, since Call Waiting can interrupt a file transfer or even cause the modem to go offline. Check with your phone company for the specified code to disable call waiting.


Callback

A security procedure used to establish a secure connection between a remote caller and a Host. If you are using the Procomm Plus Host script, and Callback in enabled, the remote modem caller must login, hang up, and have the Host call back using a designated number. The Callback settings are located in the Hostutil ASPECT script.


Caller ID

A service provided by the telephone company that identifies the calling party while your phone is ringing. You can only make use of caller ID if your modem supports this feature and you subscribe to this service from your phone company.


Caller Information

Information related to a particular caller, stored in the Caller Information database. This information is used in relation to Caller ID. It may include information such as the caller’s name, the answer response, or an automated script.

See Caller ID.


Calling Card

See Phone Card.


Capture

In reference to a data transfer. Taking data that is being received without the use of a file transfer protocol, and storing it by saving it to a file or printing it.


Capture File Options Dialog

From within Setup, select Data, Setup Files, Setup... to open the Capture File Options dialog. This dialog allows you to specify how Capture files will be handled by a Connection Directory entry, and how the Capture files will be recorded.

Recording Options

This setting determines how the Terminal window will record Capture file data:

Write text as it appears on screen

If this setting is selected, text is captured as it scrolls off the top of the screen into the Scrollback Buffer. When written to the Capture file, the text is formatted just as it appeared in the display.

This is the default setting. It works well with most host systems. However, if you find that most of the data screens are "missing" from the Capture file when you use this setting, try one of the other two settings.

Write filtered text with no emulation escapes

If this setting is selected, all data is captured except for emulation control sequences. Filtering captured data is especially useful if the host is sending commands that are causing text to be lost from the Capture file.

With this setting, all positioning and attribute sequences recognized by the terminal emulation are removed from the Capture file.

Write raw text including all escapes

If this setting is selected, all data sent by the host system is captured. The Capture file will include all text, graphics characters and emulation control sequences. A "raw" Capture file can be replayed in the Terminal window with the playback function, allowing you to review an entire on-line session without having to reconnect to the host!

Â	If you need to send an entire Terminal display screen to a Capture file, press Ak . This copies the current display into the Scrollback Buffer and to a Capture file, if one is open, and allows you to save specific screens regardless of how the host is sending the data.

Control Options

These settings determine how the Terminal window opens the Capture file to write recorded data:

Overwrite existing capture file

If this setting is enabled, and you’ve chosen an existing Capture file to receive recorded data, the existing file will be replaced with the new information. This setting is disabled by default, meaning that data is appended to the end of an existing file.

Query for file name when capture is started

If this setting is enabled, the Terminal window prompts for a file name when you open a Capture file.

Â	The prompt dialog also allows you to modify the Capture file options before data is written to the file!

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the Data Setup Files panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Capture Files

Using the Terminal window’s Capture file features, you can record data received while on-line to a disk file. This can be very useful! For example, if you’re calling an information service that charges by the minute for on-line time, you can capture messages and text files, and read them after you’ve disconnected, which can save you connect charges.

Procomm Plus’s Capture file handling is designed to be convenient and flexible. You can record information in one of three different ways, each of which offers its own advantages:

As it appears in the Terminal display

Text is captured as it scrolls off the top of the screen into the Scrollback Buffer. When written to the Capture file, the text is formatted just as it appeared in the display.

Filtered text

All of the text sent by the host system is written to the Capture file, but the emulation’s formatting information is removed. The Filtered text mode is most useful if the data you’re capturing will be processed by a script or application.

Raw text, including emulation sequences

All data sent by the host system is written to the Capture file, including all text, graphics characters and emulation control sequences. A "raw" Capture file can be re-displayed in the Terminal window with the playback function, allowing you to review an entire on-line session without having to reconnect to the host!

Capture files are limited only by your system’s available disk space.

For more information, see the following topics:

Opening a Capture File

Replaying Captured Data


Capture Files See Also
Capture Files

Opening a Capture File

Replaying Captured Data


Capturing Data

As you connect to and interact with other systems, you’ll probably want to save some of the information that’s written to the Terminal display. Using Procomm Plus, you can capture data in several different ways:

•	By selecting it from the Terminal display, as discussed in The Terminal Display and the Mouse.

•	By recording it in a Capture file.

•	By using a Screen Capture.

•	By logging it to a printer using Print Capture, which is available from the Terminal window File menu.

•	By selecting it from the Scrollback Buffer.


Capturing Data See Also
Capturing Data

The Terminal Display and the Mouse

Capture file

Screen Capture

Scrollback Buffer


Card

Thin card-shaped circuit board that slides into a slot inside a computer. Many computer peripherals are in the form of a card, such as a network card, an I/O card, a sound card, or an internal modem card.

See also PC Card.


Carrier

The tone used by a modem to transfer data across a phone line.


Carrier Detect

A specific COM port line that indicates the absence or presence of a connection to another modem. Some modems artificially force Carrier Detect (CD) high, making it difficult for communications software to determine if a connection has actually been established. The modem command that configures the modem to accurately report CD is AT&C1.


Changing a Fax Delivery

If you want to change the delivery settings for a fax you have scheduled, highlight it and then select the Edit | Change Delivery... menu item. Fax Manager displays the Send Fax dialog.

Any files that were included with the fax you selected appear in the File(s) to Fax list box. You can accept them or use the dialog’s controls to modify the file list, just as you would if you were scheduling a new fax.

The selected fax’s original delivery time and date are also carried into the Send Fax dialog. You can click on the Time & Options button to modify them if you wish.

The Change Delivery function also reports the original fax task’s Recipient(s) List or Cover Sheet options. You can add or remove recipients, or modify any Cover Sheet options to suit your preferences.

When you’re satisfied with the recipients and settings you’ve selected, click on Send to accept them and schedule the fax. To close the Send Fax dialog without modifying the original fax, click on Cancel.

Changing the delivery replaces the original fax with the newly-scheduled fax. To create a new copy of the fax while preserving the original as a scheduled task, see Forwarding a Fax.

If you click on OK and the delivery time and date are already past, Fax Status will attempt to transmit the fax immediately.


Changing the Fax Connection

The Fax Connection list box in the Send Fax, Time & Options panel displays the currently selected fax connection. You can change to a different fax connection by clicking on the list box’s down arrow button and selecting the new connection from the list.

If you want to change the fax driver settings, click on the Setup... button to display the Fax Driver Setup dialog:

Page Size

You can select either Letter, Legal or DIN A4-sized output by clicking on the Page Size list box and selecting the new size. By default, Procomm Plus creates Letter-sized output.

Fax Resolution

You can choose either Standard or Fine output by selecting the appropriate radio button within the Fax Resolution box. By default, Procomm Plus uses Fine output, 200 x 200 dpi.

Fax Orientation

You can toggle between Portrait and Landscape output by selecting the appropriate radio button within the Fax Orientation box. Procomm Plus uses Portrait by default.

When you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected, click on OK to close the Fax Driver Setup dialog and return to the Send Fax dialog. To return to the Send Fax dialog without saving any changes, click on Cancel.


Changing the Fill Color

If you want to use one of the standard Fill Color settings, you’ll probably find that it’s faster to use the viewer’s Quick Select Line. Click on the Fill Color field, then click on the color you want. Your selection is applied immediately.

If you want to specify a custom color, you’ll need to open the Fill Color dialog. You can do so in one of three ways:

Right click on the Quick Select Line’s Fill Color field. This is equivalent to clicking on the Fill Color field and selecting the
-Custom- item from the pop-up list.

Right click on the object you want to modify, then select Fill Color... from the pop-up menu.

Select the Annotation | Fill Color... menu item.

The viewer opens the Fill Color dialog. You can select a standard fill color by clicking on the Standard Colors list box, then clicking on the value you want. If you want to specify a custom color, you can either enter its Red, Green and Blue values in the appropriate edit fields, or click on Custom... edit field to choose it from a color selection dialog.

To close the Fill Color dialog and apply the changes you’ve made, click on OK. To close the dialog without saving or applying any changes you’ve made, click on Cancel.


Changing the Line Color

If you want to use one of the standard Line Color settings, you’ll probably find it easiest to use the viewer’s Quick Select Line. Click on the Line Color field, then click on the color you want. Your selection is applied immediately to all selected objects.

If you want to specify a custom color, you’ll need to open the Line Color dialog. You can do so in one of three ways:

Right click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Color field. This is equivalent to clicking on the Line Color field and selecting the -Custom- item from the pop-up list.

Right click on the object you want to modify, then select Line Color... from the pop-up.

Select the Annotation | Line Color... menu item.

The viewer opens the Line Color dialog.  You can select a standard line color by clicking on the Standard Colors list box, then clicking on the value you want. If you want to specify a custom color, you can either enter its Red, Green and Blue values in the appropriate edit fields, or click on Custom... edit field to choose it from a color selection dialog.

To close the Line Color dialog and apply the changes you’ve made, click on OK. To close the dialog without saving or applying any changes you’ve made, click on Cancel.


Changing the Line Width

If you want to use one of the standard Line Width settings, you’ll probably find the viewer’s Quick Select Line most convenient. Click on the Line Width field, then click on the width you want. Your selection is applied immediately.

If you want to specify a custom width, you’ll need to open the Line Width dialog. You can do so in one of three ways:

Right click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Width field. This is equivalent to clicking on the Line Width field and selecting the -Custom- item from the pop-up list.

Right click on the object you want to modify, then select Line Width... from the pop-up menu.

Select the Annotation | Line Width... menu item.

The viewer opens the Line Width dialog.  To select a standard line width, you can either click on the Standard Widths list box and then click on the width you want, or you can use the cursor keys to change the width without clicking at all.

If you want to specify a custom value, click in the Custom Width edit field and enter a numeric value from 1 to 99. To close the dialog and apply the changes you’ve made, click on OK. To close the dialog without saving or applying any changes you’ve made, click on Cancel.


Changing the Text Attributes

The viewer allows you to specify a variety of settings for text objects, including the font, the font size. You can also specify the text color and other attributes.

If you only want to change the color used to display the text to another standard color, you’ll probably find the viewer’s Quick Select Line most convenient. Click on the Text Color field, then click on the color you want. Your selection is applied immediately.

If you want to specify a custom color, you’ll need to open the Text Color dialog. You can do so in one of two ways:

Right click on the Quick Select Line’s Text Color field. This is equivalent to clicking on the Text Color field and selecting the
-Custom- item from the pop-up list.

Right click on the text object and select the Text Color... menu item from the pop-up menu.

Select the Annotation | Text Attributes | Text Color... menu item.

The viewer opens the Text Color dialog.  You can select a standard text color by clicking on the Standard Colors list box, then clicking on the value you want. If you want to specify a custom color, you can either enter its Red, Green and Blue values in the appropriate edit fields, or click on the Custom... edit field to choose it from a color selection dialog.

To close the Text Color dialog and apply the changes you’ve made, click on OK. To close the dialog without saving or applying any changes you’ve made, click on Cancel.

If you want to change the font, character size and attribute used to display a text object, you’ll need to open the Font dialog. To do so, click on the right-most segment of the Quick Select Line, or select the Annotation | Text Attributes | Font menu item:

Font

The available vector fonts reported by Windows appear in the Font list box. You can select and preview other fonts by scrolling through the list and highlighting them.

Font Style

Some fonts contain more than one style. These will be displayed in the Font Style list box. You can select or preview a font style by highlighting in the list.

Size

To change the size of the displayed text, select the value from the Size list by highlighting it.

Strikeout

Enable the Strikeout check box to make the text appear to be "crossed out." For example, "Strikeout."

Underline

Enable the Underline check box to underscore the text. For example, "Underline."

Color

To change the color of the displayed text, click on the Color list box’s down arrow, and select the new color by clicking on it.

Sample

The Sample window displays an example of the currently selected font, including any styles, sizes, effects or colors you’ve chosen.

Click on the OK button to close the Font dialog and accept the current settings, including any changes you’ve made. If you don’t want to keep the changes you’ve made, you can click on Cancel to close the dialog.


Character

A single symbol such as a a plus sign, or a letter from the alphabet.


Chat

An interactive, real-time, text based electronic conversation using computers. The display typically shows out-going characters as well as the incoming response.


Checking Your Spelling

The QWK Mail Viewer includes an integrated spelling checker that you can use to check your messages before you save them!

You can check the spelling of a message at any time during composition. To display the Spelling Checker dialog, select Messages | Check Spelling or click on the Check Spelling Action Bar button. The spell checker immediately begins checking the current message, and it will stop at the first word it encounters that’s not included in either the default dictionary or the user-defined dictionary.

If an unknown word is found, the checker displays it in the edit field at the top of the Spelling Checker dialog. In the scrolling list below, the checker provides possible correct spellings for the unknown word. If one of these spellings is correct, click on the word to highlight it and then click on the Change button to substitute it for the misspelled word. If this is a misspelling that’s likely to occur again within the message text, click on the Change All button to correct all occurrences of the misspelled word with the correct spelling.

If the checker highlights an unknown word that’s actually spelled correctly, click on the Ignore button to continue to the next unknown word without changing the spelling. If this is a word that’s likely to occur again within the message text, click on the Ignore All button to mark all occurrences of the unknown word as correct. The viewer’s spelling checker also provides a user-defined dictionary that can hold words you use often in your messages, such as the name of a BBS or a particular program. To add the unknown word in the edit field to your user-defined dictionary, click on the Add to User Dict button.

The spelling checker will alert you with a message once you’ve checked the entire text. Click on Exit to close the spelling checker window.


Checksum

A mathematical process used at the receiving end of a data transfer to check each packet of data for errors.


Choosing Essential Page Elements

While you can put practically anything you’d like on a cover sheet, there are some features that nearly all fax covers have in common. These include:

Company Name

A text field containing a corporate name or a personalized title that uniquely identifies the sender.

Company Logo

Usually a graphic image that represents your corporate or business identity. The Company Name and Logo are often unified graphic elements that can be imported into the cover sheet page as a single element.

Address Information

Text fields that tell the fax recipient how to reach you. Voice and fax numbers are commonly included, as well as data numbers where appropriate. Other information such as an on-line ID for CompuServe or a mailing address may be desirable as well.

Fax To/Fax From Information

Text fields detailing sender and recipient data, fax phone numbers, time and date stamps and memo fields. These fields are considered standard for most cover sheets.

Indeed, some of these fields may be required by law, depending on the fax header settings you’ve specified in the Fax, Fax Options, Fax Header panel in Setup. For more information, see The Telephone Consumer Protection Act.

The Cover Sheet Editor provides these text fields as predefined selections on the Objects | Variable Text menu, and Procomm Plus automatically updates their values with information from Setup, the Connection Directory, or the Send Fax dialog as appropriate.

Number of Pages

A text field, reporting the total number of pages contained in the fax, including the cover sheet itself. It is common to most cover sheets, and can help the fax recipient determine whether the entire fax was received properly.

These are the basic features of a cover page. However, other items can be added to create visual impact, or to make the cover sheet attractive. For example, you might use boxes to call attention to the parts of a fax you want to emphasize.


Class1

A fax modem standard that stipulates the interactions between the modem and the PC. Class1 fax modems rely on the software to implement most of the fax transmission.


Class2

A fax modem standard that stipulates the interactions between the modem and the PC. Class2 fax modems rely on the modem to implement most of the fax transmission.


Class2.0

A fax standard similar to Class2, but which has not been widely adopted by the industry and is not supported by Procomm Plus.


Client

In a dialog between computers, the client computer accesses shared information or services from a server or host computer. Data and resources on the client cannot be accessed by another client.

The software on the calling machine may also be referred to as a client, as in FTP Client and Telnet Client.

See also Client/Server. See also Peer-to-Peer.


Client / Server

A many-to-one relationship between computers where a server provides client computers with shared resources. Communications servers give PCs access to modems. There are print servers, file servers, and Web servers, to name a few.

The Client must have software that can communicate with the specific type of server in order to be able to access the information. An example of this would be using FTP client software to access an FTP server.


Clipboard

A buffer that Windows reserves so you can move or copy data from one place to another within an application, or between applications. Typical terminology when dealing with the Clipboard is to cut or copy data to the Clipboard, and paste data from the Clipboard. All previous data is lost from the Clipboard when new data is cut or copied to it, or when you exit Windows.

See File Clipboard.


Closing and Deleting QWK Packets

Once you’ve read and replied to all the messages in a QWK packet, you can close the packet by selecting File | Close Window or by clicking on the Close Window Action Bar button. Depending on your configuration, the viewer may display a dialog asking whether you’d like to delete the packet. Click on Yes to delete the packet or No to close the window without deleting the packet.

You can also delete a packet without opening it. To delete a packet, select File | Delete Packet. The viewer displays the Delete Packet dialog.

The File Name pattern defaults to the standard QWK mail extension of .q??. You can specify a different pattern for your search by typing it in the File Name field and pressing [image], or by clicking on the List Files of Type list box to select one of the preconfigured file types.

When you’ve located the file you want to delete, highlight it with the mouse or cursor bar, then click on the OK button to delete it and close the dialog.


Command Line Options

Procomm Plus's command line parameter and arguments are fully discussed in the Command Line Options topic in pw4asp.hlp.  If this link does not work or if you’re unable to locate pw4asp.hlp, the ASPECT help file may not have been installed. Run Procomm Plus’s installation program, and use the Custom Installation feature to install the ASPECT help file.


Common Menu Items and Action Bar Buttons

   Action Bar     Menu | Item          Description
      Button

The following menu items and Action Bar buttons are common to all of the Procomm Plus communication windows.

	File | Create Connection Directory...	Creates a new, untitled Connection Directory file.
	File | Open Connection Directory...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, where you can select an existing Connection Directory file to be loaded for use. See the Connection Directory for more details.
	File |  Connection Directory...	Opens the Connection Directory and displays the currently-loaded .dir file. See the Connection Directory for more details.
	File |  Connection Log...	Opens a dialog where you can view records of your Data- and Fax-class sessions initiated through the Connection Directory. For more information, see Viewing the Connection Log.
	File | Exit	Closes all open data files, closes the Terminal window and returns you to Windows. If a carrier signal is detected on the active COM port, or if you have a script executing, you’ll be prompted to confirm your request.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility, where you can configure the operating characteristics of Procomm Plus. Setup is described in detail in The Setup Utility.
	Setup | System	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Systems group in Setup. See the The System Settings for more information.
	Setup | Data	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Data group in Setup. See The Data Settings for more information.
	Setup | Fax	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Fax group in Setup. See The Fax Settings for more information.
	Setup | Internet	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Internet group in Setup. See The Internet Settings for more information.
	Setup |  Action Bars...	Opens the Load Action Bars dialog, where you can specify the Action Bar files you want to use. See Selecting Action Bars.
	Setup | Large Action Bars	Toggles the display of large or small Action Bar icon buttons.
	Setup | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar "bubble help" labels. If this menu item is checked or enabled, the Terminal window will also display brief help information on the Status Line when the mouse cursor is left motionless over an Action Bar button for one second. The ToolTips setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup | Status Line	Toggles the display of the Terminal window Status Line. See The Status Line for more information. The Status Line setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Tools | Send a Fax...	Opens the Send a Fax wizard, which will guide you through the steps required to send a fax document.  If wizards have been disabled, the Send a Fax dialog is displayed instead.
	Tools | Image Viewer	Opens the Image Viewer, where you can select and view images in several formats. See The Image Viewer for more information.
	Tools | Scheduler	Opens the Scheduler, where you can set Procomm Plus to perform functions automatically at a predetermined time. For more information, see The Scheduler.
	Tools |  Action Bar Editor	Opens the Action Bar Editor, where you can design your own Action Bars for use in the Terminal window. See The Action Bar Editor for more information.
	Tools |  QWK Mail Viewer	Opens the QWKMail Viewer, where you can view and reply to messages you’ve retrieved from a BBS. For a detailed discussion, see The QWKMail Viewer.
	Tools | Caller ID Directory Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor, where you can add, modify or delete Caller IDs from the current database. See The Caller ID Directory Editor for more information.
	Tools | Fax Status	Opens the Fax Status utility, where you can monitor the status of your fax connection(s) and watch the progress of on-going fax activity. See The Fax Status Utility for more information.
	Tools |  Fax Manager	Opens the Fax Manager, which you can use to organize faxes you've received or sent, as well as your cover sheets. See The Fax Manager for more information.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, which you can use to view, annotate and print faxes you’ve received or sent. See The Fax Viewer for more information.
	Tools | Fax Cover Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor, where you can create your own cover sheets, or modify those included with Procomm Plus. For more information, see The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Tools |  ASPECT Editor	Opens the ASPECT Editor, which you can use to create, view or modify text files as well as ASPECT source files. See The ASPECT Editor for more information.
	Tools |  Dialog Editor	Opens the Dialog Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom dialog boxes for your ASPECT scripts. See The Dialog Editor for more information.
	Tools | User  Window Editor	Opens the User Window Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom screens for your ASPECT scripts. See The User Window Editor for more information.
	Tools |  Meta Key Editor...	Opens the Meta Key Editor, where you can configure the actions performed by the Terminal window’s forty available Meta Key combinations. The keyboard shortcut is [image] [image]. For more information, see The Meta Key Editor.
	Tools |  Keyboard Editor...	Opens the Keyboard Editor, where you can specify the sequences sent or actions performed by the current emulation’s mappable keys. The keyboard shortcut is [image] [image]. For more information, see The Keyboard Editor.
	Tools | Translate Table Editor...	Opens the Translate Table Editor, where you can choose to modify or filter the characters sent or received by the current emulation. See The Translate Table Editor for more information.
	Window |  Change Window	Allows you to change the current window to one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, the Web Browser , the Telnet window, the FTP Client, Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, the Web Browser , the Telnet window, the FTP Client or the Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window | 1, 2, 3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottoem of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help | Wizards	Opens the Procomm Plus Wizard Manager dialog, where you can launch wizards to help perform common tasks within Procomm Plus.
	Help | Contents	Open on-line help to the Contents topic.
	Help | Search  for Help on...	Opens on-line help, and activates the Search dialog.
	Help |  Script Reference	Opens ASPECT on-line help.
	Help | Search  for Script Topic	Opens ASPECT on-line help and acitvates the Search dialog.
	Help | How to use Help	Opens the How to Use Help on-line help file.
Common ASPECT Menu Items and Action Bar Buttons

These menu items and Action Bar buttons are common to the communication windows that support ASPECT scripts.

	Scripts |  Start Script	Executes the ASPECT script displayed in the Action Bar’s Script File list box. If a script is already running, you can click on this icon to stop it. The icon is animated whenever a script is running. Alt-Period is the keyboard equivalent.
	Scripts | Run...	Opens the Run ASPECT File dialog, from which you can execute compiled scripts.  is the keyboard equivalent. For more information, see Running Scripts.
	Scripts |  Compile/Edit... Scripts | Start Recorder	Opens the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog, from which you can create, edit, compile and execute scripts. For more information, see Compiling Scripts.  is the keyboard equivalent. Starts the Script Recorder, which reads a host system’s prompts and your responses, and uses them to generate simple ASPECT scripts.  If the Script Recorder is running, the menu item changes to Stop Recorder; select it to stop the recorder. For more information, see The Script Recorder.


Common Questions and Answers

Faxing

The Internet & TCP/IP

The Terminal Window

Dialing

General Problems and Questions


Common Terminal Options

To view or modify the settings for an emulation, click on the Data, Terminal Options buttons, then select the emulation from the Current Terminal list to display the settings panel. For example, the following figure displays the settings panel with the Current Terminal set to ANSI BBS:

Terminal update

This setting determines how the incoming data is written to the Terminal display. By default, Terminal update is set to Fast, meaning that incoming data is buffered or held until a sizeable block of data can be written in a single burst. This setting minimizes scrolling. If Fast is used in conjunction with the Keep cursor in view option, the Terminal display refreshes and scrolls in a single jump, after only a quarter-second delay in the flow of data.

The Incremental setting causes each incoming character to be displayed as it’s received. This setting guarantees that you’ll see each character immediately. If the Keep cursor in view option is enabled, the window scrolls one character at a time, as necessary, to "follow" the current character.

The Block setting causes groups of characters received together to be written together in short bursts. If the Keep cursor in view option is enabled, the Terminal display continuously scrolls vertically as needed, and scrolls horizontally after every quarter-second delay in the received data flow to track the cursor.

Terminal scroll method

This setting determines how the Terminal display is updated with new information.

If you’re using a 486 or higher processor, use the Repaint window setting. This causes the display to be refreshed by repainting instead of scrolling, which is much faster. This is the default setting.

If you’re using a slower processor, or if your machine is equipped with a "fast" co-processor graphics adapter, use the Normal Scroll method.

Terminal keyboard file

Procomm Plus includes keyboard mapping files for each of the emulations it supports. By default, the name of the keyboard mapping selected in the Terminal keyboard file list box should closely match the Current Terminal name.

For example, if you’ve selected the ANSI BBS emulation in the Current Terminal list box, the default selected keyboard file is ANSIBBS. You can select a different keyboard file by clicking on the Terminal keyboard file list box.

A Terminal keyboard file that appears in Setup in all uppercase, like ANSIBBS, is a default keyboard mapping for the emulation it describes. Procomm Plus’s default keyboard mappings cannot be modified or removed, but you can use them to create your own custom mappings.

You can modify the current keyboard mapping by clicking on Edit Keyboard File... to open the Keyboard Editor. For a discussion of the editor see The Keyboard Editor. For a step-by-step example of mapping a single key see Step-by-Step: Mapping a Key.

Tables describing the various keyboard mappings, including the sequences they generate and the keys they represent are available within Keyboard Mappings. You can also find an emulation's keyboard mapping by searching for the terminal emulation name!

Enquiry type

This setting determines how the emulation responds to a [image] [image] or ENQ(uiry) character sent by the host system. If set to Off, the ENQ character is treated as any other character. If On, the program responds by sending the text you specify in the Enquiry response field. This is often called an "answer back" message, and it can contain any ASCII characters including control characters.

If Enquiry type is set to CIS B+, the Terminal window will respond to an ENQ character by initiating the handshake procedure for a CIS-B+ protocol file transfer. The CIS B+ setting should only be used for on-line sessions with CompuServe.

The Vidtex emulation is highly recommended for use with CompuServe. It was designed specifically for CompuServe, and defaults to an Enquiry type of CIS B+. A setting of CIS B+, allows the CompuServe system to automatically initiate CIS-B+ file transfers.

The default Enquiry type for most emulations is Off.

Scrollback pages

This field specifies the number of screens the emulation will retain in the Scrollback Buffer. The default number is 100. You can set this value as high as 1300, but depending on the emulation, the terminal size and the memory available on your system, the actual number of pages allocated for the Scrollback Buffer may be different.

Terminal size

These two drop down list boxes specify the size of the Terminal display area in Rows and Columns. The Rows field defaults to 24 for most emulations. You can either click on the list to select a standard value, or enter a value from the keyboard. The Columns field defaults to 80, but can also be set to 132 in some emulations.

Keep cursor in view

If the Terminal workspace is smaller than the logical Terminal display, this setting determines how incoming data is displayed.

By default, Keep cursor in view is enabled, meaning that the Terminal window will scroll automatically to ensure that the cursor is kept in view at all times. Depending on the size of your Terminal window and the distance the cursor moves, this can slow down the display of data considerably. Repositioning also occurs when you leave Scrollback mode or resize the Terminal window, the "view port" will shift to keep the cursor in view.

If you like to keep a small Terminal window visible as you work in other applications, enable Keep cursor in view. You’ll always see new characters as they’re received by the Terminal.

Enabling Keep cursor in view also affects the behavior of the Terminal update setting. See Terminal update for more information.

If Keep cursor in view is disabled, you’ll have to scroll the Terminal display manually with the scroll bars. This takes an extra step on your part, but it can be much faster. Manual scrolling is often preferable if your Terminal workspace is only slightly smaller than the logical Terminal display, or if the cursor’s movement is limited by the host system to a certain screen area.

Screen scroll

This setting determines the emulation’s response to new data when the cursor is in the last line of the Terminal display. If Screen scroll is enabled, the display is shifted up one line and the new line appears at the bottom of the display. If disabled, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the last line and the new line overwrites existing information. The default Screen scroll setting varies with the emulation selected.

Strip bit 8

This setting determines whether the emulation will remove the 8th or high bit from all received characters. The default setting varies with the emulation selected.

Destructive backspace

This setting determines the emulation’s response to a backspace character, ASCII decimal 8. If Destructive backspace is enabled, a received backspace character moves the cursor to the left and deletes the character displayed there. If disabled, a received backspace character moves the cursor to the left, but does not delete the character. The default setting varies with the selected emulation.

Tab stops every [ ] positions

This setting determines the number of spaces the cursor will move in response to a tab character. By default, the emulation’s tab stops are eight spaces apart. However, some emulations allow a host system to reset tab stop settings while on-line.

Line wrap

This setting determines the emulation’s response if the host system sends a line that’s longer than the column width of the logical Terminal display. If Line wrap is enabled, the excess characters will be displayed on the next line. Otherwise, the emulation will not wrap the excess characters to the next line. Instead, the additional characters simply overwrite the last character in the current line.

The default Line wrap setting varies, depending on the selected emulation.

Incoming CR to CR/LF

If this setting is enabled, a carriage return received by the emulation will be interpreted as a carriage return/line feed pair. If Incoming CR to CR/LF is disabled, carriage returns will not be modified.

This setting only affects carriage returns received by the emulation. Carriage returns received during an ASCII file transfer are translated according to the protocol settings. See ASCII Protocol Options for more information.

Some host systems require the emulation to interpret a carriage return as a carriage return/line feed pair to properly format the screen. If the cursor doesn’t move to the next line when a line is full, incorrectly causing previous data to be overwritten, enable this setting.

If the text in the Terminal display seems double-spaced, disable the option.

Block cursor

This setting determines the character used as a cursor in the Terminal display. If enabled, the cursor is a square block. Otherwise, the cursor is displayed as an underline character.

Disable host printing

This setting determines the emulation’s response to a printer command sequence received from the host system. If enabled, printer commands are ignored by the emulation. Otherwise, the emulation responds to printer commands received from the host. By default, the emulation responds to host printer commands.

Raw print mode

If this setting is enabled, print jobs initiated by the host system are directed to the selected printer in a "raw" format, without any emulation handling. This setting is disabled by default.


Common Window Elements

There are several elements that are common to all of the modules, and understanding their purposes will help you become familiar with the Procomm Plus interface as a whole. The common elements include:

•	The program control area.

•	The program’s menu bar.

•	The Action Bar.

•	The status line.

•	The communication display area.

From within Windows, open the Procomm Plus Start menu group and double click on the Procomm Plus Terminal icon.

After it displays its title screen, Procomm Plus places you in the Terminal window, where the data you type and the characters you receive are displayed.

If you’re using a modem, you may see some characters displayed in the window shortly after Procomm Plus loads. These are the modem commands being transmitted to configure your modem for use.

Learn more about Procomm Plus's common window elements in the following topics:

The Program Control Area

The Title Bar

The Menu Bar

The Action Bar®

The Status Line


Common Window Elements See Also
Common Window Elements

The Program Control Area

The Title Bar

The Menu Bar

The Action Bar®

The Status Line


Communications

Getting data from one computer to another by modem, network, or direct connection.


Communications API

Software that allows a communications application to interface with a network. Windows applications use Winsock to interface with a TCP/IP network stack. NASI, Int-14, and E-Bios are all APIs used by network-aware communication applications. These APIs access network modems by establishing a dialog between the workstation and communications server.

See also API.


Compile

To take program source code that is in text form, readable by humans, and change it into instructions designed for computers to read. Programs and scripts must be compiled before they can run.


Compiling Scripts

As we mentioned previously, you can use the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog to select and compile or execute your scripts. However, the dialog also allows you to configure the ASPECT Compiler and manage your script files! Press [image] [image] or click on the Compile/Edit button to open the dialog.

Notes

When you select a script in the File Name list box, whether they’re compiled or not, Procomm Plus reads the first line of the file. If the first line is a comment beginning with a semicolon, Procomm Plus displays the line as a note or comment for that script. For example, if the first line of a script read:

; Revision 1.0 of notes.was, a script example

that text would appear in the Notes field.

Compile

When you click on Compile, the ASPECT Compiler is launched to process the script file you’ve selected in the File Name list box. If the compile is successful, a .wax file is created. Otherwise, the compiler window will display the error(s) which caused the failure, allowing you to correct the problems and retry the compile.

Compile and Run

The Compile and Run button launches the ASPECT Compiler, which processes your script just as it does when the Compile button is pressed. However, if the compile is successful, the compiler window closes and the newly-generated .wax file is immediately executed.

Compile Options...

Click on this button to open the ASPECT Compiler Options dialog, where you can specify how the compiler should process your script files. For more information on this dialog and the settings it controls, see Debugging Options.

New

Click on this button to open the editor you’ve specified in the Editor name & path field in the System, System Options panel in Setup with a new, untitled file. By default, the ASPECT Editor is launched.

Edit

Click on this button to load the file selected in the File Name list box into the editor you’ve specified in the Editor name & path field in the System, System Options panel in Setup. By default, the ASPECT Editor is launched to open the file you’ve selected.

Delete

Click on this button to delete the file selected in the File Name list box. Procomm Plus prompts to confirm before deleting the file.

Exit

Click on this button to close the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog and return to the Terminal window.

For more information on writing, compiling and running script files, please refer to the ASPECT Script on-line help system.


Completing the Connection

Once Procomm Plus has established a connection with your host or system, it returns you to the Terminal window and reports the connect message on the status line. If you can see what you’re typing and what the host or system is sending to you, you’re on-line!

What happens next depends on the type of system or host you’ve called:

•	A bulletin board system or BBS.

BBSs typically begin sending logon prompts or "marquee screens" as soon as you’ve connected. If you don’t see incoming data within a few seconds, press [image] once or twice until you get a response. On some systems, you may need to use [image] instead, or press [image] once or twice.

When you’re logging on to a BBS for the first time, read the opening screens carefully. If the BBS has special information available for new callers, the system operator or "sysop" will often mention it as you’re logging on!

•	Another personal computer, running Procomm Plus or another software communications package.

If the other system is running Procomm Plus’s Host script, you’ll receive its logon prompts as soon as you’ve connected. If you’re connected to the other system via a null modem cable, Host will send its logon prompts as soon as you’ve selected the COM port.

For more information about the Host script, see Host, the BBS Script.

•	A mainframe or minicomputer host system.

Mainframe and minicomputer host systems typically prompt with a fairly cryptic prompt once you’ve connected, and the actual procedure varies widely between systems. If you have questions about connecting or logging in, you’ll need to ask the host’s administrator or help desk for assistance.

•	An information service, such as CompuServe or GEnie.

Information services typically begin prompting for your logon id and password as soon as you’ve connected. Some systems, however, require you to press special key sequences to signal the system. For example, to request a logon prompt for the CompuServe Information Service, you’ll need to press [image] [image] after Procomm Plus has connected.

If you have a problem connecting to an information service, you’ll need to check its user guide, or call its help line for assistance.

If you’re able to complete the logon procedure, you’re given access to the system. If your port settings don't match those used by the host or system, however, you may need to make an adjustment:

Doubled characters.

If each character you type appears twice, lliikkee tthhiiss, or if they do not appear at all, click on the Action Bar’s Setup button, or select the Setup | Setup... menu item to open Setup. Click on the Data, Port Settings buttons. If you have the Quick Select Line displayed at the bottom of the Terminal window, you can click with the right mouse button on the port settings field to go directly to the Data, Port Settings panel in Setup.

Toggle the Duplex setting. For example, if it’s currently set to Full duplex, then click on Half duplex, and vice versa. Click on OK to accept the new Duplex setting.

Line spacing problems.

If the cursor does not move to the next line when a line is full, or when you press [image], or if text is displayed "double-spaced," click on the Action Bar’s Setup button, or select the Setup | Setup... menu item to open Setup. Click on the Data, Terminal Options buttons, then toggle the Incoming CR to CR/LF option. Click on OK to accept the new setting.

Garbled characters.

If some of the data from the other computer looks garbled, or it appears in unexpected characters, check the port settings display in the Quick Select Line. If it shows N81, click on the field, and select E71. If it shows E71, click on the field and select N81. If you don’t have the Quick Select Line displayed at the bottom of the Terminal window, you’ll need to open the Data, Port Settings panel in Setup to select the new settings.


Compressed Files

Files that have been encoded so that they will take up less space. Compressed files must be decompressed before they can be executed or read.


CompuServe

Compuserve Information Service. A commercial service that offers public forums, personal electronic mail, and files provided by a wide range of sources. Quarterdeck has a forum on CompuServe offering technical support, and informative files about PC communications.


CompuServe CIS-B+ Protocol Options

The CIS-B+ protocol is used exclusively with the CompuServe Information Service. For a brief discussion of the protocol, see The CIS B+ Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select CIS-B+ in the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the CIS-B+ protocol options.

Download Options

The following options allow you to control the behavior of a CIS-B+ download:

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase CIS-B+ downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete CIS-B+ downloads are not deleted.

Existing File Action

Settings in this field allow you to specify how Procomm Plus will handle filename "collisions," which occur when an incoming file has the same name as an existing file in the download target directory.

Use CIS-B file resume

Select this setting if you want an incoming file that has the same name as an existing file to be treated as a resumed transfer. As the default setting, it is quite useful if you’re restarting a file download that had previously failed for some reason.

Overwrite existing file

Select this setting if you want a downloaded file to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename.

Rename incoming file

Select this setting if you want an incoming file name to be modified to protect a preexisting file.

For example, if you downloaded a file named readme.txt, but a readme.txt file already existed in the download directory, the incoming file would be saved as readme.tx1. If readme.tx1 already existed, the incoming file would be saved as readme.tx2, and so on.


Configuring Graphical Objects

You can use three different kinds of graphical objects in your cover sheets. The first is a simple Box object, drawn by the editor, that is helpful in formatting or attractively framing the various parts of a cover sheet. Box objects are similar in appearance to the borders that can be drawn around text objects. For more information, see Box Objects.

The second graphical object is the Bitmap object, which allows you to feature .bmp Window graphics files in your cover sheet. Since many Windows draw and paint programs can create .bmp files, or even convert other image types to .bmp, the variety of images you can place in a cover sheet is almost unlimited! For more information, see Bitmap Objects.

The Procomm Plus GIF Viewer can convert .gif files to .bmp format.

The final graphical object, the Metafile object, supports the placement of Windows metafiles, or .wmf file graphics. This file type is commonly generated by Windows draw programs, and many clipart or graphic libraries are available in .wmf format. For more information, see Metafile Objects.

Procomm Plus also includes a selection of .wmf graphics that are used in the standard cover sheet files. You can find them in the same directory as the .cvr files. These graphics are royalty-free, so you can use them anywhere you like on your cover sheets.


Configuring Graphical Objects See Also
Configuring Graphical Objects

Box Objects.

Bitmap Objects.

Metafile Objects.


Configuring Text Objects

Cover sheets can contain two different types of text objects. One type, simply called Text, is used to place "free form" text that you edit within the Cover Sheet Editor. Simple Text objects are static, meaning the text they contain does not change when the cover sheet is used within a generated fax. As you modify the contents of a Text object, its value will be displayed in the editor.

The second type, called Variable Text, is displayed by the editor as "dummy" or substitute text. The actual information used in the cover sheet is taken from the appropriate fields in a Connection Directory entry, within Setup, or within the Send Fax dialog at the time the fax is actually generated. You cannot modify the contents of a Variable Text object within the editor.

For more information, see the following topics:

Simple Text Objects

Variable Text Objects

Using the Font Dialog


Configuring Text Objects See Also
Configuring Text Objects

Simple Text Objects

Variable Text Objects

Using the Font Dialog


Configuring the ASPECT Editor

The ASPECT Editor’s default settings were selected to be compatible with Windows Notepad. However, depending on the kinds of text files you work on with the editor, you may want to take advantage of its other options. For example, if you’re working on source files for ASPECT or other programming languages, you may want to change the way the editor handles tab characters.

Select the File | Preferences command to display the Preferences dialog.

The Preferences item only appears on the File menu if you have at least one document window open.

Startup Group

The options in the Startup group determine the features the ASPECT Editor displays, and whether the editor creates a new document window whenever you run it:

New file at startup

Enable this check box if you’d like the ASPECT Editor to open an untitled document window automatically when it first loads. If this check box is disabled, you’ll have to manually load an existing file or create a new one.

Show Action Bar

This check box controls the display of the editor’s Action Bar at start-up. Turning off the Action Bar allows the editor to display additional lines of text.

You can toggle the Action Bar from within the editor at any time by selecting Window | Action Bar from the menus.

Large Icons

Enable this check box to display the editor’s large Action Bar icon buttons. Turning off the large icon buttons on the Action Bar allows the editor to display additional icon buttons without scrolling.

You can toggle the button size from within the editor at any time by selecting Window | Large Action Bar from the menus.

ToolTips

This check box controls the display of the Action Bar help text when the editor is first loaded. You can toggle the help text from within the editor by selecting Window | ToolTips from the menus.

Options Group

The settings in the Options group determine the editor’s handling of text you type, and its response to the [image] key:

Insert Mode.

Enable this check box if you’d like the ASPECT Editor to insert characters you type at the cursor position. If the Insert Mode check box is disabled, characters you type will overwrite existing characters in the document.

You can toggle insert mode from within the editor by pressing the Insert key; the fourth status line field reports "INS" if insert is on or "OVR" if it’s off.

Large Cursor.

This check box controls the size of the editor’s cursor. The larger cursor may be easier to see if you’re using the editor on a laptop. If the check box is enabled, a large block cursor is displayed. Otherwise, the cursor is a vertical line.

Auto Indent

This check box determines the editor’s response to the [image] key. If it’s enabled, the editor responds to the [image] key by placing the cursor on a new line beneath the first non-space or non-tab character in the previous line. If Auto Indent is disabled, the cursor always returns to the beginning of the new line.

The Auto Indent feature can be a great convenience if you’re writing ASPECT scripts or other kinds of programming source code.

Spacing Group

The options in the Spacing group determine how the editor handles tab characters in a file:

Tab Size.

This edit field determines how many character spaces the ASPECT Editor inserts each time you press the [image] key. The default is 8 spaces, but you can specify any value from 0 to 80, inclusive.

Convert Tabs to Spaces.

If this check box is enabled, the ASPECT Editor saves files without tab characters by substituting spaces for each tab character. The number of spaces substituted for each tab character are determined by the Tab Size setting.

Right Mouse Button Group

The options in the Right Mouse Button group determine the ASPECT Editor’s response to a right mouse button click:

Nothing.

Select this option button to have the ASPECT Editor ignore the right mouse button.

Topic Search

Select this option button if you want the right mouse button to display the ASPECT on-line help topic for the word under the mouse cursor.

Goto Line.

Select this option button if you want the right mouse button to bring up the Goto Line dialog, where you can specify a line number in the current file.

Next Window.

Select this option button to have the right mouse button move the cursor and the active focus to the next open file. This is a convenient choice if you usually edit several files at once.

Screen Font... Button

You can also select the screen font used by the editor to display text by clicking on Screen Font. See "Setting the ASPECT Editor's Screen Font" for more information.


Configuring the QWK Mail Viewer

The QWK Mail Viewer’s Setup dialog allows you to configure the wide variety of options available in the viewer. To open the Setup dialog, select the Setup menu item and select one of the six groups of settings. Each settings group is associated with a Setup menu item in the viewer; to open the dialog, select one of the items:

General

Files

Paths

Replies

Filters

Packers


Connect Strings

See Result Codes.


Connecting "On the Fly"

You can start some of Procomm Plus’s Internet modes without establishing an Internet connection. If you are in one of these Internet applications, and attempt to connect to an Internet address, Procomm Plus will initiate the dialing procedure to connect and log you into the service provider. It will use the currently specified Current Internet Connection option set in the Setup | Internet | Internet Connection panel. If this field is set to external network, you will receive an error message stating that winsock.dll is not loaded.


Connecting Manually

If you want to make a single connection to a host system or location that's not in your Connection Directory, select the Connect | Manual Connect... menu item. If the Data-, Fax- or Voice-class is selected when you request a manual connection, you’re prompted to enter the telephone number you want to dial. See Data, Fax, and Voice Manual Connections for more information.

If the Telnet-, FTP- or Web-class is selected when you request a manual connection, you’re prompted to enter the host name or IP address you want to use. See Telnet, FTP, and Web Manual Connections for more information.

If the Mail-class is selected when you request a manual connection, Procomm Plus prompts you for the Internet mail address you want to use. See Mail Manual Connections for more information.

If the News-class is selected when you request a manual connection, Procomm Plus prompts you for thename of the newsgroup you want to use. See News Manual Connections for more information.


Connecting See Also
Connecting!

Connecting with a Data Entry

Connecting with a Fax Entry

Connecting with a Voice Entry

Connecting with a Telnet Entry

Connecting with an FTP Entry

Connecting with a Web Entry

Connecting with a Mail Entry

Connecting with a News Entry

Connecting Manually.


Connecting to Newsgroups

Depending on the news server you access, you may find the array of available newsgroups to be overwhelming. However, you'll  find that the News Reader can help you access your favorite newsgroups more efficiently, especially if you take advantage of the Connection Directory!

Once you’ve added a newsgroup to the Connection Directory, you can select it with one or two clicks on the Rapid Connect list box instead of clicking through the various levels of folders in the Folders tree. After you’ve selected the newsgroup from the Rapid Connect list box, you’re only one click away from loading the newsgroup’s headers and exploring the latest articles.

The News Reader even makes it easy for you to add a newsgroup to the Connection Directory by providing News | Add Group to Connection Directory menu items in each of its windows.

When you select a News entry from the Rapid Connect list box, the News Reader highlights and opens the newsgroup’s folder in the All Newsgroups tree structure. You can then click on the Get New Headers Action Bar button to retrieve articles you haven't received, or select the News | Get New Headers menu item to have the News Reader retrieve the new articles.  You can also select the News | Get All Headers menu item to have the News Reader retrieve all headers in the current group.

Once it’s retrieved the article headers, the News Reader adds the newsgroup to the Visited Newsgroup folder, and displays the article headers in the header list.


Connecting to Saved Web Page Addresses

Soon you will find that you have quite a collection of Web sites that you enjoy visiting. You may connect to any of these Web sites easily by selecting them from the Rapid Connect -Web drop down list box, or by opening up the Connection Directory, selecting the desired entry, and then clicking the Connect button.


Connecting to an FTP Host

Before you can successfully connect to an FTP host, you must have an Internet or network connection. You can either make a dial-up connection with an Internet Service Provider or connect using network equipment, but this link must be preconfigured before you attempt to connect to an FTP host.

For more information, see Connecting to the Internet.

Whether you select an entry from the Connection Directory or manually connect, you will need the address of the specific FTP host. You will also need a personal user ID and password. If you're using the Connection Directory you will only need to supply that information once; subsequent the logons will be automatic.

For step-by-step instructions on creating a complete FTP entry in the Connection Directory, see Step-by-Step: Adding an FTP-class Entry.

You can initiate an FTP connection attempt from within Procomm Plus in one of three ways:

By double clicking an FTP entry or group in the Connection Directory, or by highlighting the entry and clicking on Connect. See Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with the Connection Directory.

By selecting an FTP entry from the Rapid Connect list. See Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with Rapid Connect.

By selecting Manual Connection from the FTP Window or from the Connection Directory and supplying an FTP address. See Step-by-Step: Connecting Manually to an FTP Host.


Connecting to the Internet

There are many different ways to connect to the Internet. The method you use to connect to the Internet depends on you Internet Service provider. Three of the most common are:

Dial-up shell connections.

Direct Internet connection.

Dial-up SLIP or PPP connections.

Once your machine has physically connected to the Internet, it creates logical connections to other systems to exchange data.

Dial-up Shell Connections

Direct Internet Connections

Dial-up SLIP or PPP Connections


Connecting with Telnet

You can initiate a Telnet connection attempt from within Procomm Plus in one of three ways:

By double clicking a Telnet entry or group in the Connection Directory, or by highlighting the entry and clicking on Connect.

By selecting a Telnet entry from the Rapid Connect list.

By selecting Manual Connection from the Connection Directory and supplying a Telnet address.

Whether you select an entry from the Connection Directory or manually connect, you will need the address of the specific Telnet host.

For step-by-step instructions on creating a complete Telnet entry in the Connection Directory, see Adding a Telnet-class Entry.


Connecting with a Voice Entry

When you attempt to connect to a Voice-class entry, the Connection Directory window closes. If it’s not already open, the Terminal window loads, then displays the Dialing progress dialog.

A Voice-class entry is dialed in the same way as a Data- or Fax-class entry. Procomm Plus’s only direct involvement in a voice call is to dial the number. Once the phone is ringing, you’re prompted to pick up the telephone handset and press OK to close the dialog.

Although you can select multiple Voice-class entries, only the first entry you selected will be dialed. Procomm Plus cannot queue voice calls because it has no way of detecting when you’ve hung up the handset!


Connecting with a Data Entry

When you attempt to connect to a Data-class entry, the Connection Directory window closes. If it’s not already active, the Terminal window loads and prepares for the session. If you selected a single entry, see Dialing Single Data Entries. If you selected multiple entries, the Dialing Queue dialog opens and begins processing your selections:

The entries you selected appear in the Name / Number list box in the upper left corner of the dialog, in the order in which they appeared in the Connection Directory. The Dialing Queue repeatedly dials the selected entries until either a connection is made or the number of dialing attempts set in the Data, Dialing Options, General panel in Setup is reached.

The entry being dialed is always at the top of the list; its connection statistics and assigned ASPECT script are shown in the Current Call group box to the right of the list. The modem or connection used for the dialing attempt to the entry is shown in the dialog’s title bar.

If a dialing attempt fails, the entry is moved to the bottom of the list and the next entry is dialed. The Current Call Progress text box indicates the command(s) sent to your modem or connection, and any information returned from it in the current dialing attempt, while the Statistics group box displays information about the overall progress of the Dialing Queue.

Beneath the Current Call Progress text box are two important option buttons. By default, once Procomm Plus has established a connection with one of the entries, it passes control to the Terminal window and performs no other processing. If you select the Call until connected with all entries option button, control passes to the Terminal window, but Procomm Plus monitors the connection continuously. After you terminate the connection the Dialing Queue dialog opens to continue processing your selections.

Four command buttons at the bottom of the Dialing Queue dialog allow you to control the processing of the Name / Number list:

Restart

Click on this button to terminate the current dialing attempt and restart the processing of the queued entries without affecting the contents of the Name / Number list.

Remove

Click on this button to terminate the current dialing attempt and remove the current entry from the Name / Number list. The remainder of the queue is processed normally.

If removing an entry leaves only one entry in the queue, the Dialing Queue dialog is closed and the final entry is processed in the dialing progress dialog, as shown in Dialing Single Data Entries.

Skip

Click on this button to terminate the current dialing attempt without removing the entry from the queue list. The current entry is moved to the bottom of the list, and the next entry is processed.

Cancel

Click on this button to terminate the current connection attempt and close the Dialing Queue dialog, returning control to the Terminal window.


Connecting with a Fax Entry

When you attempt to connect to a Fax-class entry, the Connection Directory window closes. The Send Fax dialog opens, allowing you to select files and to specify time, date and other options for the fax operation. For a detailed discussion of the Send Fax dialog, see The Send Fax Dialog.

After you’ve selected the files and settings and clicked on the Send button in the dialog, the Fax Status window opens and begins preparing your fax(es). For a step-by-step explanation of this process, see Step-by-Step: Faxing From the Connection Directory.


Connecting with a Mail Entry

When you select one or more Mail-class entries and click on Compose, the Connection Directory window closes. If it's not already open, the Internet Mail Client window loads and prepares for the session. It then displays the Compose Message dialog, where you can enter your message.

The entry or entries you selected are used to address your message. Each entry's individual settings are applied to the message(s) addressed to it.

When you're satisfied with your message, click on Send to continue processing it.


Connecting with a News Entry

When you attempt to connect to a News-class entry, the Connection Directory window closes. If it's not already open, the News Reader window loads and prepares for the session.

If you access the Internet through a network, or if you access it through a dial-up provider and you're already connected, Procomm Plus begins negotiating to connect to the entry you selected immediately. If you access the Internet through a dial-up provider, but you weren't connected at the time you selected the entry, Windows must establish the dial-up connection before connecting to your entry.

Although you can select multiple News-class entries, only the first entry you selected will be used in the connection attempt. Procomm Plus cannot queue News entries because it has no way of detecting when you're finished with a news group.

Once the connection to the news group specified by the Connection Directory entry is established, the entry's settings are referenced to configure the News Reader window to your preferences for the session.


Connecting with a Telnet Entry

When you attempt to connect to a Telnet-class entry, the Connection Directory window closes. If it’s not already open, the Terminal window loads and prepares for the session.

If you access the Internet through a network, or through a dial-up provider and you’re already connected, Procomm Plus begins negotiating to connect to the entry you selected immediately. If you access the Internet through a dial-up provider, but you weren’t connected at the time you selected the entry, Windows must establish the dial-up connection before negotiating the Telnet session.

Although you can select multiple Telnet-class entries, only the first entry you selected will be used in the connection attempt. Procomm Plus cannot queue Telnet entries because it has no way of detecting when you’re finished with the host!

Once the Telnet session is established, the Connection Directory entry’s settings are referenced to configure the Terminal window to your preferences for the current Telnet host.


Connecting with a Web Entry

When you attempt to connect to a Web-class entry, the Connection Directory window closes. If it’s not already open, the Web Browser window loads and prepares for the session.

If you access the Internet through a network, or if you access it through a dial-up provider and you’re already connected, Procomm Plus begins negotiating to connect to the entry you selected immediately. If you access the Internet through a dial-up provider, but you weren’t connected at the time you selected the entry, Windows must establish the dial-up connection before connecting to your entry.

Although you can select multiple Web-class entries, only the first entry you selected will be used in the connection attempt. Procomm Plus cannot queue Web entries because it has no way of detecting when you’re finished with the URL or address!

Once the connection to the URL or address specified by the Connection Directory entry is established, the entry’s settings are referenced to configure the Web Browser to your preferences for the session.


Connecting with an FTP Entry

When you attempt to connect to an FTP-class entry, the Connection Directory window closes. If it’s not already open, the FTP Client window loads and prepares for the session.

If you access the Internet through a network, or through a dial-up provider and you’re already connected, Procomm Plus begins negotiating to connect to the entry you selected immediately. If you access the Internet through a dial-up provider, but you weren’t connected at the time you selected the entry, Windows must establish the dial-up connection before negotiating the session with the FTP server.

Although you can select multiple FTP-class entries, only the first entry you selected will be used in the connection attempt. Procomm Plus cannot queue FTP entries because it has no way of detecting when you’re finished with the server!

Once the connection to the FTP server specified by the Connection Directory entry is established, the entry’s settings are referenced to configure the FTP Client window to your preferences for the session.


Connecting with the Connection Directory

You can open the Connection Directory from within any of the Procomm Plus modes, and connect to an FTP host. To access the FTP entries, select the FTP tab from within the Connection Directory. For more information, see Connecting with an FTP Entry.


Connecting!

Once you’ve created a Connection Directory entry, you can connect to it by:

•	Double clicking on it in the Entries list.

•	Selecting or highlighting the entry and clicking on the Dial, Send or Connect button.

•	Selecting the entry from a communication window’s Rapid Connect Action Bar list box.

You can also select multiple entries, groups or entries within groups for a connection attempt.

Regardless of how you initiate the connection attempt, Procomm Plus handles the entry automatically.

Connecting with a Data Entry

Connecting with a Fax Entry

Connecting with a Voice Entry

Connecting with a Telnet Entry

Connecting with an FTP Entry

Connecting with a Web Entry

Connecting with a Mail Entry

Connecting with a News Entry

For information on connecting to a location that's not in your Connection Directory, see Connecting Manually.


Connection Directory

The central location within Procomm Plus that you select a site to connect to, whether you are faxing, making Internet connections, or calling a BBS. When a mode such as Web or Data is selected in the Connection Directory, all related entries are available. The Connection Directory replaces the Dialing Directory from earlier versions of Procomm Plus.


Connection Directory Groups

The Connection Directory also allows you to arrange multiple entries into a group. Once placed in a group, the entries can be selected as a single unit for editing or for a connection attempt, while also remaining available as individual entries.

Groups are a convenient way to store related entries, or multiple entries for a single system. For example, if you regularly send a fax to several entries at once, you could place those entries in a group, and send each entry a copy of the fax by selecting the appropriate group from within the directory.


Connection Directory Groups See Also
Connection Directory Groups

Step-by-Step: Adding a New Group

Editing a Group

Deleting Groups


Connection Log

Select this button to view the combined record of all of your fax attempts, and of the successful data connections you’ve made with the Connection Directory. The combined record lists the type of event, as well as its date, time, duration and outcome:

Print

Click on this button to send the viewed log file to the printer.

Export

Click on this button to save the viewed log to a text file. Procomm Plus prompts for the name of the exported file, and supplies the default extension of ".txt".

Delete

Click on this button to remove entries you’ve selected from the list.

Clear All

If you want to remove all of the entries from the Connection Log, click on this button.

Close

Click on this button to close the Connection Log dialog.


Connectionless Session

A communications session where the computer does not stay online with the host. Web Browsers make a connectionless session; as soon as they download a page, they go offline from the host. If you are making a dial-up connection, you will still remain online with the service provider.


Copying a Fax

To copy your selection(s) to a different folder, choose the Edit | Copy menu item. Fax Manager displays the Copy Document dialog.  This dialog displays folders available on your system; the current folder is selected automatically. To select a different folder, just click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys.

When you’re satisfied with the destination folder you’ve selected, click on OK to accept it and copy your document(s). To return to Fax Manager’s main window without copying your document(s), click on Cancel.

You can also copy cover sheet files in this manner. However, cover sheets can only be copied to the Cover Sheets folder or to its sub-folders.


Cover Sheet Editor See Also
Cover Sheet Editor

Introducing the Cover Sheet Editor

Running the Cover Sheet Editor

Step-by-Step: Customizing Your Cover Sheet

Designing a Cover Sheet

Working With Cover Sheet Objects

Configuring Text Objects

Configuring Graphical Objects

The Cover Sheet Editor's Action Bar and Menus


Cover Sheet File

The name of the current cover sheet appears in the Cover Sheet File drop down list. If you want to use a different cover sheet, click on the list box’s down arrow button and scroll through the available cover sheets. Select the cover sheet you want by clicking on it, or by highlighting it and pressing the space bar. To make your own cover sheet, select [Create] from the top of the list to open the Cover Sheet Editor.

If you don’t want to use a cover sheet with your fax, click on the list box’s down arrow button and select [None] from the top of the list.

You can view or edit the currently selected cover sheet by clicking on the View button. The cover sheet will be loaded into the Cover Sheet Editor, where you can make any changes you desire.


Creating Folders

Fax Manager uses the paths specified in the Fax, Fax Paths panel in Setup for the four default folders. For each folder you create, Fax Manager creates a corresponding DOS directory.

To create a folder, select the File | New Folder menu item. Fax Manager displays the Add New Folder dialog.

Enter the name for the new folder in the Folder Name edit field. If you enable the Add as Top Level check box, the new folder will be displayed on the same level as the four default folders. Otherwise, the folder will be created as a child of the currently selected folder.

When you’re satisfied with the name and setting you’ve selected, click on OK to accept them and create the new folder. To return to Fax Manager’s main window without creating a folder, click on Cancel.

If the new folder is a top level folder, its DOS directory is created under the folders directory in Procomm Plus’s home path. For example, if you installed Procomm Plus to the default path on your C: drive, and created a "Past Faxes" top level folder, the full path to the new directory would be: c:\program files\procomm plus\folders\past_fax.

If the new folder is a sub-folder or "child" of an existing folder, the new directory is created under the directory associated with the parent folder. For example, if you create a "My Faxes" folder under the Inbox folder, Fax Manager creates a my_faxes directory to store the files you place in it. The my_faxes directory is created under the directory associated with the Inbox folder.

Subfolders cannot be placed under the Outbox.  If you are in the Outbox and select File | New Folder, it will automatically be created as a top level folder.

You may have noticed that our sample folder names included spaces. You can use almost any characters you want in folder names. Fax Manager will automatically adjust them for use as DOS directory names.


Creating New QWK Messages

If you’d like to compose a new message on a new subject, click on the Compose/Edit Message Action Bar button or select Messages | Compose/Edit Message. The QWK Mail Viewer displays the Entry window. The viewer automatically enters your name in the From: field, but you must supply the addressee in the To: field. If this is your first message to this correspondent, type the name as it appears on the bulletin board. If the addressee is in your Message To: picklist, click on the arrow on the right of the drop down list box and click on the desired name. If you’d like to add the name to your Message To: picklist, type the name into the field and click on the Add button.

You can also send carbon copies of your reply to other correspondents. If the names appear in your Message To: picklist, click on the Select... button on the right of the drop down list box. The viewer displays the CC List dialog; from here you can highlight one or more names. Click on OK when you’ve selected all of the names. If the names do not appear in your picklist, you can type the addressee’s name directly into the CC field.

In a similar fashion, you can specify the message topic area where the message will be posted on the BBS. Click on the arrow on the right of the drop down list box and click on the desired Area name.

You can then specify the following optional information:

Subject

If the subject string is in your Subject: picklist, click on the arrow on the right of the drop down list box and click on the desired subject string. To enter a new subject, click within the field and type it. If you’d like to add the current subject string to your Subject: picklist, click on the Add button.

Tagline

To select a tagline from your tagline file, click on the arrow on the right of the drop down list box and click on the desired entry. Of course, you can also type in a new tagline. If you’d like to add the current tagline to your list, type the string into the field and click on the Add button. For more information on taglines, see Signatures and Taglines.

Private

If the message topic area you’ve selected allows private messages, you can mark the message as private by enabling this check box; private messages can be read only by the author and the addressee. Check with the Sysop or System Operator of the BBS to see which message areas allow the posting of private messages.

Most BBS sysops read all of the "private" mail traffic on their systems to monitor for illegal activities. It’s wise, therefore, to remember that so-called private messages may be less than secure!

Once you’ve completed the necessary fields in the header portion of the message window, click in the area under the divider bar to begin typing your text. You can use all of the familiar Windows editing functions to cut, paste and type text in to the mesage entry dialog. If you need to search for a particular string within your text and, perhaps replace it with another string, select Edit | Find and Replace...

Once you’ve completed the composition of your message, click on the Save Message Action Bar button to add it to your .rep packet.


Creating QWK Carbon Copies

If you communicate with a large number of people using QWK mail, you’ve probably sent the same message to more than one individual. Although you can compose and save a separate copy of the same message for each addressee, you’ll save a great deal of time and effort by using the QWK Mail Viewer’s powerful Carbon Copy feature.

QWK Mail carbon copies are quite similar to the carbon copies available with most computer electronic mail systems: you select the individuals who will receive a copy of the message you’re currently composing, and the viewer takes care of the rest!

If you often send multiple copies to the same people, you can also create a distribution list. A distribution list is a simple ASCII text file with one addressee name per line. Lists are usually saved in the \program files\procomm plus directory, with an extension of .txt. You can create a list with the ASPECT Editor.

The Carbon Copy function is available only when you’re composing or editing a reply, so you must set up any copies before you save the message!

To display the Carbon Copy dialog while composing a message, click on the Select... button on the right of the CC drop down list box. The viewer displays the CC List dialog, where you can highlight one or more names from the "Message To" picklist. You can also use an existing distribution list; to load a list, click on the Open button. The viewer displays a standard File Open dialog.

Click on OK when you’ve selected all of the names.

If the names do not appear in your picklist, you can type the addressee’s name directly into the CC field.


Creating a New Account

To make accessing the Internet easier, we’ve included a wizard that helps automate the process of creating an Internet account.

Select the Help | Wizards... menu item, then select the Internet Access wizard. This begins the account creation process.


Creating a New .cid File

To create a new Caller ID file in the Caller ID Directory Editor, select the File | New... menu item and enter the new filename in the New Caller Information Directory dialog.

The New Caller Information Directory dialog operates like most standard file open dialogs. By default, your new Caller ID file is given a .cid extension and stored in the Procomm Plus home directory. Enter the filename of your new Caller ID file and click on OK. The editor creates and opens the new .cid file, and displays the name of the file in its title bar.


Customizing the Terminal Window

Depending on how you use Procomm Plus, you may find that you don’t want to display all of the Terminal window features. You can choose whether to hide or display most of these elements from the Setup menu.

To Toggle This...	Do This...
Meta Keys	Select the Setup | Meta Keys menu item.
Quick Select Line	Select the Setup | Quick Select Line menu item.
Status Line	Select the Setup | Status Line menu item.
The Meta Keys, Quick Select Line and Status Line settings you choose are automatically saved and used for the current and future sessions.

Selecting Action Bars

You can also control the display of the Action Bar, by selecting the Setup | Action Bars... menu item. This option is also available in the other communication windows of Procomm Plus, such as the Web Browser window. Click on this menu item to open the Load Action Bar dialog, where you can specify the Action Bars that you want to display at the top, bottom, left and right sides of the Terminal window. You can also select an Action Bar to be displayed in a "floating" window that you can place anywhere on your display.

To add an Action Bar, just click on the appropriate drop down list box and select one of the .pwb files from the list. If you want the Action Bar you select to be used in all of Procomm Plus's communications windows except for Fax Manager, enable the Global check box beside the list box.

To remove a bar, select the "[None]" item in the appropriate list. If you want to restore the default Action Bar settings, click on Use Defaults.

To close the dialog and save your changes, click on the OK button. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.

The selections you make and save in the Load Action Bars dialog will automatically be used as the default Action Bars for future sessions. However, if you attempt to connect to a Connection Directory entry that specifies its own Action Bar preferences, those preferences will override the default Action Bars. For more information, see "Action Bars" in Data-class: Action Bars or Telnet-class: Action Bars.


DCE

Data Communications Equipment. In communications sessions, the modem is referred to as the DCE. See also DTE.


DCE Rate

The speed at which one modem communicates to another modem. This speed changes depending on the modem’s negotiation with the other modem.

See also DTE Rate.


DDE

See Dynamic Data Exchange.


DDE Server Commands

In addition to running script files and determining the current value of predefined global variables, a client Windows application may request Procomm Plus to execute a particular command. Procomm Plus processes the following DDE server commands received from a DDE client application:

ASPECTCMD string

Executes an ASPECT command. The string must contain all the required syntax.

String parameters in most DDE server commands do not require quotation marks. However, quotation marks are necessary around string constants that are part of the ASPECT command syntax used with the ASPECTCMD statement. As an example, a DDE execute string using the ASPECTCMD statement and the ASPECT usermsg command might look like this:

ASPECTCMD USERMSG "The time is: %s" $TIME

CAPTURE OFF | ON

Toggles data capture ON and OFF.

DIAL {DATA | FAX | VOICE | FTP | TELNET | WWW} [GROUP] name [DIALINGBOX OFF]

Dials or connects to the group or entry name from the appropriate class. The dialing progress dialog can be hidden if you wish. Procomm Plus will use the first entry containing a matching name string, so you’ll want to be sure that the group or entry name matches the Connection Directory name exactly. The comparison is case-sensitive and includes any embedded spaces.

DIALLOAD filespec

Loads a specific Connection Directory .dir file.

EXECUTE filespec

Executes the specified script file.

GETFILE string [filespec] [FILEXFERBOX OFF]

Starts a file download with the specified protocol. The optional filespec argument is required for many protocols. The file transfer progress dialog can be hidden if you prefer.

HALT

Terminates all currently executing scripts, including all parent scripts.

HANGUP

Disconnects a communications session.

PWEXIT

Terminates active scripts, disconnects and exits Procomm Plus.

SENDFILE string [filespec] [FILEXFERBOX OFF]

Starts a file upload with the specified protocol. The optional filespec argument is required for many protocols. The file transfer progress dialog can be hidden if you prefer.

TRANSMIT string

Sends the string to the active COM port, with caret (^) translation if necessary.


DDE Server Topics

Procomm Plus makes available two DDE server names when it is executed.  The first server name is "PW4".  The second is "PW4xxxxx" where xxxxx is the unsigned integer value of the Procomm Plus process ID.  This value can be obtained in ASPECT when a second instance of Procomm Plus is launched using the run command.  This second name allows conversations to be established with a unique instance of Procomm Plus.

Procomm Plus makes available two DDE topics when acting as a server: "System" and the name of a script file with a .wax extension. If a valid script name is supplied, the script will run when the DDE session is established. If a script is already running when the session is established, the script name topic will be accepted only if one of the following is true:

•	The supplied name is the same as the executing script.

•	ASPECT is allowed to spawn other scripts on top of the executing script.

Procomm Plus also offers a set of internal items that can be polled by a client application. These topic command keywords are:

TOPICS

Returns "System" and the name of the currently executing script file, if any. The items are returned in a string, each separated by a tab character.

SYSITEMS

Lists the available items for the topic and a list of ASPECT predefined variables that can be requested. The items are returned in a string, each separated by a tab character.

FORMATS

Displays the Windows Clipboard formats available for DDE exchange. Only the text format is supported by Procomm Plus.

STATUS

Returns a block of information in a string, with each item separated by a comma:

DIAL DIR {directory name},
{script file | NO SCRIPT},
OFFLINE | ONLINE,
CAPTURE ON | OFF,
PRINTER ON | PRINTER OFF,
{TERMINAL | {FILE XFER} | DIALING},
FAX IDLE | FAX BUSY

We've placed the items on separate lines for clarity.

HELP

Displays brief help text describing Procomm Plus’ DDE server support.


DG 100 (84 key)
This is the format of the DG D100 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      DG D100 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (Cmd-1)	^^q	[ 1E 71 ]
F2	Function 2 (Cmd-2)	^^r	[ 1E 72 ]
F3	Function 3 (Cmd-3)	^^s	[ 1E 73 ]
F4	Function 4 (Cmd-4)	^^t	[ 1E 74 ]
F5	Function 5 (Cmd-5)	^^u	[ 1E 75 ]
F6	Function 6 (Cmd-6)	^^v	[ 1E 76 ]
F7	Function 7 (Cmd-7)	^^w	[ 1E 77 ]
F8	Function 8 (Cmd-8)	^^x	[ 1E 78 ]
F9	Function 9 (Cmd-9)	^^y	[ 1E 79 ]
F10	Function 10 (Cmd-10)	^^z	[ 1E 7A ]
Shift F1	Shift-Function 1 (Cmd-Shift-1)	^^a	[ 1E 61 ]
Shift F2	Shift-Function 2 (Cmd-Shift-2)	^^b	[ 1E 62 ]
Shift F3	Shift-Function 3 (Cmd-Shift-3)	^^c	[ 1E 63 ]
Shift F4	Shift-Function 4 (Cmd-Shift-4)	^^d	[ 1E 64 ]
Shift F5	Shift-Function 5 (Cmd-Shift-5)	^^e	[ 1E 65 ]
Shift F6	Shift-Function 6 (Cmd-Shift-6)	^^f	[ 1E 66 ]
Shift F7	Shift-Function 7 (Cmd-Shift-7)	^^g	[ 1E 67 ]
Shift F8	Shift-Function 8 (Cmd-Shift-8)	^^h	[ 1E 68 ]
Shift F9	Shift-Function 9 (Cmd-Shift-9)	^^i	[ 1E 69 ]
Shift F10	Shift-Function 10 (Cmd-Shift-10)	^^j	[ 1E 6A ]
BackSpace	Carriage Return	^M
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	New Line	^J
NumLock OFF:
Home	Home Cursor	^H
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^W
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^Y
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^X
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^Z
Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Keypad +	New Line	^M
Shift Keypad +	New Line	^J
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^Y
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^X
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^W


DG 200/210 (84 key)
This is the format of the DG D200/D210 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      DG D200/D210 Function	             Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1	^^q	[ 1E 71 ]
F2	Function 2	^^r	[ 1E 72 ]
F3	Function 3	^^s	[ 1E 73 ]
F4	Function 4	^^t	[ 1E 74 ]
F5	Function 5	^^u	[ 1E 75 ]
F6	Function 6	^^v	[ 1E 76 ]
F7	Function 7	^^w	[ 1E 77 ]
F8	Function 8	^^x	[ 1E 78 ]
F9	Function 9	^^y	[ 1E 79 ]
F10	Function 10	^^z	[ 1E 7A ]
Shift F1	Shift-Function 1	^^a	[ 1E 61 ]
Shift F2	Shift-Function 2	^^b	[ 1E 62 ]
Shift F3	Shift-Function 3	^^c	[ 1E 63 ]
Shift F4	Shift-Function 4	^^d	[ 1E 64 ]
Shift F5	Shift-Function 5	^^e	[ 1E 65 ]
Shift F6	Shift-Function 6	^^f	[ 1E 66 ]
Shift F7	Shift-Function 7	^^g	[ 1E 67 ]
Shift F8	Shift-Function 8	^^h	[ 1E 68 ]
Shift F9	Shift-Function 9	^^i	[ 1E 69 ]
Shift F10	Shift-Function 10	^^j	[ 1E 6A ]
Ctrl-F1	Ctrl-Function 1	^^=	[ 1E 3D ]
Ctrl-F2	Ctrl-Function 2	^^>	[ 1E 3E ]
Ctrl-F3	Ctrl-Function 3	^^?	[ 1E 3F ]
Ctrl-F4	Ctrl-Function 4	^^@	[ 1E 30 ]
Ctrl-F5	Ctrl-Function 5	^^A	[ 1E 31 ]
Ctrl-F6	Ctrl-Function 6	^^B	[ 1E 32 ]
Ctrl-F7	Ctrl-Function 7	^^C	[ 1E 33 ]
Ctrl-F8	Ctrl-Function 8	^^D	[ 1E 34 ]
Ctrl-F9	Ctrl-Function 9	^^E	[ 1E 35 ]
Ctrl-F10	Ctrl-Function 10	^^F	[ 1E 36 ]
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift Ctrl-Function 1	^^!	[ 1E 21 ]
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift Ctrl-Function 2	^^"	[ 1E 22 ]
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift Ctrl-Function 3	^^#	[ 1E 23 ]
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift Ctrl-Function 4	^^$	[ 1E 24 ]
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shift Ctrl-Function 5	^^%	[ 1E 25 ]
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shift Ctrl-Function 6	^^&	[ 1E 26 ]
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shift Ctrl-Function 7	^^'	[ 1E 27 ]
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shift Ctrl-Function 8	^^(	[ 1E 28 ]
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shift Ctrl-Function 9	^^)	[ 1E 29 ]
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shift Ctrl-Function 10	^^*	[ 1E 2A ]
BackSpace	Carriage Return	^M
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	New Line	^J
NumLock OFF:
Keypad *	Erase Page	^L
Keypad -	Erase End of Line	^K
Home	C1	^^\	[ 1E 5C ]
PgUp	C2	^^]	[ 1E 5D ]
End	C3	^^^	[ 1E 5E ]
PgDn	C4	^^_	[ 1E 5F ]
Keypad 5	Home	^H
Shift Home	Shift-C1	^^X	[ 1E 58 ]
Shift PgUp	Shift-C2	^^Y	[ 1E 59 ]
Shift End	Shift-C3	^^Z	[ 1E 5A ]
Shift PgDn	Shift-C4	^^[	[ 1E 5B ]
Shift-Keypad 5	Shift-Home	^^^H	[ 1E 08 ]
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^W
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^Y
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^X
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^Z
Shift Cursor Up	Shift-Cursor Up	^^^W	[ 1E 17 ]
Shift Cursor Right	Shift-Cursor Right	^^^X	[ 1E 18 ]
Shift Cursor Left	Shift-Cursor Left	^^^Y	[ 1E 19 ]
Shift Cursor Down	Shift-Cursor Down	^^^Z	[ 1E 1A ]
Shift Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Keypad +	New Line	^J
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^Y
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^X
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^W


DG D100 (101-key)
This is the format for the DG 100 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard. The F10 key is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	  DG 100 Function                              Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (Cmd-1)	^^q	[ 1E 71 ]
F2	Function 2 (Cmd-2)	^^r	[ 1E 72 ]
F3	Function 3 (Cmd-3)	^^s	[ 1E 73 ]
F4	Function 4 (Cmd-4)	^^t	[ 1E 74 ]
F5	Function 5 (Cmd-5)	^^u	[ 1E 75 ]
F6	Function 6 (Cmd-6)	^^v	[ 1E 76 ]
F7	Function 7 (Cmd-7)	^^w	[ 1E 77 ]
F8	Function 8 (Cmd-8)	^^x	[ 1E 78 ]
F9	Function 9 (Cmd-9)	^^y	[ 1E 79 ]
F10	Function 10 (Cmd-10)	^^z	[ 1E 7A ]
Shift F1	Shift-Function 1 (Cmd-Shift-1)	^^a	[ 1E 61 ]
Shift F2	Shift-Function 2 (Cmd-Shift-2)	^^b	[ 1E 62 ]
Shift F3	Shift-Function 3 (Cmd-Shift-3)	^^c	[ 1E 63 ]
Shift F4	Shift-Function 4 (Cmd-Shift-4)	^^d	[ 1E 64 ]
Shift F5	Shift-Function 5 (Cmd-Shift-5)	^^e	[ 1E 65 ]
Shift F6	Shift-Function 6 (Cmd-Shift-6)	^^f	[ 1E 66 ]
Shift F7	Shift-Function 7 (Cmd-Shift-7)	^^g	[ 1E 67 ]
Shift F8	Shift-Function 8 (Cmd-Shift-8)	^^h	[ 1E 68 ]
Shift F9	Shift-Function 9 (Cmd-Shift-9)	^^i	[ 1E 69 ]
Shift F10	Shift-Function 10 (Cmd-Shift-10)	^^j	[ 1E 6A ]
BackSpace	Carriage Return	^M
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	New Line	^J
NumLock OFF:
Keypad Home	Home Cursor	^H
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^W
Keypad CrLf	Cursor Left	^Y
Keypad CrRt	Cursor Right	^X
Keypad CrDn	Cursor Down	^Z
Keypad Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Keypad Enter	New Line	^J
NumLock ON:
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^Y
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^X
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^W
Keypad Enter	New Line	^M
Grey Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Grey Home	Home	^H
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^W
Grey Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^Z
Grey Cursor Lf	Cursor Left	^Y
Grey Cursor Rt	Cursor Right	^X


DG D200/D210 (101-key)
This is the format for the DG 200/210 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard. The F10 key is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	  DG 200/210 Function                        Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1	^^q	[ 1E 71 ]
F2	Function 2	^^r	[ 1E 72 ]
F3	Function 3	^^s	[ 1E 73 ]
F4	Function 4	^^t	[ 1E 74 ]
F5	Function 5	^^u	[ 1E 75 ]
F6	Function 6	^^v	[ 1E 76 ]
F7	Function 7	^^w	[ 1E 77 ]
F8	Function 8	^^x	[ 1E 78 ]
F9	Function 9	^^y	[ 1E 79 ]
F10	Function 10	^^z	[ 1E 7A ]
F11	Function 11	^^{	[ 1E 7B ]
F12	Function 12	^^|	[ 1E 7C ]
Shift F1	Shift-Function 1	^^a	[ 1E 61 ]
Shift F2	Shift-Function 2	^^b	[ 1E 62 ]
Shift F3	Shift-Function 3	^^c	[ 1E 63 ]
Shift F4	Shift-Function 4	^^d	[ 1E 64 ]
Shift F5	Shift-Function 5	^^e	[ 1E 65 ]
Shift F6	Shift-Function 6	^^f	[ 1E 66 ]
Shift F7	Shift-Function 7	^^g	[ 1E 67 ]
Shift F8	Shift-Function 8	^^h	[ 1E 68 ]
Shift F9	Shift-Function 9	^^i	[ 1E 69 ]
Shift F10	Shift-Function 10	^^j	[ 1E 6A ]
Shift F11	Shift-Function 11	^^k	[ 1E 6B ]
Shift F12	Shift-Function 12	^^l	[ 1E 6C ]
Ctrl-F1	Ctrl-Function 1	^^1	[ 1E 31 ]
Ctrl-F2	Ctrl-Function 2	^^2	[ 1E 32 ]
Ctrl-F3	Ctrl-Function 3	^^3	[ 1E 33 ]
Ctrl-F4	Ctrl-Function 4	^^4	[ 1E 34 ]
Ctrl-F5	Ctrl-Function 5	^^5	[ 1E 35 ]
Ctrl-F6	Ctrl-Function 6	^^6	[ 1E 36 ]
Ctrl-F7	Ctrl-Function 7	^^7	[ 1E 37 ]
Ctrl-F8	Ctrl-Function 8	^^8	[ 1E 38 ]
Ctrl-F9	Ctrl-Function 9	^^9	[ 1E 39 ]
Ctrl-F10	Ctrl-Function 10	^^:	[ 1E 3A ]
Ctrl-F11	Ctrl-Function 11	^^;	[ 1E 3B ]
Ctrl-F12	Ctrl-Function 12	^^<	[ 1E 3C ]
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift Ctrl-Function 1	^^!	[ 1E 21 ]
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift Ctrl-Function 2	^^"	[ 1E 22 ]
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift Ctrl-Function 3	^^#	[ 1E 23 ]
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift Ctrl-Function 4	^^$	[ 1E 24 ]
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shift Ctrl-Function 5	^^%	[ 1E 25 ]
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shift Ctrl-Function 6	^^&	[ 1E 26 ]
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shift Ctrl-Function 7	^^'	[ 1E 27 ]
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shift Ctrl-Function 8	^^(	[ 1E 28 ]
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shift Ctrl-Function 9	^^)	[ 1E 29 ]
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shift Ctrl-Function 10	^^*	[ 1E 2A ]
Shift Ctrl-F11	Shift Ctrl-Function 11	^^+	[ 1E 2B ]
Shift Ctrl-F12	Shift Ctrl-Function 12	^^,	[ 1E 2C ]
BackSpace	Carriage Return	^M
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	New Line	^J
NumLock OFF:
Keypad /	Erase Page	^L
Keypad -	Erase End of Line	^K
Keypad Home	C1	^^\	[ 1E 5C ]
Keypad PgUp	C2	^^]	[ 1E 5D ]
Keypad End	C3	^^^	[ 1E 5E ]
Keypad PgDn	C4	^^_	[ 1E 5F ]
Keypad 5	Home	^H
Shift-Keypad Home	Shift-C1	^^X	[ 1E 58 ]
Shift-Keypad PgUp	Shift-C2	^^Y	[ 1E 59 ]
Shift-Keypad End	Shift-C3	^^Z	[ 1E 5A ]
Shift-Keypad PgDn	Shift-C4	^^[	[ 1E 5B ]
Shift-Keypad 5	Shift-Home	^^^H	[ 1E 08 ]
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^W
Keypad CrLf	Cursor Left	^Y
Keypad CrRt	Cursor Right	^X
Keypad CrDn	Cursor Down	^Z
Shift-Keypad Cursor Up	Shift-Cursor Up	^^^W	[ 1E 17 ]
Shift-Keypad CrRt	Shift-Cursor Right	^^^X	[ 1E 18 ]
Shift-Keypad CrLf	Shift-Cursor Left	^^^Y	[ 1E 19 ]
Shift-Keypad CrDn	Shift-Cursor Down	^^^Z	[ 1E 1A ]
Keypad Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Keypad Enter	New Line	^J
NumLock ON:
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^Y
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^X
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^W
Keypad Enter	New Line	^M
Grey Delete	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Grey Home	Home	^H
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^W
Grey Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^Z
Grey Cursor Lf	Cursor Left	^Y
Grey Cursor Rt	Cursor Right	^X
Grey Shift-Cursor Up	Shift-Cursor Up	^^^W	[ 1E 17 ]
Grey Shift-Cursor Rt	Shift-Cursor Right	^^^X	[ 1E 18 ]
Grey Shift-Cursor Lf	Shift-Cursor Left	^^^Y	[ 1E 19 ]
Grey Shift-Cursor Dn	Shift-Cursor Down	^^^Z	[ 1E 1A ]


DLL

Dynamic Link Library. A file containing code that can be accessed by an executable program. Basically a group of procedures and functions. A DLL can be a shared resource, or it may be proprietary like the different versions of winsock.dll.


DNS

See Domain Name Server.


DOS Application

A program designed to work under the DOS operating system. They can run under Windows, but they cannot use the Windows shared resources such as the Clipboard, drag-and-drop, print drivers, and DDE Link interprogram communication. Procomm Plus cannot fax a DOS document unless the document can be viewed from a Windows editor such as Notepad. The fax creation process uses a DDE link to activate the document’s editor.


DSR

Data Set Ready. An RS-232 control signal sent by the modem to indicate that it is powered on and not in a test mode.


DTE

Data Terminal Equipment. In a communications session, this refers to the PC or the terminal.

See also DCE.


DTE Rate

The rate of speed at which the DTE (the computer) can receive data from the DCE (usually the modem). This rate is higher than the modem’s connect speed for modems that support data compression.

See also DCE Rate.


DTR

Short for Data Terminal Ready. A signal indicating whether or not the computer is ready for the modem to make a connection to another modem, as stipulated in the RS-232 standard.

Dropping DTR should cause the modem to hang up. If DTR is disabled, software commands are used instead, to make the modem hang-up.


Data

Select Setup | Answer Options | Data to answer only incoming data calls from other computers. Procomm Plus will disconnect all incoming fax or voice calls. This command is only available if you’re using a modem connection.


Data Bits

See Asynchronous.


Data Entry Class See Also
Data Entry class

Step-by-Step: Adding a Data-class Entry

Data-class Settings


Data Log

Click on this button to view the record of all successful data connections you’ve made through the Connection Directory. The Data Log includes the event’s date, time, duration and outcome:

Print

Click on this button to send the viewed log file to the printer.

Export

Click on this button to save the viewed log to a text file. Procomm Plus prompts for the name of the exported file, and supplies the default extension of ".txt".

Delete

Click on this button to remove entries you’ve selected from the list.

Clear All

If you want to remove all of the entries from the Data Log, click on this button.

Close

Click on this button to close the Data Log dialog.


Data Options

The Data Options group includes settings that primarily control the basic behavior of the Terminal window. The Data Options group includes five settings panel:

General

Advanced

Left Mouse

Right Mouse

Paths

You can save and reference the settings in the Data Options group as an option set. This allows you to create multiple operating "profiles" that you can link to Connection Directory entries or select from ASPECT scripts as you need them.

For help in creating or using option sets, see Option Sets.


Data Settings
The Data Settings

Settings in the Data group affect all sessions that use the Procomm Plus Terminal window. It contains seven minor settings groups:


Data Tab

Click on this tab to access settings and option groups that primarily affect the Terminal window.


Data and Fax

Enable both Setup | Answer Options | Fax and Setup | Answer Options | Data to answer both incoming fax and data calls. Procomm Plus will disconnect all incoming voice calls. This command is only available if you’re using a fax modem connection and your modem supports Adaptive Answer - check your modem's manual to verify that your modem is capable of Adaptive Answer.


Data compression

Temporarily reducing the number of characters to be transmitted, so that it takes less time to transfer the file. One method of data compression is to encode data if a character is repeated several times in a row.

There are a number of different standards that modems use to compress data. Many newer modems employ the V.42 bis standard of data compression. This allows a transfer rate of up to four times higher than the "listed" bps rate of the modem. A 14,400 bps modem using the V.42 bis standard can send data to the PC at up to 57,600 bps.


Data, Fax, and Voice Manual Connections

If you want to make a single connection to a host system or location that's not in your Connection Directory, select the Connect | Manual Connect... menu item. If the Data-, Fax- or Voice-class is selected when you request a manual connection, you’re prompted to enter the telephone number to be dialed. When connecting manually, Procomm Plus does not reference the System, Dialing Options, Call Setup settings in Setup. You'll need to enter the phone number just as it should be dialed. For example, if you need to dial "8" to get an outside line, and the number is long distance, you might enter "8,1-314-875-0503."

The Manual Connect function uses the System, Dialing Options, Call Control settings in Setup to determine the dialing command type, the number of dialing attempts and the delay between each attempt. It also uses the Dialing progress dialog to report the status of the connection attempt. The phone number you specify will be dialed until a connection is made, the specified number of attempts is exceeded or you cancel the dialing operation.

For a Data-class manual connection, the Terminal window will use the current or default settings that are in effect when the connection is attempted. A Fax-class manual connection opens the Send Fax dialog, where you can specify the documents to be faxed or other options.


Data-class Settings

The Data-class entry settings are divided into five groups:

Entry Info

Basic Options

Port Settings

Advanced Options

Action Bars

The most-used group, Entry Info, is selected automatically when you switch to the Data class. To select a different group of settings, click on the appropriate button.


Data-class Settings See Also
Data-class Settings

Entry Info

Basic Options

Port Settings

Advanced Options

Action Bars


Data-class: Action Bars

The Data-class Action Bars fields allow you to specify the Action Bars displayed with the Terminal window when you connect to an entry.

You can select Action Bars to be loaded at the Top, Bottom, Left or Right border of the Terminal window, or in a Floating pad by clicking on the appropriate drop down list box. By default, the currently-displayed Action Bars will be used, indicated by the [Current] list item.

Action Bar files end in an extension of .pwb. They must be placed in Procomm Plus’s home directory, typically \program files\procomm plus.


Data-class: Advanced Options

The Data-class Advanced Options settings allow you to fine-tune the Terminal display, as well as some of the files used after you’ve connected to the entry.

Terminal Font

If you’ve created a named option set in the Data, Terminal Fonts panel of Setup, you can select it to be used when you’re connected with this entry. By default, the normal font option set is selected; click on the Terminal Font drop down list box to select an available set.

Terminal Colors

If you’ve created a named option set in the Data, Terminal Colors panel of Setup, you can select it to be used when you’re connected with this entry. By default, the normal terminal colors option set is selected; click on the Terminal Colors drop down list box to select an available set.

Meta Keys

Click on this drop down list box to select a Meta Key file to be loaded when you dial this entry. By default, the currently-loaded .key file is used, indicated by the [Current] setting.

Translate Table

Click on this drop down list box to select a Translate Table to be loaded when you dial this entry. By default, the currently-loaded .xlt file is used, indicated by the [Current] setting.


Data-class: Basic Options

The fields in the Data-class Basic Options group determine the basic characteristics of the Terminal window after the connection is made, such as the current emulation and file transfer protocol.

Terminal

The emulation to be used with this entry. You can select one of the emulations supported by Procomm Plus, or one of the Terminal option sets you’ve created in the Data, Terminal Options group by clicking on this list box.

For information about Terminal option sets,  see Terminal Options.

Protocol

The default file transfer protocol to be used with this entry. You can select one of the protocols supported by Procomm Plus, or one of the Protocol option sets you’ve created in the Data, Transfer Protocols group by clicking on this list box.

For information about Protocol option sets, see Transfer Protocols.

Data Options

If you’ve created a custom option set in the Data, Data Options group, you can select it to be used by this entry by clicking on this list box. By default, this is set to normal options.

For information about Data option sets, see Data Options.

Script

An ASPECT script to be launched when this entry is used. Click on this list box to select a script from among those stored in the default Script path defined in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup.

To specify how the script is handled, click on the Setup... button to display the Script Execution Options dialog.

If you want the script to execute when Procomm Plus successfully connects to the entry, select Start script when connection is made. This is the default setting.

If you want the script to execute as soon as the Connection Directory attempts to connect to the entry, select Start script when directory entry is dialed.

If you specify Start script when directory entry is dialed, the Connection Directory will not dial the entry’s number. Instead, control is handed to the entry’s assigned script file, allowing you to create custom-connection scripts.

Click on OK to accept the script settings and return to the directory window. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.

Capture

A Capture file to be associated with this entry. Click on this list box to select an existing Capture file from among those stored in the default Capture path defined in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup.

To specify how the Capture file will be handled when used with this entry, click on the field’s associated Setup... button to open the Capture File Options dialog:

Recording Options

This setting determines how the Procomm Plus will record Capture file data. You can specify formatted, filtered or raw data for the capture by selecting the appropriate option button.

A detailed discussion of these settings can be found in Capture File Options Dialog.

Control Options

These settings determine how the Procomm Plus opens the Capture file to write recorded data. If you want the Terminal window to begin capturing data as soon as you’ve connected to the entry, enable Start capture on connection. By default, the Capture file is not automatically opened.

A detailed discussion of the other control option settings can be found in Capture File Options Dialog..

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the main Connection Directory window. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Data-class: Entry Info

The fields in the Data-class Entry Info group are similar to those listed in a standard phone book, such as a phone number and company name. They include:

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Number

The area code and primary phone number, used to dial and connect to the site or system addressed by the entry.

Country

The country where the site or system is located.  Procomm Plus uses this field to determine whether you'll be calling internationally.

Company
The business or company title for the entry. This field provides a convenient way to locate entries, as it is referenced in the directory’s Find dialog. See Searching for Entries for more information.

Always dial as long distance

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will always treat this entry as a long distance call. The entry’s Area code and Data Number will be included in the dialing string, preceded by any Location property values you’ve specified in Windows.

Only dial Data Number

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will always dial only the Data Number for this entry. Location property values you’ve specified in Windows are ignored.  This mode is especially useful for internal calls through a company PBX system, as well as commands that need to be sent directly to the modem without modification by Windows.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.

Logon Info...

Click on this button to open a dialog where you can specify Data-class logon information for the site or system you’re calling. The Logon Info values are very convenient if you’re using an ASPECT script to automate your connection to a host system. Each logon string value is available in an ASPECT system variable after the Connection Directory has dialed the entry. This allows you to easily reference them from within a script.

User ID

An entry’s User ID logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $USERID system variable. It’s also sent when you select Data | Send Information | User Id in the Terminal window.

Password

For security, characters you enter in this field are masked with asterisks "*". An entry’s Password logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $PASSWORD system variable. It’s also sent when you select Data | Send Information | Password in the Terminal window.

Miscellaneous

An entry’s Miscellaneous logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $MISC system variable. It’s also sent when you select Data | Send Information | Misc String in the Terminal window.

Click on OK to accept the values and return to the main Connection Directory window. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Data-class: Port Settings

The Data-class Port Settings fields determine the connection used to connect to the entry, as well as the operating characteristics for the connection.

Modem Connection

By default, Procomm Plus will use the connection that‘s active when you dial the entry. This setting is indicated by Current Connection. To select a different connection, click on the Modem Connection drop down list box, then click on one of the available connections.

If the connection you've selected has additional settings, you can click on Modem/Connection Properties button to display the Properties dialog.  From this dialog you can set options like the speaker volume, port settings, error control and flow control.


Data_1
Data

Information. In PC communications, data refers to bits being transmitted from one computer to another, not including transfer information overhead.


Database

An organized storage bank of information that can be read and edited by a program. Database may also refer to the program that manages the data.


Default

A value set automatically during installation, generally the most common or preferable setting.


Deleting Annotation Objects

If you want to remove an annotation object you’ve placed, select it with the Select Object tool. You can then delete it by pressing the [image] key. You can also delete an object by right clicking on it, then selecting Delete from the right mouse pop-up. The viewer does not prompt to confirm your request before deleting the object.


Deleting Entries and Groups

To remove entries or groups you’ve selected in the Connection Directory, press [image] or select the Edit | Delete menu item. A Delete button is also available on the Action Bar.

If you’re deleting an entry that contains multiple classes, Procomm Plus will prompt to determine whether it should delete them. For example, if you’ve selected an entry’s Fax-class for deletion, and the entry also contains Data, Voice and FTP classes, you will be asked whether you want the other classes removed as well.

If you’ve selected a group for deletion, any entries it contains will not be deleted. Instead, those entries are moved into the directory as individual entries. However, if you select an entry within a group for deletion, it will be removed from the directory, just as though you had selected an entry outside of the group.


Deleting a Folder

To delete the current folder, select the File | Delete Folder menu item. Fax Manager will prompt to confirm your request before deleting the folder.

When deleting a folder, Fax Manager deletes only the files for which it is responsible. This includes .fax and .bft files, as well as the record files which accompany them. If you have placed other files in the directory, Fax Manager will not delete them; you must do so manually.

If the folder’s DOS directory is empty after Fax Manager has deleted its files, the directory is removed. Otherwise, Fax Manager will tell you why it couldn’t remove the directory.

Fax Manager will not allow you to delete the four default folders: Inbox, Outbox, Sent Faxes and Cover Sheets.


Deleting a QWK Reply

One of the advantages of QWK mail is the opportunity to delete a reply before it’s posted. Since your messages are not actually added to the bulletin board’s message base until you upload the .rep file, you can delete a reply at any time!

To delete a previously saved reply, select Areas | Replies (Outgoing Messages) and display the Message List. Highlight the reply you want to edit and click on Delete. The viewer will prompt you for confirmation before deleting the reply.


Delivery Date and Delivery Time

By default, Procomm Plus attempts to transmit faxes as soon as you click on the Send Fax dialog’s Send button. You can specify a different delivery time and date by manipulating the clock and calender in the Time & Options panel, as explained in the table below:

To Do This...	Do This...
Select a day.	Click on it in the calender.
Select a different month.	Click on the scroll buttons on each side of the month field until the month you want is displayed.
Select a different year.	Click on the scroll buttons on each side of the year field until the year you want is displayed.
Select a different time.	Click on the time scroll buttons on each side of the digital time display until the time you want is displayed. The left-hand scroll buttons control the hour display, while the right-hand buttons control the minutes display. You can also click and drag the hands of the clock to the time you want. The mouse pointer changes shape when it’s in the proper position for dragging the clock hands.
Toggle AM/PM hours.	Click on the button to the right of the time display. It’s labeled am or pm, depending on the current setting.

If the time and date you specify are already past when you click on the Send Fax dialog’s Send button, Procomm Plus will attempt to transmit it immediately. Otherwise, your fax will be processed, then added to the list of scheduled faxes to wait for its transmission time and date.


Designing a Cover Sheet

Designing a cover sheet is a straightforward task. You only need to decide what graphics and text elements you want to use on the page and where they’ll go! With the Cover Sheet Editor’s "point and click" interface, you can draw your cover sheet as easily as you might with pencil and paper. Also, since the editor allows you to open and modify existing cover sheets, you can update your designs with new text or graphics as the need arises.

To create a new cover sheet, launch the Cover Sheet Editor by clicking on its icon in the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu, or by selecting Fax Cover Sheet Editor from the Tools menu. The editor will open with a blank, untitled cover sheet page. If you’re already in the editor, you can select File | New from the menu or click on the New Cover Sheet Action Bar button to begin working on a new cover sheet.

For more information, see the following topics:

Choosing Essential Page Elements

Saving Your Cover Sheet


Deskewing a Fax

If your fax seems "crooked" or slanted on the page, it was probably badly scanned by the transmitting fax machine. To help you correct the problem, the Fax Viewer provides a built-in deskewing engine.

To enhance data retention, Procomm Plus's deskewing engine automatically converts standard resolution images to fine resolution if they are modified by the deskewing process. If one or more pages of a multi-page fax are converted to fine resolution, the entire fax will also be converted when you save it.

To deskew your fax, select the Tools | Deskew Fax... menu item. If you're viewing a single page fax, deskewing is performed immediately. If you're viewing a multi-page fax, the Fax Viewer displays the Fax Deskew dialog, where you can specify the page(s) you want to deskew:

Range

By default, the Fax Viewer preselects the All option button, meaning that it will attempt to deskew the entire fax. However, if you selected specific pages in the fax the viewer will enable the Selected Page(s) option button; click on it if you only want to deskew the selected pages. You can also specify a range of consecutive pages by clicking on Pages and entering the appropriate values in the From and To fields.

To accept the page Range setting and begin deskewing, click on OK. To close the dialog without deskewing, click on Cancel.


Dial-up SLIP or PPP Connections

Since applications with graphical interfaces have increased both the popularity and ease of use of the Internet, more and more service providers are offering access to the Internet through Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) or Point to Point Protocol (PPP) links. Using a SLIP or PPP connection allows you to actually log onto the Internet and become a working node: a virtual direct Internet connection!

Since service providers are dropping their rates for this type of access, it is becoming the most popular method for connecting to the Internet.

The Internet features you can take advantage of depend upon your service provider. Most providers offer different plans based upon the features you want.


Dial-up Shell Connections

Dial-up shell connections, also known as logon connections or terminal connections, are generally created by calling into a host computer that is directly connected to the Internet. Once logged in, you are able to use the internet via a "shell" on the host system.

Dial-up shell connections are somewhat limited. Since they cannot be used to establish a node on the Internet, they cannot support the World Wide Web's graphical format. For this reason, their popularity and use has diminished over time.


Dialer

The part of a SLIP or PPP stack package that is programmed to dial up a specific service provider.


Dialing

Q.	I keep getting "NO DIALTONE" when my modem dials out. I have the telephone cord plugged into the jack on the modem labeled "phone."


Dialing Directory

See Connection Directory.


Dialing Options

The Dialing Options settings allow you to specify the dialing properties used within Procomm Plus. From within Setup, select the System, Dialing Options buttons.

Make [ ] attempts...

This setting determines how many times Procomm Plus will dial when attempting to connect to an entry. If a connection is not made in this number of tries, the dial attempt is abandoned.

This setting defaults to 99, but you can set any value from 0 to 999. If you set Make [ ] attempts to zero, Procomm Plus will dial indefinitely, until the connection is successful or you terminate the dial attempt manually.

Pause [ ] seconds between attempts

This setting determines the number of seconds Procomm Plus will pause before dialing the next number in the dialing queue. This setting defaults to 1 second, but you can set any value from 0 to 999.

Current Location

This display field indicates the current location that Procomm Plus uses to dial other systems. Typically, this will be set to Default Location.  Procomm Plus references the settings associtated with this value as it "builds" the dialing command string to be sent to your modem.  For example, a call specified as long distance from your default location may include additional numbers to access an outside line and place a long-distance call.  Procomm Plus also uses this default location when you use its Roadtrip feature to modify your Connection Directory. For more information, see Roadtrip.

Dialing Properties...

Click on this button to display the Dialing Properties dialog.  Typically, you won't have to change these fields often unless you're using a laptop computer.

I am dialing from:

This list box operates much like an option set, allowing you to create different locations that can each contain different dial settings.  To create a new location name, click on New....

The area code is:

Enter the area code for this location.

I am in:

Enter the country code for this location. If you travel to a country with a different country code, select the country here.

Outside line, local

If you need to dial a special prefix to access an outside line for local calls, enter that prefix in this field. Procomm Plus will use this sequence when dialing local entries.  Unless you specified a value for this field when you installed Procomm Plus, it will be empty by default.

Outside line, long distance

If you need to dial a prefix to access an outside line for long distance, enter that prefix in this field. Procomm Plus will use this sequence when dialing entries you’ve marked as long distance. Unless you specified a value for this field when you installed Procomm Plus, it will be empty by default.

Dial using Calling Card

This check box controls Procomm Plus’s use of a phone card. If the setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will use the phone card you’ve specified. To select a different card or enter the information for a new card, click on Change...

Call Waiting

Enable this check box if Procomm Plus should include a disable code for call waiting. Call waiting tones can disconnect a data or fax connection, and many phone companies provide a disable code that is dialed as part of the number.  Select the disable string provided by your phone company in the list box.

Tone or Pulse dialing

Select the correct option button to indicate whether the telephone system at the current location uses tone or rotary/pulse dialing..

Roadtrip

If you travel or move to a different area code or country, Setup can adjust your Connection Directory automatically.

Adjust...

Click on Adjust... to display the Select Long Distance dialog. The Data, Fax and Voice entries in your current Connection Directory are displayed in the dialog’s list box. Just highlight the entries that should be marked as Long Distance, and click on OK. You can highlight multiple entries by holding down the [image] key as you click on them.


Dialing Question 3
Q.	It sounds like the modem has already connected, but the Connection Directory keeps redialing. Why won’t the Call Progress window go away?

This might be the symptom of a data-compressing modem that is set to use Auto Baud Detect. Auto Baud Detect is usually used when dealing with 2400 baud or slower modems. When used with higher speed modems it produces poor results including the use of improper connection messages. The dialing process gets confused and may connect at 300 baud. It may also perceive that no connection has been made.

If the Connection Directory is not notified of a connection, it will keep trying to dial, hence the Call Progress box remains after the modems have connected. It is important not to use a generic 2400 Hayes modem configuration with a 14,400 modem. If you are using anything but the most basic 2400 baud modem, make sure that Auto Baud detect is turned off.

Do not confuse Auto Reliable with Auto Baud Detect. Auto Reliable means the modem’s top capabilities are enabled, while Auto Baud Detect means that the port setting is forced down to the same speed as the connection rate. Auto Baud Detect is used for more simple modems only.

If you have a 2400 baud configuration for a high-speed modem, try using one of the Generic configurations, or have Procomm Plus do an automatic detection of the modem.


Dialing Question 4
Q.	I keep getting "NO DIALTONE" when my modem dials out. I have the telephone cord plugged into the jack on the modem labeled "phone."

Many modems come with two phone jacks: one jack may be labeled "Phone," while the other may be labeled "Line" or "Wall." The cord that attaches the modem to the wall needs to be plugged into the modem jack that is labeled "Line" or "Wall." If a telephone is to be routed through the modem, plug the cord from the phone into the modem jack marked "Phone."

Usually if the jacks on the modem are not marked, that means that they are interchangeable. There are a few modems, however, that are labeled in the technical manual but not on the modem itself. Having the lines switched can cause the modem to ignore in-coming calls. If you have an unmarked modem, check the book that came with it to make sure the lines are connected in the correct order.

Another consideration is the situation of an internal digital phone system such as a PBX. If you have a digital phone line, it will not support a modem without some modification. If you want to use a modem but you have a digital phone system, there are two approaches you can take.

You can get a separate analog phone line that circumvents your digital phone system and goes directly to the public phone system.

You can get a modem adapter that attaches to the phone. This adaptor allows the modem to communicate to your digital telephone, and then the telephone can communicate to your digital system.

These options can be discussed with your Telephone System Administrator.


Dialing Single Data Entries

If you selected a single entry, the Dialing progress dialog opens and begins the dialing attempt:

The name and number of the entry being dialed is shown in the Dialing group box at the top of the dialog. The entry’s assigned ASPECT script and its Connection Directory connection statistics are shown in the Directory Statistics group box, while the overall progress of the dialing attempt is indicated in the Call Statistics group box. The Current Call Progress text box indicates the command(s) sent to your modem or connection, and any information returned from it in the current dialing attempt.

The Dialing progress dialog repeatedly dials the entry until either a connection is made or the number of dialing attempts set in the Data, Dialing Options panel in Setup is reached. The dialog then closes, passing control to the Terminal window. To close the dialog before a connection is made, click on the Cancel button.


Dialog Box

A window that facilitates user input and interaction. Dialog boxes may incorporate a number of standardized objects such as Buttons, Option Buttons, and Check Boxes.


Digital Signal

A signal that communicates using binary data, as opposed to sending analog sound waves. ISDN uses a digital signal to transfer data. Modems use converters in order to communicate over digital systems.

See Analog Signal.


Direct Connect

A communications connection from a PC to another serial device, without the use of a modem. Direct connections may require the use of a null modem cable so that the Data Send and Data Receive pins of the serial port will be correctly routed to the other serial port.


Direct Internet Connections

More and more companies are connection their computer networks to the Internet. These networks are directly connected; each machine has its own IP address and is considered a node on the Internet.

Typically, an MIS department is responsible for maintaining the company's connection to the Internet.


Directory

An organizational structure used by operating systems to manage files stored on a computer. Computer directories are like the drawers of a filing cabinet which store certain files together for organization. Directories may branch into one or more layers of subdirectories. Not related to Connection Directory.

See also Connection Directory.


Directory Options

Settings in the FTP, Directory Options panel allow you to specify how the FTP Client will handle duplicate filenames and a variety of other file-handling options. From within Setup, click on the Internet, FTP Options, Directory Options buttons to display the panel:

Retain viewed files

In order for you to view a file from a host system, it must first be downloaded or copied to your local machine. If you want to keep files you've viewed, enable the Retain viewed files check box. By default, this check box is disabled, causing viewed files to be deleted.

Confirm overwriting existing files

If you want the FTP Client to prompt you before overwriting an existing file on your local machine, enable the Confirm file overwrite check box. It is enabled by default.

Prompt for long file name conversion

When you transfer a file from an FTP host, the FTP Client generally saves it using the original filename on your local machine. Some FTP systems, especially those that are UNIX-based, can use long filenames, which must be converted into DOS format. If you want the FTP Client to prompt you to confirm converted filenames before it uses them, enable this check box. The option is enabled by default.

Default File Filters

In these fields, you can specify the file filters that FTP Client will use to list files. By default, the Local files field is set to "*" and the Remote files field is blank, but you can enter any valid filename pattern.

Initial local directory

If you'd like the FTP Client to make a specific directory the current path on your local machine each time you connect to an FTP site, enter the complete drive and directory path in this field. By default, this field is set to the download directory created under the Procomm Plus home directory, usually \procomm plus\dnload.


Domain Name

The name granted certain Internet sites in addition to their numeric IP address. A domain name can be used instead of a numeric IP address, but it must then be translated into numbers by a Domain Name Server (DNS).

For Internet e-mail addresses, the domain name is the portion that comes after the "@" symbol. The portion that precedes the domain name is the specific person that the message is addressed to, for example: wendy@never.land.org.


Domain Name Server

Computers on the Internet that store the IP address related to each domain name. Each time you access an Internet host with a domain name, the domain name server translates the name into numbers that a router can understand. One DNS can access another DNS to obtain additional address information. If the DNS is down or can’t find the domain name listed, you won’t be able to access the site unless you know the numeric IP address of the desired host. For this reason, it is good to have more then one DNS listed in your configuration. See your Internet provider for a list of suggested Domain Name Servers.


Door

A program on a BBS that you control remotely. Usually you select the IBM PC as your Procomm Plus "terminal" since this interface transmits the actual key codes as if you are typing at the BBS computer. Doorway mode is typically used to play interactive games over a BBS.


Download

To receive a file from a remote computer. Typically downloading involves a file transfer protocol to facilitate error correction and greater speed.


Drag and Drop

A mouse action that triggers an event when an object is "dragged" from one location to another. For example, dragging a file icon to a different location may cause a file to be copied or moved to a different directory.

To move an object with Drag and Drop, put the mouse pointer on an object, then click the mouse button but do not release it. With the mouse button held down, move the mouse until the pointer is on the destination location. At that point release the mouse button to "Drop" the object in the new location. If you want to copy instead of move, hold down the [image] key while you drag-and-drop.


Dragging Buttons

The editing window allows you to "drag and drop" buttons, either between the two button list boxes, or within the Current Action Bar list box itself. This can be very convenient. For example, if you want to add a button to the very top of your Action Bar, you can drag it to its location rather than copying it to the list and using the Move Up button to position it.

As you drag buttons within the dialog, the mouse pointer changes to reflect one of three states:

I	If you’re dragging a button from the Command list box to the Current Action Bar, the mouse pointer is unchanged, but a square outline is drawn beneath it to indicate that the button can be safely dropped.
	The editor displays a small black arrow to the left of the list, indicating the new button’s position relative to an existing button.
	These markers are also displayed if you’re dragging a button within the Action Bar itself to relocate it.
	If you’re dragging a button from the Command list box, the mouse pointer changes to a "not" symbol whenever it’s over a nonresponsive area.
	If you drop a button when the "not" symbol is displayed, the Current Action Bar will be unaffected.
	If you’re dragging a button from the Current Action Bar list box, the mouse pointer changes to a garbage can whenever it’s outside of the list box.
	If you drop a button when this symbol is displayed, the button will be removed from the Current Action Bar list.
	If you're dragging a button from the Current Action Bar list box, the mouse pointer changed to a downward arrow whenever the "dropped" button will be moved into the Procomm Plus Command list box. If you place a customized icon in the Procomm Plus Command list box, it will be appended to the bottom of the list.


Driver

Software that controls a particular hardware device. For example, there are mouse drivers, keyboard drivers, video drivers, and communications drivers. Microsoft Windows makes extensive use of drivers for various tasks. DOS applications often make use of drivers as well.


Dynamic Data Exchange

A Windows protocol that allows one Windows application to communicate with another Windows application. Programs that support Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), typically have a simple list of commands that they will respond to, as well a list of commands they can use to request services from other programs.


Dynamic IP Address

An Internet address that is temporarily assigned to you by an Internet Service Provider when you logon. Some service providers assign a static IP address to each of there customers. A computer that is directly connected to the Internet through a local network will also have a static IP address.


Dynamic Link Protocols

Procomm Plus may be extended to include file transfer protocols that you write yourself, or that are provided by a third party. These specially-written modules are actually Windows-compatible .dlls that are given an extension of .dlp, and referred to as Dynamic Link Protocols or .dlp modules. If a .dlp is found within Procomm Plus’s programs directory, and is recognized as a valid protocol, it will automatically appear in the programs’ file transfer protocol list boxes, as well as in other protocol-related lists.

In fact, the Ind$file protocol included with Procomm Plus is implemented as a .dlp module!

For technical information on writing .dlp modules, please call the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS.


E-Mail

Electronic Mail. Messages, typically created off-line, sent electronically over a network to specific individuals.

See also Internet Mail.


EBIOS Redirector

A network communications API that allows a work station to access a network modem or serial device. Similar to the Int 14 redirector, but with more advanced features.

See Communications API.


Echo

The process of a character being typed, transmitted out the port, and then returned by either the remote computer, or the modem in offline state. The character can then be displayed on the monitor. This process is used in full duplex mode. In half duplex mode, the remote computer does not echo characters back to the local computer.

See also Half Duplex. See also Full Duplex.


Editing Keyboard Keys

To select a key, simply click on it, or move the focus to it with the Tab and cursor keys. The Key Map legend is updated to reflect the key’s mappings.

You can also select keys by pressing them. For more information, see The Editor Options.

To edit the selected key press the space bar, or click on it a second time. The Edit Mapped Key dialog appears.

To map a key combination, simply click on its Action list box and select the function it will perform when you press it in the Terminal window. After you’ve specified the key combination’s action, you can configure its Contents field as described in the next section, "Mapped Key Actions".

Mapped Key Actions

A mappable key combination can be defined for any one of seven different actions:

Unmapped

An Unmapped key combination performs no function.

Send Text

When you press a Send Text mapped key combination, Procomm Plus automatically transmits the characters you’ve entered in the Contents field. A host or remote computer connected to your machine "sees" these characters just as though you’d actually typed them yourself!

Control codes can be included for special purposes. For example, you can represent the [image] key being pressed with the characters ^M, or the [image] [image] sequence with the characters ^C.

You can also pause the transmission of the key combination’s text by embedding a pause character within the text. Each pause character inserts a half-second delay in the transmission of the Contents text. The tilde (~), or "curly dash" is the default pause character.

If you’re entering text that includes control sequences for a mainframe host, you may find it useful to edit a key’s Contents field in either decimal or hexadecimal format. You can select Character, Decimal or Hex in the Entry Options group to display characters as ASCII, decimal values or hexadecimal values, respectively. For more information, see The Entry Options Group.

The maximum length of the Contents string is 80 characters.

Text w/Echo

A Text w/Echo key combination works much like a Send Text key. However, if your port setting is half-duplex, the text will be echoed to the Terminal display as it is sent to the host.

Run Script

A Run Script key combination will execute an ASPECT script file. Enter the name of the script you wish to run in the Contents field. If the script is not located in the default script directory, you’ll need to specify a drive and path as well as a filename.

An extension is optional, but note that Procomm Plus’s handling of the script depends on how you specify the filename!

If you do not specify a file extension, Procomm Plus will search the default script directory for a compiled .wax file with the filename you entered. If the .wax file is found, its compile date and time are checked against that of the corresponding .was source file. If the source file is newer, Procomm Plus will attempt to re-compile the source file before executing the script.

If you specify a .wax file extension, Procomm Plus will load and run the compiled script without checking for a newer .was source file. However, if a .wax file is not found, Procomm Plus attempts to load and compile the corresponding .was source file.

If you specify a .was extension, Procomm Plus will recompile your script each time it’s run from the key combination, regardless of the date and time stamps on the respective files.

Run Program

A Run Program key combination can execute external Windows applications or DOS programs. If the program you wish to run is an .exe file, you don’t need to specify an extension. For other file types, such as .com, .bat or .pif, an extension is required. Also, if the program or application is not in your DOS PATH, you’ll need to specify a drive and path name.

Some DOS applications may require .pif files to operate properly under Windows.

Menu Command

You can configure a Menu Command key combination to execute any item from the Terminal window’s menu system. When the key or combination is pressed, the associated menu item executes just as though it had been selected from the menu normally.

When you specify Menu Command in a key combination ’s Action field, its Contents field becomes a drop-down list box. Click on the list box, and scroll through the displayed selections to find the menu item you want. Highlight it and press the space bar, or click on it with the mouse to select it.

Terminal Command

You can use a Terminal Command key combination to make "special keys" for certain terminal emulations more accessible.

When you specify Terminal Command in a key combination’s Action field, its Contents field becomes a drop-down list box. Click on the list box, and scroll through the displayed selections to find the command you want. The table below lists the emulations and their respective special commands:

Emulation	Command #	Default Key	Meaning
IBM 31xx	0		SEND
IBM 31xx	1		SEND LINE
IBM 31xx	2		SEND MESSAGE
Wyse 50	0		SEND
Televideo  and Wyse	1		FUNCT
AT&T 605/4410	0		User F-Key Mode
AT&T 605/4410	1		System F-Key Mode

The Entry Options Group

You can modify any of the mappable key combination’s Contents field values by clicking on them. If you’re editing a Send Text or Text w/Echo key combination, you may find it useful to take advantage of the editor’s alternate display modes. Selections in the Entry Options group allow you to specify how character values are entered and displayed in the editor.

The Entry Options settings also affect the Run Program and Run Script types. However, the Decimal and Hex modes are really intended only for editing Send Text and Text w/Echo keys.

You can switch between the three Entry Options settings without affecting the actual values of the Action or Contents fields. They are:

Character

If this option button is selected, the editor displays the Contents field values for the Send Text, Text w/Echo, Run Script and Run Program types in their normal character form, and allows you to type ASCII characters and control codes directly into a field.

To specify a character value of less than ASCII 32 in this mode, enter it as a control code. The caret character (^) indicates to the editor that the character following the caret will be part of a control code. For example, the characters ^S represent the keystroke [image] [image], ASCII value 19 decimal, while the characters ^@ represent a null, ASCII value 0.

See The ASCII Table for a complete ASCII Table, including the various control codes.

If you need to insert a literal caret into a string where it could act as a control, use the vertical bar character, ’|’, ASCII 124, to separate the caret from the character following it. For instance, the string ^|C would send a caret followed by an uppercase C.

Normally, if you need to insert a vertical bar in a string, type one as you would any other character. However, if you need to insert a literal vertical bar into a string after a caret, include a second vertical bar. For example, the string ^||C would transmit a caret, a single vertical bar and an uppercase C.

To insert character values greater than ASCII 126 in character mode, hold down the [image] key and then type the three-digit decimal value of the character on the keypad. Characters between ASCII 32 and 126 can also be entered in this fashion. Be sure you type the leading zero when it’s required or Windows will not return the correct character!

For your convenience, Procomm Plus translates a lowercase control code into its equivalent uppercase code. For example, the codes ^a and ^A are both transmitted as ^A, ASCII value 1 decimal.

To override this translation, insert a vertical bar between the caret and the lowercase character. For example, the string ^|a forces Procomm Plus to send the codes for a caret (^) and a lowercase letter a, decimal 094 097.

If a vertical bar is placed between two characters that cannot act as a control string, it’s removed. For instance, the vertical bar would be stripped from the string ^|3 since ^3 is not a valid control character.

Decimal

If this option button is selected, the editor accepts and displays the Contents field values for the Text, Run Script and Run Program types in three-digit ASCII decimal values. For example, the value for a carriage return is 013, while the British pound symbol has a value of 156.

Terminal or host system user manuals sometimes list terminal function key codes as decimal values. The editor’s Decimal display mode can simplify the task of entering such codes in the Contents fields.

Hex.

If this option button is selected, the editor accepts and displays the Contents field values for the Text, Run Script and Run Program types in two-digit ASCII hexadecimal values. Terminal or host system user manuals sometimes list terminal function key codes as hexadecimal values. The editor’s Hex display mode can simplify the task of entering such codes in the Contents fields.


Editing Kill Files

The Edit Kill Files dialog allows you to add, delete and edit your News Reader kill files, which can filter out articles from specific individuals or articles with specific subjects.

Adding a New Kill File

To add a new kill file to the list, click New. Procomm Plus prompts you for the name of the newsgroup that will use the new file.  Once you've entered the name, click OK to launch the ASPECT Editor.

Each line of the file should contain one entry in the form:

name :F

or

subject :S

where F stands for From and S stands for Subject.  These lines should contain the exact strings for author and subject that you wish to filter, just as they appear within the News Reader.  For example, to kill all messages from the author John Schultz, you would enter:

john schultz :F

Once you have completed editing your kill file, select Save from the ASPECT Editor File menu to save the file and then select Exit to close the editor.

Editing a Kill File

To edit the contents of an existing kill file, select the file in the Kill Files list and click Edit to open the ASPECT Editor. Once you have completed editing your kill file, select Save from the ASPECT Editor File menu to save the file and then select Exit to close the editor.

Deleting a Kill File

To delete an existing kill file, select the file in the Kill Files list and click Delete... Procomm Plus will not prompt you before deleting the file.

Refreshing the Kill File List

To refresh your Kill Files list after adding or deleting a kill file, click Refresh.


Editing Meta Keys

You can select a Meta Key group for editing by clicking on one of the Meta Key Select buttons, located at the top of the editor window. You can also select a Meta Key group by pressing the appropriate [image] -key combination, such as [image] [image] for the first group, [image] [image] for the second, and so on, or by highlighting it with the [image] or cursor keys and pressing the space bar.

Each of the four possible key combinations has its own Action drop-down list, Contents field and Labels field. The combinations are:

•	Alt-key.

•	Alt-Shift-key.

•	Alt-Ctrl-key.

•	Alt-Shift-Ctrl-key.

After you’ve selected a group to edit, the value of the Action, Contents and Label fields for each of the four combinations is displayed in the center of the editor window. The current Meta Key is also indicated in the Current Meta field at the lower left corner of the editor window.

Action Lists

There are seven actions that can be performed by any Meta Key:

Unmapped

An Unmapped Meta Key performs no function.

Send Text

When you press a Send Text Meta Key, Procomm Plus automatically transmits the characters you’ve entered in the Contents field. A host or remote computer connected to your machine "sees" these characters just as though you’d actually typed them yourself!

Control codes can be included for special purposes; for example, you can represent the [image] key being pressed with the characters ^M, or the [image] [image] sequence with the characters ^C.

You can also pause the transmission of the key’s text by embedding a pause character within the text. Each pause character inserts a half-second delay in the Meta Key’s text. The tilde (~), or "curly dash" is the default pause character.

If you’re entering text that includes control sequences for a mainframe host, you may find it useful to edit a Meta Key’s Contents field in either decimal or hexadecimal format. You can select Character, Decimal or Hex in the Entry Options group to display characters as ASCII, decimal values or hexadecimal values, respectively. For more information, see Entry Options Group.

The maximum length of the Contents string is 80 characters.

Text w/Echo

A Text w/Echo key works much like a Send Text key. However, if your port setting is half-duplex, the text will be echoed to the Terminal display as it is sent to the host.

Run Script

A Run Script Meta Key will execute an ASPECT file. Enter the name of the script you wish to run in the Contents field. If the script is not located in the default script directory, you’ll need to specify a drive and path as well as a filename.

An extension is optional, but note that Procomm Plus’s handling of the script depends on how you specify the filename!

If you do not specify a file extension, Procomm Plus will search the default script directory for a compiled .wax file with the filename you entered. If the .wax file is found, its compile date and time are checked against that of the corresponding .was source file. If the source file is newer, Procomm Plus will attempt to re-compile the source file before executing the script.

If you specify a .wax file extension, Procomm Plus will load and run the compiled script without checking for a newer .was source file. However, if a .wax file is not found, Procomm Plus attempts to load and compile the corresponding .was source file.

If you specify a .was extension, Procomm Plus will recompile your script each time it’s run from the Meta Key, regardless of the date and time stamps on the respective files.

Run Program

A Run Program Meta Key can execute external Windows applications or DOS programs. If the program you wish to run is an .exe file, you don’t need to specify an extension. For other file types, such as .com, .bat or .pif, an extension is required. Also, if the program or application is not in your DOS PATH, you’ll need to specify a drive and path name.

Some DOS applications may require .pif files to operate properly under Windows.

Menu Command

You can configure a Menu Command Meta Key to execute any item from the Terminal window’s menu system. When the key is pressed, the associated menu item executes just as though it had been selected from the menu normally.

When you specify Menu Command in a key’s Action field, its Contents field becomes a drop-down list box. Click on the list box, and scroll through the displayed selections to find the menu item you want. Highlight it and press the space bar, or click on it with the mouse to select it.

Terminal Command

You can use a Terminal Command Meta Key to make "special keys" for certain terminal emulations more accessible.

When you specify Terminal Command in a key’s Action field, its Contents field becomes a drop-down list box. Click on the list box, and scroll through the displayed selections to find the command you want. The table below lists the emulations and their respective special commands:

Emulation	Command #	Default Key	Meaning
IBM 31xx	0		SEND
IBM 31xx	1		SEND LINE
IBM 31xx	2		SEND MESSAGE
Wyse 50	0		SEND
Televideo  and Wyse	1		FUNCT
AT&T 605/ 4410	0		User F-Key  Mode
AT&T 605/ 4410	1		System F-Key  Mode
Meta Key Labels

Each Meta Key combination includes a Labels field. Procomm Plus displays the key’s Labels on its Meta Key button in the Terminal window, making it easier to recognize. The width of a key’s button is determined by your screen resolution and the Terminal window size; for best results, keep your labels as short as possible.

Entry Options Group

You can modify any of the four Contents field values by clicking on them, or by moving the input focus to them with the [image] key. If you’re editing a Send Text or Text w/Echo Meta Key, you may find it useful to take advantage of the editor’s alternate display modes. Selections in the Entry Options group allow you to specify how character values are entered and displayed in the editor.

The Entry Options settings also affect the Run Program and Run Script Meta Key types. However, the Decimal and Hex modes are really intended only for editing Send Text and Text w/ Echo keys.

You can switch between the three Entry Options settings without affecting the actual values of the various Meta Key fields. They are:

Character

If this option button is selected, the editor displays the Contents and Labels field values in their normal character form, and allows you to type ASCII characters and control codes directly into a field.

To specify a character value of less than ASCII 32 in this mode, enter it as a control code. The caret character (^) indicates to the editor that the character following the caret will be part of a control code. For example, the characters ^S represent the keystroke [image] [image], ASCII value 19 decimal, while the characters ^@ represent a null, ASCII value 0.

See ASCII Table for a complete ASCII Table, including the various control codes.

If you need to insert a literal caret into a string where it could act as a control, use the vertical bar character, ’|’, ASCII 124, to separate the caret from the character following it. For instance, the string ^|C would send a caret followed by an uppercase C.

Normally, if you need to insert a vertical bar in a string, type one as you would any other character. However, if you need to insert a literal vertical bar into a string after a caret, include a second vertical bar. For example, the string ^||C would transmit a caret, a single vertical bar and an uppercase C.

To insert character values greater than ASCII 126 in character mode, hold down the [image] key and then type the three-digit decimal value of the character on the keypad. Characters between ASCII 32 and 126 can also be entered in this fashion. Be sure you type the leading zero when it’s required or Windows will not return the correct character!

For your convenience, Procomm Plus translates a lowercase control code into its equivalent uppercase code. For example, the codes ^a and ^A are both transmitted as ^A, ASCII value 1 decimal.

To override this translation, insert a vertical bar between the caret and the lowercase character. For example, the string ^|a forces Procomm Plus to send the codes for a caret (^) and a lowercase letter a, decimal 094 097.

If a vertical bar is placed between two characters that cannot act as a control string, it’s removed. For instance, the vertical bar would be stripped from the string ^|3 since ^3 is not a valid control character.

Decimal

If this option button is selected, the editor accepts and displays the Contents and Label field values in three-numeral ASCII decimal values. For example, the value for a carriage return is 013, while the British pound symbol has a value of 156.

Terminal or host system user manuals sometimes list terminal function key codes as decimal values. The editor’s Decimal display mode can simplify the task of entering such codes in the Contents fields.

Hex

If this option button is selected, the editor accepts and displays the Contents and Label field values in two-digit ASCII hexadecimal values. Terminal or host system user manuals sometimes list terminal function key codes as hexadecimal values; the editor’s Hex display mode can simplify the task of entering such codes in the Contents fields.


Editing Multiple Documents with the ASPECT Editor

The ASPECT Editor supports the Multiple Document Interface (MDI), which allows you to open and edit more than one document at a time. You’ll find this feature quite useful if you need to reference one file as you edit another, or if you need to copy portions of text from one file to another.

Each file you open in the editor will be displayed in its own window. These document windows behave much like application windows. For example, in Windows you can switch quickly between tasks by pressing [image] [image]. In the ASPECT Editor, you can switch quickly between document windows by pressing [image] [image]. The table below lists the document control actions available in the editor:

To Do This...	Do This...
Switch to a different document window.	If the document window is visible, click on it with the mouse. Otherwise, select the file you want from the Window menu. You can also use [image] [image] to cycle through the various document windows.
Minimize a document window.	Click on the document window’s down arrow button, located on the right end of its title bar.
Maximize a document window.	Click on the document window’s up arrow button, located on the right end of its title bar.
Restore a minimized document window.	Double click on its icon, or select the document from the Window menu.
Tile the open document windows.	Click on the Tile button on the Action Bar, or select one of the Tile options from the Window menu.
Move a document window.	Click and drag on its title bar, just as you would an application window in Windows itself. Note that you cannot move a document window outside of the ASPECT Editor’s main window.
Resize a document window.	Position the mouse cursor over an edge or corner of the document window; the mouse cursor will change to a double arrow indicating the directions you can stretch or shrink the window. Drag the window to its new size.
Close a document window.	Press [image] [image], or double click on the document window’s control button on the left end of its title bar. If you have unsaved changes in the file, the ASPECT Editor will prompt you before closing the file.


Editing Scheduled Tasks

To modify a scheduled task, select it by highlighting it. Scheduler updates its Program and Arguments fields to reflect the task’s settings. It also reports the task’s execution time, date and frequency.

Enter any changes that you want in the Program or Arguments fields. To modify the task’s execution time, date or frequency, click on Time & Date to access the Time & Date dialog. See Using the Time & Date Dialog for more information about this dialog.

When you’re satisfied with the task’s new settings, click on Change to update its settings in the scheduled task list.

To delete a scheduled task, select it by highlighting it, then click on Delete. Scheduler will prompt to confirm your request before removing the task from the list.


Editing a Group

To edit an existing Connection Directory group, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys to select it. Click on the Edit Group button or select the Edit | Edit Group... menu item to open the Group Editor dialog.

The name of the group appears in the Group Name edit field. To change it, click in the field and edit the text. The group name can be up to 40 characters in length.

The group’s current members appear in the Group Members list. The Available Entries list displays the directory entries that you can move into the group.

Select an entry in either list by clicking on it, or by highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys. You can select multiple entries by holding down the [image] key as you click on them.

To move the selected entries from the Available Entries list into the Group Members list, click on the right arrow button. To remove an entry from the Group Members list, select it and click on the left arrow button. The entry is returned to the Available Entries list.

When you’re satisfied with the group’s name and members, click on OK to accept them and return to the main directory window. When you return to the directory window, the group’s new values are reflected in the Entries list.

To close the editor without saving any changes you may have made in the group, click on Cancel.


Editing a QWK Reply

From time to time, you may reply to a message, save it and then later find you need to update the reply with new text.

To edit a previously saved reply, select Areas | Replies (Outgoing Messages) and display the Message List. Highlight the reply you want to edit and click on Ok. You can also choose Replies from the Area List dialog.

The viewer displays the reply you chose in the message window.

Now select Messages | Compose/Edit Messages or click on the Compose/Edit Message icon on the Action Bar. The viewer displays the reply text in the mesage entry dialog, and you can modify the header fields and message text as needed.

Finally, click on the Save Message Action Bar button to save the message.


Editing a Translate Table

The Translate Table Editor supports three different entry modes for table values. You can easily switch to the mode you prefer by selecting the appropriate option button in the Entry Type group, without affecting the table contents.

Entry Type

The Entry Type selections are:

Character

The Character mode is the editor’s default mode. It is useful if you’re typing ASCII characters or control codes directly into a field. If you need to enter a value less than ASCII 32, use the caret "^" to form a control code. For example, the characters ^S represent the keystroke [image] [image], while the characters ^@ represent a null.

For your convenience, the editor treats a lowercase alphabetical character included in a control code as its uppercase equivalent. For example, the codes ^a and ^A are both transmitted as ^A, an ASCII 01.

To enter characters greater than ASCII 31, type the characters from the keyboard. If the character doesn’t exist on your keyboard, select Decimal mode and enter the three-digit decimal value. As mentioned before, you can switch back and forth between the three modes without affecting the table’s contents. This can help you determine the character represented by each value.

To insert characters greater than ASCII 126 in character mode, hold down the [image] key, press the keypad zero and then type the three-digit decimal character on the keypad. Characters between ASCII 32 and 126 can also be entered in this fashion. Be sure to enter the leading zero, or Windows will not return the correct character.

If you want to strip a character in Character mode, enter the characters "^@", without quotations, in the edit field corresponding to the value to be stripped.

Decimal

In Decimal mode, the editor displays table values as three-digit decimal values. You’ll probably find the Decimal mode to be much easier than using the [image] -keypad method for entering character values greater than ASCII 126. It is also quite useful if you’re referencing character values from an ASCII Table, such as the one that appears in The ASCII Table.

If you want to strip a character in Decimal mode, enter a zero "0", without quotations, in the edit field corresponding to the value to be stripped.

Hex

In Hex mode, the editor displays table values as two-digit ASCII hexadecimal values. This mode can be helpful if you’re referencing a terminal or host system’s documentation, for control code information, since many such manuals list these codes in hexadecimal values.

If you want to strip a character in Hex mode, enter a zero "0", without quotations, in the edit field corresponding to the value to be stripped.


Editing an Action Bar

After you’ve created a new Action Bar or loaded an existing .pwb file into the editor, select Edit | Edit Action Bar... from the menu. The main editing dialog appears. The editing dialog’s most prominent features are two scrolling list boxes, each of which contains one or more icon buttons. The Procomm Plus Command list box contains all of the menu commands available within the Procomm Plus's communication window as Action Bar buttons.

The Terminal window's commands are selected by default if you created a new Action Bar. However, you can select a different communication set by clicking on the List icons for for list box. You can also select User Defined in the list if you want to use buttons that you've previously created and saved in the editor.

Included in each set of buttons in the Procomm Plus Command list is a blank "User-Defined Icon" which you can customize for a variety of purposes. The Current Action Bar list box displays the buttons currently included in the Action Bar you’re editing.

Between the two list boxes are two directional arrow buttons. These buttons act upon the currently selected Action Bar buttons within the lists. The button pointing right copies the highlighted Procomm Plus Command button into the Current Action Bar list, while the button pointing left removes the highlighted button from the Current Action Bar list.

The editing window also allows you to "drag and drop: buttons. See Dragging Buttons for more information.

A mouse is required to use the editing dialog efficiently. See Using the Action Bar Editor for detailed descriptions of using the Action Bar Editor window.


Editing the File Clipboard's Filename List

At any time, you can edit the filenames that appear in the clipboard window’s list box. To modify a filename in the list, select it by clicking on it or highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys. The filename is automatically displayed in the edit field; just click in or [image] to the field and make any changes you want. Click on Add to place the new filename in the list.

If you modify a filename and add it to the list, the original filename is left unchanged. You’ll need to highlight it again and click on Remove if you don’t want it included in the list.

To remove one or more filenames from the list, select them, then click on Remove. If you want to remove all of the filenames, you can either select them all and click on Remove, or click on Clear button. The File Clipboard does not prompt before removing or clearing filenames from the list.


Editor

A tool or application that allows you to create, edit, and view files such ASPECT scripts, fax documents, and the Caller Information database.


Electronic Support

Quarterdeck provides free technical support through the CompuServe Information Service and the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS, 24 hours a day, every day of the year. Messages can be transmitted through private e-mail or posted in public discussion areas.

If you’re submitting a technical question electronically, be sure to include as much information as possible. If applicable, you should also include the information requested in Before You Call....

If you’re posting a message for public discussion, do not include your product serial number or other sensitive information.

Over the Internet

Connect to our home page on the Web at www.qdeck.com and view all of the latest in helpful technical and product information. Not only will you find information regarding our products, but you will also find links to additional technical resources.

Telnet to the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS at bbs.qdeck.com and access all of the latest technical documents, or leave messages for Technical Support.

After connecting to our FTP site at ftp.datastorm.com, you will be able to access the most current technical documents, and our frequently asked questions or .faq files.

QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS

Quarterdeck’s Bulletin Board System provides the latest technical information, and also offers technical support. Once you’ve logged on to the BBS, press "M" at the main menu to go to the Message Area, then follow the instructions on posting Technical Support questions.

For a step-by-step explanation of how to connect to the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS, see Placing Your First Call.

CompuServe

We maintain a support forum on CompuServe specifically to answer your questions! In the Quarterdeck Forum, you can exchange information and solve problems with experts. You’ll also find a wealth of technical information and a variety of utilities available for downloading from the forum’s libraries.

If you’re already a CompuServe member, just type GO Quarterdeck at any CompuServe prompt to enter our support forum. If you’re not a CompuServe member, the Technical Support Guide discusses a free introductory membership.


Elements of the FTP Client Window

The FTP Client Window can be divided into three separate areas:

At the top of the window are the menus and the Action Bar. See The FTP Client's Menus and Action Bar for more information.

The central portion of the window is the local and remote work areas. See Local and Remote Work Area for more information.

The lower portion of the window gives you the status of your FTP session. Connection Progress displays a play-by-play account, and can be expanded for closer examination. Look to the Status Bar for the current event of the FTP session. See FTP Client: The Status Area for more information.


Elements of the News Reader Window

Like other Procomm Plus  communications windows, the News Reader window is divided into three horizontal components:

The top segment contains a title bar and standard Windows control buttons, a menu bar, and the Action Bar. See The News Reader's Menus and Action Bar for more information.

The middle section is the News Reader windows’s display area: a folder list appears on the left side and an article list appears on the right. See The News Reader Display Area for more information.

The bottom segment displays the News Reader's Status Line, which is discussed in The News Reader's Status Line.


Elements of the Terminal Window

This topic explains the basic elements of Procomm Plus’s main window, called the Terminal window. If you haven't already opened the Terminal window, you'll need to do so before we can begin exploring it. Just double click on the Procomm Plus Terminal icon in the Procomm Plus Start menu group.

After Procomm Plus loads, it displays its Terminal window:

Because of its many features, the Procomm Plus Terminal window may at first seem intimidating. However, it’s engineered to be powerful, easy to use and flexible.

The Terminal window divides visually into three horizontal segments:

•	A top segment, including a title bar, the standard Windows control buttons, a menu bar, and a row of list boxes and icon buttons.

•	A middle segment, including a display area and a graphical frame and background, and a scroll bar control on the right side of the window. See The Terminal Display Area for more details.

•	A bottom segment, including a row of push button Meta Keys and two rows of fields containing text or graphical displays. See The Status Line Area for more details.

To learn more about customizing the Terminal window, see Customizing the Terminal Window.


Elements of the Terminal Window See Also
Elements of the Terminal Window

The Terminal Display Area

The Status Line Area

Customizing the Terminal Window


Elements of the Web Browser Window

By now you're probably familiar with the Terminal window and its different elements. Like the Terminal window, the Web Browser window consists of three horizontal components:

The top segment, just like the Terminal window, contains the title bar and standard Windows control buttons and title bar, a menu bar, and the Action Bar. It’s Action Bar is, however, different from the Terminal window’s in two ways:

The Address field below the standard Action Bar.

This field contains the address of the currently displayed Web page. Additionally, you may drop down this list box for quick access to previously viewed pages.

The world logo in the upper right corner.

This animated graphic spins while the Web Browser window is processing data from the Internet.

The common uses of the title bar and menus were discussed in Common Window Elements, but the Web Browser window’s menus are covered in The Web Browser's Menus and Action Bar.

The middle section is the Web Browser’s display area. If the page you are currently viewing contains more data than is possible to display in the Web Browser window, a scrollbar appears on the right hand edge of the display area. See The Web Browser Display Area for more information.

The lower element of the Web Browser window, by default, consists of two rows of graphical display fields: the Quick Select Line, and the Status Line. See The Web Browser's Status Line Area for more information.


Emulation-specific Settings

If the emulation you’ve selected supports special or advanced options, you can click on the Advanced... button to view or modify them. Some of the emulations supported by Procomm Plus are very closely related to one another; we’ll group them together in the discussions:


Encoded files

You can attach any kind of file to your mail messages, even images or executables. However, before your attached files can be sent as mail they have to be converted to a form that mail can handle. This is called encoding.

There are two popular encoding methods: UUencoding and MIME encoding. By default, the mail client uses UUencoding for files you attach to messages. However, MIME encoding is also available; see Default Attachment Encoding.


Encryption and Decryption

Encryption is a process by which data is encoded or scrambled into an unreadable form for security purposes. Decryption reverses the process, converting encoded or scrambled data back to its usable form.


Error Correction

A common feature of data transfer, error correction checks for corruption of the data as it is received. If a problem is found, replacement data is requested. Uses of error correction include: error correcting modems, network transmissions, and many file transfer protocols.


Error Messages from the Web Browser

Due to the constantly changing nature of the Web, some Web pages may have invalid hyperlinks. Similarly, a Web page may contain invalid pointers to inline images. Whenever the Web Browser is unable to complete an action, it displays the Errors dialog.

The Web Browser displays an error if you click on a hyperlink that points to a non-existent file or Web server. Additionally, if a Web page contains an inline image that does not exist, or is not in the proper directory, Procomm Plus displays the error message sent from the Web server in this dialog.


Escape Sequence

Characters used by terminals to indicate that a command will follow, as opposed to the regular data flow which simply needs to be displayed on the screen. Escape Sequences are so named because many terminals actually use the "escape" character as part of the sequence. ^[ is the ASCII representation for the escape character.


Esprit 3 (101 key)
This is the format of the Esprit 3 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The NumLock key is mapped to Page, see below.  If user toggles NumLock to normal use, the ScrollLock key is also mapped to Page.

Note:  In this emulation, the keypad keys are used to support the editing keys above the keypad on the actual terminal.

Procomm Plus Key	   Esprit 3 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
F11	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
Shift F1	Function 12 (Shift F1)	^A`^M
Shift F2	Function 13 (Shift F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F3	Function 14 (Shift F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F4	Function 15 (Shift F4)	^Ac^M
Shift F5	Function 16 (Shift F5)	^Ad^M
Shift F6	Function 17 (Shift F6)	^Ae^M
Shift F7	Function 18 (Shift F7)	^Af^M
Shift F8	Function 19 (Shift F8)	^Ag^M
Shift F9	Function 20 (Shift F9)	^Ah^M
Shift F10	Function 21 (Shift F10)	^Ai^M
Shift F11	Function 22 (Shift F11)	^Aj^M
F12	Home	^^	[ 1E ]
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^[I
Enter	Enter	^M
Num Lock	Page	^[K
or Scroll Lock
Ctrl-NumLock	Shift Page	^[J
or Ctrl-Scroll Lock
End	Delete Line	^[R
Ctrl-End	Shift Delete Line	^[O
Delete	Delete Character	^[W
Ctrl-Delete	Shift Delete Character	^[r
Keypad 5	Insert Line	^[E
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Shift Insert Line	^[N
Insert	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Insert	Shift Insert Character	^[q
Keypad Home	Home	^^	[ 1E ]
Shift Keypad Home	Clear Page	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad Home	Clear All	^[*
Page Up	Clear Line	^[Y
Page Down	Clear to End of Line	^[T
Ctrl-Page Up	Clear to End of Page	^[y
Ctrl-Page Down	Clear EoL (NUL )	^[t
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L


Esprit 3 (84 key)
This is the format of the Esprit 3 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      Esprit 3 Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
Shift F1	Function 12 (Shift F1)	^A`^M
Shift F2	Function 13 (Shift F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F3	Function 14 (Shift F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F4	Function 15 (Shift F4)	^Ac^M
Shift F5	Function 16 (Shift F5)	^Ad^M
Shift F6	Function 17 (Shift F6)	^Ae^M
Shift F7	Function 18 (Shift F7)	^Af^M
Shift F8	Function 19 (Shift F8)	^Ag^M
Shift F9	Function 20 (Shift F9)	^Ah^M
Shift F10	Function 21 (Shift F10)	^Ai^M
Shift Ctrl-F1	Function 22 (Shift F11)	^Aj^M
Ctrl-F2	Home	^^	[ 1E ]
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^[I
Enter	Enter	^M
Insert	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Insert	Shift Insert Character	^[q
Delete	Delete Line	^[W
Ctrl-Delete	Shift Delete Character	^[r
Page Down	Line Erase	^[T
Ctrl-Page Down	Shift Line Erase	^[t
Page Up	Page Erase	^[Y
Ctrl-Page Up	Shift Page Erase	^[y
End	Delete Line	^[R
Ctrl-End	Shift Delete Line	^[O
Keypad 5	Insert Line	^[E
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Shift Insert Line	^[N
Scroll Lock	Page	^[K
Ctrl-Scroll Lock	Shift Page	^[J
Home	Home Cursor	^^
Shift Home	Clear Page	^Z
Ctrl-Home	Clear All	^[*
Cursor Up	Clear Line	^[Y
Shift Cursor Up	Clear to End of Line	^[T
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Clear to End of Page	^[y
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Clear EoL ( NUL )	^[t
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Page Erase	^[Y
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^K
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home Cursor	^^	[ 1E ]
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Insert Line	^[E
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Line Erase	^[T
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^V
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Delete Line	^[R
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete Character	^[W


Exporting Caller Information Editor Entries
Exporting Caller ID Directory Editor Entries

To save your Caller ID Directory Editor entries into a delimited record file, select the File | Export... menu item to display the Export Directory Entries dialog.

Available Fields list and  Field Order list

This dialog allows you to specify the fields you want included in the entry records and the order in which those fields appear in a record. The fields you can select are displayed in the Available Fields list; the currently-selected fields appear in the Field Order list, in the order they’ll be written to the record(s).

To add a field to the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing towards the Field Order list. The field is removed from the Available Fields list and added to the list of selected fields.

To remove a field from the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing towards the Available Fields list. The field is removed from the list of selected fields, and reappears in the Available Fields list.

You can specify the format of an exported record by taking advantage of several controls in the dialog:

Export quoted strings

If you want all text fields exported as quoted strings, enable this check box. Otherwise, exported fields will be separated only by the Field Delimiter, as explained below.

Field Delimiter

This setting determines the character used to separate entry fields within each record. You can specify a tab or comma character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the edit field.

Record Delimiter.

This setting determines the value(s) used to separate the exported records. You can specify a Carriage Return/Line Feed pair, a Carriage Return or a Line Feed character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the associated edit field.

Export...

When you’re satisfied with the Field Order values you’ve selected and the control settings, click on Export... to generate the entry records.

Use Clipboard

If you enable the Use Clipboard check box, the entry records will be copied to the Windows Clipboard when you click on Export... Otherwise, a standard File Save dialog is displayed, where you can specify a path and name for the records file.

Cancel

To return to the Caller ID Directory Editor window without exporting a record file, click on Cancel.


Exporting Directory Entries

To save your Connection Directory entries in a delimited record file, select the File | Export Directory... menu item. The Export Connection Directory dialog is displayed, allowing you to specify the fields you want included in the entry records and the order in which those fields appear in a record. The fields you can select are displayed in the Available list; the currently-selected fields appear in the Field Order list, in the order they’ll be written to the record(s).

To add a field to the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing to the Field Order list. The field is removed from the Available list and added to the list of selected fields.

To remove a field from the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing to the Available list. The field is removed from the list of selected fields, and re-appears in the Available list.

You can specify the format of an exported record by taking advantage of several controls in the dialog:

Export quoted strings.

If you want all text fields exported as quoted strings, enable this check box. Otherwise, exported fields will be separated only by the Field Delimiter, as explained below.

Field Delimiter.

This setting determines the character used to separate entry fields within each record. You can specify a tab or comma character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the edit field.

Record Delimiter.

This setting determines the value(s) used to separate the exported records. You can specify a Carriage Return/Line Feed pair, a Carriage Return or a Line Feed character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the associated edit field.

If you enable the Use Clipboard check box, the entry records will be copied to the Windows Clipboard when you click on Export. Otherwise, a standard File Save dialog is displayed, where you can specify a path and name for the records file.

When you’re satisfied with the Field Order values you’ve selected and the control settings, click on Export... to generate the entry records. To return to the Connection Directory window without exporting a record file, click on Cancel.


Extended ASCII

See ASCII.


FAQ

Stands for Frequently Asked Questions. A FAQ is a type of document commonly found on the Internet, that contains basic information about a given topic.


FECM

See Fax Error Correction Mode.


FTP

File Transfer Protocol. FTP is a specific protocol designed to transfer files over TCP/IP networks such as the Internet. Procomm Plus includes an FTP Client.

See Client.


FTP Address and Logon Information

Before you can logon to an FTP host with the FTP Client, you'll need the address of the host that you want to access. You can obtain FTP host addresses from a variety of sources. For your convenience, Procomm Plus includes a Connection Directory file with FTP entries you can use to connect to many interesting FTP hosts on the Internet.

The directory filename is internet.dir. Access the File | Open Connection Directory... menu item, select it in the browsing dialog and click on OK to load it.

You may also need a unique user identification and password assigned by the system or its operator. However, many FTP host sites offer "anonymous" logon privileges.

The Host IP Address

The Client IP Address

FTP Logon


FTP Client Configuration

The default settings for the FTP Client are the optimum settings for most situations. Typically, you'll only need to configure your address and logon information to begin using the FTP Client. The following topics discuss in detail the settings you're most likely to need to change to adapt to a particular FTP host system.

For a more general overview of the FTP configuration options, see FTP Options and The FTP Entry Class.

Your TCP/IP Connection

File Transfer Mode

Passive Mode

Host Type

Logon Timeout


FTP Client: Local and Remote Work Area

The central portion of the FTP Client window is its main work space. Split vertically, it displays the directories and files available on your system on the left side and those available on the host system on the right. Each side also provides controls that allow you to perform a variety of functions on its respective system.

FTP Client: The Local Section

FTP Client: The Remote Section


FTP Client: The Local Section

To Do This...     Do This...

Using the Local Section

Create a directory	Click on the Create button, and specify the name of the new directory. It will be created as a subdirectory of the current directory.
Delete a directory	Select the directory to be deleted by clicking on it or highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the Delete button. A directory cannot be deleted unless it contains no files or subdirectories.
Select one or more files	Click on the filename, or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys. You can select multiple files by holding down the [image] key as you click on them; to select multiple files from the keyboard, hold down the [image] key as you move the highlight bar over them with the cursor keys. If you double click on a filename, the FTP Client will attempt to run or view the file. If you right click on a filename, the FTP Client will display the file's time and date stamp and size in bytes on the Statuls Line.
Display files by name or extension pattern	By default, the FTP Client displays all of the files contained in the current directory. If you want to display only files whose names or extensions match a specific pattern, enter the pattern in the Filter field and press [image]. You can use DOS wildcards to define the filter. For example, you could user *.txt to view only text files.
Transfer a file from one computer to another.	Select the file you want to transfer by clicking on it or highlighting it with the cursor keys. Click on the Copy button. The FTP Client starts the transfer, and the file transfer progress window is displayed. If you’re using a mouse, you can select multiple files by holding the [image] button down as you click on your selections. For selection with the keyboard, hold the [image] key down as you scroll through your choices with the cursor keys.
Delete a file	Select the file(s) you want to delete, and click the Delete button. A dialog appears to confirm that you want to delete the file. If you have more than one file selected, you can choose Yes to delete one at a time, or Yes to All to delete the files as a group.
Rename a file	Select the file you want to rename, click on the Rename button, and supply the new filename. The button is disabled if you select more than one file.
View a file	Select the file you want to view or run and click the View button. The button is disabled if you select more than one file. For more information, see Viewing, Displaying or Running files.


FTP Client: The Remote Section

The Remote section, located on the right side, contains list boxes and controls identical to those in the Local section. However, its lists remain empty until you’ve connected to a host system.

Once you’ve received file and directory information from a host system, you can use the standard browsing techniques to select files or directories from the Remote section as if they were on your computer.

The Remote buttons work similarly to those in the Local group, but they affect files and directories on the Remote computer. Because the files and directories are on the host system, there are differences to be aware of when using the Remote functions. For example, although control buttons such as Create or Delete will be enabled as you select files or directories, your ability to perform these functions will depend entirely on the rights granted to you by the host system.

If you select a file on the host system and click View, the FTP Client will transfer the file to a temporary directory on your local system before processing it as described in Viewing, Displaying or Running files.


FTP Client: The Status Area

The bottom section of the FTP Client window gives you the status of your FTP session. It includes the Connection Progress list box and the FTP Client's Status Line.

Connection Progress

The Connection Progress, located beneath the Local and Remote work area, displays the FTP commands sent by the FTP Client and information sent by the host in response. You may find this information helpful if you're having difficulty making a connection with a particular host system.

The Status Line

The FTP Client's Status Line displays messages about the current activity of your FTP session.


FTP Client: Viewing or Running files

The View button displays or activates files. When selected, it will take one of three actions, depending on the file type that is highlighted.

Associate

In Windows, some applications are associated with certain file types. This means that if a type of document is double clicked from the Desktop, for example, Windows knows which application to run in order to properly display the file. An example of this would be the association of Microsoft WordPad with files that have a .txt extension.

If you select an associated file from the FTP Client and click View, the associated application is launched, and the file is displayed. For help in associating a file type with an application, refer to you Micorsoft Windows documentation.

Run

If the file is itself an executable or an application, it is launched.

Display

If the file is neither associated with an application, nor an application itself, the file is displayed in the current viewer. The ASPECT Editor is the default viewer.


FTP Clients and FTP Hosts

An FTP connection over the Internet creates a "Host/Client" relationship between your computer and a remote system. As the term implies, one system, the FTP host, offers services to the other system, the FTP client.

FTP Client

When Procomm Plus's FTP Client logs on to an FTP host, it negotiates operating conditions, then requests a listing of the files available in the FTP host's current file directory. Once the list of file is retrieved, the FTP Client displays them in its Remote file list box. You can then select host files to transfer to your system, browse other host directories, or select files on your system for transfer to the host.

Like other FTP client applications, Procomm Plus's FTP Client can only connect to FTP host systems. It cannot connect directly to another FTP client system, or any other kind of system. The FTP Client's sole purpose is to allow you to access files and directories on an FTP host system for file transfers and disk management.

FTP Host

An FTP host is a central computer that allows FTP clients to logon with a user ID and a password and access files. An FTP host uses highly specialized software that allows multiple FTP clients to call in simultaneously. An FTP host cannot originate a connection; it only accepts connection requests from FTP clients, or from World Wide Web Browsers that support FTP.

There are many types of Internet hosts. However, only an FTP host allows you to logon with an FTP Client and transfer files.


FTP Entry Class See Also
FTP Entry Class

Step-by-Step: Adding an FTP-class Entry

FTP-class Settings


FTP Logon

Once you have contacted an FTP host, you must logon before you can access the files. Some sites can only be accessed if you have an account with a password and user ID assigned by the system operator. To access these sites, you'll need to contact the operators for the logon information you need. However, many FTP hosts offer "anonymous" logons.

Anonymous Logon

Many FTP hosts make files available for public access by allowing anonymous logons, in which an FTP client uses the word "anonymous" for a user ID and your E-Mail address for a password.

Do not be misled by the term "anonymous"!  Since each packet of information crossing the Internet includes the return address of the sending computer, the FTP host can always determine your Internet address. In fact, some FTP host systems will allow you to use your name and an "@" symbol, such as fredjg@, since it can derive the remainder of your address from a data packet. Also, many hosts test the E-Mail address you provide before giving you access to the system.

Procomm Plus's Connection Directory is designed to make logging on to an FTP host as easy as possible, whether the host requires an assigned userid and password or allows anonymous logons. For more information, see FTP-class Settings.


FTP Options

The Internet, FTP Options settings group allows you to specify how the Procomm Plus FTP Client window interacts with a host system, as well as some of the client's basic behavior.

You can save and reference the settings in the group as an option set, which allows you to create multiple "profiles" and select them quickly from within a Connection Directory entry or from an ASPECT script.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.

General Options

Transfer Options

Directory Options


FTP-class Settings

The settings for an FTP-class entry are divided into three groups:

Entry Info

Basic Options

FTP Options


FTP-class Settings See Also
FTP-class Settings

Entry Info

Basic Options

FTP Options


FTP-class: Basic Options

The FTP-class Basic Options settings determine how an FTP connection made with the entry will be handled.

Default Host Directory

If you want to access a specific directory on the host when you first connect, enter the directory path in this field.

Host Type

The FTP Client can detect most host operating systems automatically. However, you can specify a particular system type by clicking on the Host Type drop down list box and select the system from the list.

In most cases, you should leave this field to its default value of Auto Detect.

Passive Mode

The FTP Client must use special connection negotiation methods if you’re connecting to a host system through a "firewall". Enable the Passive Mode check box if your connection passes through a firewall.

Passive Mode is not supported on all FTP servers, especially older systems.

Transfer Mode

The FTP Client supports Binary, ASCII and L8 file transfers, and automatically selects the appropriate file transfer type for each transfer.

In most cases, you should leave this field to its default of [Current].


FTP-class: Entry Info

The fields in the FTP-class Entry Info group are used to specify an address for the FTP server, as well as how the FTP Client should negotiate the logon process:

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Host/IP Address

The Internet name or IP address that the FTP Client should use when connecting to the host system.

Company

The company name for this entry. It is not required to connect.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.

Anonymous logon

If you want to logon to the host system anonymously, enable this check box. The FTP Client will use the Anonymous Password you’ve specified in the Internet, FTP Options, General Options panel in Setup to complete the FTP logon automatically.

Logon Info...

Click on this button to open a dialog where you can specify logon information for the FTP site you’re calling:

The Logon Info values are very convenient if you’re using an ASPECT script to automate your connection to a host system. Each logon string value is available in an ASPECT system variable after the Connection Directory has dialed the entry. This allows you to easily reference them from within a script.

Password

An entry’s Password logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $PASSWORD system variable.

User ID

An entry’s User ID logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $USERID system variable.

Miscellaneous

An entry’s Miscellaneous logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $MISC system variable.

Click on OK to accept the values and return to the main Connection Directory window. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


FTP-class: FTP Options

The FTP Options settings determine how an FTP connection made with the entry will be handled.

FTP Options

If you’ve created a custom Internet, FTP Options named set in Setup, you can click on this control to select it from the list. The default selection is normal ftp.

Logon Timeout

By default, FTP Client will consider a logon attempt unsuccessful if 60 seconds elapse without a response from the host. If you prefer a different time-out period, enter it in this field. Values from 0 to 999 seconds are allowed.

FTP Port

By default, the FTP Client uses the standard FTP port, which is 21. If you need to use a different port when connecting to this entry, click in this field and enter it.

Do not alter this setting unless you are specifically required to do so by an FTP site. Most FTP sites use the standard port, 21.


Fax

Select Setup | Answer Options | Fax to answer only incoming fax calls. Procomm Plus will disconnect all incoming data and voice calls. This command is only available if you have a fax modem connection.


Fax Annotation

The ability to overlay graphics and text on a fax-format document.


Fax Back

A system where a caller requests one or more faxes and then leaves a fax number. The FaxBack server then dials the number and faxes the requested document(s). The Procomm Plus Host script supports this feature.


Fax Cleaning

The Fax Viewer’s built-in fax cleaning technology can help you improve the image quality of faxes you’ve received. To clean a fax, select the Tools | Cleanup Fax... menu item or click on the Cleanup Fax button to open the Fax Cleanup dialog.

Range

By default, the Fax Viewer preselects the All option, meaning that the cleaning engine will attempt to clean the entire fax. However, if you selected specific pages in the fax you can click on the Selected Page(s) option button to apply the cleaning process only to those pages. You can also specify a range of consecutive pages by clicking on Pages and entering the appropriate values in the From and To fields.

Fax Cleaning Options

Erase extraneous fax columns

If this option is enabled, the cleaning engine will attempt to detect and remove "fax columns," which are vertical streaks caused by scanning problems in the transmitting fax machine. The option is enabled by default.

Fax cleanup

If this option is enabled, the cleaning engine will attempt to detect and remove graphical "litter" in the fax. You can select a cleaning factor of Light, Medium or Heavy.

If you select the Light factor, the cleaning engine will affect mainly small, isolated spots in the image. With the Medium factor, the engine will process isolated spots as well as short, thin lines and small blotches. The Heavy factor provides the most cleaning, but can damage delicate features of the image.

Fax cleanup is enabled by default, with a factor of Medium.

Clean carefully around text

If this option is enabled, the cleaning engine will locate areas in the image that contain text and graphics. In these areas, the engine will use a lower cleaning factor than the one you selected for the image as a whole. For example, if you've selected the Heavy factor but enabled Clean carefully around text, the engine will clean text areas with a Medium factor.

Careful cleaning is enabled by default; it's highly recommended for "dirty" faxes that contain small fonts or delicate graphics.

When you’re satisfied with the Range and other settings you’ve selected, click on OK to begin cleaning your fax. To close the dialog without cleaning the fax, click on Cancel.

Like other image-enhancement techniques, fax cleaning is not an exact science. You’ll need to experiment with the Fax Cleaning Options until you find the setting that works best for you. The cleaning engine does not process the first 30 scan lines of the image, in order to protect the fax headers which are typically printed in very small fonts.


Fax Cover Sheet

An optional signature sheet that usually includes some graphics, as well as information about the fax, such as the date, the name of the receiver, and the number of pages. In the Procomm Plus cover sheet templates, some of the information fields remain blank until the fax is created. The information is entered automatically during the fax creation.


Fax Entry Class See Also
Fax Entry Class

Step-by-Step: Adding a Fax-class Entry

Fax-class Settings


Fax Error Correction Mode

A protocol used by Class1 fax modems to detect and correct errors in a fax.


Fax Header Options

The Fax Header options allow you to specify the information to be included in the page headers of faxes you send.

Before you modify the Fax Header settings, please see "The Telephone Consumer Protection Act", which details an important legal requirement for fax transmissions!

From within Setup, select the Fax, User Info, Fax Header buttons.

Include in Fax Header

The nine check boxes in this group allow you to specify the information you want to include in the page headers of your fax documents. To include a field, enable the appropriate check box. By default, the Sender’s name, Sender’s fax number, Page numbers and the Date and time fields are enabled.

If none of the fields are enabled, the fax pages will not have headers. If the fields you enable cause the header to extend past the edge of the page, the header will be truncated.


Fax Log

Click on this button to view the record of all fax connection attempts you’ve made. For more information, see The Fax Activity Log.


Fax Options

The Fax Options group includes settings that control the basic functionality of fax operations. From within Setup, select the Fax, Fax Options buttons to display the panel.

Bring Fax Status to Top When

By enabling or disabling the appropriate check boxes in this group, you can specify whether the Fax Status window should be brought into view when a fax send or receive operation begins or completes. By default, Fax Status will be brought to the foreground when you begin sending or receiving a fax.

When a New Fax is Received

By enabling or disabling the appropriate check boxes in this group, you can specify the actions taken when a new fax document is received.

Run Fax Manager

If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus will open the Fax Manager when a new fax is received. By default, it’s disabled.

Print fax

If this option is enabled, the Fax Viewer will automatically print faxes after they’re received. By default, Print fax is disabled.

View fax

If this setting is enabled, the Fax Viewer will automatically load and display faxes after they’re received. By default, it’s disabled.

Fax Send Options

The settings in this group allow you to specify the actions taken when a fax document is sent.

Delete fax pages after successful send

By default, Procomm Plus does not delete faxes after they are sent successfully. Instead, the .fax files are moved to the directory specified in the Sent Faxes directory in the Fax, Fax Paths panel.

If you enable this setting, the .fax pages included in a transmitted fax attempt will be deleted automatically once the fax has been sent.

Deleting .fax pages has no affect on the source documents used to generate them.

Make up to [ ] attempts

This setting determines the number of times Procomm Plus will attempt to send a successful fax transmission. By default, it’s set to 10 attempts, but you can specify any value up to 99. If you set Make up to [ ] attempts to 0, Procomm Plus will attempt to send the fax indefinitely, until it is either successful or you remove or hold the scheduled fax. Click in the edit field to specify a new value.

Retry every [ ] minutes

This setting determines the number of minutes Procomm Plus will wait before attempting to re-send a failed fax. By default, it is set to 10 minutes but you can set it to any value up to 99 minutes. Click in the edit field to specify a new value.

Play .WAV Files for these Fax Events

These fields allow you to specify .wav sound files to be played when the described events occur. Click on the field’s associated Browse... button to select a .wav file in a standard file selection dialog.

Fax send complete

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when a fax transmission completes successfully.

Fax receive complete

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when a fax is received successfully.

Fax send/receive failure

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when a fax receive or send operation is unsuccessful.


Fax Paths

The Fax, Fax Paths settings allow you to specify the directories used to store faxes you send and receive, as well as your cover sheet files and graphics. If you specify a directory path that doesn’t exist, Setup will prompt you before creating the directory automatically. From within Setup, click on the Fax and Fax Paths buttons to display the settings panel:

Inbox directory

This field specifies the storage location for faxes that you’ve received.

Sent Faxes directory

This field specifies the storage location for faxes that you’ve sent. If the Delete pages after send check box in the Fax, Fax Options panel is disabled, faxes you send will be moved to this directory after they’re successfully transmitted.

Cover Sheet directory

This field specifies the storage location for the optional fax cover sheets installed with Procomm Plus. Fax cover sheets you create will also be saved to this path.

Outbox directory

This field specifies the storage location for faxes you’ve scheduled for transmission.


Fax Polling

Fax Polling is a method of data distribution which has become increasingly popular. In Fax Polling, faxed documents or Binary File Transfers are made available, or automatically transmitted by, a host fax system.

For example, suppose that you were the supervisor of a team of service representatives, and that you needed to send each member several pages of scheduling and parts availability every week. You could create a standard fax, specify the team members as recipients, and have Procomm Plus attempt to send the fax until all of the recipients had successfully received the documents. But what if some of the members were far afield and didn’t have immediate access to a secure or reliable fax?

While other solutions to this problem might be devised, Fax Polling could remedy it immediately: you would simply set up the documents in a Fax Polling List. They could be automatically transmitted to the team members as they called into your host. For a step-by-step explanation, see Step-by-Step: Building a Fax Polling Host List.

Fax Polling is only supported by Class 1 Fax modems. For more information, see A Word on Fax Standards.

If you have Caller ID service, the Caller Information Directory could even help you keep the phone line open for your team! For more information, see The Caller ID Directory Editor and System Options.

With Fax Polling, retrieving the polled files or data is just as easy as placing a normal fax call. The connection and data to be transferred is negotiated as a normal fax call; the caller doesn’t have to worry about line settings, emulations or download protocols.

The calling fax device or system must be configured to request polled files. An explanation of how to do so in Procomm Plus appears in Step-by-Step: Receiving Polled Files.


Fax Polling Defined
Fax Polling

When a fax modem or fax machine connects to a host and automatically receives a preset selection of faxes.


Fax Resolution

The number of dots per inch in a fax image. Higher numbers of dots per inch, create a sharper image.


Fax Settings

The System, Modem Connection, Fax Settings group allows you to specify how a fax connection is handled. It includes three minor groups:

General

Adaptive Answer

Advanced


Fax Setup Group
The Fax Setup Group

Settings in the Fax group affect all of Procomm Plus’s fax operations. It contains three minor settings groups:


Fax Tab

Click on this tab to access settings and option groups that affect fax operations.


Fax Viewer

The Procomm Plus tool that is used to view fax documents. In addition to viewing the fax, the user may also add graphics and text to the fax, clean a received fax, or use OCR to convert a fax document (which is in graphic format), into a text document which can be edited in a word processor.

See also Fax. See also OCR. See also Fax Annotation.


Fax vs. File Transfer

Procomm Plus is a highly-integrated communications program that combines both fax and file transfer protocol capabilities. With such flexibility and power available, you will no doubt encounter situations where it’s more appropriate to send a document with a file transfer protocol than as a faxed image.

Suppose, for example, that you have a simple ASCII file that you'd like to send to your office from your home system. Using the fax method, you'd use Procomm Plus to send the file as a fax document to your office fax machine. If you only need an copy of the information for reference, this is probably the easiest method to use.

If you need the contents of the file inserted into a report or a memo, however, you'll have to recreate the information from the fax copy by some method, which may take time. In this case, it's easier to send the ASCII file itself to your office host system with Zmodem, recreating the file electronically.

If you're sending that same ASCII document to a fax system that accepts Binary File Transfers (BFTs), you have another option: you can send the ASCII text as a BFT, which recreates the file electronically on the host system as part of a normal fax transmission.


Fax-class See Also
Fax-class

Entry Info

Fax Options.


Fax-class Settings

The Fax-class entry settings are divided into two groups, Entry Info and Fax Options. The most-used group, Entry Info, is selected automatically when you switch to the Fax class. Click on the appropriate button to toggle the displayed panels.


Fax-class: Entry Info

The fields in the Fax-class Entry Info group are similar to those listed in a standard phone book, such as a phone number and company name. They include:

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Number

The area code and primary phone number, used to dial and connect to the fax machine addressed by the entry.

Country

The country where the fax machine is located.  Procomm Plus uses this field to determine whether you'll be calling internationally.

Company
The business or company title for the entry. This field provides a convenient way to locate entries, as it is referenced in the directory’s Find dialog. See Searching for Entries.

Always dial as long distance
If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will always treat this entry as a long distance call. The entry’s Area code and Fax Number will be included in the dialing string, preceded by any Location property values you’ve specified in Windows.

Only dial Fax Number

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will always dial only the Fax Number for this entry. Location property values you’ve specified in Windows are ignored.  This mode is especially useful for internal calls to a fax machine through a company PBX system, as well as commands that need to be sent directly to the modem without modification by Windows.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.


Fax-class: Fax Options

The Fax-class Fax Options settings determine how a fax transmitted with the entry will be processed.

Fax Connection

By default, Procomm Plus will use the fax connection that‘s active when the entry is dialed. This setting is indicated by Current Connection. To select a different fax connection, click on the Fax Connection drop down list box, then click on one of the available connections.


Fax_1
Fax

An image that is sent over a telephone wire to a remote machine. Originally a facimily machine would receive the image and print it (hard copy). Now there are fax modems that allow storage of fax images as files on a computer. A document in fax format is no longer an editable document. It is a graphic image of a document, ready for printing. It can be annotated with overlay graphics, or converted to a text document by using OCR.

See Optical Character Recognition.


Faxing

Q.	My modem is not attached to my computer, it’s on a communication server on the network. How do I fax with that modem?


Faxing Question 3
Q.	My modem is not attached to my computer, it’s on a communication server on the network. How do I fax with that modem?

A network modem needs a special transport layer to get information back and forth from the PC to the network modem. This layer is called a Communications API (Application Program Interface). If you are using a network modem for file transfers, then you already have a communications API on top of the regular network layer.

Faxing is a very time critical process. During a fax transmission over a network, information can get bogged down due to heavy network traffic. This can cause the fax to fail. Check with the company that makes your current Communications API to see if it will fax reliably over a network.


Faxing with Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus‘s integrated fax support allows you to send and receive Group III fax transmissions. You can schedule faxes to be sent any time you wish, either as a background task or in the foreground so that you can monitor the progress of the fax transmission directly. Procomm Plus also supports fax polling, fax forwarding and fax broadcasting to any number of recipients, as well as other advanced features. Before discussing Procomm Plus’s fax capabilities, see The Telephone Consumer Protection Act for information on an important law regarding the use of fax communications in general.

Utilities included with Procomm Plus allow you to view, annotate and print faxes. You can also create your own custom cover sheets for faxes you send. For more information, see the following topics:

The Fax Status utility

Sending Faxes

Receiving Faxes

The Fax Manager

The Fax Viewer

The OCR Editor

Fax Polling

Other Fax Functions

Binary File Transfers

The Fax Cover Sheet Editor

Fax Standards


Faxing with PROCOMM PLUS_1
Faxing with Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus‘s integrated fax support allows you to send and receive Group III fax transmissions. You can schedule faxes to be sent any time you wish, either as a background task or in the foreground so that you can monitor the progress of the fax transmission directly. Procomm Plus also supports fax polling, fax forwarding and fax broadcasting to any number of recipients, as well as other advanced features. Before discussing Procomm Plus’s fax capabilities, see The Telephone Consumer Protection Act for information on an important law regarding the use of fax communications in general.

Utilities included with Procomm Plus allow you to view, annotate and print faxes. You can also create your own custom cover sheets for faxes you send. For more information, see the following topics:

The Fax Status utility

Sending Faxes

Receiving Faxes

The Fax Manager

The Fax Viewer

The OCR Editor

Fax Polling

Other Fax Functions

Step-by-Step: Generating .fax Files

Initializing the Fax Modem

Holding Scheduled Faxes

Aborting a Fax Send or Receive

Setting the Default Printer

The Fax Activity Log

Binary File Transfers

The Fax Cover Sheet Editor

Fax Standards


File Clipboard

A dialog box that stores file names that have been copied from the Terminal display. Different from the Windows Clipboard, the File Clipboard is designed to simplify download, by storing a list of desired file names.


File Transfer

The process of copying files from one computer to another, usually facilitated by use of a file transfer protocol.

See also Upload. See also Download.


File Transfer Mode

There are three FTP file transfer modes: Binary, ASCII and L8. In most cases you can leave the file transfer mode set to Binary and safely transfer files of all kinds. However, on some FTP connections, you'll need to use either ASCII or Binary mode depending on the file type.

For example, if an FTP host is running on a UNIX system, ASCII text files must be translated, since DOS uses carriage return/line feed pairs to separate lines, while UNIX uses only a line feed. Because of this you will need to transfer certain files in ASCII and others in Binary mode. Indications that you need to switch file modes are: corrupted file transfers in Binary mode, or text files with irregular formats.

Use the ASCII file transfer mode if you are sending or receiving a Text file. A text file contains only the characters that you would see on a typical typewriter. Text files contain no graphics and very simple formatting.

Use the Binary file mode for all files that are not text files. Binary files include graphic files, programs, and documents that are formatted with characteristics such as bold, various font styles, and underline.

There is also the L8 file transfer mode, which is also referred to as Tenex, is rarely used. It was designed to work with a number of older machines, most notably PDP-20 computers running the TOPS20 operating system.

To change the File Transfer Mode, select FTP | File Transfer Mode, then select the mode you wish to use.


File Transfer Protocol

A set of rules and conventions for communication during a file transfer. File Transfer Protocols involve a dialog between the two machines. There are many different file transfer protocols such as Zmodem, CIS-B+, and Kermit. The important thing to note, is that both machines that are involved in a file transfer must use the same file transfer protocol. Otherwise, there can be no dialog.


File Transfer Protocols

In communications, a file transfer protocol is a set of rules or conventions that allows the participants to properly communicate and transfer files regardless of the hardware or software being used. Some of the rules that are established in a typical protocol are:

Block size.

This defines the amount of data that will be sent in one continuous block. In general, the larger the block size, the more efficient the transfer protocol. On noisy phone lines or over slow networks, however, protocols that use smaller block sizes may be more efficient.

Transfer Method.

This defines the method by which data is sent and received. Examples of this are "streaming" and "windowed". This also affects the efficiency of the overall transfer.

Duplex.

This defines the procedure for the sequence of transmissions. Information can be sent in full duplex, meaning in both directions at the same time or in half duplex, meaning in only one direction at a time.

Handshaking.

This defines the procedure for validating transferred data and negotiating the capabilities of each side of the transfer..

Error detection.

This defines the procedures for detecting an error in transmission. Both the header information and the data block are tested.

Error correction.

This defines the procedure to be used if an error is detected. Generally, error correction involves a retransmission of the entire packet, both the header and data block. Occasionally the protocol will determine that the error is not correctable and abort the transfer.

Batch

This defines whether a transfer protocol allows multiple files to be sent in a single transfer operation.

Procomm Plus supports the following protocols: ASCII, Raw ASCII, CIS-B+, Ind$file, Kermit, Xmodem, 1K-Xmodem, 1K-Xmodem-G, Ymodem, Ymodem-G and Zmodem. In addition, Procomm Plus supports the use of Dynamic Link Protocols, or .dlps, that allow third party vendors to create transfer protocols for its Terminal window.

The following topics briefly discuss the protocols supported by Procomm Plus:

The ASCII Protocol

The Raw ASCII Protocol

The CIS B+ Protocol

The FTP Protocol

The Ind$file Protocol

The Kermit Protocol

The Xmodem Protocol

The Ymodem Protocol

The Zmodem Protocol

Dynamic Link Protocols


File Transfer Protocols See Also
File Transfer Protocols

The ASCII Protocol

The Raw ASCII Protocol

The CIS B+ Protocol

The FTP Protocol

The Ind$file Protocol

The Kermit Protocol

The Xmodem Protocol

The Ymodem Protocol

The Zmodem Protocol

Dynamic Link Protocols


Finding a QWK Message

If you’re searching for a particular message, there’s no need to manually look through every message in a packet! The QWK Mail Viewer can search for you within any combination of:

The message text.

The To: field.

The From: field.

The message subject.

To search for a message, select Edit | Find and enable the check boxes for the proper search criteria. The viewer stores the last ten search strings you’ve used, so if this is something you’ve searched for earlier click on the arrow to the right of the drop down list box and click on the desired item. Otherwise, type the search string into the Find What: field and click Ok. The search is not case-sensitive.

If the viewer finds the specified string in more than one message, the messages are marked and displayed to you consecutively. Note that the search routine will only search the current message topic area.


Firewall

A security measure that protects information and resources on a local network, from outside intrusion. Firewalls can also prevent users on the local network from accessing certain resources on outside networks. The term Firewall is a general term that refers to a number of different security implementations. Some Firewalls block all incoming data not initiated from the local network, while others allow outside access when you enter the correct password and user ID.

If your system employs a firewall, you will probably need to be in Passive Mode when you connect to an FTP server.

See also Passive Mode.


Flow Control

Signals exchanged between two computers, that suspend and resume the flow of data. During serial communications, one side of the connection may require the other side to pause while it processes the information it has received. Flow control signals are either software (XON/XOFF) or, more commonly, hardware (RTS/CTS).


Following Hyperlinks

Once you are viewing a Web page, you can usually follow hyperlinks to other pages. Most Web pages contain links to other pages about the same subject. You can follow hyperlinks and connect to various Web sites throughout the world.

Most Web page authors embed hyperlinks within their page’s text. For instance, if you’re reading a Web page about science fiction movies, you may see a sentence with the word NASA underlined and in a different color. The different color and the underlining indicates that it is a hyperlink. By clicking on it, the hyperlink's target is revealed.


Font

The style and size of text, as well as of the specific character set.


For the ASPECT Programmer

If you’re working on a script, you’ll find that the ASPECT Editor was designed to streamline your task. Its ASPECT support features include:

•	Direct access to the ASPECT Compiler.

To compile the script displayed in the active window, click on the Compile Action Bar button, or select Tools | Compile... from the menu. The script will be saved as necessary, and the compiler will open and attempt to compile it.

If the script doesn’t compile successfully, you can switch back and forth between the editor and the compiler window to investigate and remedy any errors or warnings the compiler reported.

•	Direct access to the Compiler Options dialog.

You can control how the ASPECT Compiler processes your script by selecting Tools | Compile Options... from the menu.

The selections you make in this dialog from within the editor will also affect the settings of scripts compiled within Procomm Plus itself, with the exception of the unsaved additional arguments.

•	Direct access to the Dialog Editor and the User Window Editor.

By copying to and pasting from the Windows Clipboard, you can easily import dialog box and User window source code directly from their respective editors.

You can also copy source code from the ASPECT Editor and paste it into these utilities. This is very convenient if you want to "fine tune" a dialog box or User window statement group and preview your changes in an editor!

•	Direct access to on-line help script topics.

If you know the name of an ASPECT command but are not certain of its usage or syntax, place the editor’s cursor on it and click on the right mouse button. The editor automatically opens the help system with the command’s description displayed!

This is the ASPECT Editor’s default response to the right mouse button. See "Topic Search".

•	Editor settings to simplify your script-writing task.

Most ASPECT programmers prefer to use an indention of three spaces. By allowing you to specify the number of spaces represented by a tab character, the ASPECT Editor allows you to quickly indent by using the [image] key.

The Auto Indent feature can also save keystrokes. For more information, see "Auto Indent".

•	Editor features to assist you in debugging scripts.

When the ASPECT Compiler encounters an error or warning condition, it reports the problem with a brief description and the line number in which it appears. You can quickly view the problematic line of source code by pressing [image] [image] in the editor, specifying the line number and pressing [image].

Procomm Plus also makes the ASPECT Editor very accessible. You can open it from the Terminal window’s Compile / Edit ASPECT File dialog. To open the editor and create a new, untitled window, click on New. To open the editor and edit the file currently selected in the dialog’s File Name list box, click on Edit.

If you have specified a different editor in the Editor name and path field in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup, that editor will be called instead of the ASPECT Editor from the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog.


Forwarding a Fax

If you want to forward the faxes you’ve highlighted to another recipient, select the File | Forward... menu item or click on the Forward Action Bar button. Fax Manager displays the Send Fax dialog with the .fax and .bft files already selected in the File(s) to Fax list box.

Since the faxes are already selected, you need only to specify one or more recipient names and numbers to forward your faxes. However, you can access all of the features of the Send Fax dialog. You can also browse for other documents to include with the faxes you’re forwarding!

When you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected for your forwarded fax(es), click on Send to accept them and begin processing. To return to Fax Manager without creating a forwarded fax, click on Cancel.

Forwarded faxes are not deleted from your machine after they’re sent. For more details about using the Send Fax dialog, see The Send Fax Dialog.


Forwarding a QWK Message

If you want to forward a message to another user on the same BBS, click on the Reply to the Current Message Action Bar button or select Messages | Reply to Message to open the reply window, just as though you were replying to the message normally. Then, click in the To field in the reply window, and enter the new recipient name.

You can then edit the message or add any additional text before you save the message to the .rep packet.


Four Specific Symptoms

Look over these four symptoms after trying the three simple tests. See which one matches the test results. Next to each symptom, you will see the suggested solutions for that problem. The solutions are marked by the numbers 1,2,3, and 4. Try them in the order they are listed and one at a time. The first one may work, and then you won’t need to try the next one.

3	I can’t see characters, but I can hear the modem. I have an internal modem. (See solutions 1 and 4).

3	I can’t see characters, but I can hear the modem. I have an external modem. (See solutions 1,2 and 4).

3	I can’t see characters or hear the modem. I have an internal modem. (See solutions 1,3, and 4).

3	I can’t see characters or hear the modem. I have an external modem. (See solutions 1,2,3, and 4).


Full Duplex

Two-way communications in which data is sent in both directions at once.

See also Echo. See also Half Duplex.


GIF

Graphics Interchange Format. A common standard for storing graphics in the form of bitmaps. GIF is a CompuServe standard.

See Bitmap.


Gateway

A computer that transfers data between two networks that use dissimilar network hardware.

See also Router.


General Data Options

Settings in the General options panel allow you to control a variety of Terminal window functions. From within Setup, select the Data, Data Options, General buttons to display the panel:

File Playback Speed

This slider bar controls the speed of File Playbacks. Move the scroll "thumb" towards the right to play Capture files faster, or to the left to play them slower. By default, File Playback Speed is set to the fastest possible speed.

File Clipboard separator

This option specifies the character used to separate filenames when you paste them from the File Clipboard. Click on the list box to select one of the common separators.

For host systems like TBBS and RBBS bulletin boards that expect multiple filenames to be entered on a single line, use a space, which is ASCII decimal 32, as your separator character.

Chat Mode transmit method

This setting determines how Procomm Plus sends characters that you enter in Chat mode. If you choose Send character, each character you type is sent immediately. If you select Send block, Procomm Plus waits for a carriage return before sending text to the host system. The maximum number of characters sent in a block is 127.

If you want Procomm Plus to send a Carriage Return and Line Feed pair after your data, select either Send character with CRLF or Send block with CRLF. The Carriage Return/Line Feed pair are needed on some systems to properly scroll text on the receiving machine.

Use long filename support for File Clipboard

If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus’s File Clipboard will recognize long filenames. For example, the File Clipboard would recognize filenames like SAM.CLEMENS.WORD1.DOC as valid. Otherwise, the File Clipboard only recognizes valid DOS filenames.

Play .WAV Files for these Data Events

These fields allow you to specify .wav sound files to be played when the described events occur. Click on the field’s associated Browse... button to select a .wav file in a standard file selection dialog.

File transfer complete

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when a file transfer has completed.

File transfer abort

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when a file transfer has terminated abnormally.

Connect

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when Procomm Plus has successfully connected to another computer or system.

Disconnect

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when a connection to another computer or system is terminated.


General Options

Settings in the FTP, General Options panel allow you to specify how the FTP Client responds to a double clicked filename, and how it negotiates the connection to the FTP host. From within Setup, click on the Internet, FTP Options, General Options buttons to display the panel:

Double Click on File Name.

If you want the FTP Client to display the contents of a file when you double click on it, select the To View file option button. If you want the FTP Client to initiate a file transfer when you double click on a file, select the To Transfer file option button.

Anonymous logon password

Click in this edit field to enter or modify the password the FTP Client will use when logging on anonymously to a server. In general, FTP servers that accept anonymous logons require that you use your Internet address as an anonymous password. For example, "jfredg@garvinsoft.com."

Use passive mode

If your Internet connection passes through a security "firewall," you'll need to use FTP's passive mode to communicate with external servers. Enable this check box to use passive mode.

Passive mode is not supported by all FTP servers, especially those that run on older Unix systems!


General Problems and Questions

Q.	When I send a file, is it an Upload or a Download?

Q.	The automatic logon script that I wrote isn’t working. It gets to a certain point and then just sits there.

Q.	Can Procomm Plus get my PC to talk to something other than a modem?


General Questions 1
Q.	When I send a file, is it an Upload or a Download?

Uploading and Downloading refer to file transfers, and it is easy to get these two terms confused. A simple visualization can help avoid the confusion. Picture the remote machine on a hill. When you send a file, you will be Uploading, and when you receive a file you will be Downloading.


General Questions 4
Q.	The automatic logon script that I wrote isn’t working. It gets to a certain point and then just sits there.

When writing an ASPECT program or script, there are a number of things that can cause problems depending on the complexity of the script. Here are a few ideas that can help pinpoint the problems and avoid obstacles.

Make sure that the steps in the script can be accomplished without the script. For example, if the script is a logon script, try logging without the script. If there is a local file specified, check the file name and the path. It’s a good idea to walk through as many steps as possible before you automate them.

Timing is very important when you are writing a script for communications. If information is being transmitted before the modem actually connects, you may need to add a pause. Use the pause command to allow needed time padding, but don’t use it directly before a waitfor command. The script may end up waiting for a response that has already been received.

Do you know where the script is failing? You can use message boxes that pop up at specific times during the script. The usermsg and statmsg commands are useful for this play-by-play status report. You can create messages such as usermsg "Password was sent."

If it still is unclear where the script is failing, try isolating small fragments of the script to see what is or is not working. Create a small script by taking a few lines from your problematic script. See if they function as expected.

The Script Recorder simplifies script writing. It creates a script automatically, based on the user’s actions. Once recorded, the script can then be edited. Editing the recorded script is a good way to see some examples of basic ASPECT script commands. For more information about working with ASPECT, select Help |  Script Reference from the menu.


General Questions 6
Q.	Can Procomm Plus get my PC to talk to something other than a modem?

With Procomm Plus, your PC can connect to almost anything that also has a serial port. Making a COM port connection without a modem is called a Direct Connection. You can make a direct connection to another PC as well as to industrial equipment, telescopes, palmtops and data recording sensory equipment (to name a few). Here is a check list for setting up a direct connection.

The other device must have a COM port, also known as a Serial port or an RS-232 port.

Check the kind of cable you need. Many direct connections need a Null Modem cable instead of a modem cable. If you are connecting two PCs, you will need a null modem cable. Do not try to substitute a modem cable for a null modem cable, or the data will not pass back and forth.

Both sides must be set to use the same baud rate.

Both sides must be set with the same parity and data bit settings.


General Questions 7
Q.	Will Procomm Plus work with OS/2?

Since Procomm Plus is a 32-bit application, it will not run under Warp 3.0 or earlier versions of OS/2.


General Settings

The General settings allow you to specify the commands used to initialize the fax modem, as well as some basic modem features. From within Setup, click on the System, Modem Connection, Fax Settings, General buttons to display the General panel:

Telephone line type

Due to limitations in current cellular technology, most cellular telephone connections cannot reliably support fax communication rates higher than 4800 or 7200. If you’re faxing over a cellular connection, click on this list box and select Cellular.

Procomm Plus makes four adjustments for more reliable communication over a cellular connection:

The Fax initialization string is modified.

Flow control is set to Software, if software flow control is supported by your modem.

Maximum transmit rate is set to 4800.

Maximum receive rate is set to 4800.

Procomm Plus defaults to Conventional Line support. The Cellular setting should be used only if you’re faxing over a cellular connection.

Fax initialization string

This field specifies the command string transmitted to prepare your fax modem to send and receive faxes. This string should contain the command to enable the flow control specified in the Flow control list box, unless your modem automatically enables flow control when it’s set to fax mode.

Fax Class

This setting determines the default fax class for fax operations. Procomm Plus supports Class 1, Class 2 and Sierra SendFax.

Flow control

This setting specifies the type of flow control used during fax operations. By default, Procomm Plus will attempt to use Hardware flow control unless your modem is found to work better with Software flow control.

If you choose to modify Procomm Plus’s Flow control setting, be sure to modify the Fax initialization string to enable the same type of flow control in the modem!

Fax baud rate (DTE)

This setting specifies the baud rate to be used by the fax modem when it’s idle.

Maximum transmit rate

This setting specifies the fastest fax send rate allowed for the connection. By default, the auto-detect modem installation process sets the Maximum transmit rate to the highest send rate supported by your modem. However, Maximum transmit rate is automatically set to 4800 if you’ve specified a Telephone line type of Cellular.

If phone lines are noisy, or you experience difficulties in transmitting faxes, you can lower the transmit rate for the connection by clicking on this field and selecting a new value. This may improve the efficiency of the transmission.

Maximum receive rate

This setting specifies the fastest fax receive rate allowed for the connection. By default, the auto-detect modem installation process sets Maximum receive rate to the highest receive rate supported by your modem. However, Maximum transmit rate is set to 4800 if you’ve specified a Telephone line type of Cellular.

If you experience problems in receiving faxes, you can lower the receive rate for the connection by clicking on this field to select a new value.


Global Screening

By default, Procomm Plus’s Caller ID processing references each entry’s answer settings when handling incoming calls. However, using the Caller ID Directory Editor you can also choose to accept or reject calls based upon a selection list.

Global Screening can be very useful. For example, if you’re expecting an important fax from a particular client, you could use the Global Screening feature to keep your phone line available. Or, you could use the screening list to limit access to your system to a specific group of callers.

To modify the Global Screening setting or edit the screening list, select the View | Global Screening... menu item or click on the Global Screening Action Bar button to open the dialog. The name and path of the currently-loaded .cid file is displayed at the top of the Global Screening dialog.

Available Entries List and Global Screening List

The entries you can select for screening are displayed in the Available Entries list on the left side of the dialog, while the entries you’ve already selected for screening appear in the Global Screening List on the right side.

To move an entry from the Available Entries list, you must first select it by clicking on it or by highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys. Then, click on the arrow button that points towards the other list. The selected entry is removed from the Available Entries list and added to the Global Screening List.

To move an entry from the Global Screening List, select it and click on the arrow button that points towards the Available Entries list. The entry is removed from the Global Screening List and reappears in the Available Entries list.

The Global Screening setting is determined by three option buttons, located at the bottom of the dialog:

Global Screening Off

Select this button if you want Procomm Plus to reference an entry’s individual answer settings when handling an incoming call. Global Screening Off is the default setting.

Accept calls only from Global Screening List

Select this button if you want Procomm Plus to accept incoming calls only from those entries you’ve placed in the Global Screening List.

Block calls from Global Screening List

Select this button if you want Procomm Plus to block incoming calls from those entries you’ve placed in the Global Screening List.

You may notice that the Global Screening List changes as you toggle between the three option buttons. This is intentional, as it allows you to quickly switch between accepting and blocking separate groups of Caller IDs.


Glossary

A

ACS

Action Bar

Adaptive Answer

Address

Analog Signal

Anchor

Anonymous FTP

API

Archie

ASCII

ASPECT

Asynchronous

AT Command Set

Auto Answer

Auto Baud Detect

Automatic Download

B

Bandwidth

Batch Transfer

Baud Rate

BBS

BFT

Binary File

Bit

Bitmap

Bookmark

BPS

Break

Bridge

Buffer

Bulletin Board System

Byte

C

Cache

Call Waiting

Callback

Caller ID

Caller Information

Calling Card

Capture

Card

Carrier

Carrier Detect

CCITT

CD

Character

Chat

Checksum

Class1

Class2

Class2.0

Client

Client / Server

Clipboard

COM port

COM Port Address

Communications

Communications API

Compile

Compressed Files

CompuServe

Connect Strings

Connection Directory

Connectionless Session

CR

CRC

CTS

D

Data

Data Bits

Data compression

Database

DCE

DCE Rate

DDE

Default

Dialer

Dialing Directory

Dialog Box

Digital Signal

Direct Connect

Directory

DLL

DNS

Domain Name

Domain Name Server

Door

DOS Application

Download

Drag and Drop

Driver

DSR

DTE

DTE Rate

DTR

Dynamic Data Exchange

Dynamic IP Address

E

E-Mail

EBIOS Redirector

Echo

Editor

Encryption and Decryption

Error Correction

Escape Sequence

Extended ASCII

F

FAQ

Fax

Fax Annotation

Fax Back

Fax Cover Sheet

Fax Error Correction Mode

Fax Polling

Fax Resolution

Fax Viewer

FECM

File Clipboard

File Transfer

File Transfer Protocol

Firewall

Flow Control

Font

FTP

Full Duplex

G

Gateway

GIF

Gopher

Group III fax

H

Half Duplex

Hardware flow control

Hayes Compatible

Helper Application

Home Page

Host

Host Script

Hot-Keys

HTML

HTTP

Huffman Encoding

Hyperlink

Hypertext Transfer Protocol

I

I/O card

Icon

Initialization string

Install

Int 14 Redirector

Internet

Internet Mail

Internet Service Provider

IRQ

ISDN

ITU-T

J

K

L

LAN

Log On

Logon

M

Mail

Mail Gateway

Mainframe

Manual Connect

MAPI

MCI Mail

Messaging

Meta Key

Metafile

MIME

MNP

Mode

Modem

N

Name Server

NASI

NCSI

NetBIOS

Network

Newsgroup

Non-Connect strings

Null Modem Cable

O

OCR

OCR Cleanup

Offline

Online

Option Set

P

Packet

Parallel Port

Parameter file

Parity bit

Passive Mode

Path

PC Card

PCMCIA

Peer-to-Peer.

Phone Card

PIN Number

Ping

POP

PPP

Protocol

Provider

Q

QWKMail

R

RAM

Rapid Dial

Reboot

Remote Computer

Result Codes

RIPscrip

Router

RPI

RS-232

RTS

S

Scanner

Script

Scroll Bar

Scrollback Buffer

Search Engine

Serial Number

Serial Port

Service Provider

Sierra

SLIP

SMTP

Software flow control

Sound Card

Stack

Status Line

Stop Bits

String

SYSOP

SYSTEM.INI

T

TCP/IP

Telnet

Terminal

Terminal Emulation

Text File

Thread

Translate Table

U

UART

UNIX

Upload

URL

Usenet

UUEncode

V

V.32bis

V.34

V.42bis

V.Fast

Variable

Video Driver

Virus

W

WAIS

WAN

WAVE file

Web Browser

Web Page

Web Server

Windows Socket Compliant

WinSock

Wizard

Workstation

World Wide Web

Web

X

XON / XOFF

Y

Z


Going On-line

You can specify settings in a Data- or Telnet-class Connection Directory entry to make your sessions in the Terminal window as convenient as possible, regardless of the variety of hosts or services you connect to.

When you connect to a host or service using a Connection Directory entry, that entry’s settings become the current settings for the Terminal window. If you’ve chosen to display the Quick Select Line, its fields update to indicate the current settings. For example, if you connect to a host using an entry that specifies the Ind$file protocol, that protocol will be pre-selected when you initiate a file transfer, and the Quick Select Line’s protocol field will display "Ind$file".

If you enable the Prompt for download protocol before starting transfer option in the Data, Data Options, Advanced settings panel in Setup, the Terminal window will also prompt for the protocol when you select the Data | Receive file menu item.

If you connect to another system without using a Connection Directory entry, the Terminal window does not adjust any of its current settings.

For our discussions in this section, we’ll use the default Action Bar’s Rapid Connect feature. Keep in mind, however, that the full power of the Connection Directory is available from within the Terminal window at the click of a button!

For an explanation of connecting from the Connection Directory, see Connecting with a Data Entry or Connecting with a Telnet Entry.

For more information, see the following topics:

Step-by-Step: Placing Your First Call

Completing the Connection

Answering Calls


Going On-line See Also
Going On-line

Step-by-Step: Placing Your First Call

Completing the Connection

Answering Calls


Gopher

A menu-driven Internet navigation tool with a text based interface. A precursor to the World Wide Web, Gopher helps you locate information on the Internet by clicking on menus. Once you access a Gopher server, its menu options may connect you to other servers. Gopher makes use of bookmarks and connectionless sessions. It can access online information as well as download files.

See also World Wide Web. See also Bookmark. See also Connectionless Session.


Group III fax

A standard for fax modem interaction. Group III fax modems comprise the bulk of modems in use.


HTML

Hypertext Markup Language. This is the behind-the-scenes code that is used to design World Wide Web documents. HTML code includes information about the format and characteristics of a document, as well as anchors that are hyperlinked to other resources.

See also Anchor. See also Hyperlink.


HTTP

See Hypertext Transfer Protocol.


Half Duplex

Two-way communication in which data is only being transmitted in one direction at a time. When you are communicating in half duplex, transmitted characters are not echoed back from the remote computer. In order to be able to see what you are typing in half duplex mode, Procomm Plus sends a character to the monitor in addition to the character sent out the port.

See also Echo. See also Full Duplex.


Hardware flow control

Data flow control using the RS-232 lines: RTS and CTS. Because this form of flow control depends on the state voltage in a physical line, it is called hardware flow control. Hardware flow control is commonly used to mediate the difference between the port speed of the computer, and the connection speed of the modem.


Hayes Compatible

See AT Command Set.


Heath 19 (101 key)
This is the format of the Heath 19 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is not mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	   Heath 19 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function Key #1	^[S
F2	Function Key #2	^[T
F3	Function Key #3	^[U
F4	Function Key #4	^[U
F5	Function Key #5	^[W
F6	Function Key Blue	^[P
F7	Function Key Red	^[Q
F8	Function Key Gray	^[R
F9	ERASE Key, Erase End of Page	^[J
Shift - F9	Sh-ERASE, Erase End of Screen	^[E
F10
F11	Insert Character Mode On	^[@
F12	Insert Character Mode Off	^[O
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M
Shift - Enter	Line Feed	^J
Home	Home Cursor	^H	[ 1B 59 5F ]
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
Ctrl-Keypad-0	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?p
Ctrl-Keypad-1	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?q
Ctrl-Keypad-2	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?r
Ctrl-Keypad-3	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?s
Ctrl-Keypad-4	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?t
Ctrl-Keypad-5	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?u
Ctrl-Keypad-6	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?v
Ctrl-Keypad-7	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?w
Ctrl-Keypad-8	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?x
Ctrl-Keypad-9	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?y
Ctrl-Keypad-. (period)	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?n
Ctrl-Keypad-Enter	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?M


Heath 19 (84 key)
This is the format of the Heath 19 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 not mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	      Heath 19 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function Key #1	^[S
F2	Function Key #2	^[T
F3	Function Key #3	^[U
F4	Function Key #4	^[U
F5	Function Key #5	^[W
F6	Function Key Blue	^[P
F7	Function Key Red	^[Q
F8	Function Key Gray	^[R
F9	ERASE Key, Erase End of Page	^[J
Shift - F9	Sh-ERASE, Erase End of Screen	^[E
F10
Scroll Lock	Insert Character Mode On	^[@
Shift - Scroll Lock	Insert Character Mode Off	^[O
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M
Shift - Enter	Line Feed	^J
Home	Home Cursor	^H	[ 1B 59 5F ]
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
Ctrl-Keypad-0	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?p
Ctrl-Keypad-1	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?q
Ctrl-Keypad-2	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?r
Ctrl-Keypad-3	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?s
Ctrl-Keypad-4	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?t
Ctrl-Keypad-5	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?u
Ctrl-Keypad-6	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?v
Ctrl-Keypad-7	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?w
Ctrl-Keypad-8	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?x
Ctrl-Keypad-9	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?y
Ctrl-Keypad-. (period)	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?n
Ctrl-Keypad-Enter	Alt.Keypad Sequence	^[?M


Helper Application

Any additional utility or viewer that a Web browser can activate when a given MIME type is encountered. The ability to configure additional helper applications, allows Web browsers to stay current with the multitude of new MIME types emerging on the Internet.

See also MIME.


Holding Scheduled Faxes

If you need to temporarily prevent Procomm Plus from sending one or more scheduled faxes, select Hold Scheduled Faxes from the Fax menu in the Fax Status window or toggle the Stop/Go icon at the lower right corner of the Fax Status window. Any fax documents scheduled to be transmitted will be held until you restart the fax queue by selecting Resume Scheduled Faxes from the same menu.

If the scheduled time and date for a fax pass while the fax queue is on hold, Procomm Plus will attempt to send it immediately when you restart the queue. The fax-holding feature is convenient if you happen to be connected to a host system when a fax is scheduled to be sent!


Home Page

The introductory page that gives you information about a Web site. It is usually linked to other resources, and is often referred to at the end of other pages offered by the same site.


Host

A server offering a specific service. A host allows clients to log in and access shared information and services. You typically need the proper client for that specific host type.

See also Client. See also Client / Server.


Host Script

In Procomm Plus, a script that sets your computer up as a single-line BBS with menus, Fax Back, RIPscrip, chat, and e-mail.


Host Type

The Host Type setting tells the FTP Client what to expect from the FTP host system. This information is used for proper display of the host's files and directory structure. The Auto Detect setting will work for most connections, but in some cases you may need to specify a host type.

Symptoms

If the host type is incorrect, you will be able to connect, but you won't see files or directories appear on the Remote side of the FTP Client window. You may see two small dots in the remote directory list box, or you may see information other than file names in the remote file list box. Additionally, if you click FTP | Expand Remote File Directory, you will usually see that whole listings of files and directories have been sent.

If this happens, you need to find out what operating system the host is using. You can sometimes find that information by reading the Connection Progress information. Otherwise, you may want to contact the FTP host's system administrator.

To set a specific host type, select File | Connection Directory from the menu. Highlight the problematic entry, then select FTP | Basic Options | Host Type. Then select the operating system that the FTP host is using.


Host, the BBS Script

The following links access the Host script documentation, located in host.hlp. If these links do not work or if you’re unable to locate this file, Host may not have been installed. Run Procomm Plus’s installation program, and use the Custom Installation feature to install the sample scripts.

Host, an Introduction

Running Host

Configuring Host

The Host User File

The Host User Editor

Step-by-Step: Creating a New User Logon

Host Security

Host in Action

Connected!

Remote User Functions

Host Management

The Mail Files and Mail Manager

Special Host Files


Hot-Keys

A combination of key strokes used to activate a program function, instead of clicking on a menu option or icon with the mouse.


How News Works

A News server is a machine that keeps track of newsgroups and the articles contained in each newsgroup. Each news server gathers the available information from other news servers and pass it on to other news servers. Error correction protocols are used to preserve the integrity of the information passed from server to server.

When you post an article to a newsgroup, it is added to the news server’s list of articles and then passed to another news server. The receiving news server adds your article to its own article base, then passes it along to another news server along with a note indicating that both the original server and the current server has received your article. Thus, your article travels from news server to news server throughout the world, updating article lists as it goes.


Huffman Encoding

A form of data compression that encodes characters based on the frequency of a given character’s use.


Hyperlink

A graphic image or text item that can be clicked on in order to access an additional resource. Hyperlinks are used extensively in Windows Help files and World Wide Web pages.


Hypertext Transfer Protocol

HTTP. The protocol used to transfer information across the Internet, between a World Wide Web server and a Web browser. This protocol incorporates the use of URLs, a Web specific address format.

See also URL.


I/O card

Input/Output card. A device that allows data to flow in and out of the computer. A typical I/O card supports two COM ports, a parallel port, and a game port.


IBM 3101 (101 key)
This is the format of the IBM 3101 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	   IBM 3101 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	PF1	^[a^M
F2	PF2	^[b^M
F3	PF3	^[c^M
F4	PF4	^[d^M
F5	PF5	^[e^M
F6	PF6	^[f^M
F7	PF7	^[g^M
F8	PF8	^[h^M
Shift F1	Erase EOL/EOF	^[I
Shift F2	Erase Input	^[K
Shift F3	Erase EOS	^[J
Shift F4	Clear	^[L
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Delete Character	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M
NumLock OFF:
Keypad Home	Cursor Home	^[H
Ctrl-Keypad Home	Clear	^[L
Keypad End	Erase Input	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[I
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Keypad Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Keypad Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
Keypad Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
NumLock ON:
Ctrl-Keypad 1	PF1	^[a^M
Ctrl-Keypad 2	PF2	^[b^M
Ctrl-Keypad 3	PF3	^[c^M
Ctrl-Keypad 4	PF4	^[d^M
Ctrl-Keypad 5	PF5	^[e^M
Ctrl-Keypad 6	PF6	^[f^M
Ctrl-Keypad 7	PF7	^[g^M
Ctrl-Keypad 8	PF8	^[h^M
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^[H
Ctrl-Grey Home	Clear	^[L
Grey End	Erase Input	^[K
Ctrl-Grey End	Erase End of Line	^[I
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Erase End of Screen	^[J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Grey Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^[B
Grey Cursor Lf	Cursor Left	^[D
Grey Cursor Rt	Cursor Right	^[C


IBM 3101 (84 key)
This is the format of the IBM 3101 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	      IBM 3101 Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

F1	PF1	^[a^M
F2	PF2	^[b^M
F3	PF3	^[c^M
F4	PF4	^[d^M
F5	PF5	^[e^M
F6	PF6	^[f^M
F7	PF7	^[g^M
F8	PF8	^[h^M
Shift F1	Erase EOL/EOF	^[I
Shift F2	Erase Input	^[K
Shift F3	Erase EOS	^[J
Shift F4	Clear	^[L
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Delete Character	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Keypad +	Keypad Enter	^M
Home	Cursor Home	^[H
Ctrl-Home	Clear	^[L
End	Erase Input	^[K
Ctrl-End	Erase End of Line	^[I
Ctrl-Page Down	Erase End of Screen	^[J
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 1	PF1	^[a^M
Ctrl-Keypad 2	PF2	^[b^M
Ctrl-Keypad 3	PF3	^[c^M
Ctrl-Keypad 4	PF4	^[d^M
Ctrl-Keypad 5	PF5	^[e^M
Ctrl-Keypad 6	PF6	^[f^M
Ctrl-Keypad 7	PF7	^[g^M
Ctrl-Keypad 8	PF8	^[h^M


IBM 3101 and 3161 Advanced Settings

With the Current Terminal set to IBM 3101 or IBM 3161, or to a named option set you’ve derived from one of these, click on the Advanced... button to display the advanced settings dialog:

Turn around character

Click on this list box to select the value the emulation will use as the turn around character for block mode. A list of standard values is provided; for the actual setting used by your host system, check with your system operator or technical help desk.

Block mode

This setting controls the emulation’s block mode support. By default, the IBM 3101 and IBM 3161 block mode support is disabled.

Null suppression

Some host systems use the ASCII null character, decimal 0, to pace transmitted data, which can cause formatting problems in captured data. If this setting is enabled, the emulation will suppress null characters received from the host. By default, this setting is disabled.

Enter key sends CR/LF

This setting determines how the emulation responds when you press the [image] key. By default, the emulation transmits the character(s) mapped for the key in the current keyboard file. If you enable this setting, the emulation will send a carriage return/line feed pair, regardless of the keyboard mapping value.

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the Data Terminal Options panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


IBM 3161 (101 key)
This is the format of the IBM 3161 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	   IBM 3161 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	F1	^[a
F2	F2	^[b
F3	F3	^[c
F4	F4	^[d
F5	F5	^[e
F6	F6	^[f
F7	F7	^[g
F8	F8	^[h
F9	F9	^[i
F10	F10	^[j
F11	F11	^[k
F12	F12	^[l
Shift F1	F13	^[!a
Shift F2	F14	^[!b
Shift F3	F15	^[!c
Shift F4	F16	^[!d
Shift F5	F17	^[!e
Shift F6	F18	^[!f
Shift F7	F19	^[!g
Shift F8	F20	^[!h
Shift F9	F21	^[!i
Shift F10	F22	^[!j
Shift F11	F23	^[!k
Shift F12	F24	^[!l
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[2
Enter	Enter	^M
Keypad Home	Cursor Home	^[H
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Keypad CrLf	Cursor Left	^[D
Keypad CrRt	Cursor Right	^[C
Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[I
Keypad CrDn	Cursor Down	^[B
Keypad PgDn	Clear	^[L
Keypad Delete	Delete Character	^[Q
Shift Keypad Insert	0	0
Shift Keypad End	1	1
Shift Keypad Cursor Dn	2	4
Shift Keypad PgDn	3	3
Shift Keypad Cursor Lt	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Keypad Cursor Rt	6	4
Shift Keypad Home	7	7
Shift Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Shift Keypad PgUp	9	9
Shift Keypad Delete	Decimal	.
Ctrl-Keypad End	PA1	^[!m
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Dn	PA2	^[!n
Ctrl-Keypad PgDn	PA3	^[!o
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Home	Erase End of Page	^[J
Shift Ctrl-Keypad CurUp	Window Up	^[ A	[ 1B 20 41 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad CurDn	Window Down	^[ B	[ 1B 20 42 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad CurRt	Window Right	^[ C	[ 1B 20 43 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad CurLt	Window Left	^[ D	[ 1B 20 44 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad End	Erase End of Page	^[J
NumLock ON:
Ctrl-Keypad 1	PA1	^[!m
Ctrl-Keypad 2	PA2	^[!n
Ctrl-Keypad 3	PA3	^[!o
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^[D
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^[C
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Cursor Home	^[H
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^[A
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Grey Insert	Insert Character	^[P
Ctrl-Grey Insert	Insert Line	^[N
Grey Delete	Delete Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Grey Delete	Delete Line	^[O
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^[H
Grey End	Back Tab	^[2
Grey PgUp	Clear	^[L
Ctrl-Grey PgUp	Erase Input	^[K
Grey PgDn	Erase End of Line	^[I
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Erase End of Page	^[J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Grey Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^[B
Grey Cursor Rt	Cursor Right	^[C
Grey Cursor Lf	Cursor Left	^[D
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Up	Window Up	^[ A	[ 1B 20 41 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Dn	Window Down	^[ B	[ 1B 20 42 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Rt	Window Right	^[ C	[ 1B 20 43 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Lf	Window Left	^[ D	[ 1B 20 44 ]


IBM 3161 (84 key)
This is the format of the IBM 3161 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      IBM 3161 Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

F1	F1	^[a
F2	F2	^[b
F3	F3	^[c
F4	F4	^[d
F5	F5	^[e
F6	F6	^[f
F7	F7	^[g
F8	F8	^[h
F9	F9	^[i
F10	F10	^[j
Shift F1	F11	^[k
Shift F2	F12	^[l
Shift F3	F13	^[!a
Shift F4	F14	^[!b
Shift F5	F15	^[!c
Shift F6	F16	^[!d
Shift F7	F17	^[!e
Shift F8	F18	^[!f
Shift F9	F19	^[!g
Shift F10	F20	^[!h
Ctrl-F1	F21	^[!i
Ctrl-F2	F22	^[!j
Ctrl-F3	F23	^[!k
Ctrl-F4	F24	^[!l
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[2
Enter	Enter	^M
Home	Cursor Home	^[H
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
End	Erase End of Line	^[I
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
Shift Ctrl-PgDn	Clear	^[L
Delete	Delete Character	^[Q
Shift Insert	0	0
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	4
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Cursor Right	6	4
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift Delete	Decimal	.
Ctrl-End	PA1	^[!m
Ctrl-Cursor Down	PA2	^[!n
Ctrl-PgDn	PA3	^[!o
Shift Ctrl-Home	Erase End of Page	^[J
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Window Up	^[ A	[ 1B 20 41 ]
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Down	Window Down	^[ B	[ 1B 20 42 ]
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Window Right	^[ C	[ 1B 20 43 ]
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Window Left	^[ D	[ 1B 20 44 ]
Shift Ctrl-End	Erase End of Page	^[J
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 1	PA1	^[!m
Ctrl-Keypad 2	PA2	^[!n
Ctrl-Keypad 3	PA3	^[!o
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^[D
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^[C
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Cursor Home	^[H
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^[A
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]


IBM 3270, TVI 950, TVI 955 and Wyse 100 Settings

With the Current Terminal set to IBM 3270, TVI 950, TVI 955 or Wyse 100, or to a named option set you’ve derived from one of these, click on the Advanced... button to display the advanced settings dialog:

Terminal Status Line

These settings control the emulation’s display status line. By default, the emulation’s status line is turned on. If you enable the Display check box, you can specify the attribute used to display the status line: Normal, Reverse or Underline.

Protected Attribute

These settings determine the attribute used by the emulation to display "protected" text. Protected text can be assigned one or more of three attributes: Dim, Reverse and Underline.

The Dim, Reverse, Underline and Normal attributes are defined in the Data, Terminal Colors settings group. See Terminal Colors for more information.

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the Data, Terminal Options panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


IBM 3270/950 (101 key)
This is the format of the IBM 3270/950 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	   IBM 3270/950 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^A@^M
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^AA^M
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^AB^M
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^AC^M
F5	Program Function 5 (PF5)	^AD^M
F6	Program Function 6 (PF6)	^AE^M
F7 or Grey PgUp	Program Function 7 (PF7)	^AF^M
F8 or Grey PgDn	Program Function 8 (PF8)	^AG^M
F9	Program Function 9 (PF9)	^AH^M
F10	Program Function 10 (PF10)	^AI^M
F11	Program Function 11 (PF11)	^AJ^M
F12	Program Function 12 (PF12)	^[Q
Shift F1	Program Function 13 (PF13)	^A`^M
Shift F2	Program Function 14 (PF14)	^Aa^M
Shift F3	Program Function 15 (PF15)	^Ab^M
Shift F4	Program Function 16 (PF16)	^Ac^M
Shift F5	Program Function 17 (PF17)	^Ad^M
Shift F6	Program Function 18 (PF18)	^Ae^M
Shift F7	Program Function 19 (PF19)	^Af^M
Shift F8	Program Function 20 (PF20)	^Ag^M
Shift F9	Program Function 21 (PF21)	^Ah^M
Shift F10	Program Function 22 (PF22)	^Ai^M
Shift F11	Program Function 23 (PF23)	^Aj^M
Shift F12	Program Function 24 (PF24)	^[q
Ctrl-F5	Program Application 1 (PA1)	^A,^M
Ctrl-F6	Program Application 2 (PA2)	^A.^M
Ctrl-F7	Program Application 3 (PA3)	^A/^M
Ctrl-F8	Erase Input	^[^[R
Ctrl-F9	Column Tab	^I
Ctrl-F10	Column Back Tab	^[I
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Field Tab	^[T
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^[t
Ctrl-Enter or Ctrl-J	Newline	^J
Keypad *	Keypad	^Aè^M	[ 01 8A 0D ]
Home	Home	^^	[ 1E ]
Ctrl-Home	Clear	^Z     or Keypad +     or Keypad Enter
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
End or Ctrl-End	Erase End of Field	^[R
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Insert or Grey Insert	Insert	^[E
Delete or Ctrl-BackSpace or Grey Del	Delete Character	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-PgUp	Indent	^[Y
Ctrl-PgDn	Unindent	^[y
Ctrl-X	Type Ahead Purge	^X
Ctrl-S	Pacing Start	^S
Ctrl-Q	Pacing Stop	^Q
Ctrl-T	Keyboard Unlock	^T
Ctrl-R	Char-error Reset	^R
Ctrl-G	Master Reset	^G
Pause	Redisplay	^[*


IBM 3270/950 (84 key)
This is the format of the IBM 3270/950 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      IBM 3270/950 Function	              Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^A@^M
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^AA^M
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^AB^M
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^AC^M
F5	Program Function 5 (PF5)	^AD^M
F6	Program Function 6 (PF6)	^AE^M
F7	Program Function 7 (PF7)	^AF^M
F8	Program Function 8 (PF8)	^AG^M
F9	Program Function 9 (PF9)	^AH^M
F10	Program Function 10 (PF10)	^AI^M
Shift F1	Program Function 11 (PF11)	^AJ^M
Shift F2	Program Function 12 (PF12)	^[Q
Shift F3	Program Function 13 (PF13)	^A`^M
Shift F4	Program Function 14 (PF14)	^Aa^M
Shift F5	Program Function 15 (PF15)	^Ab^M
Shift F6	Program Function 16 (PF16)	^Ac^M
Shift F7	Program Function 17 (PF17)	^Ad^M
Shift F8	Program Function 18 (PF18)	^Ae^M
Shift F9	Program Function 19 (PF19)	^Af^M
Shift F10	Program Function 20 (PF20)	^Ag^M
Ctrl-F1	Program Function 21 (PF21)	^Ah^M
Ctrl-F2	Program Function 22 (PF22)	^Ai^M
Ctrl-F3	Program Function 23 (PF23)	^Aj^M
Ctrl-F4	Program Function 24 (PF24)	^[q
Ctrl-F5	Program Application 1 (PA1)	^A,^M
Ctrl-F6	Program Application 2 (PA2)	^A.^M
Ctrl-F7	Program Application 3 (PA3)	^A/^M
Ctrl-F8	Erase Input	^[^[R
Ctrl-F9	Column Tab	^I
Ctrl-F10	Column Back Tab	^[I
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Field Tab	^[T
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^[t
Ctrl-Enter	Newline	^J
or Ctrl-J
Keypad *		^Aè^M	[ 01 8A 0D ]
Home	Home	^^	[ 1E ]
Ctrl-Home	Clear	^Z
or Keypad +
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
End	Erase End of Field	^[R
or Ctrl-End
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Insert	Insert	^[E
Delete	Delete Character	DEL	[ 7F ]
or Ctrl-BackSpace
Ctrl-PgUp	Indent	^[Y
Ctrl-PgDn	Unindent	^[y
Ctrl-X	Type Ahead Purge	^X
Ctrl-S	Pacing Start	^S
Ctrl-Q	Pacing Stop	^Q
Ctrl-T	Keyboard Unlock	^T
Ctrl-R	Char-error Reset	^R
Ctrl-G	Master Reset	^G
Esc*	Redisplay	^[*
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^K
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^V
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home Cursor	^Z
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Erase End of Field	^[R
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert	^[E
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete Character	DEL	[ 7F ]


IBM PC (101 key)
This is the format of the IBM PC keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	   IBM PC Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	F1	^@;	[ 00 3B ]
F2	F2	^@<	[ 00 3C ]
F3	F3	^@=	[ 00 3D ]
F4	F4	^@>	[ 00 3E ]
F5	F5	^@?	[ 00 3F ]
F6	F6	^@@	[ 00 40 ]
F7	F7	^@A	[ 00 41 ]
F8	F8	^@B	[ 00 42 ]
F9	F9	^@C	[ 00 43 ]
F10	F10	^@D	[ 00 44 ]
F11	F11	^@à	[ 00 85 ]
F12	F12	^@å	[ 00 86 ]
Shift F1	Shift F1	^@T	[ 00 54 ]
Shift F2	Shift F2	^@U	[ 00 55 ]
Shift F3	Shift F3	^@V	[ 00 56 ]
Shift F4	Shift F4	^@W	[ 00 57 ]
Shift F5	Shift F5	^@X	[ 00 58 ]
Shift F6	Shift F6	^@Y	[ 00 59 ]
Shift F7	Shift F7	^@Z	[ 00 5A ]
Shift F8	Shift F8	^@[	[ 00 5B ]
Shift F9	Shift F9	^@\	[ 00 5C ]
Shift F10	Shift F10	^@]	[ 00 5D ]
Shift F11	Shift F11	^@ç	[ 00 87 ]
Shift F12	Shift F12	^@ê	[ 00 88 ]
Ctrl-F1	Ctrl-F1	^@^	[ 00 5E ]
Ctrl-F2	Ctrl-F2	^@_	[ 00 5F ]
Ctrl-F3	Ctrl-F3	^@'	[ 00 60 ]
Ctrl-F4	Ctrl-F4	^@a	[ 00 61 ]
Ctrl-F5	Ctrl-F5	^@b	[ 00 62 ]
Ctrl-F6	Ctrl-F6	^@c	[ 00 63 ]
Ctrl-F7	Ctrl-F7	^@d	[ 00 64 ]
Ctrl-F8	Ctrl-F8	^@e	[ 00 65 ]
Ctrl-F9	Ctrl-F9	^@f	[ 00 66 ]
Ctrl-F10	Ctrl-F10	^@g	[ 00 67 ]
Ctrl-F11	Ctrl-F11	^@ë	[ 00 89 ]
Ctrl-F12	Ctrl-F12	^@è	[ 00 8A ]
Shift Ctrl-F1	Alt-F1	^@h	[ 00 68 ]
Shift Ctrl-F2	Alt-F2	^@i	[ 00 69 ]
Shift Ctrl-F3	Alt-F3	^@j	[ 00 6A ]
Shift Ctrl-F4	Alt-F4	^@k	[ 00 6B ]
Shift Ctrl-F5	Alt-F5	^@l	[ 00 6C ]
Shift Ctrl-F6	Alt-F6	^@m	[ 00 6D ]
Shift Ctrl-F7	Alt-F7	^@n	[ 00 6E ]
Shift Ctrl-F8	Alt-F8	^@o	[ 00 6F ]
Shift Ctrl-F9	Alt-F9	^@p	[ 00 70 ]
Shift Ctrl-F10	Alt-F10	^@q	[ 00 71 ]
Shift Ctrl-F11	Alt-F11	^@ï	[ 00 8B ]
Shift Ctrl-F12	Alt-F12	^@î	[ 00 8C ]
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^@^O	[ 00 0F ]
Enter	Enter	^M
NumLock ON:
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Keypad .	.	.
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Ctrl-Keypad Insert	^@Æ	[ 00 92 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Ctrl-Keypad End	^@u	[ 00 75 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Down	^@æ	[ 00 91 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Ctrl-Keypad PgDn	^@v	[ 00 76 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Left	^@s	[ 00 73 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Ctrl-Keypad Center Key	^@Å	[ 00 8F ]
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Right	^@t	[ 00 74 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Ctrl-Keypad Home	^@w	[ 00 77 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Up	^@ì	[ 00 8D ]
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Ctrl-Keypad PgUp	^@ä	[ 00 84 ]
Ctrl-Keypad .	Ctrl-Keypad Delete	^@ô	[ 00 93 ]
NumLock OFF:
Keypad Home	Keypad Home	^@G	[ 00 47 ]
Keypad Cursor Up	Keypad Cursor Up	^@H	[ 00 48 ]
Keypad PgUp	Keypad PgUp	^@I	[ 00 49 ]
Keypad Cursor Left	Keypad Cursor Left	^@K	[ 00 4B ]
Keypad Center Key	Keypad Center Key	^@L	[ 00 4C ]
Keypad Cursor Right	Keypad Cursor Right	^@M	[ 00 4D ]
Keypad End	Keypad End	^@O	[ 00 4F ]
Keypad Cursor Down	Keypad Cursor Down	^@P	[ 00 50 ]
Keypad PgDn	Keypad PgDn	^@Q	[ 00 51 ]
Keypad Insert	Keypad Insert	^@R	[ 00 52 ]
Keypad Delete	Keypad Delete	^@S	[ 00 53 ]
Keypad Enter	Keypad Enter	^M
Shift Keypad Insert	0	0
Shift Keypad End	1	1
Shift Keypad Cursor Dn	2	2
Shift Keypad PgDn	3	3
Shift Keypad Cursor Lt	4	4
Shift Keypad Center Key	5	5
Shift Keypad Cursor Rt	6	6
Shift Keypad Home	7	7
Shift Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Shift Keypad PgUp	9	9
Shift Keypad Delete	.	.
Shift Keypad Enter	Shift Keypad Enter	^M
Ctrl-Keypad Home	Ctrl-Keypad Home	^@w
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Up	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Up	^@ì	[ 00 8D ]
Ctrl-Keypad PgUp	Ctrl-Keypad PgUp	^@ä	[ 00 84 ]
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Left	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Left	^@s	[ 00 73 ]
Ctrl-Keypad Center Key	Ctrl-Keypad Center Key	^@Å	[ 00 8F ]
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Rt	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Right	^@t	[ 00 74 ]
Ctrl-Keypad End	Ctrl-Keypad End	^@u	[ 00 75 ]
Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Dn	Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Down	^@æ	[ 00 91 ]
Ctrl-Keypad PgDn	Ctrl-Keypad PgDn	^@v	[ 00 76 ]
Ctrl-Keypad Insert	Ctrl-Keypad Insert	^@Æ	[ 00 92 ]
Ctrl-Keypad Delete	Ctrl-Keypad Delete	^@ô	[ 00 93 ]
Ctrl-Keypad Enter	Ctrl-Keypad Enter	^J
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Insert	Alt-0	^@ü	[ 00 81 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad End	Alt-1	^@x	[ 00 78 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Dn	Alt-2	^@y	[ 00 79 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad PgDn	Alt-3	^@z	[ 00 7A ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Lt	Alt-4	^@{	[ 00 7B ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Center Key	Alt-5	^@|	[ 00 7C ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Rt	Alt-6	^@}	[ 00 7D ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Home	Alt-7	^@~	[ 00 7E ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Cursor Up	Alt-8		[ 00 7F ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad PgUp	Alt-9	^@Ç	[ 00 80 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Delete	Alt-.	.
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Enter	Alt-Keypad Enter	^@^\	[ 00 1C ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad /	Alt-/	^@5	[ 00 35 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad -	Alt--	^@é	[ 00 82 ]
Grey Home	Grey Home		[ 00 E0 47 ]
Grey Cursor Up	Grey Cursor Up		[ 00 E0 48 ]
Grey PgUp	Grey PgUp		[ 00 E0 49 ]
Grey Cursor Left	Grey Cursor Left		[ 00 E0 4B ]
Grey Cursor Right	Grey Cursor Right		[ 00 E0 4D ]
Grey End	Grey End		[ 00 E0 4F ]
Grey Cursor Down	Grey Cursor Down		[ 00 E0 50 ]
Grey PgDn	Grey PgDn		[ 00 E0 51 ]
Grey Insert	Grey Insert		[ 00 E0 52 ]
Grey Delete	Grey Delete		[ 00 E0 53 ]
Ctrl-Grey Home	Ctrl-Grey Home		[ 00 E0 77 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Up	Ctrl-Grey Cursor Up		[ 00 E0 8D ]
Ctrl-Grey PgUp	Ctrl-Grey PgUp		[ 00 E0 84 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Left	Ctrl-Grey Cursor Left		[ 00 E0 73 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Right	Ctrl-Grey Cursor Right		[ 00 E0 74 ]
Ctrl-Grey End	Ctrl-Grey End		[ 00 E0 75 ]
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Down	Ctrl-Grey Cursor Down		[ 00 E0 91 ]
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Ctrl-Grey PgDn		[ 00 E0 76 ]
Ctrl-Grey Insert	Ctrl-Grey Insert		[ 00 E0 92 ]
Ctrl-Grey Delete	Ctrl-Grey Delete		[ 00 E0 93 ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey Home	Alt-Grey Home	^@ù	[ 00 97 ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey Cur Up	Alt-Grey Cursor Up	^@ÿ	[ 00 98 ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey PgUp	Alt-Grey PgUp	^@Ö	[ 00 99 ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey Cur Lt	Alt-Grey Cursor Left	^@¢	[ 00 9B ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey Cur Rt	Alt-Grey Cursor Right	^@¥	[ 00 9D ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey End	Alt-Grey End	^@f	[ 00 9F ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey Cur Dn	Alt-Grey Cursor Down	^@á	[ 00 A0 ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Alt-Grey PgDn	^@í	[ 00 A1 ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey Insert	Alt-Grey Insert	^@ó	[ 00 A2 ]
Shift Ctrl-Grey Delete	Alt-Grey Delete	^@ú	[ 00 A3 ]


IBM PC (84 key)
This is the format of the IBM PC keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      IBM PC Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

F1	F1	^@;	[ 00 3B ]
F2	F2	^@<	[ 00 3C ]
F3	F3	^@=	[ 00 3D ]
F4	F4	^@>	[ 00 3E ]
F5	F5	^@?	[ 00 3F ]
F6	F6	^@@	[ 00 40 ]
F7	F7	^@A	[ 00 41 ]
F8	F8	^@B	[ 00 42 ]
F9	F9	^@C	[ 00 43 ]
F10	F10	^@D	[ 00 44 ]
Shift F1	Shift F1	^@T	[ 00 54 ]
Shift F2	Shift F2	^@U	[ 00 55 ]
Shift F3	Shift F3	^@V	[ 00 56 ]
Shift F4	Shift F4	^@W	[ 00 57 ]
Shift F5	Shift F5	^@X	[ 00 58 ]
Shift F6	Shift F6	^@Y	[ 00 59 ]
Shift F7	Shift F7	^@Z	[ 00 5A ]
Shift F8	Shift F8	^@[	[ 00 5B ]
Shift F9	Shift F9	^@\	[ 00 5C ]
Shift F10	Shift F10	^@]	[ 00 5D ]
Ctrl-F1	Ctrl-F1	^@^	[ 00 5E ]
Ctrl-F2	Ctrl-F2	^@_	[ 00 5F ]
Ctrl-F3	Ctrl-F3	^@'	[ 00 60 ]
Ctrl-F4	Ctrl-F4	^@a	[ 00 61 ]
Ctrl-F5	Ctrl-F5	^@b	[ 00 62 ]
Ctrl-F6	Ctrl-F6	^@c	[ 00 63 ]
Ctrl-F7	Ctrl-F7	^@d	[ 00 64 ]
Ctrl-F8	Ctrl-F8	^@e	[ 00 65 ]
Ctrl-F9	Ctrl-F9	^@f	[ 00 66 ]
Ctrl-F10	Ctrl-F10	^@g	[ 00 67 ]
Shift Ctrl-F1	Alt-F1	^@h	[ 00 68 ]
Shift Ctrl-F2	Alt-F2	^@i	[ 00 69 ]
Shift Ctrl-F3	Alt-F3	^@j	[ 00 6A ]
Shift Ctrl-F4	Alt-F4	^@k	[ 00 6B ]
Shift Ctrl-F5	Alt-F5	^@l	[ 00 6C ]
Shift Ctrl-F6	Alt-F6	^@m	[ 00 6D ]
Shift Ctrl-F7	Alt-F7	^@n	[ 00 6E ]
Shift Ctrl-F8	Alt-F8	^@o	[ 00 6F ]
Shift Ctrl-F9	Alt-F9	^@p	[ 00 70 ]
Shift Ctrl-F10	Alt-F10	^@q	[ 00 71 ]
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Shift Tab	^@^O	[ 00 0F ]
NumLock ON:
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Keypad .	.	.
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Ctrl-Insert	^@Æ	[ 00 92 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Ctrl-End	^@u	[ 00 75 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Ctrl-Cursor Down	^@æ	[ 00 91 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Ctrl-PgDn	^@v	[ 00 76 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Ctrl-Cursor Left	^@s	[ 00 73 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Ctrl-Center Key	^@Å	[ 00 8F ]
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Ctrl-Cursor Right	^@t	[ 00 74 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Ctrl-Home	^@w	[ 00 77 ]
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Ctrl-Cursor Up	^@ì	[ 00 8D ]
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Ctrl-PgUp	^@ä	[ 00 84 ]
Ctrl-Keypad .	Ctrl-Delete	^@ô	[ 00 93 ]
NumLock OFF:
Home	Home	^@G	[ 00 47 ]
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^@H	[ 00 48 ]
PgUp	PgUp	^@I	[ 00 49 ]
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^@K	[ 00 4B ]
Center Key	Center Key	^@L	[ 00 4C ]
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^@M	[ 00 4D ]
End	End	^@O	[ 00 4F ]
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^@P	[ 00 50 ]
PgDn	PgDn	^@Q	[ 00 51 ]
Insert	Insert	^@R	[ 00 52 ]
Delete	Delete	^@S	[ 00 53 ]
Shift Insert	0	0
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Center Key	5	5
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift Delete	.	.
Ctrl-Home	Ctrl-Home	^@w	[ 00 77 ]
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Ctrl-Cursor Up	^@ì	[ 00 8D ]
Ctrl-PgUp	Ctrl-PgUp	^@ä	[ 00 84 ]
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Ctrl-Cursor Left	^@s	[ 00 73 ]
Ctrl-Center Key	Ctrl-Center Key	^@Å	[ 00 8F ]
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Ctrl-Cursor Right	^@t	[ 00 74 ]
Ctrl-End	Ctrl-End	^@u	[ 00 75 ]
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Ctrl-Cursor Down	^@æ	[ 00 91 ]
Ctrl-PgDn	Ctrl-PgDn	^@v	[ 00 76 ]
Ctrl-Insert	Ctrl-Insert	^@Æ	[ 00 92 ]
Ctrl-Delete	Ctrl-Delete	^@ô	[ 00 93 ]
Shift Ctrl-Insert	Alt-0	^@ü	[ 00 81 ]
Shift Ctrl-End	Alt-1	^@x	[ 00 78 ]
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Down	Alt-2	^@y	[ 00 79 ]
Shift Ctrl-PgDn	Alt-3	^@z	[ 00 7A ]
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Alt-4	^@{	[ 00 7B ]
Shift Ctrl-Center Key	Alt-5	^@|	[ 00 7C ]
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Alt-6	^@}	[ 00 7D ]
Shift Ctrl-Home	Alt-7	^@~	[ 00 7E ]
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Alt-8		[ 00 7F ]
Shift Ctrl-PgUp	Alt-9	^@Ç	[ 00 80 ]
Shift Ctrl-Delete	Alt-.	^@'	[ 00 24 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad /	Alt-/	^@5	[ 00 35 ]
Shift Ctrl-Keypad -	Alt--	^@é	[ 00 82 ]


IND$FILE Filenames

This dialog contains two fields that help create the command string Procomm Plus sends to the mainframe to begin your IND$FILE transfer.

In the first field, Mainframe filename, you should enter the filename for the target file on the mainframe.  This name must be a valid filename under your mainframe operating system.

Procomm Plus automatically builds the mainframe command string that appears in the second field, Formatted mainframe command, using the current IND$FILE parameters in Setup.  This is the command that Procomm Plus actually sends to the mainframe to initiate the transfer.  If necessary, you can edit this field before you click OK to begin the transfer.

If you need to change the current IND$FILE parameters for this transfer, click on the Setup this transfer... button. Any changes you make to the IND$FILE settings are not saved and will not be reflected within Setup.


IRQ

Interrupt Request. A hardware method of temporarily interrupting the operation of the central processing unit (CPU), so that a hardware device can get the service that it needs.

Certain hardware devices such as the keyboard and the internal clock have a specific standard settings, while other devices such as modems and network cards can work with a range of different settings. No two devices should share the same IRQ, since this may block communication to one or both of the devices.


ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network. Although certain functions in the public telephone network already use digital technology, ISDN is a standard for using digital signals instead of analog signals right up to the communications equipment in a home or office.

ISDN has been in use for a number of years in certain European countries, and is now being offered by phone companies in the United States. The primary advantage is that ISDN can get nearly five times the throughput of an analog line, with higher accuracy. ISDN service requires a special phone line to the site, as well as digital computer adapters to replace modems. The service charge may be monthly, or based on the amount of use.


ITU-T

International Telecommunication Union’s standardization sector. The organization, previously called the CCITT, that sets international electronic communications standards for the industry.


Icon

A small graphic symbol that represents a program, data file, or specific action. Click on an icon to activate a program or dialog box. The Procomm Plus Action Bar is made up of configurable icons.


Importing Caller Information Editor Entries
Importing Caller ID Directory Editor Entries

The Caller ID Directory Editor can import data from two kinds of sources: other .cid files you’ve created or delimited text records. Typically, delimited text records are created by spreadsheet or database applications. Once imported into the directory, the records are interpreted and used to create new directory entries.

Importing Delimited Text Records

Importing Other .cid Files


Importing Caller Information Editor Entries See Also
Importing Caller ID Directory Editor Entries

Importing Delimited Text Records

Importing Other .cid Files


Importing Custom Format Entries

To import a custom-format file, select the File | Import - Specific menu item and display the Import Specific Connection Directory Entries dialog.

The supported source formats are shown in the Available list. Click on the one you want, or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on Import. Follow the instructions given in the dialogs displayed by the import utility you select.

If the Available list is empty, look in the dialdir directory under the Script path you've specified in Setup.  If the directory does not exist, or if it contains no scripts, you'll need to use Procomm Plus's installation program to install the Directory Conversion utilities.

To close the dialog without importing any records, click on Cancel.


Importing Delimited Text Entries

To import delimited text records, select the File | Import - Generic menu item. The Import Generic dialog is displayed, allowing you to specify the record fields contained in the data you’re importing. The fields you can select are displayed in the Available list; the currently-selected fields appear in the Field Order list. You should specify the data fields in the same order that they appear in the import records.

To add a field to the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing to the Field Order list. The field is removed from the Available list and added to the list of selected fields.

To remove a field from the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing to the Available list. The field is removed from the list of selected fields, and re-appears in the Available list.

You can specify the format of an imported record by taking advantage of several controls in the dialog:

Field Delimiter.

This setting determines the character used to separate entry fields within each imported record. You can specify a tab or comma character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the associated edit field.

Record Delimiter.

This setting determines the value(s) that separate the imported records. You can specify a Carriage Return/Line Feed pair, a Carriage Return or a Line Feed character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the associated edit field.

If you enable the Use Clipboard check box, the entry records will be copied from the Windows Clipboard when you click on Import. Otherwise, a standard File Open dialog is displayed, where you can specify a path and name for the records file, or browse for the file you want.

When you’re satisfied with the Field Order values you’ve selected and the control settings, click on Import... to process the entry records. To return to the Connection Directory window without importing any records, click on Cancel.


Importing Delimited Text Records

To import delimited text records, select the File | Import | Import Generic... menu item to open the Import Directory Entries dialog.

This dialog allows you to specify the record fields contained in the data you’re importing. The fields you can select are displayed in the Available Fields list; the selected fields appear in the Field Order list. You should specify the data fields in the same order that they will appear in the import records.

To add a field to the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing towards the Field Order list. The field is removed from the Available Fields list and added to the list of selected fields.

To remove a field from the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing towards the Available Fields list. The field is removed from the list of selected fields, and reappears in the Available Fields list.

You can specify the format of an imported record by taking advantage of several controls in the dialog:

Field Delimiter

This setting determines the character used to separate entry fields within each imported record. You can specify a tab or comma character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the associated edit field.

Record Delimiter

This setting determines the value(s) that separate the imported records. You can specify a Carriage Return/Line Feed pair, a Carriage Return or a Line Feed character by selecting the appropriate option button, or specify an ASCII decimal value from 0 to 127 by selecting Other and entering the value in the associated edit field.

Import...

When you’re satisfied with the Field Order values you’ve selected, the control settings and the filename, click on Import... to process the entry records.

If you enable the Use Clipboard check box, the entry records will be copied from the Windows Clipboard when you click on Import. Otherwise, a standard File Open dialog is displayed, where you can specify a path and name for the records file, or browse for the file you want to import.

Cancel

To return to the Caller ID Directory Editor window without importing any records, click on Cancel.


Importing Other .cid Files

You can import an existing .cid file from version 2.x, 3.x, or 4.0. To import a directory from 2.x, select the File | Import Version 2.x CID Directory menu item. For 3.x or 4.x versions, select the File | Import | Import CID Directory menu item. The editor displays the Open dialog, where you can browse for the .cid file you want with the standard dialog controls. When you’ve selected the directory file you want, click on OK to accept it and import it into the currently-loaded .cid file.

To close the dialog without importing any records, click on Cancel.


Importing and Exporting Entries See Also
Importing and Exporting Entries

Importing Delimited Text Entries

Importing Custom Format Entries

Exporting Directory Entries


Importing and exporting entries.

The Connection Directory can import data from two kinds of sources: delimited text records or custom-format records. In addition, it can export entry data.

For more information, see the following topics:

Importing Delimited Text Entries

Importing Custom Format Entries

Exporting Directory Entries


Incoming Mail Options

Options in the Incoming settings group allow you to specify whether the Internet Mail Client will automatically check for new mail. You can also select the path where new messages will be stored once they're retrieved. From within Setup, select the Internet, Internet Mail, Incoming buttons to display the panel:

Automatically Check for New Mail

If you want the Internet Mail Client to check for new messages automatically each time you launch it, select the Whenever the Internet Mail Client... option button. Never is selected by default.

Check for new mail...

If you enable this check box, the Internet Mail Client will automatically check your mail server for new messages at the interval specified in the associated edit field. The option is turned off by default.

Database path

This field specifies the path where your mail database will be stored.  By default, the Internet Mail Client uses the inetmail directory under your Procomm Plus home directory.  This is usually \procomm plus\inetmail.


Ind$file Protocol Options

Ind$file is an older, specialized protocol, used exclusively for file transfers to and from IBM mainframe and minicomputers.

Ind$file setting requirements can vary greatly from mainframe to mainframe! If you’re not familiar with mainframe communications or you need additional help in determining the values in the Protocol Converter Setup dialog, consult the system administrator or technical help desk for the mainframe system.

For a brief discussion of the protocol, see The Ind$file Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select Ind$file in the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the Ind$file panel:

Host OS

This setting specifies the host’s operating system. Because Ind$file requires different parameters for each host operating system, changing Host OS may also change the values of the Use LRECL, Use RECFM, ASCII Translate and CR-LF Translate fields.

Selectable values for Host OS include VM-CMS, MVS-TSO and Other. Note that if Other is selected, the Use LRECL, Use RECFM, ASCII Translate and CR-LF Translate fields are disabled.

Environment

This setting specifies the combination of protocol converter and terminal emulation you’ll use while connected to the host system. The Environment setting automatically adjusts the default protocol converter values and emulation settings when you select an option, making it a convenient way to configure Ind$file for different hardware.

The Current Terminal selections will automatically switch the Ind$file session to your current emulation type at the beginning of the transfer. If the emulation is not recognized by Ind$file, Procomm Plus will switch to the closest supported emulation whenever possible.

Changing the Environment setting will reset the sequences specified in the Protocol Converter Setup dialog. To retain those values, use the Modify... button to save them in a named option set before selecting a new Environment setting. The Pace Uploads field may also be affected by an Environment change.

Send command

The command you enter in this field will be used to invoke the Ind$file Send function. Other information you supply will affect the switches and data to be appended to the end of this command line, creating the "formatted" Ind$file command string. You can enter up to 29 characters in this field, but the command must end with a space.

Receive command

The command you enter in this field will be used to invoke the Ind$file Receive function. Other information you supply will affect the switches and data to be appended to the end of this command line, creating the "formatted" Ind$file command string. You can enter up to 29 characters in this field, but the command must end with a space.

Timing

This setting specifies the amount of time Procomm Plus will wait for acknowledgment from the host system during an Ind$file session.

The default setting of Normal is appropriate for most host systems. However, if the Normal setting causes an unacceptable number of time-outs or errors, try switching to the Relaxed setting. This will slow the transfer slightly, but should improve the overall efficiency.

The Tight timing value will improve transfer speed, but can cause time-outs and errors over some connections.

To determine the best setting for your host, experiment by transferring the same file with each of the settings.

Receive Options

These settings allow you to specify how Procomm Plus will handle aborted downloads and filename "collisions."

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase Ind$file downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete Ind$file downloads are not deleted.

Overwrite existing file

Select this setting if you want a file downloaded to your computer to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename.

ASCII Translate

If this setting is enabled, EBCDIC characters in a downloaded file will be converted to their equivalent ASCII values, and ASCII characters in an uploaded file will be converted to their equivalent EBCDIC values. The EBCDIC character set is used exclusively by IBM mainframes, and a "text" file you receive from the mainframe will contain these characters by default.

Do not enable this setting if you’ll be transferring binary files! The translation will modify the data, making it unusable.

CR-LF Translate

If this setting is enabled, conversion between mainframe and personal computer carriage return/line feed sequences will be performed during an Ind$file transfer. It is disabled by default.

Do not enable this setting if you’ll be transferring binary files! The translation will modify the data, making it unusable.

Display Data During Transfer

If this option is enabled, data being transferred with Ind$file will be echoed to the Terminal display. If you’re uploading the file, data is echoed from the protocol converter. Enabling this option may impair the overall transfer speed on some connections. It is disabled by default.

Pace Uploads

This option is not available when using one of the 3174... environments. When this option is enabled, Procomm Plus regulates IND$FILE uploads by pausing between transmissions. Some protocol converters cannot handle an IND$FILE upload if data is being sent too fast. Typically, the converter may disconnect, time-out, or send ASCII "bell" characters, decimal value 7, until you reset it. Enabling this option slows the overall transfer, but it will prevent the uploaded data from overwhelming the converter and causing a failure.

Systems that require specific File transfer on settings will use those settings rather than the Pace Uploads checkbox. If you have not provided a string in File Transfer on field, the Pace Uploads settings will be used.

If you've defined a protocol converter sequence that turns echo off for speed, Pace Uploads is automatically disabled; Procomm Plus cannot monitor the transfer to pace it properly if echo is not on.

The Lines field allows you to specify the number of 80-character lines to be sent between the pacing delays. Acceptable values are from 0 to 9. The larger the Lines value, the faster the transfer progresses. If the value is too high, however, you'll experience a failure as if you hadn't enabled pacing!

Experiment with the Lines value to determine the value that works best for your host system; the default depends on your environment.

Use LRECL

If this setting is enabled, its associated edit field specifies a logical record length or LRECL for the host file during an upload from your computer. If the setting is disabled, the host will usually default to a LRECL of 80. This setting is enabled, with a LRECL value of 80 by default.

If your host system is running TSO, and you’re uploading a file that already exists on the host, do not specify a LRECL value.

Use RECFM

If this setting is enabled, its associated list box specifies a record format or RECFM for the host file during an upload from your computer. You can select either a Fixed or Variable record format. If this setting is disabled, the host system typically defaults to a Fixed record format. It is enabled by default, with a Variable RECFM value.

If your host system is running TSO, and you’re uploading a file that already exists on the host, do not specify a RECFM value.

Protocol Converter...

If you’ve set your Environment field to use a specific terminal, rather than a Current terminal value, you can customize your protocol converter settings. Click on this button to open the Protocol Converter Setup dialog. If the assorted values in this dialog are wrong, you may not be able to communicate properly with the protocol converter. You should change the values in this dialog only if the system administrator of your host system has supplied you with different settings!

Click on OK to save any changes you may have made and return to the main Ind$file settings panel. To close the dialog without saving your changes, click on Cancel.


Initialization string

A set of commands sent to a modem to enable, disable, and configure certain options, in order to optimize the modem’s performance.


Initializing the Fax Modem

If your modem doesn't respond when you start Procomm Plus, you can initialize it for fax operations by selecting Fax | Initialize Fax Modem in the Fax Status window. Procomm Plus sends the modem command strings to reset and reconfigure your fax modem.

Note that this command only affects the current connection selected in the Fax Status Connections window. To reset a data modem, use the Data | Initialize Data Modem menu item in the Terminal window.


Initiating a Connection

No matter what communication mode of Procomm Plus you are using, you can always select Window | Connect to the Internet from the menu. Selecting this menu item will initiate the dialing procedure to connect and log you into the service provider currently specified in the Current Internet Connection option set in the Internet, Internet Connection dialog.


Install

To make a piece of software or hardware available locally on your computer. For software this usually means copying it to your hard drive and configuring it, or using the setup.exe file for an automated installation.


Int 14 Redirector

Interrupt 14h Redirector. A method of replacing an interrupt service routine so that communications are redirected from the COM port to the network card. The Int 14 redirector is one of the simpler communications APIs used to access a network modem.

See Communications API.


Integrating Communications

Procomm Plus is a group of integrated communications modules. Each module is designed to interact and cooperate with other modules, and to be as consistent as possible in its interface. In addition, the modules share major program components such as the Connection Directory and the Setup utility. The implications of Procomm Plus’s integrated architecture go beyond how its components work together. It provides you with a single-application solution to almost any communication task!

The following communication modules are included in Procomm Plus:

The Terminal window.

The Terminal window module provides terminal emulation and file transfer services, which you can use to connect to host systems or BBS over a modem or a direct serial connection. The Terminal window can also access network resources for a connection, either through an Asynchronous Communication Server or ACS, or through a telnet connection. The Terminal window handles any connection made with a Data- or Telnet-class Connection Directory entry.

The Terminal window is discussed in detail in Using the Terminal Window.

The Fax Status window.

The Fax Status window provides send and receive fax capability. It is launched automatically whenever you send a fax, or request that Procomm Plus receive incoming fax calls. The Fax Status window also monitors and reports the progress of all fax operations and all fax-related modem activity.

The Fax Status window is discussed with other fax-related topics in Faxing with Procomm Plus.

The Web Browser window

The Web Browser window allows you to access the many features of the Internet. The Web Browser window handles any connection made with a Web-class Connection Directory entry.

The Web Browser window is discussed with other Internet topics in Procomm Plus and the Internet.

The Internet Mail Client window

The Internet Mail Client window allows you to send and receive Internet mail. It is associated with a Connection Directory Mail entry class.

The mail client window is discussed with other Internet topics in Procomm Plus and the Internet.

The News Reader window

The News Reader window provides access to the wide variety of Internet news groups. It is associated with a Connection Directory News entry class.

The News Reader window is discussed with other Internet topics in Procomm Plus and the Internet.

The FTP Client window

The FTP Client window allows you to connect to FTP servers to transfer files. It also provides basic file management capabilities. The FTP Client window handles any connection made with an FTP-class Connection Directory entry.

The FTP Client window is discussed in The FTP Client.

Although we’ll refer to the communication modules as "windows," the Terminal, FTP Client, Web Browser, News Reader and Internet Mail Client windows are actually different views that share a single window. For example, if you’re running the Terminal window and select a Web-class entry from the Connection Directory, the Web Browser window displays automatically to handle the connection.

This architecture does not prevent you from running multiple instances of Procomm Plus, however. For example, you can run the Terminal window and the Web Browser window side-by-side simply by executing them both from the Procomm Plus Start menu group, or by selecting a Window | New Window menu item.

This design allows you to switch quickly between the Terminal window, the FTP Client window and the Web Browser window. This means that you can spend more time communicating, and less time moving between windows or communications applications. Also, because we’ve designed each module’s interface to be as consistent as possible with its siblings, you’ll won’t have to adjust to jarring interface changes as you move between them!


Internet

A global network of computers joined together by the TCP/IP network protocol, and a common computer address system. Although the Internet has traditionally been self-governed, mutual respect and a loose adherence to the constantly evolving protocols, help keep access to information open and viable in a global environment.


Internet Addresses

All of the computers on the Internet have unique identities which are declared in a 32-bit numbering system. These identifying numbers are called IP addresses. To make these numbers more readable, people usually break the addresses into four numbers joined by periods; each of these groups of numbers is called an octet. The first two or three octets are used to specify the network a machine is connected to. For instance, all of the public computers that Quarterdeck has connected to the Internet currently have an IP address of 205.138.163.x where the lowercase x varies among the specific machines. Here, the first three octets are used to designate the network and the fourth to designate the computer.

However, even with the four octets it is much easier for people to remember an alphabetic name. bbs.qdeck.com, for example, is much easier to remember than its current numeric equivalent 205.138.163.14. To make this possible, there are computers called domain name servers (DNS) that link alphabetic names with numeric IP addresses.

Some Internet service providers assign an IP addresses with each user’s account. Others, in an effort to minimize the number of IP addresses used, assign IP addresses as they are needed: each time you log into the service, you may be assigned a different IP address.

It is important to note that IP addresses often change over time and the numeric addresses listed above may not be correct at a later date: this is another reason we have name servers.


Internet Basics

The Internet is by far the largest network in the world. In reality, it is more like a global network composed of smaller networks. All of the machines on the Internet are interconnected using Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, or TCP/IP. In order to keep track of all of the computers, a special addressing method is required.

See the following topics for more information:

Internet Addresses

Transferring Information

Connecting to the Internet

Using the Internet


Internet Connection Options

Manually installing or configuring a connection to the Internet can be a daunting task. However, Procomm Plus's Setup makes the process much easier!

Internet Setup

Within Setup's Internet Connection group, you can launch the Internet Setup wizard to configure Procomm Plus for Internet access.

Internet Connection Options

 For more help in working with option sets, see Option Sets.

Current Internet Connection

This field specifies the Current Internet Connection used by Procomm Plus to access the Internet.  The connection is typically built by the Internet Setup Wizard, but you can modify your connection settings by clicking on the Connection Properties button.

Mail Option Set

This field specifies the Internet, Mail option set that will be used by the Internet Mail Client when you access your mail server with the Current Internet Connection. The Internet, Mail option set discussion begins in Internet Mail Options.

News Option Set

This field specifies the Internet, News option set that will be used by the News Reader when you access your news server with the Current Internet Connection. See The Internet, News option set discussion begins in Internet News Options.


Internet Mail

Electronic Mail that is sent across the Internet network using SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol). To create and send mail, and to access the messages on your Internet mail server account, you use an Internet mail client. The Procomm Plus Internet Mail client supports the SMTP protocol, and POP3 Internet mail servers.

See also POP. See also SMTP.


Internet Mail Addresses

Mail addresses on the Internet are made up of two parts, the username and the domain. The domain specifies the computer system or network that you logon to for Internet access, while the username identifies your particular account on the domain system. The username and domain, linked by an ‘@’ sign, form an Internet address. For example, in

president@whitehouse.gov

the username is president and the domain is whitehouse.gov.


Internet Mail Options

The Internet Mail settings group includes settings that determine how the Internet Mail Client will interact with your mail server, as well as how it will handle the messages you send and receive. The Internet Mail settings group contains six minor groups:

Mail User Info Options

Mail Server Options

Incoming Mail Options

Outgoing Mail Options

Mail Reply Options

Other Mail Options

You can save and reference the settings in the Internet Mail group as an option set. This allows you to create multiple operating "profiles" that you can select from the Quick Select Line in the Internet Mail Client window or from ASPECT scripts as you need them.

For help in creating or using option sets, see Option Sets.


Internet News Options

The News settings group includes settings that control the basic behavior of the Newsgroup Reader. The News group contains five minor groups:

News User Info Options

News Server Options

News Properties

News Reply Options

Other News Options

News Database Options

You can save and reference the settings in the Internet Mail group as an option set. This allows you to create multiple operating "profiles" that you can select from the News Reader window's Quick Select Line in the Internet Mail Client window or from ASPECT scripts as you need them.

For help in creating or using option sets, see Option Sets.


Internet Service Provider

An organization that supplies dial-up Internet connectivity. The service may be commercial, governmental or educational. An Internet Service Provider typically offers a SLIP and/or PPP server, Usenet news, an Internet Mail server and of technical support.


Internet Tab

Click on this tab to access settings and option groups that affect Procomm Plus’s Internet modes, including Telnet, the FTP Client, and the Web Browser. TCP/IP, News Reader and Internet Mail Client settings are also available.


Introducing the Connection Directory

The Connection Directory is a key component in the Procomm Plus integrated communications strategy. It allows you store the connection information for all of the sites and systems you access in a central location, and even to create single entries that contain multiple classes or connection types.

See The Connection Directory for a more in-depth discussion.

The Connection Directory is available from all of the major modes within Procomm Plus. To open it, click on its icon on the Action Bar, or press [image] [image]. The Connection Directory is displayed, with the name of the current directory file in its title bar.

The Connection Directory’s most prominent features are the class selection buttons and the entry list. The class selection buttons, which appear just below the directory’s menu bar and Action Bar, allow you to select the types of entries you want to view, either by clicking on them or by using their keyboard accelerators. The Entries list box at the left side of the directory window displays the entries available within the selected class.

To select an entry or group, simply click on it, or use the [image] and cursor keys to highlight it. Once you’ve selected an entry or group, you can view its settings in the Entry Info group box on the right side of the directory window.

Between the Entries list box and the Entry Info group box are the Settings buttons. Each entry class’s settings are arranged into two or more related groups. You can view each of these groups by clicking on the appropriate Settings button.

At the bottom of the Connection Directory window are three important command buttons. The OK button closes the Connection Directory, saving any changes you may have made to the entries or groups, while the Cancel button closes the directory window without saving any changes. The Connect button closes the directory window and initiates a connection attempt on the currently-selected entries or groups.

Procomm Plus’s handling of a connection attempt depends on the entry class of the selection(s). For a detailed discussion, see Connecting!.

When you connect to a site or location using a Connection Directory entry, that entry’s settings become the current settings for Procomm Plus. For example, if you connected with a Data-class entry, the Terminal window would use the emulation and default protocol specified in the entry, as well as the entry’s other options. Thus, by customizing a directory entry’s settings, you can make your on-line sessions as efficient as possible, without altering Procomm Plus’s saved default settings.

You can also connect to a site or location manually, either by using the Connection Directory’s Connect | Manual Connect... function or a variety of other methods. If you connect to another system without using a Connection Directory entry, Procomm Plus does not adjust any of its operating settings.

See The Connection Directory for a more in-depth discussion of the Connection Directory.


Introducing the Cover Sheet Editor

The Cover Sheet Editor included with Procomm Plus gives you extensive control over the design and editing of fax cover sheets. Using the editor, you can:

Create original fax cover sheets that include your company name and logo.

Personalize your faxes with your own unique cover sheets.

Customize any of the cover sheets included with Procomm Plus.

If you’ve ever used a Windows drawing program, you’ll probably find the Cover Sheet Editor very familiar. If not, you’ll find the editor’s "point and click" design easy to learn!

The editor allows you to use five types of objects anywhere in your cover sheets:

Windows bitmap or .bmp graphic files.

Windows metafile or .wmf graphic files.

Graphical boxes.

Static, or unchanging, text fields.

Variable text fields, which can be filled with data from a Connection Directory entry or the current Fax, User Info option set values in Setup.


Kermit Protocol Options

Kermit is typically used for transferring files to and from mini- and mainframe host systems, and there are several different Kermit revisions for many of these systems. To determine the proper values to use when transferring files to and from your particular host system, consult the system administrator or technical help desk.

If you’re using Kermit to transfer files to and from another personal computer, such as a BBS or a Procomm Plus Host, the default Kermit settings should provide the fastest and most efficient transfers. In any case, we recommend that you not alter the default Kermit settings unless you have a specific reason to do so.

For a brief discussion of the protocol, see The Kermit Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select Kermit in the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the Kermit protocol settings.

Default Characters

These fields allow you to specify the characters used to control and interpret transmitted data.

Control Quote

This setting specifies the character used to indicate that the next byte has been encoded to prevent possible interference from communications equipment.

Pad

This setting specifies the character used to pad a packet.

End of Line

This setting specifies the unique character used to signal the end of a packet.

8th Bit Quote

This setting specifies the unique character that signals that the next byte has been "8-bit quoted." 8-bit quoting allows transfers of 8-bit values over a 7-bit link by "converting" 8-bit values to 7-bit encoded values.

Block Start

This setting specifies the unique character used to signal the start of a new packet.

Other Options

These fields allow you to specify the Kermit packet and pad sizes and several file-handling options.

Maximum Packet Size

This setting specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in a single data packet. In general, larger data packets reduce the overhead of sending multiple smaller packets. However, smaller packets allow for quicker error recovery at lower speeds. You can specify a packet size from 20 to 1024 bytes; the default is 1024.

Number of pad chars.

The number of extra characters that are sent before each packet to allow for communications with some half-duplex systems.

File type

If you’re transferring text files, you can set this option to Text to have carriage return and line feed characters in the file converted appropriately by the receiving machine.

If Binary is selected, the file is transferred without conversion. If you’re transferring executable files, images or other binary files, you must specify a File Type of Binary to properly reproduce the file on the receiving machine.

Overwrite existing file

Enable this option if you want a file downloaded to your computer to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. By default, the incoming file will be renamed and the existing file will remain untouched.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase Kermit downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete Kermit downloads are not deleted.

Block Check Type

This setting determines the method Kermit will use to verify a transferred block of data. The various methods are listed in the order of increasing robustness. However, not all revisions of Kermit support all of these methods.


Kermit Server Finish

Select the Data | Kermit Command | Finish menu item to terminate the Kermit server, and return to the host operating system.


Kermit Server Get File

To download a file, you must first logon to your mainframe host and place the host into Kermit server mode.

To download the file, select the Data | Kermit Command | Get File... menu item to display the Kermit Get Command dialog. Enter the name of the file, just as it appears on the host, in the edit field. On some systems, you can also include settings or arguments in addition to the filename. Click on OK to accept the filename and arguments, if any, and begin the host’s transfer.


Kermit Server Logout

Select the Data | Kermit Command | Logout menu item to terminate the Kermit server and log out of the host, terminating the on-line session.


Kermit Server Mode

If you connect to a mainframe or minicomputer that supports the Kermit protocol "server" mode, you can easily transfer files between your machine and the host! Procomm Plus offers four commands you can use if the host system is acting as a Kermit server:

Get File

Send File

Finish

Logout

Before you can use the Kermit server commands, you must place your host in to server mode. Once the host is in Kermit server mode, it will only accept information in the form of Kermit packets. For the particular steps required to initiate and use Kermit server mode on your host, consult with your system administrator or help desk.


Kermit Server Mode See Also
Kermit Server Mode

Get File

Send File

Finish

Logout


Kermit Server Send File

With the host in Kermit server mode, uploading a file is a simple process! Select the Data | Kermit Command | Send File... menu item to display the Send File dialog. You can browse for the filename you want to send, using the standard Windows navigation controls available in the Send File dialog. When you’re satisfied with your selection, click on OK to accept it and begin the transfer!


Keyboard Mappings

84 Key, Terminal Keyboard Mappings

ADDS 60	Heath 19	VT-220/320
ADDS 90	IBM 3101	Wyse 50
ADM 31	IBM 3161	Wyse 60
ADM 3A/5	IBM 3270/950	Wyse 75
ANSI BBS	IBM PC	Wyse 100
AT&T 4410	TTY	RIPscrip
AT&T 605	Televideo
DG D100	TVI 922
DG D200/D210	VT-52/VIDTEX
Esprit 3	VT-100/102

101 Key, Terminal Keyboard Mappings

ADDS 60	Heath 19	VT-220/320
ADDS 90	IBM 3101	Wyse 50
ADM 31	IBM 3161	Wyse 60
ADM 3A/5	IBM 3270/950	Wyse 75
ANSI BBS	IBM PC	Wyse 100
AT&T 4410	TTY	RIPscrip
AT&T 605	Televideo
DG D100	TVI 922
DG D200/D210	VT-52/VIDTEX
Esprit 3	VT-100/102


LAN

Local Area Network. A network of computers in a small geographic location, usually in one building. A LAN is typically owned by one organization.

See WAN.


Launching a Script

You can launch a script file in four different ways from within the Terminal window:

•	By selecting it from the Action Bar’s Script File list box.

The Script File list box displays the names of the compiled scripts available in your default script path. Click on the list box arrow to select and execute a script. If the filename you want is already displayed in the list box, you can click on the Run Script Action Bar button to execute it.

•	By selecting the Run command.

Select the Scripts | Run... menu item, or press [image] [image] to open the Run ASPECT File dialog.  This dialog displays the compiled script files available in the Script Path specified in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup. It also allows you to browse for scripts in other drives and paths.

Once you’ve located and selected the script you want, click on OK to launch it. To close the dialog without running a script, click on Cancel.

•	By selecting the Compile/Edit command.

Select the Scripts | Compile/Edit... menu item, or press [image] [image] to open the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog.  By default, this dialog displays the source script files available in the Script Path specified in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup. You can specify other file types by clicking on the List Files of Type list box, and browse for files in other drives and paths.

Once you’ve located and selected the script you want, click on Run to launch it. To close the dialog without running a script, click on Exit.

The Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog also has other purposes. See Compiling Scripts for more information.

•	By connecting to a Connection Directory entry linked to the script.

If you’ve linked a script to a Connection Directory entry, Procomm Plus will automatically run the script when you connect to the entry. This feature can make logon or repetitive-task scripts very convenient, indeed!


Left Mouse Options

The Left Mouse options allow you to specify the Terminal window’s response to a double click on the left mouse button, as well as the characters used to prefix text pasted to the port. From within Setup, select the Data, Data Options, Left Mouse buttons to display the Left Mouse panel.

Left Mouse Selection

These settings allow you to specify what characters are sent as end of line characters when you select text in the Terminal window and what characters prefix text that you paste.

End of line character(s)

By default, Procomm Plus transmits the sequence mapped to the current emulation’s [image] key as an end of line marker for text selected in the Terminal window. For most emulations, this sequence is a carriage return. However, you can specify one or more characters to be sent instead by selecting the right-most option button and entering the character(s) you want in the associated edit field.

The end of line characters are appended to the end of complete lines whenever you select text from the Terminal display or Scrollback Buffer and then choose Copy to Windows Clipboard, Copy to Port or Copy to Port with Enter. If you select text from the Terminal display or Scrollback Buffer and then choose any other option, Procomm Plus sends the end of line characters specific to the destination instead of this value:

File Clipboard

Text sent to the File Clipboard is concatenated without any end of line characters, since it is presumed to be a filename.

Disk file

Text lines sent to a disk file end with a CR/LF combination.

Printer

Text lines sent to the system printer end with a true printer end of line sequence, which advances the line and returns the printer carriage, instead of a CR/LF combination.

Procomm Plus also adds the end of line character(s) you specify in this field to the end of each line pasted from the Windows Clipboard. The clipboard data is scanned for CR, LF and CR/LF end of line characters. Wherever these characters appear, they are removed and replaced with your end of line character(s).

Selection paste prefix

When you paste selected text, Procomm Plus will prefix the text with the characters you enter here. By default, the field is empty.

Paste Prefix is useful when you’re quoting text from a previous on-line session. In that case, you might set your Selection Paste Prefix character to ">."

Left Mouse Button Action

Double click transmits

By default, Procomm Plus’s Terminal window transmits the word you double clicked with the left mouse button. You can choose to send either a word or character, with or without a carriage return, by clicking on the Double click transmits list box.


Log On

(verb) To provide the necessary information so that security implementation will allow you to access the information and resources on a given system.


Logon

(noun) The information provided that allows you to access the secured information and resources on a given system. A common logon consists of an assigned user identification and a password.


Logon Timeout

The Logon Timeout has a default setting of 60 seconds. This is usually enough time to log onto a system. If you find that the connection times out before you can successfully logon, you can lengthen the amount of time the FTP Client will wait for a logon. See logon timeout in FTP-class settings: FTP Options.


Logon, the Script Generator

The following links access the Logon script documentation, located in logon.hlp. If these links do not work or if you’re unable to locate this file, Logon may not have been installed. Run Procomm Plus’s installation program, and use the Custom Installation feature to install the sample scripts.

Introducing Logon

Running Logon

Using Logon

Step-by-Step: Generating a Host Entry


MAPI

Messaging Application Programming Interface. A Microsoft standard that allows applications to communicate with MAPI compliant e-mail applications such as Windows 95 Microsoft Exchange.


MCI Mail

A commercial e-mail server. MCI Mail provides you with an e-mail address so that you can send and receive e-mail over the Internet.


MIME

Multipurpose Internet Mail Extentensions. Originally designed to add capabilities to e-mail messages, MIME is used to attach eight bit binary files to seven bit text e-mail messages.

The MIME protocol is now also used extensively by the World Wide Web to link graphics, video, and various other mediums to a Web page. The different types of files that can be hyperlinked to a Web page are called MIME Types.

See also Helper Application.


MNP

A series of early modem standards that define certain error correction and data compression protocols.


Mail

See E-Mail.


Mail Gateway

A computer that routs e-mail between two networks that use dissimilar protocols. A common use is for routing mail from the Internet, which uses SMTP protocol, to a network which implements a different e-mail protocol. In this way you can receive Internet e-mail as well as your local mail in the same inbox.


Mail Manual Connections

If the Mail-class is selected when you request a manual connection, Procomm Plus prompts you for the Internet mail address you want to use.

If the Internet Mail Client is not already active, it loads and displays the New Message window, with the address you entered placed in the To field. For more information, see Writing and Sending Mail.


Mail Protocols

The Internet Mail Client is designed to receive Internet mail messages from a Post Office Protocol, or POP mail server. As you might expect from the protocol’s name, a POP mail server acts much like a post office on the Internet: it accepts messages from other locations on the Internet and delivers them to you at your request.

To send messages, the Internet Mail Client uses the Simple Mail Transport Protocol, or SMTP.


Mail Reply Options

The mail Reply settings group allows you to specify whether the Internet Mail Client will include the original text when you reply to a message. You can also specify a variety of "quoting" options for the included text, such as indentation and the prefix or "quote" characters. From within Setup, select the Internet, Internet Mail, Reply buttons to display the panel:

After Reading Message

This setting determines the Internet Mail Client's response when you've finished reading a message and you either delete it or move it to another folder. You can choose to read the next message up or down, or return the client's main window. Read next message down is selected by default.

Text Quoting

The settings in this group determine whether the Internet Mail Client will quote the original message's text when it's included in your reply. When text is quoted, each line in the included text is prefixed by the Quote prefix you specify. You can enable or disable text quoting by selecting the appropriate option button. Quoting is on by default.

Include original text in message replies

If this option is enabled, the Internet Mail Client will include the original message's text in your reply message. The option is enabled by default.

Indent original text

If this option is enabled, the Internet Mail Client will indent the original message's text when it includes it in your reply. The option is disabled by default.

Include headers in quoted message

If this option is enabled, the mail client will include the original message's headers as quoted text. By default, it is enabled.

Quote original text

If this option is enabled, the Internet Mail Client will prefix each line of quoted text with the prefix character you specify in the Quote prefix field.  This field is enabled by default.

Maximum number of quoted lines

Click in this edit field to specify the maximum number of lines from the original message's text to be quoted in your reply. The default value is 300 lines.

Quote prefix

Click in this field to specify the character(s) the mail client will use to prefix quoted text. The default Quote prefix is ">".

Word wrap after [ ] characters

By default, the Internet Mail Client will wrap to the next line when your text exceeds 70 characters. To set a different line width, click in the edit field and enter the value you want.


Mail Server Options

The Mail Server settings group lets you specify your mail server's address and determine how the Internet Mail Client will retrieve your mail. You can also specify your logon name and password if they are required by the mail server. From within Setup, select the Internet, Internet Mail, Mail Server buttons to display the panel:

Incoming mail server address

Click in this field to edit the address of your mail server.

Delete retrieved mail on server

By default, the Internet Mail Client deletes messages from the server as it retrieves them. If you don't want the client to delete messages it retrieves, disable this check box.

Forward outgoing mail to this mail server

If the mail server you use to send mail is different from the server specified in Incoming mail server address, above, enable the check box and enter the server's address in the associated edit field. By default, the ckeckbox is off and its edit field is left blank

Mail Server Account

If your mail server requires you to logon for access, click in the Logon name and Password edit fields to enter your logon information.


Mail User Info Options

The User Info options allow you to specify your name and mail addresses. From within Setup, select the Internet, Internet Mail, User Info buttons to display the panel:

Full name

The name you entered when you installed Procomm Plus will appear in this field. Click in the field if you want to edit it.

Email Address

Click in this field to enter or edit your mail address.

Reply Address

If the address other users will need to send you mail is different from the Email Address above, enter it in this field. By default, the field is blank.

Signature file

If you've created a signature file that you want to include in every message you send with the Internet Mail Client, enter its name and path in this field or click on the Browse... button to select it.


Mail-class: Entry Info

The fields in the Mail-class Entry Info group are similate to those you might find in a normal address book, such as an address and company name:

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Mail Address

The Internet mail address used to send messages to this entry.

Company

The company name for this entry. It is not required to send mail, but it can be used as a search key.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.


Mailing a Fax

If your computer is connected to a MAPI-compatible network mail system, you can use it to send someone a copy of your faxes. Simply select the faxes you want, the click on the File | Mail... menu item. Fax Manager automatically connects to your mail system, but you’ll need to provide any necessary logon information.

Once connected to mail, Fax Manager creates a new mail message and attaches each page of the fax document to it as a separate document. When the mail message is delivered by the network, the recipient can view the fax by saving all of the attached documents into a single directory and loading the .fax file with the Fax Viewer.

If you’re not connected to a MAPI-compatible network mail system, the File | Mail... menu item is disabled.


Mainframe

A large and powerful computer that can handle millions of transactions at one time. Mainframe computers are typically used by large companies or universities to provide information and services to many users.


Managing Fax Documents

Fax Manager’s documents list lets you manage faxes you’ve received, sent or scheduled quickly and easily.

Viewing a Fax

Forwarding a Fax

Mailing a Fax

Moving a Fax

Copying a Fax

Rescheduling a Fax

Changing a Fax Delivery

Searching for Faxes


Managing Folders

When you first run Fax Manager, it creates four folders: Inbox, Outbox, Sent Faxes and Cover Sheets. You can use these folders and create folders of your own to suit your needs.

For more information, see the following topics:

Creating Folders

Renaming Folders

Refreshing a Folder

Deleting a Folder


Manual Answer

If you know that an incoming call is a fax transmission, you can instruct Procomm Plus to answer the call and receive the fax. Do this by selecting Answer Fax Now from the Fax Status Fax menu.  You can also click on the Fax Status Answer Now Action Bar button.

Regardless of how you initiate the answer attempt, Procomm Plus will activate your fax modem and begin processing the incoming fax immediately.


Manual Connect

Option in Procomm Plus that allows you, depending on which mode you have selected, to type in connection information such as a Web address or phone number. When you connect manually, the current configurations in Setup are used instead of using Connection Directory information.


Messaging

E-mail related activities. Often used to describe interactions with the MAPI interface in a Microsoft environment.


Meta Key

A Procomm Plus feature that allows you to map certain keys for added hotkey functionality in the Terminal mode.


Metafile

A file with instructions for creating a graphical image. Different from bitmaps in that they have relational coordinates, and as such, are easier to resize and change. Metafiles are used in Procomm Plus for some of the graphics in the supplied fax cover sheets.

See Bitmap.


Metafile Objects

To specify the display characteristics of a Metafile object, double click on it. The editor opens the Metafile Object Options dialog.

Sizing Group

Proportional

If you want the metafile image to maintain its proportions, regardless of the area you assign it in the editor, select the Proportional radio button in the Sizing group.

This setting is helpful if the metafile you’re including contains text or other features that should maintain their original proportions. Note however that the image may not fill the entire area you assign it to in the cover sheet.

Stretch to Fit

If you want the metafile image to be expanded as required to fill the area you assign it in the cover sheet, select the Stretch to Fit radio button in the Sizing group. Note that this may cause the image to be distorted or compressed.

Click on the OK button to close the dialog and accept the current settings, including any changes you’ve made. If you don’t want to keep the changes you’ve made, you can click on Cancel to close the dialog.


Mode

Used to describe the form of communications that Procomm Plus is using, for example, Internet mail, fax, and terminal modes.


Modem

A device used by PCs to send and receive data over an analog phone line. A modem is not designed to transmit data directly over a digital system such as an ISDN line. Modems include a MOdulator, used to convert digital data into analog sound waves for transmission over phone lines. They also have a DEModulator that converts analog signals back into digital information that can be used by the PC.


Modem Connection Options

From within Setup, select the System, Modem Connection buttons to display the Modem Connection options panel:

Current Modem/Connection

This scrolling list box indicates the current connection. Modems and direct wired connections will indicate the COM port they're using as part of the connection name. You can select another existing connection by clicking on the connection name in the list box.

Modem/Connection Properties

Click on this button to modify the properties for the current modem or connection.  Modem properties include the COM port and speaker volume.  Connection properties include port settings, hardware and software flow control and error control.

Add New Modem/Connection

Click on this button to install a new modem or connection type. Procomm Plus displays the Windows Install New Modem wizard.

Fax Settings...

Click here to modify the fax settings for the current connection.  For more information, see the Fax Settings discussion.

Make this connection available to Procomm Plus

If you disable this check box, the current connection will not be available anywhere within Procomm Plus.  This includes the connection list displayed from the Quick Select Line. By default, it is enabled.

Use this modem/connection to send faxes

If you enable this check box, Procomm Plus will mark the current modem/connection as available whenever you send a fax document.

Incoming call handling for current modem/connection

This option button group determines how Procomm Plus will handle incoming calls while using the current connection.

To disable autoanswer, select Do not accept or answer any incoming calls.

To answer calls, select Procomm Plus should answer incoming calls after and specify how many rings will trigger answer mode.  In this mode, you should also specify whether Procomm Plus should accept fax calls (if you're using a fax modem), data calls or both.

To allow another Windows application to answer calls, select Another program will answer incoming calls.  In this mode, you should also specify whether Procomm Plus should accept fax calls (if you're using a fax modem), data calls or both.  The answering application must be properly configured to hand control of the session to Procomm Plus once the connection is made.

Although the selection you make here for Incoming call handling determines the default answer action taken by Procomm Plus, you can change these answer action settings from the Terminal window menu as well.  For more information, see Auto Answer Modes.


Modem/Connection Properties Dialog

This dialog includes settings for non-TAPI connections that don't use a modem, including direct connections using a null-modem cable.  The fields are:

Baud rate

A single click on this drop down listbox displays a list of the most common baud settings.  For a successful connection, the baud rate must be the same for both computers.

The speed of any Windows communication operation depends largely on your serial card or internal modem. Because of this, baud rates above 19,200 will not work reliably without a 16550 or better UART. The UART is a chip that controls and buffers the data coming in through a serial port, and the 16550 version of this chip is especially designed for high-speed communications.

Parity

This setting determines the type of parity checking that will be used while on-line. The default Parity setting is None, or no parity, but you can also select Odd, Even, Mark and Space parity.

For the majority of connections, you’ll only need to choose between None and Even parity. If you select None, the Data bits field will automatically adjust to 8 bits, resulting in a setting of N-8-1, which is the common setting for bulletin boards and PC-based host systems.

If you choose Even parity, the Data bits field will adjust to 7 bits, resulting in a setting of E-7-1, which is the common setting for some on-line systems like CompuServe, as well as many mainframe-based host systems.

Data Bits

This setting determines the number of data bits. You can select either 8 or 7 data bits, with a default of 8.

Stop Bits

This setting determines the number of stop bits. You can select either 1 or 2 stop bits, with a default of 1.

Use hardware flow control

If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus will use hardware flow control, or RTS/CTS pacing. Hardware flow control is required if you’re using a baudrate greater than 2400.

Software flow control (Xon/Xoff)

This setting determines whether the Terminal window will recognize software flow control characters, also called "Xon/Xoff pacing," to regulate the flow of information between itself and the host system. Software flow control is used on some systems to prevent a faster machine from overloading a slower machine’s processing of transmitted data, or to pause the data flow so that it can be read while on-line.

Drop DTR to hang up

If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus will lower the RS-232 DTR signal to terminate a call. This option is enabled by default.


Modifying an Annotation Object

Once you’ve placed an annotation object on your fax, you can quickly change its attributes to suit your needs. Depending on the type of object you’ve placed and selected, you can change its line width, line color, fill color and font settings. To make the task even easier, the viewer gives you several different ways to access these settings: from the Quick Select Line, from the Annotation menu, and from the right mouse button pop-up menu.

Changes you make in the Line Width, Line Color, Fill Color, Text Color and Font settings are applied to the object(s) you’ve selected in the annotation layer. If you haven’t selected any objects, your new settings will be used for objects you subsequently place in the annotation layer.

Changing the Line Width

Changing the Line Color

Changing the Fill Color

Changing the Text Attributes

Selecting Multiple Annotation Objects

Arranging Annotation Objects

Deleting Annotation Objects

Annotation and the Windows Clipboard


Modifying an Option Set

Once you’ve created an option set, you can change its settings simply by making it the active or current set, then applying the changes you want. You can also use two other Setup functions from the Modify Option Set dialog:

Save As...

For an explanation of using the Save As... button, see Step 3 in Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set.

Use Defaults

If you want to restore an option set to its default values, click on Use Defaults.

Remove

If you want to delete an option set you’ve created, click on Remove. Note that you can never remove the default option set. The Remove button is disabled unless the currently selected option set is one you’ve created.

Cancel

To close the dialog without making any changes, click on Cancel.


Monitor Receive Settings

The Monitor Receive settings allow you to select the color used in Monitor window to display data received from the host system. From within Setup, select the Data, Window Colors, Monitor Receive buttons to display the Monitor Receive settings panel:

Colors

To select a new color for received data, simply click on the one you want. The Example window updates to reflect your choice. The Monitor Receive color is also used in the Chat Mode window to display characters sent by the other system.


Monitor Send Settings

The Monitor Send settings allow you to select the color used in Monitor window to display data sent to the host system. From within Setup, select the Data, Window Colors, Monitor Send buttons to display the Monitor Send settings panel:

Colors

To select a new color for transmitted data, simply click on the one you want. The Example window updates to reflect your choice. The Monitor Send color is also used in the Chat Mode window to display the characters you type.


Moving a Fax

To move your selection(s) to a different folder, choose the Edit | Move menu item. Fax Manager displays the Move Document dialog.  This dialog displays folders available on your system; the current folder is selected automatically. To select a different folder, just click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys.

You can also move documents between folders by selecting them and dragging them to the destination folder.

When you’re satisfied with the destination folder you’ve selected, click on OK to accept it and move your document(s). To return to Fax Manager’s main window without moving your document(s), click on Cancel.

You can also move cover sheet files in this manner. However, cover sheets can only be moved to the Cover Sheets folder or to its sub-folders.


Moving an Object

To move an object, place the mouse pointer inside the area bounded by its drag handles. If the object you want to move doesn’t have drag handles, click on it once to select it. When you drag the object, the mouse pointer changes to indicate that you are moving the object.

The editor draws an outline around the mouse pointer to indicate the object’s new position. The object’s original position is unaffected until you release the mouse button.

You can also use the cursor keys for more precise positioning. Select the object you want to move, then use the cursor keys to move the object up, down, left or right, one pixel value at a time.

The second field of the editor’s status line will always report the selected object’s position with respect to the cover sheet. The x and y values represent the number of pixels from the left and top of the cover sheet to the left top corner of the object, respectively. These values are updated as you move the object.


NASI

NetWare Asynchronous Services Interface. The portion of the Novell communications API that resides on the workstation, used to access a network modem. The other portion of this communications set resides on the communications server and is used to manage the network modem bank. NASI is one of several communications-related API.

See also API. See also Communications API.


NCSI

A precursor to NASI.

See also NASI.


Name Server

See Domain Name Server.


Name, Company and Numbers

Also included in the Cover Sheet options are your name, company, phone numbers and fax station ID. These are read directly from their current values in the current Fax, User Info option set in Setup. See User Info Options Group  for more information.

Some of these fields are required by law. See The Telephone Consumer Protection Act.


Navigating QWK Packets

The Areas List

The Message List

Viewing the Messages

Printing and Exporting Messages


NetBIOS

Network Basic Input/Output System. An early peer-to-peer network protocol, designed by IBM for PC networks.

See also Peer-to-Peer.


Network

A group of computers linked together, sharing a common transportation language and address system needed for communication and data transfer.


New Message Menu and Action Bar
New Message Window's Menu and Action Bar

 Action Bar       Menu Item             Description
    button

	File |  Connection  Directory...	Opens the current Connection Directory file, allowing you to create or edit Mail entries, or select entries or groups for addressing the message you’re writing.
	File |  Save As...	Saves your mail message as a standard text file, using a filename you specify.
	File |  Import Text...	Opens a standard file selection dialog, where you can browse for a text file to be inserted into the edit box as part of your mail message.
	File | Print	Prints the displayed message to the currently selected printer.
	File | Exit	Closes the New Message window, returning you to the Internet Mail Client’s main window.
	Edit | Cut	Removes the text you’ve selected in the message edit box and places it in the Windows Clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the text you’ve selected in the message edit box to the Windows Clipboard. The selected text is not affected.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste	Copies the text from the Windows Clipboard and inserts it in the message edit box.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Select All	Selects the contents of the message edit box.
	Message |  Check Spelling	Checks for words you may have misspelled in the message edit box. If the Internet Mail Client finds words it can’t recognize, it opens the Spelling Checker dialog. For more information, see Using the Mail Client's Spelling Checker.
	Message |  Check Names	Verifies the mail addresses entered in the To and Cc fields, using the Mail entries available in the current Connection Directory file.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Message |  Add Attachment	Opens a standard file selection dialog where you can browse for a file you want to attach to your message.
	Message |  Remove Attachment	Removes a file you’ve attached to your message. If you’ve attached more than one file, you’ll need to select the one you want to remove before selecting this menu item.
	Message |  Send Message	Send your message to the Outbox folder for delivery.  If you’re connected to the Internet when you select Send Message, the mail client delivers your message immediately. Otherwise, it stores your message in the Outbox folder until you request Deliver Mail in the main window.
	Help | Using  Internet Mail	Opens on-line Help for the Internet Mail Client.
	Help | Search  for Help on...	Opens on-line Help with the Search dialog activated.


News Database Options

These options determine the location of the News Reader database and the criteria controlling when the database information is purged.  These fields are available from the Internet | News | Database panel within Setup.

Purge messages older than [ ] days

This field places a date limit on all message text within the News Reader database.  Once the specified number of days have passed since the date the message was written to the database, the message will be marked as deleted during the next purge.  If you have enabled the Compact database after purging check box, this deleted data will be removed and the space it occupied will be freed.

Compact database after purging

If enabled, the News Reader will "pack" the database after a purge to eliminate deleted messages and data.  Compacting the database will save a significant amount of disk space, especially for larger database files.

When should the database be purged?

These two check boxes determine when the database purge process should take place.  By default, purging takes place as the News Reader is shut down, but you can specify a purge at startup as well. The purge process may take several seconds, depending on the size of your News Reader database.

Purge Database Now...

Click on this button to begin the database purge process immediately. The purge process may take several seconds, depending on the size of your News Reader database.

Database path

This field contains the path to the directory containing the database file.  By default, the directory is program files\procomm plus\inetnews.


News Manual Connections

If the News-class is selected when you request a manual connection, Procomm Plus prompts you for the name of the newsgroup you want to use.

If you access the Internet through a network, or if you access it through a dial-up provider and you're already connected,

Procomm Plus immediately begins negotiating to connect to the newsgroup you specified. If you access the Internet through a dial-up provider, but you're not connected when you request a Manual Connect, Procomm Plus must establish the dial-up connection before the News Reader can attempt to connect to the newsgroup.

News connections use the current or default settings that are in effect at the time you attempt the manual connection.


News Properties

Settings in the Properties group allow you to specify the actions the News Reader will perform when you access a newsgroup, as well as the storage path for articles you've retrieved and decoded. From within Setup, select the Internet, News, Properties buttons to display the panel:

Prompt if number of available headers...

If this option button is selected, the News Reader will prompt to warn you when the number of available messages in a newsgroup exceeds the value specified in its associated edit field. It is selected by default, with a warning level of 200 articles.

Only display unread headers

If this option button is selected, any headers which are marked as read will not be shown in the list of headers for a newsgroup.

If you're using threaded mode, parent articles with unread replies will still be visible regardless of this setting.

Check for new newsgroups at startup

If this option is enabled, the News Reader will retrieve and display any new newsgroups that have been added to the server.

Use Kill files to filter unwanted articles

If this check box is enabled, the News Reader will check for author names and header subjects that you have previously added to your kill files.  Any article with a name or subject specified in a kill file is not displayed in the header list.  To edit the contents of your kill files, click on Edit Kill Files...

Directory for saved and decoded articles

Click in this edit field to specify the path and directory where the News Reader will place articles you've retrieved and decoded. By default, saved and decoded articles are written to the \dnload directory under the Procomm Plus home directory.

In general, it's a good idea to specify a decoding destination that offers plenty of available drive space. Encoded articles can be quite large, and the News Reader uses temporary data files to process them.


News Reply Options

Settings in the Reply group allow you to determine the actions taken by the News Reader when you post articles.  From within Setup, select the Internet, News, Reply buttons to display the panel:

Maximum characters per line...

By default, the News Reader will wrap to the next line when your text exceeds 70 characters. To set a different line width, click in the edit field and enter the value you want.

Maximum lines per article

By default, the News Reader limits the length of articles you post to 900 lines. If you want to set a different limit, click in the edit field and enter the value you want. Setting this value to zero forces the News Reader to post articles without splitting them into smaller segments.

Reply Options

These settings allow you to specify what information from the original article, if any, is included in your reply to it. You can select the following:

Include original article text...

If this option is enabled, the News Reader will include the original message's text in your reply message. The option is enabled by default.

Include original article header...

If this option is enabled, the News Reader will include the original message's headers as quoted text. By default, it is disabled.

Quote original article information

If this option is enabled, the News Reader will prefix information from the original article when it's included in your reply. It's enabled by default.

Maximum number of quoted lines

If you want to limit the number of lines from the original article that are quoted in your reply, enable this option. You can then click in the associated edit field to specify the number of lines you want. The option is enabled by default, with a limit of 300 lines.

Quote prefix character(s)

Click in this field to specify the character(s) the News Reader will use to prefix quoted text. The default Quote prefix character is ">."


News Server Options

The News Server settings group lets you specify your news server's address and determine whether the News Reader will automatically attach to your news server when it loads. You can also specify your logon name and password if they are required by the news server. From within Setup, select the Internet, News, News Server buttons to display the panel:

News server address

Click in this field to edit the address of your news server.

This news server requires News Server Authentication

Enable this checkbox if your news server requires you to logon for access.

News Server Authentication

If you've enabled the news server requires News Server Authentication checkbox, click in the Logon name and Password fields to enter your logon values.


News User Info Options

The User Info options allow you to specify your name and mail addresses. From within Setup, select the Internet, News, User Info buttons to display the panel:

Full name

The name you entered when you installed Procomm Plus will appear in this field. Click in the field if you want to edit it.

Organization

The company name you entered when you installed Procomm Plus will appear in this field. Click in the field if you want to change it.

Email Address

Click in this field to enter or edit your mail address.

Signature file

If you've created a signature file that you want to include in every article you post with the News Reader, enter its name and path in this field or click on the Browse... button to select it.


News-class: Entry Info

The fields in the News-class Entry Info group are similar to those you might find in a standard address book, such as a name and address:

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar's Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

News Group

The name of the Internet news group for this entry. For more information, see Newsgroup Naming Conventions.

Company

The name of a Company associated with this entry. The Company name is not required to connect to a newsgroup.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.


Newsgroup

A member of the UseNet service. A discussion group pertaining to a specific topic. Similar to e-mail use except that a newsgroup message posted, is distributed to news servers, and can then be read by other subscribers of that newsgroup.

See also Usenet.


Newsgroup Articles

Individual messages within newsgroups are called articles. These articles make up the content of a newsgroup. Making an article available to a newsgroup is called posting. All of the articles in the newsgroups have been posted by other users.

A newsgroup is like a magazine made up completely of letters to the editor: the newsgroup name is the magazine’s title and the newsgroup's articles are the letters.

Before posting an article of your own, it's a good idea to spend some time reading articles posted by other newsgroup participants. This practice, known as lurking, allows you to become familiar with the tone and content of the newsgroup. It also gives you the opportunity to learn from others' questions and answers.

In addition to text articles, some newsgroups occasionally contain binary files which are attached to a newsgroup article. If an attached binary file is very large, it can span across several messages. If you access an attached binary file with a normal message viewer, you'll see a brief, readable message header followed by a jumble of high-bit ASCII characters. This is because binary files must be "encoded" or translated into a format that Internet Mail can transport safely before they're attached and posted to a newsgroup.

For additional details about how to UUdecode a binary file from received articles, see Step-by-Step: UUdecoding a Binary File.


Newsgroup Naming Conventions

Newsgroups have a loose set of naming conventions. There are always at least two words separated by a period or dot(.). The first word designates the general category of the newsgroup. Subsequent words provide a more specific definition of the subject matter contained in the group.

For example, "comp.os.ms-windows.programmer.tools" can be fairly easily translated as a newsgroup discussing the tools available to programmers working in the Microsoft Windows operating system.

There are eight common categories of newsgroups:

comp.

Groups discussing a variety of topics pertaining to computers.

misc.

Groups discussing a variety of topics that don’t relate to the other categories.

news.

Groups discussing a variety of topics pertaining to Internet news.

rec.

Groups discussing a variety of topics pertaining to recreational activities.

sci.

Groups discussing a variety of topics pertaining to other areas of science.

soc.

Groups discussing a variety of topics pertaining to social issues.

talk.

Groups discussing a variety of topics which usually evolve into heated discussions, sometimes called "flames."

alt.

alt groups are unlike the other groups in that they are not "official." Anyone can set up an alt. newsgroup. If an alt. newsgroup continues to thrive, it may eventually go through the process of becoming an "official" newsgroup. The topics of alt. newsgroups are diverse, but the topic can usually be determined by the group's name.

In addition to the eight common newsgroup categories, certain other kinds of newsgroups that are available in certain environments. However, most news servers do not receive an entire "feed," but instead limit themselves to the newsgroups their customers have expressed interest.


Non-Connect strings

Modem messages that indicate an attempted connection has failed. These messages include: no carrier, busy, no dialtone, no answer, and voice.

See also Result Codes.


Notes

If you’ve specified a cover sheet that contains a "Notes" field, the Notes edit box is enabled. Text you enter in the edit box will appear in the cover sheet’s "Notes" field when the fax is generated.

If you select a cover sheet that doesn’t have a "Notes" field or if you do not use a cover sheet, the edit field is disabled and grayed out. If you entered text in the edit box before selecting the new cover sheet, the text will be ignored and won’t be included in the transmitted fax.


Null Modem Cable

Similar to a modem cable, except that the Data Send and the Data Receive wires (DS/DR) are crossed. These cables are use when direct connecting two PCs, so that data transferred from one machine will be sent to the Data Receive pin on the other machine. The hardware flow control lines (RTS/CTS) are also crossed to facilitate two way communication between ports with identical send and receive flow control lines.


OCR

Optical Character Recognition. Creating a text document by interpreting a graphic image. The text in a fax cannot be edited since it is a graphic representation of a document. In order to change a fax into a working text document, you use OCR to interpret the image and to create a text document.


OCR Cleanup

A method to clean up any spots or blotches from a fax, before using OCR to interpret the fax image and create a text document.

See OCR.


OCR Options

The viewer’s OCR Options allow you to specify how your fax documents will be handled by the Fax Viewer‘s OCR engine.

Within the Fax Viewer, select the Setup | OCR Options... menu item to display the settings dialog:

Save processed document as

This setting determines the format of the document created by the OCR engine. In addition to many popular Windows application file types, the following output formats are available:

ASCII standard

In this format, characters are written to an ASCII text file, with new line characters inserted at the end of each line of text as it appeared in the original image.

ASCII smart

In this format, characters are written to an ASCII text file. However, new line characters and spaces are inserted in the text to format the text file much like it was formatted in the original image.

ASCII stripped

In this format, characters are written to an ASCII text file, with new line characters inserted at the end of each paragraph of text as it appeared in the original image. A paragraph in the image is determined by a blank line.

Click on the drop down list box to select a value from the list. The default output format is ASCII standard.

OCR language recognition

This setting determines the language the OCR engine will assume when processing a document. Click on the list box to select the language you want.

Use OCR Editor

If this setting is enabled, the viewer’s OCR Editor will open and display the text produced when you process one or more fax pages with the OCR engine. It is enabled by default.

For help in using the editor, see The OCR Editor.

Use automatic deskewing

If this setting is enabled the OCR engine will automatically process the image to correct graphical problems caused by poorly-scanned fax documents or other factors. The setting is disabled by default.

The Fax Viewer will not deskew a fax unless it is skewed by more than 5%, since deskewing sometimes creates graphical blemishes in the fax image.

Allow automatic image flipping

If this setting is enabled the OCR engine will automatically flip the fax image as needed to best interpret the text the image contains. This can be very useful if you received the fax upside down! The setting is disabled by default.

Retain original text attributes

If this setting is enabled, the OCR engine will automatically attempt to duplicate the formatting attributes that appeared in the original image within the created output file. The setting is enabled by default, but it is not available if you’re saving the OCR output as ASCII text.

Column Handling Options

This setting allows you to specify how the OCR engine should interpret the image’s text. It has no effect on the overall accuracy of the character recognition, but it can have a dramatic affect on the formatted output:

Attempt to automatically determine columns

By default, the OCR engine will automatically try to sense when text should be handled as multiple "snaking" columns.

Treat page as multiple columns

Select this button to force the OCR engine to interpret the image as a multiple-column document, such as a spreadsheet.

Treat page as a single column

Select this button to force the OCR engine to treat the image as a single-column document.


OCR Select Pages

This dialog allows you to select a range of pages from a multipage fax for OCR processing.

Choose All to process the entire fax.

Choose Current Page to process the page you're viewing now.

Choose Selected Page(s) to process one or more pages you've selected on the previous screen.

Choose Pages to enter a starting and ending page number for processing.


Offline

A modem state that indicates that the modem is not communicating to a remote modem or computer. This is typically determined by the state of carrier detect in the modem. When you are using a SLIP or PPP stack, Offline will indicate that you aren’t connected to your service provider. If you are using a network card instead of a modem, it will indicate that your Winsock TCP/IP stack is not loaded.


Online

A modem state that indicates that the modem is communicating to a remote modem or computer. This is typically determined by the state of carrier detect in the modem. When you are using a SLIP or PPP stack, Online will indicate that you are connected to your service provider. If you are using a network card instead of a modem, it will indicate that your Winsock TCP/IP stack is loaded.

A term also used to mean accessible by computer communications, as in "online information service."


Opening a .cid File

To open a Caller ID directory file in the Caller ID Directory Editor, select the File | Open... menu item and then select the file from the Open Caller Information Directory dialog.

The Open Caller Information Directory dialog operates like most standard file open dialogs. Caller ID files are have a .cid extension and are located in the Procomm Plus home directory. Select the .cid file that you would like to open and click on OK. The editor displays the .cid file's contents in the editor window, and displays the name of the file in its title bar.


Opening a Capture File

You can open a Capture file in of two ways:

•	By pressing [image] [image], by clicking on the Capture File Action Bar button, or by selecting the Data | Capture File... menu item.

•	By assigning a Capture file to an individual Connection Directory entry, and connecting to that entry.

Procomm Plus uses the options you’ve specified in the Capture File Options dialog, available from the Data, Setup Files panel in Setup.

To close the Capture file, you can either press [image] [image], click on the Capture File Action Bar button, or select the Data | Capture File... menu item.

You can make Procomm Plus’s Capture file handling even more flexible by enabling the Query for file name when capture is started option in the Capture File Options dialog available in the Data, Setup Files panel. If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus will prompt with the following dialog whenever you open a Capture file. The options available in this dialog are the same as those in the Capture File Options dialog, except for two important features: the Capture File Directory and the Capture file list box.

The Capture File Directory reports the current destination of the Capture file. The list box allows you to select an existing file, or to enter a filename to be used for the new Capture file.

When you’re satisfied with your selections, click on OK to accept them and close the dialog. To close the dialog without creating a Capture file, click on Cancel.


Opening a File with the ASPECT Editor

By default, the ASPECT Editor opens with a new, untitled window. If you’re creating a new file, you can begin working immediately. If you want to edit an existing text file, you can open it by selecting File | Open to display the File Open dialog.  Because the ASPECT Editor was designed for creating scripts, its File Name pattern defaults to the ASPECT source file extension of .was. To specify a different pattern for your search, enter it in the File Name field and press [image]. You can also choose from a variety of file types by clicking on the List Files of Type list box.

When you’ve located the file you want to edit, highlight it with the mouse or cursor bar, then click on the OK button to accept it and close the dialog. You can also double click on a filename to accept it. The editor loads your selection and makes it the active window.


Opening a QWK Packet

Once you’ve downloaded a QWK packet from a bulletin board, it should be placed in the directory where the viewer expects to find mail packets; by default, the directory is c:\program files\procomm plus\dnload, but you can change that from the Paths panel in the QWK Mail Viewer Setup menu. Learn more about the Paths panel in Paths Options.

To open a packet, select File | Open Packet or click on the Open an Existing Mail Packet Action Bar button. The viewer displays the Open Packet dialog. You can select four types of files from this dialog:

QWK packets

These are packets containing compressed messages and files in the standard QWK format supported by most bulletin boards.

Blue Wave packets

These packets are in an alternate format supported by some bulletin boards.

Mail packets

This combines the QWK and Blue Wave packet types.

All files

All files in the directory, regardless of extension.

The File Name pattern defaults to the standard QWK mail extension of *.q??. You can specify a different pattern for your search by typing it in the File Name field and pressing [image], or by clicking on the List Files of Type list box to select one of the preconfigured file types.

When you’ve located the file you want to open, highlight it with the cursor, click on the OK button to accept it and close the dialog.

Once you’ve selected a packet, the viewer runs another program, pwzip, to expand the message archive; depending on the size of the packet,this may take a few seconds.

After the packet has been expanded, you can navigate through the packet contents to view messages. See Navigating QWK Packets for more information.


Opening an Action Bar File

If you want to create a new Action Bar file, select File | New from the editor’s menu. The editor creates a new, untitled Action Bar identical to the default bar included with Procomm Plus Terminal window.

If you want to modify an existing Action Bar file, select File | Open from the menu. The editor presents a standard file open dialog. Action Bar files are stored in the Procomm Plus home directory with an extension of .pwb. The editor’s file open dialog pre-selects this file type for you. Simply highlight the file you want, then click on OK to load it.


Opening the Caller ID Directory Editor

You can open the directory in several different ways:

•	By clicking on its icon in the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu.

•	By selecting the Tools | Caller ID Directory Editor... menu item in the Terminal window.

•	By clicking on the Caller ID Directory Editor button in the tool-related Action Bar included with Procomm Plus.

As the Caller ID Directory Editor opens, it displays the current Caller ID file in its title bar. For information on opening a Caller ID file, see Opening a .cid File. For information on creating a new Caller ID file, see Creating a New .cid File.


Opening the Keyboard Editor

You can open the Keyboard Editor in two different ways:

•	By pressing A* in the Terminal window.

•	By selecting Keyboard Editor... from the Tools menu in the Terminal window.

Procomm Plus opens the editor, with the key mapping for your current emulation, or your current key mapping file loaded for viewing or editing.

If you want to edit the keyboard mapping for a different emulation, you can do so, by switching to that emulation with the Quick Select Line before you open the editor.

You can also select a different mapping or mapping file from within Setup. Click on the Terminal keyboard file list box in the Data, Terminal Options panel in Setup to select the mapping you want from the list, then click on the Edit Keyboard File... button. The editor will open with your selection.

You can edit the keyboard mapping for any emulation at any time, but only changes you’ve made to the current emulation within the current key mapping will be immediately reflected in Procomm Plus.

The Keyboard Editor’s main window contains a graphical representation of a keyboard, six command buttons and a Key Map legend of the currently-selected key.

The Command Buttons

The editor’s command buttons are used for file operations, and to access its Options fields. The buttons are:

Options/Key Map

When the editor first opens, the top left button in the command group reads "Options". Clicking on the Options button displays the editor’s Options group, and changes the button’s label to "Key Map". Clicking on the Key Map button restores the display of the Key Map legend, and changes the button’s label.

The settings in the editor’s Options group are discussed in The Editor Options. The Key Map legend is discussed in The Key Map Legend.

Save As

Click on this button to save the current key mapping as a new file, using a filename you specify and an extension of .kbd. If you’re editing one of Procomm Plus’s default key mappings, you must save your mapping in a new .kbd file, or your changes will be lost when you terminate Procomm Plus.

You can easily determine whether you’re editing a .kbd file or a default key mapping by looking at the editor’s title bar. If the text following the program title is in all uppercase, like "ANSIBBS", you’re editing a default key mapping. Otherwise, you’re editing a .kbd file.

Open

Click on this button to load an existing .kbd file from disk. If you’ve modified the current key mapping, but haven’t saved your changes, the editor will offer to save the mapping before loading the other file.

OK

Click on this button to close the editor window.

Cancel

Click on this button to close the editor. Any unsaved changes you’ve made to the current key mapping will be lost.

Help

Click on this button to open on-line Help for the editor.

The Editor Options

Clicking on the editor’s Options button displays the Options group, where you can specify the editor’s keyboard display and other settings:

NumLock

By default, the Keyboard Editor’s NumLock key toggles the numeric keypad between numerals and directional controls, just as it does on your keyboard. This setting is reflected in the Toggles Keypad option button.

If you select the is Mappable option button, clicking on the editor’s NumLock key will open the Edit Mapped Key dialog. You can then map NumLock as a terminal key.

The NumLock setting is saved and restored in each keyboard file.

Keyboard Type

If your computer has an 84-key keyboard, the editor displays a graphical representation of an 84-key keyboard. Otherwise, it displays a representation of a generic 101-key keyboard. However, you can toggle between the two displays by selecting the appropriate option button.

Key Select

By default, the editor allows you to select a key by highlighting it with the Tab or cursor keys. If you prefer to select a key by pressing it from the keyboard, select the by Keypress option button. Select Use Tab/Cursor Keys to restore the editor’s default behavior.

You can also select a key by clicking on it. This method is always available regardless of the Key Select setting.

The Key Map Legend

On start-up, the Keyboard Editor displays the Key Map legend in its lower left corner. As you select keys to view or map, the editor updates the fields in the Key Map legend to reflect the current key and its mappings. The fields are:

Key

The name of the currently-selected key.

Normal

The mapping when the key is pressed by itself.

Shift

The mapping when the key is pressed in combination with the [image] key.

Ctrl

The mapping when the key is pressed in combination with the [image] key.

Shift Ctrl

The mapping when the key is pressed in combination with the [image] and [image] keys.

Alt Shift

The mapping when the key is pressed in combination with the [image] and [image] keys.

Alt Ctrl

The mapping when the key is pressed in combination with the [image] and [image] keys.

Alt Shift Ctrl

The mapping when the key is pressed in combination with the [image], [image] and [image] keys.

The majority of mappable keys have all seven mapping fields available. Some of the keys, such as [image], [image] and [image], have special purposes in Windows, and cannot be mapped in all combinations.


Option Set

A group of options that can be customized, given a user defined name, and referred to in other portions of Procomm Plus. An example is the Current Data Options option set.


Option Set Controls

For example, the Data, Data Options group is referenced as the Data Options option set. This set contains all of the settings from the group’s panels: General, Advanced, Left Mouse, Right Mouse and Paths.

The Current Data Options list box, located just above the Data, Data Options group selection tabs, always displays the name of the active option set. In the figure shown above, the default Data Options set, named "normal options," is selected. Once you’ve created your own Data Options set, you can make it the active set by selecting it from the Current Data Options list box.

If you change any of the settings within the Data, Data Options panels and close Setup by clicking on its OK button, your changes will be saved and applied to the active option set. Other option sets will be unaffected.

To save the current settings as a new option set, click on the Modify... button, which is also shown in above figure. See Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set for a step-by-step example of creating an option set.


Option Sets

An option set is a group of related settings that are saved and referenced as a single "profile." You can change any of the values in an option set and save them into the default set, or use them to create a custom set to suit your needs.

Once you’ve created an option set, you can select it for use from within Setup, from within the Connection Directory, from an ASPECT script or from a Quick Select Line. Once it’s selected, the option set’s values become the current settings automatically.

Option sets are powerful and convenient. For example, suppose that you download a variety of graphics files and that you prefer to save them in different directories depending on the system from which you retrieved them. You can easily change the default download path manually while on-line by modifying the Download path setting in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup. However, by creating special Data Options sets, and linking the sets to the appropriate Connection Directory entries, you can let Procomm Plus select the download path you want automatically each time you connect with the entries! See Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set for an example.

Many Setup groups are referenced as option sets. In addition, Procomm Plus’s terminal emulations and file transfer protocols also appear as option sets.

We’ll talk specifically about each option set as we discuss its Setup group or panel. In many cases, we’ll also briefly discuss how you might use the option set to "streamline" your day-to-day use of Procomm Plus. In the following topics, we'll use the Data, Data Options group to learn how to create and modify option sets:

Option Set Controls

Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set

Modifying an Option Set


Other Connection Directory functions

Because the Connection Directory is an important part of every communication task supported by Procomm Plus, it’s designed to be both powerful and easy to use. In this section, we’ll discuss the directory functions you can use to manage your entries and groups, including:

Renaming the Connection Directory

Sorting the Connection Directory

Searching for entries.

Viewing entry statistics.

Importing and exporting entries.

Printing the Connection Directory


Other Connection Directory functions See Also
Other Connection Directory functions

Renaming the Connection Directory

Sorting the Connection Directory

Searching for entries.

Viewing entry statistics.

Importing and exporting entries.

Printing the Connection Directory


Other Fax Functions

Step-by-Step: Generating .fax Files

Initializing the Fax Modem

Holding Scheduled Faxes

Aborting a Fax Send or Receive

Setting the Default Printer

The Fax Activity Log


Other Mail Options

The Other settings allow you to control many of the Internet Mail Client's basic features, including the font used to display messages and how the client notifies you of new mail. From within Setup, select the Internet, Internet Mail, Other buttons to display the panel:

Empty Deleted folder upon exit

If this option is enabled, the Internet Mail Client will automatically clear its Deleted Items folder when you close the client. The option is turned off by default.

New Mail Notification

If you want the Internet Mail Client to notify you of new mail by playing a .wav sound file, click on the associated Browse... button to select the file.

By default, the client displays a status line message when you have new mail available. To disable this feature, uncheck the Flash message... check box.

Default Attachment Encoding

By default, the Internet Mail Client UUencodes files you attach to mail messages. You can specify UUEncoding, XXEncoding or Base 64 by clicking on the Encoding method list box. If you enable the Use MIME check box, the Mail Client will use additional features available with MIME extensions.

Screen Font...

Click on this button to open a dialog where you can choose the font and font size used by the Internet Mail Client to display messages.


Other News Options

The Other news settings allow you to control many of the News Reader's basic features, including how articles are sorted and displayed. From within Setup, select the Internet, News, Other buttons to display the panel.

Sort articles by

This setting determines how the News Reader will sort articles for display. By default, Subject with replies... is selected, which can make it easier for you to read related articles. However, you can sort articles by Subject, From, Date, Size or Article Number by selecting the appropriate option button.

Article Display Order

The News Reader can sort articles in either Ascending or Descending order. Ascending is the default settings.

Threaded View

If this check box is enabled, the News Reader arranges replies under the original article. Threading is on by default.

Binary File Encoding

By default, the News Reader UUEncodes files you attach to articles you post. You can specify UUEncoding, XXEncoding or Base 64 by clicking on the Encoding method list box. If you enable the Use MIME check box, the News Reader will use additional features available with MIME extensions.

Screen Font

Displays a standard Windows font selection dialog, allowing you to select the font type and size used to display headers and article text within the News Reader.


Other Script Files

In addition to the Host, Logon and WinLink scripts, Procomm Plus includes the following utilities:

Remote Script Commander.

The Remote Script Commander is an ASPECT script that allows you to run scripts on a remote computer that is also running Procomm Plus. The Remote Script Commander is self-documenting; for more information, run the remcmd.wax file in the c:\program files\procomm plus\aspect directory and access its help screens.

Fax Forwarding.

Using the Fax Forwarding script, you can have Procomm Plus forward faxes you've received to different fax numbers based on dates and times you've specified. The Fax Forwarding script is self-documenting; for more information, run the faxfwd.wax file in the c:\program files\procomm plus\aspect directory and access its help screens.

Fax Merge.

Procomm Plus provides Fax Merge utilities for Microsoft Word version 6.0 or higher, Ami Pro and WordPerfect. These utilities allow you to send a fax to multiple recipients using your word processor's merge capabilities:

For Microsoft Word, open the pwwrd.dot template.

For Ami Pro, open the pwmrg.sam document.

For WordPerfect, run the pwmrg.wcm macro.

By default, the Fax Merge files are installed in the c:\program files\procomm plus\aspect\faxmerge directory. Each of the Fax Merge utilities is self-documenting; just open the indicated file and follow its instructions.

BBS Chat.

The BBS Chat script emulates the Chat mode used in the DOS versions of Procomm Plus. You may find that you prefer it to the Terminal window's Chat window. To use it, run the chat.wax file in the c:\program files\procomm plus\aspect directory. The BBS Chat script is very simple and requires no additional documentation.


Outgoing Mail Options

Options in the Outgoing settings group allow you to determine the actions taken by the Internet Mail Client when you send mail. From within Setup, select the Internet, Internet Mail, Outgoing buttons to display the panel:

Send outgoing mail immediately...

If you're connected to the Internet when you finish writing a mail message, the Internet Mail Client will send it immediately by default. If you disable this option, the client won't send mail until you tell it to, regardless of your connection state.

Add new outgoing mail addresses...

If this option is enabled, the Internet Mail Client will automatically create Connection Directory entries for addresses you enter manually in the New Message dialog. The option is enabled by default.

Add new incoming mail addresses...

If this option is enabled, the Internet Mail Client will automatically create Connection Directory entries for addresses taken from incoming mail. The option is enabled by default.

Request a return receipt...

By default, the Internet Mail Client does not request receipts for messages you send. You can request receipts to confirm that your messages have been read by enabling this option.


PC Card

Also called a PCMCIA card. Creditcard- sized computer devices used extensively with laptop computers. These small devices can easily slip in and out of a special computer slot. Some of the types of PC cards are modems, hard drives, video capture cards, and network cards. PC cards use various drivers for configuration, including setting the IRQ and COM port address.


PCMCIA

See PC Card.


PIN Number

The part of a phone card security number that is not on the physical phone card. Not used by some phone card providers.


POP

Post Office Protocol. A protocol used by Internet mail clients to access e-mail from the Internet mail server. Servers that support this protocol are called POP servers. Procomm Plus supports the POP3 protocol; the predominant version of POP used on the Internet. The other part of the e-mail system is the SMTP protocol which is used to send mail across the Internet.

See also SMTP.


PPP

Point to Point Protocol. A dial-up type of TCP/IP network stack. PPP is used for making a connection to a TCP/IP network, by using a modem to contact a PPP server. The PPP server is a computer that is connected to the network, but it can also accept modem calls using the PPP protocol. Similar to SLIP, PPP is more advanced, with error correction capabilities not included in SLIP.

See also Internet Service Provider.


Packet

Unit of data sent in a transfer protocol. Usually packets include error correction information in addition to the actual data. Often the packet number, destination, and point of origin are also included.


Parallel Port

An I/O port that transfers more than one bit at a time, as opposed to a serial port. Parallel ports are used most often by printers, and look similar to a 25 pin serial port except that instead of having pins, they have two rows of small holes going into the PC.


Parameter file

The pw4.prm file where selected options and configurations from Setup are stored.


Parity bit

A bit added to serial data, that is used to check for errors. Most systems use more advanced methods of error detection, but the parity bit is still added when the port is set to use seven data bits.


Passive Mode

Many network administrators setup a security layer for networks connected to the Internet. These security measures prevent access of information and resources by outside computers. They may also intercept FTP file transfers, including the FTP host directories and files list.

FTP's Passive mode is used to sidestep these security measures. When you enable passive mode, the FTP host becomes passive so that you can tell it which specific data port to use.

Consult your network administrator for information about your specific security configuration. However, if your computer is not part of a network, hooked in with a special cable and a network card, you should not use passive mode.

You can change the current Passive Mode setting in Setup; see General Options: Use passive mode. For help in changing the passive mode setting for an FTP Connection Directory entry, see FTP-class Settings: Passive Mode.


Passive Mode_1
Passive Mode

A state of communication between an FTP client and an FTP server, where the client tells the server which specific data port to open for a file transfer. Passive mode is used when a network computer is behind a security wall, and cannot accept outside communication through common ports.

See also FTP.


Path

The location of a file or directory on a given drive or disk. An example of a complete path for a Windows or DOS machine is:

C:\dir\subdir\file.ext

A different usage is the path command, which tells DOS and Windows which directory(s) to look in when a specified file is not found in the current directory. The search path is configured in the autoexec.bat file.


Paths Options

The Data, Data Options, Paths fields allow you to specify a variety of paths accessed by the Terminal window. If you specify a DOS directory that doesn’t exist, Setup will prompt you before creating the directory automatically. From within Setup, select the Data, Data Options, Paths buttons to display the Paths panel:

Download Path

This field specifies the drive and path where the Terminal window will store files you receive from a host system.

Because the CIS-B protocol can include a DOS drive and path as part of the file transfer, files you download from CompuServe may be placed in locations other than specified by the Download path.

Upload Path

This field specifies the drive and path whose contents will be displayed in the Send File dialog when you initiate a file upload. Regardless of the drive and path you specify in this field, you can always upload from another location simply by browsing within the Send File dialog.

Script Path

This field specifies the DOS directory where Procomm Plus will look for ASPECT scripts.

Capture Path

This field specifies the DOS directory where the Terminal window will store the Capture files you create on-line.

Notes path

This field specifies where Procomm Plus will look for your Notes files.


Peer-to-Peer.
Peer-to-Peer

A network structure where each computer offers data and/or services to the other computers on the network. Generally used for smaller networks where there is not one computer dedicated to offering services and files.

See also Client / Server.


Phone Card

A credit card for phone calls that allows you to dial in security numbers and then make a long distance call, to billed at a later time.


Ping

A network troubleshooting utility used to test the ability to contact to a specific network site. There are many reasons that a Ping can fail, but if the Ping is successful, it will help you rule out many possible problems.


Placing an Object

To place the item you’ve selected from the Object menu, move the crossbar to the approximate location for the item’s top left corner, and click once with the mouse. The new object will be placed with its top left corner at the coordinates nearest to the point that you clicked.

If you’re placing a bitmap or metafile, the editor will prompt you with an Open File dialog so that it can use the graphic immediately in the display.

If you are placing a text object, it will display "dummy" or substitute text. Until you modify them, static Text objects will display "Text," while Variable Text objects will always display their field names, such as "Sender company" or "Sender Name."

After you place an object, it will remain selected, allowing you to easily resize it or modify its characteristics.

For more information, see Sizing an Object and Moving an Object.


Positioning an Action Bar

To preview your Action Bar in a different position within the editor, select Edit | Change Position... from the Action Bar Editor's menu. Select the position for the Action Bar, then click on OK to accept it and return to the editor’s main window. Your Action Bar will be moved to the new location. To exit the dialog without making a change, click on Cancel.

The Action Bar will always occupy the outside edge of the communication window except when you load it as a floating Action Bar.


Preparing Procomm Plus

Once the host is ready to send your file, you need to prepare Procomm Plus to receive it. As with the host, Procomm Plus needs to know the protocol you want to use and the file(s) you’re receiving.

If you selected the Zmodem, Kermit or CIS-B+ protocol on the host, and Enable automatic download start is checked in the Data, Data Options, Advanced settings panel in Setup, Procomm Plus will handle the download automatically!

If the Terminal window’s Quick Select Line is displayed, you can check its protocol field to quickly determine the current protocol. If the current protocol isn’t the one you selected on the host, you can select the proper protocol by clicking on the Quick Select Line’s protocol field to display the list of available protocols, then clicking on the one you want.

If you’re not using the Quick Select Line, you can verify the current protocol by opening Setup, and looking in the Data, Transfer Protocol panel. To select a different protocol, simply click on the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the list of those available, then click on the one you want. Click on OK to accept your changes and close Setup.

After you’ve selected the protocol, click on the Receive File Action Bar button, or select the Data | Receive File... menu item. Procomm Plus displays the Receiving File dialog. By default, Procomm Plus saves the files you receive or download into the Download path directory you specified in the Data, Data Options, Paths settings panel in Setup. For more information, see Paths Options. You can select a different file destination by selecting the directory you want in this dialog.

Click in the File Name edit field, and enter the name of the file the host is sending. If the host is sending multiple files in a batch transfer, enter the name of one of the files. The protocol will handle the remainder of the files in the batch automatically. Click on OK to accept the filename and begin receiving the file.


Preparing the Host

Before the host can send a file to your machine, it has to know which file you want to receive and the transfer protocol you want to use. The method of locating and specifying a file depends on the kind of host or system you’re connected to.

For example, BBSs typically provide a "Download" or "File" area, where you can browse particular libraries or sections for the filename(s) you want. Information services like CompuServe and GEnie use a similar strategy. On mainframe or minicomputer hosts, you’ll need to check with the system administrator or help desk for instruction.

Once you’ve located the file(s) you want, you’ll need to tell the host which transfer protocol to use when sending the file.

A protocol is a defined set of rules and conventions used in transferring data from one computer to another. A protocol definition includes rules about how errors will be detected and corrected, and the information that is sent in addition to the actual file. For more information, see File Transfer Protocols.

You’ll need to select a protocol that is supported by both the host and Procomm Plus. If you’re connected to a BBS, you’ll probably have a wide selection of protocols. On other systems, especially mainframe or minicomputer hosts, the selection may be more limited.

If it’s available on the host system, we highly recommend the Zmodem protocol. It’s a batch protocol, meaning that you can send or receive multiple files in a single transfer. It also includes the filenames in the transfer and can even resume interrupted transfers. Best of all, if you’ve checked Enable automatic download start in the Data, Data Options, Advanced settings panel in Setup, Procomm Plus will initiate Zmodem transfers as soon as the host begins to send information! Automatic downloading is also supported for the Kermit and CIS-B+ protocols. For more information, see The Zmodem Protocol.


Preparing the Host before Sending a File

Before the host can receive a file from your machine, it needs to know that you want to send a file. It then needs the name of the file you’re sending, and the transfer protocol you want to use. How and where you specify the filename and protocol for the host depends entirely on the host.

For example, BBSs typically provide a "Upload" or "File" area, where you can request permission to send a file. If you have upload privileges, the BBS prompts for the information it needs, then advises you to initate the transfer. Information services such as CompuServe and GEnie are similar. On mainframe or minicomputer hosts, you’ll need to check with the system administrator or help desk for instruction.

As with a download transfer, you’ll need to select a protocol that is supported by both the host and Procomm Plus.


Printing a .cid File

To print the currently displayed .cid file, select the Caller ID Directory Editor's File | Print menu item and the Select Caller ID Fields to Print dialog appears.

The Available Fields list displays value names associated with Caller ID entries. When you select a value name in the list and click on the "right-arrow" button, the value is added to the Field Order list and removed from the Available Fields list.

The Field Order list displays the value names that you have selected for printing from the Available Fields list. From top to bottom, the Field Order list represents the order in which values are printed. When you select a value name from the Field Order list and click on the "left-arrow" button, the value is removed from the Field Order list and added to the Available Fields list.

When you're satisfied with the Field Order values you've selected, click on  Print... to begin printing the entries.


Printing and Exporting Messages

The QWK Mail Viewer provides three ways of saving the contents of a message:

Print a copy of the contents.

To print a message, select File | Print... or click on the Print icon on the Action Bar. The viewer displays a standard Windows Print dialog. Click on OK to begin printing.

You can specify a font for the text you print from the viewer by selecting Printer Font from the File menu.

Export the contents to a disk file.

Select Messages | Export... The viewer displays a standard Windows Save As... dialog. Specify a path and name for your file and click on OK to save it to disk.

Copy the contents to the Windows clipboard and paste the text into a file.

As you would with any Windows application, highlight the message text you want and select Edit | Copy or press [image] [image]. From the clipboard, you can paste the message text wherever needed.


Printing from the Web Browser

As we've seen, you can always print the currently displayed Web page from the Web Browser by pressing [image] [image], by selecting the File | Print... menu item or by clicking the Print Action Bar button. The Web Browser also allows you to specify a variety of options for the printed page. To do so, select the File | Page Setup... menu item to display the Page Setup dialog:

Page Margins

Click in these edit fields to specify the Left, Right, Top and Bottom margins in inches. By default, the margins are set to 0.75 inches on all sides.

Page Header

You can specify the text printed on the Left and Right sides of the page header by clicking in the appropriate field. You can enter text directly, or use one of the print control sequences listed below. By default, the page's title will be printed on the Left side and a running page count on the Right.

Page Footer

You can specify the text printed on the Left and Right sides of the page footer by clicking in the appropriate field. You can enter text directly, or use one of the print control sequences listed below. By default, the current date in DD MMM YYYY will be printed on the Left side and the current time in 12-hour format will be printed on the Right.

Print Control Sequences

You can use the following print control sequences to specify the headers and footers generated by the Web Browser:

Sequence	Function
&d	The current date in MMM DD YYYY format.
&D	The current date in DD MMM YYYY format.
&p	The current page number.
&P	The total number of pages.
&t	The current time in 12-hour format.
&T	The current time in 24-hour format.
&u	The Universal Resource Locator, or URL, of the current page.
&w	The title of the current page.


Printing the Connection Directory

To print a listing of the entries in the current Connection Directory, select the File | Print Directory... menu item or click on the Print Directory button to open the Select Connection Directory Fields to Print dialog, where you can specify the entry fields you want to print, as well as the order in which they’ll be printed. The fields you can select are displayed in the Available Fields list; the currently-selected fields are shown in the Field Order list, in the order they’ll be printed.

To add a field to the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing to the Field Order list. The field is removed from the Available Fields list and added to the list of selected fields.

To remove a field from the Field Order list, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on the arrow button pointing to the Available Fields list. The field is removed from the list of selected fields, and re-appears in the Available Fields list.

When you’re satisfied with the Field Order values you’ve selected, click on Print... to print. To return to the Connection Directory window without printing, click on Cancel.


Procomm Plus File Conversion Utility

Procomm Plus's File Conversion Utility allows you to easily convert files from previous versions of Procomm Plus for use with this version.

To launch the utility, select Directory and ASPECT Conversion from the Start menu's Procomm Plus Utilities folder.

The File Conversion Utility is easy to use:

File(s) to Convert

Click on the Browse... button to select Dialing Directory files, keyboard mapping files, translate tables, Meta Key files, fax cover sheets, Action Bar files, parameter files, FTP Connection files, ASPECT .was or .inc source files, User Window .uws source files and Dialog Editor .wud files that you want to convert to version 4 format. The File Conversion Utility opens a standard file selection dialog, where you can browse and make your selections.

Destination Directory

You can also select the the Destination Directory for the newly-converted files by clicking on the Browse... button next to the field.

 After you've selected the files and the destination, click on Convert to begin the conversion or Exit to quit without converting..

The Conversion Status list box reports the utility's activities as it processes your files.


Procomm Plus Script Programs

Host, the BBS Script

Login, the Script Generator

WinLink, the File Transfer Utility


Procomm Plus Scripts See Also
Procomm Plus Scripts

Host, the Mini-BBS Script

Logon, the Script Generator

WinLink, the File Transfer Utility


Procomm Plus Tools See Also
Procomm Plus Tools

The ASPECT Editor

The Action Bar® Editor

The GIF Viewer

The Scheduler

The QWK Mail Viewer

The Caller ID Directory Editor

The Meta Key Editor

The Keyboard Editor

The Translate Table Editor

The Fax Status Utility

The Fax Manager

The Fax Viewer

The Fax Cover Sheet Editor

The Dialog Editor

The User Window Editor


Procomm Plus and DDE

Procomm Plus operates automatically as a Dynamic Data Exchange or DDE server. When it receives a DDE request from another Windows application, it simply processes it. DDE requests can be used to initiate the exchange of data between the client and server applications or to direct program commands by the "client" application.

Procomm Plus also allows a DDE client to:

•	Request the value of one of ASPECT’s 40 predefined global variables.

•	Poll Procomm Plus to determine if the value of one of the predefined global variables has been changed.

•	Initialize or "POKE" one of the predefined global variables.

For more information, see Procomm Plus as a DDE Server.

Procomm Plus can also act as a DDE client. See the ASPECT Script Language Reference for more information.


 Procomm Plus and Novell Networks

Included on the Procomm Plus CD is a copy of Novell's WIN2NCS utility. This utility allows communication software such as Procomm Plus to access modems across a Novell network, if the modems are connected to a NASI compliant server such as Novell's Netware Connect. The Win2NCS utility can be found on the Procomm Plus CD-ROM in the following path:

\BONUS\WIN2NCS\WNCS2B.EXE

WNCS2B.EXE is a self-extracting archive file. Create a new directory on your hard drive, copy the WNCS2B.EXE file to this directory and run it to extract the utility and documentation. To install Win2NCS you will need to then run the SETUP.EXE program extracted from the archive file.

All documentation specific to Win2NCS is included within the self-extracting archive file. WIN2NCS is a Novell utility and is only provided on the Procomm Plus CD as a convenience to our customers. Any technical support questions regarding Win2NCS must be directed to Novell, according to the documentation provided in the WNCS2B.EXE archive file.


Procomm Plus and the Internet

Internet Basics

The Web Browser

The Internet Mail Client

The News Reader

The FTP Client

Telnet Connections


Procomm Plus as a DDE Server

Procomm Plus actually designates two server names when it’s executed. The first, "PW4", should be used if you’re running a single instance of Procomm Plus. If you’re running multiple instances, you can also use "PW4xxxxx", where the digits xxxxx correspond to the unsigned integer value of Procomm Plus’s instance handle. You can obtain this handle value from within an ASPECT script by using the run command to launch another instance of Procomm Plus.

Typically, another program will request that Procomm Plus run a script file and return the value of one of the forty predefined global variables.

All applications that support DDE links provide link information using this convention:

application|topic!item

with the application name and topic separated by a vertical bar and the topic and item separated by an exclamation point. For instance, the Microsoft Excel formula:

=PW4|main.wax!i0

instructs Excel to establish a DDE link with Procomm Plus (PW4), run main.wax, and display the value of the predefined global integer variable i0 in the cell where the formula was entered. Since this formula sets up a ddeadvise link to the variable i0, any change made by a script file to the value of i0 is automatically displayed in the cell.

As an example, imagine you have written an ASPECT script called dow.wax that calls a financial service, downloads a particular stock quote and assigns the value to the float variable f0. You could enter the formula

=PW4|dow.wax!f0

in an Excel cell. Each time dow.wax changed the value of f0, the spreadsheet would be updated with the latest information.

For more information, see the following topics:

The Copy Link Function

DDE Server Commands

DDE Server Topics


Procomm Plus as a DDE Server See Also
Procomm Plus as a DDE Server

The Copy Link Function

DDE Server Commands

DDE Server Topics


Procomm Plus: Help Contents

What is...
Detailed explanations of Procomm Plus components

Using Procomm Plus
Step-by-step instructions to help you complete specific tasks

ASPECT Reference
The complete on-line scripting reference for the ASPECT Script Language

Common Questions and Answers
Answers to the most common questions

Technical Support
Support options discussed in detail


Protocol

Agreed upon conventions and procedures. Protocol usually refers to a standard for communications, so that various computers can receive and interpret data. Common examples are: file transfer protocols and network protocols.


Provider

See Internet Service Provider.


QWK Mail Overview

The Procomm Plus QWK Mail Viewer gives you a convenient way to read and reply to messages and electronic mail from many bulletin board systems.

If the BBS you’re calling offers QWK mail services, you can download messages and electronic mail as a single compressed file, usually ending in the extension .QWK. After you’ve logged off the BBS, the QWK Mail Viewer will expand the QWK packet and you can read and reply to your messages at your leisure. Once you’ve finished reading and replying to all of the messages, the QWK Mail Viewer will compress your replies into another compressed file ending in the extension .REP, which you can upload to the BBS. The BBS will automatically insert your replies into its message base.

QWKmail has proven extremely popular among BBS users who enjoy reading messages on several bulletin boards, as well as those who must call long-distance to connect with a favorite system!


QWK Mail Setup: Files Options

The options on the Files panel of Setup specify the filenames for various data files used by the QWK Mail Viewer:

Taglines Pick List

Enter the name of the ASCII file containing your message taglines - you can access this list from the Tagline header field while writing a message or reply. By default, the viewer uses the file taglines.txt in your Procomm Plus home directory.

You can add, delete and modify taglines from this dialog as well; click on the Edit button to open the taglines file with the ASPECT Editor. Each tagline string should appear on a separate line.

"Message To" Pick List

This field specifies the ASCII file containing the names of your correspondents - you can access this list from the To header field while writing a message or reply. By default, the viewer uses the file msgpick.txt in your Procomm Plus home directory.

You can add, delete and modify recipients from this dialog as well. Click on the Edit button to open the pick list file with the ASPECT Editor. Each name string should appear on a separate line.

Subject Pick List

This field specifies the ASCII file containing the names of your message subjects - you can access this list from the Subject header field while writing a message or reply. By default, the viewer uses the file subjpick.txt in your Procomm Plus home directory.

You can add, delete and modify subjects from this dialog as well. Just click on the Edit button to open the pick list file with the ASPECT Editor. Each subject string should appear on a separate line.

Pick List Editor

This field specifies the filename for your Pick List editor. This program is used to modify the various files within this Setup section when you click on the Edit button. By default, the viewer uses the ASPECT Editor, which is located in the \program files\procomm plus\programs directory, but you can use any Windows text editor.

Enable Sound in Personal Messages

If this check box is enabled, the viewer will play the .wav sound file specified in the Filename for .WAV File field each time you display a message addressed to you in the message window.

Filename for .WAV File

If you’ve enabled sound in personal messages, this field specifies the Windows .wav format sound file to play. If your computer is unable to find or play this file, it sounds a standard beep tone instead.

ANSI File Viewer

This field specifies the filename for your ANSI file viewer. This program is used to display ANSI color graphics and animation in messages and QWK-related files. By default, the viewer uses ansiview.exe, which is located in the \program files\procomm plus\programs directory. You may, however, use any Windows program that displays ANSI graphics.


QWK Mail Setup: Filters Options

The options on the Filters panel of Setup specify the filenames for the exclusion filters used by the QWK Mail Viewer. An exclusion filter prevents the display of any message containing a matching string in the message’s To:, From: or Subject: field, respectively. For example, if your Message To filter file contains the name Fred Garvin and your packet contained messages addressed to Fred Garvin, the viewer would not display them at all.

Message To

Enter the name of the ASCII file containing the names of addressees whose messages you wish to filter.

You can add, delete and modify names from this dialog as well; click on the Edit button to open the Message To filter file with the ASPECT Editor. Each name string should appear on a separate line, and it must be an exact match with the name as it appears in the To: field.

Message From

Enter the name of the ASCII file containing the names of authors whose messages you wish to filter.

You can add, delete and modify names from this dialog as well; click on the Edit button to open the Message From filter file with the ASPECT Editor. Each name string should appear on a separate line, and it must be an exact match with the name as it appears in the From: field.

Message Subject

Enter the name of the ASCII file containing the subject strings of messages you wish to filter.

You can add, delete and modify strings from this dialog as well; click on the Edit button to open the Message Subject filter file with the ASPECT Editor. Each name string should appear on a separate line, and it must be an exact match with the string as it appears in the Subj: field.


QWK Mail Setup: General Options

The options on the General panel of Setup allow you to set your preferences for operations performed on every packet:

Show all message areas

Enable this check box if you’d like the QWK Mail Viewer to display all the message topic areas available in a QWK packet, even if those areas are empty.

You can toggle the display of all areas at any time from within the Areas List dialog by disabling or enabling the Show All Areas check box at the bottom of the dialog.

Next/Previous msg spans areas

If this check box is enabled, the viewer moves to the next message area when you’ve reached the last message in your current area and you select Next from the menu, the Action Bar or the keyboard. If this option is disabled, the viewer displays a reminder indicating that you’ve reached the end of the current area and you must manually move to the next area.

Likewise, when enabled the viewer moves to the previous message area when you reach the first message in your current area and you select Previous Message from the menu, the Action Bar or the keyboard.

Areas recycle after last area

If this check box is enabled, the viewer moves to the first message area when you’ve reached the last message in the packet and you select Next Message from the menu, the Action Bar or the keyboard. If this option is disabled, the viewer displays a reminder indicating that you’ve reached the end of the packet.

Always prompt to save replies

If enabled, the viewer will prompt you for confirmation when you save replies. If disabled, replies are saved as soon as you select Messages | Save Message from the menu or click on the Save Message Action Bar button.

Ignore case during spell check

If enabled, the QWK Mail Viewer’s integrated spelling checker will ignore words in all capital letters, such as acronyms like "IBM" or "DOS." If disabled, the checker will check the spelling of words in all capital letters.

Default Sort Option

This option button group specifies which sort criteria is used by default. Select Message Number to sort by ascending message number, Message From to sort by the author’s name, Message To to sort by addressee and Message Subject to sort by the subject string.

Default Packet Type

Click on the arrow at the side of this drop down list box to select the default packet type the viewer will display in the Open Packet dialog. For most bulletin boards, you’ll use the standard QWK format, while some boards may support the Blue Wave offline mail standard. Select the Mail Packets setting to display both QWK and Blue Wave packets. You can also default to All Files, which will display all the files in your Mail Packet directory, regardless of their extension.

Last Msg Pointer

This group of option buttons determines whether the QWK Mail Viewer will automatically save the last message you’ve read in each area of a packet.

If you often read large packets or you frequently reopen a packet, this is a convenient feature, as it lets you return to your reading right where you left off. However, if last read pointers are saved the viewer actually re-archives the packet with the last read data when you close the program, so it does take the viewer a few seconds to close if this feature is set to Always Save.

You can also select Never Save to turn this feature off, or even specify that the QWK Mail Viewer Ask whether last read pointers should be saved each time you close a packet.

Delete Packet when Closing

This group of option buttons determines whether the viewer will automatically delete a packet as you close it.

If you always read an entire packet in one sitting, you’ll probably want to set this option to Yes, especially if you download packets every day from the same bulletin boards.

You can also select No to ensure that you never lose a packet, since you can also delete packets from the File menu. Finally, you can specify that the QWK Mail Viewer Ask whether a packet should be deleted as you close it.

Old Reply Packets

This option button group specifies whether the viewer will automatically open or delete an existing .rep reply packet when you open a corresponding QWK mail packet.

If you often read large packets or you frequently reopen a packet, you’ll probably want to set this field to Always Open. Any additional messages you write will then be added to your existing reply packet. However, it does take the viewer a few seconds to unarchive the reply packet.

If you always read an entire packet in one sitting and send your reply packet immediately, you’ll probably want to set this option to Always Delete, especially if you download packets every day from the same bulletin boards.

You can also specify that the QWK Mail Viewer Ask whether a reply packet should be opened or deleted as you open the QWK packet.


QWK Mail Setup: Packers Options

Finally, the options on the Packers panel of Setup allow you to specify which archive programs to use to compress and uncompress your QWK mail packets, as well as which command line parameters they should take:

ZIP Open

This template specifies the formatted command line for uncompressing ZIP format packets. Use %F to indicate the mail packet and %D to indicate the temporary directory; these values are automatically substituted by the viewer.

ZIP Close

This template specifies the formatted command line for compressing ZIP format reply packets. Use %F to indicate the mail packet and %D to indicate the temporary directory; these values are automatically substituted by the viewer.

By default, the viewer uses the pwzip program, so you should only need to change these templates if you’re using an external ZIP archive utility.

Create TBBS compatible reply packets

Some versions of the TBBS bulletin board program accept only reply packets that have been created with PKZIP version 1. Enable this check box to compress your replies so that they can be read correctly by these bulletin boards.

Note that enabling TBBS compatible packets may result in larger .rep packet sizes and longer transfer times.

ARJ Open

This template specifies the formatted command line for uncompressing ARJ format packets. Use %F to indicate the mail packet and %D to indicate the temporary directory; these values are automatically substituted by the viewer.

ARJ Close

This template specifies the formatted command line for compressing ARJ format reply packets. Use %F to indicate the mail packet and %D to indicate the temporary directory; these values are automatically substituted by the viewer.

LHARC Open

This template specifies the formatted command line for uncompressing LHARC format packets. Use %F to indicate the mail packet and %D to indicate the temporary directory; these values are automatically substituted by the viewer.

LHARC Close

This template specifies the formatted command line for compressing LHARC format reply packets. Use %F to indicate the mail packet and %D to indicate the temporary directory; these values are automatically substituted by the viewer.

Almost all bulletin board systems use the ZIP format, and you should rarely need to change any of the default settings. However, some QWK doors and BBS programs offering QWK features may not support the newer PKZIP version 2.0x compression format; if your packets are not accepted by a particular BBS, check with the sysop of that system to see what compression program and command line switches you should use.


QWK Mail Setup: Paths Options

The options on the Paths panel of Setup specify the directories where various data files used by the QWK Mail Viewer are stored:

QWK viewer path

Specifies the path where the viewer can find various resources, including the ANSIview program. By default, the viewer uses the \program files\procomm plus\programs directory.

Mail packet path

This field determines where the viewer looks for incoming mail packets you’ve received. By default, the viewer uses the \program files\procomm plus\dnload directory, since downloaded files are stored there.

Replies path

Specifies where the viewer stores outgoing reply packets. By default, the viewer uses the \program files\procomm plus\upload directory, since you’ll be uploading the reply packet from there as well.

Export message path

This field determines the default directory where the viewer stores messages you export with the Messages | Export... menu item. Since the Export command displays a Save As dialog box, you can change this directory, if necessary, when you save the message.

Spelling dictionaries path

Specifies the path where the viewer can find the dictionaries used by the integrated spelling checker. By default, the viewer uses the \program files\procomm plus directory.

Temp directory path

This field determines the directory used by the viewer to store temporary work files; these files are erased when you close the viewer.


QWK Mail Setup: Replies Options

The options on the Replies panel of Setup allow you to specify how the viewer will format quoted lines and your signature:

Quote Line Prefix

This template specifies the formatted prefix added at the beginning of each line of quoted text when you reply to a message. Use %F to indicate the first initial of the original author’s name, and %L to indicate the last initial. These values are automatically substituted by the viewer. For example, if the original message was written by Mark Twain, the default prefix template %F%L> would insert the string MT> in front of each line of quoted text.

Quote Header

This template specifies the formatted header string added at the beginning of the quoted text when you reply to a message. The header helps identify the original message, which makes it easier to read and follow long conversations with many replies. The following template characters are available, and will be substituted with the actual values by the viewer:

%F to indicate the full name of the original message’s author.

%FF to indicate the first name of the author.

%FL to indicate the last name of the author.

%T to indicate the full name of the original message’s addressee.

%TF to indicate the first name of the addressee.

%TL to indicate the last name of the addressee.

%S to indicate the message subject.

%D to indicate the date the original message was posted.

%N to force a new line (as if you had typed a carriage return).

For example, if the original message was written by Mark Twain to Thomas Edison on 08/01/95, and the subject header was "Procomm Plus," the following template:

On %D, %F was talking to %T %N about %S:

would produce the corresponding quote header at the top of the message:

On 08/01/95, Mark Twain was talking to Thomas Edison

about Procomm Plus:

Signature

This template specifies the signature string added at the end of each message you write. You can use the %N template character to force a new line (as if you had typed a carriage return).

If you would like the viewer to automatically add this signature to the end of every message you write, enable the Auto Sign Messages check box. If the check box is disabled, you must manually add the signature by clicking on the Insert Signature Action Bar button.


QWKMail

The QWK standard allows a caller to download messages and files compressed as a single packet, from most bulletin board systems. Messages can be read with a QWK Mail viewer, and any replies can be uploaded to the BBS as a single file.


RAM

Random Access Memory. The work space of a computer. Also referred to as "memory." RAM, is the space a computer uses for data and program instructions that are actively running. The amount of RAM available has a direct impact on the speed of a computer. It is not a storage space; when the computer is turned off, everything in RAM is lost. When you Save your work or install a program, the information is stored on a hard drive or on disk. Consequently, the size of a hard drive may be 500 or 1000 megabytes, while the typical RAM size is four to sixteen megabytes.


RIPscrip

A graphical terminal emulation with mouse support. It is popular on many BBSs and on-line systems. The RIP graphic standard uses 7-bit ASCII characters, allowing connections between various systems.


RIPscrip Settings

With the Current Terminal set to RIPscrip version 1.54, or to a named option set you’ve derived from it, click on the Advanced... button to display its settings dialog:

RIP Icons path

By default, the RIPscrip emulation looks in the ripicons directory under the Procomm Plus home directory for RIP graphics and icons. Click in this edit field to specify a different drive and path.

If you choose to modify this path, you may also need to move the RIP graphics to the new path!

Initial Text Windows Font

You can specify the font used by the RIPscrip emulation when it’s first loaded or re-initialized by clicking on the appropriate option button in this group. By default, the Normal Font, 80x43 is used.

Screen to Printer printing options

You can specify how the RIPscrip emulation will print the Terminal display by selecting the appropriate setting for this option. Select Print as bitmap to have the screen printed as a bitmap, or Print as text to have the screen contents printed as text. By default, the screen is printed as a bitmap.

Screen to File/Clipboard options

You can specify how the -RIPscrip emulation will save the contents of the Terminal display or copy the contents to the Windows Clipboard by selecting one of these options. If you want the display handled as a Windows bitmap or .bmp file, select Save/copy as bitmap. If you want the contents of the display handled as a text file, select Save/copy as text. By default, the display is saved as a bitmap.

Enable Data Security

RIPscrip hosts can initiate file uploads from the RIPscrip terminal without requesting your permission. If this check box is enabled, the RIPscrip terminal will prompt you for verification before transferring files at the request of the host. Data Security is enabled by default.

Enable button Hotkeys

If this option is enabled, the RIPscrip emulation will process the accelerators for any RIP button controls in the Terminal window. Note that this setting only determines the emulation's initial support for button Hotkeys; the RIP host can enable or disable the feature for its own purposes. By default, this option is enabled.

Tab key controls button focus

If this option is enabled, you can use the [image] key to move the input focus among any RIP button controls the host has displayed in the Terminal window. Otherwise, the [image] characters are sent to the RIP host as data. This feature can also be enabled or disabled by the RIP host for its own purposes. By default, the option is enabled.

Text Variable Database

RIPscrip hosts can create text variables on the RIPscrip terminal and assign values to them. Once a variable is defined, the host can query for its value at any time.

For example, a RIPscrip host might create "MYPASSWORD" and "MYUSERNAME" text variables using information from your first logon. It could then query the terminal on subsequent calls for the values of those variables to complete the logon process.

RIPscrip text variables are used internally by the emulation, and usually don’t require any modifications. However, you can edit the list of text variables defined on your system by clicking on the Text Variable Database... button.

The text variables already defined on your system, if any, are displayed in the Name/Contents list box. You can edit the list using these buttons:

Add

Click on this button to define a new text variable. You’re prompted for the variable name and value. Only the characters ‘A’ through ‘Z’, ' 0' through ' 9', or underscores ' _ ' are valid for text variable names. The editor will automatically uppercase text variable names you enter.

Text variables can contain any valid ASCII character.

Modify

Click on this button to edit a text variable you’ve selected in the list box. You’re prompted with the current value of the text variable. To modify the value, make any changes that you want and click on OK.

Delete

Click on this button to remove a text variable you’ve selected in the list box.

When you’re satisfied with the list of RIPscrip text variables, click on OK to save your changes and return to the RIPscrip Advanced Setup dialog. To return without saving any changes, click on Cancel.

From the RIPscrip Advanced Setup dialog, click on OK to accept any changes you may have made and return to the Data, Terminal Options panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes, click on Cancel.


RIPscrip keymapping
The format of the RIPscrip keymapping for the 84-key and 101-key keyboards is the same as the ANSI BBS keymappings. Please see ANSI BBS (84 key) or ANSI BBS (101 key) for more information.


RPI

A type of modem that relies on software to compress data, instead of using hardware on the modem.


RS-232

The standard that defines electronic connection between two serial ports. The standard includes such specifications as voltage and pin diagrams for communications functions.


RTS

Request to Send. One of the lines defined by the RS-232 standard. RTS is used for hardware flow control. It indicates whether the COM port is ready to send data or not.

See also Hardware Flow Control. See also CTS.


Rapid Dial

A feature on the Procomm Plus Action Bar that lets you select connection entries without opening the Connection Directory.


Raw ASCII Options

You can specify a variety of Raw ASCII protocol options for both uploaded and downloaded files. These settings apply only to Raw ASCII file transfers.

For a brief discussion of the protocol, see The Raw ASCII Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select RAW ASCII in the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the Raw ASCII protocol settings.

Upload Options

The following settings affect Raw ASCII file uploads:

Display text

If this option is enabled, text transmitted in a Raw ASCII upload will be echoed to the Terminal display. This option is disabled by default.

If you’ve enabled this setting, and the host is also echoing data, the data may appear doubled on your display, "lliikkee tthhiiss," because both systems are echoing the data. To correct the display, disable this option.

Use [ ] for Line pace character

If you enable this check box, Procomm Plus will wait to receive the character you specify in the associated edit box before sending the next line of a Raw ASCII upload.

For example, you can force Procomm Plus to wait for a colon character ":" before it sends a new line by entering the decimal value 58 in the edit field. For a table of ASCII character values, see ASCII Table.

Millisecond delay between characters

This setting specifies the number of milliseconds Procomm Plus will wait between characters sent within a Raw ASCII upload. The default character pacing is 0 milliseconds, or no pause.

If your host system seems to lose characters sent during a Raw ASCII upload, try a setting of 5 or 10 milliseconds. This should satisfy all but the slowest host systems.

Millisecond delay between lines

This field specifies the delay in milliseconds Procomm Plus will wait between lines sent within a Raw ASCII upload. The default line delay is 0 milliseconds, or no pause.

If the host system appears to handle a complete line at a time but loses some or all of a subsequent line, try a setting of 10 or 20 millisecond. If the host is especially slow, you may need an even longer delay.

Download Options

The following settings affect Raw ASCII file downloads:

Display text

If you enable this setting, data received during a Raw ASCII download will also be displayed in the Terminal window. It is disabled by default.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase Raw ASCII downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete Raw ASCII downloads are not deleted.

Overwrite existing file

If this setting is enabled, a downloaded file will replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. Otherwise, an incoming file name will be modified to protect a preexisting file.

For example, if you downloaded a file named readme.txt, but a readme.txt file already existed in the download directory, the incoming file would be saved as readme.tx1. If readme.tx1 already existed, the incoming file would be saved as readme.tx2, and so on. By default, preexisting files are protected.

Seconds until download time-out

This setting specifies the number of seconds Procomm Plus will wait for received characters during a Raw ASCII download. If Procomm Plus doesn’t receive any characters for the number of seconds specified, the Raw ASCII download will terminate and the file will be saved to disk.

This setting is helpful if you’re performing unattended Raw ASCII downloads. Since most host systems pause at a command prompt after transferring a file, Procomm Plus will end the download automatically.

The default time-out is 10 seconds with a maximum time-out of 9999 seconds.


Read Message Menus and Action Bar
Read Message Window's Menus and Action Bar

  Action Bar     Menu Item             Description
     button

	File |  Save As...	Saves the current mail message as a standard text file, using a filename you specify.
	File |  Save Attachment...	If the current message contains an attached file, you can use this command to save it to disk as a normal file. This function is not available if the current message doesn’t contain an attached file.
	File | Print	Prints the displayed message to the currently selected printer.
	File | Exit	Closes the Read Message window, returning you to the Internet Mail Client’s main window.
	Edit | Cut	Removes the text you’ve selected in the message edit box and places it in the Windows Clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the text you’ve selected in the message edit box to the Windows Clipboard. The selected text is not affected.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste	Copies the text from the Windows Clipboard and inserts it in the message edit box.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Select All	Selects the contents of the message edit box.
	Message |  Add Sender to Connection Directory	Checks for words you may have misspelled in the message edit box. If the Internet Mail Client finds words it can’t recognize, it opens the Spelling Checker dialog. For more information, see Using the Spelling Checker.
	Message |  New Message...	Opens the New Message window, where you can begin composing a completely new message. The New Message window is discussed in Writing and Sending Mail.
	Message |  Reply...	Opens the Reply to Message window, where you can write a reply to the current message. The message window opens with the sender’s address from the original message in the To field and its subject line in the Subject field, prefaced by "RE:" to mark your message as a reply.  By default, the mail client includes the original message’s text in your reply.  The Reply to Message window is identical in function to the New Message window, which is discussed in  Writing and Sending Mail.
	Message |  Reply to All...	Opens the Reply to All Message window, where you can reply to the current message, sending your response to all of the addresses that appear in the current message. The window opens with the message’s sender and carbon copy recipient addresses entered in the To and Cc fields, respectively. The original message’s subject line appears in the Subject field, prefaced by "RE:" to indicate that it is a reply to a previous message. By default, the text of the original message is included in your reply. The Reply to All Message window is identical in function to the New Message window, which is discussed in  Writing and Sending Mail..
	Message |  Forward	Forwards the current message to another address.  The mail client opens the Forward Message window, with the original message included in the message edit box. The To and Cc fields are blank, ready for you to specify the forwarding address. The Forward Message window is identical in function to the New Message window, which is discussed in Writing and Sending Mail..
	Message | View Entire Header	Opens a simple dialog to display the full text of the current message’s header.
	Message | Move	Moves the current message to a different folder. The mail client presents a list of the available folders; select the one you want and click OK to move the message.
	Message | Delete	Deletes the current message. The mail client moves your message to the Deleted Items folder, where it will be stored until you delete it there.  The mail client can automatically empty the Deleted Items folder for you when you exit it. See Empty Deleted folder upon exit. When you delete a message, the mail client returns to the main window if no other messages are available. Otherwise, it displays the next message down in the list.
	Message | View Previous Message	Displays the previous message. This function is not available if you’re viewing the first message in a folder.
	Message | View Next Message	Displays the next message. This function is not available if you’re viewing the last message in a folder.
	Help | Using Internet Mail	Opens on-line Help for the Internet Mail Client.
	Help | Search for Help on...	Opens on-line Help for the Internet Mail Client


Reading Your Mail

To view a message you’ve written or received, select it in the main window’s message list. You can then click on the View Message Action Bar button or select the Message | View Mail menu item to display the message in the Read Message window. The message’s date and time, addresses and are subject displayed in the upper section of the Read Message window. The message body is displayed in a scrolling list box in the lower section.

Using the Mail Client's Read Message Window lists other features you can use in the Read Message window, and details the menu items which access them. For detailed information about the Read Message window's menus and Action Bar, see Read Message Window's Menus and Action Bar.


Reading an Article

When you select a newsgroup folder from the Folders tree, the News Reader displays the newsgroup’s available headers. You can view a particular article by:

Double clicking on its header.

Clicking on its header, then clicking the View Article Action Bar button.

Highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys and selecting the View | View Article menu item or pressing [image].

The News Reader displays the article in the Read Article window.

While you’re reading an article, you can select its text and copy it to the Windows Clipboard, or save it directly to disk. You can also reply to the article by clicking the Reply to Article button or selecting the News | Reply to Article... menu item.

For more information about the Read Article window's menus and Action Bar, see The Read Article Menus and Action Bar.


Reboot

A method of restarting your computer, usually by holding down the C+A keys and pressing the = key (a "warm" boot), or by turning the computer off completely and then restarting it with the power switch (a "cold" boot). If possible, it is better to exit Windows before rebooting, as files may become corrupt if they are not closed properly.


Receiving Faxes

Receiving a fax is much simpler than sending one. Instead of locating a document, specifying recipient(s) and other options, you merely tell Procomm Plus to be ready to receive it!

There are two ways to prepare Procomm Plus for receiving faxes:

Manual Answer

Auto Answer


Receiving Files

Using Procomm Plus, you can receive, or "download" files from another computer. Downloading a file from another computer essentially creates a copy of the file on your machine.

The actual steps involved in downloading a file vary widely depending on the host or system you’re using. However, each time you download a file, you’ll need to do two things: prepare the host for the transfer, and prepare Procomm Plus to receive the file.

Preparing the Host

Preparing Procomm Plus

Step-by-Step: Downloading a File with Zmodem

Step-by-Step: Downloading with Other Protocols


Receiving Files See Also
Receiving Files

Preparing the Host

Preparing Procomm Plus

Step-by-Step: Downloading a File with Zmodem

Step-by-Step: Downloading with Other Protocols


Receiving a Binary File Transfer

Receiving a BFT is no different than receiving a normal fax: just enable one of the fax answer modes as explained in Receiving Faxes.

BFTs you receive will have an extension of .bft, and will be included in Fax Manager’s Inbox. Before you can use them, however, you must use the View Fax... command to remove the "header" information attached to them during the fax transmission. For more information, see Viewing a Fax.


Refreshing a Folder

To update the documents list for the current folder, select the File | Refresh Folder menu item. Refreshing a folder regenerates its documents list. If you’ve manually copied or deleted faxes or documents outside of Fax Manager, you may need to refresh the folder to get an accurate list of its contents.

Fax Manager always updates its folders and documents lists each time it’s started, as well as when faxes are sent or received. It also maintains those lists as you manage your folders and documents and receive or send faxes.


Remote Computer

As opposed to a local computer. The computer you are not at physically. Remote computer can refer to a computer on another desk in your office, or it can refer to an Internet site in an other country.

Not to be confused with Remote Control, which entails seeing the remote computer’s display on your monitor, and controlling its programs from your console.


Remote Polling
Poll Remote

If you want Procomm Plus to call the numbers you’ve specified to receive files or faxes, enable the Poll Remote check box. For more information, see Fax Polling.


Renaming Folders

To rename the currently selected folder, select the File | Rename Folder menu item. Fax Manager displays the Rename Folder dialog.  Enter the new name for the new folder in the Folder Name edit field. When you’re satisfied with the new name, click on OK to accept and rename the folder. To return to Fax Manager’s main window without renaming the folder, click on Cancel.

Fax Manager will not allow you to rename the four default folders: Inbox, Outbox, Sent Faxes and Cover Sheets.


Renaming the Connection Directory

To save the Connection Directory under a new file name, select the File | Save As... menu item to open a standard Save As dialog.

If you’re editing a new, untitled directory, you can also open the dialog by clicking on the Save Directory button

Click in the Notes edit field to specify a comment for the new Connection Directory file.

Click in the File Name edit field, and enter the new name for the file, then click on OK to create the file. To close the dialog without creating a new file, click on Cancel. If you specify a file name that already exists in the target directory, Procomm Plus will confirm your request before overwriting the older file.


Replaying Captured Data

If you create Capture files using the "raw" setting, you can play them back in the Terminal display. Because raw Capture files include all of the emulation sequences that were originally sent by the host, if you play them back through the same emulation, a replayed Capture file will look just like it did while you were on-line capturing it!

To replay a raw Capture file select the File | Start File Playback menu item to open the Playback File dialog. The Playback File dialog is a standard "open file" dialog; to select a file, just click on it in the File Name list box. You can also browse for the file you want in other locations.

When you’re satisfied with your selection, click on OK to close the dialog and begin playing the file. To close the dialog without playing a file back, click on Cancel.

As the Capture file is replaying, you can pause and resume it by pressing the [image] [image] and [image] [image] keys, respectively. To terminate the replay, you can either press [image], click on the File Playback Action Bar button, or select the File | Stop File Playback... menu item.


Rescheduling a Fax

If you want to change the delivery time for the faxes you have highlighted, select the Edit | Reschedule menu item or click on the Reschedule Action Bar button. Fax Manager opens the Send Fax dialog and preselects the Time & Options panel.

Initially, the time and date are set to the selected fax’s delivery time and date. If you selected multiple faxes for rescheduling, the time and date values are set to the first fax you selected.

You can change the delivery time and date for the fax(es) you’ve selected by manipulating the clock and calendar controls, just as you normally would when scheduling a fax.

For a detailed explanation of the time and date controls, see Delivery Date and Time.

When you’re satisfied with the time and date you’ve specified, click on OK to apply them to your selection(s). To return to Fax Manager without rescheduling, click on Cancel.

If the new time and date you specify are already past when you click on OK, Fax Status will attempt to transmit your fax immediately.


Responding to QWK Messages

Replying to a message is very similar to composing a new message, but the QWK Mail Viewer provides some of the message header information automatically.

For more information, see the following topics:

Step-by-Step: Creating a QWK Mail Reply

Forwarding a QWK Message

Editing a QWK Reply

Checking Your Spelling

Creating QWK Carbon Copies

Deleting a QWK Reply


Responding to an Article

Once you’ve spent some time reading newsgroup articles, you’ll no doubt want to post your own opinions or ask a question. To do so, simply select the Reply to Article Action Bar button, or select the News | Reply to Article menu item from within the News Reader’s Read Article window. The News Reader then opens the Reply to Article window, where you can compose a response to the article.

When you reply to an article, the News Reader automatically places the newsgroup name in the Reply to Article window’s To field. It also places the original article’s subject line in the window’s Subject field, prefaced with "RE:" to indicate that it’s a reply.

The News Reader also offers a variety of text quoting options. For more information, see News Reply Options.

If you want to include a file with your article, click on the Attach/Encode File button or select the News | Attach/Encode File... menu item. The News Reader displays a standard file selection dialog, where you can browse and select the file you want. The file will be encoded as required for posting. Once you’ve attached a file, its file and pathname will appear in the list box beneath the Subject field.

Click in the edit box at the bottom of the Reply to Article window to enter the text for your article. If you’d like to import a text file as part of your article, click on the Import Text button or select the File | Import Text... menu item and browse for the file you want to import.

When you’re satisfied with your reply, click on the Post/Send Article button or select the News | Post/Send Article menu item. The News Reader completes your message and transmits it to your news server. If you’ve specified a Signature file in the Internet, News, User Info panel of Setup, it’s automatically attached to the end of your article.

Your reply to a newsgroup article will be freely accessible to everyone who reads the newsgroup.

For more information about the Reply to Message window, see The Reply to Article Menus and Action Bar.


Result Codes

Modem responses that indicate the status of an attempted connection. The result codes may indicate the connection speed, type of error correction, and type of data compression negotiated. The type of result code displayed, is usually configured within the modem initialization string commands.

See also AT Commands.


Right Mouse Options

The Right Mouse options allow you to specify the Terminal window’s response to the right mouse button, and to select the options available on the right mouse pop-up menu. From within Setup, select the Data, Data Options, Right Mouse buttons to display the Right Mouse panel:

Right mouse button action

By default, the Terminal window responds to a right mouse button click within the Terminal display by opening a pop-up menu. You can specify a different response by clicking on this list box and selecting it. If you select No action, a click on the right mouse button will be ignored within the Terminal display.

If you select Dbl Click positions cursor, the Terminal window will transmit the appropriate emulation cursor sequences to place the terminal cursor at the location you clicked. Normally, you must be connected to a host system for this function to be useful.

List Boxes 1 - 10

These ten fields determine the options that will be available on the right mouse pop-up menu. You can specify up to 10 items by clicking on the appropriate list box, then clicking on the option you want. The options available in the list boxes are commands available from the Terminal window menus.

If you want to remove an option from the pop-up menu without replacing it with a different command, click on the appropriate list box, then scroll to the top of the list to select [None].


Router

A piece of hardware or software that sends network packets between networks. A router can communicate between networks that use similar network protocols or dissimilar network protocols.

See also Gateway.


Running Scripts

An ASPECT script file is a simple ASCII text file that contains commands to be executed by Procomm Plus. Before the script can be run or executed, it must be processed by the ASPECT Compiler.

Procomm Plus gains several advantages by using compiled scripts:

•	Faster execution. The ASPECT Compiler translates each statement in the script into a group of "tokens" or symbols that Procomm Plus can read and execute directly. This dramatically reduces the executable’s file size, and allows Procomm Plus to execute the script without having to first interpret a larger source file.

•	Support for advanced features. Using ASPECT, you can create your own dialog boxes and custom user screens for your scripts, and take advantage of a tremendous array of functions. Many of these features would have been difficult, if not impossible to provide without using compiled scripts.

•	Security. The tokens generated by the compiler are encrypted to prevent anyone from reading embedded text strings or numbers, such as a password or logon ID. This means that you can distribute compiled copies of your scripts to other Procomm Plus users without revealing any sensitive information.

An uncompiled script, or a "source" file, has an extension of .was, meaning "Windows ASPECT Source," while a compiled script has an extension of .wax, for "Windows ASPECT eXecutable".

If all of these details sound intimidating, don’t worry! Procomm Plus handles most of the details for you automatically. Just remember to save your source script files with an extension of .was, and place them in the Script path you’ve specified in Data, Data Options, Paths panel of Setup. When you compile them successfully, the .wax file will be created automatically in the same location. If the script fails to compile, the ASPECT Compiler provides a list of any error messages and will even save those messages to a text file if you wish.

Procomm Plus also automatically handles another important task for you: updating the compiled script. If you select a .wax file to execute, Procomm Plus searches for a source file of the same name. It compares the creation dates of the two files; if the source file is newer than the executable, it prompts you to determine whether it should recompile to "freshen" the executable!

Procomm Plus comes with a variety of powerful script applications that you can use. See Procomm Plus Script Programs.

For more information, see the following topics:

Launching a Script

Compiling Scripts

The Script Recorder


Running Scripts See Also
Running Scripts

Launching a Script

Compiling Scripts

The Script Recorder


Running the Action Bar Editor

You can launch the editor in one of three ways:

•	By clicking on the Action Bar Editor icon in the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu.

•	By selecting Tools | Action Bar Editor from any Procomm Plus communication window except for the Fax Manager.

•	By clicking on the Action Bar Editor button on the Tools-related Action Bar included with Procomm Plus.

The editor opens with an empty workspace.


Running the ASPECT Editor

You can launch the ASPECT Editor in several different ways:

•	By clicking on the ASPECT Editor icon in the Procomm Plus Utilities group available from the Start menu.

•	By clicking on the ASPECT Editor icon in the Tools-related Action Bar in the Terminal window.

•	By selecting ASPECT Editor from a Procomm Plus communication window Tools menu.

•	From within the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog. For more information, see For the ASPECT Programmer.

By default, the ASPECT Editor window opens with a new, untitled file.

The ASPECT Editor’s Action Bar allows you to select its most-frequently used menu commands with a click of the mouse. See "The ASPECT Editor Action Bar® and Menus" for a discussion of the Action Bar and the menus.


Running the Cover Sheet Editor

You can start the editor either by clicking on its icon within the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu, or by selecting Cover Sheet Editor from the Tools menu in a Procomm Plus communications window. The editor opens with an untitled window.

Along with a standard title bar and window controls, the top of the editor’s window contains a menu and Action Bar. Their uses are discussed in Designing a Cover Sheet.

The largest segment of the editor window is the work space. The editor functions much like a drawing or paint utility, allowing you to place your text and graphics in a "WYSIWYG" or "What You See Is What You Get" layout.

At the bottom of the window is the editor’s status bar. As you select and manipulate objects in a cover sheet, fields in the status bar report the object’s type, location and size.

For step-by-step example of using the editor to perform a basic editing task, see Step-by-Step: Customizing Your Cover Sheet.

For a discussion on creating a cover sheet "from scratch," see Designing a Cover Sheet.


Running the Fax Viewer

You can launch the Fax Viewer from a variety of locations:

By selecting it from the Tools | Fax Viewer in a Procomm Plus window.

By selecting Tools | Fax Viewer or clicking on the Fax Viewer button in the Fax Status window.

By selecting Tools | Fax Viewer or clicking on the Fax Viewer button in the Fax Manager window.

You can also launch the Fax Viewer with a fax already selected for viewing by double-clicking on it in the Fax Manager. For more information, see Viewing a Fax.

By clicking the Fax Viewer icon in the Procomm Plus group available from the Start menu.

If you didn’t launch the Fax Viewer with a fax selected from Fax Manager, it opens with an empty window. You can click on its Open Action Bar button, or select its File | Open... menu item to select a file in a standard dialog.

The Fax Viewer uses the path specified in the Inbox directory setting in the Fax, Fax Paths panel in Setup as its default directory when opening files. You may need to change directories to find .fax files to view. Simply select a .FAX file to view, then click OK. The Fax Viewer loads and displays the .fax document you selected. See The Fax Viewer Window for more information.


Running the GIF File Viewer
Running The GIF Viewer

You can launch the GIF Viewer by clicking on the GIF Viewer icon in the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu.

The viewer’s Open GIF File dialog appears. Select the file(s) you want to view, and click on OK; the dialog will close and the viewer will load your selection(s). If the .gif files you want to view aren’t in the current directory, you can use the dialog’s standard file and directory controls to locate them.

While you can select any number of .gif files to view at one time, and Ctrl-click on each of them in any sequence , the viewer’s slide show will display them in alphabetical order.

Slide Show Group

If you’ve selected more than one .gif file to view, two special controls are enabled in the Slide Show options group within the Open GIF File dialog:

Delay

You can specify the number of seconds for each image to be displayed in the Delay edit field, or use the default value of 2 seconds.

Recycle

If you want the viewer to continuously cycle, loading and displaying the images you’ve highlighted, enable the Recycle check box. If you enable this check box, the viewer will display your graphics continuously until you press [image], select Stop from its menu bar or close the viewer's window..

Set Default Button

You can also click on the Set Default button at any time to have the viewer’s Open GIF File dialog use the current drive and path as its new start-up directory. This feature is especially useful if you store your .gif graphics in a directory other than the one specified in Download path in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup.


Running the News Reader

As with Procomm Plus's Terminal window, you can start the News Reader window in a number of ways. The three most common methods include:

By launching it as a Windows desktop application.

You can launch the Internet News window from the Procomm Plus group available from the Start menu. Simply click on the News Reader icon.

By switching modes from within Procomm Plus.

While you are within Procomm Plus, you may open the Internet News window in one of two ways: by changing to the Internet News window, or opening the News Reader window in a new window.

Each Procomm Plus communications window has a Window menu on its menu bar. From the Window menu, you can select either New Window or Change Window, and then select News from the pop-up menu.

By selecting a News-class entry from the Connection Directory. When you select a News-class entry, Procomm Plus automatically switches from its current mode of operation to the News Reader window.

To use the News Reader, you'll need a properly configured Current News Options option set in the Internet, News panel of Setup. For more information, see Internet News Options.

The first time you launch the News Reader, it connects to your news server and retrieves a master list of the newsgroups available on the server. This action is also performed if you change the News server address in the Internet, News, News Server panel of Setup.

Once the master list is retrieved, the News Reader window displays the top level folders of the Folders list.


Running the QWK Mail Viewer

There are three methods of opening the viewer:

By clicking on its icon in the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu.

By selecting the Tools | QWK Mail Viewer... menu item in the Terminal window.

By clicking on the QWK Mail Viewer button in the tool-related Action Bar included with Procomm Plus.

When you first run the QWK Mail Viewer, most of its Action Bar buttons are disabled.


Running the Recorder

To start the Script Recorder, select the Scripts | Start Recorder menu item, or press [image] [image]. While the recorder is running, the menu item is changed to Stop Recorder; you’ll select it again when you’re finished with the activity you want the new script to duplicate. A Script Recorder button is also available on the default Action Bar; it’s even animated while the recorder is running.

Before you start the recorder, make sure you’re ready to begin the activities you want the script to perform. For example, if you want to record a logon procedure, select Scripts | Start Recorder just before you dial the host system. This allows the recorder to "see" all of the prompts you respond to when logging on to the system.

Once you’ve started the recorder, respond to the host system’s prompts or screens just as you do normally. The recorder performs its tasks transparently. In fact, the only differences you’ll see in the Terminal window are a Status Line message stating you are in record mode and the animated Script Recorder button on the default Action Bar!

After you’ve finished the task you want the recorded script to perform, stop the recorder by selecting the Scripts | Stop Recorder menu item, pressing [image] [image] or clicking on the Action Bar’s Script Recorder button. The Save Recorded Script dialog appears. The recorder provides a default script name of record.was, but you’ll probably want to specify a different one. To do so, click in the File Name edit field, and enter the name.

The recorder also supplies a generic Notes comment. Again, you’ll probably want to specify a different one by clicking in the Notes field and entering it.

If you want the new script to run when you connect with a particular Connection Directory entry, click on the Attach to Connection Directory entry list box and select the entry name.

To accept the File Name and other settings for the new script and save it, click on the Save button. This closes the dialog and returns you to the Terminal window. If you’d like to save the script and attempt to compile it, click on Save and Compile to close the dialog and launch the ASPECT Compiler. To close the dialog without creating a new script, click on Cancel.


Running the Scheduler

You can launch the Scheduler in one of three ways:

•	By selecting Scheduler... from the Tools menu in a Procomm Plus communication window.

•	By clicking the Scheduler icon in the Procomm Plus Utilities group available from the Start menu.

•	By placing the Scheduler icon in the Windows 95 Startup folder.

To learn how to schedule a task, see Step-by-Step: Scheduling a Task. To learn how to schedule Procomm Plus, see Step-by-Step: Scheduling Procomm Plus.


Running the Translate Table Editor

You can open the Translate Table Editor in one of two ways:

•	From the Terminal window menu.

Select the Tools | Translate Table Editor... menu item to edit the currently-active .xlt file. If you don’t have a translate table file loaded for use, the editor will open a new, untitled file.

•	From within the Data, Setup Files panel in Setup.

If you want to modify an existing file, select it from the Translate group’s drop down list box, then click on the Edit... button. The editor will open and load the file you selected.

If you want to create a new .xlt file, select [Create] from the drop down list box; the editor will open with a new untitled file.


Running the Web Browser

As with Procomm Plus’s Terminal window, you can start the Web Browser in a number of ways. The three most common methods include:

By double clicking the Web Browser icon in the Procomm Plus group on from the Start menu.

By switching to it from within Procomm Plus.

While you are within Procomm Plus, you can open the Web Browser Window in one of two ways: by changing to the Web Browser window, or by opening the Web Browser window in a new window.

Each of the different modes of Procomm Plus has a Window menu in the menu bar. From the Window menu you can select either New Window or Change Window, and then select Web Browser from the pop-up menu.

By selecting a Web-class entry from the Connection Directory.

Procomm Plus automatically switches from its current mode of operation to the Web Browser window and opens the specified Web page.

If your home page is not a local file, or if you specified a Web page on the Internet, Procomm Plus checks to make sure that you are connected to the Internet. If you are not connected to the Internet, and not using an external network, Procomm Plus will attempt to access your Internet service provider.


SLIP

Serial Line Internet Protocol. A simple dial-up type of TCP/IP network stack that mimics the interactions of a a network stack with an actual network card. SLIP is used for making a connection to a TCP/IP network, by using a modem or direct connect to contact a SLIP server. The SLIP server is a computer connected to a network, that can also accept modem connections using the SLIP protocol.

See also Internet Service Provider. See also PPP.


SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. The protocol used to send e-mail across TCP/IP networks such as the Internet. The SMTP protocol is used to send e-mail from a client to a local server, and from the local server to the destination server. When you wish to access the mail from your server, you use a protocol such as the POP protocol to logon and download mail messages.

See also POP.


SYSOP

System Operator. The operator of a bulletin board system (BBS), or other on-line service.


SYSTEM.INI

An important Microsoft Windows configuration file which predominantly contains information about hardware drivers. The system.ini is used less in Windows 95, but it is still an important part of the Windows configuration.


Saving Information From the Web

Saving the Contents of Web Pages

Saving Web Page Addresses

Connecting to Saved Web Page Addresses


Saving Web Page Addresses

In addition to saving content from Web pages you will most likely, find several Web sites that you like to frequent on a regular basis. That’s what the Connection Directory and Rapid Connect list are for.

While viewing a Web page, there are three easy ways to create a Connection Directory entry:

From the Web menu, select Add Page to Connection Directory

Click on the Add Page To Connection Directory Action Bar button.

Once you have added pages to the Connection Directory, they are only a click or two away. Sometimes you may come across a Web page address while you are offline. Many companies are now including their Web addresses in their TV and magazine advertisements. In a situation like this, simply select File | Connection Directory... from the menus and select the Web tab if it isn’t already selected. From this point, adding an entry is just as explained in Adding a Web-class Entry.


Saving Your Cover Sheet

When you’ve completed a cover sheet design, you must save it to a .cvr file before you can use it as part of a fax. You can click on the Save Cover Sheet Action Bar button, or select the Save or Save As... items on the File menu. The editor adds the .cvr extension automatically when you save your cover sheet.


Saving a .cid File With a New Name

To save a Caller ID file with a new name, select the Caller ID Directory Editor's File | Save As... menu item and enter the new filename in the File Save As dialog.

The File Save As dialog operates like most standard file save dialogs. Caller ID files have a .cid extension and are located in the home directory of Procomm Plus. By default, the File Save As dialog uses the name of the currently opened Caller ID file. To save the file with a new name, enter the new filename and click on OK. The editor creates and opens the new file, and displays the filename in its title bar.


Saving a File with the ASPECT Editor

To save changes you’ve made to a file, select File | Save from the editor menu, or click on the Action Bar’s File Save button. To save a file under a new filename, or to save an untitled file, select File | Save As... to display the File Save dialog.  Type in the name for the new file, and click on OK to save it. If you enter the name of a file that already exists in the current directory, the editor will prompt you to confirm before it overwrites the older file.


Saving an Action Bar File

To save an untitled Action Bar, or to save an edited Action Bar in a new file, select File | Save As... from the menu, and enter the new filename in the standard dialog.

To save changes you’ve made in an existing Action Bar, select File | Save from the menu.

Action Bar files must have an extension of .pwb. To be recognized and used by Procomm Plus, .pwb files must be placed in the program’s home directory, typically \program files\procomm plus.


Saving the Contents of Web Pages

If you come across a lengthy Web page, you may not want to read it while you are on-line. There are several ways to save the contents of a Web page. The most obvious is selecting File | Save As from the Web Browser’s menu. This allows you to save the current page as a text file (.txt) or an HTML formatted file (.htm).

You can also select Edit | Page to to save the current HTML document to the Windows Clipboard, a disk file, the system printer, a fax or a MAPI mail client.

If the current Web page contains any inline graphics, they will only appear if you copy the page to the printer or a fax. Otherwise, only the text is saved.


Saving the Scrollback Buffer

Whether you’re viewing the Scrollback Buffer or not, you can direct its contents to the following destinations:

•	To the Windows Clipboard, by pressing  [image] [image] or by selecting the Edit | Scrollback Buffer to | Clipboard menu item. The buffer will be copied as text to the clipboard.

•	To an open Capture file, by selecting the Edit | Scrollback Buffer to | Capture File menu item. The buffer will be written using the same filtering options in effect for the Capture file.

•	To a text file using a filename you specify, by pressing [image] [image], or by selecting the Edit | Scrollback Buffer to | File... menu item.

•	To the printer, by selecting the Edit | Scrollback Buffer to | Printer menu item.

•	To a mail system, by selecting the Edit | Scrollback Buffer to | MAPI Mail menu item. You must be connected to a MAPI-compatible network electronic mail system to use this feature.

The contents of the Scrollback Buffer are not affected by any of these actions.


Scanner

A hardware device that digitizes printed material into images you can display on your PC.


Screen Captures

Instead of opening a Capture file, or selecting different segments of the Terminal display, you may sometimes find that it’s more convenient to capture an entire screen of received data. Using Procomm Plus, you can easily copy the contents of the current Terminal display to the following destinations:

•	To the Windows Clipboard, by selecting the Edit | Screen to | Clipboard menu item. The display contents will be copied as text to the clipboard.

•	To an open Capture file, by selecting the Edit | Screen to | Capture File menu item. The buffer will be written using the same filtering options in effect for the Capture file.

•	To a text file using a filename you specify, by selecting the Edit | Screen to | File... menu item.

•	To the printer, by selecting the Edit | Screen to | Printer menu item.

•	To the Scrollback Buffer, by pressing [image] [image].

If you’re using a terminal emulation that doesn’t clear the screen or scroll incoming data, Procomm Plus may not record it within the Scrollback Buffer. You can use [image] [image] to directly "paste" a specific screen image into the buffer!

•	To a mail system, by selecting the Edit | Screen to | Mail menu item. You must be connected to a MAPI-compatible network electronic mail system to use this feature.

The contents of the Terminal display are not affected by any of these actions.


Script

A program designed and compiled using one of the higher level languages such as ASPECT. An ASPECT script is not a stand-alone executable program; Procomm Plus must run the script.


Scroll Bar

A common Windows control. A narrow bar with arrows that you can click on to view lists or parts of documents too big to fit in the window.


Scrollback Buffer

The buffer set aside to temporarily store text and images that have scrolled across the Terminal display. The size of the scrollback buffer can be changed according to memory constraints, and page history requirements.


Scrollback Buffer scrollbar
Scrollback Buffer scrollbar.

Most on-line systems such as CompuServe or bulletin boards (BBS) display text by scrolling it to your screen line-by-line. You may find that the text you want to reference, such as a filename or another member’s ID, has scrolled off the Terminal display just when you need it. Using the Terminal window’s Scrollback Buffer, you can easily review and copy information that has scrolled off of the display.

To view the contents of the Scrollback Buffer, just click on the arrow button at the top of the scrollbar, or on the Scrollback Buffer button on the Action Bar. Or, from the keyboard, press [image] [image] or [image] [image]. You’ll notice that the scrollbar’s color changes to indicate that you are viewing the Scrollback Buffer.

The Scrollback Buffer is discussed in much greater detail in Using the Scrollback Buffer!

You can exit scrollback mode by pressing [image], by clicking on the arrow button at the bottom of the scrollbar until the Terminal display returns to real-time data, or by clicking on the Scrollback Buffer button on the Action Bar.


Scrollbar Settings

The Scrollbar settings allow you to select the color of the Terminal Scrollback Buffer scroll bar. From within Setup, select the Data, Window Colors, Scrollbar buttons to display the workspace settings panel:

Colors

To select a new color for the scrollbar, simply click on the one you want. The Example window updates to reflect your choice. Note that this color is used only when the Terminal is in Scrollback mode. Otherwise, the Terminal’s scrollbar uses the standard Windows scrollbar color defined in Windows Control Panel.


Search Engine

Used to find information on a network. There are different types of search engines. Some list menus, documents, and sites for selected topics, others search for the key word or words within a document. Web search engines are as easy to use as following your interests with the click of your mouse.


Searching for Faxes

If you send or receive many faxes, it can become difficult to locate specific documents. The Fax Manager can help you in this task. To search for a fax or document, select the Edit | Find... menu item or press [image] [image] to open the Find dialog. Enter the value you want to search on in the Search Text field, and click on OK to begin searching. To return to Fax Manager without searching, click on Cancel.

Fax Manager searches the currently selected folder for faxes and documents that satisfy your search text. It searches the Date/Time, From/To, Caller ID, Company, Fax Number, Fax Station ID and Comments fields of each entry in the folder’s documents list. When a matching entry is found, it’s selected for you.

You can repeat your last search by selecting the Edit | Find Next menu item, or by pressing [image] [image]. If you continue your search, subsequent matching entries are added to the previously selected entries.

You can also search for all of the entries that match your search text by selecting Edit | Find All.


Searching for Filenames with the File Clipboard

You can either browse for the filename(s) you want directly, or use the clipboard’s Search Up and Search Down buttons.

If you use the Search... buttons, the clipboard scans for valid filenames in the appropriate direction within the Terminal display and Scrollback Buffer. The File Clipboard scans for text that could be used as a DOS filename, meaning that strings of up to eight characters followed immediately by a period and an extension of up to three characters will be detected as "valid."

As each filename is found, it’s highlighted on-screen and also displayed in the clipboard window’s edit field. When you’ve located a filename you want, just click on Add. The filename is appended to the list of files, and the clipboard automatically searches for the next valid filename.

Although the File Clipboard scans for and selects filenames automatically, you’re not limited to its Search... buttons. You can add filenames to the list manually. Just click in the edit field, enter the filename, and click on Add. The filename you enter will be added to the list.

You can also search manually for the filenames you want, by browsing through the Scrollback Buffer and Terminal display. When you locate a filename you want, just double click on it to highlight it, then click on Add to append it to the list.

If you’ve set the Left Mouse Button Action to send a single character with or without a Carriage Return in the System, System Options, Left Mouse panel in Setup, double clicking on a character in the Terminal display when the clipboard is open will not send a character out the port. The File Clipboard, if open, is always considered the "target" of double clicks regardless of the Left Mouse Button Action setting.


Searching for Information

Sometimes you may need information about a specific subject or person. The World Wide Web contains libraries of information, but unless you can find it, it doesn’t do you any good. For that reason, we’ve included a Connection Directory with links to many of the popular search engines.

For a step-by-step example of using a search engine, see Step-by-Step: Finding Information on the Web.


Searching for Text in the Scrollback Buffer

You can also search for text within the Scrollback Buffer.  Select the Edit | Find... menu item to display the Find dialog.  Enter the text you want to search for in the Find What edit field, and click on Find Next to initiate the search. If your search text is found, you can repeat the search by clicking on Find Next again.

You can search Up, towards the beginning of the Scrollback Buffer, or Down, towards the current Terminal display, which is always the last screen in the buffer, by selecting the appropriate option button in the Direction group box.

Regardless of which direction you choose, your search begins at your current position in the Scrollback Buffer. If you want to search the entire buffer, you should move to the beginning or end of the buffer by positioning the scroll bar, then search towards the opposite end of the buffer.

By default, the search will find any series of characters matching the string you entered, but you can limit the search to an entire matching word by enabling Match Whole Word Only. For a case-sensitive search, enable Match case

The Find function can’t locate words that span or "wrap" more than one line.

To close the Find dialog, click on Cancel.


Searching for entries.

As you add groups and entries to your Connection Directory, it can become difficult to locate particular items. You can use the Find function to find them quickly and easily. Entries and groups that match your search options remain selected when you return to the main directory window, just as though you’d selected them manually!

To search the current Connection Directory, click on the Find Entry button or select the Edit | Find... menu item to open the Find Connection Directory Entry dialog. You can search for entries by their Name, Company, Area Code and Country Code settings. These options can also be combined to narrow the resulting selections. For example, if you enter an Area Code of "573", and a Name of "A", the Results list would display all of the entries whose settings satisfied both field values.

When used alone, the Name search option will also report matching groups. Individual entries within groups will always be listed if they satisfy the search options.

To specify a search option, click in the appropriate edit field(s) and enter the value(s) you want. The search function is not case-sensitive; a value of "d" in the Name field would return both "Dashing" and "debonair".

The Results list updates continuously as you modify the four search options edit fields. If you don’t want a particular entry or group listed in the Results list, you can deselect it by holding down the [image] button and clicking on it.

You can also specify how the Connection Directory will handle groups or entries you’d highlighted before searching:

Select only these entries

If you select this option button, the matching entries or groups will be highlighted or selected when you return to the main Connection Directory window. Any entries or groups you selected before you searched the directory will be deselected automatically.

Add to currently selected entries

If you select this option button, the matching entries or groups will be added to those you’d selected before you searched the directory. The selected entries or groups will remain highlighted when you return to the main Connection Directory window.

When you’re satisfied with the options and search results you’ve specified, click on OK to accept them and return to the main directory window. To close the dialog without selecting any groups or entries, click on Cancel.


See Also: An Introduction to Internet Newsgroups
An Introduction to Internet Newsgroups

Newsgroup Naming Conventions

Newsgroup Articles

How News Works


See Also: Annotating Faxes
Annotating Faxes

The Annotation Toolbar

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Line

The Freehand Line

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Shape

Step-by-Step: Placing Text

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Polygon

Step-by-Step: Placing an Annotation Bitmap

Modifying an Annotation Object


See Also: Binary File Transfers
Binary File Transfers

Receiving a Binary File Transfer

Step-by-Step: Sending a Binary File Transfer

Fax vs. File Transfer


See Also: Configuring the QWK Mail Viewer
Configuring the QWK Mail Viewer

General

Files

Paths

Replies

Filters

Packers


See Also: Connecting to an FTP Host
Connecting to an FTP Host

Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with the Connection Directory

Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with Rapid Connect

Step-by-Step: Connecting Manually to an FTP Host


See Also: Data Options
Data Options

General

Advanced

Left Mouse

Right Mouse

Paths


See Also: Dialing Options
Dialing Options

Call Setup


See Also: Elements of the FTP Client Window
Elements of the FTP Client Window

The FTP Client's Menus and Action Bar

FTP Client: Local and Remote Work Area

FTP Client: The Status Area


See Also: Elements of the News Reader Window
Elements of the News Reader Window

The News Reader's Menus and Action Bar

The News Reader Display Area

The News Reader's Status Line


See Also: FTP Address and Logon Information
FTP Address and Logon Information

The Host IP Address

The Client IP Address

FTP Logon


See Also: FTP Client Configuration
FTP Client Configuration

Your TCP/IP Connection

File Transfer Mode

Passive Mode

Host Type

Logon Timeout


See Also: FTP Options
FTP Options

General Options

Transfer Options

Directory Options


See Also: Fax Connection
Fax Connection

General

Adaptive Answer

Advanced


See Also: Fax Polling
Fax Polling

Step-by-Step: Building a Fax Polling Host List.

Step-by-Step: Receiving Polled Files


See Also: Faxing with PROCOMM PLUS
Faxing with Procomm Plus

The Fax Status utility

Sending Faxes

Receiving Faxes

The Fax Manager

The Fax Viewer

The OCR Editor

Fax Polling

Other Fax Functions

Step-by-Step: Generating .fax Files

Initializing the Fax Modem

Holding Scheduled Faxes

Aborting a Fax Send or Receive

Setting the Default Printer

The Fax Activity Log

Binary File Transfers

The Fax Cover Sheet Editor

Fax Standards


See Also: Internet Basics
Internet Basics

Internet Addresses

Transferring Information

Connecting to the Internet

Using the Internet


See Also: Internet Mail Options
Internet Mail Options

Mail User Info Options

Mail Server Options

Incoming Mail Options

Outgoing Mail Options

Mail Reply Options

Other Mail Options


See Also: Internet News Options
Internet News Options

News User Info Options

News Server Options

News Properties

News Reply Options

Other News Options


See Also: Managing Fax Documents
Managing Fax Documents

Viewing a Fax

Forwarding a Fax

Mailing a Fax

Moving a Fax

Copying a Fax

Rescheduling a Fax

Changing a Fax Delivery

Searching for Faxes


See Also: Managing Folders
Managing Folders

Creating Folders

Renaming Folders

Refreshing a Folder

Deleting a Folder


See Also: Modifying an Annotation Object
Modifying an Annotation Object

Changing the Line Width

Changing the Line Color

Changing the Fill Color

Changing the Text Attributes

Selecting Multiple Annotation Objects

Arranging Annotation Objects

Deleting Annotation Objects

Annotation and the Windows Clipboard


See Also: Option Sets
Option Sets

Option Set Controls

Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set

Modifying an Option Set


See Also: PROCOMM PLUS and the Internet
Procomm Plus and the Internet

Internet Basics

The Web Browser

The Internet Mail Client

The News Reader

The FTP Client

Telnet Connections


See Also: Saving Web Information
Saving Web Information

Saving the Contents of Web Pages

Saving Web Page Addresses

Connecting to Saved Web Page Addresses


See Also: Sending Faxes
Sending Faxes

Step-by-Step: Faxing from a Windows Application

Step-by-Step: Faxing from Procomm Plus

The Send Fax Dialog

Step-by-Step: Faxing From the Connection Directory

Step-by-Step: Faxing During a Voice Call


See Also: Setup Basics
Setup Basics

The Setup Interface

Option Sets


See Also: System Connection
System Connection

Port

Speaker


See Also: Telnet Connections
Telnet Connections

Using Telnet Connections

Telnet Troubleshooting


See Also: Terminal Options
Terminal Options

Common Terminal Options

ANSI-BBS and IBM PC Advanced Settings

IBM 3101 and IBM 3161 Advanced Settings

IBM 3270, TVI 950, TVI955 and Wyse 100 Advanced Settings

RIPscrip Advanced Settings

TVI 910, 912, 925 and Esprit 3 Advanced Settings

VT-220, VT-320 and TVI 922 Advanced Settings

Wyse 50, Wyse 60 and ADM 31 Advanced Settings


See Also: The Data Settings
The Data Settings


See Also: The FTP Client
The FTP Client

Starting the FTP Client

Elements of the FTP Client Window

FTP Client Configuration

Connecting to an FTP Host

Step-by-Step: Sending and Receiving Files using FTP

The FTP Client's Menus and Action Bar


See Also: The FTP Client Utility
The FTP Client Utility

An Introduction to FTP

The FTP Client


See Also: The Fax Manager
The Fax Manager

The Folders and Documents Lists

The Details Panel

Managing Folders

Managing Fax Documents

The Fax Manager's Menus and Action Bar


See Also: The Fax Settings
The Fax Settings


See Also: The Fax Viewer
The Fax Viewer

Running the Fax Viewer

The Fax Viewer Window

Using the Fax Viewer

Using the Quick Select Line

Using the Thumbnail View

Fax Cleaning

Deskewing a Fax

Annotating Faxes

What is OCR?

The Fax Viewer's Menus and Action Bar


See Also: The Internet Mail Client
The Internet Mail Client

An Introduction to Internet Mail

Using the Mail Client

The Internet Mail Client’s Menus and Action Bar


See Also: The Internet Settings
The Internet Settings

Settings in the Internet group affect all of Procomm Plus's Internet operations. It contains six minor settings groups:


See Also: The Mail Entry Class
The Mail Entry Class

Step-by-Step : Adding a Mail-class Entry

Mail-class Settings


See Also: The News Entry Class
The News Entry Class

Step-by-Step: Adding a News-class Entry

News-class Settings


See Also: The News Reader
The News Reader

An Introduction to Internet Newsgroups

Running the News Reader

Elements of the News Reader Window

Using the News Reader

The News Reader’s Menus and Action Bar


See Also: The OCR Editor
The OCR Editor

Using the OCR Editor

The OCR Editor Basics

Step-by-Step: Editing OCR Output Data

The OCR Editor’s Menus and Action Bar


See Also: The QWK Mail Viewer
The QWK Mail Viewer

Running the QWK Mail Viewer

The QWK Mail Viewer Window

Step-by-Step: Downloading a QWK Packet

Opening a QWK Packet

Navigating QWK Packets

The Areas List

The Message List

Viewing the Messages

Printing and Exporting Messages

Responding to QWK Messages

Step-by-Step: Creating a QWK Mail Reply

Forwarding a QWK Message

Editing a QWK Reply

Checking Your Spelling

Creating QWK Carbon Copies

Deleting a QWK Reply

Creating New QWK Messages

Closing and Deleting QWK Packets

Advanced QWK Mail Viewer Features

Using QWK Message Attachments

Sorting Your QWK Messages

Finding a QWK Message

Signatures and Taglines

Using the ANSI Viewer

Using RIME Routing

Configuring the QWK Mail Viewer

The QWK Mail Viewer’s Menus and Action Bar


See Also: The Send Fax Dialog
The Send Fax Dialog

Send Fax To

Cover Sheet

Time & Options

MemoFax


See Also: The Send Fax To... Options
The Send Fax To... Options

Step-by-Step: Entering Send Fax Recipients

Step-by-Step: Selecting Files to Fax


See Also: The Setup Utility
The Setup Utility

Setup Basics


See Also: The System Settings
The System Settings


See Also: The Time & Options Screen
The Time & Options Screen

Delivery Date and Delivery Time

Poll Remote

Send to File

Fax Connection


See Also: The Web Browser
The Web Browser

The World Wide Web

Running the Web Browser

Elements of the Web Browser Window

Using the Web Browser

The Web Browser's Menus and Action Bar


See Also: Transfer Protocol Options
Transfer Protocol Options

Zmodem

Kermit

Xmodem

1K-Xmodem

1K-Xmodem-g

Ymodem

Ymodem-g

CIS-B+

ASCII

Raw ASCII

Ind$file


See Also: User Info
User Info

User Info

Fax Header


See Also: Using OCR
Using OCR

Step-by-Step: Using OCR to Process an Image

OCR Options

The OCR Editor


See Also: Using Telnet Connections
Using Telnet Connections

Connecting with Telnet

Telnet and the Terminal Window

Step-by-Step: Connecting to a Telnet Host


See Also: Using the Mail Client
Using the Mail Client

The Internet Mail Client's Menus and Action Bar

The Internet Mail Client's Folders and Messages Lists

The Internet Mail Client's Status Line

Writing and Sending Mail

Using the Mail Client's New Message Window

Using the Mail Client's Spelling Checker

Verifying Addresses

Using the Mail Client's Read Message Window

Sending and Receiving Mail

Reading Your Mail

Using the Mail Client's Read Message Window


See Also: Using the News Reader
Using the News Reader

Step-by-Step: Searching for Newsgroups

Connecting to Newsgroups

Reading an Article

Responding to an Article

Step-by-Step: UUdecoding a Binary File

Step-by-Step: Composing Your Own Article


See Also: Using the Web Browser
Using the Web Browser

Following Hyperlinks

Searching for Information

Saving Information From the Web

Error Messages from the Web Browser

The History Window

Printing from the Web Browser


See Also: Web Browser Status Line Area
Web Browser Status Line Area

The Web Browser's Quick Select Line

The Web Browser's Status Line


See Also: Web Browser Window
Web Browser Window

The Web Browser's Menus and Action Bar

The Web Browser Display Area

The Web Browser's Status Line Area


See Also: Web Browser and the mouse
Web Browser and the mouse

The Web Browser Display and the Mouse


See Also: Web Entry Class
Web Entry Class

Step-by-Step: Adding a Web-class Entry

Web-class Settings


See Also: Web-class Settings
Web-class Settings

Entry Info

Web Options


See Also: Window Colors
Window Colors

Workspace

Scrollbar

Monitor Send

Monitor Receive


Selecting Multiple Annotation Objects

You can select single objects by clicking on them. You can also select multiple objects using the Select Object tool, either by holding the [image] key down as you click on the object(s) or by "drawing" a rectangle around the object(s).

To use this method, choose the Select Object tool, either by clicking on the Select Object button, or by choosing the Annotation | Drawing Tools | Select Object menu item. The mouse cursor reverts to a standard pointer.

Use the Select Object tool just like you would if you were drawing a rectangle around the object(s) you want. Place the cursor at a point above and to the left of the object(s), then click and drag to a point below and to the right of the object.

As you’re dragging the cursor, the viewer displays a light dashed line to show you the area you’re selecting. When you release the button, the viewer selects all of the objects located within your imaginary rectangle.  Once you’ve selected the object(s) you want, you can use the viewer’s annotation controls to change their settings, arrange them or even delete them, just as though you’d only selected a single object.


Selecting Text from the Scrollback Buffer

While you’re viewing the Scrollback Buffer, you can select characters, words or pages of information from the Terminal display and then direct the information you’ve selected to one of the Copy to... destinations. See The Terminal Display and the Mouse for more information.

If you click and drag beyond the upper or lower boundaries of the Terminal display while in the Scrollback Buffer, the buffer will scroll appropriately, allowing you to select multiple pages. You can also save the entire Scrollback Buffer. See Saving the Scrollback Buffer.


Sending Faxes

Using Procomm Plus, you can generate faxes in three ways:

From other Windows applications.

You can fax documents from within other Windows applications almost as easily as you print them! Procomm Plus installs its fax support as a Windows print driver. To send a document as a fax, select Procomm Plus as the active printer within the application, then print the document normally.

For a step-by-step explanation, see Step-by-Step: Faxing from a Windows Application.

From Windows Explorer.

Procomm Plus’s Fax Status utility supports the Windows"drag and drop" standard. To fax documents you have selected in Explorer, simply drag them to the Fax Status window or its minimized icon.

From Procomm Plus.

You can send almost any document created by another Windows application from within Procomm Plus, simply by browsing and selecting it in the Send Fax dialog.

A step-by-step explanation appears in Step-by-Step: Faxing from Procomm Plus.

No matter where you generate your fax, you'll always use either the Send a Fax wizard or the The Send Fax Dialog. You can access these controls by:

Selecting the Fax | Send a Fax... menu item or clicking on the Send Fax icon on the Action Bar in Procomm Plus’s main window, in Fax Status or in Fax Manager.

Selecting a [Fax] group or entry from the Rapid Connect drop down list on the Action Bar.

You can also initiate a Send Fax operation by selecting a fax group or entry from the Connection Directory and clicking on the Send button. Procomm Plus prompts you to select the file(s) you want to send and other options, and begins processing your fax.

For a step-by-step discussion, see Step-by-Step: Faxing From the Connection Directory.

If you have a handset connected to your fax modem, you can also initiate a Send Fax operation during a voice call. Once you are finished talking, initiate a Send Fax operation, select or generate a fax, instruct Procomm Plus to send the fax, and hangup the handset. Of course, the other party must begin the receive fax process on the receiving system.

For a step-by-step discussion, see Step-by-Step: Faxing During a Voice Call.

Regardless of how you open the Send Fax dialog to initiate a fax, Procomm Plus automatically loads the document’s associated application, prints the document as a fax and closes the application.

If a particular filename extension hasn't been associated with a Windows application, Procomm Plus cannot automatically open the application or issue any commands. Please refer to your Windows User's Guide to find out how to associate an extension with a Windows application.

By default, Procomm Plus .fax files are not deleted after they are transmitted. This allows you to reuse them by browsing for them in the Send a Fax wizard or the Send Fax dialog.


Sending Filenames from the File Clipboard

Once you’ve selected the filename(s) you want, you’re ready to send them to the host! With the File Clipboard, this is as easy as a point and click!

Keep in mind, however, that the host must be ready to receive the filename(s)! For an example, see Step-by-Step: Using the File Clipboard.

To transmit a filename to the host system, select it in the list by clicking on it or highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys. You can even select multiple filenames by holding down the [image] key and clicking on them, by dragging over them with the left mouse button, or by holding down the [image] key as you move the highlight bar with the cursor keys.

Once you’ve selected the filename(s) you want to transmit, click on Send. If you select multiple filenames, they will be sent separated by the character specified in the File separator list box at the bottom of the clipboard window. A terminating carriage return is also transmitted.

The Remove when sent option determines whether the File Clipboard automatically deletes filenames from the list once they’ve been sent to the host system. If this option is checked, the filename will be deleted from the File Clipboard list regardless of the outcome of the file transfer.

Some host systems require you to enter a single filename on each line, while others may allow you to send an entire line of filenames separated by spaces. The File separator character determines what character Procomm Plus will insert between filenames. The default character is a carriage return, but you can select a different separator from the File separator list box. Other common separator characters are space and comma.

Separator characters only appear between filenames. If a single filename is sent, it will not have a separator, but it will have a carriage return.

Also keep in mind that multiple file or "batch" transfers are not supported by all protocols. Generally, the Kermit, Zmodem and Ymodem protocols can handle batch transfers, but you’ll need to confirm this on your host’s system.

With other protocols, such as Xmodem or 1K-Xmodem, you’ll need to transfer files one at a time. To use the File Clipboard with single file transfers, select and send each filename one at a time. If you enable the Remove when sent option, the filenames will be deleted from the File Clipboard as you send them, making it easy to determine which names you’ve sent to the host for processing!

You can also specify the separator to be used each time you open the File Clipboard in the Data, Data Options, General settings panel in Setup. For more information, see File Clipboard separator.


Sending Files

Using Procomm Plus, you can send, or "upload" files from your computer to another computer. Uploading a file essentially creates a copy of your file on the other computer.

The specific steps involved in sending a file vary widely depending on the host or system you’re using. However, each time you upload a file, you’ll need to do two things: prepare the host to receive the file, and initiate the transfer with Procomm Plus.

Preparing the Host before Sending a File

Sending the File

Step-by-Step: Uploading a File


Sending Files See Also
Sending Files

Preparing the Host before Sending a File

Sending the File

Step-by-Step: Uploading a File


Sending and Receiving Mail

As we mentioned earlier, the Internet Mail Client must interact with your mail server to send and receive your messages. To retrieve mail from your server, click on the Deliver Mail Action Bar button or select the Message | Deliver Mail menu item in the mail client’s main window.

After the client establishes a connection to your server, it retrieves your messages. By default, the Internet Mail Client only retrieves your new messages from the server, and deletes each message from the server as it is safely retrieved. You can control these options within Setup; see Mail Server Settings.

After it’s retrieved any messages you had waiting on the server, the mail client sends any messages you had waiting in the Outbox folder. As your messages are successfully transmitted, they are moved into the Sent Mail folder for storage.


Sending the File

Once the host is ready to receive your file, you need to tell Procomm Plus to send it. As with the host, Procomm Plus needs to know the protocol you want to use and the file(s) you’re sending.

A protocol is a defined set of rules and conventions used to transfer data from one computer to another. A protocol definition includes rules about how errors will be detected and corrected, and the information that is sent in addition to the actual file. For more information, see File Transfer Protocols.

If you’ve enabled the Terminal window’s Quick Select Line, you can check its protocol field to quickly determine the current protocol. If the current protocol isn’t the one you selected on the host, you can select the proper protocol by clicking on the Quick Select Line’s protocol field to display the list of available protocols, then clicking on the one you want.

If you’re not using the Quick Select Line, you can verify the current protocol by opening Setup, and looking in the Data, Transfer Protocols panel. To select a different protocol, simply click on the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the list of those available, then click on the one you want. Click on OK to accept your changes and close Setup.

After you’ve selected the protocol, click on the Send File Action Bar button, or select the Data | Send File... menu item. Procomm Plus displays the Send File dialog, a standard browsing dialog that defaults to the Upload path you specified in the Data, Data Options, Paths settings panel in Setup. See Paths Options.

You can select a file from the current directory by clicking on it in the File Name list box, or browse for other directories or drives with the dialog’s controls.

If the protocol you’ve selected allows "batch" transfers of multiple files, you can select them by holding down the [image] key as you click on the filenames you want, or by dragging over them. From the keyboard, you can hold down the [image] key as you move the highlight bar over them with the cursor keys.

Once you’re satisfied with the filename(s) you’ve selected, click on OK to close the Send File dialog and begin the file transfer.


Sending to File
Send to File

If you want Procomm Plus to generate .fax files even though you haven’t specified a recipient, enable the Send to File check box, then click on Send. If you specify a cover sheet and enter the recipient information, Procomm Plus will also schedule the fax and send it.  For a step-by-step explanation, see Step-by-Step: Generating .fax Files.


Serial Number

A unique number identifying each copy of Procomm Plus. To see your serial number, select Help | About Procomm Plus from the menu.


Serial Port

See COM port.


Service Provider

See Internet Service Provider.


Setting the ASPECT Editor's Screen Font

From the Preferences dialog, click on Screen Font... to open a standard FontSelect dialog.

The FontSelect dialog will only display fixed-pitch screen or TrueType fonts available on your system. You can select a Font and its Size by clicking on their respective list controls.

Your Screen Font selection does not affect the font used when you print from within the ASPECT Editor.


Setting the Default Printer

If you're going to send several faxes, or if you don't have a printer, you may want to set your default printer to the Procomm Plus fax printer driver. The Windows default printer can be set from within the Windows Control Panel. You may need to repeat this step if you alternate between the fax printer driver and other print devices.


Setup Basics

You can open the Setup utility from within each of Procomm Plus’s communications modules:

By clicking on the Setup Action Bar button.

By selecting a Setup menu item.

When you click on the Setup Action Bar button or select Setup | Setup... from a communication window’s menu, Setup opens to the last panel or settings group you accessed. If you select a Setup menu item, Setup opens to the specifc panel you selected.

The Connection Directory, Fax Manager and Fax Status all provide Setup menus with direct access to the settings groups that affect them.

The Setup Interface

Option Sets


Setup Files

The Setup Files group allows you to select, edit or create files for Meta Key files and Translate table files. You can also select or create Capture files, and specify how Capture files are handled by a Connection Directory entry.

From within Setup, select the Data, Setup Files buttons to display the settings panel:

Meta Keys

Click on this drop-down list box to view a list of the available Meta Key files. To select a file, click on its name in the list. Meta Key files must have an extension of .key and be located in the Procomm Plus home directory to be recognized and loaded.

If you don’t want to use any Meta Key file, click on the list box and select [None]. If you want to create a new Meta Key file, click on the list box and select [Create] to specify a name for the new file.

To edit the currently selected .key file, click on the list box’s associated Edit... button.

For a complete discussion of the Meta Key Editor, see The Meta Key Editor. For step-by-step example, see Step-by-Step: Customizing a Meta Key.

Translate Table

Click on this drop-down list box to view a list of the available Translate Table files. To select a file, click on its name in the list. Translate Table files must have an extension of .xlt and be located in the Procomm Plus home directory to be recognized and loaded.

If you don’t want to use any Translate Table file, click on the list box and select [None]. If you want to create a new Translate Table file, click on the list box and select [Create] to specify a name for the new file.

To edit the currently selected .xlt file, click on the list box’s associated Edit... button.

For a complete discussion of the Translate Table Editor, see The Translate Table Editor. For step-by-step example, see Step-by-Step: Stripping a Character Value.

Capture

Click on this drop-down list box to view a list of the available Capture files. To select a file, click on its name in the list. Capture files must have an extension of .cap and be located in the Capture file directory to be recognized and loaded.

If you don’t want to use any Capture file, click on the list box and select [None]. If you want to create a new Capture file, click on the list box and select [Create] to specify a name for the new file.

To specify how Capture files will be handled by a Connection Directory entry, and how the Capture files will be written, click on the list box’s associated Setup... button to open the Capture File Options dialog. See Capture File Options Dialog for more information.


Sierra

A fax modem standard that, unlike Class1 and Class2 fax modems, can only send faxes. Some modems may have the Sierra name in their modem identification response to the ATi modem command, but only a few modems actually use the Sierra sendfax protocol.


Signatures and Taglines

As a matter of personal preference, some QWK mail users like to end each message they write with a standard signature line. The viewer allows you to append a signature, either automatically or by clicking on the Insert Signature Action Bar button. You can specify the format of this signature string within Setup. See Replies Options.

Taglines are a trademark of QWK mail. A tagline is a single line of text that’s automatically added to the end of your message by the viewer. Unlike your signature, however, a tagline is usually humorous, often making light of computers, bulletin boards and cyberspace in general. Many callers use taglines to advertise a business or service as well.

If you use QWK mail often, you’re likely to have a large number of favorite taglines. If you wish, you can specify a file containing your taglines in Setup. You can select a different tagline for each message you write, or the viewer will randomly select a tagline from the list. For details on the tagline file, see File Options.

The QWK Mail Viewer also allows you to copy taglines you like from existing messages in your packet; these messages are automatically added to your tagline file. To copy a tagline into your file, select Messages | Get Tagline. Since taglines vary in size, position, and starting character, the viewer takes a best guess at which string is the tagline and inserts that string into the field. You can also type a new tagline directly into the field. Finally, click on Search to continue searching through the message text for the tagline.

When the string in the tagline field is correct, then click the OK button to append it to your tagline file and close the dialog.


Simple Text Objects

To specify the contents and characteristics of a static Text object, double click on it. The editor opens the Text Object Options dialog:

Text

The Text edit box at the top of the dialog contains the Text object’s current contents. You can edit it by clicking within the edit box and using the standard Windows editing methods. You can also cut text to the Windows Clipboard by highlighting it and pressing [image] [image]. To paste text from the Windows Clipboard, press [image] [image].

A Text object can hold up to 1023 characters.

Horizontal Justify

You can specify Left, Center or Right-aligned text by selecting the appropriate radio button in the Horizontal Justify group.

Vertical Justify

You can specify Top, Center or Bottom-aligned text by selecting the appropriate radio button from the Vertical Justify group.

Border

You can specify Square or Round-cornered borders for the text by selecting the appropriate radio button from the Border group, or click on None to specify text without any border.

Border Width

By default, the editor draws all text borders in a width of four pixels. To specify a different width, enter the value in the Border Width edit box.

Word Wrap

If you want the text in the Text object to "wrap" to the next line, enable the Word Wrap check box. Note that the Text object will not automatically expand to accommodate the extra lines; you’ll have to size it manually.

Set Font

Click on the Set Font button to configure the font, attribute and point size used to display the Text object’s contents. For more information, see Using the Font Dialog.

Click on OK to accept the Text object’s settings and contents and close the dialog, or click Cancel to close the dialog without saving any changes.

If you’ve made changes to the Text object, the editor updates it accordingly. The editor does not automatically change the object’s size or position based on the settings you select; you may find that you need to resize or move it to display its contents properly.

It is important to distinguish between a Text object and the text the object contains! The settings in the Text Object Options dialog determine how the object will display the text it contains, not the alignment or behavior of the object itself.


Sizing an Object

New cover sheet objects are initially drawn in a default size. To resize an object, move the mouse pointer over one of the "drag handles" on its corners or sides. The mouse pointer changes to indicate the directions you can drag each particular handle.

If the object you want to resize doesn’t have drag handles, click on it once with the mouse to "select" it. Once selected, the object can be moved or resized.

When you’ve located the handle you want to use, drag it in the desired direction. As you drag the handle, the editor leaves the object in its current state, but draws an outline to show you the object’s new size. When you’re satisfied with the object’s size, release the mouse button, and the editor will update your screen.

For more precise sizing, you can also use the cursor keys. Select the object you want to resize, and hold the [image] key down while pressing the cursor keys. The up and down keys move the bottom of the object, while the left and right keys move the object’s right side one pixel value at a time.

The editor’s status line will always report the size of a selected object in the third field; the dx and dy values represent the object’s width and height, respectively. These are pixel values and they will update as the object is being expanded or contracted.


Software flow control

Data flow control, using software commands instead of electrical signals. XON and XOFF characters (ASCII 17 and 19) are used to suspend and resume data transmissions. If software flow control is disabled on the local computer, and enabled on the remote computer, flow control characters from the remote side can appear in the Terminal display as a triangle and a double exclamation point. Hardware flow control is much more common than software flow control.

See also Hardware Flow Control.


Sorting Your QWK Messages

By default, the QWK Mail Viewer sorts your messages by their message number, but this may not always be the most convenient arrangement. For example, you might wish to follow a complete "conversation" or thread.

To change the sort order throughout the current packet, select Messages | Sort. You can choose to sort messages by message number, by the message recipient or sender, or by the message subject.


Sorting the Connection Directory

As you add entries and groups to your Connection Directory, you may find it useful to sort them. To sort the directory, select the Edit | Sort menu item, then select the field you wish to use as the sorting key from the menu cascade:

•	Name

•	Area Code

•	Company

•	Baud

•	Last Called

•	Total

The directory contents are sorted in ascending order.


Sound Card

Today’s multimedia computers are equipped with audio cards that provide digital sound effects and MIDI music. These cards are typically called "sound cards."


Speaker Settings

Procomm Plus provides a volume control that determines the volume of your modem's speaker while dialing. From within Setup, you can display this control by selecting System, Modem Connection, Modem/Connection Properties, General:

Speaker volume

You can select a volume level ranging from Off to High by moving the slider control. Medium is selected by default.


Special PW4.INI Settings
PW4.INI Settings

Please see the Procomm Plus readme.wri file for information about the pw4.ini settings. By default, it is located in the Procomm Plus home directory.


Stack

The network software layers that: get data from a specific application, break the data into packets, attach destination and error correction information, send the packets out the network card or modem, receive packets, strip off the address and error correction information, and deliver the data to the correct application.


Starting the FTP Client

You can start the Procomm Plus FTP Client in several different ways:

By clicking on the FTP Client icon in the Procomm Plus group on the Start menu.

By selecting the Window | Change Window | FTP menu item from within any Procomm Plus communication window.

By selecting the Window | New Window | FTP menu item from within any Procomm Plus communication window.

By double clicking an FTP group or entry in the Connection Directory, select the FTP tab. The FTP Client Window loads, then attempts to make a connection to an FTP host. You can also initiate the connection by clicking on the Connect button once you've highlighted a group or entry.

By selecting an FTP entry from the Action Bar's Rapid Connect list box. If Rapid Connect is not displaying FTP entries, click the list box's down-arrow and select [FTP Connections] to display them.


Status Line

The bar at the bottom of a Procomm Plus window that displays result codes, error messages, on/off-line status, and other information.


Step-by-Step : Adding a Mail-class Entry

To add a Mail entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to display the dialog. The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you selected in the main directory window. If the Mail class is not already selected, click on the Mail tab.

2.	Specify the name for the entry.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory and the Rapid Connect list box, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Specify the Mail address for the entry.

Click in the Mail address edit field, and specify the address. For more information on Internet addresses, see Internet Mail Address.

4.	Specify other options as desired.

Once you've specified the entry's Name and Mail address, you've given Procomm Plus the minimum information. it needs to properly address any messages you want to send to this entry. However, two other settings are available in the Add Directory Entry dialog:

Company

Click in the Company edit field to enter the company name for this entry. The Company name is not required to send mail.

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you want to create a new group for the entry, just click in the filed and enter a name for it.

5.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection tab and enter the required information.

6.	Save the entry.

Once you're satisfied with the settings you've selected for the new entry, click on OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you've created a Mail-class entry, you can edit its settings in the main Connection Directory window. These settings are discussed in Mail-class: Entry Info.


Step-by-Step: Adding a Caller ID Record

To add a Caller ID record from within the directory, follow these steps:

1.	Create a new, blank entry.

Click on the Add New Caller... button, select the Add Caller Action Bar button or select the Edit | Add New Caller menu item. Procomm Plus displays the Add New Caller dialog.

2.	Enter the entry name.

Click in the Name field and enter the name you want to use for the entry. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field; it is used to display and reference the entry within the directory itself.

You can also specify two other fields: Company and Comment.  Both fields accept up to 40 characters each.

3.	Enter the Caller ID values for the entry.

Click in the Caller ID field, and enter the value for this entry. You may enter up to 40 characters, and the field is not case-sensitive.

If the caller also has a Fax Station ID, click in that field and enter the appropriate value. This field is not case-sensitive, but it’s limited to 20 characters.

4.	Specify the response for the record.

Next, specify how Procomm Plus should handle the call. Click on the Answer Action list box, and select the response you want.

To specify an ASPECT script to be launched in the Terminal window in response to this Caller ID, enter the filename in the Script field, or click on the Browse... button to select it in a standard dialog.

Once you’ve specified an entry’s Name, ID fields and Procomm Plus’s response when receiving a call associated with the entry, it’s ready to use! Click on OK to save the record to your directory.


Step-by-Step: Adding a Customized Button

Adding a customized button to your Action Bar is much like adding one of the predefined Command buttons. To demonstrate, we’ll add a button that transmits a password when it’s clicked. Select File | New from the editor’s menu, to create an untitled Action Bar file, then select Edit | Edit Action Bar... to open the editing dialog.

We’ll add the button in five easy steps:

1.	Copy the "User-Defined Icon" into the Current Action Bar list.

The "User-Defined Icon" is the blank button at the top of the Procomm Plus Command list. Highlight it, then click on the arrow button pointing right. The button is copied into the Current Action Bar list, and the Custom Icon dialog appears.

2.	Specify the Icon Function for the button.

An Action Bar button can perform any one of six functions, as described in Icon Functions. For our example, we don’t need to select a function; the Custom Icon dialog’s default setting for a new customized button is Send Text.

3.	Specify the information required for the function.

The Custom Icon dialog displays different fields depending on the Icon Function you select for your button. A Send Text button has three settings:

Status line message

The text you enter in this edit field will be displayed on the Terminal window status line, and in the ToolTips help when the mouse pointer is left idle over the Action Bar button.

Send Text

The text you enter in this edit field is transmitted to the remote system or host.

Current Icon

This button displays the icon graphic currently selected for the button, if any.

For our example, click in the Status line message field and enter "Send Full Name". Then click in the "Send Text" field and enter your name.  Remember to add a "^M" after the name in the Send Text field. The ^M character pair is translated into a carriage return, ASCII 13, when it’s transmitted by Procomm Plus. Since host systems usually require a carriage return after a name entry, placing the ^M here will save a keystroke.

Now that we’ve selected our button’s function, and specified the information it needs to perform that function, we’re ready to select a graphic for it!

4.	Select a graphic for the button.

Click on Change Icon... to browse for an icon. The currently selected icon file is displayed in the File Name field, while the icons available in that file are shown in the Current Icon list box. Scroll through the list box to locate the icon you want and click on it to highlight it.

If you don’t find an icon that you want to use, you can search for other icon files by clicking on the Browse... button.

If you’re having a problem locating an icon graphic, select progman.exe in your Windows home directory. It contains a library of generic icons you can use.

When you’re satisfied with your button’s graphic, click on OK to return to the editing dialog. The button is complete! The completed button now appears in the Current Action Bar list box:

5.	Position the button, if desired.

The Action Bar Editor places your new button under the insertion point in the Current Action Bar list box. To change the button's position, use the Move Up and Move Down buttons on the right side of the dialog.


Step-by-Step: Adding a Data-class Entry

To add a Data entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to open the dialog.

The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you selected in the main directory window. If the Data class is not already selected, click on the Data entry class tab.

2.	Specify an entry name.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry. This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory’s entry list and the Rapid Connect list box on the default Action Bar, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Specify the entry’s telephone number.

If this entry is for an international number, or if you’ll be travelling to another country, select the appropriate country in the Country field.

The North America country code for United States and Canada is "1".

Click in the Area edit field, and enter the area code for the entry. Press [image] to move the focus to the Data Number field, and enter the telephone number for the entry.

For long distance numbers, enable the Always dial as long distance check box.  If this entry should not be dialed with any prefixes or special codes, enable the Only dial Data Number check box; this feature is especially useful for internal calls through a company's PBX system.

Most modems ignore dashes and spaces within a telephone number. You can use them to make the telephone number more readable if you like.

4.	Specify the Data Connection to be used for the entry.

By default, Procomm Plus will use the connection that was active when you opened the Connection Directory. This setting is indicated by [Current Connection].

In general, it’s a good idea to select a specific Data Connection rather than leave it at its default of [Current Connection]. This will insure that Procomm Plus always uses the proper connection type when connecting to the new entry. To select a different connection, click on the Data Connection drop down list box, then click on one of the available connections.

5.	Specify the emulation to be used for the entry.

Click on the Terminal drop down list box, and select one of the available emulations. If you’re calling a bulletin board, select ANSI BBS; it’s the most popular emulation for PC-based bulletin boards. If you calling a mainframe, you may need to contact someone at the mainframe location and determine what emulation is best to use.

6.	Specify other settings as desired.

Once you’ve specified the entry’s Name, Number, Data Connection and Terminal fields, you’ve given Procomm Plus the minimum information it needs to connect to your site or system. However, other settings are available in the Add Directory Entry dialog:

Company

Click in the Company edit field and enter the company name for this entry. The Company name is not required to connect.

Protocol

Click on the Protocol drop down list box, and select one of the available protocols. You should pick the protocol that you’re most likely to use when connected with the location you’re calling.

If you’re not sure what protocol to choose, leave this field for now; you can change it later if you wish. The Protocol setting is provided as a convenience, but you can easily select any of the protocols supported by Procomm Plus while you’re connected!

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you don’t have a group available, click on Create Group and create a new one.

9.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. This can be very convenient if you have more than one method of connecting to a particular site or system! To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection button and enter the required information.

10.	Save the entry.

Once you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected for the new entry, click OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you’ve created a Data-class entry, you can edit a variety of class-specific options in the main Connection Directory window. These are discussed in Data-class Settings.


Step-by-Step: Adding a Fax-class Entry

To add a Fax entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to display the dialog.

The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you’d selected in the main directory window. If the Fax class is not already selected, click on the Fax entry class tab.

2.	Specify an entry name.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry. This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory’s entry list and the Rapid Connect list box, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Specify the entry’s telephone number.

If this entry is for an international number, or if you’ll be travelling to another country, click in the Country edit field and enter the appropriate country code for the entry. Otherwise, you can leave the field blank.

Press [image], or click in the Area edit field, and enter the area code for the entry. Press [image] to move the focus to the Fax Number field, and enter the telephone number for the entry.

Most modems ignore parentheses, dashes and spaces within a telephone number. You can use them to make the telephone number more readable if you like.

4.	Specify the entry’s call type.

Click on Call Type, then click on the dialing type to be used for this entry from the drop-down list. You can choose from Internal, Local, Long Distance and International.

5.	Specify the Connection to be used for the entry.

By default, Procomm Plus will use the connection that was active when you opened the Connection Directory. This setting is indicated by [Current]. To select a different connection, click on the Connection drop down list box, then click on one of the available connections.

6.	Specify other settings, if desired.

Once you’ve specified the entry’s name, number, call type and connection, you’ve provided the information Procomm Plus needs to connect to a fax location. However, the Add Directory Entry dialog also allows you to specify other settings for the new entry:

Company

Click in the Company edit field and enter the company name for this entry. The Company name is not required to connect, but it can be used in fax headers or cover sheet fields.

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you don’t have a group available, finish creating the entry and add it to a group later.

7.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection tab and enter the required information.

8.	Save the entry.

Once you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected for the new entry, click on OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you’ve created a Fax-class entry, you can edit a variety of class-specific options in the main Connection Directory window. These are discussed in Fax-class Settings.


Step-by-Step: Adding a New Group

To add a new group to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Group Editor.

Click on the New Group button, or select the Edit | New Group... menu item. The Group Editor dialog appears.

2.	Specify a name for the group.

Click in the Group Name edit field, and enter a name of up to 40 characters. The group name must be unique.

3.	Select the group members.

The Available Entries list displays the directory entries that you can include in the new group. The entry or entries currently selected for the new group are shown in the Group Members list.

Any entries that you had selected in the Connection Directory at the time you opened the Group Editor will automatically appear in the Group Members list.

Select an entry by clicking on it, or by highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys. You can select multiple entries by holding down the [image] key as you click on them. Click on the right arrow button to move the selected entries into the Group Members list.

To remove an entry from the Group Members list, select it and click on the left arrow button. The entry is returned to the Available Entries list.

4.	Save your changes.

When you’re satisfied with the group’s name and members, click on OK to accept them and return to the main directory window. When you return to the directory window, the entries you placed in the Group Members list are moved into the newly-created group.

To close the editor without creating a new group, click on Cancel.


Step-by-Step: Adding a News-class Entry

To add a News entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to display the dialog. The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you selected in the main directory window. If the News class is not already selected, click on the News tab.

2.	Specify the name for the entry.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry. This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory and the Rapid Connect list box, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Specify the News Group for the entry.

Click in the News Group edit field, and specify the name of the Internet news group you want to access. For more information, see Newsgroup Naming Conventions.

4.	Specify other options as desired.

Once you've specified the entry's Name and News Group fields, you've given Procomm Plus the minimum information it needs to properly access the news group. However, other settings are available in the Add Directory Entry dialog:

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a Connection Directory group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you want to create a new group for the entry, just click in the field and enter a name for it.

5.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection tab and enter the required information.

6.	Save the entry.

Once you're satisfied with the settings you've selected for the new entry, click on OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you've created a News-class entry, you can edit its settings in the main Connection Directory window. These settings are discussed in News-class Settings.


Step-by-Step: Adding a Telnet-class Entry

To add a Telnet entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to display the dialog.

The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you’d selected in the main directory window. If the Telnet class is not already selected, click on the Telnet entry class tab.

2.	Specify an entry name.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry. This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory entry list, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Specify the Host name.

Click in the Host/IP Address edit field, and specify the Internet name or IP address of the telnet site or host system. For more information on Telnet host names, see A Word on Internet Addresses.

4.	Specify the emulation to be used for the entry.

Click on the Terminal drop down list box, and select one of the available emulations.

5.	Specify other settings as desired.

Once you’ve specified the entry’s Name, Host, and Terminal fields, you’ve given Procomm Plus the minimum information it needs to connect to your site or system. However, other settings are available in the Add Directory Entry dialog:

Company

Click in the Company edit field to enter the company name for this entry. The Company name is not required to connect.

Telnet Options

If you’ve created a custom named option set in the Internet, Telnet Options group, click on this list box to select it.

Protocol

Click on the Protocol drop down list box, and select one of the available protocols. You should pick the protocol that you’re most likely to use when connected with the location you’re calling.

If you’re not sure which protocol to choose, leave this field for now; you can change it later if you wish. The Protocol setting is provided as a convenience, and you can easily select any of the protocols supported by Procomm Plus from the Terminal window's Quick Select Line.

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you don’t have a group available, finish creating the entry and add it to a group later.

6.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. This can be very convenient if you have more than one method of connecting to a particular site or system! To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection button and enter the required information.

7.	Save the entry.

Once you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected for the new entry, click on OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you’ve created a Telnet-class entry, you can edit a variety of class-specific options in the main Connection Directory window. These are discussed in Telnet-class Settings.


Step-by-Step: Adding a Voice-class Entry

To add a Voice entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to display the dialog.

The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you’d selected in the main directory window. If the Voice class is not already selected, click on the Voice entry class tab.

2.	Specify an entry name.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry. This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory’s entry list, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Specify the entry’s telephone number.

If this entry is for an international number, or if you’ll be travelling to another country, click in the Country edit field and enter the appropriate country code for the entry. Otherwise, you can leave the field blank.

Press [image], or click in the Area edit field, and enter the area code for the entry. Press [image] to move the focus to the Primary Voice Number field, and enter the telephone number for the entry.

Most modems ignore parentheses, dashes and spaces within a telephone number. You can use them to make the telephone number more readable if you like.

4.	Specify the entry’s call type.

Click on Call Type, then click on the dialing type to be used for this entry from the drop-down list. You can choose from Internal, Local, Long Distance and International.

5.	Specify the Connection to be used for the entry.

By default, Procomm Plus will use the connection that was active when you opened the Connection Directory. This setting is indicated by Current Connection. To select a different connection, click on the Connection drop down list box, then click on one of the available connections.

6.	Specify other options, if desired.

Once you’ve specified an entry name, number, call type and connection, you’ve given Procomm Plus all the information it needs to make your connection. However, the Add Directory Entry dialog makes it easy to configure other settings:

Company

Click in the Company edit field and enter the company name for this entry. The Company name is not required to connect.

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you don’t have a group available, finish creating the entry and add it to a group later.

7.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. This can be very convenient if you have more than one method of connecting to a particular site or system! To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection button and enter the required information.

8.	Save the entry.

Once you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected for the new entry, click on OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you’ve created a Voice-class entry, you can edit a variety of class-specific options in the main Connection Directory window. These are discussed in Voice-class Settings.


Step-by-Step: Adding a Web-class Entry

To add a Web entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to display the dialog:

The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you selected in the main directory window. If the Web class is not already selected, click on the Web entry class button.

2.	Specify the name for the entry.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry. This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory’s entry list and Action Bar's Rapid Connect list box, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Specify the Address for the site or location you’re connecting to.

Click in the Address edit field, and specify the Internet name or IP address of the site or host system. For more information on URL addresses, see Internet Addresses.

4.	Specify other options as desired.

Once you’ve specified the entry’s Name and Address, you’ve given Procomm Plus the minimum information it needs to connect to the Web site. However, other settings are available in the Add Directory Entry dialog:

Company

Click in the Company edit field to enter the company name for this entry. The Company name is not required to connect.

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you don’t have a group available, click on Create Group...

5.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection button and enter the required information.

6.	Save the entry.

Once you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected for the new entry, click on OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you’ve created a Web-class entry, you can edit a variety of class-specific options in the main Connection Directory window. These are discussed in Web-class Settings.


Step-by-Step: Adding an Action Bar Button

It’s easy to add an Action Bar button! To demonstrate, we’ll add a button to the default Action Bar. Select File | New from the editor’s menu, to create an untitled Action Bar file, then select Edit | Edit Action Bar... to open the editing dialog.

Adding a button to an Action Bar is a three-step process:

1.	Select the button you want to add.

Make sure that the correct mode is selected in the List Icons for list box, then use the scroll bars at the right of the Procomm Plus Command list box to locate the desired button. Click on it to highlight it.

2.	Copy the button into the Current Action Bar list.

Click on the arrow button pointing right. The new button is copied into the Current Action Bar list, and remains highlighted in that list.

You can also drag and drop buttons to copy them into the Current Action Bar list. See Dragging Buttons.

3.	Position the button within the Current Action Bar list.

Click on the Move Up or Move Down button to change its location in the Current Action Bar list.

You can also drag and drop buttons to position them in the Current Action Bar list. See Dragging Buttons.

When you’re satisfied with the button’s position and settings, click on OK to accept it and close the editing dialog and return to the editor’s main window. If you want to close the dialog without retaining any changes you’ve made, click on Cancel.


Step-by-Step: Adding an FTP-class Entry

To add an FTP entry to your Connection Directory, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Add Directory Entry dialog.

Click on the New Entry button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item to display the dialog.

The entry class selected when you open the Add Directory Entry dialog is determined by the class you’d selected in the main directory window. If the FTP class is not already selected, click on the FTP entry class tab.

2.	Specify the name for the entry.

Click in the Name edit field and enter the name to be used for this entry. This information will be displayed in the Connection Directory’s entry list, as well as in other dialogs that reference the entry.

3.	Enter the address for the remote FTP host.

Click in the Host/IP Address field, or use the [image] key to move to it and enter the Internet name or IP address of the host site or location. For more information on FTP host names, see A Word on Internet Addresses.

4.	Specify the logon ID and password for the host system.

Type your Logon ID and Password in their respective fields. The FTP Client "masks" your password as asterisks for security.

Many FTP sites allow "anonymous" logons. Typically, these sites accept a visitor's Internet address as a password. If you want to use an anonymous logon for this connection entry, enable the Anonymous logon check box. The FTP Client will use the Anonymous Password you’ve specified in the Internet, FTP Options, General panel in Setup, and your Internet address to complete the FTP logon automatically.

5.	Specify other options as desired.

Once you’ve specified the entry’s Name, Host/IP Address, and Logon options, you’ve given Procomm Plus the minimum information it needs to connect to the FTP site. However, other settings are available in the Add Directory Entry dialog:

Company

Click in the Company edit field to enter the company name for this entry. The Company name is not required to connect, but it can be used as a search key.

Default Host Directory

If you want the FTP Client to select a specific directory on the host once you’ve logged on, specify the directory path and name in this field.

FTP Options

If you’ve created a custom Internet, FTP Options set in Setup, you can click on this control to select it from the list. The default selection is normal ftp.

Group

If you want the new entry to be a member of a group, click on this drop down list box to select one of the available groups. If you don’t have a group available, finish creating the entry and add it to a group later.

Passive Mode

If you’re connection to the Internet passes through a security "firewall," you’ll need to enable FTP’s passive mode. Otherwise, you should leave it disabled. By default, this field is set to [Current].

6.	Add other entry classes, if desired.

A single Connection Directory entry can contain multiple classes. This can be very convenient if you have more than one method of connecting to a particular site or system! To add an entry class, just click on the appropriate class-selection button and enter the required information.

7.	Save the entry.

Once you’re satisfied with the settings you’ve selected for the new entry, click on OK to return to the main Connection Directory window and create the entry. To close the Add Directory Entry dialog without creating a new entry, click on Cancel.

After you’ve created an FTP-class entry, you can edit a variety of class-specific options in the main Connection Directory window. These are discussed in FTP-class Settings.


Step-by-Step: Answering a Data Call

Answering an incoming data call is much like placing a call. It involves the following steps:

1.	Preparing for the call.

You’ll need to make sure that the Terminal window is using the same Data Bits, Stop Bits and Parity settings as the incoming caller’s system. In most cases, you should use 8, 1 and None, respectively, for best results.

2.	Setting an Answer mode.

Select Procomm Plus Answers Calls from the Setup | Answer Options menu cascade, and then enable the Data item from the same menu cascade. For more information, see Auto Answer Modes.

If you want the Host script to handle an incoming call, you should launch it before the call. See Running Host for more information.

3.	Completing the connection.

After your modem has negotiated a connection with the caller, you’ll probably see a "CONNECT" message in the Terminal display indicating the connection speed and other information. You’ll then see any characters sent by the other user, and be able to send characters in response.

If you're using the Host script to respond to incoming data calls, you'll see Host initiate its logon sequence after a connection is established. For more information, see Host in Action.


Step-by-Step: Building a Fax Polling Host List

To have your computer act as a polling host, you simply specify the files you want made available in the Fax Polling List, as explained in these steps:

1.	Select Files for polling...

Files for polling... is available within the Fax Status window. Once you've selected it, the Files for Polling by a Fax Caller dialog is displayed.

2.	Click on the Browse button to select files for the polling list.

A file selection dialog is displayed.  Select the files you want to make available for polling by highlighting them. As with most other selection dialogs in Windows, you can use the [image] key with the mouse, or the [image] key with the cursor keys to select multiple documents.

If you want your selections sent in their original format as Binary File Transfers (BFTs), enable the Binary Send check box.

The Binary Send check box affects all currently-highlighted files in the file list. If you want to send some files as fax images and some as BFTs, Browse for the BFT files separately. For more information, see Binary File Transfers.

When you’re satisfied with your selections, click on OK to accept them and return to the Files for Polling by a Fax Caller dialog, where the files you selected are added to the file list.

Files in the polling list are shown with an icon indicating the type of transmission used to send them.

If you want to remove a filename from the polling list, highlight it and click on the Remove button.

3.	Configure the polling options.

After you’ve selected the files you want made available for polling, you need to specify how Procomm Plus will handle fax callers. For normal operation, select On in the Send Faxes When Polled options group. Fax callers will receive your files automatically if their system specifically requests to poll files.

Select Auto if you want Procomm Plus to transmit your files to fax callers that specifically request polling, but also want any faxes you receive to be added to the polling list.

Select Off if you want to disable Fax Polling without purging the file list. This setting is convenient if you want to prevent fax callers from polling for files while you send or receive other faxes or data.

If you want Procomm Plus to delete .fax and .bft files after they’ve been polled, enable the Remove from polling list once polled check box. This can help you conserve disk space, and does not affect the original documents or files used to create the polled files.

Do not enable this option if more than one caller is expected to poll for files! The polling list files are removed as soon as a single fax caller successfully retrieves them!

When you're satisfied with the files and options you’ve selected click on OK to accept them.

4.	Enable Fax auto-answer mode.

From the Setup menu, select Answer Options and click on the Procomm Plus Answers Calls menu item.  Then, select the Fax menu item from the Answer Options menu. Nothing else is required!


Step-by-Step: Composing Your Own Article

When you respond to an existing article in a newsgroup, your reply becomes a part of the existing article’s thread or topic, much like a link added to a chain. If you want to ask a question that’s unrelated to an existing newsgroup thread or start an entirely new topic, you’ll need to post an article of your own. To do so, just follow these steps:

1.	Open the New Article window.

Click on the Action Bar’s Compose Article button select the News | Compose Article menu item to open the window.

The News Reader’s New Article window’s menus and Action Bar are identical to those used in the Reply to Article window. See The Reply to Article Menus and Action Bar for a detailed explanation of their functions.

2.	Specify the newsgroup to receive your article.

When you reply to an existing article, the current newsgroup is assumed to be the destination for your reply article. If you’re beginning a new topic, the News Reader cannot assume a destination; you’ll need to specify the newsgroup where the message should be posted.

If you know the name of the newsgroup you want to use, you can click in the To field and enter it directly. However, it’s much easier if you’ve created a News entry for the newsgroup: you can click on the To button and select it from the Connection Directory.

Highlight the entry you want, either by clicking on it or moving the highlight bar with the [image] and cursor keys, then click on OK to select the entry and return to the New Article window. The entry’s News Group name is copied into the To field.

3.	Specify a Subject line for the new article.

Click in the Subject edit field and enter a descriptive comment for your message. Although there are no enforced rules regarding an article’s subject line, it’s usually a good idea to make the subject text as informative as possible. Keep in mind that the newsgroup you’re using may have hundreds or even thousands of articles: by making it clear what you’re looking for or commenting on, you’re making it easier for others to find and respond to your article.

If you'll be attaching a file to your article, you don't need to specify a Subject line. The News Reader will automatically generate the Subject line from the file you attach. If you do specify a Subject line for an article that includes an attached file, the News Reader will append the attached file's name to the Subject line.

4.	Add the new article’s contents.

Click in the edit box at the bottom of the New Article window to enter the text for your article. You can take advantage of the standard Windows editing keys. You can also copy, cut and paste text to and from the Windows Clipboard.

If you want to import a text file into the message body of your article, click on the Import Text button or select the File | Import Text... menu item to select the file in a standard file selection dialog.

If you want to attach a file to your article, click on the Attach/Encode File... Action Bar button or select the News | Attach/Encode File... menu item. The News Reader presents a standard file selection dialog where you can browse for the file you want. When you select a file and click OK, the name of the file you selected appears in the edit box below the Subject line as a reminder.

5.	Post the new article!

When you’re satisfied with your article, click on the Post/Send Article button or select the News | Post/Send Article menu item. If you’ve specified a Signature file in the Internet, News, User Info panel in Setup, the News Reader automatically appends it to your article before transmitting your article to your news server.


Step-by-Step: Connecting Manually to an FTP Host

If you want to connect to a host system without creating a directory entry, you can do so from the FTP Client or the Connection Directory:

To manually connect from the FTP Client window, select the Ftp | Manual Connect menu item.

To manually connect from the Connection Directory, select the File | Connection Directory... menu item, or press [image] [image]. Click the FTP tab, then select the Connect | Manual Connect... menu item.

Procomm Plus displays the Manual Connection dialog. Click in the Host/IP field, and enter the FTP host's address. The initial settings for the other fields in the Manual Connection dialog are derived from the current values in the Internet, FTP options in Setup. If they're appropriate for the site you're connecting to, click on OK to accept them and initiate the connection attempt. Otherwise, make any required changes, then click OK.

The fields and settings in the Manual Connection dialog are similar to those available in an FTP Connection Directory entry. For more information on their usage, see The FTP Entry Class.


Step-by-Step: Connecting to a Telnet Host

In this demonstration, we’ll connect to the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS via Telnet.

1.	Open the Connection Directory.

2.	Click on the Telnet tab.

3.	Click on the Quarterdeck directory entry to select it.

4.	Click on the Connect button.

Procomm Plus displays the Telnet window and makes the connection. At this point, you can begin the logon process as if you had dialed the BBS with a modem:

5.	Type your full name at the Name prompt and press [image].

If this is your first call to the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS, you’ll be prompted to enter a new password. If you’ve called before, the system prompts you for your password.

6.	Type your password at the prompt and press [image].

If you’re a new user on the system, you’ll be prompted to enter your password again to verify that it is correct; you’ll then be asked to provide information about yourself, including your Procomm Plus serial number. If you’ve called the bulletin board before and you’ve already finished the new user procedure, the system will not request this information again.

7.	Press [image] to display the system bulletins.

The system will display one or more textfiles with important information; press [image] when you’ve finished reading each bulletin.

Once the last system bulletin has been displayed, you’ll arrive at the main bulletin board menu.  From here, you can leave messages or download files.  For more information on downloading files from the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS, see Downloading a File with Zmodem.


Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with Rapid Connect

You can make an FTP connection from any mode using the Action Bar's Rapid Connect feature:

1.	Open the Rapid Connect list box.

Click on the Rapid Connect list box's down arrow button, or press [image] [image]. The list of available connection types appear at the top of the list, followed by the actual entries.

2.	Display FTP entries.

If you opened Rapid Connect from within the FTP Client, the FTP entries are displayed automatically. Otherwise, select [FTP Connection] from the list by clicking on it or by highlighting it with the cursor keys and pressing the spacebar.

3.	Select the entry you want.

Click on the entry you want, or move the highlight bar with the cursor keys and press the spacebar.

If you selected the entry from within the FTP Client window, the FTP Client will begin its connection attempt at once. Otherwise, Procomm Plus will change the window's communication mode to FTP Client and then make the connection attempt.

If the FTP entry you want to use is already displayed in the Rapid Connect field, you can initiate a connection attempt by selecting the FTP | Connect menu item.


Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with the Connection Directory

You can open the Connection Directory from within any of the Procomm Plus modes, and connect to an FTP host. Just follow these steps:

1.	Open the Connection Directory.

Click on the Connection Directory Action Bar button, or select the File | Connection Directory... menu item. You can also use the keyboard shortcut, [image] [image].

2.	Display the FTP entries.

If you opened the Connection Directory from within the FTP Client, the FTP entries will be displayed automatically. Otherwise, click on the FTP tab to display them.

3.	Select the entry you want to use.

Click on the entry you want, or highlight it using the [image] and cursor keys. You can select multiple entries or entire groups, but only the first entry you select or the first entry within a group will be used in the connection attempt.

4.	Initiate the connection attempt.

Click on Connect, or select the Connect | Connect menu item, or simply double click on the entry you want.

See Connecting with an FTP Entry for more information about connecting with the Connection Directory.


Step-by-Step: Creating a QWK Mail Reply

To reply to a message you’ve received, follow these steps:

1.	Open the viewer’s Reply window.

Click on the Reply to the Current Message Action Bar button or select Messages | Reply to Message to open the window. Note that the viewer automatically enters certain information, such as the addressee and the message subject. Additionally, the text of the original message is automatically included at the top of your message. Each line is prefaced with the quote characters you specified in the Replies section of the viewer Setup dialog. For more information, see Replies Options.

2.	Enter your message text.

You can use all of the familiar Windows editing functions to cut, paste and type text into the mesage entry dialog. If you want to search for a particular string within your text and, optionally, replace it with another string, select Edit | Find and Replace...

3.	Save your reply.

Click on the Save Message Action Bar button to add your message to the .rep packet. The viewer automatically closes the Reply window.


Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set

In Option Sets,  we described how you might use customized Data, Data Options option sets to change your default download path. In this example, we’ll create an option set, then link it to a Connection Directory entry. Simply follow these steps:

1.	Open Setup to the Data, Data Options, Paths panel.

If Setup is already open, you can open the panel by clicking on the Data, Data Options, Paths buttons. Otherwise, you can select the Setup | Data | Data Options | Paths menu item to display the panel.

You can either save the new option set before or after you’ve made the changes you want. Generally, it’s a good idea to create the new set before you make changes, to make certain that your existing option set is preserved.

2.	Click on the Modify... button to open the Modify Option Set dialog.

The Modify Option Set dialog allows you to perform several different actions on the current option set. These options are discussed in Modifying an Option Set. For now, we’ll just use the dialog’s top button to create a new option set.

3.	Click on the Save As... button.

Setup prompts with a simple dialog, titled with a reminder of the option set you’re editing. Enter a name for the new option set in the New Name field, then click on OK to save it.

You can use upper and lower case letters, numbers and spaces in the option set name. If you enter the name of an existing option set, Setup will prompt you before overwriting it.

For our example, we’ll name the new option set "Fine Arts".

4.	Make the changes in the new option set.

After you’ve entered the new option set name in the Save As... dialog, it’s automatically selected as the active set in Setup. All you have to do is make the changes you want!

For our example, we’ll modify the Download path in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel. We’ll specify a new directory under the existing download path. Click in the Download path edit field, and add "\finearts" to the end of the current Download path value.

Although we only modified a single field within the Fine Arts option set we created, we could have modified settings within any of the five panels of the Data, Data Options group!

Now that we’ve made the change we wanted, we can close Setup and use our new option set. Keep in mind, however, that whatever option set is selected in the Current Data Options list box will be used as Procomm Plus’s active settings. If you don’t want the Fine Arts option set to be the active set right now, select a different set from the list box before closing Setup.

5.	Click on Setup’s OK button to save your changes and close the dialog.

Since we modified a drive and path field, Setup verifies that the values we specified in the Data, Data Options, Paths group are valid. In our example, we specified a nonexistent directory and Setup offers to create it for us.

Click on Yes to have Setup create the new directory and return to Procomm Plus’s main window.

Once it’s validated our new settings, Setup immediately writes our changes to disk.

Now that we’ve created the Fine Arts Data Options set, we can use it within the Connection Directory.

6.	Select a Connection Directory entry to use your option set.

In Procomm Plus’s main window, click on the Action Bar’s Connection Directory button, or select the File | Connection Directory... menu item to open the directory. If Data-class entries aren’t already displayed, click on the Data tab to display them.

Select the entry or entries you want. For help in selecting entries, see Using the Connection Directory.

7.	Assign the option set to the entry or entries you selected.

The Data Options option set is referenced in the Data-class Basic Options group. Click on the Basic Options button to display the panel.

The Data Options option set currently assigned to your selection(s) is displayed in the Data Options list box. If this field is blank, it means that you’ve selected multiple entries, and that one or more of the entries is using a different option set from the other selection(s).

To assign the new option set to your selection(s), click on the Data Options list box, and select the new option set from the list.

Click on OK to save the changes you’ve made and close the Connection Directory. To close the directory without saving any changes, click on Cancel.


Step-by-Step: Customizing Your Cover Sheet

The easiest way to become familiar with the Cover Sheet Editor is to modify one of the files included with Procomm Plus. Suppose that you’ve just developed a new logo for your consulting business, and you want to use it in all of your faxes. If the logo is in Windows metafile format, it’s a snap!

For a discussion on creating a cover sheet "from scratch," see Designing a Cover Sheet.

1.	Start the editor and open the .cvr file you want to modify.

Launch the editor either by clicking on its icon within the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu, or by selecting the Tools | Cover Sheet Editor menu item in the main window. The editor opens with an untitled window.

To open a cover sheet, select File | Open from the editor menu, or click on the Open file button on the Action Bar. The editor displays the Open File dialog.

Cover sheets have a filename extension of .cvr. By default, they’re installed in the Fax Cover Sheets directory beneath the Procomm Plus home directory. However, this path can also be changed in Setup, and you may have to change drives or directories to find the .cvr files.

Click in the File Name list box, and scroll through the available cover sheets. As you highlight each filename in the dialog, watch the Notes field. It displays text describing the cover sheet’s use or its contents.

If you didn’t install the sample cover sheets, you can rerun the Procomm Plus installation program to do so. Be sure to choose the Custom Installation option, and select only the sample fax cover sheets.

For this example we’ll use the faxconx.cvr file. Highlight it in the Open File dialog, then click on OK. The editor loads and displays the selected file.  Looking at faxconx.cvr in the editor screen, you decide to replace the "Fax Connection" metafile with your logo.

2.	Select the element you want to replace by clicking on it, then delete it.

In figure above, the "Fax Connection" metafile is framed by graphical blocks, called "drag handles." This means that it has been selected. To remove it, press the [image] key, or click on the Action Bar’s Delete button.

Metafiles and bitmaps that you delete within the editor are only removed from the cover sheet. Their disk files remain unaffected.

3.	Import the new element you want to add to the cover sheet.

You want to add your new logo as a metafile, so select Metafile from the Objects menu. The editor displays the Metafile Object Open File dialog.  Select the metafile you want to use, and click on OK. The dialog closes, and the editor changes the mouse pointer to a crossbar to indicate that you’re preparing to place an object.

4.	Place the new object.

Move the mouse pointer to the approximate location for your logo, and click once. The editor places your metafile. The metafile is first drawn in a standard size and shape. Don’t worry if it’s not quite where you want it. We’ll be adjusting it shortly.

5.	Adjust the object’s settings, if desired.

To open an object’s settings dialog, just double click on the object. Double clicking on our metafile opens the Metafile Object Options dialog.  By default, metafile objects are placed as Stretch to Fit, which means they will be placed to fill the entire space you assign them. Since the metafile in our example contains text, we want to make sure the characters don’t get distorted as we resize the graphic.

Click on the Proportional radio button to maintain the graphic’s proper aspect ratio, then click on OK.

6.	Adjust the size and placement of the object.

Since the metafile is already selected, you can move it by placing the mouse pointer inside its drag handles and dragging it to its new position. For finer adjustment, you can move a selected object using the cursor keys.

You can change the object’s size by dragging on any of the drag handles. The handles at the top and bottom of the object control only its height; the left and right handles control its width. The handles at its four corners can be used to change the object’s width and height simultaneously. As the mouse pointer is positioned over a drag handle, it changes to indicate the directions in which the handle can be moved.

Since we specified proportional scaling for the metafile, the image may not fill the entire region you select. Instead, it will be drawn as large as possible without distorting the object’s original proportions.

When you’re satisfied with the size and location of the metafile, you’ve customized your cover sheet!

As a final step before saving your work, you might want to review the other objects in the cover sheet. For example, the original faxconx.cvr file has a "Sender Company" variable text object above its metafile, but the new metafile we used already contains the company name. In this case, you might want to delete the "Sender Company" field to draw more attention to the logo.

7.	Save your work.

Since you may want to use the original cover sheet at some other time, save your new file under a different name by selecting the File | Save As... menu item. The editor displays its Save As dialog.  Enter the file name you want to use in the File Name field. You may also want to put a reminder in the Notes field to help you remember what the cover sheet contains!

If you want to save the file without renaming it, you can either select File | Save from the editor’s menu or click on the Action Bar’s Save File button.


Step-by-Step: Customizing a Meta Key

When you log on to a BBS or host system, you’re usually asked for your name or some other ID. It’s easy to create Meta Keys to transmit these values for you! Just follow these steps:

1.	Open the Meta Key Editor by pressing Alt-M in the Terminal window.

The editor opens with the current .key file loaded. If you want to create a new .key file, click on the New button, and specify a name for the new file.

2.	Select the key to edit.

When the editor first opens, the "1" key is pre-selected for editing. To select a different key, click on the appropriate Meta Key Select button, or press its Alt-key combination. You can always determine which key is selected by looking at the Current Meta field at the bottom left corner of the editor window.

3.	Specify Send Text in the key’s Action field.

For example, we’ll map the [image] [image] key; click in its Action field, and select Send Text from the drop-down list.

4.	Specify the text to send, and a label for the button.

Click once in the [image] -key’s Contents field, and enter your first name, followed by the characters ^M. The ^M indicates a [image] [image], the control code for a carriage return.

Click in the [image] -key’s Label field, and enter a label for the button.

5.	Select the key for your last name.

Click on the appropriate Meta Key Select button, or press its [image] -key combination. Remember, you can always determine which key is selected by looking at the Current Key field at the bottom left corner of the editor window.

For our example, we’ll use the [image] [image] key for the last name. Click in its Action field, and select Send Text from the drop-down list.

Note that we could easily use one of the other combinations, such as [image] [image] [image] to send the last name. However, by using [image] [image] and [image] [image], we insure that the buttons’ labels will be displayed together in the Terminal window.

6.	Specify the text to send, and a label for the button.

Click once in the [image] -key’s Contents field, and enter your last name, followed by the characters ^M.

Click in the [image] -key’s Label field, and enter a label for the button.

7.	Save your changes.

If you want to save the .key file as a new file, click on Save As, and specify the filename. In our example, we’ve saved our .key file as "demo.key", but you can use any valid filename with a .key extension. After you’ve specified a filename, click on OK to accept it, then click on OK within the editor window to return to the Terminal window.

If you want to save your changes in the current file, click on OK; the editor will save your changes and close, returning you to the Terminal window.

If you don’t see your Meta Key buttons, select Meta Keys from the Setup menu to display them. However, you can use a Meta Key from the keyboard at any time by pressing its key sequence, whether it’s displayed in the Terminal window or not.

You can also activate these keys by clicking on the corresponding buttons with your mouse. Meta Keys require only a single mouse click to operate. Do not double click on a Meta Key, as this could result in script errors or multiple executions of a program.


Step-by-Step: Defining Workdays

To define your "workday" for Scheduler’s frequency settings, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Define Workdays dialog.

Select the Options | Define Workdays... menu item.

2.	Enable the check box for each day in the Workdays group that your tasks should execute.

3.	Set the time your workday should begin.

The Begin Time controls work exactly like those in the Time & Date dialog’s clock.

4.	Set the time your workday should end.

The End Time controls work exactly like those in the Time & Date dialog’s clock.

Scheduler will not allow you to set an End Time earlier than a Begin Time. In addition, the Begin/End Time period cannot span midnight, as this would extend across workdays!

Click on OK to accept your changes and return to the Scheduler window.


Step-by-Step: Downloading a File with Zmodem

To illustrate the downloading process, we'll call the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS and download a small file.

Call the BBS, just as we did in Placing Your First Call. After you've connected, enter your name and a password and complete the logon procedure. If this is the first time you've logged on to the BBS, be sure to write down your password.

The --MORE-- prompt at the bottom of some of the BBS screens lets you know that there's more information to view. Just press the spacebar or the [image] key to display the next screen of information.

After you've completed the logon procedure, the bulletin board presents its main menu.

The QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS includes a number of files that you can download. In this example, you'll download a file called "online.doc", which contains a brief overview of BBSs, a general discussion about using BBSs and instructions on how to use the BBS.

Before you can download online.doc, you need to tell the BBS that you want to download the file. From the BBS main menu, follow these steps:

1	Press [image] to select the bulletin board's On-line tutorial.

The BBS displays a listing of the options available to you in its on-line tutorial.

2.	Press [image] to download the ONLINE.DOC file from the system.

If this is the first file transfer you've performed during this call, the BBS displays a screen prompting you for the file transfer protocol to use. Remember, a transfer protocol is much like a set of rules and conventions that guarantee the error-free transfer of data from one computer to another. Whenever you send or receive a file, both your computer and the host system must use the same transfer protocol.

Unless you've altered the default Quarterdeck entry in the pw4.dir Connection Directory file, it will set Zmodem as the Terminal window's current protocol when you use it to dial the BBS. The BBS offers Zmodem as an available protocol, so we’ll select Zmodem from the bulletin board menu.

3.	Press [image] to select Zmodem.

The BBS begins to transmit the file, and Procomm Plus initiates its side of the transfer automatically. As Procomm Plus begins receiving the file, it displays and updates a file transfer status dialog, which gives an estimate of the amount of time remaining in the transfer and the percentage of the file that has been received:

When the file transfer is complete, an alarm sounds for a few seconds to alert you.

4.	After the download has completed, press [image] or the spacebar at the "-Press Any Key-" prompt to return to the tutorial menu.

The tutorial section of the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS is structured to simplify the process of downloading a file to your computer. On most BBS’s and other host systems, you’ll need to add a few steps to the process of locating a file and downloading it to your computer, but the general procedure is the same.

After you've completed a file download, the BBS will automatically use the protocol you selected for any subsequent file transfers. If you want to use a different protocol, press [image] at the the File Transfer menu, select a different library and press [image] to change the protocol.


Step-by-Step: Downloading a QWK Packet

The first step in using QWK Mail on a BBS is to configure the QWK system on the bulletin board and download your message packet.

For our example, we’ll download a QWK packet from the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS. Follow these steps:

1.	Connect to the BBS using the Terminal window.

If you haven’t tried connecting to other systems yet, see Placing Your First Call. It’s a step-by-step explanation of how to connect to the system.

Once you’ve logged on successfully, you’ll arrive at the BBS’s main bulletin board menu.

2.	Go to the QWK Mail system.

Press [image] for the Message Menu, then press [image] for the QWK Mail system.

3.	At the QWK Mail system, press c to configure your settings.

Most of the default settings should remain unchanged, but we’ll select the conferences that we want to receive.

4.	At the Configuration screen, press [image] for conferences.

The BBS displays those conferences you can access.

5.	Enter the number of a conference you wish to receive and press [image].

An asterisk will appear next to the conference name to indicate that you’ve chosen it. To deselect a conference, follow the same procedure. The asterisk will disappear and you will not receive that conference in your packet.

6.	Press [image] to return to the QWK Mail system menu.

Before you exit the Configuration menu, you may wish to reset your message pointers to prevent the addition of all the messages to your packet! Select [image] to reset pointers and use the command "ALL HIGH-50" to receive only 50 messages for each conference.

7.	Press [image] to download your packet.

The BBS will prompt you for a download protocol. Press [image] for Zmodem and the transfer will begin. If a packet already exists with the same name, the new packet will be renamed according to the rules for Zmodem transfers. Once the transfer has completed, you’ll be returned to the QWK Mail system menu.

8.	Press [image] to logoff the BBS.

Once you've downloaded a QWK packet from a bulletin board, you're ready to open the packet. See Opening a QWK Packet for more information.


Step-by-Step: Downloading with Other Protocols

Zmodem is a fast and efficient protocol. It also incorporates a number of features that make it easier to use than most of the other protocols in common use. However, since you’ll probably encounter situations in which Zmodem is not available to you, we’ll demonstrate a more general situation, in which you must locate a specific file on a BBS, then download it using the Xmodem protocol.

The procedure for using Xmodem is similar to that used for many of the other file transfer protocols you will encounter. To perform the next part of our tutorial, you’ll need to work in the main area of the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS, rather in its tutorial section.

Call the BBS, just as we did in Placing Your First Call. After you've connected, enter your name and a password and complete the logon procedure. If this is the first time you've logged on to the BBS, be sure to write down your password. After you've completed the logon procedure, the bulletin board presents its main menu.

1.	Press [image] to get to the File Transfer Menu on the BBS, where you can access the available files.

The BBS displays its standard File Transfer Menu:

2.	Press [image] to get to the file download section of the BBS.

The many files available on the BBS are grouped into related sections called libraries. The main screen of the file download area lists the different libraries that offer downloads.

3.	Press [image] [image] to get to the "General Information" library, where ONLINE.DOC is stored on the BBS.

4.	Press [image] to tell the BBS to list the files in this section.

The files that you can download from this library are displayed in alphabetical order. The entire list may take several screens to display. You’ll need to press the space bar each time the BBS pauses at the -More- prompt.

You can exit the list by pressing [image] at the -More- prompt.

Once you’ve located online.doc, press the space bar until you’ve reached the end of the file list. After the file list completes, the list of options shown in the above figure will be displayed again.

5.	Select the Xmodem protocol.

Because we want to use the Xmodem protocol, we’ll need to make sure that the BBS is using it, too. Press [image] and then [image] to display the list of available protocols, then press [image] to select Xmodem. Remember, selecting the protocol does not initiate a transfer. It only tells the BBS that you want to use the Xmodem protocol when you do transfer a file.

After you’ve selected a protocol, the list of options shown in Step 3 are displayed once more.

6.	Tell the BBS that you want to download a file.

Press [image] and then [image]. The BBS responds by prompting for the name of the file you want to download or receive.

7.	Provide the filename.

We want to download the same file we downloaded earlier; type online.doc and press [image].

The BBS is now ready to send the file you requested. Now we merely need to give Procomm Plus the information it needs!

8.	Make Xmodem Procomm Plus’s active protocol.

There are several ways to select the active protocol, but the easiest and quickest is to use the Terminal window’s Quick Select Line. Click on the word Zmodem in the Quick Select Line, and select Xmodem from the pop-up list box.

If you’re not using a mouse, you’ll need to set the protocol from within Setup. See Transfer Protocols for more information.

The Quick Select Line field updates to indicate that Xmodem is the current protocol. Again, this action does not start a transfer. It only tells Procomm Plus that you want to use Xmodem when you do transfer a file.

9.	Start the transfer!

Now that we’ve set the Terminal window to use the Xmodem protocol, we’re ready to start our side of the download. Click on the Action Bar’s Receive File button, or select the Data | Receive File... menu item. Procomm Plus responds by displaying the Receiving File... dialog, which looks just like a standard Save As... dialog. Click in the File Name edit field, and enter online.doc. Press OK to accept the filename and begin the transfer! The file transfer status dialog appears as the transfer begins.

You may notice that the filename shown is Copy 1 online.doc, rather than online.doc. If you completed the previous exercise, a file named online.doc already existed in your download directory. Procomm Plus automatically added the words Copy 1 to the new filename to avoid overwriting the first file with the new one. By automatically changing duplicate file names, Procomm Plus protects the information contained in any files that may have the same name. If Copy 1 online.doc already existed, Procomm Plus would use the filename Copy 2 online.doc, and so on.

You can disable this behavior in Setup if you wish. See Transfer Protocols for more information. Also note that the Zmodem protocol handles file collisions differently; by default it will attempt to "resume" the file. For more information, see Zmodem Crash Recovery.

Once the transfer completes, the alarm sounds and the menu shown in the figure in step 3 are re-displayed. If you have other files you want to download, you can search for them or select them. Otherwise, we can exit this menu and logoff:

10.	Press [image] to return to the main menu.

The BBS main menu appears. Press [image] to display the BBS Good-bye menu, then press [image] to confirm the request.


Step-by-Step: Drawing a Line

You can draw two kinds of regular annotation lines: straight lines and straight arrows.

A third kind, the freehand line, is discussed briefly in The Freehand Line.

To draw a line, follow these steps:

1.	Select the line tool you want to use.

For our example, we’ll use the viewer’s Arrow tool. Click on the Arrow toolbar button, or select the Annotation | Drawing Tools | Arrow menu item. The mouse cursor changes to a small cross-hair to show that you’re drawing an object.

2.	Draw the line.

Move the mouse cursor to the starting point for the arrow. Click and drag the cursor to the line’s ending point, then release the mouse button.

The viewer draws your line using the current Line Width and Line Color shown on its Quick Select Line.

Don’t worry if you don’t end the line exactly where you wanted it; we’ll show you how to adjust it later.

Your new line remains selected until you place another object or click on the annotation layer. This makes it easy to "fine tune" new objects as you place them.

3.	Adjust the line’s length and position if necessary.

If you didn’t get the line exactly where you wanted it, you can easily change its position. Click on the Select Object button, or select the Annotation | Select Object menu item. The mouse cursor reverts to a standard pointer.

Unless you’ve drawn another object, your line will still be selected after you click on Select Object. If it’s not selected, click on it once to select it.

Position the mouse cursor over one of the drag handles; the mouse cursor changes into a cross-hair with arrows indicating the directions you can drag the handle. In the figure shown above, we’ve placed the cursor over the arrow’s starting point. The cursor indicates that we can drag the handle up, down, left or right to shift the starting point.

If you want to move the entire arrow, click and drag on it at any point between the drag handles.

4.	Adjust the line’s width and color, if desired.

The viewer creates your new lines using the current Line Width and Line Color shown on the Quick Select Line. However, you can easily change either of these attributes. If the line you want to modify isn’t selected, select it just as we explained in Step 3, above.

To change the line’s color, click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Color field, then click on the color you want. The color you choose is applied to the selected line immediately. To change the line’s width, click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Width field, then click on the setting you want. The width you choose is applied to the selected line immediately.

The viewer provides standard colors and line widths that you can use to draw or color objects. You can also choose custom colors and line widths. For more information, see Modifying an Object.


Step-by-Step: Drawing a Polygon

In addition to "fixed" annotation shapes like circles and rectangles, the viewer also supports a third kind of shape, the polygon. A polygon combines features of freehand and straight lines, allowing you to create interesting and dramatic annotation objects.

To draw a polygon, follow these steps:

1.	Select the Polygon tool.

Click on the Polygon toolbar button, or select the Annotation | Drawing Tools | Polygon menu item. The mouse cursor changes to a small cross-hair to show that you’re drawing an object.

2.	Draw the polygon.

You can draw a polygon by dragging a freehand line, or by clicking at different points to place straight lines. You can also combine the two methods in the same polygon.

As you’re creating the polygon, the viewer draws a straight connecting line between the starting point of the polygon and the current position of the mouse cursor.

Whether you create your polygon by dragging freehand lines or by clicking straight lines, the viewer will remain in polygon-drawing mode until you double click.

Your polygon is drawn with the current Line Width, Line Color and Fill Color shown on the Quick Select Line. You can easily change these settings, as we’ll see in Step 4.

3.	Adjust the polygon’s size and position if necessary.

If you didn’t get the polygon right where you wanted it or if it’s not the right size, you can easily change it. Click on the Select Object button, or select the Annotation | Drawing Tools | Select Object menu item. The mouse cursor reverts to a standard pointer.

Unless you’ve drawn another object, your new polygon will still be selected after you click on Select Object. If it’s not selected, click on it once to select it.

To resize the polygon, position the mouse cursor over one of the drag handles; the mouse cursor changes into a cross-hair with arrows indicating the directions you can drag the handle. Click and drag a handle to alter the polygon’s appearance.

If you want to move the entire polygon, click and drag on it at any point within its drag handles. Again, the mouse cursor changes to indicate the directions in which you can move it. As you’re moving a polygon, the viewer displays an outline indicating the polygon’s new position. It also displays the polygon in its current position.

4.	Adjust the polygon’s line width and colors, if desired.

To change the color used for the polygon’s boundary line, click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Color field, then click on the color you want. If you want the line to be transparent, select -None- from the Line Color list. The setting you choose is applied immediately.

Similarly, you can change the color used to fill the polygon by clicking on the Quick Select Line’s Fill Color field. You can then click on the color you want. If you want the polygon to be transparent, select -None- from the Fill Color list. The setting you choose is applied immediately.

To change the width of the polygon’s boundary line(s), click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Width field, then click on the setting you want. The width you choose is also applied immediately.

The viewer provides standard colors and line widths that you can use to draw or color polygons. You can also choose custom colors and line widths. For more information, see Modifying an Object.


Step-by-Step: Drawing a Shape

You can draw three kinds of regular annotation shapes: rectangles, rounded rectangles and circles.

A fourth shape, the polygon is discussed in Drawing a Polygon.

To draw a shape, follow these steps:

1.	Select the shape tool you want to use.

Click on the Circle, Rounded Rectangle or Rectangle toolbar button, or select the appropriate Annotation | Drawing Tools menu item. The mouse cursor changes to a small cross-hair to show that you’re drawing an object.

2.	Draw the shape.

Drawing a shape is as easy as drawing a line; you just click and drag! If you’re drawing a rectangle, the viewer uses the first and last dragging points as diagonal corners for the new shape. The new rectangle’s boundaries are aligned with the drag points.

If you’re drawing a circle or rounded rectangle, the viewer also uses the first and last dragging points. However, for these shapes, the dragging points are used as diagonal corners for an imaginary rectangle. The new circle or rounded rectangle is drawn to fit snugly into the imaginary rectangle.

To draw your shape, move the mouse cursor to the point in the fax where you want one of the corners of the shape to be placed. Click and drag the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner, then release the mouse button. The viewer draws the new shape using the current Line Width and Line Color shown on its Quick Select Line. The new shape is filled with the current Fill Color.

Remember, if you’re drawing a circle or rounded rectangle, the shape will drawn within an imaginary rectangle. Don’t worry if you don’t place the shape exactly as you wanted it; we’ll show you how to adjust it later.

The new shape remains selected until you place another object or click on the annotation layer.

3.	Adjust the shape’s size and position if necessary.

If you didn’t get the shape where you wanted it or if it’s not in the right proportions, you can easily change it. Click on the Select Object button, or select the Annotation | Select Object menu item. The mouse cursor reverts to a standard pointer.

Unless you’ve drawn another object, your new shape will still be selected after you click on Select Object. If it’s not selected, click on it once to select it.

Position the mouse cursor over one of the drag handles; the mouse cursor changes into a cross-hair with arrows indicating the directions you can drag the handle. Click and drag a handle to alter the shape’s size.

If you want to move the entire shape, click and drag on it at any point within its drag handles. Again, the mouse cursor changes to indicate the directions in which you can move it. As you’re moving an object, the viewer displays an outline indicating the object’s new position. It also displays the object in its current position.

4.	Adjust the shape’s line width and colors, if desired.

The viewer creates your new shape using the current Line Width, Line Color and Fill Color shown on the Quick Select Line. You can change these attributes easily. If the shape you want to modify isn’t selected, select it just as we explained in Step 3, above.

To change the color used for the shape’s boundary line, click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Color field, then click on the color you want. If you don’t want a line around the object, select
-None- from the Line Color list. The your choice is applied to the selected object immediately.

Similarly, you can change the color used to fill the shape by clicking on the Quick Select Line’s Fill Color field. You can then click on the color you want. If you want the shape to be transparent, select -None- from the Fill Color list. The setting you choose is applied to the selected object immediately.

To change the boundary line’s width, click on the Quick Select Line’s Line Width field, then click on the setting you want. The width you choose is also applied immediately.

The viewer provides standard colors and line widths that you can use to draw or color objects. You can also choose custom colors and line widths. For more information, see Modifying an Object.


Step-by-Step: Editing OCR Output Data

Using the OCR Editor, you can review and modify OCR engine output text as easily as you would spell-check and verify a document in a standard Windows word processor.

This Step-by-step assumes that you’ve already processed your fax or image with the OCR engine. If you need help in doing so, see Step-by-Step: Using OCR to Process an Image.

To review and edit the OCR output from an image loaded in the Fax Viewer, follow these steps:

1.	Locate the first questionable word in the output file.

By default, the editor highlights words it considers misspelled or misinterpreted to help you locate them.

If you don’t see any highlighted text, the feature may have been toggled off. Make sure that the Speller | Mark Suspect Words menu item is checked.

Although the editor’s design helps you to easily locate problem words manually, we recommend using one of the Find options from the editor’s Speller menu:

Speller | Find Next

Use this command to find the next word that appears to be misspelled, beginning at the current cursor location.

The editor locates and highlights the word, and uses the Pop-Up Verifier to display the region of the original fax or image from which the OCR engine read the suspect word.

Speller | Find Special Marker

Use this command to find the next character that the OCR engine marked as unreadable, using a tilde ‘~’ character.

The editor locates and highlights the marker, and uses the Pop-Up Verifier to display the region of the original fax or image that the OCR engine could not interpret.

2.	Correct or verify the word.

To correct a misspelled word, just select the problem text and type in the correction.

If the OCR engine correctly interpreted a word from the image, but the OCR Editor marks it as a misspelling, you can mark the word as correct by selecting the Speller | Mark Word as Correct or by pressing [image].

3.	Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until you’re satisfied with the document.

After you’re satisfied with the changes you’ve made in the OCR output file, save your changes by selecting the File | Save menu item, or by clicking on the Save file Action Bar button.

Keep in mind that if you close the OCR Editor without saving the output data file, the Fax Viewer will assume that you intend to cancel the entire OCR process!

To close the editor and return to the Fax Viewer, select File | Exit.


Step-by-Step: Entering Send Fax Recipients

You can enter recipient names and numbers manually, or select them from the Connection Directory. From the Send Fax dialog, click on the Send Fax To button and follow these steps:

To manually enter a recipient:

1.	Click on the Send to field and type in the name of the person receiving the fax.

If you prefer to use the keyboard, you can move the cursor to the field with the [image] key, then enter the name.

2.	Press [image] to move to the Fax Number field, and type in the number.

If you want to save the recipient you’ve specified in a new Connection Directory entry, click on the Add to Connection Directory button. For more information about the Add to Connection Directory button, see The Add Fax Recipient to Connection Directory Dialog.

Be sure to include any dialing prefixes needed for long distance or outside lines in the Fax Number field. Fax numbers you enter manually in the Send Fax dialog do not reference the Connection Directory for dialing commands or other important settings.

3.	Click on the Add to Recipient(s) List button.

The recipient name you entered is added to the Recipient(s) List. You can now enter more names manually, select names from the Connection Directory, or move on to other fax options.

To select names from the Connection Directory:

1.	Click on the Connection Directory button.

The Procomm Plus Connection Directory opens and displays the fax entries from the current directory file.

2.	Select the entry, entries or group(s) you want, then click on Send.

The Connection Directory closes, and your selections, if any, appear automatically in the Recipient(s) List.

If you want to remove an entry from the Recipient(s) List, simply highlight it and click on the Remove button.


Step-by-Step: Faxing During a Voice Call

Since most modems allow you to attach a telephone and most fax machines have telephone handsets, it's possible to send a fax at the end of a voice call.

To send a fax with Procomm Plus during a voice call, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Send Fax dialog.

From the Procomm Plus main window, select Tools | Send a Fax... to launch the Send a Fax wizard.  From the Send a Fax wizard, go to the Advanced Fax Facility.

Otherwise, you may find that it’s faster to load Fax Status and select the menu item there.

2.	Specify the file(s) you want to send, but do not enter a recipient name or number.

You don’t need to specify a name or number after you’ve selected the file(s) you want. Since you’re already using the telephone connection that Procomm Plus will access to transmit your fax, you’re ready to send the fax!

3.	Click on Send.

Procomm Plus prompts you with a dialog to confirm that you want to send a fax on the current connection.

4.	Click on Yes.

Procomm Plus processes the file(s) you selected, as discussed in Step 4 of Step-by-Step: Faxing From the Connection Directory

Depending on the kinds of documents you’re faxing, you may find it more convenient to generate the .fax files you want to send before attempting to transmit them at the end of a voice call. For more information, see Step-by-Step: Generating .fax Files.

After .fax or .bft files have been generated for each of the file(s), Procomm Plus sends fax initialization and command strings to begin the fax transmission.

5.	When you hear your modem send the initial fax tones, hang up the handset.

The person receiving the fax should listen for the fax tones. As soon as they hear them, they should initiate the fax receive process on their side.

If the person receiving the fax is using Procomm Plus, they should select the Fax | Answer Fax Now menu item from Fax Status, then hang up the handset. If they're calling from a fax machine, or using another fax application, they should begin the fax receive process and hang up the handset.


Step-by-Step: Faxing From the Connection Directory

You can also initiate faxes from within the Procomm Plus Connection Directory:

1.	Open the Connection Directory, and select one or more entries or groups to receive the fax.

Select the entries or groups you want to fax by highlighting them. If you select a group to receive a fax, it will not appear as a group in the Send Fax dialog. Instead, each entry within the group will be listed separately.

You can also fax from the Connection Directory by selecting a [Fax] entry from the Rapid Connect list box in a Procomm Plus communication window.

2.	Click on Send at the bottom of the Connection Directory window.

The Send Fax dialog opens with the selections you made in the Connection Directory.

If you want to send your fax to a recipient that’s not in the Connection Directory, just enter their information in the Send to and Fax Number fields, and click on Add to Recipient(s) List.

Be sure to include any dialing prefixes needed for long distance or outside lines in the Fax Number field. Fax numbers you enter directly in the Send Fax dialog do not reference the Connection Directory for dialing commands or other important settings.

You can also add more selections from the Connection Directory by clicking on the Connection Directory button. To remove a recipient from the list, just highlight it and click on Remove.

3.	Click on Browse, and select the files or documents you want to fax.

When you’re satisfied with the list of recipients and the files you’ve selected, your fax is ready to send. However, you might want to make use of some of the options available from the Send Fax dialog, such as specifying a cover sheet or scheduling a date and time for the fax to be transmitted. For an explanation of these options, see The Send Fax Dialog.

4.	Click on Send.

The Send Fax dialog closes immediately, and the fax operation you’ve specified is processed by Fax Status.

If the file(s) you selected are already in .fax format, or if you’re sending a Binary File Transfer, no other processing is required. Procomm Plus transmits them without opening other applications.

If you're sending a file created with another application, Procomm Plus loads the Windows application associated with the file’s extension.

If the application supports Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) control, Procomm Plus automatically issues the "print" and "close" commands to process the file. In other cases, Procomm Plus runs the application with a print instruction on the command line.

If the application doesn't support either of these methods, you'll have to print the document and close the application manually. Procomm Plus will display a message dialog to advise you when this occurs.

If you have to print the document manually, or if the application prompts you for confirmation or other information before printing to the fax driver, you’ll have to close the application manually as well.

Once a .fax or .bft file has been created for each file you selected, the Fax Status dialog will appear and the transfer will begin. You can either watch the progress of the transmission or minimize Fax Status and go on to other tasks in Windows.


Step-by-Step: Faxing from Procomm Plus

To send a fax from Procomm Plus using the contents of an existing document, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Send a Fax dialog.

To open the dialog, select Fax | Send a Fax... in Fax Status.

If you’re in the Procomm Plus main window, you can open the Send a Fax wizard to help you as well. Click on the Send Fax Action Bar icon or select the Tools | Send a Fax... menu item. If you've disabled wizards, these controls open the Send Fax dialog instead.  To open the Send Fax dialog from within the Send a Fax wizard, enable the Skip the wizard and go to the Advanced Fax Utility option button.

2.	Specify the fax recipient(s).

If you have a Connection Directory entry configured for the fax destination, click on the Connection Directory... button to open the directory. Select the entry or entries you want to use and close the directory by clicking Send. The selected entries are automatically added to the Recipient(s) List in the Send Fax dialog.

You can also manually enter fax recipients. Click on the Send to field and type the recipient’s name, then on the Fax Number field and type the recipient’s number.

Be sure to include any dialing prefixes needed for long distance or outside lines in the Fax Number field. Fax numbers you enter directly in the Send Fax dialog do not reference the Connection Directory for dialing commands or other important settings.

After you’ve entered the recipient’s name and number, click on the Add to Recipient(s) List button. Any number of recipients can be added to the list in this manner.

If you want to remove an item from the Recipient(s) List, just highlight it and click on the Remove button.

3.	Click on the Browse... button.

Procomm Plus displays a standard file selection dialog. You can select one or more files to fax. There's no practical limit on the number of files you can send in a single fax transmission.

By default, Procomm Plus attempts to send the documents you select as normal faxes. If you want to send them as Binary File Transfers (BFTs), enable the Binary Send check box. For more information on BFTs, see Binary File Transfers.

Once you’ve selected the file(s) you want to send, click on OK to return to the Send Fax dialog.

If you want to remove a filename from the File(s) to Fax list, highlight it and click on the Remove button.

When you’re satisfied with the list of recipients and the files you’ve selected, your fax is ready to send. However, you might want to make use of some of the options available from the Send Fax dialog, such as specifying a cover sheet or scheduling a date and time for the fax to be transmitted. For an explanation of these options, see The Send Fax Dialog.

4.	Click on the Send button.

The Send Fax dialog closes immediately, and the fax operation you’ve specified is processed by Fax Status.

If the file(s) you selected are already in .fax format, or if you’re sending a Binary File Transfer, no other processing is required. Procomm Plus transmits them without opening other applications.

If you're sending a file created with another application, Procomm Plus loads the Windows application associated with the file’s extension.

If the application supports Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) control, Procomm Plus automatically issues the "print" and "close" commands to process the file. In other cases, Procomm Plus runs the application with a print instruction on the command line.

If the application doesn't support either of these methods, you'll have to print the document and close the application manually. Procomm Plus will display a message dialog to advise you when this occurs.

If you have to print the document manually, or if the application prompts you for confirmation or other information before printing to the fax driver, you’ll have to close the application manually as well.

Once a .fax or .bft file has been created for each file you selected, the Fax Status dialog will appear and the transfer will begin. You can either watch the progress of the transmission or minimize Fax Status and go on to other tasks in Windows.


Step-by-Step: Faxing from a Windows Application

To send a document as a fax from within another Windows application, follow these steps:

1.	Run the application and select your fax modem as the print destination.

For Windows 3.x programs, the Print Setup dialog is available from an application’s File menu. Otherwise, you’ll need to refer to the application’s documentation to determine how to specify a printer.

2.	Initiate the application’s Print command, just as if you were printing a paper copy of the document.

The application processes your document normally for printing. However, when the print job is given to the Procomm Plus fax driver, it opens the Send Fax dialog, prompting you for the information it needs to send the fax.

3.	Specify the fax recipient(s).

If you have a Connection Directory entry configured for the fax destination, click on the Connection Directory... button to open the directory. Select the entry or entries you want to use and close the directory by clicking Send. The selected entries are automatically added to the Recipient(s) List in the Send Fax dialog.

You can also manually enter fax recipients. Click on the Send to field and type the recipient’s name, then on the Fax Number field and type the recipient’s number.

Be sure to include any dialing prefixes needed for long distance or outside lines in the Fax Number field. Fax numbers you enter manually in the Send Fax dialog do not reference the Connection Directory for dialing commands or other important settings.

After you’ve entered the recipient’s name and number, click on the Add to Recipient(s) List button. Any number of recipients can be added to the list in this manner.

If you want to remove a recipient from the list, simply highlight it and click on the Remove button.

When you’re satisfied with the list of recipients, you’re ready to send your fax, since all Procomm Plus needs to know is the name and number of the recipient and the file(s) you want to send. However, you might want to specify a cover sheet for the fax, include other files, or take advantage of some of the other options available from the Send Fax dialog. For help with these options, see The Send Fax Dialog.

4.	Click on the Send button.

The Send Fax dialog closes immediately. Fax Status receives the fax operation you’ve specified, and begins processing it. You can either watch the transmission’s progress, or minimize Fax Status and go on to other tasks in Windows.


Step-by-Step: Finding Information on the Web

Using the popular search engines available on the Web, finding information on the Internet is as easy as performing a query in a database. Let’s search for some information regarding the ever entrepreneurial modem magnate, Fred Garvin.

1.	Access a search engine.

For our example, we’ll use the WebCrawler search engine. We’ve included a Connection Directory entry for WebCrawler in internet.dir. Open the internet.dir Connection Directory file, select the WebCrawler entry from the Internet Search group, and click Connect.

2.	Perform the Webcrawler Search.

Click in the edit field to the left of the Search button, type "Fred Garvin" and click Search.

Because the Web is constantly evolving, the WebCrawler Search Engine home page may appear different the next time you connect. The basic functionality will most likely be nearly identical: a field for your query and a button to activate the search.

3.	Use the links that you found.

After searching its database of hyperlinks, the WebCrawler search engine returns a list of hyperlinks to documents containing the words Fred and Garvin. Let’s click on the first one, Mechanical & Aerospace Engineering Phone Directory.

Â	Because the Web is constantly evolving, your WebCrawler search may produce a different list of results than the example hyperlinks we are using in this example. If this happens, please look through the list to see if the Mechanical & Aerospace Engineering Phone Directory hyperlink is listed. If it is not listed at all, simply select another hyperlink and continue following the proceeding steps.

4.	Find the text you searched for.

This Web page contains a lot of information. Rather than reading the entire document, we’ll use the Web Browser’s Find capabilities.

Select Edit | Find to open the Find dialog. In the Text to Find: field, type Garvin and click OK.

The Web Browser highlights the first occurrence of the word Garvin that it finds. In this case it is someone else with the last name of Garvin.

Since that wasn’t Fred Garvin, let’s repeat our search. This time, select Edit | Find Again from the menu.

5.	Backtracking.

Since there were no further occurrences of the word Garvin, we must assume that Fred isn’t listed here -- there was someone named Fred, and someone named Garvin, but no Fred Garvin.

Let’s go back to the WebCrawler Search Results page. You may select Web | Back from the menu, use the Previous Page Action Bar button, or you may use the Address field’s drop down list box. By clicking on the down arrow at the end of the Address field, you may access a list of your most recently visited addresses.

From this drop down list, you may select the WebCrawler Search Results page and look for more information about Fred Garvin, or you may select the WebCrawler home page and begin your own search.


Step-by-Step: Generating .fax Files

Depending on the kinds of documents or files you fax, you may want to generate .fax files before initiating a Send Fax event. For example, desktop publishing and other graphics-intensive applications are typically slower in printing than an application that produces plain text. Also, if the application you’re using doesn’t support DDE control, you may have to generate the .fax files manually if you want Procomm Plus to transmit them unattended!

To generate a .fax file without transmitting it, do the following:

1.	From within the application, set the fax printer driver as the active printer.

Generally, the Printer Setup dialog is available from an application’s File menu. If not, you’ll need to refer to the application’s documentation to determine how to specify a printer.

2.	Initiate the application’s print process.

Your document is processed normally for printing. If the application presents a confirmation or configuration dialog, click on OK or Close to continue printing.

Each application handles printing differently. Since the fax driver acts as a print device, the application has no means of distinguishing between a .fax file destination and a traditional paper copy. You’ll need to become familiar with your application’s interaction with the fax driver.

3.	If Procomm Plus’s Send Fax dialog appears, enable Send to File in the Time and Options screen.

After you’ve enabled the Send to File check box, click on the Send button without specifying any recipients or a cover sheet file.

Fax files generated in this manner are written to the directory specified in Scheduled faxes in the Fax Paths dialog in Setup.


Step-by-Step: Mapping a Key

Procomm Plus is a powerful application with many features and menu selections. Rather than overwhelm you with a flood of "hot keys" for each of its menu selections or program features, the designers of Procomm Plus sought to assign hot keys for the most commonly-used features or selections.

However, depending on your keyboard and how you use the program, you may find it convenient to re-map a key for one reason or another. For example, suppose that you often use the Filename Clipboard, but its hot key, [image] [image], is inconvenient on your laptop system. You could easily re-map a key combination to open the clipboard:

1.	Open the Editor by pressing [image] [image] in the Terminal window.

The editor opens with the current key mapping loaded.

2.	Select the key to edit.

When the editor first opens, the [image] function key is already selected for editing. Typically, this key is critical in terminal emulations. Instead, we’ll use a cursor key in our example. Open the Edit Key Mapping dialog by double clicking on the down arrow key.

3.	Specify Menu Command in the desired key combination’s Action field.

For our example, we’ll map the [image] -combination. Click in its Action field, and select Menu Command from the drop-down list.

4.	Specify the desired menu command in the combination’s Contents field.

Click in the [image] -combination’s Contents list box, and select the Data- File Clipboard item.

Click on OK to accept the mapping and return to the editor window.

5.	Save your changes.

If you modified an existing .kbd file, you can click on OK to save the changes and return to the Terminal window. If you modified a default key mapping, you’ll need to specify a filename for the new .kbd file. For more information, see The Command Buttons.


Step-by-Step: Placing Text

To place annotation text, follow these steps:

1.	Select the Text tool.

Click on the Annotation Toolbar’s Text button, or select the Annotation | Drawing Tools | Text menu item. The mouse cursor changes to a small cross-hair to indicate that you’re drawing an object.

2.	Draw the text box.

If you want a default-sized text box, just move your mouse cursor to the point in the fax where the box’s left top corner should be placed. Click once with the left mouse button.

Otherwise, you can draw a custom-sized text box as easily as you draw a rectangle. The viewer uses the first and last dragging points as the text box’s diagonal corners.

To draw your text box, move the mouse cursor to the point in the fax where you want one of its corners to be placed. Click and drag the cursor to the diagonally opposite corner, then release the mouse button.

Don’t worry if you didn’t draw the text box just as you wanted it; we’ll show you how to adjust it later.

The viewer creates the new text box using the current Line Width and Line Color, and fills it with the current Fill Color shown on its Quick Select Line. The new text box remains selected until you place another object or click on the annotation layer.

3.	Enter your text.

The viewer displays an editing cursor in the new text box, allowing you to enter your text. You can use the standard Windows editing keys to modify your text.

4.	Adjust the text’s attributes if desired.

The viewer draws your text in the current text color, font and size shown on the Quick Select Line. To modify the text’s attributes, click on the font segment of the Quick Select Line or select the Attribute | Text Properties | Font... menu item to open the Font dialog.

You can change the selected font and its style, size and color using the controls in the Font dialog. You can also apply Strikeout and Underline effects by enabling the appropriate check boxes. To accept the settings and return to the viewer’s main window, click on OK. To close the dialog without changing the font settings, click on Cancel.

5.	Adjust the box’s size, position and colors if necessary.

You can easily move or resize the text box, or change the colors used to draw it. Click on the Select Object button, or select the Annotation | Drawing Tools | Select Object menu item. The mouse cursor reverts to a standard pointer.

Unless you’ve drawn another object, your new shape will still be selected after you click on Select Object. If it’s not selected, click on it once to select it.

Position the mouse cursor over one of the drag handles; the mouse cursor changes into a cross-hair with arrows indicating the directions you can drag the handle. Click and drag a handle to alter the box’s size. When you resize a text box, the text it contains is reformatted automatically.

If you want to move the entire box, click and drag on it at any point within its drag handles. Again, the mouse cursor changes to indicate the directions in which you can move it. As you’re moving the box, the viewer displays an outline indicating the box’s new position. It also displays the box in its current position.

You can change a text box’s colors and line width in the same way you change the settings for other objects. You can even remove the box’s framing rectangle by setting its Line Color and Fill Color to -None-! For an explanation, see Step 4 of Drawing a Shape.


Step-by-Step: Placing Your First Call

Procomm Plus makes connecting easy! To show how quickly you can call another computer, we’ll connect to the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS, using the Rapid Connect list box on the Action Bar.

This discussion assumes that you have the default pw4.dir directory file loaded, and that you haven’t deleted or modified the Quarterdeck entry. The Quarterdeck entry defaults to a long distance call. If you're within local calling range, change the entry's Call Type to "Local."

To dial the BBS, follow these steps:

1.	From the Terminal window, click on the arrow at the right side of the Rapid Connect drop down list box, or press [image] [image].

The Rapid Connect list box displays the name of each entry in your Connection Directory for the type of call: Data, Fax, Voice, Telnet, FTP, News, Mail or Web.

Unless you’ve added entries to the default directory file, you’ll only see the Quarterdeck entry. After you’ve added your own entries, you’ll be able to scroll and select from them as well.

2.	Click once on the word "Quarterdeck," or highlight it and press [image].

That's it! Procomm Plus sends the dialing command to your modem, and displays a dialing status box in the Terminal window. If the system is busy, Procomm Plus will redial the number until you press the Cancel button or until it has satisfied the number specified in the Make [ ] attempts setting in the System, Dialing Options, Call Control panel in Setup.

Once you connect to the BBS, you can logon by entering your name and following the instructions displayed by the BBS, or, if you like, you can simply disconnect by clicking on the Action Bar Hangup icon. From the keyboard, you can hang up by pressing [image] [image].


Step-by-Step: Placing an Annotation Bitmap

The Fax Viewer allows you to import Windows bitmaps or .bmp files for use as annotation objects. However, when you’re selecting or creating bitmaps to use as annotations, remember that all of your annotation objects will be converted to black and white when they are merged into the fax. For best results, use simple, low color bitmaps for annotations.

To place a bitmap on your fax, follow these steps:

1.	Select the bitmap file.

Select the Annotation | Import Bitmap... menu item. This opens a standard file selection dialog, where you can browse for and select the bitmap you want to use. When you choose a bitmap and click on OK, the dialog closes. The bitmap you selected is placed in the upper left corner of the fax image.

By default, annotation bitmaps are placed in their normal size, scaled to the size of the fax page. For example, if the viewer’s scale factor is set to 50%, the bitmap will be displayed at half size.

2.	Place the bitmap where you want it.

To move the bitmap, click on the Select Object button, or select the Annotation | Drawing Tools | Select Object menu item. The mouse cursor reverts to a standard pointer.

Unless you’ve drawn another object or clicked somewhere else, the bitmap will still be selected after you click on Select Object. If it’s not selected, click on it once to select it.

To move the entire bitmap, click and drag on it at any point within its drag handles; the mouse cursor changes to indicate the directions in which you can move it. As you’re moving the bitmap, the viewer displays an outline indicating the bitmap’s new position. It also displays the bitmap in its original location until you release the mouse button.

3.	Change the bitmap’s size and settings to suit your tastes.

To resize the bitmap, place the mouse cursor over one of the drag handles. The cursor changes into a cross-hair with arrows indicating the directions you can drag the handle. Click and drag the handle to resize the bitmap.

The viewer displays a bitmap using its true size and proportions. This means that, by default, the bitmap’s image will not be resized when you change the size of its frame, which may result in the image being "clipped off."

If you want the bitmap image to resize when you change the size of the frame, you’ll need to modify its settings. Right click on the bitmap to display the pop-up menu, or select the Annotation | Bitmap Properties menu item. You can choose one of three settings for a bitmap:

Default Size

This is the viewer’s default setting for a bitmap. The bitmap is adjusted to the scaling of the fax page, and displayed in its true size regardless of the size of its rectangle.

Proportional Size

If you want the bitmap image to maintain its proportions regardless of how you resize its frame, select Proportional Size. This setting is ideal if your bitmap contains text or other features that you don’t want distorted.

Size to Fit

If you want the bitmap’s image to be resized as needed to fill its entire frame select Size to Fit. Note that this setting may cause the image to be distorted or compressed.

Transparent
You can choose whether to display the bitmap as a transparency by toggling the Transparent menu item.  To choose the color you want handled as “transparent”, select the Transparent Color menu item and select it from the color dialog.

The bitmap’s current settings will be shown with checkmarks on the menu.


Step-by-Step: Receiving Polled Files

Because the details are handled automatically within the fax protocol, calling to poll a host for files is quite simple. In fact, you can poll a host for files or documents as part of a regular Send Fax operation!

To receive polled files, follow these steps:

1.	Open the Send Fax dialog.

If you have one or more documents to fax to the polling host, select them for transmission as explained previously.

If you don’t have documents you want to fax, open the Send Fax dialog by selecting the Skip the wizard and go to the Advanced Fax Utility option button within the Send Fax Wizard.

2.	Specify one or more sites to poll in the Recipient(s) List, just as you would to fax normally.

3.	Enable fax polling.

In the Send Fax dialog, click on the Time & Options control button, then enable the Poll Remote check box.

4.	Click on Send.

Procomm Plus handles your request just as if you had initiated a normal Send Fax operation!


Step-by-Step: Recording a Script

To record a script, follow these steps:

1.	Prepare the host or remote system.

To create scripts, the Script Recorder "watches" the characters you type and the information the host transmits in response. You’ll need to activate the recorder just before you begin the activity you want the script to reproduce for you.

For example, if you’re recording a logon script for a BBS, you’d want to start the recorder before connecting to the system.

2.	Start the Script Recorder.

Select Scripts | Start Recorder from the menu, or click on the Action Bar’s Recorder button. After the Script Recorder is started, the Start Recorder menu command changes to Stop Recorder, and the corresponding Action Bar button is animated.

3.	Complete the procedure you wish to record.

If you’re connecting to a BBS, respond to its prompts and menus just as you would normally. When you’ve finished the activities that you want the recorded script to perform, select Scripts | Stop Recorder or click again on the Action Bar’s Script Record button to stop recording.

4.	Specify a filename for the new script.

When you close the recorder, Procomm Plus displays a dialog, prompting you for the name for the new source file. If you wish, you can also compile the new script from this dialog.

At this point, rather than compiling your script, you may wish to save and edit it. Scripts generated by the Script Recorder sometimes need "fine-tuning" before they’ll successfully duplicate your tasks.


Step-by-Step: Removing an Action Bar Button

To remove a button from the Current Action Bar list:

1.	Select the button you want to remove.

Use the scroll bar on the Current Action Bar list to scroll the list until the button you want to remove is displayed. Click on the button to highlight it.

2.	Click once on the arrow button pointing left.

The button is removed from the list. You can also remove buttons by dragging them out of the list. For more information, see Dragging Buttons.


Step-by-Step: Saving GIFs as Windows Bitmaps

If you have a .gif file that you would like to convert to Windows bitmap ".bmp" format, it’s a simple two-step process with the GIF Viewer:

1.	Select File | Save As BMP... from the viewer menu.

The viewer displays a standard file save as dialog, with the file’s extension changed from .gif to .bmp.

2.	Modify the filename and path as desired.

You can either accept the viewer’s default name for the new .bmp file, or modify it. If you want to place the new file in a different directory, select that directory in the dialog.

If you want to use the new .bmp file as a "wallpaper" graphic, you’ll need to place it in your \windows directory.

Click OK to create the .bmp file, or Cancel to close the dialog without saving the file.


Step-by-Step: Scheduling Procomm Plus

Although you can use it to launch almost any Windows or DOS program at a specific date and time, Scheduler includes special control settings for Procomm Plus. These allow you to schedule specific tasks to be performed by Procomm Plus. You can even pass variable data to ASPECT scripts launched by the Scheduler!

Scheduling Procomm Plus as a task is much like scheduling other applications:

1.	Specify pw4.exe, along with a full path, in the Program field.

Click in the Program field and enter the full path and filename for Procomm Plus’s main executable, pw4.exe. If you’re not certain of the path, click on the Browse... button to search for the executable.

2.	Specify task options for Procomm Plus.

You could use the Arguments field to specify command-line options for Procomm Plus. However, you’ll find it far more convenient to take advantage of Scheduler’s special options. Click on the Procomm Plus... button to display the Procomm Plus Options dialog.

Script Button/Set Variables...

Select this option button, then click on its drop-down list box to choose a compiled ASPECT script file to launch with Scheduler. If you’re launching a script, you can specify variable data to pass to it by clicking on the Set Variables... button.

You can specify values for any of the 40 predefined ASPECT system variables. To switch between string, integer, float and long variables, click on the appropriate option button in the dialog. When you’re satisfied with the values you’ve entered, click on OK to return to the Procomm Plus Options dialog.

Remember that the script must have been designed to interpret and respond to the values you specify!

Automatic Connection Button

Select this option button if you want Procomm Plus to connect to a particular Connection Directory entry or group after it’s launched by Scheduler. You can specify the directory file to be loaded by Procomm Plus by clicking on the Connection Directory list box.

The second list box, illustrated in the figure in step 2, changes its label to reflect the entry or group class you’re viewing. You can toggle between Data, Fax, Voice, FTP, Telnet and Web entries by selecting the appropriate list items. To select an entry or group for dialing or connecting, just click on it in the list.

When you’re satisfied with the options you’ve selected for Procomm Plus, click on OK to return to the Scheduler window.

3.	Specify the execution time, date and frequency.

After you’ve specified the task options, you’re ready to specify when the task will be launched by Scheduler. Click on Time and Date... to open the Time & Date dialog. To select a day in the current month, simply click on it in the calendar. To select a day in the future, click on the scroll buttons beneath the calendar until the month and year you want are displayed, then click on the appropriate day.

You can set the task’s execution time by clicking on the scroll buttons on either side of the digital time display. The buttons on the left side control the hour, while those on the right side control the minutes. You can also set the time by dragging the hands of the clock.

To toggle AM/PM hours on the clock, click on the button to the far right of the digital time display. It is labelled "am" or "pm", depending on the current setting.

By default, Scheduler launches a task only once. But you can specify Hourly, Daily, Weekly or Monthly by selecting the appropriate setting from the Frequency: drop-down list box. For more information, see Using The Time & Date Dialog. You can also schedule tasks to run only on days you specify as "work days," as explained in Defining Workdays.

4.	Add the new task to the scheduled task list.

Click on Add to place your task in the Scheduler’s activity list.

If you’d like to verify that Scheduler will be able to launch Procomm Plus, and that the task will operate as you expect it to, click on the Test Run button. Scheduler immediately runs Procomm Plus using the information you’ve provided.


Step-by-Step: Scheduling a Task

Scheduling a task is a four-step process:

1.	Specify the application or program to be launched.

If you know the complete DOS path and filename of the program you want to schedule, click within the Program field and enter them.

Unless the application’s executable directory is included in your DOS PATH statement, make sure you include the complete path along with the filename in the Program field.

If you’re unsure of the exact location or name of the program, click on the Browse... button to display a standard file selection dialog. Highlight the program filename you want to run, then click on OK to accept it. The path and filename you selected appears in the Scheduler window’s Program field.

2.	Specify any arguments you want to pass to the application or program.

Specify any options or switches you’d normally use on the program’s command line in the Arguments field.

If you’re running a DOS program, keep in mind that the total number of characters for the path, program name and arguments cannot exceed 128 characters under DOS.

3.	Specify the execution time, date and frequency.

Once you’ve entered the program name and the arguments, you’re ready to specify the execution time and date. Click on Time and Date... to open the Time & Date dialog. To select a day in the current month, simply click on it in the calendar. To select a day in the future, click on the scroll buttons beneath the calendar until the month and year you want are displayed, then click on the appropriate day.

You can set the task’s execution time by clicking on the scroll buttons on either side of the digital time display. The buttons on the left side control the hour, while those on the right side control the minutes. You can also set the time by dragging the hands of the clock.

To toggle AM/PM hours on the clock, click on the button to the far right of the digital time display. It is labelled "am" or "pm", depending on the current setting.

By default, Scheduler launches a task only once. But you can specify Hourly, Daily, Weekly or Monthly by selecting the appropriate setting from the Frequency drop-down list box. For more information, see The Time & Date Dialog. You can also schedule tasks to run only on days you specify as "work days", as explained in Defining Workdays.

4.	Add the new task to the scheduled task list.

Click on Add to place your task in the Scheduler’s activity list.

If you’d like to verify that Scheduler will be able to launch your task, click on the Test Run button. Scheduler immediately runs the program using the information you’ve provided.


Step-by-Step: Searching for Newsgroups

You can easily browse through the Folders tree structure to locate newsgroups that interest you -- that's what it was designed for! However, you'll probably find it much faster to take advantage of the News Reader’s Find capabilities. Follow these steps:

1.	Open the Find dialog.

Click the Find Action Bar button, or select it from the Edit menu.

2.	Configure it to search the Newsgroups tree.

Click the Search Newsgroups option button to select it.

3.	Search for a keyword.

Enter text in the Find field, and click OK. Remember, the word that you’re searching for is in the name of the newsgroup and abbreviations are often used instead of full words. For example, comp is used instead of computer.

The News Reader locates the first instance of the text you enter and highlights it for you. If the newsgroup is one that interests you, continue to the next step. Otherwise, click on Find Next to continue the search.

4.	Peruse the located groups available headers.

Double click on the folder representing the newsgroup. The News Reader retrieves the headers available for the newsgroup from you news server. By default, the News Reader will only retrieve 200 headers from an individual newsgroup. If the newsgroup you've selected has more headers available, the News Reader prompts to determine whether you'd like to retrieve them.

You can specify the maximum number of headers to be retrieved in the Article Header Retrieval group in the Internet, News, Properties panel of Setup.

After the News Reader has retrieved the headers, it displays them in the headers list, where you can scan through them. If you're not interested in any of the headers that are displayed, you should probably start over with Step 1.

5.	See if the articles are as good as the headers.

After you've located an articled header that interests you, double click it to open the article in the Read Article window.

If you like the first article, browse through a few more to make sure you didn’t find an odd article which was the exception rather than the rule.

6.	Add the newsgroup to the Connection Directory.

If you like the newsgroup and want to connect to it quickly and easily in the future, you can have the News Reader add it to the Connection Directory. Just select the News | Add Group to Rapid Connect menu item. The advantage of adding newsgroups to the Connection Directory is discussed in Connecting to Newsgroups.


Step-by-Step: Selecting Files to Fax

Regardless of how you initiate a Send Fax operation, Procomm Plus allows you to specify one or more files to include as part of the transmitted fax. From the Send a Fax dialog, click on the Send Fax To button and follow these steps:

1.	Click on the Browse button.

A standard file selection dialog appears.

2.	Select the files you want, and click on OK.

You can select any number of files to include in the fax. When you click on OK, the selection dialog closes, and the files you selected, if any, are automatically added to the File(s) to Fax list.

If you have a TWAIN-compliant scanner attached to your computer, you can use it to acquire files to your fax. Click on Scanner to access your scanning software.

If you want to delete an entry from the list of files, highlight it and click the Remove button.


Step-by-Step: Sending a Binary File Transfer

Procomm Plus makes sending a file as a BFT just as easy as sending a regular fax! Just follow these steps:

1.	Open the Send a Fax dialog and specify the fax recipients, just as you would for a normal fax.

2.	Browse and select the file(s) to be sent as BFTs.

In the Send a Fax dialog, click on the Browse button to open the file selection dialog.  Select the files you want to send as BFTs and enable the Binary Send check box, then click on OK to accept your selections and return to the Send Fax dialog.

Note that the Binary Send check box affects all of the selected files. If you want to transmit normal fax images along with BFTs, select the documents to be faxed as images separately, with the Binary Send check box disabled.

3.	In the Send Fax dialog, click on Send to process the fax transmission.

That’s it! If you scheduled a future time or date for the .bft, Procomm Plus will add it to the Scheduled Faxes List. If not, Procomm Plus attempts to transmit it immediately.


Step-by-Step: Sending and Receiving Files using FTP

1.	Browse the directories.

Once you have connected to an FTP host, you can browse the directories on the remote computer as well as your own, using the controls in the Local and Remote sections of the FTP Client window. The current directory is listed in the Path field, above the Directory list box.

To view files in the subdirectories of the current directory, double click a directory name. To view the parent directory, double click the two dots at the top of the Directory list box.

If you have gone too deep into the subdirectory structure, you can double click on the double dots to back your way out one layer at a time. Available disk drives are listed in square brackets below the subdirectories.

2.	Select the file(s) you want to transfer.

If you want to send a file, select it from the Local file list; if you want to receive one, select it from the Remote file list. To select more than one file, hold down the [image] key and click on the files you want. To select multiple files using the keyboard, use the arrow keys with the [image] key.

3.	Select the destination directory.

If you are sending a file, select the receiving directory on the Remote side; if you are receiving a file, select the receiving directory on the Local side. The receiving directory must be the active directory. You can verify the receiving directory by looking at the Path label at the top of the Remote or Local group, as appropriate.

To select a directory, double click it. You will see the complete path appear above the directory list box.

4.	Start the FTP file transfer.

To transfer selected file(s) from one computer to another, simply click the Copy button with the arrow pointing the direction that you want file(s) to go. The arrow pointing to the right is for sending; one pointing to the left is for receiving. During an FTP transfer, a dialog appears to display the status of the file transfer.


Step-by-Step: Stripping a Character Value

..With the Translate Table Editor, stripping a character is a simple three step process. Open the editor by selecting Tools | Translate Table Editor... from the menu. Select the .xlt file you wish to modify, or click on New to create a new table.

1.	Select the character value to be stripped.

For our example, we’ll strip the ASCII 007 "bell" character. Scroll down the Incoming Translate list until the ^G value is displayed in the left column. Select it by clicking on it, or by pressing the cursor keys.

2.	Enter a zero or null value in the translated value field.

Since we’re in Character mode, we’ll enter the ^@ characters. If the editor was in Decimal or Hex mode, we’d enter a zero.

3.	Save your changes.

If you modified an existing file, just click on OK to save your changes. If you created a new file, click on Save As... and supply a name for the new .xlt file.

To close the editing dialog without saving any changes, click on Cancel.


Step-by-Step: UUdecoding a Binary File

In addition to standard text messages, newsgroup articles can also contain binary files that have been encoded for transport across the Internet. Typically, binary files are UUencoded for posting to Usenet newsgroups.

For more information on UUendcoding, see Encoded files.

To access an encoded file, you must first decode it. Fortunately, the News Reader makes it a simple task! Just follow these steps:

1.	Determine if there is a UUencoded attachment.

Most newsgroup utilities on the market today indicate an attached file in a newsgroup article by including a numbering sequence or filename in the article's Subject field. For example, each of the following lines was a Subject line for an article containing an encoded file:

Check out this ray trace image (2/2)

A modeled ORK (orc.jpg 4/5)

Network OSI (MODEL.GIF) (1/1)

The newest graphic of the shuttle. 5/11

Quite often, articles with encoded binary file attachments stretch over multiple articles. The numbering sequence included in the Subject field helps to group these related articles together when the article headers are viewed in a news reader utility.

If you see several articles in a newsgroup header list with Subject fields that are identical except for a fraction at the end, it's probably an encoded binary file that spans across multiple articles.

2.	Select the article(s) you want to decode.

Typically, sorting articles within a newsgroup by Subject will arrange encoded binary file articles in sequential order. However, you may want to experiment with the sorting methods available from the News Reader's Edit | Sort submenu to find the arrangement that you prefer.

When you've located one or more articles you want to retrieve and decode, click on the first article, press [image] and then click on the last article to select all of them. You can also select multiple articles by holding down the [image] key as you click on them.

3.	Let the News Reader download the messages.

Once you've selected the article(s) you want, click on the Get and Decode Articles Action Bar button or select the News | Get and Decode Articles... menu item. The News Reader begins retrieving the articles you selected and displays the Getting Article status dialog. Once the articles you selected have been retrieved, the News Reader begins decoding them automatically. The decoded files are saved in the path you've specified in the Directory for saved and decoded articles field in the Internet, News, Properties panel of Setup.

In general, it's a good idea to specify a decoding destination that offers plenty of available drive space. Encoded articles can be quite large, and the News Reader uses temporary data files to process them.


Step-by-Step: Uploading a File

To demonstrate how to send a file, we'll call the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS and upload a sample file.

Call the BBS, just as we did in Placing Your First Call. After you've connected, enter your name and a password and complete the logon procedure. If this is the first time you’ve logged on to the BBS, be sure to write down your password.

The --MORE-- prompt at the bottom of some of the BBS screens lets you know that there's more information to view. Just press the spacebar or the [image] key to display the next screen of information.

After you've completed the logon procedure, the bulletin board presents its main menu.

From the BBS main menu, follow these steps to upload a file to the BBS:

1.	Press [image] to enter the BBS’s File area.

The BBS displays is standard File Transfer Menu.

2.	Press [image] to enter the Upload area, then [image] to Submit an uploaded file.

Before allowing you to upload a file, the BBS displays a legal notice about the conditions under which uploaded files are accepted. It then prompts for an upload comment.

3.	Enter the upload comment.

You can enter up to three lines of comment for the upload. If you don’t need all three lines, just press [image] through the remaining lines.

4.	Enter the name of your upload file.

After you’ve entered the upload comment, the BBS prompts for the name of the file you’re uploading.

The BBS wil advise you if it already has a file using the filename you specify. In that case, you'll need to specify a different filename and change the name of your file before you upload it.

In our example, we’re uploading sample.bin.  After you’ve supplied a filename, the BBS prompts you for the upload destination. If you’re uploading the file to a technician, enter his or her name at the prompt. If you're experimenting, enter "BBS."

If this is the first file transfer you've performed during this call, the BBS displays a screen prompting you for the file transfer protocol to use.

5.	Press [image] to select the Zmodem protocol.

At this point, you’ve given the BBS the information it needs to handle your upload: an upload comment, handling instructions, a filename and a transfer protocol.

6. 	Start the transfer!

If you're not using the Zmodem protocol, click on the protocol name in the Quick Select Line and select Zmodem. Click on the Send File button, or select the Data | Send File... menu item to open the Send File dialog. Select the file you want to upload. Click on OK to accept your choices and upload the file!


Step-by-Step: Using OCR to Process an Image

To scan for text within an image you’ve loaded into the Fax Viewer, follow these steps:

1.	Select an OCR command.

If you only want to process the current page of the image, select the Tools | OCR Current Page... menu item or click on the Action Bar’s OCR Current Page button. The viewer immediately displays the dialog described in Step 2.

If you want to process multiple pages, select the Tools | OCR Select Pages... menu item.

By default, the viewer preselects the All option button, meaning that all of the pages in the fax image will be processed. However, if you selected specific pages in the fax the viewer will automatically select the Selected Page(s) option button for you. You can also specify a range of consecutive pages by clicking on Pages and entering the appropriate values in the From and To fields.

To accept the page setting and proceed to the next step, click on OK. To close the dialog without processing the image, click on Cancel.

2.	Specify a name for the output data file.

Before the OCR engine can process the page(s) you’ve specified, it needs a name for the output file. The viewer displays the Save As dialog.

Click in the File Name field and enter the name you want to use. Click on OK to accept the name and begin processing. The OCR engine reports its progress with a simple dialog.

3.	Review the output file for corrections or modifications.

By default, the OCR engine automatically opens the OCR Editor, where you can easily review and modify the output file before it’s saved. If you‘re not using the OCR Editor, the output file is created and saved immediately.

For more information about the OCR Editor, see The OCR Editor.


Step-by-Step: Using the File Clipboard

To demonstrate the File Clipboard, we’ll use file listings from the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS. The files we’ll select are located in Library 10 of the file download area. To clip filenames from the Terminal display or Scrollback Buffer, press [image] [image] to open the File Clipboard, then follow these steps:

1.	Browse for the filename(s) you want.

2.	Click on Add to copy the filename(s) you want.

Clicking on the Add button appends the highlighted filename to the clipboard’s file list. You can also add filenames by entering them in the edit field at the top of the clipboard window and pressing Add.

Clicking on Add also continues the search up or down, which allows you to add a filename and resume searching with a single click or [image] [image] keystroke.

3.	Prepare the host to receive your filename(s).

Remember, for the data you send from the File Clipboard to be properly interpreted as filenames, the host must be ready to accept filenames!  For example, you may return to the BBS’s library menu and press [image] to prepare the BBS for a download request.

4.	Transmit the filename(s).

5.	Start your file receive or download procedure if necessary.

If you’re using Zmodem or Kermit, and you’ve enabled automatic file downloads in the Data, Data Options, Advanced settings panel in Setup, your downloads will start automatically. Otherwise, you’ll need to start your side of the transfer by selecting the Data | Receive file... menu item.


Stop Bits

See Asynchronous.


String

A sequence of ASCII characters.


System Options

This group includes control settings for a variety of functions, such as connection logging and remote ASPECT script commands. From within Setup, select the System, System Options buttons to display the System Options group:

Use Caller ID

If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus will use your modem’s Caller ID feature. Note that your modem must support this feature, and you must have Caller ID service on your modem’s telephone line to use Caller ID.

Caller ID can be used to control access to your system. See The Caller ID Directory Editor.

Caller ID only works if you have caller ID service from your telephone company, a modem capable of caller ID, and a TAPI service provider, such as Unimodem/V, that supports both caller ID and your modem.

Sound alarm for [ ] seconds

This option specifies the length of time the default alarm will sound when a file transfer has completed.

If you’ve set a .wav sound file to be played when a file transfer completes in the Data, Data Options, General panel, it will be played in its entirety. The Sound alarm for [ ] seconds setting only determines the length of time the default beep will sound if you have not specified a .wav file.

Notes file

A Notes file is an ASCII text file named with an extension of .txt, which you can use to store a variety of information. Notes files are stored in the Notes directory, which can be specified in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel. Since Procomm Plus identifies these files by their .txt extension, any ASCII text file you place in the Notes directory can be selected as a Notes file.

To select a Notes file, click on the Notes file drop down arrow. Setup displays a list of available files, along with the [Create] and [None] selections. Click on the filename you want, or highlight it with the cursor keys and press the spacebar to select it.

If you don’t want to specify a default Notes file, select [None].

To modify the currently selected Notes file, click on Edit... to load it into your text editor. To open a new file, select [Create] in the Notes file list box, and specify a name for the new Notes file. When you press [image], the new filename will appear in the list, where you can select it for use.

Typically, a Notes file is attached to a Connection Directory entry. For your convenience, the Notes file controls are duplicated in the Connection Directory.

Connection logging

If this option is enabled, Procomm Plus will maintain a record of all successful data and fax connections with other systems. The connection log includes various entry fields, as well as the date, time and duration of the connection.

Write Status Line messages to Connection Log

If you enable this option, Procomm Plus will include data and fax Status Line messages in its Connection Log.

Remote script commands

If this option is enabled, the Procomm Plus Terminal window will accept ASPECT script commands sent by a connected computer. If you choose to allow remote script commands, you can specify a remote command password in the Password edit field to prevent unwanted access. Remote script commands are discussed in more detail in Remote ASPECT Command Format.

Add incoming calls to Caller Information Directory

If you’re using Caller ID, enable this option if you want Procomm Plus to add new caller information to your current Caller Information Directory.

By default, the Add incoming calls... option is enabled. However, the default startup.wax ASPECT script included with Procomm Plus will disable the option if it determines that your modem does not support Caller ID.

You can also select the active Caller Information Directory file by clicking on the list box associated with the Add incoming calls... setting.

Editor name & path

This field specifies the name and path of the text editor you want to use to view and edit text files and to create and edit ASPECT scripts. Procomm Plus includes a stand-alone text editor and uses it as the default, but you can specify your favorite word processor or ASCII text editor by supplying a file name and path in this field.

Transmit pacing

This setting specifies the number of milliseconds that Procomm Plus will pause between transmitted characters. This setting applies to Meta Key send text values and terminal sequences like cursor controls or function keys. The default pacing is 0 milliseconds, or no delay. This setting has no effect on file transfer protocols.

Some remote systems and some modems may require you to specify a delay if they can’t process incoming characters as fast as your computer can send them.

Pause character

This field specifies the character that Procomm Plus will use to indicate a half-second pause when processing a transmitted character string. The default character is a tilde "~" decimal 126 ASCII. The pause character is recognized in all transmitted modem strings, Meta Key send text strings and any strings sent with the ASPECT transmit command.

Do not change the Pause character setting unless you have a specific reason to do so.

Play .WAV files for these System Events

These fields allow you to specify .wav sound files to be played when the described events occur. Click on the associated Browse... buttons to select a .wav file in a standard file selection dialog.

Calling queue complete

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when the Calling Queue has finished processing a list of call entries.

Miscellaneous errors.

This field specifies the .wav sound file to be played when miscellaneous errors occur.


System Tab

Click on this tab to access settings and option groups that affect all of Procomm Plus’s communication modes. For example, Connection Directory-related options appear in the System settings group because each communication module uses the directory.


TCP/IP

TCP/IP is a protocol that defines how machines on the Internet transfer information. Standard desktop PC’s communicate via TCP/IP with an interface called a TCP/IP stack. Fundamentally, a stack allows your computer to "speak" TCP/IP. The TCP/IP stack then passes the TCP/IP information to the SLIP, PPP, or network drivers which in turn send the information to the Internet. Procomm Plus's Internet applications communicate with the TCP/IP stack through Windows sockets.


TCP/IP_1
TCP/IP

Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A network protocol used to transport information between computers on the Internet. The TCP/IP protocol is also used on smaller networks, particularly those working with the UNIX operating system.


TTY (101 key)
This is the format of the TTY keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	   TTY Function	  Transmitted Sequence

BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M


TTY (84 key)
This is the format of the TTY keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	        TTY Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Enter	^M


TVI 910, 912, 920, 925 and Esprit 3 Settings

With the Current Terminal set to TVI 910, TVI 912, TVI 920, TVI 925 or Esprit 3, or to a named option set you’ve derived from one of these, click on the Advanced... button to display the advanced settings dialog:

Protected Attribute

These settings determine the attribute used by the emulation to display "protected" text. Protected text can be assigned one or more of three attributes: Dim, Reverse and Underline.

The Dim, Reverse and Underline attributes are defined in the Data, Terminal Colors settings group. See Terminal Colors.

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the Data, Terminal Options panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


TVI 922 (101 key)
This is the format of the TVI 922 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mappable, and the NumLock key is mapped to PF1, see below.

Because of the extensive combinations supported by the TVI 922, the keypad numeric values are only available in this mapping when NumLock is ON.  The Application keys are generated with the Ctrl-key when NumLock is ON, and Shift-Ctrl when NumLock is OFF.

The editing keys Find, Select, Insert Here, Remove, Next Screen, and Prev Screen are mapped to Shifted keypad keys, as shown below. Procomm Plus supports programmable function keys within the TVI 922, which are accessed via the Ctrl- and Shift-Ctrl Function key combinations.   The codes entered for the "Shifted F6" through "Shifted F20" are used unless re-programmed by the host system.

Procomm Plus Key	   TVI 922 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	PF1	^[OP
F2	PF2	^[OQ
F3	PF3	^[OR
F4	PF4	^[OS
F6	F6	^[[17~
F7	F7	^[[18~
F8	F8	^[[19~
F9	F9	^[[20~
F10	F10	^[[21~
F11	F11	^[[23~
F12	F12	^[[24~
Shift F1	F11	^[[23~
Shift F2	F12	^[[24~
Shift F3	F13	^[[25~
Shift F4	F14	^[[26~
Shift F5	Help	^[[28~
Shift F6	Do	^[[29~
Shift F7	F17	^[[31~
Shift F8	F18	^[[32~
Shift F9	F19	^[[33~
Shift F10	F20	^[[34~
Ctrl-F6	Shifted F6	^[[37~
Ctrl-F7	Shifted F7	^[[38~
Ctrl-F8	Shifted F8	^[[39~
Ctrl-F9	Shifted F9	^[[40~
Ctrl-F10	Shifted F10	^[[41~
Ctrl-F11	Shifted F11	^[[43~
Ctrl-F12	Shifted F12	^[[44~
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shifted F11	^[[43~
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shifted F12	^[[44~
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shifted F13	^[[45~
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shifted F14	^[[46~
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shifted Help	^[[48~
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shifted Do	^[[49~
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shifted F17	^[[51~
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shifted F18	^[[52~
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shifted F19	^[[53~
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shifted F20	^[[54~
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
NumLock	PF1	^[OP
Keypad /	PF2	^[OQ
Keypad *	PF3	^[OR
Keypad -	PF4	^[OS
Keypad +	Keypad MINUS	-
Keypad End	1	1
Keypad Cursor Down	2	2
Keypad PgDn	3	3
Keypad Cursor Left	4	4
Keypad Cursor Right	6	6
Keypad Home	7	7
Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Keypad PgUp	9	9
Keypad Delete	.	.
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Shift Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Shift PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Shift Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Shift Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Shift Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Shift PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Shift Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Keypad /	Keypad Application 00	^[Oo
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Enter	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Grey Insert	Insert Here	^[[2~
Grey Delete	Remove	^[[3~
Grey Home	Find	^[[1~
Grey End	Select	^[[4~
Grey Page Up	Prev Screen	^[[5~
Grey Page Down	Next Screen	^[[6~
Shift Grey Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Grey Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Ctrl-Grey Insert	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Grey End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Ctrl-Grey Delete	Delete Line	^[[M
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC
Ctrl-Grey Cursor Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD


TVI 922 (84 key)
This is the format of the TVI 922 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Because of the extensive combinations supported by the TVI 922, the keypad numeric values are only available in this mapping when NumLock is ON.  The Application keys are generated with the Ctrl-key when NumLock is ON, and Shift-Ctrl when NumLock is OFF.

The editing keys Find, Select, Insert Here, Remove, Next Screen, and Prev Screen are mapped to Shifted keypad keys, as shown below. Procomm Plus supports programmable function keys within the TVI 922, which are accessed via the Ctrl- and Shift-Ctrl Function key combinations.   The codes entered for the "Shifted F6" through "Shifted F20" are used unless re-programmed by the host system.

Procomm Plus Key	      TVI 922 Function	                          Transmitted Sequence

F1	PF1	^[OP
F2	PF2	^[OQ
F3	PF3	^[OR
F4	PF4	^[OS
F6	F6	^[[17~
F7	F7	^[[18~
F8	F8	^[[19~
F9	F9	^[[20~
F10	F10	^[[21~
Shift F1	F11	^[[23~
Shift F2	F12	^[[24~
Shift F3	F13	^[[25~
Shift F4	F14	^[[26~
Shift F5	Help	^[[28~
Shift F6	Do	^[[29~
Shift F7	F17	^[[31~
Shift F8	F18	^[[32~
Shift F9	F19	^[[33~
Shift F10	F20	^[[34~
Ctrl-F6	Shifted F6	^[[37~
Ctrl-F7	Shifted F7	^[[38~
Ctrl-F8	Shifted F8	^[[39~
Ctrl-F9	Shifted F9	^[[40~
Ctrl-F10	Shifted F10	^[[41~
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shifted F11	^[[43~
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shifted F12	^[[44~
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shifted F13	^[[45~
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shifted F14	^[[46~
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shifted Help	^[[48~
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shifted Do	^[[49~
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shifted F17	^[[51~
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shifted F18	^[[52~
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shifted F19	^[[53~
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shifted F20	^[[54~
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad *	*	*
Keypad -	-	-
Keypad +	+	+
Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift Ctrl-PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Shift Ctrl-PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Shift Home	Find	^[[1~
Shift Cursor Left	Select	^[[4~
Shift Cursor Up	Insert Here	^[[2~
Shift PgUp	Remove	^[[3~
Shift Cursor Right	Next Screen	^[[6~
Shift Keypad 5	Prev Screen	^[[5~
Shift Keypad +	Enter	^M
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Shift Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application 00	^[Oo
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
With NUMLOCK toggled ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad .	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Keypad .	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om


Tagging, Marking, and Keeping News Articles

The News Reader allows you to easily retrieve, read, and reply to articles in newsgroups. It also gives you convenient management tools to help you make the most of your newsgroup experience:

To Do This	Do This
Tag the selected article(s) for later retrieval.	Select a News | Mark Article(s) | Tag item from the News Reader menus or from the right mouse button pop-up menu. Options are also available to Untag tagged articles.
Flag an article to indicate that you've read it.	Select a News | Mark Article(s) | Read item from the News Reader menus or from the right mouse button pop-up menu. Options are also available to mark Read article(s) as Unread.
Protect the selected article(s) whenever the News Reader purges its database.	Select a News | Mark Article(s) | Keep item from the News Reader menus or from the right mouse button pop-up menu. You can remove a Keep flag from selected article(s) with the Don't Keep options.


Technical Support

Although we've worked hard to make Procomm Plus as easy-to-use as possible, the amazing range of communications hardware and software available today can make proper configuration a daunting task. If you have a problem installing or running Procomm Plus, take a few moments to follow this checklist:

•	Make sure your system meets the minimum requirements described in "Program Requirements" in the Introduction.

•	Make sure your computer, your modem and the cables that connect them are working properly.

•	Make sure you've searched for a solution to the problem in this On-line Help system. For answers to the questions most frequently asked of our Technical Support specialists, see Common Questions and Answers.

If the suggestions above don't help you find a solution to your problem, you can contact Quarterdeck's Technical Support department for help. Currently, support options are available through a variety of methods:

Written support

Electronic support

Voice support


Teknet-class Settings See Also
Telnet-class Settings

Entry Info

Basic Options

Telnet Options

Advanced Options

Action Bars


Televideo (101 key)
This is the format of the Televideo keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	   Televideo Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
F11	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
Shift F1	Function 12 (Shift-F1)	^A`^M
Shift F2	Function 13 (Shift-F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F3	Function 14 (Shift-F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F4	Function 15 (Shift-F4)	^Ac^M
Shift F5	Function 16 (Shift-F5)	^Ad^M
Shift F6	Function 17 (Shift-F6)	^Ae^M
Shift F7	Function 18 (Shift-F7)	^Af^M
Shift F8	Function 19 (Shift-F8)	^Ag^M
Shift F9	Function 20 (Shift-F9)	^Ah^M
.Shift F10	Function 21 (Shift-F10)	^Ai^M
Shift F11	Function 22 (Shift-F11)	^Aj^M
Ctrl-F7	Character Insert	^[Q
Ctrl-F8	Character Delete	^[W
Ctrl-F9	Line Insert	^[E
Ctrl-F10	Line Delete	^[R
Ctrl-F11	Line Erase	^[T
Ctrl-F12	Page Erase	^[Y
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shift Character Insert	^[q
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shift Character Delete	^[r
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shift Line Insert	^[N
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shift Line Delete	^[O
Shift Ctrl-F11	Shift Line Erase	^[t
Shift Ctrl-F12	Shift Page Erase	^[y
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Rubout	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Keypad Insert	Character Insert	^[Q
Keypad Delete	Character Delete	^[W
Keypad Home	Home Cursor	^^	[ 1E ]
Shift Keypad Home	Clear Page	^[{
Ctrl-Keypad Home	Clear All	^Z
Keypad End	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Shift Keypad End	Erase End of Page	^[Y
Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Keypad Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Keypad Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Keypad Cursor Right	Cursor Right
Shift Keypad Insert	0	0
Shift Ctrl-Keypad End	1	1
Shift Keypad Cursor Dn	2	2
Shift Keypad PgDn	3	3
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift Ctrl-Keypad Home	7	7
Shift Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Shift Keypad PgUp	9	9
Shift Keypad Delete	.	.
Grey Insert	Character Insert	^[Q
Shift Grey Page Up	Line Insert	^[E
Ctrl-Grey Insert	Shift Character Insert	^[q
Grey Delete	Character Delete	^[W
Shift Grey Delete	Line Delete	^[R
Ctrl-Grey Delete	Shift Character Delete	^[r
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^^
Shift Grey Home	Cursor to Start of Text	^[{
Ctrl-Grey Home	Clear All	^Z
Grey End	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Shift Grey End	Erase End of Page	^[Y
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Shift Grey Cursor Up	Shift Cursor Up	^[j
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Shift Grey Cursor Down	Shift Cursor Down	^J
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L


Televideo (84-key)
This is the format for the Televideo keymappings for the 84-key keyboard. This mapping is used for all of the Televideo terminal except the TVI 922. F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      Televideo Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
Shift F1	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
Shift F2	Function 12 (Shift-F1)	^A`^M
Shift F3	Function 13 (Shift-F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F4	Function 14 (Shift-F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F5	Function 15 (Shift-F4)	^Ac^M
Shift F6	Function 16 (Shift-F5)	^Ad^M
Shift F7	Function 17 (Shift-F6)	^Ae^M
Shift F8	Function 18 (Shift-F7)	^Af^M
Shift F9	Function 19 (Shift-F8)	^Ag^M
Shift F10	Function 20 (Shift-F9)	^Ah^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 21 (Shift-F10)	^Ai^M
Ctrl-F2	Function 22 (Shift-F11)	^Aj^M
Ctrl-F5	Character Insert	^[Q
Ctrl-F6	Character Delete	^[W
Ctrl-F7	Line Insert	^[E
Ctrl-F8	Line Delete	^[R
Ctrl-F9	Line Erase	^[T
Ctrl-F10	Page Erase	^[Y
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shift Character Insert	^[q
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shift Character Delete	^[r
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shift Line Insert	^[N
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shift Line Delete	^[O
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shift Line Erase	^[t
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shift Page Erase	^[y
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Rubout	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad +	Enter	^M
Insert	Character Insert	^[Q
Shift Insert	Line Insert	^[E
Ctrl-Insert	Shift Character Insert	^[q
Delete	Character Delete	^[W
Shift Delete	Line Delete	^[R
Ctrl-Delete	Shift Character Delete	^[r
Home	Home Cursor	^^
Shift Home	Cursor to Start of Text	^[{
Ctrl-Home	Clear All	^Z
End	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Shift End	Erase End of Page	^[Y
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Shift Cursor Up	Shift Cursor Up	^[j
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^V
Shift Cursor Down	Shift	Cursor Down	^J
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^K
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^V
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Home Cursor	^^
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Erase End of Field	^[Y
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert	^[Q
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete Character	^[W
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Enter	^M


Telnet

A Terminal emulation that communicates over TCP/IP. A Telnet client logs on to a Telnet host, and can then access information. If supported by the host, file transfer protocols such as Zmodem and Kermit may be used to download files.


Telnet Connections

The following topics describe the Telnet support within Procomm Plus. These topics include step-by-step instructions on how to add a Telnet connection, how to add a Telnet entry to your Connection Directory and how to connect to the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS via Telnet.

A Telnet connection provides point-to-point terminal communications over TCP/IP networks. Typically, these connections are made with either VT-102 or ANSI-BBS terminal emulation. Depending on the host, file transfers are also possible using Zmodem or Kermit.

Using Telnet Connections

Telnet Troubleshooting


Telnet Entry Class See Also
Telnet Entry Class

Step-by-Step: Adding a Telnet-class Entry

Telnet-class Settings


Telnet Settings

The Internet, Telnet settings group allows you to determine how or if Procomm Plus will negotiate with a host when establishing a telnet session. You can save and reference the settings in the group as an option set, which allows you to create multiple "profiles" and select them quickly from within a Connection Directory entry or from an ASPECT script.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.

From within Setup, select the Internet, Telnet buttons to display the panel:

Disable all telnet negotiations

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will refuse to negotiate with the host when establishing the settings for a telnet session. By default, the option is disabled.

This setting is useful if you connect to a telnet that doesn't support negotiated session settings. However, you should only enable it on the advice of the telnet host's administrator.

Negotiate terminal size

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will negotiate with the host when establishing a telnet session to determine the terminal size. It is enabled by default.

Negotiate terminal type

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will negotiate with the host when establishing a telnet session to determine the terminal type. It is enabled by default.

Set session to binary mode

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will specify a binary mode when negotiating with a telnet host. It is enabled by default.

Allow automatic telnet logon

Telnet hosts can query for logon information within the connection negotiations process. When queried, Procomm Plus will respond by sending the Logon Info data from the Connection Directory entry that you used to connect to the telnet host if this check box is enabled. This option is enabled by default.

For help in configuring an entry's Logon Info settings, see "Logon Info..." in Telnet-class: Entry Info.

Force speed to...

If you need to use a particular baud rate for a telnet session, you can click on this list box to select it. By default, it's set to Disabled, which allows Procomm Plus to negotiate with the host to establish a connection speed.

Set Xwindow value to...

Specifies the display value Procomm Plus should use in negotiating a telnet session with an X-Windows host. This field is empty by default. The host administrator can advise you on the value you should enter in this field, if any is necessary.


Telnet Troubleshooting

Alternate Terminal Names

When Telnet negotiates a connection, the host system typically requests your terminal type. By default, Procomm Plus sends the name of the terminal you’re using during the connection - for example, for VT-100, Procomm Plus sends vt100. However, some host systems will not recognize this exact terminal name; instead, they might require the string "dec-vt100".

You can specify the string to be sent for any Telnet entry in your Connection Directory; display the Telnet Options group in the directory for that entry and type the required string in the field When negotiating the Telnet terminal type...

UNIX termcap tables

On UNIX systems, terminal emulation sequences are handled through the termcaps table; unfortunately, these tables are often wrong or incomplete. If you encounter problems with function keys or arrow keys while using Telnet with a UNIX host, check with the host system administrator to see if the termcap file is set up correctly on the host.

File Transfers through Telnet

Although FTP is preferred for file transfers, you can use Telnet if necessary. However, note that many UNIX machines reserve or process control characters, and this will interfere with a transfer. Under such circumstances, use the KERMIT protocol in binary transfer mode. If you encounter problems when using Zmodem to transfer a file to or from a UNIX or VMS host, make sure you add the "-e" switch to the Zmodem protocol command line you type on the host.


Telnet and the Terminal Window

Functionally, the Telnet window operates almost identically to the standard Procomm Plus Terminal window.

Most Telnet host systems require the VT-102 terminal emualtion; however, if you're connecting to a PC-based BBS via Telnet, you should be able to use ANSI-BBS to take advantage of ANSI graphics and color if the BBS supports it.

For more information on the Action Bar and menu system available within the Telnet window, see The Terminal Window Menus and Action Bar.


Telnet, FTP, and Web Manual Connections

If the Telnet- class is selected when you request a manual connection, you're prompted to enter the host name or IP address and other important information. Please see Step-by-Step: Connecting manually to an FTP Host.

If you access the Internet through a network, or if you access it through a dial-up provider and you’re already connected, Procomm Plus immediately begins negotiating to connect to the Host Name/IP Address you specified. If you access the Internet through a dial-up provider, but you’re not connected when you request a Manual Connect, Procomm Plus must establish the dial-up connection before attempting to connect to the name or address you enter.

Telnet-, FTP- and Web-class connections use the current or default settings that are in effect at the time you attempt the manual connection.


Telnet-class Settings

The Telnet-class entry settings are divided into five groups:

Entry Info

Basic Options

Telnet Options

Advanced Options

Action Bars

The most-used group, Entry Info, is selected automatically when you switch to the Telnet class. To select a different group of settings, click on the appropriate button.


Telnet-class: Action Bars

The Telnet-class Action Bars fields allow you to specify the Action Bars displayed in the Terminal window when you connect to an entry.

You can select Action Bars to be loaded at the Top, Bottom, Left or Right border of the Terminal window, or in a Floating pad by clicking on the appropriate drop down list box. By default, the currently-displayed Action Bars will be used, indicated by the [Current] list item.


Telnet-class: Advanced Options

The Telnet-class Advanced Options settings allow you to fine-tune the Terminal window for your session, and to specify some of the files used after you’ve connected to the entry.

Terminal Font

If you’ve created a named option set in the Data, Terminal Fonts panel of Setup, you can select it to be used when you’re connected with this entry. By default, the normal font set is selected; click on the Terminal Font drop down list box to select a different set.

Terminal Colors

If you’ve created a named option set in the Data, Terminal Colors panel of Setup, you can select it to be used when you’re connected with this entry. By default, the normal terminal colors set is selected; click on the Terminal Colors drop down list box to select a different set.

Meta Keys

Click on this drop down list box to select a Meta Key file to be loaded when you dial this entry. By default, the currently-loaded .key file is used; this is indicated by the [Current] setting.

Translate Table

Click on this drop down list box to select a Translate Table to be loaded when you dial this entry. By default, the currently-loaded .xlt file is used, indicated by the [Current] setting.


Telnet-class: Basic Options

The Telnet-class Basic Options settings allow you to determine the basic characteristics of the Terminal window after the connection is made, such as the current emulation and the file transfer protocol.

Terminal

Click on this list box to select an emulation to be used when connecting to this entry. Any Terminal named option sets you’ve created will also be included in the list.

Protocol

Click on this list box to select a default file transfer protocol to be used when you’re connected with this entry. Any Protocol named option sets you’ve created will also be available in the list.

Data Options

The general Data, Data Options set to be used with this entry. By default, this is set to normal options, but you can select another set by clicking on the list box.

Script

An ASPECT script to be launched when this entry is used. Click on this list box to select a script from among those stored in the default Script path defined in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup.

To specify how the script is handled, click on the Setup... button. This opens the Script Execution Options dialog.

Capture

A Capture file to be associated with this entry. Click on this list box to select an existing Capture file from among those stored in the default Capture path defined in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup.

To specify how the Capture file will be handled when used with this entry, click on the field’s associated Setup... button. This opens the Capture File Options dialog.


Telnet-class: Entry Info

The fields in the Telnet-class Entry Info group are similar to those you might find in an address book, such as a name, address and company name.

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Host/IP Address

The Internet name or IP address of the telnet site or location. For more information see A Word on Internet Addresses.

Company

The business or company title for the entry. This field provides a convenient way to locate entries, as it is referenced in the directory’s Find dialog. See Searching for Entries.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.

Logon Info...

Click on this button to open a dialog where you can specify logon information for the site or system you’re calling. The Logon Info values are very convenient if you’re using an ASPECT script to automate your connection to a host system. Each logon string value is available in an ASPECT system variable after the Connection Directory has dialed the entry. This allows you to easily reference them from within a script.

Password

An entry’s Password logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $PASSWORD system variable and sent when you select Data | Send Information | Password in the Terminal window.

User ID

An entry’s User ID logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $USERID system variable and sent when you select Data | Send Information | User Id in the Terminal window.

Miscellaneous

An entry’s Miscellaneous logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $MISC system variable. and sent when you select Data | Send Information | Misc String in the Terminal window.

Click on OK to accept the values and return to the main Connection Directory window. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Telnet-class: Telnet Options

The Telnet Options settings determine how a telnet connection made with the entry will be handled.

Telnet Options

If you’ve created a named option set for the Internet, Telnet Options group in Setup, you can click on this list box to select it to be used with the entry. By default, the normal telnet option set, or your current option set, is selected.

For more information on the settings referenced by a Telnet Options named option set, see Telnet Options.

When negotiating the Telnet...

Click in this edit field to specify a terminal id string to be transmitted when negotiating a telnet connection for this entry. This field is blank by default.

Telnet Port

Click in this edit field to specify the Telnet Port to be used with this connection. By default, the standard port, 23, is used.

Do not alter this setting unless you are specifically required to do so by a telnet host or site. Most telnet systems use the standard telnet port, 23.


Terminal

A piece of hardware that looks like a personal computer, but typically has no CPU. Also called a "dumb terminal." Used for input to mainframes and other powerful computers. Terminals were more prevalent before the advent of personal computers.


Terminal Colors

The Data Terminal Colors group allows you to specify the colors used to display data in the Terminal display. The group can be saved as an option set, then linked to a Connection Directory entry, activated from an ASPECT script or selected for re-use from within Setup.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Terminal Colors buttons to display the settings panel:

Attribute Display

This group allows you to view and select the currently-configured attributes for data in the Terminal display.

To modify a setting, click on the color box you want to change; a heavy black outline indicates that a color box is selected. You can also select multiple color boxes, either by holding down the [image] key as you click on them, or by clicking and dragging over them.

After you’ve selected one or more color boxes, you can easily modify its foreground and background colors, or enable or disable such features as blinking, bold or underline display.

Foreground Coler / Background Color

These controls reflect the current foreground and background colors of the selected color box. To change a color, simply click on it in the control!

Bold font

Enables or disables the use of a bold font in the selected attribute color box.

Underline font

Enables or disables the use of an underline font in the selected attribute color box.

Blinks

Enables or disables the use of a blinking font in the selected attribute color box.

The Bold font, Underline font and Blinks settings do not affect the Normal terminal display attribute in emulations that by definition have no display attributes, or in emulations whose attributes can be configured by the host. The first group includes TTY and VIDTEX; the second includes IBM PC and ANSI-BBS.

The Bold font, Underline font and Blinks check boxes can appear checked, unchecked or darkened depending on the current attributes of the color boxes you’ve selected. For example, if you highlight two different display attributes, one bold and one underlined, both the bold and underline check boxes will appear darkened. In this case, the darkening means that both the bold and the underline attributes are enabled in at least one of the selected color boxes.

Blink rate

If you’ve selected a blinking font, you can increase or decrease the blink rate by sliding this control to the right or left, respectively.


Terminal Emulation

Software that makes a PC mimic a terminal. Since the terminal standards and protocols have been adopted by BBSs and other Information services, a wide range of terminal emulations allows you to logon to most services. Procomm Plus provides thirty-six different emulations.


Terminal Fonts

Settings in the Data, Terminal Fonts group allow you to specify the font used to display data in the Terminal display, to enlarge or shrink the Terminal window, and to determine how the Terminal window should respond when you enlarge or shrink it.

The Data, Terminal Fonts group can be saved and referenced as a named option set. This allows you to create different "profiles" that you can link to Connection Directory entries, call from an ASPECT script or quickly select for use within Setup.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Terminal Fonts buttons to display the settings panel:

Terminal autosize

The Procomm Plus Terminal window can automatically change the size of the system font or the Terminal window itself to accommodate your preferences! This allows you to resize the Terminal window or select a different font while retaining the same number of rows and columns in the Terminal display. Click on the Terminal autosize list box to select the behavior you want:

Window based on font

Select this setting if you want the Terminal window size automatically changed to match the font size you specify. This gives you more control over the font used to display your data.

Font based on window

Select this setting if you want the font size automatically changed to match the current Terminal display dimensions. This is the default behavior, which allows you to resize the Terminal window without worrying about the current font or its size.

If you select Font based on window, the Size list box is grayed, as the font size is then based on the size of the Terminal window itself.

No autosize

Select this setting if you want to be able to resize the Terminal smaller than the logical Terminal display. Note that you may not be able to view all of the data in the Terminal display without scrolling if you use this setting.

Font

To select the Terminal font, click on the font name or enter the name in the text entry box. Click on a point value in the Size list to specify a font size. An example of the font and size you’ve selected appears in the Sample text box.

If you select a larger font and the Terminal autosize option is set to Window based on font, the resulting Terminal display will take a proportionally larger amount of the Terminal workspace.

Only monospaced fonts, such as the default PCPlus 437 are used for the Terminal font. Most TrueType fonts do not contain the correct graphics characters needed for proper terminal emulation. This will result in incorrect screen displays in many cases. If you switch fonts and encounter problems, try switching back to the PCPlus 437 font.


Terminal Options

The Data, Terminal Options group includes settings for all of the terminal emulations available in the Terminal window. This section documents the settings for the thirty-six standard emulations provided with Procomm Plus.

Most of the emulations supported by Procomm Plus have identical Setup options which determine how the Terminal display is updated and scrolled, and the number of scrollback pages the Terminal provides. Rather than list and discuss the common settings panels for each of the emulations, we’ll discuss them using the ANSI BBS panel, then document any special settings or considerations for the remaining emulations.

See Common Terminal Options for the discussion of the terminal options common to all of the terminal emulations. See the following topics for advanced,emulation-specific options:

ANSI-BBS and IBM PC Advanced Settings

IBM 3101 and IBM 3161 Advanced Settings

IBM 3270, TVI 950, TVI955 and Wyse 100 Advanced Settings

RIPscrip Advanced Settings

TVI 910, 912, 925 and Esprit 3 Advanced Settings

VT-220, VT-320 and TVI 922 Advanced Settings

Wyse 50, Wyse 60 and ADM 31 Advanced Settings

Each terminal emulation can be saved and referenced as an option set. This allows you to create different terminal settings and access them quickly from the Terminal window’s Quick Select Line or an ASPECT script. You can also link them to Connection Directory entries.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.

If you’ve installed Dynamic Link Terminal, or .dlt modules in Procomm Plus’s executable directory, the emulations they support will appear as selections in the Current Terminal list box.


Terminal display
Terminal display.

The Terminal display is where the characters received by your computer actually appear. If you are using a modem, or if you are connected directly to another system, characters may appear in the display as Procomm Plus starts.

The size of the Terminal display is determined by the number of rows and columns specified for the terminal in Setup, the particular emulation you’re using, and the size of the current terminal font. It is also affected by any elements from the other two segments that you’ve "hidden" by toggling them off from the Setup menu.

You can also change the size of the display by stretching or shrinking the Terminal window. By default, Procomm Plus will automatically re-size the font to fit the new dimensions of the window. For help in changing this behavior,  see "Terminal autosize" in Terminal Fonts.


Terminal frame
Terminal frame.

By default, a graphical frame is drawn around the Terminal display. Its purpose is only cosmetic; you can remove it by unchecking the Display terminal frame check box in the Data, Window Colors, Workspace panel in Setup.


Terminal workspace
Terminal workspace.

Surrounding the Terminal display and the frame is another graphical region called the Terminal workspace. This region is primarily cosmetic. However, the workspace can be used by ASPECT scripts to display graphical objects for almost any purpose.

The size of the Terminal workspace is determined by the same factors that affect the display. By default, it is filled with a graphical pattern. You can select a different pattern or change its color in the Data, Window Colors, Workspace panel in Setup.


Text File

A file containing only display characters from the ASCII character set, and a small number of control codes such as line feed and carriage return. When viewed, a text file looks like a document created on a typewriter, with no special fonts, formatting, or graphics.


The ASCII Protocol

,ASCII stands for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It consists of 128 seven bit codes, 0 - 127, that represent the upper and lower case alphabet, numbers, standard keyboard characters and some specific control characters. Many computers implement an "8-bit" set, which includes values from 128 to 255, but these upper 128 characters may differ from system to system. By definition, the lower 128 are always the same.

The ASCII protocol has no error checking, but it can use "software" or "XON/XOFF" flow control to pace the transfer of data. Software flow control uses ASCII decimal codes 17 and 19, or Ctrl-Q/Ctrl-S to control data flow. Both the sending and receiving system must have software flow control enabled for this process to function properly. When the sending system receives a XON from the receiver, it stops sending until the receiver transmits a XOFF.

In addition to software control, you can implement other forms of flow control using character pacing, line pacing and the pace character. The Setup options for the ASCII protocol are discussed in ASCII Protocol Settings.


The ASPECT Editor

The ASPECT Editor is a feature-rich text editor that is capable of handling very large text files. While it was designed specifically for ASPECT programmers, it is also an excellent general purpose Windows editor for any ASCII text file!

If you’ve used Windows Notepad, or other Windows-based text editors, you’ll find the ASPECT Editor very familiar. Even if you haven’t used other Windows editors, you’ll find the ASPECT Editor easy to learn.

Running the ASPECT Editor

Opening a File with the ASPECT Editor

Saving a File with the ASPECT Editor

Editing Multiple Documents with the ASPECT Editor

Using the ASPECT Editor

The ASPECT Editor Status Line

Configuring the ASPECT Editor

For the ASPECT Programmer

The ASPECT Editor Menus and Action Bar®


The ASPECT Editor See Also
The ASPECT Editor

Running the ASPECT Editor

Opening a File with the ASPECT Editor

Saving a File with the ASPECT Editor

Editing Multiple Documents with the ASPECT Editor

Using the ASPECT Editor

The ASPECT Editor Status Line

Configuring the ASPECT Editor

For the ASPECT Programmer

The ASPECT Editor Action Bar® and Menus


The Action Bar Editor
The Action Bar® Editor

The Procomm Plus Action Bar Editor allows you to create your own Action Bars, or load and modify the Action Bars included with Procomm Plus. The editor is easy to use, and features a "drag and drop" edit dialog, where you can:

•	Specify the number of buttons on an Action Bar.

•	Customize each Action Bar button to perform one of six kinds of functions.

•	Customize the icon image displayed on an Action Bar button.

After you’ve finished your Action Bar, you can load it and use it just like the default Action Bars included with Procomm Plus.

Running the Action Bar Editor

Opening an Action Bar File

The Action Bar Editor Window

Positioning an Action Bar

Saving an Action Bar File

Editing an Action Bar

Using the Action Bar Editor

Action Bar Icon Functions

Step-by-Step: Adding an Action Bar Button

Step-by-Step: Adding a Customized Button

Step-by-Step: Removing an Action Bar Button

The Action Bar Editor's Menus


The Action Bar Editor See Also
The Action Bar Editor

Running the Action Bar Editor

Opening an Action Bar File

The Action Bar Editor Window

Positioning an Action Bar

Saving an Action Bar File

Editing an Action Bar

Using the Action Bar Editor

Action Bar Icon Functions

Step-by-Step: Adding an Action Bar Button

Step-by-Step: Adding a Customized Button

Step-by-Step: Removing an Action Bar Button

The Action Bar Editor's Menus


The Action Bar Editor Window

By default, Action Bars you create or load are displayed at the top of the editor’s main window.

In addition to the currently-loaded Action Bar, the editor’s main window displays a status line identical to the Terminal window’s. However, these features are provided in the editor only to allow you to test or preview your Action Bar.

For example, if you rest the mouse cursor on an Action Bar button, the editor will display its ToolTip, just as it would appear in the Terminal window. If you click on a button, the editor will report the button’s function in a standard dialog or, in the case of the Action Bar list boxes, mimic the control’s function.


The Action Bar Editor's Menus

 Menu | Item                          Description

File | New	Creates a new, untitled Action Bar identical to the default bar included with Procomm Plus Terminal window.
File | Open...	Opens a standard file open dialog. Action Bar files are stored in the Procomm Plus home directory with an extension of .pwb. The editor’s file open dialog pre-selects this file type for you.
File | Save	Opens a standard file save dialog, as discussed in Saving an Action Bar File.
File |  Save As...	Opens a standard file save dialog, as discussed in Saving an Action Bar File.
File | Exit	Closes the editor.
Edit | Edit Action Bar...	Opens the main editing dialog, as discussed in Editing an Action Bar.
Edit | Change Position...	Opens the Change Action Bar Position dialog, as discussed in Positioning an Action Bar.
Edit | Large Icons	Toggles the Action Bar display between small and large buttons.
Help | Contents	Opens the on-line help system and displays information about the editor.  is the keyboard shortcut.
Help | Search for Help on...	Opens the help utility to a Search dialog where you can search for topics.
Help | How to Use Help	Opens the on-line help system with a topic explaining how to use the help system.
Help | About Action Bar Editor...	Displays version information about the Action Bar Editor.


The Action Bar®

Perhaps the most powerful feature of a communications module window is the Action Bar. Located just below the menu bar, it acts as a graphical "control center," where you can access the module’s most commonly-used menu functions with the click of a button! It even allows you to quickly select Connection Directory entries or groups to dial and ASPECT scripts to execute if the module can use them.

For example, instead of opening the Connection Directory to select and connect to an entry, you can select it from the Rapid Connect list box. Since you can edit the Terminal window’s Action Bars, or even create new ones, you may find yourself using them exclusively!

The Terminal window can use up to five Action Bars, including those you’ve created with the Action Bar Editor. For help in using the editor, see The Action Bar® Editor.

To activate an Action Bar icon, simply click on it. If the icon is associated with a toggle function such as File Capture or Print Capture, its button will remained depressed while that function is active. You can either click on the depressed icon or access the appropriate menu item to terminate the function.

If an icon’s associated function is unavailable for some reason, the button will be disabled and its colors will be inverted or grayed. Clicking on a disabled button will have no effect.

If you’re not certain of an icon’s associated function, position the mouse pointer over the icon, and leave it for a few seconds. Procomm Plus will display the icon’s label in a small pop-up beside the pointer. For instance, if you leave the pointer over the telephone icon in the Terminal window, the label Hangup is displayed. If Procomm Plus does not display the ToolTip, make sure that the ToolTips item is checked on the window’s Setup menu.


The Add Fax Recipient to Connection Directory dialog

The Send Fax dialog's Send Fax To panel includes an Add to Connection Directory... button. Unless you have entered a fax recipient and fax number in the Send to and Fax Number fields, this button is disabled.

Click this button to open the Add to Connection Directory... dialog, where you can add a fax connection to the Connection Directory "on-the-fly." The fax recipient's name and the fax number that you entered in the Add to Connection Directory... dialog appear in the Name and Primary Fax Number fields. In addition, the dialog contains fields for the remaining values that constitute a basic Fax-class Connection Directory entry. For more information on these fields, please refer to Fax-class: Entry Info Settings.


The Annotation Toolbar

     Annotation       Menu | Item      Description
 Toolbar Button

 Using the Annotation Toolbar

	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Select Object	Click on this button or menu item when you want to modify or select objects you’ve placed in the annotation layer. For more information, see Modifying an Object.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Text	Select this to place a text box. Once you’ve placed the box, you can enter the text to appear within it and modify its appearance. For more information, see Placing Text.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Line	Select this to draw a plain straight line using the current Line Width and Line Color settings. For more information, see Drawing a Line.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Arrow	Select this to draw a straight line tipped by an arrowhead, using the current Line Width and Line Color settings.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Freehand Line	Select this to draw a freehand line using the current Line Width and Line Color settings.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Rectangle	Select this to draw a rectangle, using the current Line Width and Line Color settings for its border and the current Fill Color for its interior. For more information, see Drawing a Shape.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Rounded Rectangle	Select this to draw a rectangle with rounded corners. The current Line Width and Line Color settings will be used for its border and the current Fill Color will be used for its interior.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Circle	Select this to draw a circle, using the current Line Width and Line Color settings for its border and the current Fill Color for its interior.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Polygon	Select this to draw a polygon using the current Line Width and Line Color settings for its border and the current Fill Color for its interior. For more information, see Drawing a Polygon.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Move to Front	Moves the currently selected object(s) in front of any other annotation objects. This command is also available from the pop-up menu that’s displayed when you right click on an annotation object.
	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Move to Back	Moves the currently selected object(s) behind any other annotation objects. This command is also available from the pop-up menu that’s displayed when you right click on an annotation object.


The Areas List

While you’re reading the messages in a packet, you may wish to quickly switch topic areas, perhaps to reference a message in another area, or skip ahead. The viewer’s Areas List dialog allows you to jump directly to any area within the current packet.

To display the dialog, select Areas | List... or click the List Areas in Packet Action Bar button. The dialog displays the following information for each area in the packet:

The topic area number and name, as supplied by the BBS.

The total number of messages in the area.

The number of messages in the area addressed directly to you.

By default, the dialog only displays the areas that actually contain messages. If you’d like to display all the areas, enable the Show All Areas check box at the bottom of the dialog. You can also change the default mode by enabling or disabling the Show All Areas check box in the General section of the viewer Setup.

To jump directly to a specific area, double click on the corresponding entry.

You can also instruct the BBS QWK mail service to Add or Drop message areas from future packets. To add an area that you don’t currently receive, highlight it and click on Add. To drop an area you’re currently receiving, highlight it and click on Drop.

The Add and Drop functions may not be supported by all QWK mail doors. Check with the sysop of a system to see if that BBS supports these functions.

The viewer automatically gathers all messages addressed to you in all of the areas and places them in a special area named Personal. Click on the Personal Messages button to display this area.

You can also navigate to the previous area or the next area from the Action Bar, or by selecting Areas | Previous and Areas | Next, respectively.


The Aspect Editor Action Bar® and Menus
The ASPECT Editor Menus and Action Bar®

   Action Bar     Menu | Item      Description
      Button

Using the ASPECT Editor's Menus and Action Bar

	File | New	Opens a new, untitled text file window.
	File | Open	Displays a standard File Open dialog, allowing you to select and open an existing text file.
	File | Close	Closes the active text file. If you have made changes but haven’t saved them, the editor will prompt you before closing the file.
	File | Save	Saves the current text to a disk file. This command is disabled if the text file you’re editing has not yet been saved with a filename.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Save As...	Opens a standard File Save dialog, where you can specify a new filename and/or location for the active window’s file.
	File | Print...	Prints the file in the current editor window to the selected Windows printer.
	File | Print Setup...	Opens a standard Print Setup dialog, where you can specify printing characteristics like paper orientation, printer fonts and paper size.
	File |  Preferences...	Opens the Preferences dialog, which is explained in Configuring the Editor.
	File | Exit	Exits the ASPECT Editor. If you’ve modified an open text file and haven’t saved the changes, the editor will ask whether you wish to save the file before closing it.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File |  1, 2, 3 or 4	The editor remembers the filenames of the last four files you’ve edited. To reload one of them, simply select it from the File menu.
	Edit | Undo	Reverses the effect of the last action you performed. This command is useful if you happen to make a mistake and want to restore deleted text.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Redo	Reverses the effect of the last Undo command.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the selected text from the file and places it in the Windows Clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Cut	Deletes the selected text from the file and places it in the Windows Clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste	Copies text from the Windows Clipboard and places it in the active ASPECT Editor window.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | OEMKeys	Toggles the editor's handling of characters with ASCII values greater than 127. If this menu item is checked, these characters will be entered as their OEM symbols. Otherwise, their ANSI symbols will be used.
	Find | Find...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a search string of up to 31 characters. The search is performed in the active document from the current cursor position onward.  is the keyboard shortcut. You can force a case-sensitive search, or limit the search to only those whole words that match the string by selecting options within the dialog.
	Find | Repeat Last Find	Repeats the last Find... command you executed.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Find | Replace...	Opens the Replace dialog where you can specify a string of up to 31 characters to be searched for and replaced with another string you specify. The search is performed in the active document from the current cursor position. You can force a case-sensitive search, or you can limit the search to only those whole words that match the string by selecting options within the dialog. If your search string is found, you can choose to Find Next, Replace or Replace All by clicking the appropriate buttons.
	Find |  Line Number...	Allows you to jump directly to a particular line in the current text file.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Tools |  Compile...	Saves the current text file to disk and attempts to compile it as an ASPECT script. If the script compiles successfully, the resulting file is saved with a .wax extension. If the script you’re compiling has not yet been given a filename, the editor prompts you for a name and location. If you’re editing an existing file, the text is automatically saved to the same file.
	Tools | Compile Options...	Opens the Compiler Options dialog, where you can specify settings to be used by the compiler when it’s called from the editor. The selections you make in this dialog from within the editor will also affect the settings of scripts compiled within Procomm Plus itself, with the exception of the unsaved additional arguments. For complete details on the Compiler Options dialog, see "Compiler Options" in the ASPECT on-line help file.
	Tools | Dialog Editor...	Launches the Dialog Editor. You can cut and paste dialogbox blocks between the two editors by using the Windows Clipboard.
	Tools | User Window Editor	Launches the User Window Editor. You can cut and paste uwincreate blocks between the two editors by using the Windows Clipboard.
	Window |  Action Bar	Toggles the display of the editor’s Action Bar.
	Window |  Large Action Bar	Toggles the display of the editor’s Action Bar between small buttons and large buttons.
	Window |  ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar help text.
	Window | Tile Horizontal	Displays or "tiles" all of the open text windows within the editor workspace. The windows are displayed horizontally.  You can switch the active focus to another window by clicking once anywhere within it.
	Window | Tile Vertical	Displays or "tiles" all of the open text windows, with each window automatically sized to fit within the editor workspace. The windows are displayed side-by-side.  You can switch the active focus to another window by clicking once anywhere within it.
	Window |  Cascade	Displays all of the open text windows in the familiar overlapping style used often in the Windows 3.x Program Manager.
	Window |  Arrange Icons	Arranges all of the text windows you’ve minimized to icons neatly in the lower left hand corner of the editor workspace.
	Window |  1,2,3 ...	The editor lists all of the open file windows at the bottom of the Window menu. To make an open file the active window, simply select it from the list.
	Help | Contents	Opens the ASPECT Editor on-line help window.
	Help |  How to use Help	Opens the on-line help system with a topic explaining how to use the help system.
	Help | Script Reference	Opens the ASPECT on-line help system.
	Help |  Search for a Script Topic...	Opens the help utility to a Search dialog where you can search for ASPECT-related topics.
	Help | About ASPECT Editor	Opens a dialog that displays information about the program.


The ASPECT Editor Status Line

At the bottom of the editor window is its status line, which has fields that report several important conditions:

•	The current line and column position of the editor cursor.

•	The status of the CapsLock key.

If the CapsLock key is "down," the second field on the status line will report "CAPS". Otherwise, it will be blank.

•	The status of the NumLock key.

If the NumLock key is "down," the third field on the status line will report "NUM". Otherwise, it will be blank.

•	Whether the editor is in Overtype or Insert mode.

If the characters you type will overwrite characters in the file, the fourth field will report "OVR". Otherwise, it will report "INS". You can toggle this setting by pressing the Insert key.

The status line fields are constantly updated as you work in the ASPECT Editor.


The Basics of Understanding Procomm Plus

If you're familiar with Windows, but new to Procomm Plus or communications software in general, the following topics will help you become familiar with the features and abilities of Procomm Plus.

If you’re new to Windows itself, the following topics will introduce you to the fundamentals of using Procomm Plus. At the same time, these topics will also explain some of the fundamentals of the Windows environment.

A thorough discussion of the Windows environment is beyond the scope of this online help system, however. For more information about Windows itself, refer to the documentation that came with your copy of Windows.

Learn more about the basics of Procomm Plus in the following topics:

Integrating Communications - An overview of the Procomm Plus integrated communication modules, and how they interact.

Common Window Elements - An introduction to the elements of a Procomm Plus communication window, including the Action Bar and more.

Introducing the Connection Directory - An introduction to the Procomm Plus Connection Directory.

"Drag and Drop" Support - An explanation of Procomm Plus’s "Drag and Drop" support.

Additional Documentation

Procomm Plus’s printed manual and the Help system provide you with a wealth of information and advice. However, if you received Procomm Plus on CD-ROM, you have access to additional resources!  We’ve provided extensive documentation in HTML format on the CD, including:

♦	The step-by-step discussions from the printed manual, as well as additional step-by-steps that weren’t included in the manual.

♦	The ASPECT Reference guide in a hyperlinked, serial format. Additionally, we’ve provided source files for more comprehensive ASPECT script examples.

♦	In-depth discussions about the various modes and utilities included in Procomm Plus.

♦	Technical Bulletins to help you solve problems you may encounter.

The HTML files are indexed and cross-referenced, so you can always find the information you need. To access them, insert your Procomm Plus CD, and browse the \HTMLDocs directory.

index.htm provides an overview of the full HTML Documentation set and offers an excellent starting point. user.htm provides access to the On-line User Guide, while steps.htm is an overview of the On-line Step-by-step guide, and aspect.htm is the comprehensive ASPECT On-line Reference launching pad. techdocs.htm is a listing of the technical bulletins provided.

If you have space, you can copy the entire contents of the htmldocs directory to your hard drive.


The Basics of Understanding PROCOMM PLUS See Also
The Basics of Understanding Procomm Plus

Integrating Communications

Common Window Elements

Introducing the Connection Directory

"Drag and Drop" Support


The CIS B+ Protocol

The CIS-B+ protocol is for use with the CompuServe B, Compuserve Quick B and CompuServe B+ protocols, which are only available on the CompuServe Information Service. The CIS-B+ protocol sends the filename and size information for each file, but does not support batch transfers.

Procomm Plus supports both 16- and 32-bit CRC error checking and packet lengths of up to 2K in the CIS-B+ protocol. These values are automatically negotiated before the transfer. Note that long packet lengths of 2K will result in longer delays if you abort a CIS B+ transfer.

The Setup options for the CIS-B+ protocol are limited, but they’re discussed in CompuServe CIS-B+ Protocol Options.


The Caller ID Directory Editor

The Caller ID Directory Editor is an easy-to-use utility that allows you to create and maintain lists of Caller IDs. These lists can then be used to either grant or deny access to your computer, and to specify how Procomm Plus should respond when answering an incoming call from a particular Caller ID.

Caller ID Directory Editor files are stored in Procomm Plus’s home directory, and have an extension of .cid. Each directory file can contain up to 500 entries. The default directory file, pw4.cid, is created the first time you run the directory.

Opening the Caller ID Directory Editor

The Caller ID Directory Editor window

Step-by-Step: Adding a Caller ID Record

Global Screening

Importing Caller ID Directory Editor Entries

Exporting Caller ID Directory Editor Entries

The Caller ID Directory Editor's Menus and Action Bar®


The Caller ID Directory Editor See Also
The Caller ID Directory Editor

Opening the Caller ID Directory Editor

The Caller ID Directory Editor window

Step-by-Step: Adding a Caller ID Record

Global Screening

Importing Caller ID Directory Editor Entries

Exporting Caller ID Directory Editor Entries

The Caller ID Directory Editor's Action Bar® and Menus


The Caller ID Directory Editor window

As the Caller ID Directory Editor opens, it displays the current Caller ID file in its title bar. The directory’s main window features menus and an Action Bar; as discussed in The Caller ID Directory Editor's Action Bar® and Menus.

Callers List

The Callers list, at the left side of the directory window, displays the entries available in the current Caller ID file. To select an entry, click on it or highlight it with the [image] and cursor keys. As you select entries, the fields in the Caller Information group on the right side of the window update to display the entry’s values.

Once you’ve selected an entry, you can modify its settings simply by clicking in the appropriate Caller Information field and making the changes you want.

You can also select multiple entries, either by clicking and dragging over them, by holding down the [image] key and clicking on them, or by pressing the [image] key as you move the highlight bar with the cursor keys.

Any changes you make within the Caller Information group will affect every entry you’ve selected! The second section of the directory’s status line displays "MULTIPLE" whenever your changes will affect more than one entry.

Caller Information Group

The Caller Information fields are:

Name

The name used to reference and display the entry within the directory. It isn’t used by Procomm Plus’s Caller ID features, but it can be used as a search key. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Company

A company name for this entry. The Company field isn’t used by Procomm Plus, and it isn't required,  but it can be referenced as a search key. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Comment

A comment line for this entry. This field accepts up to 40 characters. The Comment field isn’t used by Procomm Plus, and it isn’t required, but it can be referenced as a search key.

Caller ID

The Caller ID for this entry. Typically, this is the phone number of the caller, but you may need to verify this with your phone company.

You can include formatting characters such as dashes and parentheses to make the Caller IDs more readable. The formatting will not affect Procomm Plus's recognition of an ID, but it will be used if you use the editor's Find function.

For example, when processing a Caller ID, Procomm Plus would treat "1(314) 555-1234" and "13145551234" as equivalent, but if you used the Find funtion with an argument of "(314)", the latter Caller ID would not satisfy the search.

Fax Station ID

The Station ID for this entry. Typically, this ID is displayed by the receiving fax machine as a transmission is processing. This field isn’t required, but it can be used as a search key. You can enter up to 20 characters in this field. As with the Caller ID field, you can use formatting characters to make the Fax Station ID more readable.

Answer Action

To specify how Procomm Plus will handle an incoming call from the selected entries, click on the Answer Action list box. You can choose Connection Default, Data, Fax or Data and Fax. If you select Connection Default, Procomm Plus will answer the call based on information reported by your modem.

Script

To specify an ASPECT script to be launched in response to an incoming call from the selected entries, click in the Script edit field and enter the filename.If you’re uncertain of the filename, you can click on the Browse... button, and select it from a standard dialog.

The Script controls are not available unless you’ve selected the Answer this call option button.

Add New Caller...

To add a new caller entry to your Caller ID directory, click Add New Caller...  The editor displays the Add New Caller dialog.  Once you've entered the information, click OK to exit the dialog and save the new entry.

Delete Caller

To remove the highlighted caller entry from your Caller ID directory, click Delete Caller.  The Editor will not prompt for confirmation before deleting the entry or entries you've selected!


The Caller ID Directory Editor's Action Bar® and Menus
The Caller ID Directory Editor's Menus and Action Bar®

   Action Bar      Menu | Item      Description
      Button

	File | New...	Creates and opens a new directory file, using a name you provide. The keyboard equivalent is [image] [image].
	File | Open...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, allowing you to select and open an existing caller information file. The keyboard equivalent is [image] [image].
	File | Save	Saves the current data to a disk file. The keyboard equivalent is [image] [image].
	File | Save As...	Opens a standard File Save As... dialog, where you can specify a new filename for the caller information file.
	File | Print...	Prints the currently-loaded .cid file, after you’ve specified the fields and settings you want to print.  is the keyboard shortcut. See Printing a .cid File.
	File | Import | Import Generic...	Opens a dialog from which you can import delimited text records. See Importing Delimited Text for more information.
	File | Import | Import CID Directory...	Opens a dialog where you can select a .cid file from this version or version 3.x of Procomm Plus to import into the current record file. See Importing Other .cid Files for more information.
	File | Import | Import Version 2.x CID Directory...	Opens a dialog where you can select a .cid file from version 2.x of Procomm Plus to import into the current record file.
	File | Export...	Opens a dialog from which you can export the current record list as a delimited text record file. See Exporting Directory Entries for more information.
	File |  1, 2, 3 or 4	The directory remembers the filenames of the last four .cid files you’ve edited. To reload one of them, simply select it from the File menu.
	File | Exit	Exits the Caller ID Directory Editor.
	Edit | Undo Changes to Current Record	Reverts the contents of the current record back to its contents at the time of the last save you performed on the .cid file.
	Edit | Cut	Deletes the selected record(s) from the file and places it in the Windows Clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the selected record(s) from the file and places it in the Windows Clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste	Copies information from the Windows Clipboard and inserts it as a new record.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Sort	Select this menu item to sort the current information file. You can choose to sort the file by the Name, Caller ID or Fax Station ID fields, in either ascending or descending order.
	Edit | Find	Opens a dialog where you can enter text to search for in the current directory file.  is the keyboard shortcut.  By default, all of the entry’s text fields are searched for the characters you specify, but you can modify this behavior by selecting the appropriate options in the Find dialog.
	Edit | Find Next	Repeats the last Find command you executed.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Add New Caller	Adds a new, blank entry, which is inserted above the currently selected entry.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit |  Delete Caller	Deletes the currently selected entry or entries. The directory does not prompt to confirm before deleting your selection(s), but the File | Revert to Saved menu item can undo the deletion.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	View | Global Screening...	Opens a dialog where you can select multiple entries whose calls will be accepted or rejected. For more information, see Global Screening.
	View | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar button labels. By default, ToolTips are enabled.
	View | Action Bar	Toggles the display of the Action Bar. By default, it's displayed.
	View | Status Line	Toggles the display of the status line. By default, it's displayed.
	View | Large Action Bar	Toggles the display of the Action Bar between small and large iconbuttons.
	Help | Help Topics...	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor on-line help window.
	Help |  Search  for Help on...	Opens the on-line help system with the Search dialog activated.
	Help |  About Caller ID Directory	Opens a dialog that displays important information about the Caller ID Directory Editor.


The Chat Window

If you call many bulletin boards, you may have had a direct, real-time conversation with the operator through the Terminal window. This is usually referred to as "chatting". Chatting is also popular on many large information services. For example, the CompuServe Information Service’s CB Simulator feature allows many users to carry on conversations in a round-table style.

Procomm Plus's Chat window makes it easier for you to chat, because it helps you to differentiate the text you send from the text you receive. Characters you receive from the host system or service are displayed in the Terminal window, while the characters you enter appear in the Chat window as they’re sent.

Any Meta Keys that you’ve configured to transmit text will also work in Chat Mode, and you can also use the Terminal window’s capture and printer functions.

To open the Chat window, select the Data | Chat Window... menu item. The Chat window is very simple to use - just enter the text you want to send!

For your convenience, you can move the Chat window anywhere on your display. You can also specify either line- or character-based transmission of the text you enter. See Chat Mode transmit method for details.

A chat script is also provided with Procomm Plus, named chat.wax. It provides a "split" window chat interface within the Terminal display, rather than a separate window. Some users prefer this alternative approach.


The Client IP Address

In order for the host system to communicate with your system, your system must also have an IP address.

If you access an FTP host through a direct network connection, you're IP address is assigned by your network administrator. The address is entered in your network software configuration.

If you use a modem and the Dial-up connection provided by Procomm Plus, your Internet Service Provider will either give you a permanent IP address or a temporary one that is automatically assigned each time you connect. For more information, see Internet Addresses.


The Connection Directory

Procomm Plus’s Connection Directory helps you to organize the connection information for all of the sites and systems you access, whether they are BBS or host systems, voice or fax numbers, telnet connections or Internet sites.

The Connection Directory is much more than an electronic phone book, however. It is an integral part of every kind of communication task supported by Procomm Plus! Regardless of how you intend to use Procomm Plus, a solid understanding of the Connection Directory will help you to get "up and running" quickly.

See the following topics for an in-depth look at the Connection Directory:

The basics of the Connection Directory

Adding, editing and deleting directory entries

Adding, editing and deleting directory groups

Connecting!

Other Connection Directory functions

The Connection Directory Menus and Action Bar®


The Connection Directory 2
The Connection Directory

Procomm Plus’s Connection Directory helps you to organize the connection information for all of the sites and systems you access, whether they are BBS or host systems, voice or fax numbers, telnet connections or Internet sites.

The Connection Directory is much more than an electronic phone book, however. It is an integral part of every kind of communication task supported by Procomm Plus! Regardless of how you intend to use Procomm Plus, a solid understanding of the Connection Directory will help you to get "up and running" quickly.

See the following topics for an in-depth look at the Connection Directory:

The basics of the Connection Directory

Adding, editing and deleting directory entries

Adding, editing and deleting directory groups

Connecting!

Other Connection Directory functions

Renaming the Connection Directory

Sorting the Connection Directory

Searching for entries.

Viewing entry statistics.

Importing and exporting entries.

Printing the Connection Directory

The Connection Directory Menus and Action Bar®


The Connection Directory Action Bar and menus
The Connection Directory Menus and Action Bar

  Action Bar  Menu | Item      Description
     Button

	File | New	Creates an empty Connection Directory file, using a name you specify.
	File | Open...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, where you can select an existing Connection Directory file to be opened.
	File | Save	Saves the current Connection Directory. This command is disabled if the directory file you’re editing has not yet been saved with a filename.
	File | Save As...	Opens a standard File Save dialog, where you can specify a new filename for the current Connection Directory file.
	File | Print...	Opens a dialog where you can select the entry fields to be printed from the current directory file. See Printing the Connection Directory.
	File | Import Generic...	Opens a dialog where you can select a file containing delimited records to be imported into the current Connection Directory. See Importing Directory Entries.
	File | Import Specific...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a source application whose address or connection data files will be imported into the current Connection Directory. See Importing Directory Entries.
	File | Export...	Opens a dialog where you can specify an output format which will be used to create a delimited record file of the current Connection Directory entries. See Exporting Directory Entries.
	File | Exit	Exits the Connection Directory. If you’ve modified an entry or group but haven’t saved the changes, you will be prompted to do so.  is a keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Cut	Deletes the selected entry or group from the directory and places it in the Windows Clipboard.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the selected entry, entries or group(s) from the directory into the Windows Clipboard.
	Edit |  Insert Paste	Copies Connection Directory data from the Windows Clipboard and inserts it just above the current selection(s).
	Edit | Delete	Deletes the selected entry, entries or group(s) from the Connection Directory.
	Edit | Sort	Select this menu cascade to sort the entries and groups in the Connection Directory. You can sort by Name, Area Code, Company name, Baud rate, Last Called, and Total calls.
	Edit | Find...	Opens the Find Connection Directory Entry dialog, where you can specify search options. See Searching the Directory.
	Edit |  View Stats...	Displays the connection statistics for the selected Data-class entry. This command is disabled if more than one entry is selected.
	Edit |  New Entry...	Opens the Add Directory Entry dialog, where you can specify the connection information and settings for a new entry.
	Edit |  Edit Entry...	Opens the Edit Directory Entry dialog, where you can modify an existing entry’s information and settings, and add entry classes.
	Edit |  New Group...	Opens the Group Editor dialog, where you can specify a name for a new group and select one or more entries to be included in it.
	Edit |  Edit Group...	Opens the Group Editor dialog, where you can add entries to or remove entries from an existing group, or modify the group name.
	Connect |  Connect	Initiates a connection attempt with the currently-selected entries or groups.
	Connect |  Manual  Connect...	Opens a dialog where you can specify information for a manual connection attempt. See Connecting Manually.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility to the last settings group you accessed.
	Setup |  Dialing Options	Opens the Setup utility with the System, Dialing Options panel pre-selected.
	Setup |  Dialing Properties...	Opens the Dialing Properties dialog.
	Help!	Opens the Connection Directory on-line help window.


The Connection Directory See Also
The Connection Directory

The basics of the Connection Directory

Adding, editing and deleting directory entries

Adding, editing and deleting directory groups

Connecting!

Other Connection Directory functions

The Connection Directory Action Bar® and menus


The Connection Directory Window

You can open the Connection Directory in several different ways from within each of Procomm Plus’s integrated communications modules:

•	By clicking on the Connection Directory Action Bar button.

•	By pressing [image] [image].

•	By selecting the File | Connection Directory... menu item.

The Connection Directory window appears, with the name of the current directory file in its title bar. You can move the Connection Directory window to any location on your screen, and even expand the window’s height to display more entries in the list. The window’s size and location are saved, then restored for your convenience the next time you open the directory.

The Connection Directory window is divided into four segments. From top to bottom, they are:

The Connection Directory Action Bar and menus.

The entry-class selection tabs (Data, Fax, Voice, etc.).

The entry list and settings panel.

The Connection Directory command buttons.

For help with actions or keystrokes that perform basic Connection Directory functions, see Using the Connection Directory.


The Connection Directory Window See Also
The Connection Directory Window

The Connection Directory Action Bar and menus.

The entry-class selection tabs (Data, Fax, Voice, etc.).

The entry list and settings panel.

The Connection Directory command buttons.


The Connection Directory command buttons.
The Connection Directory command buttons

The Connection Directory’s three command buttons are available at the bottom of the window:

OK

Click on OK to save any changes you may have made and close the directory without attempting to make a connection.

Cancel

Click on Cancel to close the directory without attempting to make a connection and without retaining any changes you may have made.

Dial, Send or Connect or Compose

Click on Dial, Send, Connect or Compose to save any changes you may have made, close the directory and attempt to connect to your selection(s). The button’s label changes to reflect the entry class you selected.

If you selected the Data- or Voice-class entries, it’s labeled Dial. If you selected Fax-entries, it’s labeled Send. For Telnet, FTP and Web, and News-classes, it’s labeled Connect. For Mail-class entries, it's labeled Compose.

The connection process is discussed in Connecting!.


The Copy Link Function

The Copy Link function allows you to copy DDE link data for pasting into other Windows applications while Procomm Plus is acting as a DDE server.Selecting Edit | Copy Link... from the Terminal window menu opens the Copy Link dialog. The Copy Link dialog allows you to select one of the 40 predefined global variables to be linked to another application, and the ASPECT script that will be used to assign values to that variable. You can toggle between Float, Integer, Long and String variables by clicking on the appropriate option button.

When you’re satisfied with your selections, click on the Copy button. The Copy Link data is placed into the Windows Clipboard as a DDE link. When the DDE link is pasted into a Windows application that supports the Paste Link command, it is already formatted for that application.

For information about ASPECT’s support of DDE, refer to Advanced Topics.

Procomm Plus supports the Link clipboard using the standard format:

application\0\topic\0item\00

where “\0” represents a null character. A single null separates the application, topic and item names, and two nulls terminate the entire string.

A DDE client application generally supports the Link function by means of an Edit | Paste Link menu item. When you choose Paste Link, the client application parses the names from the Link clipboard data and uses it to initiate a conversation with the DDE server application. The client application then initiates a DDE advise with the server, using the specified item.


The Cover Sheet Editor

The Cover Sheet Editor included with Procomm Plus gives you extensive control over the design and editing of fax cover sheets.

For more information, see the following topics:

Introducing the Cover Sheet Editor

Running the Cover Sheet Editor

Step-by-Step: Customizing Your Cover Sheet

Designing a Cover Sheet

Working With Cover Sheet Objects

Configuring Text Objects

Configuring Graphical Objects

The Cover Sheet Editor's Menus and Action Bar


The Cover Sheet Editor's Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar      Menu | Item           Description
      Button

	File | New	Clears the editor window and creates an empty, untitled cover sheet.
	File | Open...	Opens an existing .cvr file.
	File | Save	Saves the current cover sheet to a disk file. If the cover sheet has not yet been given a filename, this menu item will be disabled.  The associated Action Bar button is never disabled. If the cover sheet hasn’t been given a filename, the button will open the Save As... dialog.
	File | Save As...	Opens the Save As... dialog, allowing you to specify a filename for the current cover sheet. This function is called by the Action Bar button associated with the File | Save item if the cover sheet has not been given a filename.
	File | Exit	Closes the editor. If you’ve modified the cover sheet but haven’t saved your changes, the editor will ask whether you wish to save the file before closing it and exiting.
	Edit | Cut	Deletes the selected object from the cover sheet and places it in the Windows Clipboard.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the selected object from the cover sheet and places it in the Windows Clipboard.
	Edit | Paste	Pastes the selected object from the Windows Clipboard into the Cover Sheet Editor window.
	Edit | Delete Object	Deletes the selected object from the cover sheet.
	View |  Page Size Letter	Selects a standard Letter page size, 8.5 inches wide by 11 inches long.
	View |  Page Size Legal	Selects Legal page size, 8.5 inches wide by 14 inches long.
	View |  Page Size A4	Selects A4 page size, 210 mm wide by 297 mm long.
	View |  Page View Full Size	Displays the cover sheet in its actual size. In Full Size, you’ll have to scroll to view the entire contents of the page. However, this mode is quite useful for "fine tuning" the placement of graphical elements.
	View |  Page View Fit to Window	Scales the cover sheet page to display the complete layout within the current window size. This view always shows the full vertical length of the page no matter how wide you make the editor window. You can also click on the right mouse button anywhere within the editor’s workspace to switch quickly between a Fit to Window view and your current view state.
	View |  Page View Fit to Sides	Displays the full width of the cover page across the editor window. Depending on your display, you may have to scroll the page vertically to see the complete document.
	View | Action Bar	Toggles the display of the editor’s Action Bar.
	View | Large Action Bar	Toggles the display of the Action Bar between large icon buttons and small icon buttons.
	Object | Metafile	Displays the Metafile Object Open File dialog, where you can select a metafile to be included in your cover sheet. After you’ve selected a file, the mouse pointer changes to a crossbar to indicate that you’re placing an object. Metafiles, which have a filename extension of .wmf, are graphical vector images. They can be created by most Windows drawing packages such as CorelDRAW!™, and are available in many commercial clipart packages.
	Object | Bitmap	Displays the Bitmap Object Open File dialog, where you can select a bitmap image to be included in your cover sheet. After you’ve selected a file, the mouse pointer changes to a crossbar to indicate that you’re placing an object. Bitmaps, with a filename extension of .bmp, are bit-mapped graphical images. They can be created in Windows Paint and many other Windows painting packages. In addition, other common bitmap formats can be converted to .bmp by some applications. For example, the Windows 95 Paint program can convert .pcx files to .bmp, and the Procomm Plus GIF Viewer can convert .gif images to .bmp.
	Object | Box	Select this item to add a graphical box to your cover sheet. The mouse pointer changes to a crossbar, indicating that you’re placing an object.  Boxes are used as design elements in cover sheets, to frame or separate text and graphical objects.
	Object | Text	Select this item to add static, or unchanging text to the cover sheet. The mouse pointer changes to a crossbar, indicating that you’re placing an object. Text objects are useful as labels or banners that remain constant. For text objects that can receive information from a Connection Directory entry or an ASPECT faxsend command, see the Object | Variable Text item, which follows.
	Object |  Variable Text	Variable text objects are updated with values taken from the Send Fax dialog at the time the fax is transmitted. They are commonly used to include important information that can change with each fax, as described below. These objects will display as "dummy" or placeholder text within the Cover Sheet Editor.
	Recipient Name	This object will be updated with a value from the Recipient(s) List when the fax is transmitted. The Recipient Name, Company and Fax number are supplied to the Recipient(s) List by the Connection Directory entries you select, by the recipients you specify manually or by ASPECT faxsend commands within scripts.
	Object |  Variable Text  Recipient Company  Name	This object will be updated with a value from the Recipient(s) List when the fax is transmitted.
	Object |  Variable Text  Recipient Fax Number	This object will be updated with a value from the Recipient(s) List when the fax is transmitted.
	Object |  Variable Text  Sender Name	This object will be updated with the value of the From field in the Cover Sheet Options section of the Send Fax dialog. All of the Sender-related fields in the Send Fax dialog obtain their values from their respective fields in the Fax Options, User Info dialog in Setup at the time the fax is generated.
	Object |  Variable Text  Sender Company Name	This object will be updated with the value of the Company field in the Cover Sheet Options section of the Send Fax dialog.
	Object |  Variable Text  Sender Fax Number	This object will be updated with the value of the Fax number field in the Cover Sheet Options section of the Send Fax dialog.
	Object |  Variable Text  Sender Voice Number	This object will be updated with the value of the Voice number field in the Cover Sheet Options section of the Send Fax dialog.
	Object |  Variable Text  Time	This object will be updated to indicate the time the fax was generated.
	Object |  Variable Text  Date	This object will be updated to indicate the date the fax was generated.
	Object |  Variable Text  Notes	This object will be updated with the contents of the Notes edit box in the Send Fax dialog, if any, at the time the fax is generated.
	Object |  Variable Text  Total Pages	This object will be updated with the total fax page count at the time it’s generated.
	Help | Contents	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor on-line help window.


The Cover Sheet Options

Whether you initiate a Send Fax operation from within Procomm Plus, from another Windows application or from the File Manager, you can easily include a cover sheet with your fax. You can use cover sheets to personalize your fax, or to provide additional information to accompany your document(s).

A variety of professionally-designed cover sheets are included with Procomm Plus. By default, these are installed in the Fax Cover Sheets directory under the Procomm Plus home directory. You can use the Cover Sheet Editor to view or edit them. For more information, see The Cover Sheet Editor.

Click on the Send Fax dialog’s Cover Sheet button to display the settings panel.  For more information about the settings, see the following topics:

Cover Sheet File

Name, Company and Numbers

Notes

The Cover Sheet options displayed in this panel are taken directly from their corresponding values in the current Fax, User Info option set in Setup. If you want to use a different option set, click on the User Info Options list box and select it from the list. The Cover Sheet options will update accordingly.

You can modify these settings from within the Send Fax dialog without affecting their saved values. If you do change a setting the User Info Options list box is blanked to indicate that you have overridden one or more values in the selected User Info option set.


The Data Entry Class

Data-class entries are used to connect to systems or sites for terminal emulation, file transfers and data entry or retrieval. They can access almost any type of communication method supported by Procomm Plus to complete the connection, including:

•	Direct connection through a null-modem cable.

•	Phone line connection with an internal or external modem.

Phone line connection using a shared network modem.

Connection across a network to a host on the network.

The fields required to complete a Data-class connection are simple and straightforward. However, the Connection Directory allows you to specify a number of other settings that can make a Data-class entry even more convenient.

Step-by-Step: Adding a Data-class Entry

Data-class Settings


The Detail Panel
The Details Panel

The Fax Manager's details panel, located at the bottom of the Fax Manager window, displays important information about faxes and cover sheets when a fax or cover sheet is selected. By selecting or deselecting the Fax Manager View menu's Details option, you can control whether the details panel is displayed.


The Dialog Editor

The Procomm Plus Dialog Editor allows you to create and edit dialog boxes for use with ASPECT script files, using a visual approach that is much easier than coding a dialogbox statement group by hand.

The following links access the ASPECT script documentation, located in pw4asp.hlp. If these links do not work or if you’re unable to locate this file, the ASPECT help file may not have been installed. Run Procomm Plus’s installation program, and use the Custom Installation feature to install the ASPECT help file.

An Introduction to the Dialog Editor

Running the Dialog Editor

Editing a Dialog Box

Step-by-Step: Placing a Dialog Control

Re-sizing a Dialog Box Control

Moving a Dialog Box Control

Duplicating Dialog Box Controls

Deleting a Dialog Box Control

Dialog Control Options

A Sample Dialog

The Dialog Editor's Menus and Action Bar


The Duplicate Entry Dialog

A single Connection Directory entry can store information for any one of the communication types supported by Procomm Plus or a combination of entry types for a given entry name. Depending on how you communicate, you may accidentally specify a name for a new entry that matches an entry you've already created or that matches a name within another communication type. Procomm Plus handles this by prompting you with the Duplicate Entry dialog to determine if you want to combine the entries or rename the new entry. If you combine the entries, the old entry is updated with the new entry's information. Select Yes to update or No to return to the Add Directory Entry dialog where you can rename the new entry.


The Entry Class Tabs

The Connection Directory can store entries for each kind of connection supported by Procomm Plus. Rather than jumble the various entries together into a single, possibly confusing list, the directory displays them separately. This allows you to select the entries by their connection type or class, as well as by name!

Since a single system or location may have more than one connection method, each directory entry can contain any combination of the various classes. This can be very convenient. For example, whether you want to reach Quarterdeck by voice phone, fax, through its BBS or through the World Wide Web, you only have to select the appropriate class, then select the "Quarterdeck" entry and connect to it!

The entry class tabs, which appear above the entry list and settings panel, allow you to select the kinds of entries you want to view, connect to or edit. The available classes are:

Data

The Data class, the most general, refers to entries that you connect to over a modem or COM port, or through a network Asynchronous Communications Server (ACS) for terminal emulation, data entry or retrieval and file transfers.

Typical uses for Data entries are bulletin board systems or BBS’s, on-line information services such as CompuServe or GEnie, and mainframe or minicomputer host systems. Data entries are handled by Procomm Plus’s Terminal window.

Fax

The Fax class refers to entries that Procomm Plus connects with to send fax documents or files. You can also call other sites to "poll" or request faxes or files they've made available. Fax entries are handled by Procomm Plus’s Fax Status window.

Voice

The Voice class refers to entries that Procomm Plus dials with your modem, then prompts you to left the telephone handset to talk.  Voice entries are handled by Procomm Plus’s Terminal window.

Most Hayes-compatible modems allow you to connect a regular telephone. If your modem has two phone jacks, attach the telephone's cord to the modem jack labeled "Phone". If the jacks are unlabeled, refer to your modem’s reference manual.

Telnet

The Telnet class refers to entries that you connect to with TCP/IP using a network, SLIP or PPP dial-up connection for terminal emulation, data entry or retrieval and file transfers. Telnet entries are actually a special kind of Data connection; they are handled by Procomm Plus’s Terminal window.

FTP

The FTP class refers to entries that you connect to with TCP/IP using a network, SLIP or PPP dial-up connection to retrieve files from or upload files to an FTP host system. FTP entries are handled by Procomm Plus’s FTP Client window.

Web

The Web class refers to entries that you connect to with TCP/IP using a network, SLIP or PPP dial-up connection. Web entries are typically Uniform Resource Locators (URLs), which are references to hypertext documents and other resources available on the Internet’s World Wide Web. Web entries are handled by Procomm Plus’s Web Browser window.

Mail

The Mail class refers to entries that store Internet mail addresses. Mail entries are handled by Procomm Plus's Internet Mail Client window.

News

The News class refers to entries that store Internet newsgroup names. News entries are handled by Procomm Plus's News Reader window.

The entry class displayed when you open the Connection Directory is determined by the communication module you opened it from. For example, if you open the directory from Procomm Plus’s FTP Client module, the FTP entry class is automatically selected.

To display a different class, click on the appropriate tab or press its keyboard accelerator. For example, to display Fax entries, click on the Fax tab or press [image] [image]. As you select each class, the entry list and settings panel are updated accordingly.


The FTP Client

The Procomm Plus FTP Client allows you to transfer files to and from an FTP host system. Its "point and click" interface makes file transfers as simple as a click of the mouse. You can transfer files using FTP regardless of whether you have a dial-up SLIP or PPP connection, or a connection via network cards and cables.

In addition to file transfer capabilities, the FTP Client offers file management features that allow you to organize files and directories both on your computer and, if authorized, on the host computer. You can even view or run a file from the FTP Client window.

The following topics include a general overview of the Procomm Plus FTP Client, as well as some in-depth discussion and step-by-step instruction:

Starting the FTP Client

Elements of the FTP Client Window

FTP Client Configuration

Connecting to an FTP Host

Step-by-Step: Sending and Receiving Files using FTP

The FTP Client's Menus and Action Bar


The FTP Client Utility

The Procomm Plus FTP Client allows you to transfer files to and from an FTP host system. You can transfer files using FTP regardless of whether you have a dial-up SLIP or PPP connection, or a connection via network cards and cables. Once you've connected to an FTP host system, the FTP Client's "point and click" interface makes file transfers as simple as a click of the mouse!

An Introduction to FTP

The FTP Client


The FTP Client’s Menus & Action Bar

   Action Bar      Menu | Item...        Description
      Button

Certain menu commands and their Action Bar counterparts are disabled if the FTP Client is not connected to a host system.

	No associated menu item.	The Rapid Connect drop down list box gives you quick access to your Connection Directory entries. For more information, see Step-by-Step: Connecting with an FTP Host with Rapid Connect.
	No associated menu item	Using the Script File drop-down list box, you can quickly select a compiled script to run. If the script you want is already shown in the list box window, you can click on the Start Script icon.
	File |  Create Connection Directory	Creates a new, untitled Connection Directory file.
	File |  Open Connection Directory...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, where you can select an existing Connection Directory file to be loaded for use. See The Connection Directory.
	File |  Connection  Directory...	Opens the Connection Directory and displays the currently-loaded .dir file.  See The Connection Directory.
	File |  Copy |  to Local	Begins an FTP file transfer from the host computer to your local computer. This command is disabled if you haven't selected a remote file.
	File |  Copy | to Remote	Begins an FTP file transfer from the your local computer to the host computer. If you haven't selected a local file, this command is disabled.
	File |  Delete |  Local	Deletes a selected file or files from your local computer. If you haven't selected a local file, this command is disabled.
	File |  Delete |  Remote	Deletes a selected file or files from the host computer. This command is disabled if you haven't selected a remote file.
	File |  Rename |  Local	Displays a window that allows you to rename a selected file on your local computer. If you haven't selected a local file, this command is disabled.
	File |  Rename | Remote	Displays a window that allows you to rename a selected file on the host computer. This command is disabled if you haven't selected a remote file.
	File |  View Local	Launches the program or displays the file depending on the type of file you selected. See View a file for more information. If you haven't selected a local file, this command is disabled.
	File | View Remote	Transfers the selected file to the local computer and temporarily stores it the temp directory. Then launches the program or displays the file, depending on the type of file selected. See View a file for a detailed description of each action. This command is disabled if you haven't selected a remote file.
	File | Change Directory | Local	Displays a dialog where you can change the current local directory in the FTP Client.
	File |  Change Directory | Remote	Displays a dialog where you can change the current directory of the FTP host, on the Remote side of the FTP Client Window.
	File | Create Directory | Local	Displays a dialog where you can create a subdirectory beneath the current local directory.
	File | Create Directory | Remote	Displays a dialog where you can create a subdirectory beneath the current remote directory if the FTP host has granted you rights to do so.
	File | Delete Directory | Local	Deletes one or more directories on the local machine. A directory must be empty of files and subdirectories before it can be deleted. If you haven't selected a local directory, this command is disabled.
	File | Delete Directory | Remote	Deletes one or more directories on the remote machine, if the FTP host has granted you rights to do so. A directory must be empty of files and sub-directories before it can be deleted. This command is disabled if you haven't selected a remote directory.
	File | Exit	Closes the current instance of Procomm Plus. If you’re connected to a host system, the connection will be terminated automatically.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility. See The Setup Utility for more information.
	Setup | System	Pulls down a submenu from which you can select a specific panel within the Systems group in Setup. See System Settings.
	Setup | Data	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel within the Data group in Setup. See Data Settings.
	Setup | Fax	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel within the Fax group in Setup. See Fax Settings.
	Setup | Internet	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel within the Internet group in Setup. See Internet Settings.
	Setup | Action Bars...	Opens the Load Action Bars dialog, where you can specify the Action Bar files you want to use. See Selecting Action Bars.
	Setup | Large Action Bars	Toggles between the display of large or small icon buttons on the FTP Client’s Action Bar.
	Setup | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar  bubble help labels. If this menu item is checked or enabled, the FTP Client will also display brief help information on its Status Line when the mouse cursor is left motionless over an Action Bar button for one second. The ToolTips setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup |  Progress Window	Toggles the display of the Connection Progress window, which displays messages sent to and received from the host system.
	Setup |  Status Line	Toggles the display of the FTP Client’s status line.
	Setup |  Answer Options	Determines whether Procomm Plus or another application will answer incoming data or fax calls on the current connection.
	FTP | Connect	Attempts an FTP connection with the current entry from the Rapid Connect box.
	FTP |  Manual Connect	Opens the Manual Connect dialog, where you can enter the address for a specific FTP host system. For more information, see Step-by-Step: Connecting Manually to an FTP Host.
	FTP | Refresh Current Directories	Queries the FTP host and displays the latest files. This is useful if you are on a very active site, or have had the same directory displayed for a while.  The directory is automatically refreshed each time you change directories. However, files may have been uploaded, deleted, or renamed since your directory was refreshed.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	FTP |  Expand Remote File Directory	Displays the complete data received from the host after a directory query. This information is usually parsed and displayed in the Directory and File list boxes in the Remote section. These lists can be informative if you do not see any files or directories after making a connection to an FTP host. For more information, see Host Type.
	FTP |  File Transfer Mode | Binary	Sets the file transfer mode to Binary, for non-text files. Binary mode is used as the default transfer mode with most connections. See File Transfer Mode.
	FTP | File Transfer Mode | ASCII	Sets the file transfer mode to ASCII. ASCII mode is used only for text files when you connect to certain FTP hosts. See File Transfer Mode.
	FTP |  File Transfer Mode | L8	Sets the file transfer mode to L8 (Tenex), a rarely used protocol that is found on a few older host machines such as the PDP-20s. See  File Transfer Mode.
	FTP |  View Progress Text	Displays the messages sent to and received from the host in the current FTP session. The information is displayed in the viewer, specified in Setup.
	Scripts |  Start/Stop Script	Executes the ASPECT script displayed in the Action Bar’s Script File list box. If a script is already running, you can click on this icon to stop it. The icon is animated whenever a script is running.
	Scripts | Run	Opens the Run ASPECT File dialog, from which you can execute compiled scripts from the current directory selected in Setup, or browse through your other directories.  is the keyboard equivalent. For more information, see Running Scripts.
	Scripts |  Compile/Edit...	Opens the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog, from which you can create, edit, compile and execute scripts.  is the keyboard equivalent. For more information, see Compiling Scripts.
	Tools |  Remote Control	Displays the Procomm Remote opening dialog, where you can configure your computer for remote control, call a remote machine or set your machine as a host.
	Tools |  Send a Fax...	Displays the Send a Fax wizard.  If wizards are disabled, the Send a Fax dialog is displayed instead.
	Tools | Fax Status	Opens the Fax Status utility, where you can monitor the status of your fax connection(s) and watch the progress of on-going fax activity. For more information, see The Fax Status Utility.
	Tools | Fax Manager	Opens the Fax Manager so you can organize and view your fax documents.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, which you can use to view, annotate and print faxes you’ve received or sent. See The Fax Viewer.
	Tools |  Fax Cover Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor, where you can create your own cover sheets, or modify those included with Procomm Plus. For more information, see The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Tools |  Image Viewer	Opens the Image Viewer, where you can select and view images in many different formats. See The Image Viewer.
	Tools |  Scheduler	Opens the Scheduler, where you can set Procomm Plus to perform functions automatically at a predetermined time. For more information, see The Scheduler.
	Tools |  Action Bar Editor	Opens the Action Bar Editor, where you can customize the Action Bar, or create additional Action Bars. See The Action Bar Editor.
	Tools |  QWK Mail Viewer	Opens the QWK Mail Viewer, where you can view and reply to messages you’ve retrieved from a BBS. For a detailed discussion, see The QWK Mail Viewer.
	Tools |  Caller ID Directory Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor, where you can add, modify or delete Caller IDs from the current database. See The Caller ID Directory Editor.
	Tools |  ASPECT Editor	Opens the ASPECT Editor, which you can use to create, view or modify text files as well as ASPECT source files. See The ASPECT Editor.
	Tools |  Dialog Editor	Opens the Dialog Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom dialog boxes for your ASPECT scripts. See The Dialog Editor.
	Tools |  User Window Editor	Opens the User Window Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom screens for your ASPECT scripts. See The User Window Editor.
	Tools |  Meta Key Editor	Opens the Meta Key Editor, where you can configure the actions performed by the Terminal window’s forty available Meta Key combinations. The keyboard shortcut is [image] [image]. These changes affect the Terminal Window only. For more information, see The Meta Key Editor.
	Tools |  Keyboard Editor	Opens the Keyboard Editor, where you can specify the sequences sent or actions performed by the current emulation’s mappable keys. The keyboard shortcut is [image] [image]. These changes affect the Terminal Window only. For more information, see The Keyboard Editor.
	Tools |  Translate Table Editor	Opens the Translate Table Editor, where you can choose to modify or filter the characters sent or received by the current emulation. These changes affect the Terminal Window only. See The Translate Table Editor.
	Window |  Change Window	Allows you to change the current window to one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, the Web Browser, the Telnet window, the FTP Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation, including the Data Terminal, Fax Status, the Telnet window, the FTP Client, the Web Browser, the Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  1,2,3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottom of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help |  Wizards...	Opens the Procomm Plus Wizard Manager dialog, where you can launch wizards to assist you in performing common tasks.
	Help |  Topics	Opens on-line help topics.
	Help |  Using the FTP Client	Displays on-line help on using the FTP client.
	Help |  Search for Help on...	Displays the on-line help topic search dialog.
	Help |  Script Reference	Displays the ASPECT on-line reference manual.
	Help |  Search for Script Topic...	Displays the on-line ASPECT help topic search dialog.
	Help |  How to Use Help	Displays help on how to use the on-line help system.
	Help |  About Procomm Plus...	Displays important information on this version of Procomm Plus.


The FTP Entry Class

FTP-class entries are used to connect with FTP server sites to upload and download files. FTP connections are made with TCP/IP using a network, SLIP or PPP dial-up connection.

Step-by-Step: Adding an FTP-class Entry

FTP-class Settings


The FTP Protocol

The File Transfer Protocol, or FTP protocol is a robust transfer protocol is designed to transfer files between different kinds of computers, across a TCP/IP network. In an FTP file transfer, one computer runs the FTP Host software, while the other computer uses the FTP Client software. The host operates like a file server, making files available to the numerous FTP clients that log on.

As part of the protocol, the client requests information about what type of host the remote computer is. The client can then interpret and display information about the host's directory structure and available files.

When an FTP client connects to the host computer, it opens one virtual command port that is used to send commands to and receive responses from the host. If the client requests a file, a second data port is opened by the host. This virtual port is used to transfer files, leaving the command port open to cancel the transfer if desired. In Passive Mode the data port is opened by the client instead of the host. Once the file has been transferred, the data port is closed. The command port remains open until the session is terminated.

FTP is used almost exclusively to transfer files across the global TCP/IP network, the Internet. As use of the Internet has become more widespread, the FTP protocol has become an integral part of global communication.


The Fax Activity Log

The Fax Activity Log is a record of the fax transmit and receive events that occur on your system. You can view the log within Fax Status. Or, if you’re already viewing the Connection Log or Data Log, you can view the Fax Activity Log by clicking on the Fax Log button on the left side of the dialog.  Each entry in the log is a record of a send or receive fax event, with fields indicating all of the information available about the event:

Status

This field reports whether the fax was successfully sent or received. If the event resulted in a failed or terminated transmission, it lists the cause of the unsuccessful communication.

File

The name of the .fax file involved in the event, if available.

From/To

The sender or recipient of the received or transmitted fax, respectively.

Number

The fax number dialed in the fax attempt.

Date

The date the fax event occurred.

Time

The time the fax event occurred.

Pages

The number of pages contained in the fax.

Duration

The length of time the fax modem was "off hook" during the event.

Depending on the resolution of your graphics display, you may have to scroll the list to view some of the fields. You can also resize the fields by placing the mouse cursor over the graphical separator bars and dragging them to new positions.

You can select an entry in the log by clicking on it, or by highlighting it with the [image] and cursor keys. You can also select multiple entries by dragging over them, or by holding down the [image] key as you click on them.

The command buttons at the bottom of the Fax Activity Log allow you to print, export or delete the log entries:

Print

Click on this button to print the contents of the Fax Activity Log.

Export

Click on this button to save the contents of the Fax Activity Log as a space-delimited text file. A standard Save As dialog allows you to specify a name for the new file.

Delete

Click on this button to delete the entry or entries you’ve selected.

Clear All

To reset the Fax Activity Log and clear its contents, click on the Clear All button. Use this button with caution, as the program does not prompt to verify that you want to reset the log.

Close

When you’re finished viewing the log, click on Close to exit the dialog.


The Fax Entry Class

As you might expect, Fax-class entries are used to connect to fax locations to send or receive fax images or Binary File Transfers (BFTs). You can make fax connections with an internal or external modem.

Step-by-Step: Adding a Fax-class Entry

Fax-class Settings


The Fax Manager

Using the Procomm Plus Fax Manager, you can easily view, modify or delete faxes that you’ve received, sent or scheduled. It logically organizes your faxes into folders and allows you to manage those folders to suit your needs. You can open the Fax Manager by:

Selecting Tools | Fax Manager in one of Procomm Plus’s main communication windows.

Selecting Tools | Fax Manager in Fax Status.

Clicking on the Fax Manager icon in the Procomm Plus group on the Start menu.

The Fax Manager opens and displays the fax folders available on your system.  It is divided into three sections: the menu and Action Bar, the folder and document lists, and the detail panel:

The Folders and Documents Lists

The Details Panel

The Fax Manager's Menus and Action Bar

For detailed information about managing your folders and documents, review these topics:

Managing Folders

Managing Fax Documents


The Fax Manager’s Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar      Menu | Item      Description
      Button

	File | Connection Directory	Opens the Connection Directory, where you can select Fax groups or entries to initiate a Send Fax operation.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | View Fax...	Loads your selection(s) in the Fax Viewer. See Viewing a Fax for more information. The Fax Viewer itself is discussed in The Fax Viewer.
	File | Send a Fax...	Opens the Send a Fax Wizard, allowing you to to enter the information needed to send a fax.  If you have disabled Wizards, the program displays the Send Fax dialog instead. For more information, see The Send Fax Dialog.
	File |  Send Now...	Changes the scheduled delivery of your selection(s) to the current time and date, causing Procomm Plus to transmit them at the earliest opportunity.
	File | Forward...	Opens the Send Fax dialog with the faxes you’ve selected automatically inserted into the File(s) to Fax list. You can then specify recipients, additional files or other options, just as though you were generating a fax normally. See Forwarding a Fax for more information.
	File | Mail...	Connects to a MAPI-compatible network mail system and creates a new mail message, attaching your current selection(s) to it. See Mailing a Fax for more information.
	File |  Fax Activity Log	Opens the Fax Activity Log. See The Fax Activity Log for more information.
	File | New Folder...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a name for a new folder. See Creating Folders for more information.
	File | Rename Folder...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a new name for the selected folder. See Renaming Folders for more information.
	File | Refresh Folder	Updates the documents list for the selected folder. See Refreshing a Folder for more information.
	File | Delete Folder	Deletes the selected folder and any faxes or documents it contains.  is the keyboard shortcut. See Deleting a Folder for more information.
	File  Print Fax...	Prints the faxes you’ve selected using the current printer.  is the keyboard shortcut. You can also have Procomm Plus print faxes automatically as you receive them. For more information, see "Print fax" in Fax Options.
	File | Exit	Exits Fax Manager.
	Edit | Edit Fax...	Opens the Fax Viewer, which loads and displays the fax(es) you’ve selected. The viewer’s annotation layer is automatically enabled when you launch it via this menu item.
	Edit | Edit Comment...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a new comment for your selection(s).
	Edit | Move...	Moves your selection(s) to another folder. See Moving a Fax for more information.
	Edit | Copy...	Copies your selection(s) to another folder.  is the keyboard shortcut. See Copying a Fax for more information.
	Edit | Delete	Deletes the documents or faxes you’ve selected.  is the keyboard shortcut. Fax Manager will prompt for confirmation of your request.
	Edit | Find...	Opens a dialog where you can specify search text. For more information, see Searching for Faxes.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit |  Find Next...	Repeats the previous Find command.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Find All...	Opens the Find dialog where you can specify search text, and selects all of the documents and faxes in the current folder that satisfy your search. See Searching for Faxes for more information.
	Edit | Select All	Selects all of the documents listed in the current folder.
	Edit | Sort	Selects the entry field used to sort the documents list. You can sort the list by Date/Time or by Name by selecting the appropriate menu item. The list is sorted in ascending order.
	Edit | Hold Fax	Places the selected documents or faxes on hold. If the selected document is on hold, this menu item changes to Release Fax, allowing you to release the fax for transmission.  is the keyboard shortcut for Hold Fax; [image] [image] is the shortcut for Release Fax.
	Edit |  Reschedule Fax...	Displays the Time and Options tab within the Send Fax dialog, where you can select a new time and date for your fax. See Rescheduling a Fax for more information.
	Edit |  Change  Delivery...	Opens the Send Fax dialog, where you can modify the fax recipient(s), add or remove fax files and reschedule the send operation. See Changing a Fax Delivery for more information.
	View |  Details	Toggles the display of the Fax Manager details panel.
	View |  Thumbnails	Toggles the display of document thumbnails in Fax Manager’s details panel.
	View |  Action Bar	Toggles the display of Fax Manager’s Action Bar.
	View |  Status Line	Toggles the display of Fax Manager's status line.
	View |  ToolTips	Toggles the display of Fax Manager's Action Bar ToolTips.
	View |  Large Action Bar	Toggles the display of the Action Bar between large buttons and small buttons.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility to the last panel that you accessed.
	Setup | Fax Options...	Opens the Setup utility to the Fax, Fax Options panel, which is discussed in Fax Options.
	Setup | Modem Connection	Displays the System, Modem Connection group in Setup. These panels are discussed in Fax Connection.
	Setup |  User Info...	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Fax, User Info group in Setup. These panels are discussed in User Info Options.
	Setup |  Fax Paths...	Opens the Setup utility to the Fax, Fax Paths panel, which is discussed in Fax Paths.
	Tools |  Send a Fax...	Launches the Send a Fax wizard.  If wizards have been disabled, the Send Fax dialog is displayed.
	Tools |  Fax Status	Opens the Fax Status utility. See The Fax Status Utility for more information.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, where you can view, annotate or print your faxes, or use OCR to read their text into a file. See The Fax Viewer  for more information.
	Tools | Fax Cover  Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor, which is discussed in The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Tools | Caller ID Directory  Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor. See The Caller ID Directory Editor for more information.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation, including the Data Terminal, the Telnet window, the FTP Client, the Web Browser, the Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  1,2,3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottom of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help | Contents...	Opens on-line help for Fax Manager.
	Help | Search for Help on...	Opens on-line help with the Search dialog activated.
	Help | About Fax Manager...	Opens a dialog that includes important information about Fax Manager.


The Fax Status Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar      Menu | Item      Description
      Button

	Fax | Connection Directory	Opens the Connection Directory, where you can select Fax groups or entries to initiate a Send Fax operation.
	Fax | Send a Fax...	Launches the Send a Fax wizard.  If wizards have been disabled, this item opens the Send Fax dialog. For more information, see The Send Fax Dialog.
	Fax |  Memo Fax...	Opens a dialog where you can enter or import text for a simple memo fax. Once you’re satisfied with the text, click on OK to complete the fax settings in the Send Fax dialog. You can also create memo faxes by selecting the Send a Fax... menu item. See The Memo Fax Options for more information.
	Fax | View Faxes	Opens the Fax Manager with the folder selected, allowing you to browse and view faxes.
	Fax |  Fax Activity Log...	Opens a dialog where you can view a record of all fax-related activities. See The Fax Activity Log.
	Fax |  Answer Fax Now	Instructs your modem to answer an incoming call in fax mode. For more information, see Receiving Faxes.
	Fax | Abort Fax Send/Receive	Cancels an on-going fax transfer, and hangs up the phone line. If you were receiving a fax, any incomplete fax documents associated with the cancelled transfer are deleted.
	Fax | Hold All Scheduled Faxes	Pauses processing of the scheduled faxes list. When you select this menu item, it changes to Resume All Scheduled Faxes; select it to resume processing of any faxes you’ve scheduled.
	Fax | Detect Modem Capabilities	Runs a diagnostic check on the modem specified in the current fax connection.  If the modem's fax capabilities can be determined, Procomm Plus automatically initializes it for correct operation. Initializing the modem may be necessary if you run another program that accesses the same COM port. This command also updates the settings within Setup | Modem Connection | Fax Settings, overwriting the current values. For more information, see Fax Connection.
	Fax |  Files for Polling...	Opens a dialog where you can browse for and select files to be faxed to callers that specifically request polling. For more information, see Fax Polling.
	Fax | Exit	Exits Fax Status.
	View | Show Thumbnails	Toggles the display of document thumbnails within Fax Status.
	View | Action Bar	Toggles the display of the Fax Status Action Bar.
	View | Status Line	Toggles the display of the Fax Status status line.
	View | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Fax Status Action Bar ToolTips.
	View | Large Action Bar	Toggles the display of the Fax Status Action Bar between large buttons and small buttons.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility to the last panel that you accessed.
	Setup | Fax Options...	Opens the Setup utility to the Fax, Fax Options panel, which is discussed in Fax Options.
	Setup | Modem  Connection	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the System, Modem Connection group in Setup. These panels are discussed in Fax Connection.
	Setup |  User Info...	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Fax, User Info group in Setup. These panels are discussed in User Info Options.
	Setup |  Fax Paths...	Opens the Setup utility to the Fax, Fax Paths panel, which is discussed in Fax Paths.
	Setup |  Answer Options	Allows you to specify whether your modem will answer incoming calls, and how those calls will be handled. For more information see Answering Calls.
	Tools |  Send a Fax...	Launches the Send a Fax wizard.  If wizards have been disabled, this item opens the Send Fax dialog. For more information, see The Send Fax Dialog.
	Tools |  Fax Manager	Opens the Fax Manager utility, which is discussed in The Fax Manager.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, where you can view, annotate or print your faxes, or use OCR to read their text into a file. See The Fax Viewer for more information.
	Tools | Fax Cover  Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor. See The Cover Sheet Editor for more information.
	Tools | Caller ID Directory  Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor. See The Caller ID Directory Editor for more information.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation, including the Data Terminal, the Telnet window, the FTP Client, the Web Browser, the Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  1,2,3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottom of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help | Contents...	Opens on-line help for Fax Status.
	Help | Search  for Help on...	Opens on-line help with the Search dialog activated.
	Help | About Fax Status...	Opens a dialog that displays important information about Fax Status.


The Fax Status Utility

Procomm Plus provides a separate utility called Fax Status that acts as a "control panel" for your fax modem. Fax Status monitors and reports the progress of all fax operations and all fax-related modem activity.

Almost all of Procomm Plus’s fax capabilities are available from the Fax Status pull-down menus. Since you can launch it separately by selecting it from Procomm Plus’s Start group, you can also use Fax Status to send, receive and view faxes without opening Procomm Plus’s main communications window. For now, double click on the Fax Status icon in the Procomm Plus group to display the Fax Status window.

As its name implies, the primary function of the Fax Status utility is to report on the current conditions of your fax connection(s). The Connections list box, located below the menu and Action Bar performs this task. Each connection in the list includes the following fields:

Connections

This field contains the name of the connection being used for fax operations.

Status.

This field reports the connection's current activity or status.

Auto-Answer

This field reports whether the connection will automatically answer Data, Fax or Data and Fax calls.  You can also disable auto-answer by selecting Off.

If you have a single fax connection, it will always be selected in the Connections list box. Otherwise, you can click on a listed connection to select it.

Beneath the Connections list box is Fax Status’s Activity panel. If the selected Connections entry is being used to send or receive a fax, Fax Status updates the Activity fields with the details of the operation. It also draws a thumbnail view of the fax document.

You can toggle the thumbnail display by selecting the Fax Status window’s View | Show Thumbnails menu item.

If you often receive faxes without opening Procomm Plus’s main window, you may want to include Fax Status in your Startup folder so that it will be launched automatically when Windows loads.

The Fax Status menus and Action Bar allow you to access most of Procomm Plus’s fax capabilities and Setup options without opening the program’s main window. They also give you access to many of Procomm Plus’s fax-related utilities. See The Fax Status Menus and Action Bar for more information.


The Fax Viewer

Using the Procomm Plus Fax Viewer, you can view and print faxes you’ve scheduled or received. Its powerful features include:

Full-featured annotation capabilities.

Built-in Optical Character Recognition (OCR).

Built-in fax cleaning and deskewing technology.

Built-in anti-aliasing to make your faxes easier to read.

Support for TWAIN-compliant scanners.

For more detailed information, see the following topics:

Running the Fax Viewer

The Fax Viewer Window

Using the Fax Viewer

Using the Quick Select Line

Using the Thumbnail View

Fax Cleaning

Deskewing a Fax

Annotating Faxes

What is OCR?

The Fax Viewer's Menus and Action Bar


The Fax Viewer Window

The Fax Viewer default view is portrait orientation, with your document’s full page width fit to the viewer’s window.  If you can’t see the full page of your document, you can view the remainder of the page by moving the scroll bar down. You can also change the way the fax image is displayed by selecting options from the Fax Viewer’s Action Bar, View menu or Quick Select Line. For information about using the Fax Viewer, see Using the Fax Viewer.


The Fax Viewer’s Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar      Menu | Item      Description
      Button

	File | Open...	Displays a standard file open dialog, allowing you to select a .fax, .pcx or .bmp file for viewing.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Close...	Closes the currently loaded image file. If you’ve made changes in the image but haven’t saved them, the viewer prompts before closing the file.
	File | Save	Writes any changes you’ve made in the current .fax file to disk. If you’re editing an untitled document, the viewer will prompt you for a filename.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Save As...	Displays a standard file save as dialog, allowing you to save the current .fax document under a new filename. If you’re viewing a single-page fax or image you can also save the new file as a .bmp or .pcx file.
	File |  Revert to Saved	Discards any changes you may have made in the current image and reloads the image as it was last saved to disk.
	File | Scan New Image...	Accesses your scanner software to load an image into the viewer. You must have a TWAIN-compliant scanner available to take advantage of this feature. Once you’ve scanned an image into the viewer, you can save it as a monochrome .bmp or .pcx, or as a fax like any other loaded image.
	File | Import...	Allows you to select a monochrome .bmp or .pcx file, or a .fax file to be loaded into the viewer.
	File | Export...	Saves the currently loaded fax into a .fax, .bmp or .pcx file using a filename you specify. You can only export to .bmp or .pcx format if you’re viewing a single-page fax or if you’ve selected a single page from a multi-page fax.
	File | Print...	Prints the current .fax file.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File |  1, 2, 3 or 4	The viewer remembers the filenames of the last four files you’ve opened. To reload one of them, simply select it from the File menu.
	File | Exit	Closes the Fax Viewer.
	Edit | Cut	Copies a selected annotation object to the Windows clipboard and deletes it from the annotation layer. If you’re editing the contents of a text box, this command copies selected text to the Windows clipboard and deletes it from the text box.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Copy	Copies a selected annotation object to the Windows clipboard. If you’re editing the contents of a text box, this command copies selected text to the Windows clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste	Pastes an annotation object from the Windows clipboard into the annotation layer. If you’re editing the contents of a text box, this command pastes text from the Windows clipboard into the text box.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	View | Zoom...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a scale factor value from 1 to 200%. The fax’s displayed image is resized in the Fax Viewer window, but the aspect ratio of the actual file is unaffected by this command.  This command is also available as -Custom- in the Quick Select Line’s View segment.
	View |  Zoom In	Magnifies the displayed fax image by a scale factor. This command is disabled if the current scale factor is the maximum value of 200% of the image size.  This command is also available as Zoom in from the Quick Select Line’s View segment.
	View |  Zoom Out	Reduces the displayed fax image by a scale factor. This command is disabled if the current scale factor is the maximum reduction of 1% of the image size.  This command is also available as Zoom out from the Quick Select Line’s View segment.
	View |  Fit Window | Width	Displays the fax image with its full page width fit to the width of the Fax Viewer window.  This command is also available as Fit to Width in the Quick Select Line’s View segment.
	View |  Fit Window | Height	Displays the fax image with its full page height fit to the height of the Fax Viewer window.  This command is also available as Fit to Height in the Quick Select Line’s View segment.
	View | Rotate Left	Rotates the displayed image to the left by 90 degrees.
	View |  Rotate Right	Rotates the displayed image to the right by 90 degrees.
	View |  Rotate 180	Rotates the displayed image by 180 degrees.
	View |  Go to Page...	Allows you to jump immediately to another page in the fax document. You can also quickly access a specific page using the Page segment of the viewer’s Quick Select Line, as explained in Using the Quick Select Line.
	View | Next Page	Displays the next page of the fax. This command is disabled if you are viewing the last page of a document, or if the document has only a single page.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	View | Previous Page	Displays the previous page of the fax. This command is disabled if you are viewing the first page of a document, or if the document has only a single page.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	View | View as Thumbnails	Displays the currently loaded fax page(s) as reduced images. This is a convenient mode for selecting multiple fax pages for a variety of purposes, as described in Using the Thumbnail View.
	View | Reverse	Displays the fax image with its colors reversed; light colors will be dark and dark colors will be light.  The Reverse command also affects printed output. It is useful if the fax is hard to read because it contains light characters on a dark background.
	View |  Anti-aliasing	Toggles the use of the viewer’s anti-aliasing technology. Anti-aliasing can help make a fax clearer and more readable when you’re viewing images in a reduced scale. Anti-aliasing does not affect the image file, only how that image is displayed by the viewer.
	Setup |  OCR Options...	Opens the OCR Options dialog, where you can configure how the OCR engine will process your faxes. For more information, see OCR Options.
	Setup |  Select Scanner...	Opens the Select Source dialog, which lists any TWAIN-compliant scanner drivers available on your system. Select the scanner you want to use with the viewer and click on OK to accept it and return to the viewer. To close the dialog without selecting a scanner, click on Cancel.
	Setup | Fast Screen Update	Toggles the use of the viewer’s most efficient painting routines, which may cause problems on older S3 video cards. If your video display degrades when you rotate images to the left or right by 90 degrees, uncheck this item. It is checked by default.
	Setup |  Action Bar	Toggles the display of the viewer’s Action Bar.
	Setup |  Status Line	Toggles the display of the viewer’s Status Line.
	Setup | Quick Select Line	Toggles the display of the viewer’s Quick Select Line.
	Setup |  ToolTips	Toggles the display of the ToolTips for both the Action Bar and the Annotation Toolbar.
	Setup |  Large Action Bar	Toggles between large or small buttons on the viewer’s Action Bar and Annotation Toolbar.
	Annotation | Show  Annotation	Toggles the viewer’s annotation mode, which allows you to place text, bitmap and graphical objects on your fax. When the annotation mode is displayed, this menu item changes to Hide Annotation.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Annotation |  Merge  Annotation	Combines the text, bitmap and graphical objects you’ve created in the viewer’s annotation mode with the fax you’re viewing.  If you merge the annotation layer with a standard fax, it;s automatically converted to fine resolution when you save it in order to provide the best possible image. Any annotation objects will be converted to monochrome when you merge them with the original image!
	Annotation |  Annotation Toolbar	Controls the display of the viewer’s Annotation Toolbar, which is discussed in The Annotation Toolbar.  The toolbar is only available when you’ve enabled the viewer’s annotation mode.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Select Object button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools |  Select Object	Activates the Select Object tool, which you can use to select objects you’ve drawn or placed.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Text button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Text	Selects the Text tool, which allows you to draw rectangles that contain text. For more information, see Placing Text.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Line button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Line	Selects the Line tool for drawing straight lines. For more information, see Drawing a Line.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Arrow button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Arrow	Selects the Arrow tool for drawing straight lines tipped with an arrowhead. For more information, see Drawing a Line.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Freehand button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Freehand Line	Selects the Freehand Line tool for drawing free-form lines. For more information, see The Freehand Line.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Rectangle button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Rectangle	Selects the Rectangle tool for drawing rectangles. For more information, see Drawing a Shape.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Rounded Rectangle button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Rounded Rectangle	Selects the Rounded Rectangle tool for drawing rectangles with rounded corners. For more information, see Drawing a Shape.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Circle button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Circle	Selects the Circle tool for drawing circles and ellipses. For more information, see Drawing a Shape.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Polygon button.	Annotation | Drawing Tools | Polygon	Selects the Polygon tool for drawing a closed shape using a freehand line. For more information, see Drawing a Polygon.
	Annotation | Import Bitmap...	Opens a file selection dialog, where you can select a Windows bitmap or .bmp file to import into the annotation layer. For more information, see Placing an Annotation Bitmap.
The Annotation Toolbar’s Move to Front button.	Annotation | Move to Front	Moves the currently selected object(s) in front of any other object(s).
The Annotation Toolbar’s Move to Back button.	Annotation | Move to Back	Moves the currently selected object(s) behind any other object(s).
	Annotation | Text Properties	Opens a secondary menu where you can specify how annotation text objects will be handled.
	Annotation | Bitmap  Properties	Allows you to specify how the currently selected bitmap will be handled by the viewer.
	Annotation | Line Width...	Opens the Line Width dialog, where you can specify the line width to be applied to the currently selected line and any lines you place in the future.  You can also select a line width from the Line Width segment of the viewer’s Quick Select Line. This menu item is only available when you’re using the viewer’s annotation mode. See Changing the Line Width.
	Annotation | Line Color...	Opens the Line Color dialog, where you can specify the line color to be applied to the currently selected line and any lines you place in the future.  You can also select a line color from the Line Color segment of the viewer’s Quick Select Line. This menu item is only available when you’re using the viewer’s annotation mode. See Changing the Line Color.
	Annotation | Fill Color...	Opens the Fill Color dialog, where you can specify the fill color to be applied to the currently selected object and any objects you place in the future.  You can also select a fill color from the Fill Color segment of the viewer’s Quick Select Line. This menu item is only available when you’re using the viewer’s annotation mode. See Changing the Fill Color.
	Tools  OCR Current Page	Opens a Save As dialog, where you can specify a filename for the text read from the current page of your fax.
	Tools |  OCR Select Pages...	Opens the viewer’s Fax Optical Character Recognition dialog, where you can specify the fax pages which will be scanned for text.
	Tools  Deskew Fax...	Opens the viewer’s Fax Deskew dialog, where you can specify the fax pages to which Procomm Plus’s deskewing technology will be applied.
	Tools | Cleanup Fax...	Opens the viewer’s Fax Cleanup dialog, where you can specify the fax cleaning settings to be used on your fax.
	Tools | Cover Sheet  Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor, which is discussed The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Help | Contents	Displays on-line Help for the Fax Viewer.
	Help | Search for Help on...	Opens on-line Help with the Search dialog activated.
	Help | About Fax Viewer...	Opens a dialog that includes important information about Fax Viewer.


The File Clipboard

If you’re downloading a single file from a host system, it’s usually easy to remember the filename and enter it at the system’s prompt. If you’re downloading multiple files, or if you access systems that use exotic filenames, however, it can be tedious indeed! Why not just "pluck" the filenames you want from the Terminal display or Scrollback Buffer? Procomm Plus’s File Clipboard can do it for you automatically!

The File Clipboard works much like a miniature, specialized version of the Windows Clipboard. Instead of cutting, copying and pasting data between Windows applications, it copies filenames from the Terminal display and allows you to send them to a host system at your discretion.

Long filenames can be up to 255 characters in length, but should not include embedded spaces. Enable the Long filename support check box at the bottom of the window if you want the File Clipboard to search for these filenames.

To open the File Clipboard, click on the File Clipboard Action Bar button, or select the Data | File Clipboard... menu item. The File Clipboard window is quite compact, and it’s moveable so that you can place it where it’s most convenient. The window contains a menu bar, an edit field and list box, and a variety of command buttons and option controls.

For more information, see the following topics:

Searching for Filenames with the File Clipboard

Editing the File Clipboard's Filename List

Sending Filenames from the File Clipboard

The File Clipboard's Menus

Step-by-Step: Using the File Clipboard


The File Clipboard See Also
The File Clipboard

Searching for Filenames with the File Clipboard

Editing the File Clipboard's Filename List

Sending Filenames from the File Clipboard

The File Clipboard's Menus

Step-by-Step: Using the File Clipboard


The File Clipboard's Menus

 Menu | Item               Description

Menu | Item	Description
File | Open...	Allows you to select a text file of filenames to be loaded into the File Clipboard’s list of filenames. The text file can either be one you’ve created or one you’ve saved from an earlier File Clipboard session.
	If you’re creating your own list, format it with one filename per line, each followed by a carriage return. If you place more than one filename on a line, each space-delimited word will be interpreted as a filename.
File | Save As...	Saves the File Clipboard’s filename list as a text file, using a filename you specify.
	By using the Open... and Save As... commands, you can download using a single list of filenames for multiple on-line sessions.
File | Exit	Closes the File Clipboard window. The filename list is not affected; it is maintained until you Clear the list or exit Procomm Plus.
Edit | Copy	Copies filenames you’ve selected in the File Clipboard’s list to the Windows Clipboard as text. From the keyboard, press [image] [image].
Edit | Paste Text	Pastes filenames from the Windows Clipboard into the File Clipboard’s filename list. From the keyboard, press [image] [image].


The Folders and Documents Lists

The first time you run Fax Manager, it creates four folders and places them in the Folders list box. These include:

Inbox

Faxes you’ve received will be listed in this folder. The actual fax files will be placed in the path specified by the Inbox directory in the Fax, Fax Paths panel in Setup.

Sent Faxes

Faxes you’ve sent successfully will be listed in this folder. The actual files will be moved to the path specified by the Sent faxes directory in Fax, Fax Paths in Setup once they’re transmitted.

You can also configure Procomm Plus to delete faxes you’ve sent successfully. For more information, see Delete fax pages after successful send in Fax Options.

Cover Sheets

This folder will list the fax cover sheets available in the path specified by the Cover Sheet directory in Fax, Fax Paths in Setup.

Cover sheets can only be copied or moved to the Cover Sheets folder, or folders you’ve created as sub-folders of the Cover Sheets folder.

Outbox

Faxes you’ve scheduled will be listed in this folder. The actual fax files will be placed in the path specified by the Outbox directory in the Fax, Fax Paths panel in Setup.

If you drag a fax from another folder and place it in the Outbox, Fax Manager will attempt to send it. If you drag a cover sheet to the Outbox, Fax Manager will make it the current default cover sheet for a fax.

For details about managing folders, see Managing Folders

When you select a folder, the documents list updates to display the folder’s contents. Each fax or document in a folder has a corresponding entry in the documents list box. For details about managing documents, see Managing Fax Documents.

If you select the Cover Sheets folder or folders you’ve created to contain cover sheets, the documents list displays the filenames and comments for the cover sheets available in the Cover Sheet directory in the Fax, Fax Paths group in Setup.

If you select the Inbox, Outbox or Sent Faxes folder, or folders you’ve created to contain faxes, the documents list displays the following fields for each fax or document in the folder:

Result.

This field reports the outcome of the last attempt made to send the fax or whether the fax was completely received. The icons used to indicate the result are explained below.

Result	Description
	Success. All of the fax pages were successfully sent or received. This graphic is also used for scheduled faxes which have not been transmitted.
	Partial failure. Some of the fax pages were successfully sent or received, but the fax did not complete normally. This graphic is also used for faxes terminated by the user.
	Failure. None of the fax pages were received or sent.

Type

This field reports the fax or document’s type. The icons used to indicate the result are explained below.

Type	Description
	A fax image.
	A binary file or .bft. For more information, see Binary File Transfers.
	A remote poll request. For more information, see Fax Polling.
	A scheduled fax operation that you've placed on hold.

From/To

The sender or recipient of the fax you received or sent, respectively.

Date and Time

The date and time the fax was received, or the date and time it is scheduled to be sent.

Comments

If you entered information in the Comments field within the Send Fax dialog, it will be displayed in the documents list. You can also edit an entry’s comment by selecting Edit | Edit Comment... from the Fax Manager’s menu.

The first entry in the documents list is selected automatically when you open a folder. To select a different entry, just click on it or use the [image] and cursor keys to move the highlight bar. The details panel below the two list boxes always updates to display all of the information available for the selected entry. If the entry represents a .fax file, the detail panel also displays a thumbnail view of the first page of the document.

You can toggle the display of the detail panel by selecting View | Details from the Fax Manager menu. To toggle the display of the thumbnail view, select View | Thumbnails.


The Freehand Line

In addition to "fixed" lines and arrows, the viewer supports freehand lines. Drawing a freehand line is just like drawing other lines, except that the new line is drawn directly on the mouse cursor’s drag path.

Once you’ve placed a freehand line, you can change its size, colors and line width using the same methods discussed for arrows and straight lines. See Step-by-Step: Drawing a Line for help.


The GIF File Viewer

The Procomm Plus GIF File Viewer is a compact utility that allows you to view CompuServe graphics images. You can run the viewer from within a Procomm Plus communication window, or as a stand-alone application.

If you have the View *.GIF files during download check box enabled in Data, Data Options, Advanced settings panel in Setup, the viewer will even display your .gif files as they are being transferred to your system!

Running the GIF Viewer

Viewing GIF Files

Viewing Incoming Files with the GIF Viewer

Step-by-Step: Saving GIFs as Windows Bitmaps

The GIF Viewer Menus


The GIF File Viewer Menus
The GIF Viewer Menus

 Menu | Item                           Description

File | Open File...	Opens the viewer’s Open GIF File dialog, allowing you to specify files to view.  If you select multiple images to view, you can also set the number of seconds to delay between images and whether the slide show should recycle and begin again after the last image.
File |  Save As .BMP...	Saves the current .gif image in .bmp format, as discussed in Saving GIFs as Windows Bitmaps.
File | Default Path...	Opens a standard dialog, where you can specify a new default path for the viewer.
File | Exit	Closes the viewer.
Edit | Copy	Copies the current .gif image to the Windows Clipboard in .bmp format. This allows you to then paste the image into a paint program like Windows Paintbrush for editing.  is the keyboard shortcut.
View | Full Screen	Displays the current .gif image full screen. This command is only enabled if the current image is larger than the resolution of your video display.  is the keyboard equivalent.
Next!	Displays the next .gif image in the list of selected files. This menu item is disabled if you only selected a single file for viewing, or if the current .gif image is the final image in the selection list.
Stop!	Terminates the display of a list of selected files. If you select this command as an image is being painted in the window, it will complete normally.
	This command is disabled if you only selected a single file for viewing, or if the current .gif image is the final image in the selection list.
Help | Contents	Opens the on-line help system and displays information about the viewer.
Help | Using Help	Opens the on-line help system with a topic explaining how to use the help system.
Help | About	Displays important information about this version of the GIF Viewer.


The GIF File Viewer See Also
The GIF Viewer

Running the GIF Viewer

Viewing GIF Files

Viewing Incoming Files with the GIF Viewer

Step-by-Step: Saving GIFs as Windows Bitmaps

The GIF Viewer Menus


The History Window

Whenever you select Web | History... from the menu, Procomm Plus displays a list of the Web sites you have visited. Whenever the Web Browser window displays a Web page, it adds the title of the Web page and its address to the History file. You may configure the number of days that information is stored with the Delete History contents over [ ] days old field of the Internet, Web Options panel in Setup.

The title of the Web page is displayed in the list box. When you highlight an entry, its Web address is displayed below the list box. The History dialog allows you to Go To the highlighted link, Delete the highlighted link, or even Export the entire list to a file.


The Host IP Address

Like other networks, the Internet uses an identification or addressing system to distinguish between particluar computers or systems that attach to the network. Each system on the Internet is assigned a unique number that distinguishes it from other systems. The unique number assigned to a system is referred to as its IP Address, and the same Internet IP address can be expressed with either words or numbers.

Numeric Addresses

Each host on the Internet is assigned a numeric address comprised of four groups of numbers separated by periods, such as 192.0.1.7, with no trailing period. In most cases, however, you will use an Internet site's domain name, rather than its numeric IP Address.

Domain Names

Most Internet hosts also have a unique domain name comprised of words separated by periods. You can use the domain name when you supply an Internet host address instead of numeric IP address; the domain name is automatically translated to the correct numeric address by the Domain Name Server (DNS) for use across the Internet.

Most domain name addresses are designed to indicate the type of service or connection they represent.

Whether you enter a numeric IP address or a domain name, it is important to enter it accurately. Domain names are typically case-sensitive; periods and spaces will also affect the interpretation of the address. Try to be as precise as possible when you are obtaining an Internet address.


The Image Viewer

The Image Viewer utility allows you to display images in several popular formats, including JPEG, Windows Metafile, TIF and PCX.  You can also display multiple images in a slide show, rotate the image, cut and paste images through the Windows Clipboard and zoom the display in or out.

The Image Viewer also offers format conversion.  Once you've displayed the image, you can also save it to disk in another format.


The Ind$file Protocol

Ind$file is an older specialized protocol. Used exclusively for file transfers to and from IBM mainframes and minicomputers, it is much less "automatic" than popular protocols like Zmodem and Ymodem. Ind$file handles only a single file at a time, and you’ll have to send the filename manually.

On the other hand, Ind$file includes several unique features for control of protocol converters, ASCII translation and mainframe data formatting. It will also work in environments where other protocols might fail.

Note that filename formatting varies from one operating system to another, so you must ensure the filename is correct for your host system.

The Setup options for the Ind$file protocol are discussed in Ind$file Protocol Options.


The Internet & TCP/IP

Q.	What is an Internet Connection?

Q.	Can I run different Internet products at the same time?

Q.	Once I have the proper components for Internet access, what are the most common reasons for an attempted connection to fail?


The Internet & TCP/IP Question 1
Q.	What is an Internet Connection?

An Internet connection allows you to communicate to the international network of computers known as the Internet. There are a number of different ways that you can configure your system to communicate over the Internet. You can use your modem to communicate over the Internet; this is called a called a Dial-Up connection. You can also connect to the Internet via a network card.

Once Procomm Plus is properly configured, you will be able to select an Internet connection from the Connection Directory just as you select a phone number to dial.


The Internet & TCP/IP Question 3
Q.	Can I run different Internet products at the same time?

Yes. Unlike data connections or faxes which block all other applications from using the port when they are active, you can have many active Internet sessions at the same time even if you are using a modem. Once you have established a connection on the Internet, other Internet tools can use that same active connection simultaneously.


The Internet & TCP/IP Question 5
Q.	Once I have the proper components for Internet access, what are the most common reasons for an attempted connection to fail?

A failed connection can be as specific as a graphic image not being available in the Web Browser, or it can be as general as not being able to access any sites on the Internet. For this discussion it is assumed that your modem or network hardware is functioning properly, that you can log on to your Internet Provider where applicable, and that your network, SLIP or PPP stack is loading properly. Listed below are three areas that occasionally cause problems even when your communications/network layers are in place.

Problems with a specific site

Site problems are evident when you can’t access a particular site on the Internet, but you are still able to access other Internet locations. Sometimes you may not be able access a particular Web Page, or you may get an error message when you try to connect to a specific FTP or Telnet site. When this happens, you can retry the connection. Occasionally that results in a successful connection. If this fails, however, there are three key causes related to specific site problems.

The Internet address or Uniform Resource Locator (for World Wide Web sites) may be incorrect. Since addresses and URLs are case sensitive, and spaces are interpreted as separate characters, care must be taken when entering an Internet host address. If you are clicking hyperlinked text or graphics in a browser, this is probably not the issue.

The host computer that you wish to access may be experiencing technical difficulties or performing routine maintenance.

Occasionally a service may change addresses or be permanently taken off line. In These cases when you try to access the host, you may see a message with a "forwarding address." Be sure to copy the new information into your Connection Directory, as that service is temporary.


The Internet Mail Client

The Procomm Plus Internet Mail Client allows you to conveniently read and reply to Internet mail messages you’ve received. It also helps you manage your correspondence, using an intuitive folder-and-list approach.

The mail client references the Current Mail Options set in the Internet, Mail settings group in Setup to determine how to deliver and retrieve your messages.

An Introduction to Internet Mail

Using the Mail Client

The Internet Mail Client’s Menus and Action Bar


The Internet Mail Client’s Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar     Menu | Item       Description
      Button

Using the Internet Mail Client's Menus and Action Bar

	Rapid Connect No associated menu item.	The Rapid Connect drop down list box allows you to quickly select an address, or a group of addresses without opening the Connection Directory. By default, Mail-class entries are shown in the list box, but you can toggle the displayed class by selecting the appropriate bracketed item from the list. For example, to view Voice-class entries and groups, you’d select the [Voice numbers] item from the list box.
	File | Create Connection Directory	Creates a new, untitled Connection Directory file.
	File | Open Connection Directory...	Displays a standard file selection dialog, where you can select an existing Connection Directory file to be loaded for use.
	File | Connection Directory	Opens the Connection Directory, where you can create or edit existing entries or groups, or select entries or groups for use as message recipients.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Save As...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a filename to be used to save the currently selected message(s) as a disk file.
	File | New Folder...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a name for a new folder.
	File | Rename Folder...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a new name for the selected folder.
	File | Delete Folder...	Deletes the selected folder and any messages it contains. You cannot delete the Inbox, Outbox, Sent Mail or Deleted Items folders.
	File | Print	Prints the currently selected message(s).  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Exit	Exits Internet Mail Client.
	Edit | Select All	Selects all of the messages listed in the current folder.
	Edit | Sort	Selects the entry field used to sort the message list.  You can sort the list by the date and time the message was received, by the sender’s name, by the message subject or by the message size, in ascending or descending order.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility, where you can configure the operating characteristics of Procomm Plus. See The Setup Utility for more information.
	Setup | System	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the System group in Setup. See The System Settings for more information.
	Setup | Data	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Data group in Setup. See The Data Settings for more information.
	Setup | Fax	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Fax group in Setup. See The Fax Settings for more information.
	Setup | Internet	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Internet group in Setup. See The Internet Settings for more information.
	Setup |  Action Bars...	Opens the Load Action Bars dialog, where you can specify the Action Bar files you want to use. See Selecting Action Bars.
	Setup |  Large Action Bars	Toggles the display of the Action Bar between large and small icon buttons.
	Setup | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar ToolTips labels. If this menu item is checked or enabled, the Internet Mail Client will also display brief help information on the Status Line when the mouse cursor is left motionless over an Action Bar button for one second. The ToolTips setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup | Status Line	Toggles the display of the Internet Mail Client’s Status Line. The Status Line setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup | Answer Options	Determines whether Procomm Plus or another application will answer incoming data or fax calls on the current connection.
	Message | Deliver Mail	Connects to your mail server to deliver any messages you’ve prepared and retrieve messages that are waiting for you. For more information, see Sending and Receiving Mail.
	Message | View Message...	Opens the Read Message window and displays the currently selected message(s). For more information, see Reading Your Mail.
	Message | New Message...	Opens the New Message window. For more information, see Writing and Sending Mail.
	Message | Reply...	Opens the Reply to Message dialog, using information from the currently selected message for addressing and quoting. The Internet Mail Client gives you extensive control over its message quoting features. See Text Quoting. The Reply to Message window is identical in function to the New Message window, which is discussed in Writing and Sending Mail.
	Message |  Reply to All...	Opens the Reply to Message dialog, placing the address(es) from the selected message in the To field and the subject in the Subject field, prefaced by "RE:."  The Reply to All Message window is identical in function to the New Message window, which is discussed in Writing and Sending Mail.
	Message |  Forward...	Forwards the selected message to another address. The mail client opens the Forward Message window, with the original message included in the message edit box. The To and Cc fields are blank, ready for you to specify the forwarding address. The Forward Message window is identical in function to the New Message window, which is discussed in Writing and Sending Mail.
	Message | Move...	Opens a dialog where you can move the selected message to another folder.
	Message | Delete	Deletes the selected message(s). The mail client moves you message to the Deleted Items folder, where it will be stored until you delete it. The mail client can automatically empty the Deleted Items folder for you when you exit. See Empty Deleted folder upon exit in Internet Mail: Other Options.
	Tools |  Remote Control	Displays the Procomm Remote opening dialog, where you can configure your computer for remote control, call a remote machine or set your machine as a host.
	Tools |  Send a Fax...	Displays the Send a Fax wizard.  If wizards are disabled, the Send a Fax dialog is displayed instead.
	Tools |  Image Viewer	Opens the Image Viewer, where you can select and view images in many different formats. See the Image Viewer.
	Tools |  Scheduler	Opens the Scheduler, where you can set Procomm Plus to perform functions automatically at a predetermined time. For more information, see The Scheduler.
	Tools |  Action Bar  Editor	Opens the Action Bar Editor, where you can design your own Action Bars for use in the Internet Mail Client window. See The Action Bar Editor.
	Tools |  QWK Mail Viewer	Opens the QWKMail Viewer, where you can view and reply to messages you’ve retrieved from a BBS. See The QWK Mail Viewer.
	Tools |  Caller ID Directory Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor, where you can add, modify or delete Caller IDs from the current database. See The Caller ID Directory Editor.
	Tools |  Fax Status	Opens the Fax Status utility, which is discussed in The Fax Status Utility.
	Tools |  Fax Manager	Opens the Fax Manager utility where you may access all of Procomm Plus's fax functionality. See The Fax Manager.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, where you can view, annotate or print your faxes, or use OCR to capture their text to a file. See The Fax Viewer.
	Tools | Cover Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor. See The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Tools |  ASPECT Editor	Opens the ASPECT Editor, which you can use to create, view or modify text files as well as ASPECT source files. See The ASPECT Editor.
	Tools |  Dialog Editor	Opens the Dialog Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom dialog boxes for your ASPECT scripts, as explained in The Dialog Editor.
	Tools | User  Window Editor	Opens the User Window Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom screens for your ASPECT scripts, as explained in The User Window Editor.
	Tools |  Meta Key Editor	Opens the Meta Key Editor, where you can configure the actions performed by the Terminal window’s Meta Key combinations. See The Meta Key Editor.
	Tools |  Keyboard Editor	Opens the Keyboard Editor, where you can specify the sequences sent or actions performed by the current emulation’s mappable keys. See The Keyboard Editor.
	Tools | Translate Table Editor	Opens the Translate Table Editor, where you can choose to modify or filter the characters sent or received by the Terminal window. See The Translate Table Editor.
	Window |  Change Window	Allows you to change the current window to one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, the Web Browser, the Telnet window, the FTP Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation, including the Data Terminal, Fax Status, the Telnet window, the FTP Client, the Web Browser, the Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  1,2,3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottom of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help |  Wizards...	Opens the Procomm Plus Wizard Manager dialog, where you can launch wizards to assist you in performing common tasks.
	Help |  Contents	Opens on-line help to the Contents topic.
	Help |  Using  Internet Mail	Opens on-line help for the Internet Mail Client.


The Internet Mail Client’s Status Line

The Internet Mail Client’s Status Line is contains three fields. From left to right, they are:

Menu help text.

The number of messages available, and the number of messages you haven't read.

The current system date and time.


The Internet Settings

Settings in the Internet group affect all Internet operations within Procomm Plus. It contains six minor settings groups:


The Kermit Protocol

Kermit was developed at Columbia University under the guidance of Frank da Cruz and released into the public domain. It’s a block or packet-oriented protocol and uses a 7 or 8 data bit transmission. The protocol is designed to convert the 8th bit when needed, and to send it using a technique called "8th bit quoting" or "prefixing".

Some of the later enhancements to Kermit include simple data compression, file attribute information, sliding windows and long blocks, which are packets of 1024 bytes or longer in length. The sliding window adds the full duplex mode to the protocol. This full duplex mode means that Kermit can send data while receiving responses at the same time.

Procomm Plus supports these features and is backwardly compatible with earlier versions.

Procomm Plus’s default Kermit settings are fairly standard and should be changed only under special conditions. You may want to contact the system administrator of the particular host system you will be using for specific settings.

More information on Kermit is available from Columbia University. Write:

Kermit Distribution

Columbia University Center for Computing Activities

612 West 115th Street

New York, NY 10025

The Setup options for the Kermit protocol are discussed in Kermit Protocol Settings.


The Keyboard Editor

A critical part of any terminal emulation is the proper support of its keyboard. Procomm Plus provides over thirty different terminal emulations, with two sets of keyboard mappings for each of them.

While the keyboard mappings are designed to be as close to the "real" terminal’s keyboard, there may be instances where you need to add or modify certain emulation sequences to handle special conditions on your host system. You can do this, and much more, with the Keyboard Editor included with Procomm Plus.

Using the Keyboard Editor, you can re-map or redefine almost any of the keys that don’t send a letter, numeral or symbol from the "typewriter" keyboard. These include the function, cursor and numeric keypad keys, as well as the six positioning keys found on the 101/102 extended keyboard. Keys can be defined to:

•	Transmit characters, with or without echo to the Terminal window.

•	Run an ASPECT script.

•	Run a Windows application or DOS program.

•	Select a menu item from the Terminal window menus.

•	Transmit a special terminal command.

Procomm Plus stores your custom key definitions in key map files, win an extension of ".kbd". Each .kbd file contains the keys for a single terminal emulation that you’ve created, and must be located in Procomm Plus’s home directory to be recognized and used by the program.

Procomm Plus’s default key mappings are stored internally. They always appear in uppercase letters within the Data, Terminal Options panel in Setup. Key mappings that you create are listed in lowercase letters.

Tables describing the various keyboard mappings, including the sequences they generate and the keys they represent are available within Keyboard Mappings. You can also find an emulation's keyboard mapping by searching for the terminal emulation name!

Opening the Keyboard Editor

Editing Keyboard Keys

Step-by-Step: Mapping a Key


The Keyboard Editor See Also
The Keyboard Editor

Opening the Keyboard Editor

Editing Keyboard Keys

Step-by-Step: Mapping a Key


The Mail Client's Folders and Messages Lists

The first time you run the Internet Mail Client, it creates four folders and places them in the Folders list box:

Inbox

Messages you’ve received will be listed in this folder.

Outbox

Messages you’ve prepared to send will be listed in this folder.

Sent Mail

Messages you’ve written will be moved to this folder after they’ve been sent by the mail client.

Deleted Items

Messages you’ve deleted from other folders will be moved to this folder.

You can configure the Internet Mail Client to automatically delete the contents of the Deleted Items folder when you exit. See Empty Deleted folder upon exit.

You can use these folders, and other folders you create, to organize your messages to suit your needs. When you select a folder, the messages list updates to display the folder’s contents. Each message in a folder has a corresponding entry in the list box. Each entry contains the following fields:

From/To

The sender or recipient of the message you received or sent, respectively.

Subject

The subject line of the message you received or sent.

Received/Sent

The date and time the message was received, or if you composed it, the date and time you wrote it.

Size

The size of the message, in bytes.

The first entry in the message list is selected automatically when you open a folder. To select a different entry, just click on it or use the [image] and cursor keys to move the highlight bar.

The message list takes special advantage of the right mouse button. Click it to access a variety of functions from the Internet Mail Client's Message menu.


The Mail Entry Class

Mail-class entries are used to address messages to other users on the Internet.

Step-by-Step : Adding a Mail-class Entry

Mail-class Settings


The MemoFax Options

A MemoFax is a single page, text-only message sent without a cover sheet or other files. To send a MemoFax, click on the MemoFax button in the Send Fax dialog.  If you have an ASCII text file that you want to send as a MemoFax, you can load it by clicking on the Import button and browsing to select it. You can paste text from the Windows Clipboard by pressing [image] [image] or type your message into the scrolling edit box directly.

After you’re satisfied with your text, you can click on the Save As... button to save it into a text file if you wish. Click on Send to begin transmitting your fax.


The Menu Bar

"Pull-down" menus are an important part of any Windows application. The menu bar appears at the top of an application’s window. Each word on the menu bar is usually associated with a "family" of menu items which perform similar or related functions. For example, a File family often includes Open, Close and Save commands, all of which perform actions on the program’s data files.

To pull down a menu, just click on it. Once the menu is "down," you can move between the various menus with the left and right arrow keys, and move up and down on the menus with the up and down arrow keys. You can select a menu command by clicking on it, or by highlighting it with the cursor keys and pressing [image].

The menu remains down until you select an item, click on another area of the screen or press [image].

You can also pull down a menu from the keyboard. Simply hold down the [image] key while you press the underlined letter in the family name. For example, to pull down the File menu from the keyboard, you'd typically press [image] [image].

Procomm Plus may add, remove, disable, enable or modify certain menu selections, depending on your current activities. For example, if you initiate the Script Recorder in the Terminal window, the Scripts | Start Recorder menu item changes to Stop Recorder.

An ASPECT script can also change the menu.

Each of Procomm Plus’s communications modules provides its own menus. We’ll discuss these menus along with their applications in the respective topics.


The Message List

In the same manner as the Areas dialog, the viewer Message List dialog makes it easy to jump directly to any message within the current area. To display the dialog, select Messages | List... or click on the List All Messages button on the Action Bar:

The dialog displays the following information for each message in the area:

The message number.

The author of the message.

The addressee of the message.

The message subject.

If you’ve already read a message, the entry is marked with an asterisk to the left of the message number. If you’ve replied to a message, it’s marked with a tilde "~".

To jump directly to a specific message, double click on the corresponding entry.

If you’d like to export the contents of the message window to a disk file, click on Export; the viewer displays a standard Save As dialog. You can also export the current message by selecting Messages | Export... or by pressing [image].

To help in organizing the display of the messages in an area, you can sort them with the same criteria as the Messages | Sort menu item. To change the display, click on the sort criteria you want.

The viewer allows you to "select" a message in the Message dialog by clicking on the message entry. You can also use the standard Windows [image] and [image] key procedures for selecting multiple entries. Once you’ve marked one or more entries, you can read them sequentially by clicking on the Read Selected Messages button. The title bar changes to indicate that you’re reading selected messages.

The selection feature is convenient if you’re only interested in certain messages in the packet, but it’s not necessary to select messages if you simply want to read your messages sequentially!

You can also navigate to the previous message or the next message from the Action Bar, or by selecting Messages | Previous and Messages | Next, respectively.


The Meta Key Editor

Procomm Plus offers 40 Meta Keys that you can use from its Terminal window to send a text string, run an ASPECT script, initiate a selection from the Terminal window’s menus, transmit a special terminal command or execute a Windows application or a DOS program.

Accessing the Meta Key Editor

Editing Meta Keys

Step-by-Step: Customizing a Meta Key


The Meta Key Editor See Also
The Meta Key Editor

Accessing the Meta Key Editor

Editing Meta Keys

Step-by-Step: Customizing a Meta Key


The Meta Keys

The Meta Keys are multipurpose buttons which are displayed by default at the bottom of the Terminal display. You can configure Meta Keys to:

•	Transmit text, with or without echo to the Terminal display.

•	Run ASPECT scripts.

•	Run programs, including Windows applications or .pif files.

•	Execute a command from the Procomm Plus menus.

•	Generate special terminal emulation key sequences.

For example, if you find that you often open a particular application while you’re using Procomm Plus, or if you repeatedly send the same text to a host system, you can automate the process by setting it up as a Meta Key! For help in editing Meta Keys, see The Meta Key Editor.

If a Meta Key is visible, you can execute it by clicking on it. Only ten buttons are visible on-screen at any time, but all of the Meta Keys are always available from the keyboard. You can switch the displayed set by clicking on the button at the left end of the keys.

Meta Keys require only a single click to operate. Do not double-click on them, as this could result in script errors or multiple executions of a program.

Meta Keys are mapped to the [image], [image] [image], [image] [image] and [image] [image] [image] keys in combination with keys [image] through [image], for a total of forty keys.

If the Meta Key buttons don’t appear on your Terminal window, they've been turned off from the Setup menu. To display them, select the Setup | Meta Keys menu item.

To load a different Meta Keys file, open the Data, Setup Files settings panel in Setup, and click on the Meta Keys list box to select an available .key file. For more information, see Meta Keys.


The Monitor Window

Procomm Plus’s Monitor window can be a useful tool if you’re experiencing problems with a particular host’s emulation support. The Monitor window provides an exact display of the characters sent to and received from the host system. The information is not filtered, processed or altered by the current terminal emulation, making it perfect for debugging emulation sequences without leaving Procomm Plus!

To open the Monitor window, select the Data | Monitor window... menu item.  You can move the Monitor window to any location on your display, and resize it to suit your needs. It displays data in two columns. The left column depicts incoming and outgoing characters in hexadecimal value, while the right column displays their corresponding ASCII characters on the same line. Characters you send and receive are color-coded for display and appear in the window in the order they occurred.

For help in configuring the Monitor window colors, For more information, see Window Colors.

The Monitor window includes a simple menu that allows you to exit, or save the window’s hexadecimal contents to a special file named monitor.cap. If a monitor.cap file already exists, the new information will be appended to the old file.

When you select the Monitor window as your active window, the transfer of data is paused, to allow you to scroll and examine the data stream depicted in the Monitor window. If you’ve enabled software or hardware flow control, Procomm Plus will use it to help avoid the loss of incoming characters. This makes it very convenient to switch between the Terminal and Monitor windows simply by clicking on one or the other to activate them in turn.

If the Terminal window is active and new data is sent or received, the Monitor window will automatically scroll to display it. The Monitor window will not display data during a file transfer or fax operation.


The News Entry Class

News-class entries are used to connect to news and special interest message groups on the Internet.

Step-by-Step: Adding a News-class Entry

News-class Settings


The News Reader

Procomm Plus includes the News Reader to help you easily manage the large quantity of messages available from Usenet Newsgroups. In addition to powerful features like support for UUdecoding, Procomm Plus also includes an easy-to-use interface for quick on-line navigation.

The News Reader references the Current News Options option set defined in the Internet, News panel of Setup to determine everything from your news server’s address to how you want your article headers sorted.

An Introduction to Internet Newsgroups

Running the News Reader

Elements of the News Reader Window

Using the News Reader

The News Reader’s Menus and Action Bar


The News Reader Display Area

The News Reader display area is split into two sections:

The Folders list, located on the left.

The Headers list, located on the right.

These sections help you easily keep track of the large quantities of messages available within individual Internet newsgroups.

The Folders List

The left portion of the display area is a tree structure of folders. There are three top level folders:

Visited Newsgroups

This folder stores a list of the newsgroups you have read during the current session, listed by their full names in a second level of folders under the Visited Newsgroups folder.

All Newsgroups

The All Newsgroups folder is the top folder of a multilevel tree structure that arranges newsgroups by their names. The first level under All Newsgroups displays folders for each of the main types of newsgroups, plus any other starting level newsgroups your news server provides. Subsequent folder levels contain subgroups of the starting level newsgroups, and so on.

Unread Newsgroups

This folder stores a list of newsgroups that contain unread articles you have retrieved through a previous process.

If a folder within the tree structure contains other folders, it's displayed with a small plus (+) button. To open a folder an expand the next level of the tree, simply click on its associated plus (+) button.

When you expand the tree structure within a folder, its associated plus (+) button changes to a minus (-) button. If you click on a minus button, the tree structure contracts and the minus button changes back to a plus.

The Headers List

Newsgroup articles usually contains header information describing the articles contents, origin and posting date. When you double click on a folder, the News Reader scans the articles contained in the folder and displays the header information in its header list on the right side of the reader window.

Each article's entry in the headers list displays the following information:

Status

If a green dot appears beside an article’s subject, the article has been tagged. Tagged articles can be retrieved.

If a push pin appears beside an article's subject, the article has been marked to Keep. Any article with the Keep attribute will not be purged.

If the image of a document appears beside an article's subject, the article has been retrieved from the news server and is stored in the local database. If a red "X" appears, the article is no longer available on the news server and is not stored locally. If neither of these images appears, the article is not stored in the local database but it was available on the server at the time of the last update.

If a "plus" button appears beside an article's subject, the article represents the starting point for a thread of two or more articles. You can click on the plus button to expand the thread. Similarly, if a "minus" button appears, it indicates the starting point for an expanded thread; you can click on the minus button to contract the thread.

Subject

The contents of the article's Subject line.

From

The name or Internet Email address of the article’s author.

Date

The date the article was received by your news server.

Given the meandering path newsgroup articles can take across time zones, traveling from news server to news server, it's not uncommon to see a reply to an article with a date or time stamp earlier than that of the article itself!

Size

The number of lines in the article.

Number

The number of the article within its newsgroup on your news server.

The article number shown in the News Reader's headers list is accurate for your news server. However, since each news server on the Internet maintains its own newsgroups and articles lists, a particular article's number may vary from server to server.

The News Reader allows you to sort the headers list by any one of its information fields, in either ascending or descending order. You can specify a sort order by selecting one of the Edit | Sort menu items, or by clicking on the heading list field you want to sort with.

Clicking on the heading fields also toggles the sort order between ascending and descending. For example, to sort the articles by ascending date (older-to-newer), click on the Date field once. To sort by descending date (newer-to-older), click Date a second time.

You can also choose to sort the articles by threading them. This arranges articles primarily by subject, but also links them to the articles they reply to: the original article appears first, followed by all of its replies. Threading articles makes it easier to read them as though they were parts of a conversation.

The article number shown in the News Reader's headers list is accurate for your news server. However, since each news server on the Internet maintains its own newsgroups and articles lists, a particular article's number may vary from server to server.

For your convenience, the fields displayed in the header list are also resizable. To change the width of a field, move the mouse cursor slowly over one of its boundary lines: when the cursor changes to a bi-directional arrow, you can click and drag the boundary line in the direction you desire. Your changes are applied immediately to the headers list!

The header list takes special advantage of the right mouse button. Click it to access a variety of functions from the News Reader's News menu.


The News Reader's Status Line

At the bottom of the News Reader window is the Status Line, which is used to display messages and program information, including information about the current Newsgroup and Headers list.

From left to right you see a guess of how many articles reside on the server in the current group, the number of groups in your news database and the current date and time.

If the Status Line doesn't appear on your News Reader window, it’s been toggled off. Simply select the Setup | Status Line menu item to turn it on again.


The News Reader’s Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar          Menu | Item          Description
       Button

Using the News Reader's Menus and Action Bar

	Rapid Connect No associated menu item.	The Rapid Connect drop down list box allows you to quickly access the Headers for a newsgroup.  By default, News-class entries are shown in the list box, but you can toggle the displayed class by selecting the appropriate bracketed item from the list. For example, to view Mail-class entries and groups, you’d select the [Mail Connection] item.
	File | Create Connection Directory...	Creates a new, untitled Connection Directory file.
	File | Open Connection Directory...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, where you can select an existing Connection Directory file to be loaded for use. See The Connection Directory.
	File | Connection Directory...	Opens the Connection Directory and displays the currently loaded .dir file. See The Connection Directory.
	File |  Decode Local File	Opens a standard file selection dialog, where you can select file to load and decode. This is useful if you've save a newsgroup article as a text file and later discovered that it included an encoded file.
	File | Exit	Closes all open data files, closes the News Reader window, and returns you to Windows.
	Edit | Find...	Opens the Find dialog, where you can specify text and options to be used to search for text in the News Reader display. For more information, see Searching for Text.
	Edit |  Sort	Opens a submenu, where you can select the field to be used to sort the headers of the currently selected newsgroup. You can sort headers by Date, From, Subject, Size, Article Number, or Subject with Replies, in ascending or descending order.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility, where you can configure the operating characteristics of Procomm Plus. See The Setup Utility.
	Setup | System	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Systems group in Setup. See the The System Settings for more information.
	Setup | Data	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Data group in Setup. See The Data Settings for more information.
	Setup | Fax	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Fax group in Setup. See The Fax Settings for more information.
	Setup | Internet	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Internet group in Setup. See The Internet Settings for more information.
	Setup |  Action Bars...	Opens the Load Action Bars dialog, where you can specify the Action Bar files you want to use. See Selecting Action Bars.
	Setup |  Large Action Bars	Toggles between the display of large or small icon buttons on the News Reader’s Action Bar.
	Setup | Status Window	Toggles the display of the News Status Window, which displays important information about your news session.
	Setup | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar ToolTips. If this menu item is checked or enabled, the Terminal window will also display brief help information on the Status Line when the mouse cursor is left motionless over an Action Bar button for one second. The ToolTips setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup | Status Line	Toggles the display of the News Reader window Status Line. See The News Reader's Status Line. The Status Line setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup | Answer Options	Determines whether Procomm Plus or another application will answer incoming data or fax calls on the current connection.
	News | Add Group to Connection Directory	Creates a Connection Directory entry for the currently selected newsgroup.
	News | Get Group List	Receives the complete list of newsgroups available for download from your news server.
	News | Update Group List	Updates the list of newsgroups available for download from your news server.
	News | Get New Headers	Retrieves the headers for the currently selected newsgroup. The number of headers actually retrieved is determined by the settings you've specified in the Article Header Retrieval group in the Internet, News, Properties panel of Setup and the number of headers available in the selected newsgroup.
	News |  Compose New Article	Opens the New Article window, where you can compose a new article for the posting to a newsgroup. For more information, see Step-by-Step: Composing your own article.
	News | Get Selected Articles	Retrieves the articles whose headers you've highlighted in the headers list.
	News | Get and Decode Selected Articles...	Retrieves and decodes attached files from the articles whose headers you've highlighted in the headers list. Decoded files are stored in the path you've specified in the Internet, News, Properties panel in Setup.
	News | Get Tagged Articles	Retrieves the articles whose headers you've previously tagged.
	News | Get and Decode Tagged Articles...	Retrieves and decodes attached files from the articles whose headers you've previously tagged. Decoded files are stored in the path specified in the Internet, News, Properties panel within Setup.
	News | Add Author to Killfile | Current Newsgroup	Adds the author of the currently highlighted article to the killfile for the current newsgroup, preventing articles from that author from being seen.
	News | Add Author to Killfile | Global	Adds the author of the currently highlighted article to the killfile for all newsgroups, preventing articles from that author from being seen.
	News | Add Subject to Killfile | Current Newsgroup	Adds the subject of the currently highlighted article to the killfile for the current newsgroup, preventing articles on that subject from being seen.
	News | Add Subject to Killfile | Global	Adds the subject of the currently highlighted article to the killfile for all newsgroups, preventing articles on that subject from being seen.
	News | Mark Article(s)	Marks all of the articles (all) or the headers you've selected (selected) with one of the following marks:  read, unread, keep, don't keep, tag or untag.
	News | Work Offline	If toggled on, the News Reader will connect to the news server only to get and send news; message composition is performed offline.  If toggled off, the News Reader remains connected to the news server while articles are being read and replies composed.
	View | View Article	Opens the Read Article window, displaying the full article text associated with the selected header.
	View | View Saved Graphic	Determines whether the Image Viewer or GIF Viewer will be launched automatically after a decode process..
	View | Show visited Groups	Expands the Visited Newsgroups folder and moves the focus to it.
	View | Show only unread articles	Configures the News Reader to display only those articles you haven't read.
	View | Status window	Toggles the display of the decode status window.
	Scripts | Start Script	Executes the ASPECT script displayed in the Action Bar’s Script File list box. If a script is already running, you can click on this icon to stop it. The icon is animated whenever a script is running.
	Scripts | Run...	Opens the Run ASPECT File dialog, from which you can execute compiled scripts from the current directory selected in Setup, or browse through your other directories.  is the keyboard equivalent. For more information, see Running Scripts.
	Scripts | Compile/Edit	Opens the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog, from which you can create, edit, compile and execute scripts.  is the keyboard equivalent. For more information, see Compiling Scripts.
	Tools |  Remote Control	Displays the Procomm Remote opening dialog, where you can configure your computer for remote control, call a remote machine or set your machine as a host.
	Tools |  Send a Fax...	Displays the Send a Fax wizard.  If wizards are disabled, the Send a Fax dialog is displayed instead.
	Tools | Image Viewer	Opens the Image Viewer, where you can select and view images in many formats. See the Image Viewer.
	Tools | Scheduler	Opens the Scheduler, where you can set Procomm Plus to perform functions automatically at a predetermined time. For more information, see The Scheduler.
	Tools |  Action Bar Editor	Opens the Action Bar Editor, where you can design your own Action Bars for use in the News Reader window. See The Action Bar Editor.
	Tools |  QWKMail Viewer	Opens the QWKMail Viewer, where you can view and reply to messages you’ve retrieved from a BBS. For a detailed discussion, see The QWK Mail Viewer.
	Tools | Caller ID Directory Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor, where you can add, modify or delete Caller IDs from the current database. See The Caller ID Directory Editor.
	Tools | Fax Status	Opens the Fax Status utility, where you can monitor the status of your fax connection(s) and watch the progress of on-going fax activity. See The Fax Status Utility.
	Tools |  Fax Manager	Opens the Fax Manager utility where you may access all of the fax functionality. See The Fax Manager.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, which you can use to view, annotate and print faxes you’ve received or sent. See The Fax Viewer.
	Tools | Fax Cover Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor, where you can create your own cover sheets, or modify those included with Procomm Plus. For more information, see The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Tools |  ASPECT Editor	Opens the ASPECT Editor, which you can use to create, view or modify text files as well as ASPECT source files. See The ASPECT Editor.
	Tools |  Dialog Editor	Opens the Dialog Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom dialog boxes for your ASPECT scripts, as explained in The Dialog Editor.
	Tools | User  Window Editor	Opens the User Window Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom screens for your ASPECT scripts, as explained in The User Window Editor.
	Tools |  Meta Key Editor	Opens the Meta Key Editor, where you can configure the actions performed by the Terminal window’s forty available Meta Key combinations. For more information, see The Meta Key Editor.
	Tools |  Keyboard Editor	Opens the Keyboard Editor, where you can specify the sequences sent or actions performed by the current emulation’s mappable keys. For more information, see The Keyboard Editor.
	Tools | Translate Table Editor	Opens the Translate Table Editor, where you can choose to modify or filter the characters sent or received by the current emulation. See The Translate Table Editor.
	Window |  Change Window	Allows you to changes the current window to one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, Fax Status, the Telnet window, the FTP Client or the Internet Mail Client.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, Fax Status, the Telnet window, the FTP Client, the Web Browser, the Internet Mail Client, or the News Reader.
	Window |  1,2,3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottom of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help |  Wizards...	Opens the Procomm Plus Wizard Manager dialog, where you can launch wizards to assist you in performing common tasks.
	Help |  Contents...	Opens on-line help for the Internet News Reader.


The OCR Editor

Procomm Plus’s OCR Editor allows you to review and edit the text interpreted from images you’ve processed with the OCR engine. The OCR Editor works much like a standard Windows text editor. For example, you can select, cut, copy and delete text using the standard editing keys. However, the OCR Editor also includes a variety of powerful features for its special purpose:

A Pop-Up Verifier, which displays the area of the image associated with the word or text you click on in the editor.

A spell-checker, which includes support for personalized dictionary files.

Support for bold, italic and underline character attributes.

Full search-and-replace capabilities.

For more information, see the following topics:

Using the OCR Editor

The OCR Editor Basics

Step-by-Step: Editing OCR Output Data

The OCR Editor’s Menus and Action Bar


The OCR Editor Basics

To Do This...     Do This....

Move left or right by a single character.	Press the left or right cursor keys, respectively.
Move left or right by a single word.	Press the left or right cursor keys while holding down the [image] key.
Move up or down a line.	Press the up or down cursor keys, respectively.
Move to the end of the line.	Press the [image] key.
Move to the beginning of the line.	Press the [image] key.
Move down a page.	Press the [image] key, or click beneath the scroll thumb on the scrollbar.
Move up a page.	Press the [image] key, or click above the scroll thumb on the scrollbar.
Move to the end of the file.	Press the [image] key while holding down the [image] key.
Move to the beginning of the file.	Press the [image] key while holding down the [image] key.
Select a character.	Drag over it with the mouse cursor, or hold the [image] key down as you move over the character with the left or right cursor keys.
Select a word.	Hold the [image] and [image] keys down as you move over the word with the left or right cursor keys.
Select a line.	Drag over it with the mouse, or hold the [image] key down as you move over the line with the up or down cursor keys.
Select all text to the end of a line.	Drag over it with the mouse, or hold the [image] key down and press [image].
Select all text to the beginning of a line.	Drag over it with the mouse, or hold the [image] key down and press [image].
Select all text to the end of the file.	Hold the [image] and [image] keys down, and press [image].
Select all text to the beginning of the file.	Hold the [image] and [image] keys down, and press [image].
Select the entire contents of the file.	Press [image] [image], then [image] [image] [image].
Copy selected text to the Windows Clipboard, and delete it from the file.	Press [image] [image] or click on the Cut Action Bar button:
Copy selected text to the Windows Clipboard.	Press [image] [image] or click on the Copy Action Bar button:
Copy text from the Windows Clipboard to the current cursor location in the file.	Press [image] [image] or click on the Paste Action Bar button:


The OCR Editor’s Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar      Menu | Item      Description
      Button

	File | Save	Writes any changes you’ve made in the current OCR output file to disk.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Save As...	Displays a standard file save as dialog, allowing you to save the current document under a new filename.
	File | Print...	Prints the current document.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Exit	Closes the OCR Editor.  If you close the OCR Editor without saving the output data file, the Fax Viewer will assume that you intend to cancel the entire OCR process!
	Edit | Cut	Copies selected text to the Windows clipboard and deletes it from the document.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Copy	Copies selected text to the Windows clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste	Copies text from the Windows clipboard into the document at the current cursor location.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Delete	Deletes selected text from the document.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Select All	Selects the entire contents of the document.
	Find |  Find...	Opens a dialog where you can specify a search string. The search begins at the current cursor position. You can force a case-sensitive search, or change the direction of the search by selecting options in the Find dialog.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Find | Repeat Last Find	Repeats the previous Find action.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Find |  Replace...	Opens the Replace dialog where you can specify a string to be searched for and replaced with another string you specify. The search begins at the current cursor position and proceeds downward through the document. You can force a case-sensitive search by enabling the Match Case check box. If your search string is found, you can choose to Repeat Last Find, Replace or Replace All by clicking the appropriate buttons.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Find |  Find Special Marker	Locates the next occurrence of the editor’s placeholder marker, which is used to replace characters the OCR engine couldn’t recognize in the original image.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Find | Pop-Up Verifier	Displays the Pop-Up Verifier with the region of the fax or image associated with the word or text nearest the OCR Editor’s cursor.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Find | Auto Pop-Up	A toggle setting that determines whether the editor’s Pop-Up Verifier is automatically displayed when you click on a suspect word or use the Find or Replace functions. It is enabled by default.
	Character | Regular	Removes all attributes from the currently selected text.
	Character | Bold	Applies the bold attribute to the currently selected text.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Character | Italic	Applies the italic attribute to the currently selected text.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Character | Underline	Applies the underline attribute to the currently selected text.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Speller | Mark Suspect Words	By default, the OCR Editor automatically highlights misspelled words. You can toggle this feature on and off by selecting this menu item.
	Speller | Find Next	Locates the next word in the document that appears to be misspelled.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Speller | Add Word	Adds the selected word to the open dictionary file.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Speller | Mark Word as Correct	Marks the selected word as correct.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Speller | Select User  Dictionary	Opens a file selection dialog where you can select the dictionary file you want to use.
	Speller | Refresh	Updates the displayed text and reruns the spell checker, marking words the editor cannot verify and unmarking words that appear to be correct.  If you’ve marked a word as correct, the Refresh function will search for other instances of the same word and mark them correct as well.
	Help | Contents	Displays the on-line Help for the OCR Editor.
	Help | Search for Help on...	Displays the on-line Help topic search dialog.
	Help | About...	Displays important infomation on this version of the OCR Editor.


The Organize Favorites Dialog
Organize Favorites

This dialog allows you to organize your favorite Web site shortcuts any way you wish.  Organizing sites makes it easier for you to locate a favorite page or a specific topical area within your Favorites list.

To create a new folder

Click the new folder icon at the top of the dialog. You will be prompted for a name for your new folder.

To open an existing folder

Double-click on the folder icon or highlight it and click on the Open button.

To move favorites into a folder

Click the shortcut in the list and drag it to the desired folder, or select multiple files and click on the Move button.

To rename a shortcut or a folder

Click on the shortcut or folder in the list and click on the Rename button.

When you've finished arranging your shortcuts, click on the Close button to return to the Browser Window.


The Program Control Area

The upper segment of Procomm Plus’s main window consists of a standard Windows title bar and its controls, a menu bar, and a powerful feature of Procomm Plus, the Action Bar:


The QWK Mail Viewer Action Bar

The Action Bar offers easy access to the program functions you’ll use most often in the QWK Mail Viewer. Each Action Bar button and menu item is covered in detail in The QWK Mail Viewer's Menus and Action Bar.


The QWK Mail Viewer Message Window

This is the window where the viewer displays the text of your messages. The message window can be resized, moved or minimized, and the viewer can load more than one packet and display more than one message at a time. The title bar for each message window indicates which packet it’s displaying.

You’ll note that the message window is divided into two areas by a moveable bar. The top portion of the window contains the message header information. From left to right, the header fields are:

The topic area number and name, as supplied by the BBS.

The date and time the message was posted.

The message number, as supplied by the BBS.

The author of the message.

The current message number in this area, and the total number of messages in this area.

The addressee for this message.

The message status flags. Depending on the type and status of the message, you might see:

PVT

This is a private message.

RCVD

The message is marked received on the BBS.

READ

You have read this message within the QWK Mail Viewer.

ATTACHMENT

A file is attached to this message

REPLIED

You have replied to this message within the QWK Mail Viewer.

The message subject line.

Below the divider bar, the QWK Mail Viewer displays the contents of the message.


The QWK Mail Viewer Status Line

The Status Line appears as the last line of the QWK Mail Viewer. It’s used to display status messages and help text. You can toggle the Status Line by selecting View | Status Line from the menu bar.


The QWK Mail Viewer Window

The QWK Mail Viewer window consists of three parts:

The title bar, menu bar and Action Bar. See The QWK Mail Viewer Action Bar.

The main display area, or Message Window.

The Status Line. See The QWK Mail Viewer Status Line.


The QWK Mail Viewer’s Menus and Action Bar

  Action Bar       Menu | Item      Description
     button

Using the QWK Mail Viewer's Menus and Action Bar

	File | New Packet...	Opens a new empty reply packet for one of the bulletin boards recognized by the viewer.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Open Packet...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, allowing you to select and open an existing mail packet.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File | Close Window	Closes the current window. Depending on your Setup choices, if you have replied or composed new messages the viewer may prompt you before closing.
	File |  Request File...	Requests the downloading of one or more files when the reply packet is uploaded. This command is only available with Blue Wave packets.
	File | Print Font...	Opens a standard Printer Font dialog, where you can specify a new font for the viewer to use while printing messages.
	File | Print...	Prints the message currently displayed in the message window.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File |  1, 2, 3 or 4	The viewer remembers the filenames of the last four packets you’ve edited. To reload one of them, simply select it from the File menu.
	File | Exit	Exits the QWK Mail Viewer. Depending on your Setup settings, the viewer may prompt you if you’ve replied to or composed any messages. You may also be asked whether to delete the packet or save the message pointers.
	Edit | Undo	Reverses the effect of the last action you performed. This command is useful if you happen to make a mistake and want to restore deleted text.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Cut	Deletes the selected text from a message and places it in the Windows clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the selected text from a message and places it in the Windows clipboard.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste	Copies text from the Windows clipboard and places it in the active message window.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit | Paste from File...	Inserts the contents of a disk file at the current cursor position.
	Edit |  Delete	Deletes the highlighted text in the active window.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Edit |  Select All	Highlights the entire contents of the message window for an upcoming command.
	Edit | Find...	Opens a dialog where you can search for a text string within all of the messages within the current area. The search is not case-sensitive, and you can specify search criteria to limit the search to the message text and three fields in the header.
	Edit | Find and Replace...	Opens a standard Windows Find and Replace dialog where you can specify a string of characters to be searched for and replaced with another string you specify. The search is performed in the active message window from the current cursor position. You can force a case-sensitive search within the dialog. If your search string is found, you can choose to Find Next, Replace or Replace All by clicking the appropriate buttons.  This command is only available when you’re composing a message.
	View |  Screen Font...	Opens a standard Screen Font dialog, where you can specify a new font for the viewer to use for displaying messages.
	View |  Use ANSI Viewer...	Opens the QWK Mail Viewer’s ANSI file viewer for ANSI pictures and animations embedded in messages and packets.  is the shortcut key.
	View |  Action Bar	Toggles the display of the viewer Action Bar.
	View |  Status Line	Toggles the display of the Status Line.
	View |  ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar ToolTips.
	View |  Large Action Bar	Toggles the display of the viewer Action Bar between large and small buttons.
	Areas |  List...	Opens the Area List dialog, allowing you to select a message topic area within the current packet.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Areas |  Next	Jumps to the first unread message in the next area.  - right cursor is the keyboard shortcut.
	Areas |  Previous	Jumps to the previous message area.  - left cursor is the keyboard shortcut.
	Areas |  Personal Messages	Opens a new window containing messages in the current packet addressed to you.
	Areas | Replies (Outgoing Messages)	Opens a new window containing your replies and and the new messages you’ve written in the current packet.
	Messages |  List...	Opens the Message List dialog, allowing you to select a message within the current message area.   is the keyboard shortcut.
	Messages |  Next	Jumps to the next message in the current area. The right cursor key is the shortcut key.
	Messages |  Previous	Jumps to the previous message in the current area. The left cursor key is the shortcut key.
	Messages |  Export...	Saves the contents of the current message to a disk file. The header information is included.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Messages |  Sort	Sorts the messages throughout the current packet by the criteria you select.
	Messages |  Compose/Edit Message	Opens a message window for the composition of a new message.   is the keyboard shortcut.
	Messages |  Reply to Message	Opens a message window for a reply to the current message.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Messages |  Get Tagline	Saves the tagline from the current message to your tagline file.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Messages |  Extract Attachment	Saves a file attached to the current message to disk. This command is active only if the current message contains an attachment.
	Messages |  Check Spelling	Check the current message text for spelling errors. This command is only available when you’re composing a message.
	Messages |  Insert Signature	Add the signature text defined in Setup at the current cursor position.   is the shortcut key. This command is only available when you’re composing a message.
	Messages |  Attach File...	Attach a binary file for uploading with this message. This command is only available when you’re composing a message.
	Messages |  RIME Routing	Specifies that this message should include RelayNet RIME routing information. This command is only available when you’re composing a message.
	Messages |  RIME Routing w/Receipt	Specifies that this message should include RelayNet RIME routing information and requests a return receipt from the destination BBS. This command is only available when you’re composing a message.
	Messages |  Save Message	Saves the current message and closes the window.  is the keyboard shortcut. This command is only available when you’re composing a message.
	Setup |  (section...)	Opens the corresponding section of the viewer Setup dialog. See Configuring the QWK Mail Viewer for more information.
	Window |  New Window	Opens another message window for the current packet.
	Window |  Cascade	Displays all of the open message windows in the familiar overlapping style used often in the Windows 3.x Program Manager.
	Window | Tile	Displays or "tiles" all of the open message windows within the viewer window. The windows are displayed horizontally. You can switch the active focus to another window by clicking once anywhere within it.
	Window |  Arrange Icons	Arranges all of the message windows you’ve minimized to icons neatly in the lower left hand corner of the viewer window.
	Window |  1,2,3 ...	The viewer lists all of the open file windows at the bottom of the Window menu. To make an open window the active window, simply select it from the list.
	Help | Contents	Opens the QWK Mail Viewer on-line help window.
	Help |  Search for Help on...	Opens the help utility to a Search dialog where you can search for viewer help topics.
	Help | How to Use Help	Opens the How to Use Help on-line help.
	Help |  About...	Displays the version number and copyright information for the QWK Mail Viewer.


The QWK Mail Viewer

The Procomm Plus QWK Mail Viewer gives you a convenient way to read and reply to messages and electronic mail from many bulletin board systems.

If the BBS you’re calling offers QWK mail services, you can download messages and electronic mail as a single compressed file, usually ending in the extension .qwk. After you’ve logged off the BBS, the QWK Mail Viewer will expand the QWK packet and you can read and reply to your messages at your leisure. Once you’ve finished reading and replying to all of the messages, the QWK Mail Viewer will compress your replies into another compressed file ending in the extension .rep, which you can upload to the BBS. The BBS will automatically insert your replies into its message base.

QWKmail has proven extremely popular among BBS users who enjoy reading messages on several bulletin boards, as well as those who must call long-distance to connect with a favorite system!

For more information, see the following topics:

Running the QWK Mail Viewer

The QWK Mail Viewer Window

Step-by-Step: Downloading a QWK Packet

Opening a QWK Packet

Navigating QWK Packets

Responding to QWK Messages

Creating New QWK Messages

Closing and Deleting QWK Packets

Advanced QWK Mail Viewer Features

Configuring the QWK Mail Viewer

The QWK Mail Viewer’s Menus and Action Bar


The Quick Select Line

The Quick Select Line is a dual-purpose feature of the Terminal window. It acts as a status line, reporting the current value of several important Procomm Plus settings, but also allows you to change those settings with only a click of the mouse!

The Quick Select Line appears at the bottom of the Terminal window. From left to right, the Quick Select Line displays:

•	The current terminal emulation.

•	The current default transfer protocol.

•	The current connection.

•	The current baud rate and port settings.

As you move the mouse pointer over a field, Procomm Plus changes the cursor to a pointing hand to indicate that the field is selectable. When you click on the field, a pop-up list is displayed showing the available choices. Click on the item you want, and the Terminal window will use it as the current setting.

If you click with the right mouse button on any of these fields, Procomm Plus will automatically open Setup to the settings panel related to the field you clicked. The right mouse button has no effect on the custom fields.

At the end of the Quick Select Line is a configurable field, with several different display options. If you’re running in a video resolution of 800x600 or higher, you may see two or more of these custom fields, depending on the size of the Terminal window.

The default display for the first configurable field is a real-time simulation of the indicator lights on an external modem. This can be very useful in diagnosing problems with a modem or host system! Custom fields can also display:

•	The current terminal row and column position.

•	The available space for download files.

•	The current amount of free memory, as reported by Windows.

The Free Memory selection is the amount of free memory reported by Windows. Since this can include swap files, it may be higher than the total physical memory in your computer.

•	A graphic representation of the amount of data held in the transmit and receive buffers.

•	A real-time clock.

•	The name of the currently-running ASPECT script.


The Raw ASCII Protocol

The Raw ASCII protocol is a variant of ASCII. However, Raw ASCII performs no translation, filtering or software flow control on the data being sent or received.

Raw ASCII is especially useful to those users requiring completely "transparent" or "passthru" transfer of text files, or even transmission of binary files when no protocol is available on the remote system.

Many of the Setup options that control the ASCII protocol do not apply to Raw ASCII. If you’re sending a file with Raw ASCII, only the Local Echo, Line Pacing, Pace Character and Character Pacing settings still apply. If you’re receiving a file with Raw ASCII, all Setup options are valid, but the Translate Table is disabled.

Procomm Plus does not strip the 8th bit or perform any CR/LF manipulation during a Raw ASCII transfer.

The Setup options for the Raw ASCII protocol are discussed in Raw ASCII Settings.


The Read Message Menus and Action Bar
The Read Article Window's Menus and Action Bar

   Action Bar          Menu Item             Description
       Button

	File |  Connection  Directory...	Opens the current Connection Directory file, allowing you to connect to, create or edit News entries.
	File |  Save Article as Text...	Saves the currently displayed article as a standard text file, using a filename you specify. By default, the file will be written to the path you’ve specified in the Internet, News, Properties panel in Setup.
	File | Print	Prints the displayed article to the currently selected printer.
	File | Exit	Closes the Read Article window, returning you to the News Reader’s main window.
	Edit | Copy	Copies text you’ve selected in the current article to the Windows Clipboard. The article is not affected.
	Edit | Select All	Selects the entire text of the article except for its header contents.
	News | Add Group to Connection Directory	Creates a Connection Directory News entry for the current newsgroup. Once placed in the Connection Directory, the entry will also appear in the Rapid Connect list box in the main News Reader window.
	News | Add Author to Killfile | Current Newsgroup	Adds the author of the current article to the killfile for the current newsgroup, preventing articles from that author from being seen.
	News | Add Author to Killfile | Global	Adds the author of the current article to the killfile for all newsgroups, preventing articles from that author from being seen.
	News | Add Subject to Killfile | Current Newsgroup	Adds the subject of the current article to the killfile for the current newsgroup, preventing articles on that subject from being seen.
	News | Add Subject to Killfile | Global	Adds the subject of the current article to the killfile for all newsgroups, preventing articles on that subject from being seen.
	News | Compose New Article...	Opens the New Article window, where you can prepare an article to be posted to any newsgroup under any subject.
	News | Reply to Article...	Opens the Reply to Article window, where you can prepare a reply to the article currently displayed in the Read Article window. The current article’s Subject line and newsgroup name are automatically entered in the appropriate fields within the Reply to Article window. For more information, see Responding to an Article.
	News | View Entire Header...	Opens a simple dialog where you can view all of the header information available for the current message.
	News | View Previous Article	Displays the article which precedes the current article in the sorted headers list.
	News | View Next Article	Displays the article which follows the current article in the sorted headers list.
	Help | Using News	Opens on-line Help for the News Reader.
	Help | Search  for Help on...	Opens on-line Help with the Search dialog activated.


The Reply to Message Menus and Action Bar
The Reply to Article Window's Menus and Action Bar

    Action Bar         Menu Item             Description
       Button

	File |  Connection  Directory...	Opens the current Connection Directory file, where you can select a News entry to be used as the destination newsgroup in the To field.
	File |  Save Article as Text...	Saves your reply to the current article as a standard text file, using a filename you specify. By default, the file will be written to the path you’ve specified in the Internet, News, Properties panel in Setup.
	File | Import Text...	Opens a standard file selection dialog, where you can browse for and select a text file to be imported into the message body of your article.
	File | Print	Prints your reply to the current article to the currently selected printer.
	File | Exit	Closes the Reply to Article window without posting an article to a newsgroup.
	Edit | Cut	Removes the text you’ve selected in the message body edit box and places it in the Windows Clipboard.
	Edit | Copy	Copies the text you’ve selected in the message body edit box to the Windows Clipboard. The message body text is unaffected.
	Edit | Paste	Copies text from the Windows Clipboard into the message body edit box.
	Edit | Select All	Selects all of the text in the message body edit box.
	News | Add Group to Rapid Connect	Creates a Connection Directory News entry for the current newsgroup. Once placed in the Connection Directory, the entry will also appear in the Rapid Connect list box in the main News Reader window.
	News |  Attach/Encode File...	Opens a standard file selection dialog, where you can browse for and select a file to be attached to your article. If necessary, the file will be encoded for posting.
	News |  Post/Send Article	Saves your article and sends it to your news server.
	News |  Check Spelling
	Help | Using News	Opens on-line Help for the News Reader.
	Help | Search  for Help on...	Opens on-line Help with the Search dialog activated.


The Scheduler

The Procomm Plus Scheduler is a versatile utility that can run any DOS or Windows application, including Procomm Plus itself, at a date and time you specify, or at a certain regular frequency. You can take advantage of any command-line arguments your scheduled programs accept, for even greater flexibility. The Scheduler even features special built-in support for ASPECT scripts.

To launch Windows applications or execute DOS programs, the Scheduler itself must be running. However, Scheduler is designed to be both efficient and unobtrusive. After you’ve configured any events you want the Scheduler to handle, you can minimize it and go on to other tasks. The Scheduler will remain inactive until it’s time for one of your scheduled tasks to be launched!

Running the Scheduler

Step-by-Step: Scheduling a Task

Step-by-Step: Scheduling Procomm Plus

Editing Scheduled Tasks

Using the Time & Date Dialog

The Scheduler's Options Menu

Step-by-Step: Defining Workdays

The Scheduler's Menus


The Scheduler See Also
The Scheduler

Running the Scheduler

Step-by-Step: Scheduling a Task

Step-by-Step: Scheduling Procomm Plus

Editing Scheduled Tasks

Using the Time & Date Dialog

The Scheduler's Options Menu

Step-by-Step: Defining Workdays


The Scheduler's Menus

 Menu | Item                           Description

File | Exit	Closes the Scheduler.  is the keyboard shortcut.
Options | Define workdays...	Opens the Define workdays dialog, as discussed in Step-by-Step: Defining Workdays.
Options | Run expired events	This selection configures how the Scheduler handles expired events, as discussed in The Scheduler's Options Menu.
Options | Delete completed events	This selection configures how the Scheduler handles completed events, as discussed in The Scheduler's Options Menu.
Help | Help Topics	Opens the on-line help system and displays information about the Scheduler.
Help | About Scheduler	Displays version information about the Scheduler.


The Scheduler's Options Menu

Selections on the Options menu allow you to control how Scheduler handles "expired" and completed events, and to specify the days of the week when your tasks should run.

Run Expired Events

If an event’s scheduled time and date has lapsed at the time Scheduler starts, that event is said to be "expired". By default, Scheduler launches expired events immediately upon start-up. For example, if you scheduled a script to run at 8:00 am, but Scheduler was not started until 8:15, the script would be launched as soon as Scheduler loaded.

You can enable or disable Scheduler’s execution of expired events by selecting the Options | Run Expired Events menu item. The response is enabled if a checkmark appears by this item on the menu. Events that have executed and completed are not considered "expired".

Delete Completed

By default, Scheduler deletes events that have executed and completed. You can enable or disable this behavior by selecting the Options | Delete Completed menu item. Scheduler will delete completed events if a checkmark appears by this item on the menu.


The Script Recorder

Perhaps the most common use for an ASPECT script is to automate a logon, or to automate certain activities on a host system. Typically, these involve a simple set of keystrokes that are repeated each time you perform them manually. You can use the Terminal window’s Script Recorder to easily create a script that performs such a repetitive process each time you run it!

The Script Recorder monitors a host system’s prompts, and the characters you type in response to them. It then uses this information to generate an ASPECT source file. Once you’ve specified a name for the .was file, and compiled the script, you can run it to respond to those same prompts just as though you were entering the information from the keyboard!

Running the Recorder

Step-by-Step: Recording a Script


The Script Recorder See Also
The Script Recorder

Running the Recorder

Step-by-Step: Recording a Script


The Send Fax Dialog

Procomm Plus’s fax capabilities, like its other features, are designed with you in mind. The Send Fax dialog is an important part of this design. It gives you tremendous flexibility in creating and sending faxes, while allowing you the freedom to skip fields and features you don’t want for a particular fax!

In this section, we’ll discuss the options available in the Send Fax dialog, beginning with the Send Fax To... options. However, keep in mind that to send a fax, Procomm Plus needs only a recipient’s name and number and at least one of the following:

One or more files or documents to fax as images or send as Binary File Transfers.

Text entered into the MemoFax edit box, as explained in The MemoFax Options.

A cover sheet selected for use.

Poll Remote enabled in the Time & Options section of the Send Fax dialog.

Load Fax Status and select Fax | Send a Fax... The Send Fax dialog is displayed.

The Send Fax dialog contains four screens, only one of which is visible at a time. On the left side of the dialog are four control buttons, labeled:

Send Fax To

Cover Sheet

Time & Options

MemoFax

You can click on these buttons to select the options you want to view or modify. However, the Send Fax To button will always be preselected when the Send Fax dialog first displays.


The Send Fax To... Options

As you might expect, settings in the Send Fax To... panel are used to give Procomm Plus the information it needs to transmit your fax. You can also specify one or more files to be included in the fax.

For more information, see the following topics:

Step-by-Step: Entering Send Fax Recipients

Step-by-Step: Selecting Files to Fax


The Setup Interface

Procomm Plus is a powerful, integrated product with many options, and at first glance Setup may seem complex. However, Setup’s controls are simple, predictable, and arranged for quick access. For example, consider the Data, Data Options, Paths settings shown below:

The figure above shows the Data, Data Options, Paths settings panel, which you can view by selecting the Setup | Data | Data Options | Paths menu item in Procomm Plus’s main communication window.

At the top of the Setup dialog are four buttons, shaped like file folder tabs. These are the major Setup group tabs. They include:

System

Data

Fax

Internet

In the above figure, the Data tab is graphically "raised" to indicate that it’s selected. As you select each major group tab, the Setup dialog refreshes to display that group’s minor settings buttons and options.

On the left side of the dialog beneath the major group tabs are the minor group buttons. These buttons vary in number depending on the currently selected major group tab. As you select each minor group button, the options panel refreshes to display the minor group’s settings and fields.

Some minor groups have multiple panels. These are indicated by buttons shaped like file folder tabs. In the above figure, for example, the Data, Data Options minor group has five panels: General, Advanced, Left Mouse, Right Mouse and Paths. The Paths tab is graphically "raised" to indicate that it’s currently selected.

Throughout the help system, we'll generalize our references to Setup's tabs and buttons. The directions to reach a settings panel describe the path for reaching the panel, including the major and minor group buttons. These directions are usually written as if you've already opened Setup.

We'll also discuss another powerful feature of Setup: the named option set. See Option Sets for more information.

Closing Setup

Setup’s command buttons appear in the lower left corner of the Setup dialog:

OK

Click on OK to close the Setup dialog and save any changes you may have made. If you’ve made changes in the System, Dialing Options or in other areas that might affect the Connection Directory, Setup will offer to update your directory files automatically.

Cancel

Click on this button to close Setup, discarding any unsaved changes.

Help

Click on this button to open Setup’s on-line help topics.


The Setup Utility

Procomm Plus’s default settings are carefully chosen to be intuitive and useful. You may never need to change any of the program’s settings. If you do, however, you’ll find that you can completely alter the "look and feel" of each type of communication session.

Setup allows you to quickly and easily modify almost all of Procomm Plus’s settings and options by logically arranging them within a multi-paneled dialog.

The following topics describe the Setup utility and its options:

Setup Basics


The Sound Player

If you select a hyperlink that points to a sound file in the .au or .aiff format, the Web Browser opens the built-in sound player and plays the file.


The Status Line

At the very bottom of a module’s window is the Status Line, which is used to display messages and program information, including the status of file transfers and connection results. ASPECT scripts may also use the Status Line as a message area.

For example, this Terminal window Status Line shows that Procomm Plus has opened the COM port, but you're not currently connected to another computer:

Once you do make a connection, the Terminal window Status Line displays the elapsed time for the connection at the far right and the word "online" will replace "Not Connected".

ASPECT scripts may also use the Terminal window's Status Line as a message area. If the Status Line doesn't appear on your Terminal window, it's been turned off from the Setup menu. To display it, select the Setup | Status Line menu item.

The The Quick Select Line also displays useful information about the status of Procomm Plus and your system.


The Status Line Area

The lower segment of the Terminal window consists of a row of buttons known as the Meta Keys, a line of clickable fields called the Quick Select Line, and a status line.


The Status Line Area See Also
The Status Line Area

Meta Keys

Quick Select Line

Status Line


The System Settings

Settings in the System group affect all of Procomm Plus’s communications modes. It contains three minor settings groups:


The Telephone Consumer Protection Act

Please note the following special provisions of the Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 as they apply to sending fax transmissions:

"It shall be unlawful for any person within the United States -- to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such person clearly marks, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page of the message or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or of such business, other entity or individual."

Procomm Plus is installed preconfigured to meet this requirement. If you choose to make changes to the fax header settings, you must ensure that these requirements are still met on the cover page, within the header, or by your fax modem.


The Telnet Entry Class

Telnet-class entries are similar to Data-class entries, in that they are used to connect to systems or sites for the purpose of terminal emulation, file transfers and data entry or retrieval. However, Telnet connections are made with TCP/IP using a network, SLIP or PPP dial-up connection.

The fields required to complete a Telnet-class connection are fairly straightforward. However, the Connection Directory allows you to specify a number of other settings to control Telnet operations and the operation of the Terminal window after you’ve connected.

Step-by-Step: Adding a Telnet-class Entry

Telnet-class Settings


The Terminal Display Area

The Terminal display area is made up of four components:

Terminal display

Terminal frame

Terminal workspace

Scrollback Buffer scrollbar

One of the most useful features of Windows is that its graphical environment allows you to control its operation with a "point and click" of the mouse. Procomm Plus extends this ability into the Terminal display, allowing you to select a character, word, phrase or even one or more pages using the mouse. For more information, see The Terminal Display and the Mouse.


The Terminal Display and the Mouse

One of the most useful features of Windows is that its graphical environment allows you to control its operation with a "point and click" of the mouse. Procomm Plus extends this ability into the Terminal display, allowing you to select a character, word, phrase or even one or more pages using the mouse. These actions are detailed in the table below:

To Select	Do This
A character.	Click and drag over the desired character.
A word.	Click and drag over the desired word.
	If you want to select a word and transmit it through the current port with a carriage return, you can simply double click on it.
	This is the Terminal window’s default response, but you can choose to send the word without a carriage return, or to send a single character with or without a carriage return. See Left Mouse Button Action.
A phrase.	Click and drag over the desired information.
The current screen.	Click and drag over the information you want to select, or use one of the Edit | Screen to menu items.
From the Scrollback Buffer.	Click and drag over the information you want to select. If you click and drag beyond the upper or lower boundaries of the Terminal display while in the Scrollback Buffer, the buffer will scroll appropriately, allowing you to select multiple pages.
	To select the entire contents of the buffer, use one of the Edit | Scrollback Buffer to menu items.
If you’ve selected information by clicking and dragging, Procomm Plus displays the Copy to... pop-up as soon as you release the mouse button. You can copy the selected information to any one of several destinations simply by choosing it from the pop-up menu:

Choose This	To Do This
Copy to Port	Transmit the selected information through the current port.
Copy to Port with Enter	Transmit the selected information through the current port, followed immediately with the sequence mapped to your terminal emulation’s [image] key. In most emulations, the default is a carriage return.
Copy to File Clipboard	Copy the selected information to the File Clipboard.
Copy to Windows Clipboard	Copy the selected information to the Windows Clipboard as text.
Copy to Capture File	Copy the selected information to an open Capture File. This option is only available if a Capture File is already open when you select the information.
Copy to File	Copy the selected information to a file, using a filename you supply.
Copy to Printer	Print the selected information.
Mail	Copy the selected information to your mail application. You must be connected to a MAPI-compatible mail server to use this option.
In addition, many useful functions can be accessed by placing them on the right mouse button. For more information, see The Terminal Display and the Right Mouse Button.


The Terminal Display and the Mouse See Also
The Terminal display and the Mouse

The Terminal Display and the Mouse

The Terminal Display and the Right Mouse Button

Using the Right Mouse Button in the Web Browser


The Terminal Display and the Right Mouse Button

As you use the Terminal window, you’ll no doubt find that there are certain actions that you perform repeatedly. For example, you may often send or receive files, or open the Scrollback Buffer. One way to make the functions you use most quickly accessible is to place them on the Right Mouse Button Pop-Up.  If you click and hold the right mouse button, the Terminal window displays a pop-up menu with up to ten selections. To select an item from the pop-up menu, just drag the mouse pointer to the item you want, then release the button. To close the pop-up without selecting an item, move the pointer outside of the pop-up and release the button.

The default functions offered in the Right Mouse Button Pop-Up were carefully chosen by Procomm Plus’s designers as those most often accessed by users. However, you can place any function appearing on the Terminal window’s menus on the pop-up menu, or modify the program’s response to the right mouse button. For more information, see Right Mouse Options.

The table below describes the default selections for the pop-up menu:

Choose This	To Do This
Position Terminal Cursor	Transmit cursor codes to a host system to position the terminal cursor to the character location nearest the mouse pointer using sequences read from the current keyboard file.  If the text contains tabs, the cursor might not position properly with the first selection. Simply repeat the pop-up selection until the cursor moves to the proper location.
Send File	Initiate Procomm Plus’s side of a file transfer to a host system. This is also referred to as "uploading". You’ll learn more about sending files in Sending Files.
Receive File	Initiate Procomm Plus’s side of a file transfer from a host system to your computer. This is also referred to as "downloading". You’ll learn more about receiving files in Receiving Files.
File Clipboard	Open the File Clipboard, where you can scan the current Terminal display and the Scrollback Buffer for filenames.
File Capture	Open a Capture File. If you select this item and a Capture File is already open, it will be closed.
Find	Search for text in the Scrollback Buffer.
Hang Up	Terminate a connection made to another system over a modem.
Clear Screen	Clear the Terminal display, returning the terminal cursor to the "home" position in the first row and column, without resetting the emulation or clearing the Scrollback Buffer.
Scrollback Buffer	Open the Scrollback Buffer.
Options Right Mouse	Open the Setup utility, with the Data | Data Options | Right Mouse group pre-selected.


The Terminal Window

Q.	When I select the RIPscrip Terminal in Procomm Plus, the graphics and buttons on my screen are working with no problem. Why do I keep getting error messages about icons not being found?

Q.	When my modem connects to another computer I see some normal text, but I also see weird stuff like ^[[4m.

Q.	I’m using the VT-220 emulation. When I re-map my function keys they work fine the first time. Then I start seeing strange characters in the Keyboard Editor, like the cent symbol instead of the left bracket character.


The Terminal Window Action Bar and Menus
The Terminal Window Menus and Action Bar

    Action Bar Button        Menu | Item          Description

Using the Terminal Window Menus and Action Bar

	Rapid Connect No associated menu item.	The Rapid Connect drop-down list box allows you to quickly call an entry, or a group of entries without opening the Connection Directory. By default, Data-class entries are shown in the list box, but you can toggle the displayed class by selecting the appropriate bracketed item from the list. For example, to view Voice-class entries and groups, you’d select the [Voice Numbers] item.
	Script File No associated menu item.	Using the Script File drop-down list box, you can quickly select a compiled script to run. If the script you want is already shown in the list box window, you can  click on the Start Script icon to execute it.
	File | Create Connection Directory...	Creates a new, untitled Connection Directory file.
	File | Open Connection Directory...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, where you can select an existing Connection Directory file to be loaded for use. See the Connection Directory for more details.
	File |  Connection Directory...	Opens the Connection Directory and displays the currently-loaded .dir file. See the Connection Directory for more details.
	File | Print Setup...	Displays the standard Windows Print Setup dialog, where you can specify settings like page orientation and printer fonts.
	File | Print Capture	Echoes all received characters to your printer. If you’ve already begun Print Capture, you can end it by selecting the menu item or button again. All of the captured data will not be printed until you terminate the Print Capture function. Most printers can’t print as fast as your modem can receive data, and you may find it easier to capture the data to a disk file for later printing. This can save you on-line time and avoid a possible the loss of printed information.
	File | Start  File Playback...	Allows you to select a Capture file to be replayed into the Terminal display. For more information, see Replaying Captured Data.
	File |  Connection Log...	Opens a dialog where you can view records of your Data- and Fax-class sessions initiated through the Connection Directory. For more information, see Viewing the Connection Log.
	File | Exit	Closes all open data files, closes the Terminal window and returns you to Windows. If you are currently connected or if you have a script executing, you’ll be prompted to confirm your request.
	Edit | Copy Link...	Opens a dialog, where you can specify an ASPECT script to run and a predefined ASPECT global variable whose value will be pasted into another Windows application while Procomm Plus acts as a DDE server. For more information, see The Copy Link Function.
	Edit | Paste Text	Inserts text from the Windows Clipboard into the Terminal window. The text is transmitted through the current port or connection to a remote host or system.  The text is not cleared from the Windows Clipboard. Paste Text should be used only with ASCII text.
	Edit | Find...	Opens the Find dialog, where you can specify text and options to be used to search for text in the Terminal display and Scrollback Buffer. For more information, see Searching for Text.
	Edit | Screen to	Allows you to select a destination to which the contents of the Terminal display will be written. See Screen Captures.
	Edit |  Scrollback Buffer to	Allows you to select a destination to which the contents of the Scrollback Buffer will be written. See Saving the Scrollback Buffer for more information.
	Edit |  Scrollback Buffer	Opens the Scrollback Buffer, as discussed in Using the Scrollback Buffer.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility, where you can configure the operating characteristics of Procomm Plus. Setup is described in detail in The Setup Utility.
	Setup | System	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Systems group in Setup. See the The System Settings for more information.
	Setup | Data	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Data group in Setup. See The Data Settings for more information.
	Setup | Fax	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Fax group in Setup. See The Fax Settings for more information.
	Setup | Internet	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Internet group in Setup. See The Internet Settings for more information.
	Setup |  Action Bars...	Opens the Load Action Bars dialog, where you can specify the Action Bar files you want to use. See Selecting Action Bars.
	Setup |  Large Action Bars	Toggles the display of large or small Action Bar icon buttons.
	Setup | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar "bubble help" labels. If this menu item is checked or enabled, the Terminal window will also display brief help information on the Status Line when the mouse cursor is left motionless over an Action Bar button for one second. The ToolTips setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup | Meta Keys	Toggles the display of the Meta Key buttons. However, Meta Keys can be accessed via the keyboard regardless of whether the buttons are displayed. For more information, see The Meta Keys. The Meta Keys setting is automatically saved for future sessions. The actual .key file used is determined in Setup or by the last Data- or Telnet-class Connection Directory entry you connected with.
	Setup |  Quick Select Line	Toggles the display of the Quick Select Line. See The Quick Select Line for more information. The Quick Select Line setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup | Status Line	Toggles the display of the Terminal window Status Line. See The Status Line for more information. The Status Line setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup |  Answer Options	Allows you to select an answer mode for Procomm Plus or disable auto-answer. For more information, see Answering Calls.
	Data | Modem Command Mode	Sends characters you type directly to the modem.  This function is only available if you're currently using a TAPI connection with a modem.
	Data | Manual Connect...	Opens a dialog where you can enter a phone number or IP address, depending on whether you're in Data or Telnet mode.  If you're placing a data call, Procomm Plus uses the current connection to dial the number just as you specify it.  This function is identical to the Connection Directory’s manual connect feature. See Connecting Manually for more information.
	Data | Answer Data Call Now	Instructs your modem to answer an incoming call in data mode. For more information, see Answering Calls.
	Data | Disconnect	Disconnects the current call.
	Data | Send File...	Initiates your side of a file send or "upload" operation. For more information, see Sending Files.
	Data |  Receive File...	Initiates your side of a file receive or "download" operation. For more information, see Receiving Files.
	Data | Kermit Command	Select this item to send one of four Kermit server commands: Send, Get, Finish or Logout. For more information, see Kermit Server Mode. Kermit server commands are not useful unless you’ve placed the host system in Kermit server mode. For normal Kermit file transfers, use the Send File or Receive File functions.
	Data |  Capture File...	Opens a Capture File, which will be "fed" information as it scrolls from the Terminal display. For more information, see Capturing Data.
	Data |  File Clipboard...	Opens the File Clipboard, where you can conveniently search for and copy the filenames from the Terminal display, and "paste" them to the host system. See The File Clipboard for more information.
	Data |  Doorway mode	Switches the terminal emulation into Doorway Mode, in which the keycodes generated by the keys you press are transmitted to a host system, rather than the keyboard characters themselves.  While Doorway Mode is in effect, the Terminal window will not recognize [image] -key sequences; you’ll have to use the mouse to control the program. Doorway Mode is not useful unless the host system is configured to handle it. Do not enable this mode without a specific need to do so!
	Data |  Send Information	Select this item to send your password, user ID or a miscellaneous string to a host system. These strings are taken from the Logon Info settings of the Connection Directory entry you used to connect to the host. If you didn’t use the Connection Directory to connect, they’re taken from the last entry dialed. Data- and Telnet-class entries include logon information settings that you can access with these menu items. You can configure them by clicking on the Logon Info... button in the class’s Entry Info panel in the Connection Directory.
	Data |  Chat Window...	Opens a window where you can easily enter text to be sent to a host, and read text that is sent in return. The Chat window is used for direct, real-time "conversation" between yourself and the host operator. See The Chat Window for more information.
	Data |  Monitor Window...	Opens a window where you can view a character-by-character representation of the data received and sent by the terminal emulation. See The Monitor Window for more information.
	Data | Send Break	Generates a time delay signal, called a "break," to a host system. Many host systems recognize a break as a signal to interrupt the current activity.
	Data | Clear XOFF	This function is only available when software flow control is enabled and the Terminal window has received an XOFF character from a host system. It clears an XOFF state, allowing characters to be transmitted out the port.
	Data |  Clear Screen	Clears the Terminal display and resets the character attributes and display colors to their original settings. The terminal cursor is moved to the "home" position in the first row and first column. Clear Screen does not clear the Scrollback Buffer. The Clear Screen function is convenient if you’ve been connected to a host system that altered your display settings but didn’t reset them when you ended the session.
	Data |  Reset Terminal	Clears the Terminal display resets the emulation to its default start-up state. This resets the character attributes and display colors to their original settings and moves the terminal cursor to the "home" position in the first row and first column. Reset Terminal also resets and empties the Scrollback Buffer and clears the current connection’s transmit and receive buffers.
	Data |  Duplex	Toggles between full duplex and half duplex.  In full duplex mode, Procomm Plus does not display outgoing characters. In half duplex mode, Procomm Plus displays outgoing characters to the Terminal window as they are sent.
	Scripts |  Start Script	Executes the ASPECT script displayed in the Action Bar’s Script File list box. If a script is already running, you can click on this icon to stop it. The icon is animated whenever a script is running. Alt-Period is the keyboard equivalent.
	Scripts | Run...	Opens the Run ASPECT File dialog, from which you can execute compiled scripts.  is the keyboard equivalent. For more information, see Running Scripts.
	Scripts |  Compile/Edit...	Opens the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog, from which you can create, edit, compile and execute scripts. For more information, see Compiling Scripts.  is the keyboard equivalent.
	Scripts |  Start Recorder...	Starts the Script Recorder, which reads a host system’s prompts and your responses, and uses them to generate simple ASPECT scripts.  If the Script Recorder is running, the menu item changes to Stop Recorder; select it to stop the recorder. For more information, see The Script Recorder.
	Tools | Remote Control	Displays the Procomm Remote launch screen, where you can place a remote call or wait for a remote call..
	Tools | Send a Fax...	Displays the Send a Fax wizard, which will guide you through the steps necessary to send a fax document.  If wizards are disabled, the Send a Fax dialog is displayed instead. See Faxing with Procomm Plus and The Send Fax Dialog for more information.
	Tools | Fax Status	Opens the Fax Status utility, where you can monitor the status of your fax connection(s) and watch the progress of on-going fax activity. See The Fax Status Utility for more information.
	Tools | Fax Manager	Opens the Fax Manager, which you can use to organize faxes you've received or sent, as well as your cover sheets. See The Fax Manager for more information.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, which you can use to view, annotate and print faxes you’ve received or sent. See The Fax Viewer for more information.
	Tools | Fax Cover Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor, where you can create your own cover sheets, or modify those included with Procomm Plus. For more information, see The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Tools | Image Viewer	Opens the Image Viewer, where you can select and view images in many different formats. See the Image Viewer for more information.
	Tools | Scheduler	Opens the Scheduler, where you can set Procomm Plus to perform functions automatically at a predetermined time. For more information, see The Scheduler.
	Tools |  Action Bar Editor	Opens the Action Bar Editor, where you can design your own Action Bars for use in the Terminal window. See The Action Bar Editor for more information.
	Tools |  QWK Mail Viewer	Opens the QWKMail Viewer, where you can view and reply to messages you’ve retrieved from a BBS. For a detailed discussion, see The QWKMail Viewer.
	Tools | Caller ID Directory Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor, where you can add, modify or delete Caller IDs from the current database. See The Caller ID Directory Editor for more information.
	Tools |  ASPECT Editor	Opens the ASPECT Editor, which you can use to create, view or modify text files as well as ASPECT source files. See The ASPECT Editor for more information.
	Tools |  Dialog Editor	Opens the Dialog Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom dialog boxes for your ASPECT scripts. See The Dialog Editor for more information.
	Tools | User  Window Editor	Opens the User Window Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom screens for your ASPECT scripts. See The User Window Editor for more information.
	Tools |  Meta Key Editor...	Opens the Meta Key Editor, where you can configure the actions performed by the Terminal window’s forty available Meta Key combinations. The keyboard shortcut is [image] [image]. For more information, see The Meta Key Editor.
	Tools |  Keyboard Editor...	Opens the Keyboard Editor, where you can specify the sequences sent or actions performed by the current emulation’s mappable keys. The keyboard shortcut is [image] [image]. For more information, see The Keyboard Editor.
	Tools | Translate Table Editor...	Opens the Translate Table Editor, where you can choose to modify or filter the characters sent or received by the current emulation. See The Translate Table Editor for more information.
	Window |  Change Window	Allows you to change the current window to one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, the Web Browser , the Telnet window, the FTP Client, Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, the Web Browser , the Telnet window, the FTP Client or the Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window | 1, 2, 3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottom of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help | Wizards...	Displays the Procomm Plus Wizard Manager dialog, where you can select automated wizards to lead you through common tasks.
	Help | Help Topics	Opens on-line help.
	Help | Using the Terminal	Opens on-line help for the Terminal window.
	Help | Search  for Help on...	Opens on-line help, and activates the Search dialog.
	Help |  Keyboard Help	Opens on-line help and activates the Keyboard Mappings topic.
	Help |  Script Reference	Opens ASPECT on-line help.
	Help | Search  for Script Topic	Opens ASPECT on-line help and acitvates the Search dialog.
	Help | How  to use Help	Opens the How to Use Help on-line help file.
	Help | About Procomm Plus	Opens a dialog with information about Procomm Plus.


The Terminal Window Question 2
Q.	When I select the RIPscrip Terminal in Procomm Plus, the graphics and buttons on my screen are working with no problem. Why do I keep getting error messages about icons not being found?

The RIPscrip Terminal uses commands from the host to paint graphic images on the screen. Unlike most terminal emulations, you can use the mouse to click on a graphical button, and the RIPscrip Terminal will communicate that selection back to the host. For the most part, the images that you see on the screen are defined by the host and painted by the RIPscrip Terminal. A host can, however, request that the terminal display one or more of a group of icons that are stored on your hard drive. Many hosts will query your PC to see if you have the proper icon group. If you don’t have the specific icon group, the host will usually ask you if you would like to download the host icon file. If this process is not automatic, you will need to locate the correct icon file on your RIPscrip host and download the file manually.

The icon file will usually be a compressed file containing many different icons. Once the icon file has been transferred to your machine, you will need to move this file to your RIPscrip icon directory. The default directory during installation is \program files\procomm plus\ripicons. To check which directory Procomm Plus expects the icons to be in, select Setup | Setup from the menu. Click on Data | Terminal Options. Make sure that [RIPscrip 1.54] is the Current Terminal (at the top of the window), and then click Advanced. Check the RIPscrip Icons field to see the correct path.

If the icon file that you downloaded has an extension of .zip, then you will need to "unzip" the file. This requires PKUNZip® or a similar utility. If you do not have this utility, it can be downloaded from many bulletin board systems, including the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS. If the icon file has an .exe extension, you can simply double click the file from Windows Explorer and it will self extract. Once the file is in the proper directory and has been extracted or "unzipped," the RIPscrip terminal will be able to access the icons.


The Terminal Window Question 3
Q.	When my modem connects to another computer I see some normal text, but I also see weird stuff like ^[[4m.

Those strange characters are screen formatting sequences. The Host (the remote computer) is trying to design the screen. Typically the format characters are not seen. The problem occurs when the host is trying to communicate to a different type of terminal than Procomm Plus is configured for. If the host is expecting a WYSE 50 terminal, and your computer is set to respond like an ANSI terminal, you will see some junk characters on the screen along with the text.

The solution is to find out what terminal the host expects.

When you use the Data and Telnet modes of Procomm Plus, you are using a Terminal Emulation. Terminals, dependant on connections with large mainframe computers, are the predecessors of the personal computer. Host systems are designed to communicate with terminals. When you call up a BBS or other on-line service, you must set Procomm Plus to emulate the expected terminal in order to interact properly with the host.

Sometimes the system that you’re connected to will give you a choice of terminals when you log on. In that case there may be a selection of several terminals to choose from. You can also check with the host System Operator to find out which terminals the host supports. The important thing to remember is that Procomm Plus must be set to use the same terminal emulation that the host expects.


The Terminal Window Question 4
Q.	I’m using the VT-220 emulation. When I re-map my function keys they work fine the first time. Then I start seeing strange characters in the Keyboard Editor, like the cent symbol instead of the left bracket character.

The VT220 and the VT320 emulations have two types of command prefixes. These prefixes or Escape Sequences are characters that come in front of any terminal command. The sequences distinguish the terminal commands from the other data that you see on your screen. One type of escape sequence is eight bits long and is usually represented by a "¢" (a single cent symbol). The other type is the seven bit sequence represented by two characters "^["(or caret, left bracket).

If your Keyboard Editor displays the wrong escape sequence, or the host is not responding properly when you use your function keys, try switching between eight bit and seven bit sequences.


The Time & Options Screen

You can specify a variety of options for your fax by clicking on the Send Fax dialog’s Time & Options button.  For more information on settings, see the following topics:

Delivery Date and Delivery Time

Poll Remote

Send to File

Fax Connection


The Title Bar

 To Do This                            Do This

 Using the Title Bar

Maximize Procomm Plus	Double click on the title bar, or select the Maximize command on the title bar's control menu. You can restore the program to its original size by selecting the contol menu's Restore command.
Minimize Procomm Plus	Select the Minimize command on the title bar's control menu. Procomm Plus’s window disappears, but its icon is placed on the desktop. You can restore the window by double clicking on the icon.
Exit Procomm Plus	Double click on the title bar’s "dash" button, which is called the control button. Procomm Plus will follow its normal exit procedures, then terminate.
Access the control menu	Click once on the title bar’s "dash" button, or press  . The control menu displays program control options such as Minimize, Maximize and Close.
	Although its access button appears on the title bar, the control menu is actually an extension of an application’s menu system. You can verify this by pulling down a menu and cycling through the various menus with the cursor keys.


The Translate Table Dialog

The editing dialog displays the Incoming and Outgoing Translate values in side-by-side list boxes. Each list box displays two columns with values ranging from ASCII decimal 0 to 255. The character in the left column is the original value; it’s value after translation appears in the right column. Incoming and outgoing characters are mapped to their normal values in a newly-created translate table.

Entry Type Buttons

By default, the editor displays table values in character format, using caret "^" character combinations to indicate values lower than ASCII 32. However, you can view decimal or hexadecimal values by selecting the appropriate option button from the Entry Type group. See Editing a Translate Table for a complete discussion of the three Entry Type buttons.

Incoming Translate/Outgoing Translate Lists

To modify an incoming character’s translated value, simply scroll through the Incoming Translate list box and select it, then enter the new translated value in the list’s edit field. You can modify an outgoing character’s translated value using the Outgoing Translate list box.

For more detailed information on editing translate values, as well as a discussion of the Entry Type settings, see Editing a Translate Table.

Command Buttons

The dialog’s command buttons are:

OK

To accept the current translate table values and close the editing dialog, click on OK. If you’re editing an existing .xlt file, any changes you’ve made will be saved to that file. If you’re editing an untitled table, the editor will prompt you for the name of the new .xlt file. If you’re editing a new file, and opened the editor from within the Setup, Setup Files dialog using the Translate list box’s [Create] selection, your new .xlt file will be specified as the active translate table when you return to the Setup dialog.

If you’ve made changes in an existing file, and that file is the currently-active translate table, your changes will take effect immediately within the Terminal window.

Cancel

Click on Cancel to close the dialog without retaining any unsaved changes.

New

Click on New to create a new, untitled table. The new table is essentially "empty," since it simply translates each character to itself. The editor prompts you for the name of the new table file.

If you’ve made any changes to the .xlt file currently loaded in the editor, you’ll be prompted to save them before the new file is created.

Open

Click on Open to open an existing .xlt file by selecting it in a standard file open dialog.

If you’ve made any changes to the .xlt file currently loaded in the editor, you’ll be prompted to save them before the new file is loaded.

Save As

Click on Save As... to save the .xlt file currently loaded in the editor under a different name, or to title an untitled .xlt file. The editor prompts you for the name of the new file.

Options

Click on Options to specify how the editor should handle the Incoming and Outgoing Translate list boxes. The editor opens the Scrolling Options dialog. The setting in this dialog determines how the incoming and outgoing tables will move when you scroll either of them up or down. If you select Independent, the two tables are not linked at all, and each scrolls without affecting the other.

Select Move Together to link the original (left column) values for both the Incoming and Outgoing Translate list boxes. In this mode, scrolling through either list box causes the other list box to scroll to the same position.

Select Mirror Image to update the Incoming Translate’s translated (right column) value with the untranslated (left column) value of the corresponding character in the Outgoing Translate list box.

The Mirror Image is  bidirectional; changes made to the Incoming Translate list will be mirrored to the Outgoing Translate’s list.

After you’ve selected the scrolling mode you prefer, click on OK to return to the editing dialog.


The Translate Table Editor

Procomm Plus’s Translate Table allows you to substitute one character value for another, both in the data received by your system and in the characters you send. This ability is useful in a variety of situations.

For example, some host systems embed pacing characters that can disrupt the formatting of valid character data in the Terminal display. You can use the Translate Table to replace or remove these extraneous values before they’re displayed. Or, if you connect to a BBS or on-line system that transmits "bell" characters (ASCII 07), you can strip these characters to eliminate distracting noises.

Translation tables are also helpful if you’re connecting to a system located in a foreign country.

Translate table settings will have no affect on a file transfer or fax operation, as character translations are disabled during these activities.

Translate table files must have an extension of .xlt, and they must be stored in the Procomm Plus home directory, typically \program files\procomm plus.

To activate an .xlt file, you simply select it from the Translate Table drop down list in the Data, Setup Files panel in Setup. For more information, see Setup Files.

Since a Data-class entry in the Connection Directory can specify a particular translate table in its Advanced Options settings, connecting to such an entry will also activate an .xlt file.

Running the Translate Table Editor

The Translate Table Dialog

Editing a Translate Table

Step-by-Step: Stripping a Character Value


The Translate Table Editor See Also
The Translate Table Editor

Running the Translate Table Editor

The Translate Table Dialog

Editing a Translate Table

Step-by-Step: Stripping a Character Value


The User Window Editor

The User Window Editor helps you build graphical displays that appear in the Procomm Plus Terminal workspace. The editor allows you to create and edit your User windows with a visual approach that is much easier than making a uwincreate statement group manually.

The following links access the ASPECT script documentation, located in pw4asp.hlp. If these links do not work or if you’re unable to locate this file, the ASPECT help file may not have been installed. Run Procomm Plus’s installation program, and use the Custom Installation feature to install the ASPECT help file.

An Introduction to the User Window Editor

Running the User Window Editor

Editing a User Window

Step-by-Step: Placing a User Window Object

Resizing an Object

Moving an Object

Duplicating Objects

Deleting an Object

User Window Object Options

A Sample User Window

The User Window Editor's Menus and Action Bar


The Voice Entry Class

You can use Voice-class entries to dial voice phone numbers. After Procomm Plus dials the entry, it prompts you to pick up the telephone handset and proceed with your call.

For help in attaching a handset to your modem, see your modem manual.

Step-by-Step: Adding a Voice-class Entry

Voice-class Settings


The Web Browser

The Procomm Plus Web Browser allows you to view Web documents in their graphical format. The Web Browser provides complete support for all the features incorporated within Microsoft's Internet Explorer, including Java, ActiveX objects and much more. Whether you are using a direct connection, SLIP, or PPP, the Web Browser window’s intuitive graphical interface will have you "surfing the ‘net" in no time!

The World Wide Web

Running the Web Browser

Elements of the Web Browser Window

Using the Web Browser

The Web Browser's Menus and Action Bar


The Web Browser Display and the Mouse

To make the Web Browser window even easier to use, we’ve incorporated mouse support throughout. Whether you’re hyperlinking to a new Web site or printing the Web site you’re currently viewing, the mouse support in the Web Browser window eases the task.

There are two ways to use the left mouse button in the Web Browser display area:

Clicking on hyperlinks.

Clicking and dragging over text and images to select them.

Contained within Web pages are hyperlinks. Many hyperlinks are incorporated into the text of the document. To differentiate hyperlinks from standard text, most Web page authors underline the text and give it a different color.

Another important feature to note is that when the mouse is over a hyperlink the mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand with the index finger extended. Some web pages use graphics as hyperlinks; you will always be able to tell they are hyperlinks if the mouse pointer changes. Additionally, many of these graphic hyperlinks are outlined with a specific color.

While you are browsing the Web, you will most likely find pages that have information you would like to keep. If you want to copy just a selection of that text, you can highlight it by clicking and dragging the mouse. Once you have selected the text, you can copy it to the Windows Clipboard using the Edit | Copy feature.


The Web Browser display area.
The Web Browser Display Area

The main portion of the window is the display area. This is where HTML documents are displayed. These documents may be files on your hard drive, or documents provided by a Web server like those described in The World Wide Web.

If you were already using Internet Explorer before installing Procomm Plus, the Web Browser displays the home page specified within Internet Explorer.  If you installed Internet Explorer with Procomm Plus, the Web Browser displays a local Quarterdeck HTML file.

The size of the display area depends on the size of the Web Browser window. You may change the size of the Web Browser window just like any other window. However, many people find that a tall, fairly narrow window works best for viewing HTML documents.

If you are viewing an HTML document and decide to resize your window, the Web Browser window automatically optimizes the text and graphics for display in the new window size.

If you have the Web Browser window maximized, you may be able to view an entire page. More commonly, on large Web pages, you will use the scrollbar to scroll through the page.

The Web Browser Display and the Mouse


The Web Browser's Menus and Action Bar

     Action Bar        Menu | Item           Description
        Button

Using the Web Browser's Menus and Action Bar

	No associated menu item.	The Rapid Connect drop down list box allows you to quickly call an entry, or a group of entries without opening the Connection Directory. By default, Web-class entries are shown in the list box, but you can toggle the displayed class by selecting the appropriate bracketed item from the list. For example, to view Voice-class entries and groups, you’d select the [Voice numbers] item.
	No associated menu item.	Using the Script File drop down list box, you can quickly select a compiled script to run. If the script you want is already shown in the list box window, you can click on the Start Script icon to execute it.
	File | Create Connection Directory...	Creates a new, untitled Connection Directory file.
	File | Open Connection Directory...	Displays a standard File Open dialog, where you can select an existing Connection Directory file to be loaded for use. See The Connection Directory for more information.
	File |  Connection  Directory...	Opens the Connection Directory and displays the currently-loaded .dir file. See The Connection Directory for more information.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File |  Open Local File...	Displays a standard File Open dialog where you can select an HTML document stored on your hard drive for viewing in the Web Browser window.
	File | Save As...	Displays a standard Save As dialog where you can select to save the current HTML document in either HTML format, .htm, or as a text file, .txt.
	File |  Page Setup	Displays a Page Setup dialog which allows you to modify how your printed pages appear; you can change what information goes in the header and footer as well as the size of your margins.
	File | Print	Prints the current page displayed in the Web Browser window.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	File |  Connection Log...	Opens a dialog where you can view records of your Data- and Fax-class sessions initiated through the Connection Directory. For more information, see Viewing the Connection Log.
	File | Exit	Closes all open data files, closes the Web Browser window and returns you to Windows.
	Edit | Cut	Allows you to cut information out of the Address field into the Windows Clipboard. This option is only available if you have highlighted text in the Address field.
	Edit | Copy	Allows you to copy highlighted text from either the Address field or the current page into the Windows Clipboard.
	Edit | Paste	Inserts text from the Windows Clipboard into the Address field.
	Edit | Find...	Opens the Find dialog, where you can specify text and options to be used to search for text in the Web Browser display. For more information, see Searching for Text.
	Edit | Page to	Allows you to select a destination to which the text of the currently open Web page will be sent. see Saving the Contents of Web Pages.
	Edit |  View Source...	Opens the ASPECT Editor and displays the current .html document in its text format.
	Setup | Setup...	Opens the Setup utility, where you can configure the operating characteristics of Procomm Plus. See The Setup Utility for more details.
	Setup | System	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Systems group in Setup.
	Setup | Data	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Data group in Setup.
	Setup | Fax	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Fax group in Setup.
	Setup | Internet	Pulls down a submenu, from which you can select a specific panel to access within the Internet group in Setup.
	Setup |  Action Bars...	Opens the Load Action Bars dialog, where you can specify the Action Bar files you want to use. See Selecting Action Bars.
	Setup | Large Action Bars	Toggles the Action Bar display between small and large icon buttons.
	Setup | ToolTips	Toggles the display of the Action Bar ToolTip labels. If this menu item is checked or enabled, the Web Browser window will also display brief help information on the Status Line when the mouse cursor is left motionless over an Action Bar button for one second. The ToolTips setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup |  Quick Select Line	Toggles the display of the Quick Select Line. See The Web Browser's Quick Select Line. The Quick Select Line setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup |  Status Line	Toggles the display of the Web Browser Status Line. See The Web Browser's Status Line. The Status Line setting is automatically saved for future sessions.
	Setup |  Answer Options	Sets the answer options for the current modem connection.  Procomm Plus can be set to answer data, fax or data and fax calls.
	Setup |  Browser Properties	Displays the Browser Properties dialog, allowing you to modify many settings specific to Browser mode.
	Web |  Add Page to Connection Directory	Creates a Connection Directory entry for the Web page being currently displayed.
	Web |  Add/Edit Page to Connection Directory...	Opens an Add Location to Connection Directory dialog with the title and location of the currently displayed web page in the Name and Address fields.
	Web | Back	Opens the last viewed Web page in the Web Browser display area. You can continue using the Back feature until your home page is displayed.
	Web | Forward	If you have used the Back feature, the Forward feature will allow you to display the pages you had viewed.
	Web | Home	Displays the Web page specified in the Default startup home page field of the Setup, Internet, Web Options dialog. Clicking on the animated graphic in the top right corner also takes you to your home page. For additional information, see Default startup home page.
	Web | History...	Open a History dialog which displays the titles of the Web pages you have visited during the timeframe specified in the Delete History contents over [ ] days old field of the Internet, Web Options panel in Setup. See The History Window for more information.
	Web | Reload	Connects to the Web server and gets the information for the currently displayed Web page, and loads it again.
	Web | Stop	Stops the Web Browser from attempting to gather additional information about the Web page currently being loaded.
	Web |  Search the Internet	Displays a Web page where you can search the Internet for a particular topic.
	Web |  Full Screen	Displays the current Web page in full screen mode. To restore the display to its normal size, press [image] [image] [image]. While in Full Screen mode, you can use the Alt-cursor keys to navigate forward or backward through viewed web pages.
	Scripts |  Start Script	Executes the ASPECT script displayed in the Action Bar’s Script File list box. If a script is already running, you can click on this icon to stop it. The icon is animated whenever a script is running.
	Scripts | Run...	Opens the Run ASPECT File dialog, from which you can execute compiled scripts. For more information, see Running Scripts.
	Scripts |  Compile/Edit...	Opens the Compile/Edit ASPECT File dialog, from which you can create, edit, compile and execute scripts. For more information, see Compiling Scripts.
	Tools | Remote Control	Displays the Procomm Remote dialog, where you can place a call, prepare for a call or configure Remote.
	Tools | Send a Fax...	Launches the Send a Fax wizard, allowing you to send a fax document.  If wizards have been disabled, the Send a Fax dialog appears instead.
	Tools | Image Viewer	Opens the Image Viewer, where you can select and view many different types of image files. See The Image Viewer.
	Tools | Scheduler	Opens the Scheduler, where you can set Procomm Plus to perform functions automatically at a predetermined time. For more information, see The Scheduler.
	Tools |  Action Bar Editor	Opens the Action Bar Editor, where you can design your own Action Bars for use in the Web Browser window. See The Action Bar Editor.
	Tools |  QWK Mail Viewer	Opens the QWK Mail Viewer, where you can view and reply to messages you’ve retrieved from a BBS. For a detailed discussion, see The QWK Mail Viewer.
	Tools | Caller ID Directory Editor	Opens the Caller ID Directory Editor, where you can add, modify or delete Caller IDs from the current database. See The Caller ID Directory Editor.
	Tools | Fax Status	Opens the Fax Status utility, where you can monitor the status of your fax connection(s) and watch the progress of on-going fax activity. See The Fax Status Utility.
	Tools |  Fax Manager	Opens the Fax Manager utility where you may access all of the fax functionality. See The Fax Manager.
	Tools |  Fax Viewer	Opens the Fax Viewer, which you can use to view, annotate and print faxes you’ve received or sent. See The Fax Viewer.
	Tools | Fax Cover Sheet Editor	Opens the Cover Sheet Editor, where you can create your own cover sheets, or modify those included with Procomm Plus. For more information, see The Cover Sheet Editor.
	Tools |  ASPECT Editor	Opens the ASPECT Editor, which you can use to create, view or modify text files as well as ASPECT source files. See The ASPECT Editor.
	Tools |  Dialog Editor	Opens the Dialog Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom dialog boxes for your ASPECT scripts. See The Dialog Editor.
	Tools | User  Window Editor	Opens the User Window Editor, which you can use to create or modify custom screens for your ASPECT scripts. See The User Window Editor.
	Tools |  Meta Key Editor...	Opens the Meta Key Editor, where you can configure the actions performed by the Terminal window’s forty available Meta Key combinations. See The Meta Key Editor.
	Tools |  Keyboard Editor...	Opens the Keyboard Editor, where you can specify the sequences sent or actions performed by the current emulation’s mappable keys. For more information, see The Keyboard Editor.
	Tools | Translate Table Editor...	Opens the Translate Table Editor, where you can choose to modify or filter the characters sent or received by the current emulation. For more information, see The Translate Table Editor.
	Favorites | Add to Favorites...	Adds the current URL to your Web Favorites list.
	Favorites | Organize Favorites...	Opens a dialog where you can rename, delete or open entries in your Web Favorites list.  You can also create folders which can hold groups of entries.
	Window |  Change Window	Allows you to change the current window to one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, the Telnet window, the FTP Client, the Internet Mail Client or the News Reader.
	Window |  New Window	Allows you to open a new window in one of the other modes of operation including the Data Terminal, Fax Status, the Telnet window, the FTP Client, the Web Browser, the Internet Mail Client, or the News Reader.
	Window |  1,2,3...	If you have one or more Procomm Plus communications windows open, they will be listed at the bottom of the Window menu. To make one of them the active window, select it from the menu.
	Help |  Wizards...	Displays the Procomm Plus Wizard Manager dialog.
	Help |  Help Topics	Opens on-line help.
	Help | Using  the Web Browser	Opens on-line help for the Web Browser.
	Help | Search  for Help on...	Opens on-line help, and activates the Search dialog.
	Help |  Script Reference	Opens ASPECT on-line help.
	Help | Search for Script Topic...	Opens ASPECT on-line help and acitvates the Search dialog.
	Help | How  to Use Help	Opens the How to Use Help on-line help file.
	Help | About Procomm Plus...	Opens a dialog with information about Procomm Plus.


The Web Browser's Quick Select Line

The Quick Select Line is a multi-purpose feature of the Web Browser window. It acts as a status line, reporting the current value of several important Procomm Plus settings, and also allows you to change settings with a click of the mouse!

As you move the mouse pointer over a field, Procomm Plus changes the cursor to a pointing hand to indicate that the field is selectable. When you click on the field, a pop-up list is displayed showing the available choices.

The Quick Select Line displays two types of fields:

The current Web Options Setup fields

The first two settings allow you to change the Font Size and Font Family fields defined in the Internet, Web Options panel of Setup. Simply select the desired option set, and the Web Browser window loads it automatically.

This is extremely useful when you come across custom Web pages which use an off colored font, or a small font size.

The custom fields of your choice

The remainder of the Quick Select Line consists of configurable fields. Depending on the width of the Web Browser window, you may have one to three of these fields. By default, these three custom fields display the following information:

A real-time clock.

A real-time simulation of the indicator lights on an external modem.

A progress graph that displays the progress of the current task, such as downloading an .html file or decompressing an image.

You may, however, select from the same choices that are available in the Terminal window. If you would like to review those descriptions, see The Quick Select Line.

If the Quick Select Line doesn't appear in your Web Browser window, it’s been turned off. To enable it, select the Setup | Quick Select Line menu item.


The Web Browser's Status Line

The last graphical line of the Web Browser window is the Status Line. Procomm Plus uses this area to display messages and program information, including the status of the Web Browser.

If you're currently connected to another computer over the Internet, the Status Line will display the elapsed time for the connection, and the word "online" in the right corner.

If the Status Line doesn't appear in your Web Browser window, it’s been turned off. To enable it, select the Setup | Status Line menu item.


The Web Browser's Status Line Area

The Status Line area consists of two important features:

The Web Browser's Quick Select Line

The Web Browser's Status Line


The Web Entry Class

Web-class entries are used to connect to systems or sites with TCP/IP using a network, SLIP or PPP dial-up connection. Web entries are usually Uniform Resource Locators or URLs, which link to hypertext documents available on the Internet, or addresses to Web sites.

Step-by-Step: Adding a Web-class Entry

Web-class Settings


The World Wide Web

The World Wide Web, more commonly referred to as The Web, is the fastest growing interface of the Internet. The Web consists of documents on servers that are available for viewing. The documents that web browsers display, called Web pages, are hypertext documents formatted in HTML, the HyperText Markup Language. Files created using HTML are generally saved with a .htm or .html extension.

Web Pages

Addresses on the Web


The Xmodem Protocol

In the late 1970’s, Ward Christensen developed one of the first public domain "8-bit" error checking protocols. Xmodem is a block-oriented error checking protocol that uses a 128-byte data block. It is a single file, half duplex protocol.

The protocol uses either CRC or checksum error checking. It always attempts to use CRC first. If the sender does not acknowledge the first three requests for CRC, the receiver shifts to the checksum mode and continues its request for transmission using checksum as the error checking.

Although Procomm Plus correctly implements this protocol, some other systems do not. As a result, the sender may begin sending using checksum while the receiver is expecting CRC. This is evident after Procomm Plus has reported several CRC errors on the first block. The sender should not send data using the checksum method until it receives a NAK character from Procomm Plus.

Most systems will work fine with the normal mode Xmodem, but some systems, such as CompuServe, have trouble meeting the standard Xmodem timing constraints. To solve this problem, Procomm Plus allows you to set Xmodem into a "relaxed" mode.

The Setup options for the Xmodem protocol are discussed in Xmodem Protocol Options.

Two variants of the Xmodem protocol include:

1K-Xmodem

1K-Xmodem-G


The Ymodem Protocol

Ymodem is similar to 1K-Xmodem, but it allows multiple files to be sent in one transfer. This feature is commonly referred to as a "batch" mode. Filenames can be unique or may contain the standard DOS wildcards "*" and "?".

Ymodem starts a transfer with the first packet labeled #0 instead of #1; this packet contains the filename and size for the file being transferred. After the last actual file is transmitted, Ymodem sends another packet #0 with a blank filename to tell the receiver that the transmission is complete.

The Setup options for the Ymodem protocol are limited, but they’re discussed in Ymodem Protocol Options.

Ymodem-G is a variant of the Ymodem protocol.


The Zmodem Protocol

Zmodem, created by Chuck Forsberg, is an efficient multiple-file protocol popular on many bulletin boards. It features autodownloading, and sends the filename, size and creation date information for each file. Zmodem varies the size of each block to allow for noisy telephone lines, and supports "crash recovery," which allows an interrupted file transfer to be restarted. Both 16- and 32-bit CRC error checking are available.

The Setup options for Zmodem are extensive. See Zmodem Protocol Options.


The basics of the Connection Directory

Each Connection Directory entry stores all of the information needed to connect your computer to another location, whether that location is another computer, a fax machine, an Internet site, or a voice number. In general, each location you connect to will have a separate entry in the directory. However, a single entry can support a data, fax, voice, telnet, FTP or World Wide Web connection, or any combination thereof.

Once you’ve configured an entry, you can connect to it with the click of a button from the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list or from the Connection Directory itself. Whatever the location, Procomm Plus can connect to it automatically!

Depending on the types of connections you make, you can specify other settings in your Connection Directory entries to make Procomm Plus even easier to use. For example, if you normally make data connections with Zmodem set as the default transfer protocol, but need to use Ind$file for a particular host, you can specify Ind$file within the entry for that host. Thereafter, when you use that entry to connect to the host, the Terminal window will make Ind$file the active protocol!

The basics of the Connection Directory are further discussed in the following topics:

Connection Directory Groups

The Connection Directory Window


The entry list and settings panel.
The entry list and settings panel

The entries and groups available in the currently-selected class are displayed in the Entries list on the left side of the directory window. On the right side of the window, the settings panel displays the settings for the currently-selected entry or group within the current class.

Most entry classes have multiple groups of related settings, which help to arrange the various options logically and neatly for viewing or editing. The Data class, for example, has five groups of settings: Entry Info, Basic Options, Port Settings, Advanced Options and Action Bars. To view or modify a group of settings, click on the appropriate Settings tab, or move the focus to the tab with the [image] key and cursor keys and press [image].

If the selected group or entry contains more than one class of connection, you’ll notice that some fields, such as the entry Name, are shared between the various classes. If you modify a shared field within a particular class, the change will also affect that field in the other classes.


Thread

In reference to CompuServe, a sequence of related messages. Each reply is added to the pertinent thread.


Three simple tests.

These tests will help you diagnose the cause of the communication failure, and help you choose solutions.

1.	Even if you can’t see characters when you type from the Terminal Window, try typing ATE1Q0V1E. (Use the numbers one and zero in this command). Then type ATE. Do you see characters on the screen? Try ATE once or twice more just to clear the buffer.

2.	Can you hear the modem? Even if you can’t see the characters on the Terminal Window, try typing this command to get your modem to dial: ATDT123E. After you pressed E, did you hear your modem click or dial? If not, try one more time to make sure you typed the command correctly. Listen for any modem response. If you do hear a response, you can press E to clear the modem.

3.	Is your modem an External Modem? If you can see your modem outside the computer case, then you have an External Modem.


Transfer Options

Settings in the FTP, Transfer Options panel allow you to specify the default transfer mode used by the FTP Client and how incoming files will be handled. From within Setup, click on the Internet, FTP Options, Transfer Options buttons to display the panel:

File transfer mode

FTP supports three different file transfer modes. Typically, you'll want to use the default transfer mode of Binary, which is suitable for all types of files. However, if you're transferring text files, you can also select ASCII. The third setting, L8, is also referred to as Tenex. L8 is only useful if you're transferring non-text files with a VMS system.

View GIF file while receiving

If you want the FTP Client to display .gif graphic files as they're being transferred to your machine from a host system, enable this check box.

Allow file transfer crash recovery

By default, the FTP Client will automatically attempt to recover failed file transfers. This means that if you restart a failed transfer, the FTP Client will resume the transfer at the point that it "crashed," which can save transfer time. To prevent file transfer recoveries, disable this option.

Sound alarm at end of transfer

Enable this check box if you'd like the FTP Client to signal file transfer events with an audible alarm.


Transfer Protocol Options

The Data, Transfer Protocol options group includes settings for all of the file transfer protocols available in the Terminal window. The following topics describes the settings for the eleven standard protocols supported by Procomm Plus:

Zmodem

Kermit

Xmodem

1K-Xmodem

1K-Xmodem-g

Ymodem

Ymodem-g

CIS-B+

ASCII

Raw ASCII

Ind$file

Each transfer protocol can be saved and referenced as an option set. This allows you to create different protocol settings and access them quickly from the Terminal window’s Quick Select Line or an ASPECT script. You can also link them to Connection Directory entries.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.

To view or modify the settings for the available protocols, click on the Current Transfer Protocol list box, and select the protocol you want. The settings panel updates to reflect the options available for the protocol.

For a brief description of each of the protocols, see File Transfer Protocols.

If you’ve installed Dynamic Link Protocol, or .dlp modules in the Procomm Plus home executable directory, the protocols they support will also appear as selections in the Current Transfer Protocol list box. For more information on .dlp modules, see Dynamic Link Protocols.

You can save settings for individual protocols as named option sets. Once you’ve created an option set, you can select it for use in the Connection Directory and the Send and Receive File dialogs, as well as the Terminal window’s Quick Select Line. See Option Sets for more information.


Transferring Information

Several standard protocols are used to transfer information over the Internet. These protocols allow computers of all different types to communicate with a common set of rules.

TCP/IP

Windows Sockets


Translate Table

A powerful but not commonly used feature of Procomm Plus that allows you to filter specific incoming or outgoing characters, and translate them to a different character.


Transparent Bitmap Colors

This dialog allows you to select the color you'd like to assign as transparent within the bitmap.  There are three methods of selecting the color:

Standard
Standard Windows colors are available from the drop-down list box.

RGB Values
Custom colors can be created by supplying the RGB red, green and blue values for the desired color.

Custom Color Dialog
Finally, you can select or define a color from the standard Windows custom color control.  Click on Custom... to display the dialog.


UART

Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter. The main COM port chip. The 16550 is the only UART with buffering capability (FIFO). In order to use the full capability of a most modems, your COM port must be a 16550, with FIFO enabled in your Windows configuration. The earlier 8250 and 16450 UARTs have no buffer capability, and limit the speed that the port can accept data to 19,200 bps under Windows.


UNIX

A multi-tasking multi-user operating system. Many of the protocols and standards used on the Internet were taken directly from the UNIX environment.


URL

Uniform Resource Locator. An address format used by World Wide Web browsers and servers, that identifies the type and location of an Internet site or resource. Web browsers use URL addresses to access other Internet services which may including anonymous FTP, UseNet News, Gopher, WAIS, and Telnet.


UUEncode

A way to encode 8 bit data into 7 bit data. This method is used to attach a binary file to a text based e-mail message. Once the Mail client has downloaded the message, it can then be UUdecoded to restore it to its original form.


Uninstall

By default, the Procomm Plus Uninstall Utility is located in the Procomm Plus Utilities group on the Start menu.

When you click on Uninstall, the utility performs the following actions:

Any files and any subdirectories under Procomm Plus's home directory will be deleted.

Files installed by Procomm Plus in your windows\system directory will be deleted, unless they're needed by other Windows programs.

Windows will be restarted after the files are removed.

If you do not want to uninstall Procomm Plus, click on Exit.


Upload

Sending one or more files from your computer to another computer. To ensure that the transfer is error-free, uploads are usually performed with a file transfer protocol like Zmodem or FTP.

See also File Transfer Protocol.


Usenet

A system of several thousand discussion-based message groups available from almost any Internet provider. The Usenet is generally considered to be the "message base of the Internet."

See also MIME.


User Info Options

The User Info options allow you to specify your name, company and telephone numbers, and a default cover sheet for faxes you send. These values can then be referenced in cover sheet fields and fax headings. From within Setup, select the Fax, User Info, User Info buttons to display the panel:

Cover sheet file

This list box allows you to select the default cover sheet for faxes you send. Click on it to select an existing cover sheet from the list.

To create a new cover sheet, select the [Create] item from the Cover sheet file list box. This will open the Cover Sheet Editor with a new, untitled file. The editor is discussed in detail under The Cover Sheet Editor. For a step-by-step example, see Step-by-Step: Customizing Your Cover Sheet.

If you don’t want to specify a default cover sheet, select [None]. This setting does not affect the Send a Fax wizard.

Regardless of the setting of the Cover sheet file field, you can always select a different cover sheet for your fax within the Send Fax dialog.

Name

The name you entered in the New Parameter File dialog after installing Procomm Plus will appear in this field. Click in the edit field to modify its contents.

Company

If you entered a company name in the New Parameter File dialog after installing Procomm Plus, it will appear in this field. Click in the edit field to modify its contents.

Fax number

If you entered your fax number in the New Parameter File dialog after installing Procomm Plus, it will appear in this field. Click in the edit field to modify its contents.

Voice number

If you entered your voice number in the New Parameter File dialog after installing Procomm Plus, it will appear in this field. Click in the edit field to modify its contents.

Fax send station ID

Fax machines use a "Station ID" string to identify each other. The Fax send station ID is typically displayed by the receiving fax machine as a transmission is processing.

If you entered a Station ID in the New Parameter File dialog after installing Procomm Plus, it will appear in this field. Click in the edit field to modify its contents.


User Info Options Group

Options in the Fax, User Info group allow you to specify the personal information used in cover sheets and fax headers. You can also specify a default cover sheet and select the information included in your fax document’s page headers. The Fax, User Info group contains two minor groups:

User Info

Fax Header

You can save and reference the settings in the User Info group as an option set. This allows you to create multiple "profiles" and select them quickly from within a Connection Directory entry, from an ASPECT script or from the Send Fax dialog.

For example, if you use Procomm Plus for both business and personal fax documents, you might create separate option sets reflecting the two different User Info settings, then attach those sets to Connection Directory entries as needed.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.


Using Drag and Drop Support
Using "Drag and Drop" Support

Procomm Plus fully supports the Windows "drag and drop" feature for sending any file during an on-line session.

To drag and drop, select one or more files in the Windows Explorer display. Click and hold on the selected file(s). The mouse pointer will change to indicate that you are dragging filenames. Drag the pointer anywhere within the Procomm Plus window, and release the button. If you've minimized Procomm Plus to an icon, you can activate drag and drop by moving the mouse pointer over the icon on the desktop and releasing the button.

Five specific file types, distinguished by their extensions, can also initiate program functions.


Using Print Capture

To send all incoming characters to the default printer, you can initiate a Print Capture. Print Capture can toggled on and off from the Terminal window by selecting Print Capture from the File menu or clicking on the Print Capture Action Bar icon. All of the captured data will not be printed until you terminate the Print Capture function.

Most printers can’t print as fast as your modem can receive data, and you may find it easier to capture the data to a disk file for later printing. This can save you on-line time and avoid a possible the loss of printed information.


Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Connection Directory

Terminal & Telnet

Faxing

Internet

File Transfers

Customizing Procomm Plus


Using Procomm Plus Connection Directory
Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Connection Directory

Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set

Step-by-Step: Adding a Data-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Fax-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Voice-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Telnet-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding an FTP-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Web-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a News-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Mail-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a New Group

Step-by-Step: Placing Your First Call

Step-by-Step: Answering a Data Call

Step-by-Step: Connecting to a Telnet Host

Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host

Terminal & Telnet

Faxing

Internet

File Transfers

Customizing Procomm Plus


Using Procomm Plus Customizing
Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Connection Directory

Terminal & Telnet

Faxing

Internet

File Transfers

Customizing Procomm Plus

Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set

Step-by-Step: Scheduling Procomm Plus

Step-by-Step: Scheduling a Task

Step-by-Step: Defining Workdays

Step-by-Step: Adding an Action Bar Button

Step-by-Step: Removing an Action Bar Button

Step-by-Step: Adding a Customized Button

Step-by-Step: Customizing a Meta Key

Step-by-Step: Adding a Caller ID Record

Step-by-Step: Mapping a Key

Step-by-Step: Stripping a Character Value

Step-by-Step: Customizing Your Cover Sheet


Using Procomm Plus Faxing
Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Connection Directory

Terminal & Telnet

Faxing

Step-by-Step: Adding a Fax-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Faxing from Procomm Plus

Step-by-Step: Faxing From the Connection Directory

Step-by-Step: Faxing from a Windows Application

Step-by-Step: Faxing During a Voice Call

Step-by-Step: Selecting Files to Fax

Step-by-Step: Generating .fax Files

Step-by-Step: Entering Send Fax Recipients

Step-by-Step: Sending a Binary File Transfer

Step-by-Step: Building a Fax Polling Host List

Step-by-Step: Receiving Polled Files

Step-by-Step: Using OCR to Process an Image

Step-by-Step: Editing OCR Output Data

Step-by-Step: Placing an Annotation Bitmap

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Line

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Polygon

Step-by-Step: Drawing a Shape

Step-by-Step: Placing Text

Step-by-Step: Customizing Your Cover Sheet

Internet

File Transfers

Customizing Procomm Plus


Using Procomm Plus File Transfers
Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Connection Directory

Terminal & Telnet

Faxing

Internet

File Transfers

Step-by-Step: Uploading a File

Step-by-Step: Sending and Receiving Files using FTP

Step-by-Step: Downloading a File with Zmodem

Step-by-Step: Downloading with Other Protocols

Customizing Procomm Plus


Using Procomm Plus General
Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Step-by-Step: Creating and Using an Option Set

Step-by-Step: Recording a Script

Step-by-Step: Using the File Clipboard

Step-by-Step: Saving GIFs as Windows Bitmaps

Connection Directory

Terminal & Telnet

Faxing

Internet

File Transfers

Customizing Procomm Plus


Using Procomm Plus Internet
Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Connection Directory

Terminal & Telnet

Faxing

Internet

Step-by-Step: Adding a Telnet-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding an FTP-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Web-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a News-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Mail-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Finding Information on the Web

Step-by-Step: Connecting to a Telnet Host

Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with the Connection Directory

Step-by-Step: Connecting to an FTP Host with Rapid Connect

Step-by-Step: Connecting Manually to an FTP Host

Step-by-Step: Sending and Receiving Files using FTP

Step-by-Step: UUdecoding a Binary File

Step-by-Step: Composing Your Own Article

Step-by-Step: Searching for Newsgroups

File Transfers

Customizing Procomm Plus


Using Procomm Plus Terminal & Telnet
Using Procomm Plus

General/System

Connection Directory

Terminal & Telnet

Step-by-Step: Adding a Data-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Adding a Telnet-class Entry

Step-by-Step: Placing Your First Call

Step-by-Step: Answering a Data Call

Step-by-Step: Connecting to a Telnet Host

Step-by-Step: Uploading a File

Step-by-Step: Downloading a File with Zmodem

Step-by-Step: Downloading with Other Protocols

Step-by-Step: Mapping a Key

Step-by-Step: Stripping a Character Value

Step-by-Step: Customizing a Meta Key

Step-by-Step: Recording a Script

Step-by-Step: Using the File Clipboard

Faxing

Internet

File Transfers

Customizing Procomm Plus


Using QWK Message Attachments

Most bulletin board programs available today allow a caller to "attach" a binary file to a new message or a reply, which the addressee can then retreive by downloading. The QWK standard also supports the transfer of attached files. It may be necessary for you to enable the attachment option on the bulletin board’s QWK mail menu before attachments will be included in your .qwk packets or before you can include them in your .rep packets. Check with the sysop of the BBS if you’re not sure how to enable QWK attachments.

When sending a file attachment, note that the BBS must support attachments in the area that will contain the message. File attachments are configured on the BBS, so check with the sysop of the bulletin board to find out which areas allow attachments.

You can also attach a binary file to a message you compose. Before you save a message, select Messages | Attach File. The viewer opens a standard selection dialog, where you can browse for the file you want. When you’ve chosen the file, click on OK to add it to the .rep packet. You can only attach one file to a message. If you select multiple files, only the last file you selected will be attached to the message.

To extract and save a file attached to the message you’re currently viewing, select Messages | Extract Attachment. The viewer displays a standard Windows Save As... dialog. By default, the viewer supplies the name stored in the message, but you can specify any valid path and filename you like. Click on OK to save it to disk.

Finally, the QWK Mail Viewer allows you to request specific files from bulletin boards offering Blue Wave format packets. Files you request are included in the next packet you receive from that system. Some bulletin boards send a list of available download files if you request it, and you can request one or more of these files.

The File List and File Request options are configured on the BBS, so check with the sysop of the bulletin board to find out whether these functions are available and how you can use them. These functions are only available when you’re using a Blue Wave packet.

If you do have the option of requesting files, select Messages | Request Files from the menu while you’re composing a message. You can either type the filename directly into the File Name field or paste it in from the Windows Clipboard by clicking on the Paste button. Once the name is correct, click on the Add button to add it to the list. To delete a filename from the list, highlight it and click on Remove.

Once you’ve added all the filenames you’d like to request, click on OK to add them to the .rep packet.


Using RIME Routing

If you call a BBS that offers RelayNet International Message Echo RIME messages, you can use automatic RIME routing to send a message to a specific BBS, as well as request a return receipt. The QWK Mail Viewer checks the last line of the original message when you compose your reply; if that line contains a RIME BBS number and you specify routing, the number is inserted as the first line in the reply and your message will be routed accordingly. To specify RIME routing with or without a return receipt, select Messages | RIME Routing or Messages | RIME Routing w/Receipt, respectively.

The RIME Routing functions are available only when you’re composing a reply. Also, note that these menu items will be enabled only if the packet was generated by a BBS offering RIME support.


Using Telnet Connections

Procomm Plus provides Telnet functionality over both serial and network connections. To use the Telnet support in Procomm Plus, you must install a Windows Sockets-compliant WINSOCK TCP stack provider.

Before you can successfully connect to a Telnet host, you must have an Internet or network connection. You can either make a dial-up connection with an Internet Service Provider or connect using network equipment, but this link must be preconfigured before you attempt to connect to a Telnet host.

For more information , see Connecting to the Internet.

Connecting with Telnet

Telnet and the Terminal Window

Step-by-Step: Connecting to a Telnet Host


Using an Existing Account

With your current Internet Service Provider

If you already have an Internet service provider, you can continue to use the software they have provided to connect to their service. Simply configure Procomm Plus to use an External Network/Dialer in the Internet, Internet Connection panel in Setup. Once you have logged on to your service provider, you can use Procomm Plus Internet applications for your Internet activities.

You can also configure Procomm Plus to call your service provider, log on to their system, and connect you to the Internet. To configure Procomm Plus to contact your service provider, select the Setup | Internet | Internet Connection menu item, then click Internet Setup Wizard.


Using the ANSI Viewer

Although the messages you’ll be reading in the QWK Mail Viewer will predominately contain ASCII text, some QWK messages can contain ANSI color sequences, or even animation. Also, a QWK standard packet can contain file lists, a welcome screen, bulletins, a news file and a session log, depending on the sysop’s configuration, and all of these files may also contain ANSI codes.

You can display these files with the QWK Mail Viewer’s ANSIVIEW.EXE program. To run ANSIview, open a mail packet and select View | Use ANSI Viewer:

The ANSIview window looks much like the Procomm Plus Terminal window, with scroll bars to allow the viewing of larger files. You can also resize the ANSIview screen by clicking and dragging the lower right corner of the window.

There are three ways to display a file:

Run ANSIview while displaying a message in the QWK Mail Viewer.

The program automatically displays the contents of that message. This is a convenient way to view an ANSI animation or ANSI graphic embedded in the body of a message.

Select a file from a packet.

To open one of the preconfigured file types that may be included in a QWK packet, select the Packet menu and then pick one of the file types:

Welcome

This is an ANSI screen prepared by the sysop of the BBS identifying the name of the system and some of its features. The Welcome screen usually includes the BBS logo as well.

Files

A list of download files available by request from the BBS. For more information on requesting files, see Using Message Attachments.

Bulletins

This is a series of system bulletins prepared by the sysop of the BBS, usually announcing new features or system improvements.

News

The latest news and announcements from the BBS sysop; the same news file is often displayed when you logon to the BBS.

Session

The contents of the Session file vary from system to system, but it usually includes statistics for the current packet - such as how many messages were included, highest message number read, and so on.

Select File | Open from the ANSIview menu.

The program displays a standard File Open dialog; once you’ve selected the desired file, click on OK to load it.

To exit the ANSIview program, select File | Exit.


Using the ASPECT Editor's Menus and Action Bar

The ASPECT Editor’s menu bar contains familiar Windows selections, as well as commands unique to the editor. The most-used commands are also available from the editor’s Action Bar at the click of a button!

If you don’t have at least one text file window open, most of the editor’s menu items and Action Bar buttons are not displayed.


Using the Action Bar Editor

  To Do This...            Do This...

Display a different communication mode's Procomm Plus Command icons.	Click on the List Icons for list box control button, then select the mode you want to use. In addition to Terminal, Telnet, Web Browser, FTP, Mail and News, you can select a special setting, User Defined, that allows you to reuse Action Bar buttons you've created.
Highlight a button	Click on it with the mouse, or move the focus into the list with the [image] key and use the cursor keys to move the highlight bar.
Copy a command button into the Current Action Bar list	Highlight the button you want, then click on the arrow button that points right. You can also drag a button from the Command list into the Current Action Bar list. See  Dragging Buttons.
Remove a button from the Current Action Bar list	Highlight the button you want to remove, then click on the arrow button that points left. You can also drag a button out of the Current Action Bar list. See Dragging Buttons.
Edit a button in the Current Action Bar list	You can double click on a button to edit it in the Custom Icon dialog. If the button is already highlighted, you can click on the Edit... button to open the dialog.
	If you copy or drag a "User-Defined Icon" into the Current Action Bar list, the editor opens the Custom Icon dialog for you automatically. For more information, see Adding a Customized Button.
Shift a button’s position within the Current Action Bar list	Highlight the button, then click Move Up or Move Down to move it. You can also move buttons by dragging them. See Dragging Buttons.
Remove the Rapid Connect list box	Disable the Include Rapid Connect list box check box in the editing window. To restore the list box, enable the check box.
Remove the Script File list box	Disable the Include Script Files list box check box in the editing window. To restore the list box, enable the check box.
Close the editing dialog	If you want to accept the current Action Bar settings, click on OK. If you want to close the editing dialog without retaining any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Using the Annotation Toolbar

The Annotation Toolbar gives you convenient access to most of the viewer’s annotation menu items. By default, the toolbar is displayed as a "floating" button pad. However, you can display it as a second row of buttons beneath the viewer’s Action Bar by selecting the Annotation | Annotation Toolbar | Fixed menu item.

You can display the toolbar as a "floating" button pad by selecting the Annotation | Annotation Toolbar | Floating menu item. The floating Annotation Toolbar's appearance can be configured too. Simply drag the edges of the toolbar like you would resize a window.


Using the ASPECT Editor

The ASPECT Editor supports the standard Windows methods of text selection and cursor location, and adds its own functions as explained in the following table:

To Do This...	Do This...
Move left or right by a single character.	Press the left or right cursor keys, respectively.
Move left or right by a single word.	Press the left or right cursor keys while holding down the [image] key.
Move up or down a line.	Press the up or down cursor keys, respectively.
Move to the end of the line.	Press the [image] key.
Move to the beginning of the line.	Press the [image] key.
Move down a page.	Press the [image] key, or click beneath the scroll thumb on the scrollbar.
Move up a page.	Press the [image] key, or click above the scroll thumb on the scrollbar.
Move to the end of the file.	Press the [image] key while holding down the Ctrl key.
Move to the beginning of the file.	Press the [image] key while holding down the [image] key.
Move to a specific line in the file.	Press [image] [image]. Specify the line number in the Goto Line dialog, then press OK.
Select a character.	Drag on it with the mouse cursor, or hold the [image] key down as you move over it with the [image] or [image] cursor keys.
Select a word.	Double click on it, or hold the [image] key down as you move over it with the [image] or [image] cursor keys.
Select a line.	Drag over it with the mouse, or hold the [image] key down as you move over it with the [image] or [image] cursor keys.
Select all text to the end of a line.	Drag over it with the mouse, or hold the [image] key down and press [image].
Select all text to the beginning of a line.	Drag over it with the mouse, or hold the [image] key down and press [image].
Select all text to the end of the file.	Hold the [image] and [image] keys down, and press [image].
Select all text to the beginning of the file.	Hold the [image] and [image] keys down, and press [image].
Select the entire contents of the file.	Press [image] [image], then [image] [image] [image].
Copy selected text to the Windows Clipboard.	Press [image] [image] or [image] [image], or click on the Copy Action Bar button.
Copy selected text to the Windows Clipboard, and delete it from the file.	Press [image] [image] or [image] [image], or click on the Cut Action Bar button.
Copy text from the Windows Clipboard to the current cursor location in the file.	Press [image] [image] or [image] [image], or click on the Paste Action Bar button.
Undo the last action.	Press [image] [image], or click on the Undo Action Bar button.
Redo the last Undo request.	Press [image] [image], or click on the Redo Action Bar button.


Using the Connection Directory

The table below describes the actions or keystrokes used to perform many of the basic Connection Directory functions. If you’re an "old hand" with Windows and communication applications, or if you were familiar with the 2.xx version of Procomm Plus, you may want to skip to Adding and Editing Entries. Whether you look at the table now or not, keep it in mind. You may find it useful at some point as you’re using the Connection Directory.

	To Do This...	Do This...
	Select an entry or group.	Click on the entry or group name within the Entries list, or highlight it by moving the highlight bar with the [image] and cursor keys.
	Select multiple entries or groups.	If the entries or groups you want are next to each other, highlight the first item, then hold down the [image] key and move the highlight bar through the others, or simply drag over them with the mouse. If the entries or groups you want are separated by other items, click on the first one you want, then hold down the [image] key as you click on the rest.
	Deselect a single entry or group name from a multiple selection.	Hold down the [image] key, and click on the entry or group that you wish to deselect.
	Change the displayed entry or group class.	Click on the appropriate entry class tab at the top of the entry list panel. Each of the tabs also has a keyboard accelerator. For example, to select the Data tab from the keyboard, press [image] [image].
	Edit the settings for one or more groups or entries.	Select the target item(s), then make the changes you want. The Connection Directory always displays an advisory message when your changes will affect more than one entry.
	Move entries into a group.	Select the group to receive the entries, and click on the Edit Group button, or select the Edit | Edit Group... menu item to open the Group Editor dialog.  From the Available Entries list on the left side of the dialog, choose the entry or entries you want to move into the group, and click on the right arrow button. See Adding and Editing Groups for more information.
	Move entries out of a group.	Select the group from which entries will be removed. Click on the Edit Group button, or select the Edit | Edit Group... menu item to open the Group Editor dialog.  From the Group Members list on the right side of the dialog, choose the entry or entries you want to move out of the group, and click on the left arrow button. See Adding and Editing Groups for more information.
	Expand a group member list.	Double click on the group name, or highlight it and press [image]. The group’s members will be listed directly under the group name. If a group member list is shown, you can double click on the group name, or highlight it and press [image], to return its display to normal.
	View the settings for an entry or group.	Select the group or entry; the currently displayed settings panel updates to reflect the entry’s current values. If the entry or group’s current class has more than one settings group, you can view them by clicking on the appropriate settings group button.
	View the connection statistics for a Data entry.	Select the entry, then click on the View Stats button, or select the Edit | View Stats... menu item. This function is disabled if you’ve selected more than one entry.
	Add a new entry.	Click on the New Entry... button, or select the Edit | New Entry... menu item. For help in adding entries,  see Adding and Editing Entries.
	Add a class type to an existing entry.	Highlight the target entry, then select the Edit | Edit Entry... menu item. Pick the appropriate entry class and specify its settings. See Adding an Entry Class for more information.
	Add a new group.	Click on the New Group button, or select the Edit | New Group... menu item. For help in adding groups,  see Adding and Editing Groups.
	Remove an entry, a group or multiple groups or entries from the Connection Directory.	Select the item(s) you want to remove, then press [image], or select the Edit | Delete menu item. An Action Bar button is also available. Individual entries within a group are not removed when you delete the group. Instead, they become standard entries within the directory. However, if you delete an entry within a group it will be removed from the directory.
	Dial or connect.	Select the entries or groups you want to access, then click on the Connect, Dial, Send or Compose button, depending on the class you selected. If you want to access a single entry, you can do so quickly by double clicking on it. Before dialing for the first time, you may want to confirm the dialing settings. To do so, select the Setup | Dial Options... menu item.
	Search for a particular entry or group.	Click on the Find button, or select the Edit | Find... menu item. Specify the information to be used for the search. As you type characters in the search fields, any entries satisfying the search appear in the Results list. See Searching the Directory for more information.
	Adjust the Call Types of all of the entries based on a new area code.	Procomm Plus’s Roadtrip feature helps you to easily modify your directory entries if you’re travelling or relocating. Select the Setup | Call Setup... menu item, change your area code, then click on Adjust... in the Call Setup panel. For more information, see "Roadtrip" in Call Setup.


Using the Fax Viewer

  Action Bar       To Do This...   Do This...
      Button

	Restore the fax to its saved image, abandoning any unsaved changes.	Select the File | Revert to Saved menu item.
	Magnify the fax images.	Click on the Action Bar’s Zoom In button, or select the View | Zoom In menu item. You can also select a new view factor from the Quick Select Line, as explained in Using the Quick Select Line.
	Reduce the fax images.	Click on the Action Bar’s Zoom Out button, or select the View | Zoom Out menu item. You can also select a new view factor from the Quick Select Line, as explained in Using the Quick Select Line..
	Specify a custom view factor.	Select the View | Zoom... menu item, or select Zoom... from the Quick Select Line’s View segment, then enter a value from 1 to 200 percent in the Zoom dialog. Click on OK to accept the value you specify.
	View the full page width of the fax images.	Click on the Action Bar’s Fit to Width button, or select the View | Fit Window | Width menu item. You can also select Fit to Width from the Quick Select Line’s View segment.
	View the full page height of the fax images.	Click on the Action Bar’s Fit to Height button, or select the View | Fit Window | Height menu item. You can also select Fit to Height from the Quick Select Line’s View segment.
	Rotate the fax images 90 degrees to the left.	Click on the Action Bar’s Rotate Left button, or select the View | Rotate Left menu item.
	Rotate the fax images 90 degrees to the right.	Click on the Action Bar’s Rotate Right button, or select the View | Rotate Right menu item.
	Rotate the fax images 180 degrees.	Click on the Action Bar’s Rotate 180 button, or select the View | Rotate 180 menu item.
	View thumbnail fax images.	Select the View | View as Thumbnails menu item. The thumbnail mode is convenient for selecting fax pages for a variety of uses. See Using the Thumbnail View for more information.
	Reverse the displayed fax images.	Select the View | Reverse menu item.
	Toggle the use of the viewer’s anti-aliasing technology.	Click on the Action Bar’s Anti-alias button, or select the  View | Anti-aliasing menu item. Anti-aliasing is only effective when you're viewing a fax at a scale of less than 100%
	Move to the next page.	Select the View | Next Page menu item, or press [image] [image]. You can also click below the scrolling button on the scrollbar.
	Move to the previous page.	Select the View | Previous Page menu item, or press [image] [image]. You can also click above the scrolling button on the scrollbar.
	Move to a specific page.	Select the View | Goto Page... menu item, enter the page number you want and click OK. You can also select a specific page number by clicking on the Quick Select Line’s Page segment, as explained in the next section.
	Select multiple pages.	Select the View | View as Thumbnails menu item, then hold the [image] button down as you click on the page(s) you want to select. See Using the Thumbnail View for more information.
	Apply the viewer’s deskewing technology.	Select the Tools | Deskew Fax... menu item. For more information, see Deskewing a Fax.
	Apply the viewer’s fax cleaning technology.	Select the Tools | Cleanup Fax... menu item, or click on the Action Bar’s Clean Fax button. For more information, see Fax Cleaning.
	Use OCR to process text on the current page.	Select the Tools | OCR Current Page... menu item, or click on the Action Bar’s OCR Current Page button. For more information, see The OCR Editor.
	Use OCR to process text on one or more fax pages.	Select the Tools | OCR Select Pages... menu item. For more information, see The OCR Editor.
	Access your scanner to import an image.	Select the File | Scan New Image... menu item to load your scanner’s software. You must have a TWAIN-compliant scanner available to take advantage of this feature.


Using the Font Dialog

The Font dialog allows you to configure the font, character size and attribute for the text displayed by a Text or Variable Text object. Clicking on the Set Font button within the object’s options dialog opens the Font dialog:

Font

The available fonts reported by Windows appear in the Font list box. You can select and preview other fonts by scrolling through the list and highlighting them.

Font Style

Some fonts contain more than one style. These will be displayed in the Font Style list box. You can select or preview a font style by highlighting in the list.

Size

To change the size of the object’s displayed text, select the value from the Size list by highlighting it.

Strikeout

Enable the Strikeout check box to make the object’s text appear to be "crossed out." For example, "Strikeout."

Underline

Enable the Underline check box to underscore the object’s text in the cover sheet. For example, "Underline."

Color

To change the color of the displayed text, click on the Color list box’s down arrow, and select the new color by clicking on it. Note that color will not be apparent in the generated fax.

Sample

The Sample window displays an example of the currently selected font, including any styles, sizes, effects or colors you’ve chosen.

Changing the font size of a text element will probably mean that you’ll need to change the size of the object or any Box objects that surround it, especially if you change the font to a larger point size.

Click on the OK button to close the Font dialog and accept the current settings, including any changes you’ve made. If you don’t want to keep the changes you’ve made, you can click on Cancel to close the dialog.


Using the Internet

Because different people use the Internet for different purposes, it requires several different interfaces for information exchange. Procomm Plus includes applications for the five most popular interfaces:

The Web Browser

Using Procomm Plus's Web Browser, you can view documents available on the World Wide Web. Documents on the Web can display information in an astonishing variety of forms, including graphics. Perhaps most importantly, Web documents contain hyperlinks to other documents. See The Web Browser.

Internet Mail Client

Procomm Plus's Internet Mail Client allows you to send and receive Internet mail with people all over the world. See The Internet Mail Client.

Internet News Reader

Internet Newsgroups are large collections of messages discussing various subjects. They are posted in a way that allows many people to interact in the "discussion" by reading and responding to messages. With Procomm Plus's Internet News Reader, you can access these newsgroups quickly and easily! See The News Reader.

The FTP Client

FTP, which stands for File Transfer Protocol, offers an easy way to share files over the Internet. FTP host programs provide directories of files. Using Procomm Plus's FTP Client, you can connect to FTP hosts and transfer files. See The FTP Client.

Telnet

With Procomm Plus, you can access remote systems over the Internet for terminal emulation and file transfers. See Telnet Connections.

You can even Telnet to the QUARTERDECK TECHNICAL SUPPORT BBS and avoid long distance phone call charges!

Each of the Internet applications has been integrated into Procomm Plus to provide you with an intuitive easy to use interface. If you would like to learn more about the Internet, there are many books available, or you can "surf the ‘net" for the information you want.


Using the Internet Mail Client's Menus and Action Bar

You can access a pull-down menu within Procomm Plus in one of two ways: by clicking on the menu with your mouse, or by pressing the correct [image] -key sequence. A menu remains down until you select a command by clicking on it or pressing the underlined letter in the command. To close the menu without making a selection, click on any area of the screen outside the menu or press [image].

The Internet Mail Client’s menus and Action Bar give you direct access to Procomm Plus’s fax features and Setup options.


Using the Local Section

The Local section, located on the left side, contains two list boxes. The upper list box displays directory names, while the lower list box displays the names of files available in the current directory. The current directory's drive and path information are shown above the top list box.

The FTP Client's file and directory list boxes are standard Windows browse controls. You can move to the current directory's parent directory by double clicking on the ".." (double period) at the top of the directory list. To select a different drive, double click on a drive letter at the bottom of the directory list. Drive letters are always indicated by square brackets, like [-a-].

You can use the controls within the FTP Client's Local section to perform basic file management on your computer and initiate file transfers to a connected FTP host.


Using the Mail Client

You can open the Internet Mail Client by:

Clicking on the Internet Mail Client icon in the Procomm Plus Start menu group.

Selecting Window | New Window | Internet Mail... in a Procomm Plus communication window.

Selecting Window | Change Window | Internet Mail... in a Procomm Plus communication window.

The Internet Mail Client opens and displays the message folders available on your system. The Internet Mail Client window is divided into three sections:

The Internet Mail Client's Menus and Action Bar

The Internet Mail Client's Folders and Messages Lists

The Internet Mail Client's Status Line

For information about composing, sending, receiving, and viewing messages, see the following topics:

Writing and Sending Mail

Using the Mail Client's New Message Window

Using the Mail Client's Spelling Checker

Verifying Addresses

Using the Mail Client's Read Message Window

Sending and Receiving Mail

Reading Your Mail

Using the Mail Client's Read Message Window


Using the Mail Client's New Message Window

  Action Bar       To Do This...   Do This...
     Button

	Specify an address for a message	Enter the address directly in the To field, or select it from the Connection Directory by clicking the To button or choosing the File | Connection Directory... menu item.
	Create a Connection Directory Mail entry using an address you’ve entered	By default, the Internet Mail Client does this automatically!  If the mail client doesn’t create your entries automatically, the feature may have been turned off in Setup. For help in enabling it, see Add new outgoing mail addresses....
	Verify addresses you’ve entered manually	Click on the Check Names Action Bar button, or select the Message | Check Names menu item.
	Check the spelling in your message	Click on the Check Spelling Action Bar button or select the Message | Check Spelling menu item. For more information, see Using the Mail Client's Spelling Checker.
	Select text	Click and drag over the text you want, or hold down the [image] key as you move over the text with the cursor keys.  If you want to select all of the text in your message, select the Edit | Select All menu item.
	Copy selected text from your message to the Windows Clipboard	Click on the Copy Action Bar button, or select the Edit | Copy menu item.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Cut selected text from your message to the Windows Clipboard	Click on the Cut Action Bar button, or select the Edit | Cut menu item.   is the keyboard shortcut.
	Paste selected text from the Windows Clipboard into your message	Click on the Paste Action Bar button, or select the Edit | Paste menu item.  is the keyboard shortcut.
	Delete selected text from your message	Press the [image] key.
	Import text from a disk file into the body of your message	Click on the Import Text Action Bar button, or select the File | Import Text menu item.
	Send your message to the Outbox folder for delivery	Click on the Send Message Action Bar button or select the Message | Send Message menu item.  If you’re connected to the Internet when you select Send Message, the mail client delivers your message immediately. Otherwise, it stores your message in the Outbox folder until you request Deliver Mail in the main window. If you want the mail client to hold your messages even when you’re already connected to the Internet, see Send outgoing mail immediately....
	Print your message	Click on the Print Action Bar button or select the File | Print menu item.
	Save your message as a text file	Click on the Save As... Action Bar button or select the File | Save As... menu item.
	Attach a file to your message	Click on the Attach File Action Bar button, or select the Message | Attach File... menu item to open a standard file selection dialog where you can locate and select the file you want to attach.
	Remove a file you’ve attached	If you’ve attached more than one file, you’ll need to highlight the one you want to view or play. Then, choose the Message | Remove Attached File menu item.
	Close the New Message window without saving your message	Click on the Cancel Message Action Bar button or select the File | Exit menu item.


Using the Mail Client's Read Message Window

   Action Bar      To Do This...   Do This...
      Button

	Create a Connection Directory Mail entry using the address(es) in the message	By default, the Internet Mail Client does this automatically!  If the mail client doesn’t create your entries automatically, the feature may have been turned off in Setup. For help in enabling it, see Add new incoming mail addresses.... Even if you don’t allow the mail client to create entries automatically, you can save a sender’s address as a Mail entry by selecting the Message | Add Sender to Connection Directory menu item.
	Select text in the Read Message window	Click and drag over the text you want, or hold down the [image] key as you move over the text with the cursor keys. If you want to select all of the text in the message, select the Edit | Select All menu item.
	Copy selected text from the message to the Windows Clipboard	Select the Edit | Copy menu item.   is the keyboard shortcut.
	Cut selected text from the message to the Windows Clipboard	Select the Edit | Cut menu item.   is the keyboard shortcut.
	Paste selected text from the Windows Clipboard into the message	Select the Edit | Paste menu item.   is the keyboard shortcut.
	Print the current message	Click on the Print Action Bar button or select the File | Print menu item.
	Save the current message as a text file	Click on the Save As... Action Bar button or select the File | Save As... menu item. The mail client opens a standard file save as dialog where you can specify a path and filename for the new file.
	Save a file that was attached to the message	Click on the Save Attachment Action Bar button, or select the File | Save Attachment... menu item to open a standard file save as dialog where you specify a filename and/or a path for the attachment.
	Move the message to another folder	Select the Message | Move menu item. The mail client presents a list of the available folders; select the one you want and click OK.
	Reply to the message	Click on the Reply Action Bar button or select the Message | Reply... menu item. The mail client opens the Message Reply dialog with the sender’s address in the To field and the original message’s subject line in the Subject field, prefaced by "RE:" to mark your message as a reply.  By default, the mail client includes the original message’s text in your reply.
	Forward a message to another recipient	Click on the Forward Action Bar button or select the Message | Forward... menu item. The mail client’s message window opens with the original message included in the message edit box. The To and Cc fields are blank, ready for you to specify the forwarding address.
	Reply to all of the addresses included in the message	Click on the Reply All Action Bar button or select the Message | Reply All menu item. The mail client’s message window opens with the message’s sender and carbon copy recipient addresses entered in the To and Cc fields, respectively. The original message’s subject line appears in the Subject field, prefaced by "RE:" to indicate that it is a reply to a previous message. By default, the text of the original message is included in your reply.
	View the previous message	Click on the Previous Message Action Bar button or select the Message | View Previous Message menu item. This command is unavailable if you’re viewing the first message in the message list.
	View the next message in the folder	Click on the Next Message Action Bar button or select the Message | View Next Message menu item. This command is unavailable if you’re viewing the last message in the message list.
	Write a completely new message	Select the Message | New Message... menu item.
	Delete the current message	Click on the Delete Message Action Bar button or select the Message | Delete Message menu item. The mail client moves your message to the Deleted Items folder, where it will be stored until you delete it there.  The mail client can automatically empty the Deleted Items folder for you when you exit it. See Empty Deleted folder upon exit. When you delete a message, the mail client returns to the main window if no other messages are available. Otherwise, it displays the next message down in the list.
	Close the Read Message window	Click on the Exit Action Bar button or select the File | Exit menu item.


Using the Mail Client's Spelling Checker

The Internet Mail Client provides an integrated spelling checker that you can use at any time to check your message before you send it. To access the spelling checker, select the Message | Check Spelling menu item or click on the Check Spelling Action Bar button.

The spelling checker immediately begins processing the contents of the message edit box. If it encounters a word that appears to be misspelled, it opens the Spelling Checker dialog. The questionable word appears in the Not in dictionary edit field at the top of the dialog. You can either click in the field and make any corrections directly, or choose another word from the Suggestions list box, then click on Change to apply your corrections or use the selected word in the Suggestions list box.

If the misspelled word is one that's likely to appear more than once within your message text, click on Change All to correct all occurrences of the misspelled word with the correct spelling.

If the spelling checker questions a word that's actually spelled correctly, click on the Ignore button to continue checking your message without changing the questioned word. If the word is one that's likely to appear more than once in your message, click on Ignore All to mark all occurrences of the word as correct.

The spelling checker also provides a user-defined dictionary. Once a word as been added to the user-defined dictionary, the spelling checker will recognize it as a valid word for your message. This is a useful feature if you often refer to product or location names, or use technical terms that might include words that aren't in the standard dictionary.

If the spelling checker questions a word that is correctly spelled, you can add it to the user-defined dictionary by clicking on Add to User Dict.

Once it's verified the entire message, the spelling checker displays a simple message box. If you want to close the Spelling Checker dialog without verifying the entire message text, click on Exit.


Using the News Reader

Now that you’re familiar with all of the different elements of the News Reader, we can discuss how to use the News Reader to read articles. First, we'll need some newsgroups to read!

Step-by-Step: Searching for Newsgroups

Connecting to Newsgroups

Reading an Article

Responding to an Article

Tagging, Marking, and Keeping

Step-by-Step: UUdecoding a Binary File

Step-by-Step: Composing Your Own Article


Using the News Reader's Menus and Action Bar

You can access a pull-down menu within Procomm Plus in one of two ways: by clicking on the menu with your mouse, or by pressing the correct [image] -key sequence. A menu remains down until you select a command by clicking on it or pressing the underlined letter in the command. To close the menu without making a selection, click on any area of the screen outside the menu or press [image] twice.

The table below describes the menu items available within the News Reader's main window. If a menu item has a corresponding button on the default Action Bar, it’s shown with the menu item description.The number of buttons displayed on the Action Bar is automatically adjusted by the News Reader window to match both your current Windows screen resolution and the current size of the window. However, you can always use the scroll arrows to display more buttons, and each command is also available from the menus.


Using the OCR Editor

The OCR Editor is only available from within the Procomm Plus Fax Viewer. For help in running the viewer, see The Fax Viewer.

After the Fax Viewer’s OCR engine has finished processing your image, the resulting document or text file is loaded and displayed in the OCR Editor window.

The OCR Editor’s Action Bar allows you to select its most-frequently used menu commands with a click of the mouse. The Action Bar and the menus are discussed in The OCR Editor's Menus and Action Bar. For the basics of using the editor and an example of using the editor to correct a processed document, see The OCR Editor Basics and Step-by-Step: Editing OCR Output Data.


Using the QWK Mail Viewer's Menus and Action Bar
Although the QWK Mail Viewer’s menu bar includes every command, the icon equivalents displayed on the Action Bar make it easy to navigate through a mail packet without ever using the menus!

Â	Remember, if you don’t have at least one message window open, most of the menu items and Action Bar buttons are disabled. Also, some of the Message menu items only appear when you’re composing a message.

The table below details the menu commands, and shows the Action Bar buttons which mirror their function if available:


Using the Quick Select Line

The Quick Select Line, located at the bottom of the Fax Viewer window, places many of the viewer’s commands within one or two mouse clicks.

As you’re using the Fax Viewer’s powerful features, keep in mind that the viewer allows you to restore your current fax or image to its last saved version at any time. If you make a mistake, or simply change your mind about an annotation or any cleaning or deskewing you’ve applied, you can abandon those changes and start over by selecting the File | Revert to Saved menu item. The viewer will prompt before reloading the file.

The Quick Select Line is divided into seven fields. To access a field, move the mouse pointer over it; you’ll see the mouse cursor change to indicate that the field is clickable.

If you don’t see the Quick Select Line at the bottom of the Fax Viewer window, it’s been disabled. You can enable it by selecting the View | Quick Select Line menu item.

The Quick Select Line’s fields include:

Page

This field displays the number of the page you’re currently viewing, as well as the total page count of the fax. You can click on the field to display a pop-up menu where you can select a page to view.

This field is blank and disabled if you haven’t loaded a fax.

View

This field displays the current scale value of the displayed image. You can click on the field to display a pop-up menu where you can select a preset scale value.

This field is blank and disabled if you haven’t loaded a fax.

The field’s pop-up also contains options corresponding to commands available on the viewer’s View menu:

Fit to width

Scales the fax image so that its full page width fills the Fax Viewer window. This pop-up selection corresponds to the View | Fit Window | Width menu item.

Fit to height

Scales the fax image so that its full page height fills the Fax Viewer window. This pop-up selection corresponds to the View | Fit Window | Height menu item.

Zoom In

Magnifies the displayed fax image by a scale factor. This pop-up selection corresponds to the View | Zoom in menu item. It will have no effect if the current scale factor is the maximum value of 200% of the image size.

Zoom out

Reduces the displayed fax image by a scale factor. This pop-up selection corresponds to the View | Zoom out menu item. It will have no effect if the current scale factor is the minimum value of 1% of the image size.

Thumbnails

Displays the fax images as thumbnails, which allows you to view multiple pages of the fax at the same time. This pop-up selection corresponds to the View | View as Thumbnails menu item.

Custom

Opens a dialog where you can specify a scale factor value from 1 to 200%. The fax’s displayed image is resized in the Fax Viewer window, but the aspect ratio of the actual file is unaffected. This pop-up selection corresponds to the View | Zoom... menu item.

Line Width

This field displays the line width setting that will be used for lines and objects drawn in the viewer’s annotation mode, or the line width used for the currently selected object. You can click on the field to select a preset line width, or select the -Custom- pop-up menu item to specify a line width value. For more information, see Changing the Line Width.

Line Color

This field displays the line color that will be used for lines and objects drawn in the viewer’s annotation mode, or the line color used for the currently selected object. You can click on the field to select a preset line color, or select the -Custom- pop-up menu item to specify a color. For more details, see Changing the Line Color.

Fill Color

This field displays the color that will be used to fill objects drawn in the viewer’s annotation mode, or the color used to fill the currently selected object. You can click on the field to select a preset color, or select the -Custom- pop-up menu item to specify a color. For more detail, see Changing the Fill Color.

Text Color

This field displays the color that will be used for text placed in the viewer’s annotation mode, or the color used for the currently selected text object. You can click on the field to select a preset color, or select the -Custom- pop-up menu item to specify a color. For more information, see Changing the Text Attributes.

Font

This field displays the current font that will be used for text objects placed in the viewer’s annotation mode, or the font used by the currently selected text object.

Clicking on this field is equivalent to selecting the Annotation | Text Properties | Font... menu item. It opens the Font dialog, where you can specify a variety of options for your text. If you’ve placed or selected a text annotation object, changes you make with the Font dialog will be applied to it. For more information, see Changing the Text Attributes.


Using the Right Mouse Button in the Web Browser Window

Besides providing support for the left mouse button, we’ve added a pop-up menu for the right mouse button. Unlike the right mouse menu in the Terminal window, the right mouse menu in the Web Browser window is static. There are four types of areas the mouse pointer may be over when you right click in the display area:

Regular text or open space.

If your mouse pointer is over standard text , you will only be able to select options that pertain to the current document.

A graphic.

If your mouse pointer is over a graphic, you will be able to select options pertaining to both the current document and the graphic your mouse is currently over.

A hyperlink.

If your mouse is over a hyperlink, you will be able to select options pertaining to the current document and options for the hyperlink your mouse is currently over.

A graphic hyperlink.

If your mouse is over a graphic hyperlink and you right click, you can select from all of the options available on the pop-up menu.

Depending on what the mouse is over when you right click, some of the features available in the pop-up menu may be grayed-out if they are not applicable to the area type you have clicked on.


Using the Scrollback Buffer

Most on-line systems like CompuServe or bulletin boards (BBS) display text by scrolling it to your screen line-by-line. You may find that the text you want to reference, such as a filename or another member’s ID, has scrolled off the Terminal display just when you need it! Using the Terminal window’s Scrollback Buffer, you can easily review and copy information that has scrolled off of the display.

Some on-line systems use random cursor address commands to place information on your screen. Typically, these are database or other record-keeping systems. Procomm Plus may not be able to display such information within scrollback just as it was originally formatted on your screen.

To view the contents of the Scrollback Buffer, just click on the arrow button at the top of the scrollbar, or on the Scrollback Buffer button on the Action Bar. Or, from the keyboard, press [image] [image] or [image] [image]. You’ll notice that the scrollbar’s color changes to indicate that you are viewing the Scrollback Buffer.

You can specify the color of the scrollbar in the Data, Window Colors, Scrollbar panel in Setup. While the Terminal window is in scrollback mode, a message stating that you are in scrollback mode is displayed on the Status Line at the bottom of its main window.

By default, Procomm Plus maintains 100 pages of scrollback data. You can specify up to 1300 pages in the Data, Terminal Options in Setup, which is roughly equivalent to 32,000 lines of text! However, the maximum number of pages actually available depends on several factors:

•	The amount of Windows memory that Procomm Plus can access.

•	The number of columns you’re displaying in the Terminal display.

•	The current emulation. To allow for immediate response when switching to 132 column operation, the TTY, VT-100, TVI-950 and Wyse 50 reserve extra memory for 132-column operation, even when you’re not using 132 columns.

While you are viewing the Scrollback Buffer’s contents, Procomm Plus updates the position of the buffer’s scrollbar to indicate your position within the buffer, and continues to retrieve any data sent to your computer until the received data buffer is full.

Once the buffer is full, Procomm Plus will use the flow control method you’ve specified in Setup to avoid the loss of incoming characters. However, if the host computer doesn't stop sending data, the information will be lost.

In order for Procomm Plus to use flow control effectively, it must be inabled on both your computer and the system you're connected to.

You can exit Scrollback mode by pressing [image], by clicking on the arrow button at the bottom of the scrollbar until the Terminal display returns to real-time data, or by clicking on the Scrollback Buffer button on the Action Bar.

For more information, see the following topics:

Selecting Text from the Scrollback Buffer

Searching for Text in the Scrollback Buffer

Saving the Scrollback Buffer


Using the Scrollback Buffer See Also
Using the Scrollback Buffer

Selecting Text from the Scrollback Buffer

Searching for Text in the Scrollback Buffer

Saving the Scrollback Buffer


Using the Terminal Window

Using Procomm Plus’s Terminal window, you can connect to other systems and transfer files, emulate a terminal for data entry or retrieval and much more! The Terminal window also supports the use of ASPECT scripts, allowing you to automate repetitive tasks or design your own utilities.

The Terminal window is fully-integrated into Procomm Plus. You can send and receive faxes, or switch directly into one of the Internet communication modules from within the Terminal window!

See the following topics for an in-depth look at the Terminal window:

Elements of the Terminal Window

Going On-line

Receiving Files

Sending Files

Kermit Server Mode

Capturing Data

Running Scripts

The Chat Window

The File Clipboard

Viewing .GIFs on Download

Viewing the Connection Log

The Monitor Window

The Terminal Window Menus and Action Bar®


Using the Terminal Window Menus and Action Bar

You can access a pull-down menu within Procomm Plus in one of two ways: by clicking on the menu with your mouse, or by pressing the correct [image] -key sequence. A menu remains down until you select a command by clicking on it or pressing the underlined letter in the command. To close the menu without making a selection, click on any area of the screen outside the menu or press [image].

Menu items are automatically disabled or "grayed" if they can’t be used for some reason. For example, the Connection Directory button on the Action Bar is grayed while you’re downloading a file, since connecting to another entry would probably involve breaking the current connection.

The table below describes the menu items available within the Terminal window. If a menu item has a corresponding button on the default Action Bar, it’s shown beside the command.

The number of buttons displayed on the Action Bar is automatically adjusted by the Terminal window to match both your current Windows screen resolution and the current size of the window. However, you can always use the scroll arrows to display more buttons, and each command is also available from the menu system.


Using the Terminal Window See Also
Using the Terminal Window

Elements of the Terminal Window

Going On-line

Receiving Files

Sending Files

Kermit Server Mode

Capturing Data

Running Scripts

The Chat Window

The File Clipboard

Viewing .GIFs on Download

Viewing the Connection Log

The Monitor Window

The Terminal Window Action Bar® and Menus


Using the Thumbnail View

If you’re working with a multi-page fax, you’ll probably find the Fax Viewer’s View as Thumbnails function to be quite useful. Thumbnail mode displays your fax pages as miniature images, which lets you see and select multiple pages.

You can place the viewer in thumbnail mode in several different ways:

By selecting the View | View as Thumbnails menu item.

By selecting View as Thumbnails from the Quick Select Line’s View field.

By right clicking on your fax and selecting View as Thumbnails from the right mouse pop-up menu.

Regardless of how you select the View as Thumbnails command, the viewer scales your pages to thumbnail size and fills the viewer window.  Thumbnail mode makes several tasks much easier:

Selecting Fax Pages

Just click on a page to select it; the viewer draws a dashed line around the page to indicate that it’s selected. To select more than one page, hold down the [image] key as you click on the ones you want.

Moving a Fax Page

If you want to move a fax page, click on it and drag it where you want it. As you’re dragging the page, the viewer draws an outline of the page to indicate its new position. It also displays the page in its original position for reference.

Deleting Fax Pages

If you want to delete one or more pages from your fax, just select the one(s) you want. Press [image], or right click in the viewer window and select Delete from the pop-up menu. The viewer prompts to confirm your request before deleting your selection(s).

Viewing a Specific Page

As we mentioned earlier, you can easily go to a specific page in your fax by clicking on the Quick Select Line’s Page field, then clicking on the page number you want. However, the thumbnail mode allows you to select the page visually. Just select the page you want, then change the View factor to the setting you prefer. Your selected page becomes the current page in the viewer window.


Using the Time & Date Dialog

The Time & Date dialog allows you to specify your task’s launch time and date. You can easily schedule your task for any time or date in the future by using the dialog’s calendar controls.

By default, Scheduler launches a task only once. However, you can have the task repeat at different intervals every day, or at intervals on workdays in this dialog.

Scheduler allows you to define your "workdays" as well. See Defining Workdays.

Click on the Scheduler's Time & Date button to open the dialog.

To select a day in the current month, just click on it in the calendar. To select a day in the future, click on the scroll buttons beneath the calendar until the month and year you want are displayed, then click on the appropriate day.

You can set the task’s execution time by clicking on the scroll buttons on either side of the digital time display. The buttons on the left side control the hour, while those on the right side control the minutes. You can also set the time by dragging the hands of the clock.

To toggle AM/PM hours on the clock, click on the button to the far right of the digital time display. It’s labelled "am" or "pm", depending on the current setting.

Frequency List

By default, Scheduler launches a task only once. But you can specify Hourly, Daily, Weekly or Monthly by selecting the appropriate setting from the Frequency drop-down list box:

Once

Scheduler runs the task only once, at the specified time and date.

Hourly

While Scheduler is running, it executes the task once each hour.

Hourly on Workdays

While Scheduler is running, it executes the task once each hour during the days and hours you’ve specified as workdays. See Step-by-Step: Defining Workdays for more information on workdays.

Daily

While Scheduler is running, it executes the program once a day.

Daily on Workdays

While Scheduler is running, it executes the program once a day during the days you’ve specified as workdays. See Step-by-Step: Defining Workdays for more information on workdays.

Weekly

Scheduler runs the program once a week.

Monthly

Scheduler runs the program once a month.


Using the Title Bar

The primary purpose of a title bar in Windows is to help you quickly determine which application you’re working in. However, you can use the title bar for some basic program control as well. See the table below for details.

By default, the title bar in Procomm Plus’s main window will always display the program name. However, an ASPECT script, or even other applications can change an application’s title bar text. Also, many of the tools and components included with Procomm Plus display additional information on their title bars, such as the currently-open file.


Using the Web Browser

Following Hyperlinks

Searching for Information

Saving Information From the Web

Error Messages from the Web Browser

The History Window

Printing from the Web Browser


Using the Web Browser's Menus and Action Bar

You can access a pull-down menu within Procomm Plus in one of two ways: by clicking on the menu with your mouse, or by pressing the correct [image] -key sequence. A menu remains down until you select a command by clicking on it or pressing the underlined letter in the command. To close the menu without making a selection, click on any area of the screen outside the menu or press [image].

Menu items are automatically disabled or "grayed" if they can’t be used. For example, the Stop button on the Action Bar is grayed once you’ve loaded a Web page; since the page is loaded, there’s nothing to stop.

The number of buttons displayed on the Action Bar is automatically adjusted by the Web Browser window to match both your current Windows screen resolution and the current size of the window. However, you can always use the scroll arrows to display more buttons, and each command is also available from the menu system.


V.32bis

An extension of the V.32 protocol that allows modems to communicate at speeds of 14,400 bps through data compression. V.32 can achieve 9600 bps.


V.34

A protocol that allows modems to communicate at speeds of up to 28,800 bps.


V.42bis

A data-compression protocol that enables modems to provide up to a four-to-one compression ratio, depending on the type of file being transferred.


V.Fast

A protocol that allows modems to communicate at speeds of up to 28,800 bps.


VT-100/102 (84-key)
This is the format for the VT-100/102 keymappings for the 84-key keyboard.

Ctrl-keypad keys will transmit their Application keycodes.

Procomm Plus Key	      VT-100/102 Function	             Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[OP
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[OQ
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[OR
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[OS
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Shift Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	^X
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad -	Keypad -	-
Keypad +	Enter	^M
End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Shift Keypad -	Keypad COMMA	,
Shift Keypad +	+	+
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Insert	0	0
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Up	Application cursor Up	^[OA
Shift Ctrl-Down	Application cursor Down	^[OB
Shift Ctrl-Left	Application cursor Left	^[OD
Shift Ctrl-Right	Application cursor Right	^[OC


VT-102/100 (101 key)
This is the format of the VT-102/100 keymappings for the 101-key keyboard.  NumLock is mapped to the PF1 key, see below.

Procomm Plus Key	   VT-102/100 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[OP
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[OQ
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[OR
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[OS
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Shift Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	^X
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
NumLock	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[OP
Keypad /	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[OQ
Keypad *	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[OR
Keypad -	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[OS
Keypad +	Keypad COMMA	,
Shift Keypad +	Keypad MINUS	-
Keypad End	1	1
Keypad Cursor Down	2	2
Keypad PgDn	3	3
Keypad Cursor Left	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad Cursor Right	6	6
Keypad Home	7	7
Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Keypad PgUp	9	9
Keypad Delete	.	.
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Shift Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Shift PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Shift Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Shift Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Shift Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Shift PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Shift Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[On
Ctrl-Enter	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Shift Ctrl-Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Shift Ctrl-Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Shift Ctrl-Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC
Grey Delete	Delete Character	DEL	[ 7F ]
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Grey End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Ctrl-Grey Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Grey PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Ctrl-Grey Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Ctrl-Grey Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Ctrl-Grey Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Ctrl-Grey Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC


VT-220, VT-320 and TVI 922 Advanced Settings

With the Current Terminal set to VT-220, VT-320 or TVI 922, or to a named option set you’ve derived from one of these, click on the Advanced... button to display the advanced settings dialog:

8 bit mode

This setting determines the emulation’s support of the DEC "8 bit" control sequences. By default, 8 bit sequences are supported. Note that this setting can be changed by a command from the host system.

If the host is not responding properly when you press an emulation function key, you may need to toggle this setting. The switch will not be reflected in the Keyboard Editor until you close this dialog by clicking OK, then click OK in the main Setup dialog to save the change.

Keypad Application Mode

If this option is enabled, the keypad keys on the right end of the keyboard will send their application key sequences, rather than their numeric or character values. This mode can be enabled or disabled by a host system; typically, you do not need to change this setting.

Cursor Key Application Mode

If this option is enabled, the cursor keys will send their application key sequences, rather than their cursor positioning sequences. This mode can be enabled or disabled by a host system; typically, you do not need to change this setting.

Extended Character Set

By default, the VT-220, VT-320 and TVI-922 emulations use the DEC multinational character set. You can choose the ISO-Latin 1 set by clicking on the appropriate radio button.

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the Data, Terminal Options panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


VT-220/320 (101 key)
This is the format of the VT-220/320 keymappings for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mapped, and the NumLock key is mapped to PF1, see below.

Procomm Plus supports downloadable function keys in the VT 220/320 terminals.

These keys are accessed on the actual terminal using the Shift-Function key combination.

Because the 101-key keyboard has only twelve function keys, the Shift-Function keys are used to access F11-F20, while the Ctrl-Function and Shift Ctrl-Function keys are mapped toaccess the programmed function keys.  For convenience, the editing keys Find, Select, Insert Here, Remove, Next Screen, and Prev Screen are mapped both to Ctrl-Function keys and to the six upper grey keys, see below.

Procomm Plus Key	  VT220/320 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	PF1	^[OP
F2	PF2	^[OQ
F3	PF3	^[OR
F4	PF4	^[OS
F6	F6	^[[17~
F7	F7	^[[18~
F8	F8	^[[19~
F9	F9	^[[20~
F10	F10	^[[21~
F11	F11	^[[23~
F12	F12	^[[24~
Shift F1	F11	^[[23~
Shift F2	F12	^[[24~
Shift F3	F13	^[[25~
Shift F4	F14	^[[26~
Shift F5	F15	^[[28~
Shift F6	F16	^[[29~
Shift F7	F17	^[[31~
Shift F8	F18	^[[32~
Shift F9	F19	^[[33~
Shift F10	F20	^[[34~
Ctrl-F1	Find	^[[1~
Ctrl-F2	Insert Here	^[[2~
Ctrl-F3	Remove	^[[3~
Ctrl-F4	Select	^[[4~
Ctrl-F5	Prev Screen	^[[5~
F5	Next Screen	^[[6~
Ctrl-F6	Shift F6	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F7	Shift F7	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F8	Shift F8	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F9	Shift F9	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F10	Shift F10	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F11	Shift F11	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F12	Shift F12	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift F11	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift F12	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift F13	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift F14	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shift F15	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shift F16	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shift F17	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shift F18	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shift F19	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shift F20	Programmed by Host
		Programmed by Host
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
NumLock	PF1	^[OP
Keypad /	PF2	^[OQ
Keypad *	PF3	^[OR
Keypad -	PF4	^[OS
Keypad +	Keypad MINUS	-
Keypad End	1	1
Keypad Cursor Down	2	2
Keypad PgDn	3	3
Keypad Cursor Left	4	4
Keypad Cursor Right	6	6
Keypad Home	7	7
Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Keypad PgUp	9	9
Keypad Delete
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Shift PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Shift Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Shift Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Shift Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Shift Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Shift PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Shift Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Keypad +	Keypad +	=
Shift Ctrl- Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Enter	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Shift Ctrl-Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Shift Ctrl-Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Shift Ctrl-Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC
Grey Insert	Insert Here	^[[2~
Grey Delete	Remove	^[[3~
Grey Home	Find	^[[1~
Grey End	Select	^[[4~
Grey Page Up	Prev Screen	^[[5~
Grey Page Down	Next Screen	^[[6~
Shift Grey Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Grey Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Ctrl-Grey Insert	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Grey End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Ctrl-Grey Delete	Delete Line	^[[M
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Ctrl-Grey Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Ctrl-Grey Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Ctrl-Grey Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Ctrl-Grey Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC


VT-220/320 (84-key)
This is the format for the VT-220/320 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard. F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus supports downloadable function keys in the VT 220/320 terminals.  These keys are accessed on the actual terminal using the Shift-Function key combination.  Because the 84-key keyboard has only ten function keys, the Shift-Function keys are used to access F11-F20, while the Ctrl-Function and Shift Ctrl-Function keys are mapped to access the programmed function keys.  For convenience, the Editing keys Find, Select, Insert Here, Remove, Next Screen and Prev Screen, normally available in the grey key area, are mapped both to Ctrl-Function keys, and to Shift Ctrl-keypad keys, see below.

Procomm Plus Key	      VT-220/320 Function	             Transmitted Sequence

F1	PF1	^[OP
F2	PF2	^[OQ
F3	PF3	^[OR
F4	PF4	^[OS
F6	F6	^[[17~
F7	F7	^[[18~
F8	F8	^[[19~
F9	F9	^[[20~
F10	F10	^[[21~
Shift F1	F11	^[[23~
Shift F2	F12	^[[24~
Shift F3	F13	^[[25~
Shift F4	F14	^[[26~
Shift F5	Help	^[[28~
Shift F6	Do	^[[29~
Shift F7	F17	^[[31~
Shift F8	F18	^[[32~
Shift F9	F19	^[[33~
Shift F10	F20	^[[34~
Ctrl-F1	Find	^[[1~
Ctrl-F2	Insert Here	^[[2~
Ctrl-F3	Remove	^[[3~
Ctrl-F4	Select	^[[4~
Ctrl-F5	Prev Screen	^[[5~
F5	Next Screen	^[[6~
Ctrl-F6	Shift F6	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F7	Shift F7	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F8	Shift F8	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F9	Shift F9	Programmed by Host
Ctrl-F10	Shift F10	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift F11	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift F12	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift F13	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift F14	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shift F15	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shift F16	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F7	Shift F17	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F8	Shift F18	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F9	Shift F19	Programmed by Host
Shift Ctrl-F10	Shift F20	Programmed by Host
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad *	*	*
Keypad -	Keypad MINUS	-
Keypad +	Keypad Enter	^M
Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Ctrl-End	Insert Line	^[[L
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Keypad +	+	+
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Home	Find	^[[1~
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Select	^[[4~
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Insert Here	^[[2~
Shift Ctrl-Pg Up	Remove	^[[3~
Shift Ctrl-Keypad 5	Prev Screen	^[[5~
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Next Screen	^[[6~


VT-52 (101 key)
This is the format of the VT-52 and Vidtex keymappings for the 101-key keyboard.  The NumLock key is mapped to PF1, see below.

Procomm Plus Key	   VT-52 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[P
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[Q
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[R
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[S
BackSpace	Horizontal Backspace	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Horizontal Tab	^I
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Home	Home Cursor	^[H
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Ctrl-End	Erase End of Page	^[J
Ctrl-PgUp	Delete Line	^[M
Ctrl-PgDn	Clear Screen	^[H^[J
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
NumLock	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[P
Keypad /	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[Q
Keypad *	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[R
Keypad -	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[S
Keypad +	Keypad COMMA	,
Shift Keypad +	Keypad MINUS	-
Keypad End	1	1
Keypad Cursor Down	2	2
Keypad PgDn	3	3
Keypad Cursor Left	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad Cursor Right	6	6
Keypad Home	7	7
Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Keypad PgUp	9	9
Keypad Delete	.	.
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Home	Home Cursor	^[H
Shift Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
Shift PgUp	Delete Line	^[M
Shift Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Shift Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
Shift End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Shift Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
Shift PgDn	Clear Screen	^[H^[J
Shift Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[?m
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application COMMA	^[?l
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[?p
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[?q
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[?r
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[?s
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[?t
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[?u
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[?v
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[?w
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[?x
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[?y
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[?n
Ctrl-Enter	Keypad Application Enter	^[?M


VT-52/VIDTEX
This is the format for the VT-52 and Vidtex keymappings for the 84-key keyboard.

Procomm Plus Key	      VT-52 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Program Function 1 (PF1)	^[P
F2	Program Function 2 (PF2)	^[Q
F3	Program Function 3 (PF3)	^[R
F4	Program Function 4 (PF4)	^[S
BackSpace	Horizontal Backspace	^H
Ctrl-BackSpace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Horizontal Tab	^I
Keypad *	Keypad *	*
Keypad -	Keypad -	-
Shift Keypad -	Keypad COMMA	,
Keypad +	Keypad Enter	^M
Shift Keypad +	Keypad +	+
End	Erase End of Line	^[K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[B
PgDn	Clear Screen	^[H^[J
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[C
Home	Home	^[H
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[A
PgUp	Delete Line	^[M
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Keypad +	+	+
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Insert	0	0
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[?m
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[?l
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[?p
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[?q
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[?r
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[?s
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[?t
Ctrl-Keypad 5	Keypad Application 5	^[?u
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[?v
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[?w
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[?x
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[?y
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application PERIOD	^[?n
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[?M


Variable

As related to programing. A piece of information that can change depending on the results of a specified procedure or function, or the symbol chosen to represent this data. When you define a variable and label it, a small section of memory is allocated to hold the value. When the program is terminated, the information in the variable is lost unless it has been saved in a file.


Variable Text Objects

To specify the characteristics of a Variable Text object, double click on it. The editor opens the Variable Text Object Options dialog:

Type

The information field contained by the Variable Text object is displayed with the Type: label at the top of the dialog. You cannot change the object’s information field; it’s actual value will be determined when the fax is generated.

Horizontal Justify

You can specify Left, Center or Right-aligned text by selecting the appropriate radio button in the Horizontal Justify group.

Vertical Justify

You can specify Top, Center or Bottom-aligned text by selecting the appropriate radio button from the Vertical Justify group.

Border

You can specify Square or Round-cornered borders for the text by selecting the appropriate radio button from the Border group, or click on None to specify text without any border.

Border Width

By default, the editor draws all text borders in a width of four pixels. To specify a different width, enter the value in the Border Width edit box.

Show Label

If you want the Variable Text object’s contents to be labeled, enable the Show Label check box. For example, a Recipient Name object would display "Recipient Name:" along with the appropriate information from the Send Fax dialog.

Word Wrap

If you want the Variable Text object’s contents to "wrap" to the next line, enable the Word Wrap check box. Note that the Variable Text object will not automatically expand to accommodate the extra lines; you’ll have to size it manually.

Set Font

Click on the Set Font button to configure the font, attribute and point size used to display the Variable Text object’s contents. For more information, see Using the Font Dialog.

Click on OK to accept the Variable Text object’s settings and contents and close the dialog, or click Cancel to close the dialog without saving any changes.

If you’ve made changes to the Variable Text object, the editor updates it accordingly. The editor does not automatically change the object’s size or position based on the settings you select; you may find that you need to resize or move it to display its contents properly.

It is important to distinguish between a Variable Text object and the text the object contains! The settings in the Variable Text Object Options dialog determine how the object will handle the text it’s given when the fax is generated, not the alignment or behavior of the object itself.


Verifying Addresses

The Internet Mail Client always verifies addresses before sending your messages. It does this by first comparing the contents of the To and Cc fields with the Mail entries in the current Connection Directory, then by testing the fields for valid Internet mail addresses.

The Internet Mail Client considers a mail address "valid" if it satisfies the format described in Internet Mail Addresses.

If you’ve entered an address that doesn’t appear in the current directory, the Internet Mail Client prompts you with a dialog to determine whether you want to create an entry. If you click on Yes, the Add Address dialog is displayed to allow you to provide the information for the new entry.

This is the default behavior; it can be enabled or disabled in Setup. See Add new outgoing mail addresses....

If you’ve entered an address that resembles an entry in the current Connection Directory, the Internet Mail Client replaces the information you entered with the entry’s Name field, and uses the entry’s Address value when preparing your message for transmission.

For example, suppose you have a Connection Directory entry named "FJ Garvin" with an address of "fredjg@garvinsoft.com". You could enter it manually in a message address field by specifying:

FJ

or

fredjg@garvinsoft.com

In either case, the Internet Mail Client would recognize that the information you’ve provided matches the "FJ Garvin" entry. It would replace the information you entered with "FJ Garvin" in the message address field and use the entry’s Address field to complete the message.

If you entered an address that resembles more than one Mail entry in the current Connection Directory, the Internet Mail Client opens the Check Names dialog and displays the matching entries. Highlight the entry you want to use, and click on OK to return to the message window. If you don’t see an entry you want to use, you can click on Create to create a new Connection Directory entry, or click on Cancel to return to the message window.

If you need help in creating a new entry, see Step-by-Step: Adding a Mail-class Entry.

The Internet Mail Client always verifies addresses in the To and Cc fields when preparing to send messages. However, you can have Procomm Plus verify addresses without sending your message by clicking on the Check Names Action Bar button or select the Message | Check Names menu item.


Video Driver

Windows uses video drivers to display high resolution graphics on a wide variety of different hardware. These drivers are usually supplied by the hardware manufacturer.


Viewing .GIFs on Download

By default, Procomm Plus displays CompuServe Graphic Interchange Files in a separate window as they are downloaded. These picture files usually have a filename extension of .gif. Displaying .gif files as they are downloaded does not affect the overall file transfer speed.

Procomm Plus can display up to eight .gif files at a time. If you download more than eight pictures in a single batch transfer, newer pictures will replace previously-downloaded images in the display windows.

If you’re using Zmodem to download a series of .gif files in a "batch" transfer, you can choose to skip one or more of the files as you view them. This can be very convenient! Rather than download a .gif file you don’t want, click on the Skip File while it’s being displayed. Procomm Plus will force the host system to skip to the next file in the batch download.

If you use the Skip File feature, the host system may report a CRC failure on the skipped file. This won’t abort the batch transfer or corrupt data, however, so your transfer will continue.

If you restart the download of a partial .gif file with the Zmodem point-of-interrupt feature, Procomm Plus will read in the existing portion of the .gif to display the entire picture.

This feature can be enabled or disabled in Setup. A stand-alone .gif viewer is also provided with Procomm Plus; see The GIF Viewer.


Viewing GIF Files

Once you’ve selected one or more files for viewing, the GIF Viewer’s main window opens and displays the first file in its list. If you’ve selected more than one file for viewing, you can select the Next! menu item to display the next .gif image in the file list. Next! is disabled if you only selected a single file for viewing, or if the current .gif image is the final image in the selection list.

If you want to terminate a Slide Show of selected files, click on the Stop! menu item. If an image is being painted as you select Stop!, it will complete normally.

For more information about the viewer’s menus, see The GIF Viewer Menus. For information on viewing incoming .gif images, see Viewing Incoming Files with The GIF Viewer.


Viewing Incoming Files with the GIF File Viewer
Viewing Incoming Files with The GIF Viewer

If you’ve enabled View *.GIF files on download in Setup, Data, Data Options, Advanced, Procomm Plus will load the viewer to display your .gif images as you receive them.

When displaying images during a transfer, the GIF Viewer window looks much like it does during normal operation. However, the viewer’s menus are altered slightly. Some viewer menu commands are irrelevant to image transfers; they are removed. The Next! and Stop! commands are useful only when you’re viewing multiple .gif images, for example. They do not appear when you’re viewing images as you receive them.

As an image is received, the viewer paints it in the display window, with unpainted areas of the window darkened.

The Skip File! command is added to the viewer menus during a .gif download. If you decide you don’t want a particular .gif after seeing a portion of the image, click on Skip File! to cancel it.

The Skip File! command affects only the current transfer. If you’re receiving multiple files in a batch download from a host system, only the current file in the transfer will be cancelled. The remainder of the batched transfers will continue.

The viewer window opens as soon as a .gif download begins. Depending on the speed of your connection to the host system, you may decide that you don’t want to view the image as it’s transferred to your system. You can safely close the viewer, either by selecting File | Exit or by pressing [image].. A moment after the viewer closes, the normal file transfer progress box will appear and the transfer will continue.


Viewing a Fax

To view, annotate or use OCR to scan for text in the faxes you’ve selected, click on the View Fax Action Bar button or select the File | View Fax... menu item. The Fax Viewer loads and displays your selections. For help in using the Fax Viewer,  see The Fax Viewer.

You can have Procomm Plus display or print faxes automatically as you receive them, or automatically launch Fax Manager. For more information, see When a New Fax is Received in Fax Options.

If the file(s) you selected are the result of a Binary File Transfer, the View Fax menu item opens a file save dialog where you can rename the binary files. You must use this function to rename the .bft file before you attempt to execute or unarchive it! For more information, see Binary File Transfers.


Viewing entry statistics.

To view the connection statistics for the selected entry, click on the Statistics button or select the Edit | View Stats... menu item.

The Connection Directory reports the following values for the selected entry:

•	The date you last connected to the entry.

•	The total time you've spent connected to the entry.

•	The total number of successful connections you've made to the entry.

If you want to reset an entry’s connection statistics, click on Clear. The time and connection count are reset to zero values, and the entry is marked as a "new entry".

The View Stats function is only available if your're viewing Data-class directory entries. It's disabled if you’ve selected more than one entry, or if you’ve selected a group. Click on OK to close the dialog and return to the main Connection Directory window.


Viewing the Connection Log

By default, Procomm Plus maintains records or "logs" of all of the data and fax connections you make through the Connection Directory. To view the logs, select the File | Connection Log... menu item to display the Connection Log dialog.

You can choose to view your data and fax logs separately, or in a combined log list, simply by clicking on the appropriate button:

Connection Log

Data Log

Fax Log


Viewing the Connection Log See Also
Viewing the Connection Log

Connection Log

Data Log

Fax Log


Viewing the Messages

Once the packet has been successfully expanded, the QWK Mail Viewer displays the first message contained in the packet within the message window. The QWK Mail Viewer makes it easy to move forward and backward through the messages in the current area:

To Do This...	Do This...
Move to the next message.	Select the Next Message Action Bar button, select Messages | Next from the menu bar or press the right cursor key.
Move to the previous message.	Select the Previous Message Action Bar button, select Messages | Previous from the menu bar or press the left cursor key.


Virus

A virus is a program that can regenerate itself. Most viruses are specifically written to disrupt the normal operation of your computer, without being detected. Virus detectors are constantly being created and updated to help protect users from new strains of viruses.


Voice Entry Class See Also
Voice Entry Class

Step-by-Step: Adding a Voice-class Entry

Voice-class Settings


Voice Support

Your purchase of Procomm Plus also entitles you to voice-line Technical Support calls. Be sure to send in your Procomm Plus Registration Card or register electronically, as Quarterdeck must have your registration on file in order to provide you with technical support. Registration also entitles you to announcements of new products, upgrades and special offers.

When you call, give Quarterdeck's Technical Support specialist the serial number of your copy of Procomm Plus. You can find number by selecting the Help | About Procomm Plus... menu item in the Terminal window.

Before You Call...


Voice-class Settings

The Voice-class entry settings are divided into two groups, Entry Info and Voice Options. The most-used group, Entry Info, is selected automatically when you switch to the Voice class. Click on the appropriate button to toggle the displayed panels.


Voice-class Settings See Also
Voice-class Settings

Entry Info

Voice Options.


Voice-class: Entry Info

The fields in the Voice-class Entry Info group are similar to those listed in a standard phone book, such as a phone number and company name. They include:

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Number

The area code and primary phone number, used to dial and connect to the person addressed by the entry.

Country

The country where the person is located.  Procomm Plus uses this field to determine whether you'll be calling internationally.

Company
The business or company title for the entry. This field provides a convenient way to locate entries, as it is referenced in the directory’s Find dialog. See Searching for Entries.

Always dial as long distance

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will always treat this entry as a long distance call. The entry’s Area code and Voice Number will be included in the dialing string, preceded by any Location property values you’ve specified in Windows.

Only dial Voice Number

If this check box is enabled, Procomm Plus will always dial only the Voice Number for this entry. Location property values you’ve specified in Windows are ignored.  This mode is especially useful for internal calls through a company PBX system, as well as commands that need to be sent directly to the modem without modification by Windows.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.


Voice-class: Voice Options

The Voice Options settings determine how a voice call made with the entry will be handled.

Voice Connection

Procomm Plus will use the connection you specify here to dial the entry. To select a connection, click on the Voice Connection drop down list box, then click on one of the available connections.


WAIS

Wide Area Information Server. A system used for finding information on a network. A search engine that looks at the contents of the documents in its database, not just the file name. Many of the World Wide Web search tools use WAIS technology.


WAN

Wide Area Network. Two or more local area networks linked together. WANs may span buildings, or even countries. A WAN is typically owned and managed by a conglomeration of organizations.

See also LAN.


WAVE file

A digitized sound file format supported by Microsoft Windows as a standard. A WAVE file has a .wav file name extension.


WEB

See World Wide Web.


Web Browser

A way to access Internet information, download files, and connect to Internet sites around the globe simply by clicking on menu items and hyperlinked text or graphics. Browsers use the World Wide Web protocol (HTTP) so they can access Web servers and display interactive, hyperlinked Web pages. A Web browser is a graphical interface that, in addition to displaying Web pages, manages a conglomeration of different client protocols such as WAIS, Gopher, and FTP.


Web Options

Settings in the Internet, Web Options panel allow you to control some of the features of the Web Browser, including the default font. From within Setup, select the Internet, Web Options buttons to display the panel:

Font Size

This list box specifies the default font size for use with the <Body> HTML tag within the Web Browser.  The default selection is Medium.

Font Family

This list box specifies the default font family for use with the <Body> HTML tag within the Web Browser.  The default selection is Western.

Animate stop sign on Action Bar

If this option is checked, the Web Browser's stop sign Action Bar button will be animated to indicate on-going activity. This option is enabled by default.

Use multiple windows

If this option is enabled the Web Browser will open additional windows to display more than one web page. This option is enabled by default.

You can also modify several Web Browser settings from the Setup | Browser Properties item on the Web Browser menu.


Web Page

A single HTML display page sent by a Web server. Web pages contain formatted text as well as hyperlinks to resources such as graphics, animations, applications, Internet sites, and other Web pages.


Web Pages

One of the biggest advantages Web pages offer is the use of hyperlinks. A hyperlink allows a direct link to other Web pages or files, or even to specific sections of the currently displayed page. A hyperlink consists of two parts: the anchor and it’s pointer. The anchor is the text or image that is displayed when you view a Web page. The pointer is part of the HTML formatting and it provides the address and path of the destination page or file. Combined, they form a hyperlink.

Hyperlinks are typically highlighted or graphically empahsized to help you distinguish them from standard text within a Web page. Procomm Plus emphasizes hyperlinks with underlining and color.

In addition to hyperlinks, HTML files may contain text in a variety of fonts and sizes or even contain embedded graphics.


Web Server

A computer connected to the Internet, that supports the World Wide Web transfer protocol, and that answers browser requests for Web pages. Some servers offer secure connections for financial and business transactions as well.


Web-class Settings

Entry Info

Web Options


Web-class: Entry Info

The fields in the Web-class Entry Info group are similar to those you might find in a normal address book, such as an address and company name:

Name

The entry name, used to reference the entry in the Connection Directory, the Action Bar’s Rapid Connect list, and in other areas of Procomm Plus. You can enter up to 40 characters in this field.

Address

The Uniform Resource Locator (URL) or IP address used to connect to this site or location. For more information see Internet Addresses.

Company

The company name for this entry. It is not required to connect.

Notes File

A text file to be associated with the entry. The default setting for this field is [None]. To create a new file, select [Create] and specify a filename. You can then click on Edit... to edit the file.

Logon Info...

Click on this button to open a dialog where you can specify logon information for the site or resource you’re accessing:

The Logon Info values are very convenient if you’re using an ASPECT script to automate your connection to a host system. Each logon string value is available in an ASPECT system variable after the Connection Directory has tried to connect to the entry. This allows you to easily reference them from within a script.

The Web Browser can also access the Logon Info fields. When you connect to a site that requests Basic Authentication data, the Web Browser seeks the information in the current Connection Directory, depending on how you accessed the site.

If you connected with a Web-entry, from either the Connection Directory or from the Rapid Connect feature, the Web Browser uses the Logon Info values from the entry you selected.

If you connected by entering the site's address directly in the Web Browser's Address field and pressing [image], or by browsing to the site, the Web Browser will search the current Connection Directory for a Web-entry for the site. If an entry is found, its Logon Info fields are referenced for the requested information.

User ID

An entry’s User ID logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $USERID system variable.

Password

An entry’s Password logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $PASSWORD system variable.

Miscellaneous

An entry’s Miscellaneous logon string is reported in ASPECT’s $MISC system variable.

Click on OK to accept the values and return to the main Connection Directory window. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Web-class: Web Options

The Web Options settings determine how a connection made with the entry will be processed.

Font Size

This list box specifies the default font size for use with the <Body> HTML tag within the Web Browser.  The default selection is Medium.

Font Family

This list box specifies the default font family for use with the <Body> HTML tag within the Web Browser.  The default selection is Western.

Script

An ASPECT script to be launched when this entry is used. Click on this list box to select a script from among those stored in the default Script path defined in the Data, Data Options, Paths panel in Setup.

To specify how the script is handled, click on the Setup... button. This opens the Script Execution Options dialog.


What Is OCR?

Optical Character Recognition (OCR) is a process through which text contained in an image file is read and stored in a text or document file. Using the Fax Viewer’s built-in OCR engine, you can gather information from several kinds of images:

From faxes you’ve sent or received.

From monochrome .bmp or .pcx images.

If you’ve created monochrome Windows bitmap or .bmp files in another application, you can load them into the viewer by selecting the File | Import... menu item.

From scanned documents.

If you have a TWAIN-compliant scanner installed on your system, you can load an image into the Fax Viewer by selecting the File | Scan New Image... menu item.

For a step-by-step example, see Step-by-Step: Using OCR to Process an Image. See OCR Options for a detailed account of available OCR options. Once you have used the OCR engine to interpret text from images, you can use the OCR Editor to review and edit the interpreted text. See The OCR Editor for more information.

Once the OCR engine has retrieved text from the image, you can save it in a variety of popular file formats, including Microsoft Word for Windows™ and Microsoft Excel™. You can even take advantage of Procomm Plus’s built-in OCR Editor, which includes a spell-checker to help you quickly verify and correct the converted data before you save it to disk!

Optical Character Recognition is not an exact science. Rather, it is a technology that relies upon complex mathematical algorithms to analyze and interpret text displayed in an image file. We have designed Procomm Plus’s OCR engine to be as "smart" as possible. It can even "flip" a fax image automatically when processing, just in case it was transmitted upside down!

The results you get when processing images will depend on the fonts and character styles that appear in the image, as well as the source and quality of the image. The Fax Viewer also includes fax cleaning and deskewing technology that can help you obtain the best possible image for OCR processing.


What is ...

The Basics of Understanding Procomm Plus

The Connection Directory

Using the Terminal Window

Faxing with Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus and the Internet

Procomm Plus Tools

Procomm Plus Script Programs

The Setup Utility

ASCII Table

File Transfer Protocols

Procomm Plus and DDE


What is ...2
What is ...

The Basics of Understanding Procomm Plus

The Connection Directory

Using the Terminal Window

Faxing with Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus and the Internet

Procomm Plus Tools

The ASPECT Editor

The Action Bar® Editor

The Image Viewer

The Scheduler

The QWK Mail Viewer

The Caller ID Directory Editor

The Meta Key Editor

The Keyboard Editor

The Translate Table Editor

The Fax Status Utility

The Fax Manager

The Fax Viewer

The Fax Cover Sheet Editor

The Dialog Editor

The User Window Editor

Procomm Plus Script Programs

The Setup Utility

ASCII Table

File Transfer Protocols

Procomm Plus and DDE


What is ...3
What is ...

The Basics of Understanding Procomm Plus

The Connection Directory

Using the Terminal Window

Faxing with Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus and the Internet

Procomm Plus Tools

Procomm Plus Script Programs

Host, the BBS Script

Logon, the Script Generator

WinLink, the File Transfer Utility

The Setup Utility

ASCII Table

File Transfer Protocols

Procomm Plus and DDE


What is ...4
What is ...

The Basics of Understanding Procomm Plus

The Connection Directory

Using the Terminal Window

Faxing with Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus and the Internet

Procomm Plus Tools

Procomm Plus Script Programs

The Setup Utility

ASCII Table

File Transfer Protocols

An Introduction

The ASCII Protocol

The Raw ASCII Protocol

The CIS B+ Protocol

The FTP Protocol

The Ind$file Protocol

The Kermit Protocol

The Xmodem Protocol

The Ymodem Protocol

The Zmodem Protocol

Dynamic Link Protocols

Procomm Plus and DDE


What is FTP?

The File Transfer Protocol, or FTP, is the standard method used to move files between computers over the Internet and other TCP/IP networks. Specifically engineered to transfer files over TCP/IP networks, FTP is a dependable transfer protocol with relatively few configurable options.


What is See Also
What is ...

The Basics of Understanding Procomm Plus

The Connection Directory

Using the Terminal Window

Faxing with Procomm Plus

Procomm Plus and the Internet

Procomm Plus Tools

Procomm Plus Script Programs

The Setup Utility

ASCII Table

File Transfer Protocols

Procomm Plus and DDE


WinLink, the File Transfer Utility

The following links access the WinLink script documentation, located in winlink.hlp. If these links do not work or if you’re unable to locate this file, WinLink may not have been installed. Run Procomm Plus’s installation program, and use the Custom Installation feature to install the sample scripts.

An Introduction to WinLink

Running WinLink

Configuring WinLink

The WinLink Server

The WinLink Client

The Client On-line


WinSock

The portion of a Windows TCP/IP stack that interfaces with a Windows application. The term "Winsock" often refers to the Windows Socket Compliant TCP/IP interface.

See also Windows Socket Compliant. See also API.


Window Colors

The Data, Window Colors group allows you to specify the colors used to display many of the Terminal window features, including the workspace scrollbar and the Monitor window send and receive colors. It includes four minor groups:

Workspace

Scrollbar

Monitor Send

Monitor Receive

The Data, Window Colors group can be saved as an option set, then referenced from a Connection Directory entry, from an ASPECT script or from within Setup.

For help in creating and using option sets, see Option Sets.


Windows Socket Compliant

A Microsoft standard for the interface between Windows applications and TCP/IP stacks. Both the stack and the application must be Windows Socket Compliant in order for the communication to take place.


Windows Sockets

Windows sockets, or Winsock for short, is a protocol that provides a standard programming interface to be utilized by many different products. This standard allows various software applications to use a non-specific TCP/IP stack. In the most basic example, Winsock provides the interface between your Internet applications, and your TCP/IP stack.

Both TCP/IP and Winsock provide behind-the-scenes handling and for the most part, should not concern you. They operate transparently in the background, allowing you to go on-line and access the Internet.


Wizard

A series of automated help panels that lead you through a technical procedure step-by-step.


Working With Cover Sheet Objects

With the "point and click" interface of the Cover Sheet Editor, it is a simple task to place and size a cover sheet object, regardless of the target object.

When you select a text or graphic item from the editor’s Object menu, the mouse pointer changes to a small crossbar.  Once the mouse has changed into a crossbar, you can place the object. After you place an object, it will remain selected, allowing you to easily resize it or modify its characteristics. For more detailed information, see the following topics:

Placing an Object

Sizing an Object

Moving an Object

A Word on Cover Sheet Design


Working With Cover Sheet Objects See Also
Working With Cover Sheet Objects

Placing an Object

Sizing an Object

Moving an Object

A Word on Cover Sheet Design


Workspace Settings

Settings in the Workspace panel allow you to control the color and pattern used to "frame" the Terminal display. You can even enable or disable an attractive graphical frame! From within Setup, select the Data, Window Colors, Workspace buttons to display the Workspace settings panel:

Colors

The color boxes in this group allow you to select the workspace color. Simply click on the color you want. Your selection is reflected in the Example window at the bottom of the panel.

Patterns

Click on the drop down list to select the workspace pattern you want to use. Your selection is reflected in the Example window at the bottom of the panel.

Display terminal frame

If you enable this setting, an attractive graphical frame will be drawn around the Terminal display.


Workstation

A PC connected to a local area network. Workstations can access shared data and resources, and often access programs stored on a shared network server.


World Wide Web

An Internet service that allows you to search or browse the Internet by clicking on links in graphic documents. A network of computers on the Internet that use the HTTP protocol to transfer information, and that hyperlink a large portion of Internet sites through the use of imbedded addresses (URLs) in Web pages.


Writing and Sending Mail

The Internet Mail Client’s message window makes it easy to write messages. You can open the window in several different ways:

By clicking on the New Message Action Bar button or selecting the Message | New Message menu item in the mail client’s main window.

By selecting one or more Mail entries or groups in the Connection Directory and clicking on its New Message button.

The message window opens with the entry or entries you selected entered in the To field. If you selected one or more groups, each entry within the group will be listed separately in the field.

By selecting a Mail entry or group from the Rapid Connect Action Bar control in one of Procomm Plus’s main communication windows.

The message window opens with your selection entered as the message’s address. If you selected a group, each entry within the group will appear separately in the To field.

As described in Sending and Receiving Mail, the message window is also used if you reply to or forward mail you’ve received. If you’re writing a new message, the window is titled New Message. If you’re replying to or forwarding an existing message, the title changes appropriately.

The New Message window provides its own menus and Action Bar, but its most important features are the controls you use when you write a message. See the controls described below, and also review Using the Mail Client's New Message Window.

To

You can click in the associated edit field and enter a recipient’s Internet mail address directly, or click on the To button to select entries or groups from the Connection Directory.

If you selected one or more Connection Directory entries or groups to open the message window, your selection(s) will be listed in the edit field when the window opens. If you’re replying to an existing message, the message’s sender will be listed.

Cc

If you want to send a "carbon copy" of your message to one or more users, click in the associated edit field and enter their Internet mail address(es) directly, or click on the Cc button to select entries or groups from the Connection Directory.

Subject

Click in this field to enter a subject line for your message. If you’re replying to or forwarding an existing message, its subject line will appear here automatically.

The attached file list

If you’ve attached one or more files to your message they will appear in this list.

By default, attached files are UUencoded; see Encoded files.

The message edit box

You can either enter your message directly in the edit box at the bottom of the New Message window, or use the File | Import Text... function to import a text file. You can also take advantage of the Window Clipboard to cut, copy and paste text from and to the message body.

By default, the Internet Mail Client formats messages to a maximum line width of 80 characters. You can change this value in Setup; see Word wrap after [ ] characters. However, keep in mind that some mail systems on the Internet cannot handle longer lines.

After you’re finished with your message, just click on the Send Message Action Bar button or select the Message | Send Message menu item to save and send it.

If you’re already connected to the Internet when you select Send Message, the mail client delivers your message immediately. Otherwise, it stores your message in the Outbox folder until you request Deliver Mail in the main window.

If you want the mail client to hold your messages even when you’re connected to the Internet, see Send outgoing mail immediately....

Please review Using the Mail Client's New Message Window for a discussion of other features you can use in the New Message window and the menu items which access them. For help with the spell checker, please see Using the Mail Client's Spelling Checker. In addition, the New Message window's menus and Action Bar are discussed in New Message Menu and Action Bar.


Written Support

Quarterdeck always welcomes questions received via letter or fax. Just mail or fax your questions to the address or Technical Support FAX number shown in your Technical Support Guide. You’ll receive a support technician’s response in the same form that you sent your question. For example, if you fax a question, it will be answered by fax if possible.

In order to respond to your questions via fax or letter, a technician will need your serial number. Don’t forget to include it along with a return address or fax number in your letter or fax! You can find your serial number by selecting the Help | About Procomm Plus... menu item in the Terminal window.

If you’re mailing or faxing a technical question, be sure to include as much information as possible. If applicable, you should also include the information requested in Before You Call....

Quarterdeck also offers a fax on demand service, called DATAFAX. You can call this automated system to have technical documents faxed to you. For more information, see the Technical Support Guide.


Wyse 100 (101 key)
This is the format of the Wyse 100 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	   Wyse 100 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
Shift F1	Function 9 (Shift F1)	^AH^M
Shift F2	Function 10 (Shift F2)	^AI^M
Shift F3	Function 11 (Shift F3)	^AJ^M
Shift F4	Function 12 (Shift F4)	^AK^M
Shift F5	Function 13 (Shift F5)	^AL^M
Shift F6	Function 14 (Shift F6)	^AM^M
Shift F7	Function 15 (Shift F7)	^AN^M
Shift F8	Function 16 (Shift F8)	^AO^M
F9	Line Insert	^[E
Shift F9	Shift Line Insert	^[t
F10	Line Delete	^[R
F11	Line Erase	^[T
Shift F11	Shift Line Erase	^[t
F12	Page Erase	^[Y
Shift F12	Shift Page Erase	^[y
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Rubout	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Grey Insert	Insert Off	^[r
Shift Grey Page Up	Insert On	^[q
Grey Delete	Insert Space Character	^[Q
Shift Grey Delete	Delete Character	^[W
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^^	[ 1E ]
Shift Grey Home	Cursor to Start of Text	^[{
Grey End	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Shift Grey End	Erase End of Page	^[Y
Grey PgUp	Scrl Up	^[w
Grey PgDn	Scrl Down	^[v
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L


Wyse 100 (84-key)
This is the format for the Wyse 100 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Because of the extensive combinations supported by the Wyse 100 the keypad numeric values are available in this mapping when NumLock is ON, or with the Ctrl-key when NumLock is OFF.

Procomm Plus Key	     Wyse 100 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
Shift F1	Function 9 (Shift F1)	^AH^M
Shift F2	Function 10 (Shift F2)	^AI^M
Shift F3	Function 11 (Shift F3)	^AJ^M
Shift F4	Function 12 (Shift F4)	^AK^M
Shift F5	Function 13 (Shift F5)	^AL^M
Shift F6	Function 14 (Shift F6)	^AM^M
Shift F7	Function 15 (Shift F7)	^AN^M
Shift F8	Function 16 (Shift F8)	^AO^M
F9	Line Insert	^[E
Shift F9	Shift Line Insert	^[t
F10	Line Delete	^[R
Ctrl-F1	Line Erase	^[T
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift Line Erase	^[t
Ctrl-F2	Page Erase	^[Y
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift Page Erase	^[y
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Rubout	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad +	Enter	^M
Shift Keypad +	+	+
Insert	Insert Off	^[r
Shift Insert	Insert On	^[q
Delete	Insert Space Character	^[Q
Shift Delete	Delete Character	^[W
Home	Home Cursor	^^	[ 1E ]
Shift Home	Cursor to Start of Text	^[{
End	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Shift End	Erase End of Page	^[Y
PgUp	Scrl Up	^[w
PgDn	Scrl Down	^[v
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-End	1	1
Ctrl-Cursor Down	2	2
Ctrl-PgDn	3	3
Ctrl-Cursor Left	4	4
Ctrl-Center Key	5	5
Ctrl-Cursor Right	6	6
Ctrl-Home	7	7
Ctrl-Cursor Up	8	8
Ctrl-PgUp	9	9
Ctrl-Insert	0	0
Ctrl-Delete	.	.
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^J
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Scrl Down	^[v
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Cursor Home	^^
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^K
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Scrl Up	^[w
Ctrl-Keypad +	Enter	^M
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	^[W


Wyse 50 (101 key)
This is the format of the Wyse 50 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The NumLock key is mapped to Insert Character, see below.  The F10 key is also mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	  Wyse 50 Function	 Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
F11	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
F12	Function 12 (F12)	^AK^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 13 (F13)	^AL^M
Ctrl-F2	Function 14 (F14)	^AM^M
Ctrl-F3	Function 15 (F15)	^AN^M
Ctrl-F4	Function 16 (F16)	^AO^M
Shift F1	Function 17 (Shift F1)	^A`^M
Shift F2	Function 18 (Shift F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F3	Function 19 (Shift F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F4	Function 20 (Shift F4)	^Ac^M
Shift F5	Function 21 (Shift F5)	^Ad^M
Shift F6	Function 22 (Shift F6)	^Ae^M
Shift F7	Function 23 (Shift F7)	^Af^M
Shift F8	Function 24 (Shift F8)	^Ag^M
Shift F9	Function 25 (Shift F9)	^Ah^M
Shift F10	Function 26 (Shift F10)	^Ai^M
Shift F11	Function 27 (Shift F11)	^Aj^M
Shift F12	Function 28 (Shift F12)	^Ak^M
Ctrl-F5	Function 29 (Shift F13)	^Al^M
Ctrl-F6	Function 30 (Shift F14)	^Am^M
Ctrl-F7	Function 31 (Shift F15)	^An^M
Ctrl-F8	Function 32 (Shift F16)	^Ao^M
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Num Lock	Insert Character	^[Q
Shift Num Lock	Insert Line	^[E
Keypad /	Delete Character	^[W
Shift Keypad /	Delete Line	^[R
Keypad *	Clear Line	^[T
Shift Keypad *	Clear Screen	^[Y
Keypad -	Replace	^[r
Shift Keypad -	Insert	^[q
Shift Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Shift Keypad Cursor Lt	Cursor Left	^H
Shift Keypad Cursor Rt	Cursor Right	^L
Shift Keypad Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^J
Shift Keypad Home	Cursor Home	^^	[ 1E ]
Shift Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[T
Shift Keypad PgUp	Page Prev	^[K
Shift Keypad PgDn	Page Next	^[J
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Grey Insert	Insert Character	^[Q
Shift Grey Page Up	Insert Line	^[E
Grey Delete	Delete Character	^[W
Shift Grey Delete	Delete Line	^[R
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^^
Shift Grey Home	Shift Home Cursor	^[{
Grey End	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Shift Grey End	Erase End of Page	^[Y
Grey PgUp	Page Prev	^[K
Grey PgDn	Page Next	^[J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L


Wyse 50 (84-key)
This is the format for the Wyse 50 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard. F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	      Wyse 50 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
Shift F1	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
Shift F2	Function 12 (F12)	^AK^M
Shift F3	Function 13 (F13)	^AL^M
Shift F4	Function 14 (F14)	^AM^M
Shift F5	Function 15 (F15)	^AN^M
Shift F6	Function 16 (F16)	^AO^M
Shift F7	Function 17 (Shift F1)	^A`^M
Shift F8	Function 18 (Shift F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F9	Function 19 (Shift F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F10	Function 20 (Shift F4)	^Ac^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 21 (Shift F5)	^Ad^M
Ctrl-F2	Function 22 (Shift F6)	^Ae^M
Ctrl-F3	Function 23 (Shift F7)	^Af^M
Ctrl-F4	Function 24 (Shift F8)	^Ag^M
Ctrl-F5	Function 25 (Shift F9)	^Ah^M
Ctrl-F6	Function 26 (Shift F10)	^Ai^M
Ctrl-F7	Function 27 (Shift F11)	^Aj^M
Ctrl-F8	Function 28 (Shift F12)	^Ak^M
Ctrl-F9	Function 29 (Shift F13)	^Al^M
Ctrl-F10	Function 30 (Shift F14)	^Am^M
Shift Ctrl-F1	Function 31 (Shift F15)	^An^M
Shift Ctrl-F2	Function 32 (Shift F16)	^Ao^M
Shift Ctrl-F3	Insert Character	^[Q
Shift Ctrl-F4	Insert Line	^[E
Shift Ctrl-F5	Delete Character	^[W
Shift Ctrl-F6	Delete Line	^[R
Shift Ctrl-F7	Clear Line	^[T
Shift Ctrl-F8	Clear Screen	^[Y
Shift Ctrl-F9	Replace	^[r
Shift Ctrl-F10	Insert	^[q
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Home	Cursor Home	^^	[ 1E ]
End	Erase End of Line	^[T
PgUp	Page Prev	^[K
PgDn	Page Next	^[J
Insert	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Insert	Insert Line	^[E
Delete	Delete Character	^[W
Ctrl-Delete	Delete Line	^[R
Keypad +	Enter	^M
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift Home	7	7
Shift End	1	1
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Insert	0	0
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Keypad +	+	+
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Erase End of Line	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^J
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Page Next	^[J
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Cursor Home	^^
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^K
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Page Prev	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad +	Enter	^M
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	^[W


Wyse 50, Wyse 60 and ADM 31 Advanced Settings

With the Current Terminal set to Wyse 50, Wyse 60 or ADM 31, or to a named option set you’ve derived from one of these, click on the Advanced... button to display the advanced settings dialog:

Terminal Status Line

These settings control the emulation’s display status line. By default, the emulation’s status line is turned on. If you enable the Display check box, you can specify the attribute used to display the status line: Normal, Reverse or Underline.

Protected Attribute

These settings determine the attribute used by the emulation to display "protected" text. Protected text can be assigned one or more of three attributes: Dim, Reverse and Underline.

The Dim, Reverse, Underline and Normal attributes are defined in the Data, Terminal Colors settings group. See Terminal Colors for more information.

Block mode

This setting controls the emulation’s block mode support. By default, the Wyse 50, Wyse 60 and ADM 31 block mode support is disabled.

End of line/block sequence

Click on this list box to select the value the emulation will use as the end of line or block sequence in block mode. A list of standard values is provided; for the actual value used by your host system, check with your system operator or technical help desk.

Click on OK to accept the settings and return to the Data, Terminal Options panel. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Wyse 60 (101 key)
This is the format of the Wyse 60 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The NumLock key is mapped to Insert Character, see below.  The F10 key is also mapped.

Procomm Plus Key	  Wyse 60 Function	 Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
F11	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
F12	Function 12 (F12)	^AK^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 13 (F13)	^AL^M
Ctrl-F2	Function 14 (F14)	^AM^M
Ctrl-F3	Function 15 (F15)	^AN^M
Ctrl-F4	Function 16 (F16)	^AO^M
Shift F1	Function 17 (Shift F1)	^A`^M
Shift F2	Function 18 (Shift F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F3	Function 19 (Shift F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F4	Function 20 (Shift F4)	^Ac^M
Shift F5	Function 21 (Shift F5)	^Ad^M
Shift F6	Function 22 (Shift F6)	^Ae^M
Shift F7	Function 23 (Shift F7)	^Af^M
Shift F8	Function 24 (Shift F8)	^Ag^M
Shift F9	Function 25 (Shift F9)	^Ah^M
Shift F10	Function 26 (Shift F10)	^Ai^M
Shift F11	Function 27 (Shift F11)	^Aj^M
Shift F12	Function 28 (Shift F12)	^Ak^M
Ctrl-F5	Function 29 (Shift F13)	^Al^M
Ctrl-F6	Function 30 (Shift F14)	^Am^M
Ctrl-F7	Function 31 (Shift F15)	^An^M
Ctrl-F8	Function 32 (Shift F16)	^Ao^M
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Num Lock	Insert Character	^[Q
Shift Num Lock	Insert Line	^[E
Keypad /	Delete Character	^[W
Shift Keypad /	Delete Line	^[R
Keypad *	Clear Line	^[T
Shift Keypad *	Clear Screen	^[Y
Keypad -	Replace	^[r
Shift Keypad -	Insert	^[q
Shift Keypad Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Shift Keypad Cursor Lt	Cursor Left	^H
Shift Keypad Cursor Rt	Cursor Right	^L
Shift Keypad Cursor Dn	Cursor Down	^J
Shift Keypad Home	Cursor Home	^^	[ 1E ]
Shift Keypad End	Erase End of Line	^[T
Shift Keypad PgUp	Page Prev	^[K
Shift Keypad PgDn	Page Next	^[J
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Grey Insert	Insert Character	^[Q
Shift Grey Page Up	Insert Line	^[E
Grey Delete	Delete Character	^[W
Shift Grey Delete	Delete Line	^[R
Grey Home	Home Cursor	^^
Shift Grey Home	Shift Home Cursor	^[{
Grey End	Erase End Of Line	^[T
Shift Grey End	Erase End of Page	^[Y
Grey PgUp	Page Prev	^[J
Grey PgDn	Page Next	^[K
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L


Wyse 60 (84 key)
This is the format of the Wyse 60 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Procomm Plus Key	     Wyse 60 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	Function 1 (F1)	^A@^M
F2	Function 2 (F2)	^AA^M
F3	Function 3 (F3)	^AB^M
F4	Function 4 (F4)	^AC^M
F5	Function 5 (F5)	^AD^M
F6	Function 6 (F6)	^AE^M
F7	Function 7 (F7)	^AF^M
F8	Function 8 (F8)	^AG^M
F9	Function 9 (F9)	^AH^M
F10	Function 10 (F10)	^AI^M
Shift F1	Function 11 (F11)	^AJ^M
Shift F2	Function 12 (F12)	^AK^M
Shift F3	Function 13 (F13)	^AL^M
Shift F4	Function 14 (F14)	^AM^M
Shift F5	Function 15 (F15)	^AN^M
Shift F6	Function 16 (F16)	^AO^M
Shift F7	Function 17 (Shift F1)	^A`^M
Shift F8	Function 18 (Shift F2)	^Aa^M
Shift F9	Function 19 (Shift F3)	^Ab^M
Shift F10	Function 20 (Shift F4)	^Ac^M
Ctrl-F1	Function 21 (Shift F5)	^Ad^M
Ctrl-F2	Function 22 (Shift F6)	^Ae^M
Ctrl-F3	Function 23 (Shift F7)	^Af^M
Ctrl-F4	Function 24 (Shift F8)	^Ag^M
Ctrl-F5	Function 25 (Shift F9)	^Ah^M
Ctrl-F6	Function 26 (Shift F10)	^Ai^M
Ctrl-F7	Function 27 (Shift F11)	^Aj^M
Ctrl-F8	Function 28 (Shift F12)	^Ak^M
Ctrl-F9	Function 29 (Shift F13)	^Al^M
Ctrl-F10	Function 30 (Shift F14)	^Am^M
Shift Ctrl-F1	Function 31 (Shift F15)	^An^M
Shift Ctrl-F2	Function 32 (Shift F16)	^Ao^M
Shift Ctrl-F3	Insert Character	^[Q
Shift Ctrl-F4	Insert Line	^[E
Shift Ctrl-F5	Delete Character	^[W
Shift Ctrl-F6	Delete Line	^[R
Shift Ctrl-F7	Clear Line	^[T
Shift Ctrl-F8	Clear Screen	^[Y
Shift Ctrl-F9	Replace	^[r
Shift Ctrl-F10	Insert	^[q
BackSpace	BackSpace	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Ctrl-Backspace	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Shift Tab	Back Tab	^[I
Enter	Return	^M
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^K
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^H
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^L
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^J
Home	Cursor Home	^^	[ 1E ]
End	Erase End of Line	^[T
PgUp	Page Prev	^[J
PgDn	Page Next	^[K
Insert	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Insert	Insert Line	^[E
Delete	Delete Character	^[W
Ctrl-Delete	Delete Line	^[R
Keypad +	Enter	^M
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift Home	7	7
Shift End	1	1
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Insert	0	0
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Keypad +	+	+
NumLock ON:
Keypad .	.	.
Keypad 0	0	0
Keypad 1	1	1
Keypad 2	2	2
Keypad 3	3	3
Keypad 4	4	4
Keypad 5	5	5
Keypad 6	6	6
Keypad 7	7	7
Keypad 8	8	8
Keypad 9	9	9
Ctrl-Keypad 0	Insert Character	^[Q
Ctrl-Keypad 1	Erase End of Line	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad 2	Cursor Down	^J
Ctrl-Keypad 3	Page Next	^[J
Ctrl-Keypad 4	Cursor Left	^H
Ctrl-Keypad 6	Cursor Right	^L
Ctrl-Keypad 7	Cursor Home	^^
Ctrl-Keypad 8	Cursor Up	^K
Ctrl-Keypad 9	Page Prev	^[K
Ctrl-Keypad +	Enter	^M
Ctrl-Keypad .	Delete	^[W


Wyse 75 (101 key)
This is the format of the Wyse 75 keymapping for the 101-key keyboard.  The F10 key is mappable, and the NumLock key is mapped to PF1, see below.

Procomm Plus Key	   Wyse 75 Function	  Transmitted Sequence

F1	Print Copy Key(F1)	^[[?5i
F2	Print Trans Key(F2)	^[[?3i
F3	Screen Send(F3)	^[[2i
F4	Insert Char	^[[@
F5	Line Delete	^[[M
F6	F6	^[[17~
F7	F7	^[[18~
F8	F8	^[[19~
F9	F9	^[[20~
F10	F10	^[[21~
F11	F11	^[[23~
F12	F12	^[[24~
Shift F1	F11	^[[23~
Shift F2	F12	^[[24~
Shift F3	F13	^[[25~
Shift F4	F14	^[[26~
Shift F5	F15	^[[28~
Shift F6	F16	^[[29~
Ctrl-F1	Shift F1	^[[4i
Ctrl-F2	Shift F2	^[[?1i
Ctrl-F3	Shift F3	^[[0i
Ctrl-F4	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-F5	Line Clear	^[[K
Ctrl-F6	Shift F6	^[[31~
Ctrl-F7	Shift F7	^[[32~
Ctrl-F8	Shift F8	^[[33~
Ctrl-F9	Shift F9	^[[34~
Ctrl-F10	Shift F10	^[[35~
Shift Ctrl-F1   or Ctrl-F11	Shift F11 (Find)	^[[1~
Shift Ctrl-F2   or Ctrl-F12	Shift F12 (Insert Here)	^[[2~
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift F13 (Remove)	^[[3~
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift F14 (Select)	^[[4~
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shift F15 (Prev Screen)	^[[5~
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shift F16 (Next Screen)	^[[6~
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
NumLock	PF1	^[OP
Keypad /	PF2	^[OQ
Keypad *	PF3	^[OR
Keypad -	PF4	^[OS
Keypad +	+	+
Shift Keypad +	Keypad MINUS	-
Keypad End	1	1
Keypad Cursor Down	2	2
Keypad PgDn	3	3
Keypad Cursor Left	4	4
Keypad Cursor Right	6	6
Keypad Home	7	7
Keypad Cursor Up	8	8
Keypad PgUp	9	9
Keypad Delete	.	.
Keypad Enter	Enter	^M
Shift Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Shift PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Shift Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Shift Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Shift End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Shift Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Shift Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Shift PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Shift Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Ctrl-Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Enter	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Shift Ctrl-Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Shift Ctrl-Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Shift Ctrl-Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC
Grey Home	Find	^[[1~
Grey End	Select	^[[4~
Grey Insert	Insert Here	^[[2~
Grey Delete	Remove	^[[3~
Grey Page Up	Prev Screen	^[[5~
Grey Page Down	Next Screen	^[[6~
Shift Grey Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Shift Grey Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
Ctrl-Grey Home	Insert Line	^[[L
Ctrl-Grey End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Ctrl-Grey PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Ctrl-Grey PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Grey Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
Grey Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Grey Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Grey Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
Ctrl-Grey Up	Application Cursor Up	^[OA
Ctrl-Grey Down	Application Cursor Down	^[OB
Ctrl-Grey Left	Application Cursor Left	^[OD
Ctrl-Grey Right	Application Cursor Right	^[OC


Wyse 75 (84-key)
This is the format for the Wyse 75 keymapping for the 84-key keyboard.  F10 is a mapped key.

Because the 84-key keyboard has only ten function keys, the Shifted Function keys are used to access F11-F16, while the Ctrl-Function and Shift Ctrl-Function keys are mapped to access the shifted states of these keys.  For convenience, the editing keys Find, Select, Insert Here, Remove, Next Screen and Prev Screen are mapped both to Shift Ctrl-Function keys and to Shift Ctrl-keypad keys, see below.

Procomm Plus Key	     Wyse 75 Function	                         Transmitted Sequence

F1	PF1	^[OP
F2	PF2	^[OQ
F3	PF3	^[OR
Ctrl-F1	PF4	^[OS
F4	Insert Char	^[[@
Ctrl-F4	Insert Line	^[[L
F5	Line Delete	^[[M
Ctrl-F5	Line Clear	^[[K
F6	F6	^[[17~
F7	F7	^[[18~
F8	F8	^[[19~
F9	F9	^[[20~
F10	F10	^[[21~
Shift F1	F11	^[[23~
Shift F2	F12	^[[24~
Shift F3	F13	^[[25~
Shift F4	F14	^[[26~
Shift F5	F15	^[[28~
Shift F6	F16	^[[29~
Shift F7	F1	^[[?5i
Shift F8	F2	^[[?3i
Shift F9	F3	^[[2i
Ctrl-F6	Shift F6	^[[31~
Ctrl-F7	Shift F7	^[[32~
Ctrl-F8	Shift F8	^[[33~
Ctrl-F9	Shift F9	^[[34~
Ctrl-F10	Shift F10	^[[35~
Shift Ctrl-F1	Shift F11 (Find)	^[[1~
Shift Ctrl-F2	Shift F12 (Insert Here)	^[[2~
Shift Ctrl-F3	Shift F13 (Remove)	^[[3~
Shift Ctrl-F4	Shift F14 (Select)	^[[4~
Shift Ctrl-F5	Shift F15 (Prev Screen)	^[[5~
Shift Ctrl-F6	Shift F16 (Next Screen)	^[[6~
BackSpace	Back Space	^H
Ctrl-Backspace	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Tab	Tab	^I
Enter	Return	^M
Keypad +	Enter	^M
Keypad -	Keypad COMMA	,
Home	Home Cursor	^[[H
PgUp	Delete Line	^[[M
Cursor Left	Cursor Left	^[[D
Cursor Right	Cursor Right	^[[C
End	Erase End of Line	^[[K
Cursor Down	Cursor Down	^[[B
Cursor Up	Cursor Up	^[[A
PgDn	Clear Screen	^[[H^[[2J
Delete	Character Delete	DEL	[ 7F ]
Ctrl-End	Insert Line	^[[L
Shift End	1	1
Shift Cursor Down	2	2
Shift PgDn	3	3
Shift Cursor Left	4	4
Shift Keypad 5	5	5
Shift Cursor Right	6	6
Shift Home	7	7
Shift Cursor Up	8	8
Shift PgUp	9	9
Shift Delete	.	.
Shift Insert	0	0
Shift Keypad +	+	+
Ctrl-Keypad -	Keypad Application MINUS	^[Om
Ctrl-Keypad *	Keypad Application COMMA	^[Ol
Ctrl-Insert	Keypad Application 0	^[Op
Ctrl-End	Keypad Application 1	^[Oq
Ctrl-Cursor Down	Keypad Application 2	^[Or
Ctrl-PgDn	Keypad Application 3	^[Os
Ctrl-Cursor Left	Keypad Application 4	^[Ot
Ctrl-5	Keypad Application 5	^[Ou
Ctrl-Cursor Right	Keypad Application 6	^[Ov
Ctrl-Home	Keypad Application 7	^[Ow
Ctrl-Cursor Up	Keypad Application 8	^[Ox
Ctrl-PgUp	Keypad Application 9	^[Oy
Ctrl-Delete	Keypad Application  .	^[On
Ctrl-Keypad +	Keypad Application Enter	^[OM
Shift Ctrl-Home	Find	^[[1~
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Left	Select	^[[4~
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Up	Insert Here	^[[2~
Shift Ctrl-Pg Up	Remove	^[[3~
Shift Ctrl-Keypad 5	Prev Screen	^[[5~
Shift Ctrl-Cursor Right	Next Screen	^[[6~


XON / XOFF

See Software flow control.


Xmodem Protocol Options

The settings available for each of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols and their derivatives are identical. Keep in mind that these same options are also available for the following protocols:

1K-Xmodem and 1K-Xmodem-G

Ymodem and Ymodem-G

For a brief discussion of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols, and their derivatives, see The Xmodem Protocol and The Ymodem Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select Xmodem from the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display its panel.

Download Options

The following options allow you to control the behavior of an Xmodem download:

Overwrite existing file

Enable this option if you want a file downloaded to your computer to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. By default, the incoming file will be renamed and the existing file will remain untouched.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete downloads are not deleted.

Use relaxed protocol timing

By default, Procomm Plus uses a standard timing value when waiting for information from the sending system. This is appropriate for most systems. With some connections, however, this standard value may cause an unacceptable number of time-outs or errors. Enabling this setting will slow the transfer slightly, but should improve the overall efficiency in those cases.


Ymodem Protocol Options

The settings available for each of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols and their derivatives are identical. Keep in mind that these same options are also available for the following protocols:

1K-Xmodem and 1K-Xmodem-G

Ymodem-G

For a brief discussion of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols, and their derivatives, see The Xmodem Protocol and The Ymodem Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select Ymodem from the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display its panel.

Download Options

The following options allow you to control the behavior of an Ymodem download:

Overwrite existing file

Enable this option if you want a file downloaded to your computer to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. By default, the incoming file will be renamed and the existing file will remain untouched.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete downloads are not deleted.

Use relaxed protocol timing

By default, Procomm Plus uses a standard timing value when waiting for information from the sending system. This is appropriate for most systems. With some connections, however, this standard value may cause an unacceptable number of time-outs or errors. Enabling this setting will slow the transfer slightly, but should improve the overall efficiency in those cases.


Ymodem-G

Ymodem-G is a variant of Ymodem, but it does not provide software error detection and recovery, as it expects the hardware to provide this service. The packet is constructed the same as Ymodem packets. Ymodem-G supports batch mode.

This protocol does not provide any software error recovery. It is for use only with error-correcting modems!


Ymodem-G Protocol Options

The settings available for each of the Xmodem and Ymodem protocols and their derivatives are identical. Keep in mind that these same options are also available for the following protocols:

1K-Xmodem and 1K-Xmodem-G

Ymodem

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select Ymodem-G from the Current Transfer Protocol list box.

Download Options

The following options allow you to control the behavior of an Ymodem-G download:

Overwrite existing file

Enable this option if you want a file downloaded to your computer to replace a preexisting file if they both use the same filename. By default, the incoming file will be renamed and the existing file will remain untouched.

Delete aborted downloads

If this setting is enabled, Procomm Plus will erase downloads that were canceled or aborted. By default, incomplete downloads are not deleted.

Use relaxed protocol timing

By default, Procomm Plus uses a standard timing value when waiting for information from the sending system. This is appropriate for most systems. With some connections, however, this standard value may cause an unacceptable number of time-outs or errors. Enabling this setting will slow the transfer slightly, but should improve the overall efficiency in those cases.


Your TCP/IP Connection

Internet

Before you can access an FTP host, you will need to establish an Internet connection, either with an Internet Service Provider or with a direct network connection to the Internet.

Other Network

The FTP Client can also be used for file transfers over TCP/IP networks that are not connected to the Internet. The same procedures and configuration issues apply as for Internet connections. However, you TCP/IP connection must be established before you can access an FTP host.


Zmodem Protocol Options

Settings for the Zmodem protocol allow you to specify how aborted files will be handled, as well as a variety of other options. For a brief discussion of the protocol, see The Zmodem Protocol.

From within Setup, click on the Data, Transfer Protocol buttons to display the protocols panel, then select Zmodem in the Current Transfer Protocol list box to display the Zmodem setting panel.

Zmodem Crash Recovery

In addition to being fast and reliable, the Zmodem protocol supports a useful feature called Crash Recovery. If you’re downloading a file and the transfer aborts for any reason, Crash Recovery allows you to resume the transfer from where it aborted, rather than restarting it!

Both the sending and receiving sides of the Zmodem transfer have Crash Recovery settings, and the decision to resume or restart an aborted transfer is negotiated by the two sides. For more information, see Zmodem Receiver Recovery Settings or Zmodem Sender Crash Recovery Settings.

Other Options

Transmit method

This setting specifies the method used by Zmodem to send data during an upload. By default, data is "streamed," meaning that the sending computer continues to transmit data until either the end of the file is reached or the receiver requests the retransmission of data. This is the most efficient method.

If you’re transferring files over exceptionally noisy lines or across a packet-switched network, you can also specify a "windowed" method. Both 2K- and 4K-windows, 2048 and 4096 bytes respectively, are supported. If the phone line quality is very poor, use the smaller 2K window size.

This setting only affects files you upload to another machine.

Error detection

This setting specifies the type of error detection that will be used for a Zmodem file transfer. Both 16-bit and 32-bit CRC error detection are supported.

32-bit CRC is the default setting, as it is better for users requiring absolute data integrity. However, 32-bit CRC requires additional processing time to verify data integrity, but this should not be a problem for processors higher than an 80386-SX.

Use local EOL convention

If this setting is enabled, Zmodem will add a carriage return before each line feed within a received file. You may find this feature useful if you’re receiving text files created by another type of computer, such as an Apple or UNIX machine.

It is very important that you enable this setting only when you’re receiving ASCII text files! Zmodem will also add carriage returns to binary files, which will likely corrupt any binary file you receive.

Original file time stamp

This setting determines whether Zmodem will retain the time and date stamp on received files. By default, it is enabled, meaning that received files will bear the original system time and date sent by the host system.

If you disable the setting, the file will be stamped with your system’s current time and date as they are received. Disabling this setting essentially invalidates the settings in Crash Recovery If date/time match and Overwrite if incoming newer, since the incoming file’s date and time stamp will be altered by Zmodem.


Zmodem Receive Options
Zmodem Receiver Crash Recovery Options

To change the Crash Recovery settings and other options for files you download to your machine, click on the Change Settings... button in the Receiver Crash Recovery Settings box.

Crash Recovery Options

Selections within this group allow you to specify how Crash Recovery will be handled when you’re downloading:

Always crash recover

If this setting is selected, and the incoming file already exists, Crash Recovery will be used. If the file doesn’t exist, it will be created. The Overwrite Options are grayed if you choose this setting to indicate that they have no effect in this mode.

Follow sender

If this setting is selected, the sender’s Crash Recovery setup is used, overriding your settings. The Overwrite Options are grayed if you choose this setting to indicate that they have no effect in this mode.

If date/time match

If this setting is selected, Crash Recovery is used if the file date and time stamps match. If the file date and time stamps do not match, the Overwrite Options are referenced to determine how to handle the new file. This is the default setting.

If CRCs match

If this setting is selected, Crash Recovery is used if the CRCs of the incoming and existing files match. If they do not match, the Overwrite Options are referenced to determine how to handle the new file.

Crash recovery off

If this setting is selected, Crash Recovery is disabled. The Overwrite Options are referenced to determine how to handle the new file.

Overwrite Options

Selections within this group allow you to specify how filename collisions will be handled under Zmodem if Crash Recovery isn’t used:

Overwrite if incoming newer

If this setting is selected and the incoming file is newer, the local file is overwritten. Otherwise, the incoming file is skipped. This is the default setting.

Always overwrite

If this setting is selected, the incoming file will always replace the existing file.

Skip, don’t overwrite

If this setting is selected, the incoming file is always skipped.

Rename, don’t overwrite

If this setting is selected, the incoming file is always renamed to protect the existing file.

Summary of Options Selected

This text briefly summarizes the results of the options you've selected in the other two settings groups.

To accept the settings and return to the main Zmodem settings panel, click on OK. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


Zmodem Send Options
Zmodem Sender Crash Recovery Options

To change the Crash Recovery and other settings for files you upload or send to another machine, click on the Change Settings... button in the Sender Crash Recovery Settings box.

Crash Recovery Options

Selections within this group allow you to specify how Crash Recovery will be handled when you’re uploading:

Crash recovery off

If this setting is selected, Zmodem will direct the receiver not to perform Crash Recovery. If the uploaded file already exists on the receiver’s machine, Zmodem will handle the filename collision based on the Overwrite Options setting.

Always crash recover

If this setting is selected, and the uploaded file already exists on the receiver’s machine, Crash Recovery will be used automatically. Otherwise, the new file is created. Selecting this option causes the Overwrite Options to be grayed, as they are irrelevant for Crash Recovery.

Crash recover if CRCs match...

If this setting is selected, and the file CRCs match on the sender and receiver sides, recovery is used automatically. Otherwise, the file is overwritten. Selecting this option causes the Overwrite Options to be grayed, as they are irrelevant for Crash Recovery. By default, Crash recover if CRCs match... is selected.

Overwrite Options

This field specifies how Zmodem handles a filename collision if Crash Recovery has been disabled.

Overwrite if incoming newer

If this setting is selected, Zmodem directs the receiver not to Crash Recover, and to replace the existing file with the uploaded file. If the uploaded file is not newer, the receiver is told to skip the file.

Always overwrite

If this setting is selected, no Crash Recovery is used and a preexisting file will be replaced with the uploaded file.

Skip, don’t overwrite

If this setting is selected, no Crash Recovery is used and the receiver is directed to skip the upload file. The existing file is protected.

Summary of Options

This text briefly summarizes the results of the options you’ve selected in the other two settings groups.

To accept the settings and return to the main Zmodem settings panel, click on OK. To close the dialog without saving any changes you may have made, click on Cancel.


a, e, d directory entries See also
Adding, editing, and deleting directory entries

The Data Entry Class

The Fax Entry Class

The Voice Entry Class

The Telnet Entry Class

The FTP Entry Class

The Web Entry Class

The Mail Entry Class

The News Entry Class

Adding an Entry Class

Deleting Entries